JP2026063243A - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Abstract

[Problem] To provide a gaming machine that can effectively increase the level of attention given to the game.
[Solution] The main control unit (MPU) performs a win/loss lottery based on the entry into the operating port 91A. If this lottery results in a special loss, the support mode by the electric mechanism 93A transitions to a normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A. The game board unit 80E is provided with a special performance device 500E that performs a special loss notification effect to clearly indicate to the player that a special loss result has occurred in a game round prior to the game round in question. The special performance device 500E has a light-emitting unit and a front cover that covers the light-emitting unit, and is configured so that light from the light-emitting unit is emitted forward of the game machine through the front cover. The front cover is provided with a light-diffusing section in which a plurality of linear annular protrusions are arranged so as to be aligned radially with respect to the axis extending in the direction in which the light-emitting unit and the front cover are installed side by side.
[Selection Diagram] Figure 157

Description

This invention relates to a gaming machine.

Some amusement machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching mechanism that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. The ball entry section is made variable, and by switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state depending on the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Publication No. 2002-78904

In the type of gaming machine described above, there is still room for improvement in its configuration to increase the level of attention it attracts to the game.

This invention has been made in view of the circumstances illustrated above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can effectively increase attention to the game.

The present invention
A means for acquiring special information that acquires special information based on the occurrence of a predetermined acquisition trigger,
An acquired information storage means capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means that performs a determination based on special information stored in the acquired information storage means,
A means that, based on the result of the aforementioned specific determination being the first result, allows the player to transition to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state,
A means for performing the variable display of the first symbol in each game round, wherein the variable display of the first symbol is performed in the first notification means based on the specific determination, and the variable display of the first symbol is performed in the first notification means based on the determination of the specific determination, and the variable display of the first symbol is performed in the first notification means based on the determination, and the variable display of the first symbol is performed in each game round.
In a game round, a second symbol different from the first symbol is variably displayed by a second notification means different from the first notification means, and a stop result corresponding to the result of the specific judgment is displayed.
Equipped with,
The game state is one that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state, and has a specific game state that is different from the special game state.
A means that, based on the result of the specified determination being a second result different from the first result, allows transitioning to the specified game state without going through the special game state,
A pre-identification means for identifying information corresponding to the determination result when a predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes the subject of the identification determination, before the predetermined special information becomes the subject of the identification determination,
It is characterized by having the following features.

According to the present invention, it is possible to effectively increase the level of attention given to the game.

This is a front view showing a pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. This is a front view of a pachinko machine. This is a perspective view showing the main components of a pachinko machine. This is a perspective view showing the main components of a pachinko machine. This is a front view showing the structure of the inner frame. This is a front view showing the configuration of the game board unit. This is a perspective view of the game board unit from the rear. This is a rear view showing the structure of the inner frame. This is a rear view of a pachinko machine. This is a front view showing the back pack unit. This is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the display content on the display screen of a graphic display device. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the display content on the display screen of a graphic display device. This is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of various counters used in lottery draws and other similar processes. (a) A schematic diagram showing the win/loss table for the low probability mode, and (b) A schematic diagram showing the win/loss table for the high probability mode. (a) A schematic diagram showing the distribution table for big wins, and (b) A schematic diagram showing the distribution table for special misses. (a) A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the type of jackpot, the lottery mode, and the support mode. (b) A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the type of special miss, the lottery mode, and the support mode. (a) A schematic diagram showing the support lottery table for low-frequency support mode, (b) A schematic diagram showing the support lottery table for high-frequency support mode A, and (c) A schematic diagram showing the support lottery table for high-frequency support mode B. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the overview of the support modes. This flowchart shows the timer interrupt processing performed by the MPU of the main control unit. A flowchart showing the prize-winning process for the activation port. This is a flowchart showing the information retrieval process. This flowchart shows the normal processing performed by the MPU of the main control unit. This flowchart shows the game round control process. This is a flowchart showing the data setup process. This is a flowchart showing the process for initiating the change. This is a schematic diagram showing the variable display time table for handling normal errors. This is a schematic diagram showing the time display table for variations corresponding to big wins. This is a schematic diagram showing the variable display time table for handling special out-of-bounds events. This is a flowchart showing the game state transition process. This flowchart shows the process for opening and closing the grand prize slot. This is the transition process that occurs when the open/close execution mode ends. This flowchart shows the control process for through gates. This is a flowchart showing the process for initiating changes in a through gate. This is a schematic diagram comparing the display time of images in the display unit for through gates. This is a flowchart showing the processing for power supply support. This is a flowchart showing the power switch operation process. This flowchart shows the process for final display. This flowchart shows the process for switching support modes. This is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration related to the notification/performance control device and the display control device. This flowchart shows the variable display control process executed by the MPU of the notification and performance control device. This is the first variable display control process. This is a flowchart showing the process for initiating the first variation. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the general outline of gameplay sequences. (a) A schematic diagram showing the symbol combinations corresponding to a big win, and (b) A schematic diagram showing the symbol combinations corresponding to a special loss. This timing chart shows the flow of gameplay when transitioning to the fourth normal game state following a special miss. This block diagram shows the relationships between the different game states. This is a timing chart illustrating the changes in a pitcher's repertoire. (a) A schematic diagram comparing the support modes in the second embodiment; (b) A schematic diagram showing the display content when transitioning to high-frequency support mode A1; (c) A schematic diagram showing the display content when transitioning to high-frequency support mode A2. This flowchart shows the process for switching support modes, which is executed by the MPU of the main control unit. This is a flowchart showing the process for setting the variable display time. This flowchart shows the setting process for the first and fourth normal game states. This is a schematic diagram showing the variable display time table for handling normal errors. This is a schematic diagram showing the variable display time table for handling normal errors. This is a timing chart showing the flow of gameplay. This is a front view of the game board unit in the third embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of various counters used in lottery draws and other similar processes. This is a schematic diagram showing the success/failure table for the first operating port. This is a schematic diagram showing the success/failure table for the second operating port. This block diagram shows the relationships between the different game states. This is a schematic diagram showing the variable display time table for the second operation port. This is a timing chart showing the flow of gameplay. This is a schematic diagram showing the distribution table for the operating port in the fourth embodiment. This flowchart shows the first variation initiation process executed by the MPU of the notification and performance control device. (a) A schematic diagram showing the flow of the first special effect, and (b) A schematic diagram showing the flow of the second special effect. This is a timing chart showing the flow of gameplay. This is a front view of the game board unit in the fifth embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing the internal structure of the variable prize-winning device. This is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of various counters used in lottery draws and other similar processes. (a) A schematic diagram showing the validity table for the first operating port, and (b) A schematic diagram showing the validity table for the second operating port. (a) A schematic diagram showing the distribution table for the first operating port, and (b) A schematic diagram showing the distribution table for the second operating port. (a) A schematic diagram showing the behavior when a special win occurs, and (b) A schematic diagram showing the transition patterns of the game state. This flowchart shows the timer interrupt processing performed by the MPU of the main control unit. This flowchart shows the normal processing performed by the MPU of the main control unit. This flowchart shows the process for switching support modes. This flowchart shows the process for transitioning to a special winning game state. This is a flowchart showing the start process for special wins. This flowchart shows the process for ending a special winning game. This is a flowchart showing the V distribution setting process. A flowchart showing the process for winning the V prize. This flowchart shows the process for transitioning to the jackpot state. There are many transition processes at the end of a big win. This block diagram shows the relationships between the different game states. This flowchart shows the pre-verification process performed by the MPU of the main control unit. This is a flowchart showing the special variable display time table for the second operation port. This is a timing chart showing the flow of gameplay. This is a schematic diagram showing the contact/failure table for the operating port in the sixth embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing the transition patterns between game states. This block diagram shows the relationships between the different game states. This is a front view of the game board unit in the seventh embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of various counters used in lottery draws and other similar processes. This is a schematic diagram showing the success/failure table for the first operating port. This is a schematic diagram showing the success/failure table for the second operating port. (a) A schematic diagram showing the distribution table for the first operating port, and (b) A schematic diagram showing the distribution table for the second operating port. This is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the type of winning combination, the lottery mode, and the support mode. This flowchart shows the process for switching support modes. This block diagram shows the relationships between the different game states. This is a front view of the game board unit in the eighth embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of various counters used in lottery draws and other similar processes. (a) A schematic diagram showing the win/loss table for the low probability mode, and (b) A schematic diagram showing the win/loss table for the high probability mode. (a) A schematic diagram showing the distribution table for the first operating port, and (b) A schematic diagram showing the validity table for the second operating port. This is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the type of winning combination, the lottery mode, and the support mode. This flowchart shows the transition process performed by the main control unit's MPU when the opening/closing execution mode ends. This flowchart shows the process for switching support modes, which is executed by the MPU of the main control unit. This is a schematic diagram showing the compatibility table in the ninth embodiment. (a) A schematic diagram showing the distribution table for big wins, and (b) A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the type of win, the lottery mode, and the support mode. (a) A schematic diagram comparing the support modes, and (b) A schematic diagram comparing the display time of the images in the display unit for the through gate. This flowchart shows the transition process performed by the main control unit's MPU when the opening/closing execution mode ends. This flowchart shows the game round termination process executed by the MPU of the main control unit. This is a timing chart illustrating the changes in a pitcher's repertoire. (a) A schematic diagram comparing the support modes in the tenth embodiment; (b) A schematic diagram showing the display content when transitioning to high-frequency support mode A1; (c) A schematic diagram showing the display content when transitioning to high-frequency support mode A2. This is a timing chart showing the flow of gameplay. This is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the lottery result and the pattern displayed on the operation port display unit in the eleventh embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing the variable display time table for handling normal errors. This is a schematic diagram showing the variable display time table for handling special out-of-bounds events. This is a schematic diagram showing the variation in the display of symbols on the display screen. This is a flowchart illustrating the process for switching the support mode in the twelfth embodiment. This flowchart shows the main processing performed by the MPU of the main control unit. (a) A flowchart showing special notification processing executed by the MPU of the notification and performance control device, and (b) and (c) schematic diagrams showing special notifications. This flowchart shows the special notification control process executed by the MPU of the main control unit. This is a front view of the game board unit in the thirteenth embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of various counters used in lottery draws and other similar processes. (a) A schematic diagram showing the win/loss table for the low probability mode, and (b) A schematic diagram showing the win/loss table for the high probability mode. (a) A schematic diagram showing the distribution table for the first operating port, and (b) A schematic diagram showing the validity table for the second operating port. This is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the type of winning combination, the lottery mode, and the support mode. This is a schematic diagram showing the changes in the game state. This flowchart shows the first variation initiation process executed by the MPU of the notification and performance control device. This is a timing chart showing the flow of gameplay. This is a schematic diagram showing a distribution table for outlier results in the 14th embodiment. This is a front view of the game board unit. This is a schematic diagram showing the configuration related to the display of the design. This is a schematic diagram showing the patterns displayed on the display screen of a pattern display device. This is a schematic diagram showing the arrangement of patterns displayed on the display screen of a pattern display device. (a) A schematic diagram showing the symbol combinations corresponding to the jackpot result, and (b) A schematic diagram showing the symbol combinations corresponding to the special losing result. (a) A flowchart showing the special failure setting process executed by the MPU of the notification and performance control device, and (b) a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the type of special failure result and the number of rotations. This flowchart shows the special processing for the latter half of the game, which is executed by the MPU of the notification and performance control system. This flowchart shows the special variation termination process for when a change occurs, which is executed by the MPU of the notification and performance control device. This is a timing chart showing the notification process for the termination criteria count. This is a front view of the game board unit in the 15th embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of various counters used in lottery draws and other similar processes. This is a schematic diagram showing the success/failure table for the first operating port. This is a schematic diagram showing the success/failure table for the second operating port. This flowchart shows the pre-verification process performed by the MPU of the main control unit. This flowchart shows the process for setting pending commands, which is executed by the MPU of the main control unit. This flowchart shows the process for setting the jackpot announcement effect, which is executed by the MPU (Master Program Unit) of the notification and effect control system. This flowchart shows the process for determining the details of the jackpot announcement animation. This is a schematic diagram showing the pending notification effect. This flowchart shows the command handling process for hold display control executed by the MPU of the display control device. This flowchart shows the pending display process executed by the MPU of the display control unit. (a) A schematic diagram illustrating the flow of a Type 1予告演出 (preview sequence), and (b) A schematic diagram illustrating the flow of a Type 2予告演出 (preview sequence). This is a front view of the special effects device. This is a schematic diagram showing various display modes for special effects devices. This flowchart shows the special miss notification effect setting process executed by the MPU (Master Program Unit) of the notification and effect control system. This is a flowchart showing the process for determining the details of the special miss notification effect. This flowchart shows the special miss notification effect execution process performed by the MPU (Master Program Unit) of the notification and effect control system. This is a timing chart showing the sequence of special miss notification effects. This is a front view of the game board unit in the 16th embodiment. This is a vertical cross-section of a special effects device. (a) Front view of the special effects device, (b) schematic diagram showing the positional relationship between the path of the light-emitting element and the light-diffusing and non-light-diffusing sections. This is a schematic diagram comparing different light emission patterns. This is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the position of the light-emitting element and the manner in which it emits light. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the changes in the light emission pattern. This is a cross-sectional view of the special effects device in the 17th embodiment. This is a front view of the special effects device. This is a schematic diagram showing various display modes for special effects devices. This is a front view of the game board unit in the 18th embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing the internal structure of the prize-winning device. This is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of various counters used in lottery draws and other similar processes. This is a schematic diagram showing the correct/incorrect table for the operating port. This is a schematic diagram showing the distribution table for the operating ports. This is a schematic diagram comparing the results of various jackpots. This is a flowchart showing the V distribution setting process. A flowchart showing the process for winning the V prize. There are many transition processes at the end of a big win. This flowchart shows the pre-verification process performed by the MPU of the main control unit. This flowchart shows the process for setting pending commands, which is executed by the MPU of the main control unit. This is a schematic diagram showing the pending notification effect. This flowchart shows the process for confirming the arrival of the ceiling, which is executed by the MPU of the notification and performance control system. This timing chart illustrates the flow of gameplay when the "ceiling reached" confirmation animation is executed.

<First Embodiment>
The following describes in detail a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as "pachinko machine"), a type of gaming machine, based on the drawings. Figure 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, Figure 2 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 seen from the front, and Figures 3 and 4 are perspective views showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10 in an unfolded state. Note that, for convenience, the components within the game area of the pachinko machine 10 are omitted in Figure 3.

As shown in Figure 1, the pachinko machine 10 is composed of an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a game machine main unit 12 attached to this outer frame 11.

As shown in Figure 2, the outer frame 11 is constructed by connecting elongated frame materials on all four sides, forming an overall rectangular frame shape. By attaching and fixing this outer frame 11 to the island equipment, the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the gaming hall. Note that the outer frame 11 is not an essential component of the pachinko machine 10; it may also be installed as part of the island equipment in the gaming hall.

The main body of the gaming machine 12 is supported by the outer frame 11 in a manner that allows it to be opened and closed. Specifically, an upper support fitting 17 is fixed to the connection portion between the upper frame portion and the left frame portion of the outer frame 11, and a lower support fitting 18 is provided at the connection portion between the lower frame portion and the left frame portion of the outer frame 11. These upper and lower support fittings 17 and 18 constitute a support mechanism, which allows the main body of the gaming machine 12 to rotate forward of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the outer frame 11, with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 (see Figures 3 and 4).

As shown in Figures 3 and 4, the main body of the gaming machine 12 comprises an inner frame 13 as a base body, a front door frame 14 positioned in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 positioned behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported relative to the outer frame 11. Specifically, in a front view of the gaming machine, the inner frame 13 is rotatable forward with the left side being the base end and the right side being the tip end.

The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and the front door frame 14 can rotate forward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. Furthermore, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and the back pack unit 15 can rotate backward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

(Front door frame 14)
Next, the front door frame 14 will be described. As shown in Figure 1, the front door frame 14 is mainly composed of a synthetic resin frame body 20 whose outer shape is almost identical to that of the outer frame 11, and covers almost the entire front surface of the inner frame 13. A roughly elliptical window portion 21 is formed in the central part of the frame body 20 so that almost the entire area of the game area PE, which will be described later, can be seen from the front, and this window portion 21 is covered from the rear side of the front door frame 14 by a glass unit 22.

The glass unit 22 comprises a plurality of transparent glass panels 23 and a glass holder that holds these glass panels 23. The glass holder has a partition that divides the holding area of the glass panels 23 into front and rear sections, with the two glass panels 23 facing each other across the partition. In other words, by ensuring a predetermined gap between the two glass panels 23, interference between the glass panels 23 is avoided, while the game area PE is double-covered from the front of the pachinko machine 10 by the glass panels 23.

Furthermore, it is not necessarily required to unitize both glass panels 23 using a glass holder; each glass panel 23 may be individually attached to the frame 20. Moreover, the number of glass panels is arbitrary; it may be one or three or more. However, in light of improving safety and security, it is preferable to use multiple glass panels and arrange them facing each other front and back with a predetermined gap in between. Incidentally, it is also possible to use transparent synthetic resin panel members instead of glass panels.

Various light-emitting means, such as lamps, are provided around the glass unit 22 (specifically, the window section 21). For example, a ring-shaped illuminated section 26 containing LEDs or other light-emitting means is provided along the periphery of the window section 21. The ring-shaped illuminated section 26 lights up or flashes in response to changes in the game state, such as during a jackpot or a predetermined reach. Furthermore, an error indicator lamp section 27, which lights up in the event of an error or malfunction, is provided at the center of the ring-shaped illuminated section 26 and at the very top of the pachinko machine 10. Prize ball lamp sections 28, which light up during prize ball payout, are provided to the left and right of the error indicator lamp section 27. Additionally, speaker sections 29, which output sound effects, background music, etc., according to the game state, are provided in positions close to the left and right prize ball lamp sections 28 (see Figure 3).

Below the window portion 21 of the front door frame 14 (frame body 20), an upper bulge 31 and a lower bulge 32 are arranged vertically, bulging toward the front. An upper tray 33, opening upwards, is provided inside the upper bulge 31, and a lower tray 34, also opening upwards, is provided inside the lower bulge 32 (see Figure 2). The upper tray 33 has the function of temporarily storing game balls dispensed from the dispensing device (described later), arranging them in a line, and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism (described later). The lower tray 34 has the function of storing excess game balls in the upper tray 33 and also functions as a receptacle for game balls that were launched by the game ball launching mechanism but did not reach the game area PE (see Figure 3) and are returned to the player.

In the upper bulge 31, a special effect button 35, operated by the player, is located in front of the upper tray 33. This special effect button 35 is connected to a notification and effect control device 140, which executes corresponding effects based on the operation of the special effect button 35.

To the right of the lower bulge 32, a game ball launching handle 41 is provided, protruding toward the player. When the game ball launching handle 41 is operated, a game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism described later. The launch speed of the game ball increases as the amount of operation (rotation) of the game ball launching handle 41 increases. When this amount of operation is adjusted by the player to a predetermined amount, the game ball reaches the game area PE. Furthermore, by adjusting this amount of operation, the player can choose to launch the game balls to either the right or left route, as described later.

As shown in Figure 3, a passage forming unit 45 is attached to the back of the front door frame 14. The passage forming unit 45 is molded from synthetic resin and has a front door-side upper tray passage leading to the upper tray 33 and a front door-side lower tray passage leading to the lower tray 34. In the passage forming unit 45, a receiving portion is formed at its upper corner, projecting rearward and opening upward. This receiving portion is partitioned left and right by a partition wall, thereby separating the entrance portion of the front door-side upper tray passage from the entrance portion of the front door-side lower tray passage. The upstream side of both the front door-side upper tray passage and the front door-side lower tray passage leads to a game ball distribution section, which will be described later. Game balls entering the front door-side upper tray passage are guided to the upper tray 33, and game balls entering the front door-side lower tray passage are guided to the lower tray 34.

On the rear side of the front door frame 14, at the pivot end, protruding shafts are provided at its upper and lower ends. These protruding shafts constitute the assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13.

Next, the inner frame 13 will be explained in detail with reference to Figure 5. Figure 5 is a front view of the inner frame 13. Note that, as with Figure 3, the configuration within the game area PE of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted in Figure 5 for convenience.

(Inner frame 13)
The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of an inner frame base body 50, which has an outer shape similar to that of the outer frame 11, being roughly rectangular. The height dimension of the inner frame base body 50 is set to be slightly smaller than the height dimension of the outer frame 11. The inner frame base body 50 is positioned close to the upper frame portion of the outer frame 11, and a small gap is formed between the lower frame portion of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame base body 50. A fascia board is attached to the outer frame 11 to close this gap. The fascia board is positioned below the inner frame base body 50 (specifically its lower end), and when the inner frame 13 is closed to the outer frame 11, the inner frame base body 50 rests on the fascia board. A small clearance may be provided between the fascia board and the inner frame base body 50 to prevent mutual interference, etc.

Support brackets 71 and 72 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the pivot base end (left side in Figure 5) on the front surface of the inner frame base body 50. Although not shown in the illustration, the support brackets 71 and 72 have shafts, and bearing portions provided on the front door frame 14 are inserted into these shafts, thereby supporting the front door frame 14 so that it can rotate relative to the inner frame 13.

A locking device 75 for locking the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is provided on the rotating end side (right side in Figure 5) of the inner frame base body 50. The locking device 75 extends vertically along the right end of the inner frame base body 50 (the vertical frame member described later) and has front door hook members 76 scattered along its longitudinal direction (vertical direction). The inner frame base body 50 has a hook receiving member 49 (see Figure 3) provided on the back of the front door frame 14 and slits formed to protrude towards the front side of the inner frame 13, corresponding to each front door hook member 76. The front door hook members 76 protruding through these slits engage with the front door hook members 76 provided on the front door frame 14 in a one-to-one correspondence with each front door hook member 76, thereby locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 in an unopenable state. Furthermore, the locking device 75 has an inner frame hook member 77 that extends to the rear side of the inner frame 13. These inner frame hook members 77 engage with a hook receiving member 19 fixed to the outer frame 11, thereby locking the main body of the gaming machine 12 in a closed position relative to the outer frame 11.

The inner frame base 50 (locking device 75) is equipped with a cylinder lock 78 for unlocking the locking device 75. The cylinder lock 78 is separate from the locking unit (each hook member 76, 77 and the interlocking rod, etc.) that constitutes the main part of the locking device 75, and is positioned adjacent to the locking unit. Turning the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 78 to the right (clockwise) unlocks the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13, and turning the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 78 to the left (counterclockwise) unlocks the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11.

A recessed area 51 for housing the game board unit 80 is formed in the central part of the inner frame base body 50. The recessed area 51 is recessed towards the rear of the game machine to match the outer shape of the game board unit 80, and the game board unit 80 is secured by a manual locking mechanism while fitted into this recessed area 51 from the front of the game machine. A roughly rectangular window opening 52 is formed at the bottom of the recessed area 51, through which the rear configuration of the game board unit 80 (rear block 80b, described later) protrudes to the rear of the inner frame 13. Almost the entire area of this window opening 52 is covered from the front of the game machine by the game board unit 80 mounted on the inner frame base body 50.

(Game board unit 80)
The game board unit 80 is formed by integrating a game board 80a, which is mainly made of wooden board material, and a rear block 80b, which is provided on the rear side of the game board 80a and has various game components (variable display device, control device, movable performance mechanism, etc.) mounted on the base body 251.

The game area PE, through which the game balls flow, is formed on the front of the game board 80a. As already explained, the game area PE is covered by a glass unit 22 (specifically, the rear glass panel 23). The glass unit 22 is positioned such that the gap between the rear glass panel 23 and the front of the game board 80a is slightly larger than the diameter of the game balls; that is, the game balls flowing down the game area PE do not line up front to back at the same point in the game area PE. This suppresses ball jamming in the game area PE. Note that the game board 80a is not limited to wood; it can also be made of synthetic resin.

The following description will explain the game board unit 80 (particularly the various components arranged in the game area PE of the game board 80a) based on Figures 6 and 7. Figure 6 is a front view of the game board unit 80, and Figure 7 is a rear perspective view of the game board unit 80.

The game board 80a has multiple openings of varying sizes that penetrate in its own thickness direction (front-to-back direction). As shown in Figure 6, each opening is equipped with a general prize entry opening 81, an operating opening unit 82, a variable prize entry device 83, a through gate 84, etc. When a game ball enters the general prize entry opening 81, the operating opening unit 82, or the variable prize entry device 83, these game balls are detected by detection sensors provided corresponding to each entry point, and based on the detection result, the player is granted a predetermined number of prize balls (dispensing of game balls) or other benefits. In addition, an out opening 86 is provided at the bottom of the game board 80a (game area PE), and game balls that do not enter the various entry points are discharged from the game area PE through the out opening 86. In the following explanation, in order to clearly distinguish it from the entry of game balls into the out opening 86, the entry of game balls into the general prize entry opening 81, the operating opening unit 82, or the variable prize entry device 83 will also be referred to as "winning."

Furthermore, the game board 80a is equipped with numerous game pins 87, windmills 94, and other game components to appropriately distribute the flow paths of the game balls. These various configurations of game pins 87, windmills, etc., differentiate the flow paths of the game balls, resulting in a reasonable probability of winning prizes in the general prize winning slots 81, etc.

A central opening is formed in the middle of the game board 80a, and a transparent opening cover is attached to cover this central opening from the rear side of the game board unit 80. Behind this central opening, the variable display unit 85 and other components belonging to the rear block 80b are located, and these components can be viewed from the front of the game machine through the central opening (opening cover).

An operating port unit 82 and a through gate 84 are arranged around the central opening. The operating port unit 82 includes a first operating port 91 located below the variable display unit 85, and a second operating port 92 located below the first operating port 91. Of these two operating ports 91 and 92, the second operating port 92 is equipped with an electric mechanism 93, which functions as an open/close ball entry assist device (ball entry assist means) or an open/close member (open/close means). The electric mechanism 93 comprises a movable piece and a solenoid-type drive unit that drives the movable piece, and is switchable between an open state (assist state) that allows ball entry into the second operating port 92 and a closed state (non-assist state) that prevents ball entry.

Furthermore, the electric mechanism 93 may be configured such that, when in the closed state, it becomes difficult for balls to enter the second operating opening 92, and when switched to the open state, it becomes easier for balls to enter the second operating opening 92 than when it is closed.

Upstream from the second operating port 92, specifically to the side of the variable display unit 85, is the through gate 84. When a support lottery is triggered by the passage of a game ball through the through gate 84, the electric mechanism 93 is switched from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined period of time.

Furthermore, if a ball enters the first operating port 91, three game balls will be dispensed, and if a ball enters the second operating port 92, four game balls will be dispensed. However, the number of game balls dispensed is not limited to the above.

The variable prize-winning device (special ball-entry device or special ball-entry means) 83 is equipped with a large prize-winning opening and a shutter that can be switched between an "allowing" state, which permits ball entry into the large prize-winning opening, and a "blocking" state, which prevents ball entry. In the following description, the state of the variable prize-winning device 83 when the shutter is in the "allowing" state will be referred to as the "open state," and the state of the variable prize-winning device 83 when the shutter is in the "blocking" state will be referred to as the "closed state."

Furthermore, the variable prize-winning device 83 may be configured such that, when it is in the closed state, it becomes difficult for balls to enter the variable prize-winning device 83, and when it switches to the open state, it becomes easier for balls to enter the variable prize-winning device 83 than when it is closed.

In the normal game state described later, an internal lottery is performed based on the entry of balls into the operating ports 91 and 92. If the internal lottery is won (for example, a jackpot is achieved), the game transitions to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. The variable prize entry device 83 is maintained in the closed state and is configured to be switched to the open state when the game transitions to the special game state. In the special game state, for example, after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or after a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) have been entered, one round is defined as the switching to the open state being repeated for multiple rounds (for example, 6 rounds) with a maximum limit.

Next, a supplementary explanation of the variable display unit 85 will be provided. The variable display unit 85 has a symbol display device 95 that displays symbols variably (variable display) when a prize is awarded in the operating ports 91 and 92. The symbol display device 95 is configured as a liquid crystal display device, and its display content is controlled by a display control device, which will be described later. On the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95, symbols are displayed, for example, in a row at the top, middle, and bottom, and these symbols are displayed variably by scrolling horizontally. When a jackpot is won, a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed on a pre-set active line, and the game transitions to the opening/closing execution mode (special game state or jackpot). Note that the symbol display device 95 does not necessarily have to be a liquid crystal display device; it may also be a dot matrix or 7-segment type display device.

A center frame 96 is provided on the game board 80a so as to surround the central opening. The center frame 96 is fixed to the game board 80a from its front side, and in this fixed state, it stands upright from the front of the game board 80a, so that the gap between the center frame 96 and the glass unit 22 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, collisions between the game ball flowing down the game area PE and the symbol display device 95 are avoided, and the flow path of the game ball flowing down the game area PE is broadly divided into the right route, which bypasses the variable display unit 85 (specifically the center frame 96) from the right side, and the left route, which bypasses it from the left side. In this embodiment, the various game components provided in the game area PE are arranged symmetrically (a so-called symmetrical gauge), and there is no difference in advantage or disadvantage between the right and left routes. The configuration allows game balls launched from either the right or left route to enter the operating ports 91, 92, the through gate 84, and the variable prize winning device 83.

A stage is formed on the upper surface of the frame portion that constitutes the lower part of the center frame 96, allowing game balls to roll left and right. Game balls flowing in through an inlet formed in the left frame portion of the center frame 96 are discharged onto the stage through a warp passage also formed in the center frame 96. The stage is configured to make it relatively easier for game balls that reach the stage to flow into the first operation port 91, specifically, to flow into the first operation port 91 more easily than game balls that do not pass through the stage, thus contributing to increased player attention to the movement of game balls on this stage. In this embodiment, as described above, the central opening is covered with a transparent opening cover, restricting game balls that reach the stage from moving toward the rear block 80b (variable display unit 85).

The activation ports 91 and 92 are positioned closer to the variable display unit 85. Since a win in the activation ports 91 and 92 can trigger a transition to a special game state, players are expected to pay attention to whether or not a win occurs in the activation ports 91 and 92, and also to the symbol display device 95 to determine whether or not a transition to the special game state occurs. The placement of the activation ports 91 and 92 closer to the variable display unit 85 is a design choice to concentrate the player's attention on the area around the variable display unit 85.

At the right end of the game board 80a, a game area partitioning member 98 is provided, which, together with the guide rail 100 (described later), demarcates the game area PE. The game area partitioning member 98 is equipped with a stopper member and a main display unit 99, which the game balls flying along the guide rail 100 will collide with. The stopper member is a buffer member positioned near the tip of the guide rail 100. Upon impact with this stopper member, the game ball's momentum is reduced before it flows down the game area PE. In other words, the stopper member is provided with a force-reducing function that weakens the momentum of the colliding game ball.

Here, we will provide a supplementary explanation regarding the main display unit 99. The main display unit 99 is embedded in the game area partition member 98, with a portion of it positioned to face the glass unit 22. This facing portion is provided with a main display section D, which displays predetermined patterns and other information. The main display unit 99 is electrically connected to a main control device, which will be described later, and the display content of the main display section D is controlled by the main control device.

As shown in Figure 6(b), the main display unit D comprises a first operation port display unit D1 that displays the lottery result based on a win in the first operation port 91, and a second operation port display unit D2 that displays the lottery result based on a win in the second operation port 92. In the first operation port display unit D1, a change in the pattern is triggered by a win in the first operation port 91, and as a result of stopping this change in the pattern display, the result of the internal lottery based on the win in the first operation port 91 is clearly displayed. If the result of the internal lottery based on the win in the first operation port 91 is a winning result corresponding to a transition to a special game state, the change in the first operation port display unit D1 is stopped, and after a predetermined pattern is displayed as a result of the stop, the game transitions to the special game state.

The display unit D2 for the second operation slot triggers a change in the symbol display upon entry into the second operation slot 92. The result of the internal lottery conducted based on the entry into the second operation slot 92 is clearly displayed as the change in the display stops. If the result of the internal lottery based on the entry into the second operation slot 92 is a winning result corresponding to a transition to a special game state, the display unit D2 for the second operation slot stops the change in the display. After a predetermined symbol is displayed as a result of the stop, the game transitions to the special game state according to the result.

Here, based on a winning entry into either of the operating ports 91 or 92, a variation display is initiated on the corresponding operating port display units D1 and D2, a predetermined stop result is displayed, and the variation display stops (confirms). This state is maintained until the confirmed display time elapses, which constitutes one game round. However, one game round is not limited to the above. For example, in a configuration where a single display area is provided and a variation display is performed in that single display area regardless of which operating port 91 or 92 wins, one game round can be defined as the variation display starting in that single display area, displaying a predetermined stop result, stopping (confirms), and maintaining that state until the confirmed display time elapses.

In this embodiment, the number of times a game ball passes through the first operation port 91 and the second operation port 92 is limited to four times each (a total of eight balls). The main display unit 99's main display section D is provided with a first operation port retention count display section S1 and a second operation port retention count display section S2, respectively, which display the number of balls held in the first and second operation ports 91 and 92.

Furthermore, in addition to the operation port display units D1 and D2, the main display unit 99's main display section D is also equipped with a through-gate display unit DS that displays the lottery results based on winning a prize in the through-gate 84. The through-gate display unit DS triggers a change in the pattern display upon winning a prize in the through-gate 84, and as a result of the stopping of this change display, the result of the internal lottery conducted based on winning a prize in the through-gate 84 is clearly displayed (a confirmation display is executed). If the result of the support lottery based on winning a prize in the through-gate 84 is a support win, a predetermined stopping result is displayed on the through-gate display unit DS, the change display stops, and after the confirmation display is completed, the system transitions to the electric mechanism open state. In the electric mechanism open state, the electric mechanism 93, which is attached to the second operation port 92, is opened in a predetermined manner.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the number of times a game ball passes through the through gate 84 is retained up to a maximum of four times. The main display unit 99's main display section D is provided with a retained ball display section SS that shows the number of retained balls.

The main display unit D, as detailed above, is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 22 of the front door frame 14, and its visibility is ensured because the game balls do not move in front of these various display units.

To explain the configuration of the inner frame 13 again using Figure 5, below the game board unit 80 in the inner frame base body 50, there is a game ball launching mechanism 110 that launches game balls into the game area PE based on the operation of the game ball launching handle 41.

(Game ball launching mechanism 110)
The game ball launching mechanism 110 mainly comprises a solenoid 111 that launches game balls positioned at a predetermined launch standby position, a launch rail 112 that defines the launch direction of the game balls launched by the solenoid 111, a ball feeding device 113 that supplies game balls to the launch standby position, and a base plate 114 on which these various components 111 to 113 are mounted. The base plate 114 is fixed to the inner frame base body 50, thereby integrating it with the inner frame base body 50.

The launch rail 112 is fixed to the base plate 114 at an angle, tilted upwards toward the game board unit 80. The launch rail 112 has a groove with a roughly V-shaped cross-section, and the game ball fits into this groove, thereby defining its front-to-back position.

A ball stopper is positioned near the downstream end (i.e., the lower end) of the launch rail 112 to hold the game balls supplied from the ball feeding device 113 in the aforementioned launch standby position. The solenoid 111 is positioned further downstream from the ball stopper.

The solenoid 111 is electrically connected to the power supply and launch control device, which will be described later. Based on the electrical signal output from the power supply and launch control device, the output shaft of the solenoid 111 reciprocates in the extension and retraction direction, causing the game ball, positioned in the launch standby position, to be launched towards the game board unit 80, specifically towards the guide rail 100 attached to the game board unit 80.

The guide rail 100, together with the game area partitioning member 98 fixed to the game board unit 80 (specifically the front surface of the plate), partitions the game area PE so that the outer shape of the game area PE is approximately circular. The guide rail 100 consists of an inner rail 101 and an outer rail 102, which are positioned opposite each other with a gap larger than the diameter of the game ball, and these two rails 101 and 102 partition a single guide passage 103. The guide passage 103 has an entrance portion 104 that opens to the tip side (diagonally downward) of the launch rail 112 and an exit portion 105 located at the top of the game area PE. The game ball, launched based on the operation of the solenoid 111, is guided to the game area PE by moving in the order of launch rail 112 → guide rail 100 (entrance portion 104 → exit portion 105). Furthermore, in the game board unit 80, a reverse return prevention member 106 is attached to the front of the exit portion 105, specifically near the tip of the inner rail 101, to prevent game balls that have reached the game area PE from returning back into the guide passage 103. This prevents subsequent game balls from being obstructed by game balls that have already reached the game area PE.

The rails 101 and 102 constituting the guide rail 100 are arc-shaped, centered approximately in the middle of the game area PE. Therefore, game balls passing through the guide passage 103 are easily moved (sliding or rolling) along the outer rail 102, that is, while in contact with the outer rail 102, due to the centrifugal force generated within them. In other words, when a game ball is launched to reach the game area PE, the area along the outer rail 102 in the guide passage 103 effectively constitutes the passage area (path) through which the game ball passes, while the area along the inner rail 101 effectively becomes an area through which the game ball does not pass.

As shown in Figure 5, the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112 are positioned so that the entrance portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 face each other diagonally across the lower edge of the game board unit 80. In other words, the two rails 100 and 112 are positioned so that the entrance portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 are offset to the left and right near the lower edge of the game board unit 80. This brings both rails 100 and 112 closer to the lower edge of the game board unit 80 while creating a predetermined gap between the entrance portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112.

A foul ball passage is located below the gap formed in this manner. The foul ball passage is integrally molded with the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. If a game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 110 fails to reach the game area PE and returns to the guide passage 103 as a foul ball, these foul balls will enter the foul ball passage through the gap. The foul ball passage leads to the lower tray passage on the front door side, and game balls that enter the foul ball passage are discharged into the lower tray 34 shown in Figure 1. This suppresses interference between foul balls and the next game ball to be launched.

In the inner frame base 50, a through hole is formed to the left of the launch rail 112 (specifically, the side supporting the front door frame 14), extending through the inner frame base 50 in the front-to-back direction. A passage forming member 121 is installed in this through hole. The passage forming member 121 is screwed to the inner frame base 50 and has a main body-side upper tray passage 122 and a main body-side lower tray passage 123. The upstream sides of these main body-side upper tray passages 122 and 123 lead to the game ball distribution section, which will be described later. Furthermore, a receiving portion of the passage forming unit 45, attached to the front door frame 14, fits into the lower part of the passage forming member 121. Below the main body-side upper tray passage 122 is the front door-side upper tray passage, and below the main body-side lower tray passage 123 is the front door-side upper tray passage.

In the inner frame base 50, below the passage forming member 121, an opening/closing member 124 is attached to open and close the main body-side upper tray passage 122 and the main body-side lower tray passage 123. The opening/closing member 124 is biased to a forward position that closes the main body-side upper tray passage 122 and the main body-side lower tray passage 123. When the front door frame 14 is opened, this biasing force closes each opening/closing member 124, preventing game balls from falling out of the passages 122 and 123. Conversely, when the front door frame 14 is closed, the opening/closing member 124 is pushed open against the biasing force by a receiving portion provided in the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. In this state, the main body-side upper tray passage 122 and the front door-side upper tray passage are connected, and the main body-side lower tray passage 123 and the front door-side lower tray passage are also connected.

Next, the rear configuration of the inner frame 13 (inner frame base 50 and game board unit 80) will be described based on Figures 7 and 8. Figure 8 is a rear view of the inner frame 13.

As shown in Figure 8, a bearing bracket 132 is attached to the pivot base end (right side in Figure 8) on the back of the inner frame base body 50. The bearing bracket 132 has bearing portions 133 formed at vertically spaced intervals, and these bearing portions 133 allow the back pack unit 15 to rotatably attach to the inner frame 13. Furthermore, multiple fixing levers 134 are provided on the back of the inner frame base body 50 for fixing the back pack unit 15 to the inner frame base body 50 in the closed position.

As already explained, a window opening 52 is formed at the bottom of the housing recess (game board housing section) 51 in the inner frame base 50, penetrating in the thickness direction of the inner frame base 50 and opening to the rear side of the inner frame base 50. This window opening 52 is covered from the front side of the inner frame 13 by the game board unit 80 housed in the housing recess 51. Various components such as control devices are mounted on the rear side of the game board unit 80 (rear block 80b), and these components are exposed to the rear side of the inner frame 13 through the window opening 52. Now, with reference to Figure 7, the configuration of the rear side of the game board unit 80 will be described.

As already explained, a rear block 80b is attached to the back of the game board 80a. The rear block 80b has a roughly box-shaped base 251 that opens towards the game board 80a. This base 251 is fixed to the back of the game board unit 80, thereby integrating the game board 80a and the rear block 80b.

The front side of the base body 251 is the area for arranging movable performance mechanisms, etc., while the rear side is the area for arranging control devices that control these various components and the variable display unit 85 (pattern display device 95).

More specifically, a portion of the base body 251 protrudes from the rear side of the inner frame base body 50, and the aforementioned pattern display device 95 (see Figure 6) and a display control device for driving the pattern display device 95 are mounted on this protruding portion. These pattern display device 95 and display control device are arranged in a stacked configuration in the front-to-back direction (the thickness direction of the inner frame base body 50), with the pattern display device 95 at the front and the display control device at the rear. Furthermore, a notification/effect control device 140 is mounted on the rear of the base body 251, positioned behind the display control device.

The notification and performance control device 140 includes a notification and performance control board that controls audio output, lamp display, and the display control device according to instructions from the main control device (described later). The notification and performance control board is housed in a board box 141 made of a transparent resin material or the like.

Below the notification and performance control device 140, a main control unit 160 is provided, covering the base body 251 from the rear. The main control unit 160 comprises a synthetic resin mounting base 161 fixed to the rear of the game board unit 80 (specifically, the rear block 80b), and a main control device 162 mounted on the mounting base 161. The main control device 162 includes a main control board having a function for controlling the main game (main control circuit) and a function for monitoring the power supply (power outage monitoring circuit). This main control board is housed in a board box 163 made of a transparent resin material or the like.

The circuit board box 163 comprises a box base (front case) with a roughly rectangular shape and a box cover (back case) that covers the opening of the box base. These box base and box cover are connected in an unopenable manner by a box sealing section 164, thereby sealing the circuit board box 163. Multiple box sealing sections 164 are provided on the short side of the circuit board box 163, and at least one of them is used to perform the sealing process.

The box sealing section 164 can be configured in any way that makes it impossible to open the box base and the box cover, but the box base and the box cover are made impossible to open by inserting a locking pin into the locking hole that constitutes the box sealing section 164. The sealing process by the box sealing section 164 prevents unauthorized opening after sealing, and even if unauthorized opening occurs, it is possible to detect such a situation early and easily, and it is possible to reseal the box even after it has been opened. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting a locking pin into at least one locking hole of the multiple box sealing sections 164. When the main control board inside malfunctions or when the main control board needs to be inspected, the connection between the box sealing section with the locking pin inserted and the main body of the board box 163 is cut. This separates the box base and the box cover of the board box 163, and the main control board inside can be removed. After that, if the sealing process is to be repeated, a locking pin is inserted into another locking hole. If a record of the opening of the circuit board box 163 is kept in the circuit board box 163, it will be easy to detect unauthorized opening by examining the circuit board box 163.

The circuit board box 163 and the mounting base 161 are indestructibly connected by a base seal 165. Specifically, the base seal 165, like the box seal 164, has a locking hole and a locking pin. The insertion of the locking pin into the locking hole ensures that the circuit board box 163 and the mounting base 161 are irremovably connected. This makes it easier to detect if the circuit board box 163 has been illegally removed.

On the front of the base body 251, in the portion facing the lower rear of the game board unit 80, a collection passage (not shown) is formed that corresponds to the game board openings of the general prize entry point 81, the operating point unit 82, and the variable prize entry device 83, and converges at a single point downstream. As a result, game balls that enter the general prize entry point 81, etc., are all collected below the game board unit 80 via the collection passage. In other words, the base body 251 is equipped with the function of collecting game balls that enter the various prize entry points.

Below the game board unit 80 is a discharge passage, which will be described later. Game balls collected below the game board unit 80 via the collection passage are guided into the discharge passage. Similarly, the out-out opening 86 also leads to the discharge passage, and game balls that do not enter any of the winning slots are guided into the discharge passage via the out-out opening 86.

Furthermore, the base body 251 constituting the rear block 80b is equipped with detection sensors for each of the aforementioned ball entry sections: a general prize entry sensor for detecting game balls that have entered the general prize entry opening 81, and operation opening detection sensors for detecting game balls that have entered the operation openings 91 and 92. These various detection sensors constitute the prize entry detection mechanism. These various detection sensors are electrically connected to the main control unit 162, and detection information (detection signals) is output from each detection sensor to the main control unit 162.

Next, the back pack unit 15 will be described based on Figures 9 and 10. Figure 9 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and Figure 10 is a front view of the back pack unit 15.

As shown in Figure 9, the inner frame 13 is covered from the rear by the back pack unit 15. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 201 as its main body, and the dispensing mechanism 202, discharge passage panel, and control device assembly unit 204 are attached to this back pack 201.

The back pack 201 is molded from a transparent synthetic resin and, as shown in Figure 10, has a base portion 211 to which the dispensing mechanism 202 and other components are attached, and a protective cover portion 212 that protrudes from the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and has a roughly rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 212 has a shape in which the left and right sides and the top are closed and only the bottom is open, and is large enough to surround at least the variable display unit 85.

The base portion 211 is provided with an external terminal board. The external terminal board has various output terminals, through which various signals are output to the management control device (hall computer) on the gaming hall side. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 10, the base portion 211 has a pair of upper and lower locking pins 214 at its right end when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10. By inserting the locking pins 214 into the bearing portion 133 provided on the inner frame 13, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported relative to the inner frame 13. The base portion 211 has multiple insertion points through which the fixing lever 134 provided on the inner frame 13 is inserted. The back pack unit 15 is fixed to the inner frame 13 by contacting the base portion 211 from the rear when the fixing lever 134 is inserted into the insertion points.

The dispensing mechanism 202 is positioned on the base 211, bypassing the protective cover 212. The dispensing mechanism 202 includes a tank 221 located at the top of the back pack 201, with an upward opening. Game balls supplied from the island equipment in the gaming hall are continuously replenished into this tank 221. A tank rail 222, gently sloping downstream, is connected to the side of the tank 221, and a case rail 223, extending vertically, is connected downstream of the tank rail 222. A dispensing device 224 is provided at the downstream end of the case rail 223. Game balls dispensed from the dispensing device 224 are supplied to a game ball distribution unit 225 located on the base 211 of the back pack 201 via a dispensing passage (not shown) located downstream of the dispensing device 224.

The game ball distribution unit 225 has the function of distributing game balls dispensed from the payout device 224 to either the upper tray 33, the lower tray 34, or the discharge passage described later. Its inner opening connects to the upper tray 33 via the main body-side upper tray passage 122 and the front door-side upper tray passage, while its outer opening connects to the lower tray 34 via the main body-side lower tray passage 123 and the front door-side lower tray passage.

The lower end of the base portion 211 is fitted with a discharge passage panel and a control unit 204, which are attached to the lower end of the base portion 211, sandwiching the lower end from front to back. The discharge passage panel has a discharge passage formed on the side facing the control unit 204, which is open to the rear. This opening in the discharge passage is closed by the control unit 204. The discharge passage is designed to discharge game balls to the island equipment of the gaming hall, etc. Game balls guided from the aforementioned recovery passage, etc., to the discharge passage are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 by passing through this discharge passage.

The control unit assembly 204 has a horizontally elongated mounting base 241, on which the payout control device 242 and the power supply/launch control device 243 are mounted. These two devices, the payout control device 242 and the power supply/launch control device 243, are arranged in a front-to-back configuration, with the payout control device 242 facing the rear of the pachinko machine 10.

In the dispensing control device 242, a dispensing control board for controlling the dispensing device 224 is housed within a circuit board box 244, and a state reset switch 245 provided on the dispensing control board protrudes outside the circuit board box 244. For example, when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing device 224, pressing the state reset switch 245 will resolve the ball jam.

The power supply and launch control device 243 houses the power supply and launch control board within the circuit board box 246. The power supply and launch control board generates and outputs the necessary power for various control devices, and further controls the launch of game balls in response to the player's operation of the game ball launch handle 41. Specifically, it controls the drive of the solenoid 111 and the ball feeding device 113, which constitute the game ball launch mechanism 110.

Furthermore, the power supply and launch control device 243 is equipped with a power switch 247. By operating the power switch 247, the power to the pachinko machine 10 can be switched between an on state and an off state.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a data storage function, so that even if a power outage occurs, it will retain the state it was in at the time of the outage, and when power is restored, it will return to that state. For example, when the power is shut off in the normal procedure, such as when a gaming hall closes for the day, the state before the shutdown is stored. On the other hand, when the power is turned on while pressing the reset switch 166 provided on the main control unit 162, the RAM data is initialized.

These various switches can be operated from the front of the gaming machine by opening the main unit 12 (inner frame 13) and exposing the rear of the inner frame 13. On the other hand, when the opening of the main unit 12 is restricted by the locking device 75, these various switches cannot be operated from the front of the gaming machine. In other words, these various switches are difficult to operate when the main unit 12 is closed, making it difficult for someone without the key for the locking device 75 (for example, a cheat) to operate them from the front of the gaming machine.

(Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10)
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained with reference to the block shown in Figure 11.

The main control board 401, located in the main control unit 162, is equipped with an MPU 402. The MPU 402 is a component that incorporates a ROM 403 for storing various control programs and fixed-value data executed by the MPU 402, a RAM 404 for temporarily storing various data during the execution of the control programs stored in the ROM 403, and various counter circuits such as interrupt circuits, timer circuits, data input/output circuits, and random number generators. Note that some of the functions of the MPU 402, such as the functions of the ROM 403 or RAM 404, may be provided by separate components.

The MPU 402 is equipped with both input and output ports. The input side of the MPU 402 is connected to the power outage monitoring board 405, the dispensing control device 242, and various detection sensors, all located on the main control device 162. The power supply and launch control device 243 is connected to the power outage monitoring board 405, and power is supplied to the MPU 402 via the power outage monitoring board 405.

As part of the various detection sensors, the following are connected: ball entry detection sensor 391a for detecting ball entry into the general prize entry opening 81, ball entry detection sensor 391b for detecting ball entry into the variable prize entry device 83, ball entry detection sensor 391c for detecting ball entry into the first operation opening 91, ball entry detection sensor 391d for detecting ball entry into the second operation opening 92, and ball entry detection sensor 391e for detecting ball entry into the through gate 84. The MPU 402 of the main control device 162 performs prize entry determination (ball entry determination) for each entry point. Furthermore, the MPU 402 executes a jackpot lottery based on ball entry into the first operation opening 91 and the second operation opening 92, and also executes a support lottery based on ball entry into the through gate 84.

The output side of the MPU 402 is connected to the power outage monitoring board 405, the payout control device 242, and the notification/effect control device 140. The payout control device 242 outputs a prize ball command based, for example, the result of determining whether a ball has entered the prize-winning ball entry section, such as the aforementioned operating ports 91 and 92. In this case, the command information storage area 425 of the ROM 403 is referenced when outputting the prize ball command. If a ball has entered the general prize port 81, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output; if a ball has entered the variable prize device 83, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 15 game balls is output; if a ball has entered the first operating port 91, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 3 game balls is output; and if a ball has entered the second operating port 92, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 4 game balls is output.

The notification and performance control device 140 receives various commands from the main control device 162, including commands for starting the variation, type commands, ending the variation, opening commands, and ending commands. In this case, the command information storage area 425 of the ROM 403 is referenced when outputting these commands. Details of these commands will be explained later. Each of the above commands is composed of information of a predetermined number of bytes, and this predetermined number of bytes contains various information.

Furthermore, the output side of the MPU 402 is connected to a variable prize drive unit that opens and closes the shutter of the variable prize device 83, an electric prize drive unit that opens and closes the electric prize mechanism 93 of the second operating opening 92, and a main display unit 99. The main control board 401 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 402 performs drive control of the various drive units through these driver circuits.

In other words, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 402 controls the drive of the variable prize drive unit so that the variable prize device 83 is opened and closed. Furthermore, if the support lottery for the electric prize mechanism 93 is won, the MPU 402 controls the drive of the electric prize mechanism drive unit so that the electric prize mechanism 93 is opened and closed. The MPU 402 also controls the display of the main display unit D of the main display unit 99.

Furthermore, an external output terminal board 213 is connected to the output side of the MPU 402. Through this external output terminal board 213, information regarding ball entry into various ball entry points and lottery results such as jackpots is output to the management control device (hall computer) on the gaming hall side. This allows the hall computer to monitor the status of the pachinko machine 10 and the gameplay situation.

The power outage monitoring board 405 acts as a relay between the main control board 401 and the power supply/launch control device 243. The power outage monitoring board 405 is equipped with the function of monitoring the maximum voltage output from the power supply/launch control device 243, which is a stable DC voltage of 24 volts. The payout control device 242 controls the payout of prize balls and loaned balls via the payout device 224 based on prize ball commands input from the main control device 162.

The power supply and launch control device 243 is connected to a commercial power supply (external power supply) in, for example, a gaming arcade. Based on the external power supplied from this commercial power supply, it generates the necessary operating power for the main control board 401, the payout control device 242, etc., and supplies this generated operating power through a predetermined power path. Furthermore, the power supply and launch control device 243 is responsible for controlling the launch of the game ball launching mechanism 110, which is driven when predetermined launching conditions are met.

The notification and performance control device 140 is equipped with a notification and performance control board on which an MPU (Multi-Purpose Unit) is mounted. The MPU contains a ROM (Remote Control Module) that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU, a RAM (Memory for Temporarily Storing Various Data During Execution of the Control Programs Stored in the ROM), and various circuits such as interrupt circuits, timer circuits, and data input/output circuits. It is not mandatory for the ROM and RAM to be integrated into a single chip; they may be configured as separate chips. The MPU of the notification and performance control device 140 drives and controls the lamp units 26-28 and speaker unit 29 located on the front door frame 14, as well as controlling the display control device 410, based on various commands input from the main control device 162.

The display control device 410 executes display control of the symbol display device 95 based on commands input from the notification and performance control device 140. In this case, the notification and performance control device 140 determines the pattern of symbol variation on the symbol display device 95 (for example, whether a reach occurs and the content of the reach performance) and the pattern of symbol stop display (the type of symbol combination to be displayed when the variation display ends) based on various commands input from the main control device 162.

Here, we will explain the configuration and content of the display of the changing symbols for each game round. In the following explanation, please refer to Figures 12 and 13 as appropriate. Figures 12 and 13 are schematic diagrams illustrating the display content on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95.
For the sake of explanation, the illustration of the background image and other elements displayed on the display screen 95a has been omitted in Figure 13, etc.

The display control device 410 is equipped with a character ROM. This character ROM pre-stores data for nine main symbols, each numbered "1" through "9" (see Figures 12(a) to (i)), and data for sub-symbols without numbers (see Figure 12(j)).

As shown in Figure 13(a), the display screen 95a of the pattern display device 95 has three pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 set up: upper, middle, and lower. Each pattern row Z1 to Z3 is composed of main patterns and sub-patterns arranged in a predetermined order. On the display screen 95a, the patterns in each of these pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a periodic manner, scrolling in a predetermined direction (specifically, from right to left).

The upper symbol row Z1 consists of nine main symbols, "1" through "9," arranged in descending order, with one secondary symbol between each main symbol. The lower symbol row Z3 also consists of nine main symbols, "1" through "9," arranged in ascending order, with one secondary symbol between each main symbol. Therefore, the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are composed of 18 symbols each. In contrast, the middle symbol row Z2 consists of nine main symbols, "1" through "9," arranged in ascending order, with an additional main symbol "4" placed between the "9" and "1" symbols, and one secondary symbol between each of these main symbols. Thus, the middle symbol row Z2 consists of 10 main symbols, totaling 20 symbols.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 13(b), the display screen 95a displays three symbols for each symbol row, resulting in a total of nine symbols being displayed in a 3x3 grid. The display screen 95a also has five active lines: the left line L1, the middle line L2, the right line L3, the downward-right line L4, and the upward-right line L5. The display stops in the order of upper symbol row Z1 → lower symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2. Once the display of all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 has finished with a predetermined symbol combination (for example, a combination of symbols with the same number) formed on any of the active lines, a jackpot video is displayed, indicating either a normal jackpot or a probability-increasing jackpot.

Furthermore, considering that the display of variations in each symbol row is stopped as described above, the upper symbol row Z1 can be referred to as the first symbol row (or first picture row), the lower symbol row Z3 as the second symbol row (or second picture row), and the middle symbol row Z2 as the third symbol row (or third picture row).

Of the main symbols listed above, those with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are considered "specific symbols," while those with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) are considered "non-specific symbols." In the case of a probability-increasing jackpot, for example, the same specific symbol combination or the same non-specific symbol combination will be displayed. In the case of a regular jackpot, for example, the same non-specific symbol combination will be displayed.

Furthermore, the manner in which the patterns are displayed in the pattern display device 95 is not limited to those described above and is arbitrary. The number of pattern rows, the direction of the pattern display in each pattern row, and the number of patterns in each pattern row can be changed as appropriate. For example, multiple pattern rows may be set to be arranged horizontally, and the direction of the pattern display in each pattern row may be set to vertical.

Below the lower part of the display screen 95a, specifically below the variable display area ME which is composed of variable display areas for the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows, is a hold display area. The hold display area consists of a hold count display area Da, where the same number of unit hold display areas as the maximum number of holdable balls when game balls enter the operation openings 91 and 92 are arranged horizontally, and an execution target display area Dc, which can display hold images (hold icons) corresponding to the game rounds currently being played in the variable display area ME.

More specifically, the maximum number of reserved balls when a game ball enters the activation openings 91 and 92 is 8. Correspondingly, the reserved ball display area Da is configured with the following areas: the 1st unit reserved ball display area, the 2nd unit reserved ball display area, the 3rd unit reserved ball display area, the 4th unit reserved ball display area, the 5th unit reserved ball display area, the 6th unit reserved ball display area, the 7th unit reserved ball display area, and the 8th unit reserved ball display area.

For example, when a game ball enters the operating slots 91 and 92 and the number of reserved balls is 1, the predetermined reserved image (reserved icon) is displayed only in the first unit reserved display area. When a game ball enters the operating slots 91 and 92 and the number of reserved balls is 4, the predetermined reserved images (reserved icons) are displayed in the first to fourth unit reserved display areas, respectively. Figure 13(b) illustrates the case where the number of reserved balls in the operating slots 91 and 92 is 3. In the following explanation, "number of reserved balls" will also be simply referred to as "number of reserved balls."

(Regarding various counters)
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be explained.

The MPU 402 uses various counter information during gameplay to perform tasks such as jackpot抽選 (jackpot lottery), setting the display on the main display unit 99 (main display section D), and setting the symbol display on the symbol display device 95. Specifically, as shown in Figure 14, it uses a random number counter C1 used for jackpot lottery, a type counter C2 used to determine the type of jackpot, such as a probability variation jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, a random number counter C3 used for reach lottery when the symbol display device 95 is fluctuating towards a miss, a random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the random number counter C1, and a fluctuation type counter CS that determines the display time of the symbol fluctuations on the display sections D1 and D2 for the operation port of the main display unit 99 and the display time of the symbol fluctuations on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95. Furthermore, it uses an electric mechanism release counter C4 used for a lottery to determine whether or not to put the electric mechanism 93 attached to the second operation port 92 into the electric mechanism release state.

Each counter C1-C4, CINI, and CS is a loop counter where 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and it returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 431 set in a predetermined area of RAM 404. RAM 404 is provided with a reserved ball storage area 432 consisting of an operation slot reserve area RE, an execution area AE, and a total reserved ball storage area.

The operating port retention area RE comprises the first, second, third, fourth, fifth, sixth, seventh, and eighth areas. In accordance with the winning history of the first or second operating port 91, the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 stored in the lottery counter buffer 431 is stored as retention information in one of the eighth areas. This retention information corresponds to special information.

In this case, in areas 1 through 8, if multiple consecutive entries into the first or second operating port 91 occur, the numerical information is stored chronologically in the order of area 1 → area 2 → area 3 → area 4. Furthermore, up to four entries of the game ball entry history into the first or second operating port 92 are retained and stored. The retained ball storage area 432 also has a total retained count storage area, which stores information to identify the number of entries into the first or second operating port 91 that are being retained and stored.

The execution area AE is an area for moving the values stored in the first area of the operation port hold area RE when the display section D1 and D2 of the main display unit 99 starts displaying the changing patterns. At the start of each game round, a win/loss determination is made based on the various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

Here, we will provide further explanation about the various counters.

The winning random number counter C1 is configured to increment by 1 sequentially within a range of, for example, 0 to 599, and then reset to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 599). In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that point is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically and stored in the operation port reserve area RE of the reserve ball storage area 432 of the RAM 404 when a game ball enters the first operation port 91 or the second operation port 92.

The random number values that result in a jackpot are stored as a win/loss table (win/loss information group) in the win/loss table storage area 421, which serves as a win/loss information group storage means in ROM 403. As shown in Figure 15, two win/loss tables are set: a win/loss table for the low probability mode (low probability win/loss information group) and a win/loss table for the high probability mode (high probability win/loss information group). In other words, this pachinko machine 10 has two lottery modes in its win/loss lottery means: a low probability mode (low probability state) where the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively low, and a high probability mode (high probability state) where the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively high.

Under the circumstances where the win/loss table for low probability mode (Figure 15(a)) is referenced during the above lottery, the random numbers that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) are a total of 6: "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507". In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to jackpot results. On the other hand, under the circumstances where the win/loss table for high probability mode (Figure 15(b)) is referenced during the above lottery, the random numbers that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) are a total of 30: "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107"... "597". In other words, among the values of the random number counter C1 (ranging from 0 to 599), "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107"... "597" correspond to the jackpot results. Incidentally, if the probability of winning is higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers that result in a jackpot are arbitrary.

In this embodiment, the random number value that results in a jackpot corresponds to a losing result. Losing results are broadly classified into normal losing results and special losing results. While details will be described later, special losing results are treated more favorably than normal losing results in that they trigger a switch in the support mode by the electric mechanism 93 to the high-frequency support mode A described later. If a special losing result occurs under predetermined conditions, the support mode switches to the high-frequency support mode after the game round related to that special losing result has ended. In the following explanation, normal losing results will also be simply referred to as "losing results."

In the situation where the win/loss table for low probability mode (Figure 15(a)) is referenced during the above lottery, the random number values that result in a special miss (i.e., special miss information) are "111", "333", and "555", totaling three values. In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 (0-599), "111", "333", and "555" correspond to special miss results. On the other hand, even in the game state where the win/loss table for high probability mode (Figure 15(b)) is referenced during the above lottery, the random number values that result in a special miss (i.e., special miss information) are also "111", "333", and "555", totaling three values. In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 (0-599), "111", "333", and "555" correspond to jackpot results. Therefore, the probability of a special miss is the same in both low probability mode and high probability mode.

Next, the type counter C2 will be explained. The type counter C2 is configured to increment by 1 sequentially within the range of 0 to 29, and then return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 29). In this embodiment, multiple jackpot results are set. These multiple jackpot results differ in two conditions: (1) the lottery mode in the win/loss lottery means after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and (2) the support mode by the electric mechanism 93 after the opening/closing execution mode ends.

The support modes provided by the electric mechanism 93 attached to the second operating port 92 are set to be low-frequency support mode (low-frequency support state or low-frequency guide state) and high-frequency support mode (high-frequency support state or high-frequency guide state), so that the frequency at which the electric mechanism 93 of the second operating port 92 opens per unit time is relatively high or low when comparing situations where game balls are continuously launched in the same manner towards the game area PE. The high-frequency support mode is broadly divided into high-frequency support mode A, which is triggered by the aforementioned special miss, and high-frequency support mode B, which is triggered by a jackpot. The differences between these support modes will be described later.

The type counter C2 is updated periodically, and when a game ball enters the first or second operation port 91, it is stored in the operation port reserve area RE of the RAM 404's reserve ball storage area 432.

The distribution destinations of game results for the type counter C2 are stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in the distribution table storage area 422, which serves as a distribution information group storage means in ROM 403. Here, the contents of the distribution table will be explained using the schematic diagram in Figure 16. Two distribution tables are set: the distribution table for jackpots (first distribution information group) shown in Figure 16(a), and the distribution table for special misses (second distribution information group) shown in Figure 16(b).

As shown in Figure 16(a), the distribution table for jackpots sets the distribution destinations for game results as follows: 6R normal jackpot results (special game results corresponding to low probability) and 6R probability-changing jackpot results (special game results corresponding to high probability). Specifically, among the values of the type counter C2 from "0 to 29", "0 to 14" corresponds to 6R normal jackpot results, and "15 to 29" corresponds to 6R probability-changing jackpot results.

As shown in Figure 17(a), a 6R normal jackpot result is a jackpot result where, after the special game state (open/close execution mode) ends, the lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode B. This high-frequency support mode B ends when the number of games played during high-frequency support mode B reaches the termination threshold, or when a jackpot result occurs before reaching the termination threshold (specifically, when transitioning to the special game state), and the game switches to the low-frequency support mode. In this embodiment, the termination threshold is set to 40 games.

A 6R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot where, after the end of the special game state (open/close execution mode), the lottery mode becomes high probability mode and the support mode becomes high-frequency support mode B. This high-frequency support mode B continues until the next jackpot result and transition to the special game state, and switches to low-frequency support mode upon the start of the special game state.

Next, as shown in Figure 16(b), the distribution table for special misses sets special miss result A and special miss result B as the distribution destinations for the game result. Specifically, among the values of the type counter C2 from "0 to 29", "0 to 23" corresponds to special miss result A, and "24 to 29" corresponds to special miss result B.

As shown in Figure 17(b), neither special failure result A nor special failure result B triggers a switch in the lottery mode; rather, they trigger a switch in the support mode by the electric mechanism 93.

Specifically, a special loss result A triggers a switch to high-frequency support mode A after the end of the game round in which that special loss result A occurred. This high-frequency support mode A terminates when the number of games played during high-frequency support mode A reaches the termination threshold, or when a jackpot result occurs before reaching the termination threshold (specifically, when transitioning to a special game state), and the system transitions to low-frequency support mode. In this embodiment, the termination threshold is set at 20 games.

Regarding special failure result B, the end of the game round in which this special failure result B occurred triggers a switch to high-frequency support mode A. This high-frequency support mode A terminates when the number of games played during high-frequency support mode A reaches the termination threshold, or when a jackpot result occurs before reaching the termination threshold (specifically, when transitioning to a special game state), and the system transitions to low-frequency support mode. In this embodiment, 40 games are set as the termination threshold.

The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment by 1 sequentially within a range of, for example, 0 to 238, and then reset to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 238). The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the operation port reserve area RE of the RAM 404's reserve ball storage area 432 when a game ball enters the first operation port 91 or the second operation port 92. Then, a decision is made on whether or not to generate a reach based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 403.

However, during gameplay rounds transitioning to the open/close execution mode, the MPU 402 determines whether a reach occurs regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. While the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of a reach display is the same for each game state, it may be set individually according to the game state. For example, a configuration where the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of a reach display is set higher in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode may be used.

Here, "reach display" (reach state) refers to a display state in a gaming machine equipped with a symbol display device 95 (display screen 95a) capable of displaying (or changing) the variation (or variable) of symbols (pictures), where, in a game round where the game result corresponds to an open/close execution mode, the stop display result after the variation display may become a special display result. This state is intended to make the player believe that the variation display state is likely to result in the special display result, occurring between the start of the variation (or variable) display of symbols (pictures) on the symbol display device 95 and the display of the stop display result.

In other words, this refers to a display state in which, by stopping the display of some of the multiple symbol sequences shown on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95, a potential winning symbol combination corresponding to the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode is displayed, and the remaining symbol sequences are then displayed in a variable symbol state.

More specifically, as a preliminary step before ending the display of changing symbols, a reach line is formed by stopping and displaying potential reach symbol combinations that correspond to the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode on a pre-set active line within the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95. Then, while this reach line is formed, the symbol change display is performed using the final stopped symbol sequence.

To further explain the display content on display screen 95a, first, the symbol variation display ends in the upper symbol row, and then, when the symbol variation display ends in the lower symbol row, a reach line is formed when a main symbol with a number that constitutes a winning symbol combination is displayed to stop on any of the active lines. When this reach line is formed, the symbol variation display in the middle symbol row is performed, indicating a reach. Then, when a jackpot occurs, the symbol variation display in the middle symbol row ends, with the main symbols forming the reach line, along with the main symbols with numbers that constitute a winning symbol combination, being displayed to stop on the reach line.

Furthermore, the reach display includes methods such as displaying the reach symbol combination as described above, then showing the remaining symbol variations in the remaining symbol rows, and displaying predetermined characters as animations in the background screen to create a reach effect, or displaying the reach symbol combination in a reduced size or hidden, and then displaying predetermined characters as animations across approximately the entire display screen 95a to create a reach effect. Additionally, the decision of whether or not to display a pre-announcement using predetermined images, such as predetermined characters, when a reach display is being shown or before a reach display may be made using a reach random number counter C3 or other counters.

The variation type counter CS is configured to increment by 1 sequentially within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and then return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 198). The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 402 to determine the variation display time in the first operation port display unit D1 and the second operation port display unit D2 of the main display unit 99 (main display unit D), and the variation display time of the patterns in the pattern display device 95. The variation type counter CS is updated once each time the normal processing described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time of that normal processing. The buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation display in the first operation port display unit D1 and the second operation port display unit D2, and at the start of pattern variation by the pattern display device 95.

The electric mechanism release counter C4 is configured to increment by 1 sequentially within the range of 0 to 599, and then reset to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 599). The electric mechanism release counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric mechanism reserve area 433 of the RAM 404 when a game ball enters the through gate 84. Then, at a predetermined timing, a support lottery is conducted based on the stored value of the electric mechanism release counter C4 to determine whether or not to control the electric mechanism 93 of the second operation opening 92 to the open state. Further explanation of the support mode will be provided below with reference to the schematic diagrams in Figures 18 and 19.

The random number values that result in a support win are stored as a support lottery table (win/loss information group) in the win/loss table storage area 421, which serves as a win/loss information group storage means in ROM 403. As shown in Figure 18, the support lottery table includes a support lottery table for low-frequency support mode (low-probability win/loss information group), a support lottery table for high-frequency support mode A (low-probability win/loss information group), and a support lottery table for high-frequency support mode B (high-probability win/loss information group).

Under the circumstances where the support lottery table for low-frequency support mode (Figure 18(a)) is referenced during the above lottery, the random numbers that result in support wins (i.e., winning information) are "1", "3", "5", "7"... "595", "597", and "599", totaling 300 values. In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "1", "3", "5", "7"... "595", "597", and "599" correspond to support win results. All other values correspond to non-support win results.

Under the circumstances where the support lottery table for high-frequency support mode A (Figure 18(b)) is referenced during the above lottery, the random number values that result in support wins (i.e., winning information) are "1", "3", "5", "7"... "595", "597", and "599", totaling 300 values. In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "1", "3", "5", "7"... "595", "597", and "599" correspond to support win results. All other values correspond to non-support win results. Therefore, the support lottery table for high-frequency support mode A is shared with the support lottery table for low-frequency support mode.

On the other hand, under the circumstances where the win/loss table for high-frequency support mode B (Figure 18(c)) is referenced during the above lottery, the random number values that result in support wins (i.e., winning information) are all 598 values except for "4" and "304". In other words, all values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599" except for "4" and "304" correspond to support win results. Therefore, high-frequency support mode B is differentiated from high-frequency support mode A and low-frequency support mode by resulting in support wins in almost all support lotteries.

As shown in Figure 19, in the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a support bonus is 1/2. The number of times the electric mechanism 93 switches to the open state (number of openings) when a support bonus is won is set to "1," and the time the electric mechanism 93 remains in the open state (open time) is set to "0.1 seconds." By drastically shortening the open time in this way, entry into the second operating opening 92 is effectively avoided during the low-frequency support mode.

In High-Frequency Support Mode A, the probability of winning a support bonus is 1/2, similar to Low-Frequency Support Mode. However, the number of times the electric mechanism 93 switches to the open state (number of openings) when a support bonus is won is set to "2 times." The time the electric mechanism is maintained in the open state (open time) is set to "2 seconds," and the interval time it is maintained in the closed state is set to "0.2 seconds." By extending the open time compared to Low-Frequency Support Mode in this way, entry into the second operating port 92 is permitted during High-Frequency Support Mode A. This allows for timely entry into the second operating port 92, making it possible to play while minimizing the reduction in the number of balls held (investment). In other words, compared to Low-Frequency Support Mode, High-Frequency Support Mode A is configured to have a higher ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched (the so-called base rate).

In High-Frequency Support Mode B, the probability of winning a support bonus is 1/1.1. When a support bonus is won, the number of times the electric mechanism 93 switches to the open state (number of openings) is set to "2 times." The time the electric mechanism is maintained in the open state (open time) is set to "2 seconds," and the interval time it is maintained in the closed state is set to "0.2 seconds." By extending the open time compared to Low-Frequency Support Mode, entry into the second operating port 92 is permitted in High-Frequency Support Mode B. In High-Frequency Support Mode B, the frequency of entry into the second operating port 92 is higher than in High-Frequency Support Mode A, allowing players to continue playing while further reducing the decrease in their ball count (investment). In other words, compared to Low-Frequency Support Mode and High-Frequency Support Mode A, High-Frequency Support Mode B is configured to have a higher ratio of prize balls to the number of game balls launched (the so-called base rate).

As already explained, the game states in this embodiment are broadly divided into a normal game state, where the game progresses by repeating game rounds based on balls entering the operating ports 91 and 92, and a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is triggered by a jackpot and to which the variable prize entry device 83 is opened and closed. The normal game state consists of a first normal game state where the lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a low frequency support mode; a second normal game state where the lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode is a high frequency support mode B; a third normal game state where the lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a high frequency support mode B; and a fourth normal game state where the lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a high frequency support mode A. The advantage for the player is set to increase in the order of first normal game state < fourth normal game state, and third normal game state < second normal game state.

(Regarding the various processes executed by the main control unit 162)
Next, the timer interrupt processing and normal processing performed in the MPU 402 within the main control unit 162 for the advancement of the game will be explained. In addition to the timer interrupt processing and normal processing described above, the MPU 402 also performs main processing which is started when the power is turned on, and NMI interrupt processing which is started when a power outage signal is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal), but the explanation of these various processes will be omitted.

(Timer interrupt handling)
First, let's refer to the flowchart in Figure 20 and explain the timer interrupt processing. This process is activated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU402.

In step S101, the system reads the status of various prize detection sensors (for example, the detection sensors 391a to 391e). Specifically, it reads the status of the various prize detection sensors connected to the main control unit 162, determines the status of the respective sensors, and saves the detection information (prize detection information).

Subsequently, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when its value reaches its maximum, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 404.

In the subsequent step S103, the system updates the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric mechanism release counter C4. Specifically, the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric mechanism release counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when their values reach their maximum values, they are reset to 0. The updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are then stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 404.

In the following step S104, the entry process for the through gate 84 is executed. In the entry process for the through gate, it is determined whether the entry detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. If the flag is stored, and provided that the number of reserved information for the through gate 84 stored in the electric mechanism reserve area 433 (hereinafter also referred to as the number of reserved memory items SN) is less than 4, the value of the electric mechanism release counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the electric mechanism reserve area 433. Then, if the entry detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 435, the entry detection flag is erased, and the entry process for the through gate is terminated.

After executing the prize-winning process for the through-gate in step S104, the process proceeds to step S105. In step S105, the prize-winning process for the activation ports 91 and 92 is executed, and this timer interrupt process ends.

(Award processing for the operating port)
Here, the prize-winning process for the operating port will be explained with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 21 and 22.

In step S201, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered (become a prize in) the first operating opening 91. If it is determined that a game ball has entered the first operating opening 91, the process proceeds to step S202, where a prize ball command is set in the payout control device 242 to dispense three game balls.

In the following step S203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the hall computer on the gaming hall side indicating that a game ball has entered the first operation opening 91. This allows the hall computer to recognize that a game ball has entered the first operation opening 91. In the following step S204, the value corresponding to the first operation opening 91 is read from the reserve count storage area, and this value is set as the reserve count RaN for the first operation opening (hereinafter also referred to as the reserve count RaN for the first operation opening). After that, in step S205, information acquisition processing is performed to store various values such as the winning random number counter C1 and the type counter C2, and the main prize entry process is completed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has not entered the first operating opening 91, the process proceeds to step S206. In step S206, it is determined whether the game ball has entered (entered) the second operating opening 92. If it is determined that the game ball has entered the second operating opening 92, the process proceeds to step S207, where a prize ball command is set to the payout control device 242 to dispense four game balls. The prize ball command set in steps S202 and S207 is transmitted to the payout control device 242 in the external output processing S401 of the normal processing described later.

In the following step S208, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the hall computer on the gaming hall side indicating that a game ball has entered the second operation opening 92. This allows the hall computer to recognize that a game ball has entered the second operation opening 92. In the following step S209, the value corresponding to the second operation opening 92 is read from the reserve count storage area, and this value is set as the reserve count RbN for the second operation opening (hereinafter also referred to as the reserve count RbN for the second operation opening). After that, in step S205, information acquisition processing is performed to store various values such as the winning random number counter C1 and the type counter C2, and the main prize entry process is completed.

Furthermore, if both steps S201 and S206 result in a negative determination, that is, if no ball enters either the first operating port 91 or the second operating port 92, the prize-winning process will terminate immediately.

Now, referring to Figure 22, the information acquisition process in step S205 will be explained.

(Information acquisition process)
In the information acquisition process, first in step S301, it is determined whether the number of reserved operation memories N stored in the reserved number memory area of the reserved ball storage area 432, specifically the number of reserved operation memories N (RaN or RbN above) related to the ball entry section that triggered the information acquisition process among the first operation port 91 and the second operation port 92, is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). If the number of reserved operation memories N is at the upper limit, the information acquisition process is terminated as is. If it is less than the upper limit, in step S302, the number of reserved operation memories N for the corresponding operation port is increased by 1, and in step S303, the total number of reserved balls stored in the reserved number memory area (hereinafter referred to as the common reserved number CRN) is increased by 1.

In the subsequent step S304, the values of the winning random number counter C1, type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variable type counter CS, which were updated in step S103, are stored in the first available memory area of the operating slot reserve area RE, that is, the memory area corresponding to the common reserve number CRN, which was incremented by 1 in step S302.

In other words, if the first operation slot reserve memory count RaN is set, the values of the winning random number counter C1, type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variable type counter CS, which were updated in step S103, are stored in the first available memory area of the operation slot reserve area RE, that is, the area corresponding to the operation slot reserve memory count N, which was incremented by 1 in step S302.

Furthermore, if the second operation slot's reserved memory count RbN is set, the values of the winning random number counter C1, type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3, updated in step S103, are stored in the first available memory area of the operation slot's reserved memory area RE, i.e., the area corresponding to the operation slot's reserved memory count N, which was incremented by 1 in step S302.

After storing the hold information, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, a display update process is performed on the hold count display section of the main display unit 99. During the display update process, if the ball entry destination (winning destination) is the first operation port 91, the display of the hold count display section S1 for the first operation port is updated. If the ball entry destination (winning destination) is the second operation port 92, the display of the hold count display section S2 for the second operation port is updated.

Each of the reserved number display units S1 and S2 is composed of four LEDs, and the number of LEDs lit in these reserved number display units S1 and S2 matches the reserved number related to the first operation port 91 and the reserved number related to the second operation port 92. If the reserved number related to the first operation port 91 increases due to this win, the number of LEDs lit in the reserved number display unit S1 for the first operation port is increased accordingly. If the reserved number related to the second operation port 92 increases, the number of LEDs lit in the reserved number display unit S2 for the second operation port is increased accordingly.

In the subsequent steps S306 and S307, the sub-control devices, namely the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410, are notified that a prize has been awarded to the operation openings 91 and 92. A pre-confirmation process and a hold command setting process, which are processes for executing the hold notification and other actions described later, are then executed, and this information acquisition process ends. The hold command includes information indicating whether the prize was awarded to the first operation opening 91 or the second operation opening 92.

The hold command set in step S307 will be transmitted to the notification/effect control device 140 and the display control device 410 in the external output processing of the normal processing (step S401), which will be described later.

(Normal processing)
Next, the normal processing flow will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 23. Normal processing is the process that begins after the main processing, which is started when the power is turned on, has been executed, and the main processing for the game is performed during normal processing. In summary, the processes in steps S401 to S407 are executed as periodic processing with a 4 msec cycle, and the counter update processing in steps S409 and S410 is executed in the remaining time.

In normal processing, the first step, S401, executes external signal output processing. In the external signal output processing of step S401, output data such as timer interrupt processing or commands set in the previous normal processing is transmitted to each control device on the sub-side and the hall computer.

Specifically, the system determines whether a prize ball command is set, and if so, transmits it to the payout control device 242. Furthermore, if various commands such as the variation start command, type command, variation end command, and other performance commands, as well as the hold command and the shift command (described later), are set, they are transmitted to the notification/performance control device 140.

Furthermore, as will be explained in more detail later, for example, each time the change in the pattern is displayed on the operation port display units D1 and D2 of the main display unit D, an external signal indicating the pattern confirmation is output to the hall computer. During the opening/closing execution mode, an external signal indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress is output to the hall computer. During the high-frequency support mode, an external signal indicating that the high-frequency support mode is in progress is output to the hall computer.

Next, in step S402, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 404.

In the following step S403, game round control processing is performed to control the game in each game round. This game round control processing includes determining the jackpot, setting the display of changing symbols on the symbol display device 95, and controlling the display on the main display unit 99.

After executing the game turn control process in step S403, the process proceeds to step S404, where the game state transition process is executed. As will be explained in detail later, this game state transition process changes the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode), high probability mode, high frequency support mode B, etc. Further details regarding the game turn control process in step S403 and the game state transition process in step S404 will be explained later.

In the subsequent step S405, control processing for the through gate is performed, including support lottery processing based on winning entries into the through gate 84. In step S406, support processing for the electric mechanism 93, which is attached to the second operating opening 92, is performed. Details regarding the through gate processing in step S405 and the electric mechanism support processing in step S406 will be described later.

Subsequently, in step S407, the game ball launch control process is executed. In this process, provided that a launch permission signal is received from the power supply/launch control device 243, the solenoid 111 of the game ball launch mechanism 110 is energized once at a predetermined interval (for example, 0.6 seconds). This launches the game ball towards the game area PE.

In the subsequent step S408, it is determined whether the timing for the next normal processing has been reached, that is, whether one cycle (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal processing. Then, within the remaining time until the timing for the next normal processing, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated.

The execution time for each process in steps S401 to S407 varies depending on the game state; therefore, the remaining time until the next normal process is executed is not constant but fluctuates. Thus, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using this remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (i.e., the initial value of the winning random number counter C1) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counter CS can also be randomly updated.

(Game round control processing)
Next, the game round control process in step S403 will be explained with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 24 to 27.

In the game round control process, first, as shown in the flowchart of Figure 24, it is determined in step S501 whether or not the game is in a special game state (open/close execution mode). If it is in open/close execution mode, the game round control process ends without executing any of the processes from step S502 onward, namely the game round start processes in steps S503 to S506 and the game round progress processes in steps S507 to S509.

If the system is not in opening/closing mode, steps S502 and S503 determine whether a game round is currently in progress. Specifically, it determines whether the operation port display units D1 and D2 of the main display unit 99 are in a variable display state. If they are in a variable display state, step S502 is a negative determination, and the process proceeds to step S503. In step S503, it is determined whether the confirmed display on the operation port display units D1 and D2 has finished. If the determination in step S503 is positive, the process proceeds to steps S504 to S506 for starting a game round. In the game round start process, first in step S504, it is determined whether the total number of starting reserved balls (common reserved ball count CRN) is "0". If the common reserved ball count CRN is "0", it means that no reserved ball information is stored in the reserved ball storage area 432. Therefore, this game round control process ends immediately.

On the other hand, if the common reserve count CRN is not "0", in step S505, a data setting process is executed to set the data stored in the reserve area RE for the operation port of the reserve ball storage area 432 for variable display. Furthermore, in step S506, a variable start process is executed to start the variable display of the operation port display units D1 and D2 in the main display unit 99 and the variable display of the symbol display device 95, after which the game round control process ends.

Here, we will explain in detail the data setting process in step S505 and the variation start process in step S506. First, we will explain the data setting process in step S505 with reference to the flowchart in Figure 25.

(Data setting process)
In the data setting process, first, in step S601, the number of operation hold memory N stored in the hold memory area that is the target of this setting process, as well as the common hold memory CRN, are subtracted by 1. Then, it is determined whether the number of hold information stored in the operation port hold area RE (see Figure 14), i.e., the number of operation hold memory N, is "0". If the number of operation hold memory N is "0", the data setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the number of operation hold memory N is not "0", the data (hold information) stored in the first area of the operation port hold area RE is moved to the execution area AE. Then, the data (hold information) stored in the second to eighth areas of the operation port hold area RE are shifted sequentially to the lower areas. As a result, when data from area 1 is moved to execution area AE, for example, the data within each area is shifted as follows: area 2 → area 1, area 3 → area 2, area 4 → area 3, area 5 → area 4, area 6 → area 5, area 7 → area 6, area 8 → area 7, and so on.

In the following step S604, a shift command is set, which is information that allows the notification and display control device 140 to recognize that a data shift has occurred in the operation port holding area RE. After this, the data setting process ends. The shift command set in step S604 is transmitted to the notification and display control device 140 in step S401 of the normal process (Figure 23). This shift command is then transmitted to the display control device 410 via the notification and display control device 140.

(Initiation of change process)
Next, the variation start process in step S506 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 26.

In the variation initiation process, first, in step S701, the update process for the game count counter located in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 is executed. The game count counter is reset to 0 upon transitioning to the special game state, and is incremented by "1" each time the update process in step S701 is executed. The MPU 402 can identify the number of games played after the special game state ends by referring to the value of this game count counter.

In the following step S702, a win/loss determination process is executed based on the winning entries into the operating ports 91 and 92. This win/loss determination process determines whether the held information referenced in the current variation start process corresponds to a jackpot win. Specifically, it identifies the information for jackpot determination, i.e., the information obtained from the winning random number counter C1, from the information stored in the execution area AE. Then, if the win/loss lottery mode is low probability mode, the win/loss table for low probability mode stored in the win/loss table storage area 421 of ROM 403 is referenced to determine if the identified information is included in the information corresponding to a jackpot. If the win/loss lottery mode is high probability mode, the win/loss table for high probability mode stored in the win/loss table storage area 421 of ROM 403 is referenced to determine if the identified information is included in the information corresponding to a jackpot.

In the following step S703, it is determined whether the result of the win/loss determination process in step S702 corresponds to a jackpot. If the result corresponds to a jackpot, the jackpot type determination process is executed in step S704.

This type determination process identifies the type determination information from the information stored in the execution area AE, specifically the information obtained from the type counter C2. Furthermore, it refers to the distribution table for jackpots stored in the distribution table storage area 422 of ROM 403 to determine whether the identified type determination information corresponds to a 6R normal jackpot result or a 6R probability variation jackpot result.

If it is a 6R probability variation jackpot, a positive determination is made in step S705, and the process proceeds to step S706, where the stop result setting process for the 6R probability variation jackpot is executed. If it is a 6R regular jackpot, a negative determination is made in step S705, and the process proceeds to step S707, where the stop result setting process for the 6R regular jackpot is executed.

Returning to the explanation of step S703, if a negative result is obtained in step S703, i.e., if it is not a jackpot, proceed to step S708. If the result of this draw is a normal miss as described above, a negative result is obtained in step S708 and proceed to step S713. In step S713, the stop result setting process for normal misses is executed. If the result of this draw is a special miss as described above, an affirmative result is obtained in step S708 and proceed to step S709, where the special miss type determination process is executed.

This type determination process identifies the type determination information, specifically the information obtained from the type counter C2, among the information stored in the execution area AE. Furthermore, it refers to the distribution table for special exceptions stored in the distribution table storage area 422 of ROM 403 to determine whether the identified type determination information corresponds to special exception result A or special exception result B.

If the result is special failure A, a positive determination is made in step S710, and the process proceeds to step S711, where the stop result setting process for special failure A is executed. If the result is special failure B, a negative determination is made in step S710, and the process proceeds to step S712, where the stop result setting process for special failure B is executed.

In the stop result setting processes of steps S706, S707, and S711-S713, the information regarding the pattern to be ultimately displayed on the main display unit 99 is identified by referring to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 424 of the ROM 403, and this identified information is stored in the RAM 404.

In steps S706 and S707, information for determining whether the result of the current game round is a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 6R regular jackpot is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. Specifically, in step S706, the 6R probability variation jackpot flag is stored, and in step S707, the 6R regular jackpot flag is stored.

Furthermore, in steps S711 and S712, information for determining whether the result of this game round is either a special miss A or a special miss B is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. Specifically, in step S711, the special miss A flag is stored, and in step S712, the special miss B flag is stored.

After executing any of the processes in steps S706, S707, or S711-S713, the variable display time setting process is executed in step S714. In the variable display time setting process, the variable display time table stored in the variable display time table storage area 423 of ROM 403 is referenced to obtain variable display time information corresponding to the current variable type counter CS value, etc. Then, the obtained variable display time information is set in the variable display time counter (variable display time measurement means) provided in the various counter areas 434 of RAM 404.

After the setting process for the display time of the variation is executed in step S714, the process proceeds to step S715, where the variation start command and the type command are set. The variation start command includes information on whether a reach occurred and information on the variation display time. The type command includes information on the game result. Specifically, the type command includes information on the 6R probability variation jackpot result, the 6R normal jackpot result, special miss result A, and special miss result B. Note that in step S713, the value of the game count counter is referenced to determine whether the ceiling has been reached, and this information is also included in the variation start command.

The variation start command and type command set in step S715 are transmitted to the notification/performance control device 140 in step S401 of the normal processing (Figure 23). The notification/performance control device 140 determines the illumination pattern of the lamp unit 26 and the output pattern of sound (BGM and sound effects) from the speaker unit 29 for that game round based on the received variation start command and type command, and controls the lamp unit 26 and speaker unit 29 so that the determined performance content is executed. Furthermore, the notification/performance control device 140 determines the details of the game performance, such as the variation display pattern of the symbols on the symbol display device 95, for that game round based on the received variation start command and type command, and transmits this determined information to the above variation start command and type command to the display control device 410. The display control device 410 controls the display of the symbol display device 95 so that the game performance (display performance) is executed in the manner determined by the notification/performance control device 140, based on the received variation start command and type command.

Subsequently, in step S716, the display of the changing symbols is started on either the first operation port display unit D1 or the second operation port display unit D2 of the main display unit 99, and then this symbol change start process is terminated. It is also possible to configure the display of the changing symbols, etc., to start before the above-mentioned lottery is performed.

(Setting the variable display time)
Next, an overview of the setting process for the variation display time (step S714) will be described with reference to Figures 27 to 29. As already explained, in this embodiment, reserve information is acquired based on balls entering the first operation port 91 and the second operation port 92, and based on the acquired reserve information, the variation display to confirmation display of the patterns and symbols in the game round is executed. Here, the variation display time of the patterns and symbols is set according to the current game state, the result of the win/loss lottery based on balls entering the operation ports D1 and D2, the number of reserve information stored in the operation port reserve area RE, etc. Regarding the variation display time, when comparing a jackpot result with a loss result, the former tends to be longer than the latter, and in the case of a loss result where no reach display occurs, the display time is set to become shorter as the number of stored reserve information increases.

In the process of setting the variable display time, it is first determined whether a jackpot or a special miss occurred in the lottery in step S702 described above. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the following are stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404: the 6R probability variation jackpot flag, the 6R normal jackpot flag, the special miss A flag, or the special miss B flag.

(Fluctuating display time table for normal misses)
If the lottery result is a normal miss (complete miss) that does not correspond to reaching the ceiling (not reaching it), it is determined whether or not to generate a reach display on the symbol display device 95 in the current game round. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE and the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of ROM 403 are referenced to determine whether or not to generate a reach display. Then, the variable display time table corresponding to a complete miss is referenced from the various variable display time tables stored in the variable display time table storage area 423 of ROM 403, and the variable display time is set according to the current game state, the number of reserve information stored in the operation port reserve area RE, and whether or not a reach has occurred.

Figure 27(a1) illustrates the display time for a complete miss in the first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode. For example, if the number of stored reserved information is "0" or "1", the display time for the variation is set to "12, 13, or 14 seconds". If the number of stored reserved information is "2", the display time for the variation is set to "7, 8, or 9 seconds". If the number of stored reserved information is "3" to "8", the display time for the variation is set to "3, 4, or 5 seconds". In the first normal game state, the display time for the confirmed symbols in the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the display time for the confirmed symbols in the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "1 second".

Figure 27(a2) illustrates the display time for a complete miss in the fourth normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode A. For example, if the number of stored reserved information is "0" or "1", the display time for the variation is set to "12, 13, or 14 seconds". If the number of stored reserved information is "2", the display time for the variation is set to "7, 8, or 9 seconds". If the number of stored reserved information is "3" to "8", the display time for the variation is set to "3, 4, or 5 seconds". In the fourth normal game state, the display time for the confirmed symbols in the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the display time for the confirmed symbols in the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "1 second". In other words, the setting method for the display time for the variation in the fourth normal game state is the same as the setting method for the display time for the variation in the first normal game state.

Figure 27(a3) illustrates the display time for a complete miss in the second normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode B. For example, if the number of stored reserved information is "0", the display time for the variation will be set to "12, 13, or 14 seconds". If the number of stored reserved information is "1" to "8", the display time for the variation will be set to "1 or 2 seconds". In the second normal game state, the display time for the confirmed symbols in the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the display time for the confirmed symbols in the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "0.5 seconds".

Figure 27(a4) illustrates the display time for a complete miss in the third normal game state, which is in low probability mode and supports high frequency support mode B. For example, if the number of stored hold information is "0", the display time for the variation is set to "12, 13, or 14 seconds". If the number of stored hold information is "1" to "8", the display time for the variation is set to "1 or 2 seconds". In other words, the setting method for the display time for the variation in the third normal game state is the same as the setting method for the display time for the variation in the second normal game state. Note that in the third normal game state, the display time for the confirmed symbols in the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the display time for the confirmed symbols in the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "1 second".

Incidentally, in all four normal game states (1st to 4th), during game rounds where a losing reach display (losing reach) occurs, the display time is set to "20 to 30 seconds," regardless of the number of stored reserve information. This display time is within the same range as the display time set for game rounds corresponding to jackpot results (see Figure 28). A relatively longer time is more likely to be set for jackpot results, while a relatively shorter time is more likely for losing results. In other words, a longer display time for a reach display indicates a higher probability of a jackpot than a shorter display time.

In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 may, when the game progresses without a jackpot and the number of plays in normal gameplay reaches a predetermined upper limit (hereinafter also referred to as the ceiling), forcibly switch the support mode to high-frequency support mode A upon reaching the ceiling. In the game rounds where the ceiling is reached, a variable display time corresponding to the reach display (specifically 20-30 seconds) is set, similar to when a jackpot occurs or when a special miss occurs.

Furthermore, this is not the only option; it is also possible to configure the system so that the display time for spins that reach the ceiling is not corresponding to the reach indicator. For example, the display time for spins that reach the ceiling and those that do not may be configured to be the same regardless of whether the ceiling is reached or not.

Incidentally, the term "complete miss" as used in the following explanation refers to any game result that does not fall under the categories of a big win, a special miss, or a normal miss that does not correspond to reaching the ceiling.

(Table of display time for big wins)
If the lottery result is a jackpot (6R probability variation jackpot or 6R regular jackpot), the ROM 403 refers to the jackpot-corresponding variable display time table from the various variable display time tables stored in the variable display time table storage area 423, and sets the variable display time regardless of the current game state or the number of reserve information stored in the operation port reserve area RE.

Figure 28 illustrates the display time for the variation when a complete loss occurs in the first to fourth normal game states. Regardless of whether the number of stored hold information is "0" to "8", the display time for the variation is set to "20 to 30 seconds". This range of display time is the same as the range for when a losing reach occurs, and within this range, a relatively longer time is more likely to be set compared to a relatively shorter time. Note that in the first, third, and fourth normal game states, the display time for confirmed symbols in the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the display time for confirmed symbols in the symbol display device 95 is "1 second", while in the second normal game state, the display time for confirmed symbols in the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the display time for confirmed symbols in the symbol display device 95 is "0.5 seconds".

(Fluctuating display time table for handling special out-of-bounds events)
If the lottery result is a special miss (special miss A or special miss B), the variable display time is set by referring to the variable display time table corresponding to the special miss from the various variable display time tables stored in the variable display time table storage area 423 of ROM 403.

Figure 29(c1) shows the display time for a special miss in the first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode. Regardless of whether the number of stored hold information is "0" to "8", the display time for the variation will be set to "20 to 30 seconds". This range of display time is the same as the range for when a miss reach occurs, and within this range, a relatively longer time is more likely to be set compared to a relatively shorter time. In the first normal game state, the display time for confirmed symbols in the operation port display units D1 and D2, and the display time for confirmed symbols in the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "1 second".

Figure 29(c2) shows the display time for a special miss in the fourth normal game state corresponding to low probability mode and high frequency support mode A. Regardless of whether the number of stored hold information is "0" to "8", the display time for the variation will be set to "20 to 30 seconds". This range of display time is the same as the range for when a miss reach occurs, and within this range, a relatively longer time is more likely to be set compared to a relatively shorter time. In the first normal game state, the display time for confirmed symbols in the operation port display units D1 and D2, and the display time for confirmed symbols in the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "1 second".

Figure 29(c3) shows the display time for a special miss in the second normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode B. Regardless of whether the number of stored hold information is "0" to "8", the display time for the special miss is set to either "1" or "2 seconds". The range of this display time is the same as that for a complete miss as described above, making it difficult to distinguish a special miss from the display time alone. In the second normal game state, the display time for confirmed symbols in the operation port display units D1 and D2, and the display time for confirmed symbols in the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "0.5 seconds".

Figure 29(c4) shows the display time for a special miss in the third normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode B. Regardless of whether the number of stored hold information is "0" to "8", the display time for the special miss is set to either "1" or "2 seconds". The range of this display time is the same as that for the complete miss described above, making it difficult to distinguish a special miss from the display time alone. In the third normal game state, the display time for confirmed symbols in the operation port display units D1 and D2, and the display time for confirmed symbols in the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "0.5 seconds".

As already explained, in the pachinko machine 10 shown in this embodiment, if the game progresses without a jackpot and the number of games played in the normal game state reaches a predetermined upper limit (ceiling), the support mode may be forcibly switched to high-frequency support mode A upon reaching the ceiling. While reaching the ceiling does not occur in high-frequency support mode B, it can occur in the first normal game state (low probability mode and low-frequency support mode) and the fourth normal game state (low probability mode and high-frequency support mode A). In the first and fourth normal game states, when the ceiling is reached during a game round, the display time for the variation is set to the same variation display time as for the reach display (specifically 20-30 seconds). In other words, the machine is configured to display a reach during the game round when the ceiling is reached.

Returning to the explanation of the game turn control process (Figure 24), if the operation port display units D1 and D2 in the main display unit 99 are showing a variable display or a confirmed display, the process proceeds to step S507. In step S507, it is determined whether the variable display time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the variable display time counter (variable display time information) in RAM 404 has become "0". This value is deducted by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (Figure 20) is activated.

If the variable display time has not elapsed, the variable display processing is executed in step S508. In the variable display processing, the display mode of the corresponding display unit D1 or D2 for the operation port is changed. After that, the game round control processing ends. If the variable display time has elapsed, the confirmation display processing is executed in step S509, and then the game round control processing ends. Details of this confirmation display processing will be described later.

(Game state transition process)
Next, the game state transition process in step S404 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 25.

In the game state transition process, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the system is in opening/closing execution mode (special game state). If it is not in opening/closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S802, where it is determined whether or not the game round has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a predetermined confirmed display time (stop display time) has elapsed since the change display ended on either the operation port display unit D1 or D2 of the main display unit D. If the game round has not ended, the game state transition process ends immediately.

If the game round has ended, a positive result is determined in step S802, and the process proceeds to step S803. In step S803, it is determined whether the game result of this round (the result of the above win/loss lottery) corresponds to a transition to the opening/closing execution mode (special game state). Specifically, it is determined whether either the 6R probability variation jackpot flag or the 6R normal jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. If neither of the above flags is stored, the game state transition process ends.

If any of the above flags are stored, the start process for the opening/closing execution mode is executed in step S804. This start process releases the restriction on the operation of the variable prize device 83 by the locking device, allowing the opening and closing operation of the variable prize device 83 until the opening/closing execution mode ends. Furthermore, in the start process of step S804, the opening/closing execution mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404, and the waiting time for opening in the opening/closing execution mode is set. Note that in step S801, the presence or absence of this opening/closing execution mode flag is used to determine whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress.

In the following step S805, the round counter RC1, located in the various counter area 434 of the RAM 404, is set to "6". The round counter RC1 functions as a means of determining the number of times the variable prize device 83 has been opened. After executing the process in step S805, the process proceeds to step S806, where the high-frequency support mode flags A and B, stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404, are erased. This forces the support mode during the opening/closing execution mode to switch to the low-frequency support mode. Subsequently, the opening command setting process is executed in step S807, and the external signal setting process is executed in step S808, after which the game state transition process ends.

The opening command set in step S807 is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 140 and the display control device 410 in step S401 of the normal processing (Figure 23). The notification/effect control device 140 determines the content of the effects corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices to execute the determined effects. This content includes the display mode of the symbol display device 95, and this determined display mode is output from the notification/effect control device 140 to the display control device 410 as a display content command. The display control device 410 executes display control of the symbol display device 95 based on the opening command received from the main control device 162 and the display content command received from the notification/effect control device 140, so that the display corresponding to the current opening/closing execution mode is changed, for example, to display animated characters or background images corresponding to a jackpot.

Furthermore, the external signal set in step S808 is also transmitted to the hall computer of the gaming hall in step S401 of the normal processing (Figure 23). The hall computer can then determine that the gate is in open/close execution mode based on this external signal.

Returning to the explanation of step S801, if it is determined in step S801 that the system is in opening/closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S809. In step S809, it is determined whether the waiting time for opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for opening has not elapsed, the game state transition process ends immediately. If the waiting time for opening has elapsed, the opening and closing process of the main prize slot is executed in step S810. Now, referring to Figure 31, the opening and closing process of the main prize slot will be explained.

(Opening and closing of the grand prize slot)
In the opening and closing process of the main prize slot, first, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the variable prize device 83 (main prize slot) is open. Specifically, this determination is made based on the drive state of the variable ball entry device drive unit of the variable prize device 83. If the main prize slot is not open, in step S902, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC1 is "0". If the determination in step S902 is positive, the main prize slot opening and closing process is terminated.

If a negative result is obtained in step S902, the process proceeds to step S903. In step S903, it is determined whether the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0". The timer counter TC1 is a counter referenced when determining the opening time or interval time of the main prize slot, and its value is decremented by "1" each time the timer interrupt process (see Figure 20) is executed. If a negative result is obtained in step S903, the main prize slot opening/closing process is terminated.

If the value of the round counter RC1 is not "0" AND the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0", the process proceeds to step S904, where the variable prize entry device 83 (large prize opening) is opened. Specifically, the drive unit for the variable ball entry device is driven to open the large prize opening.

Subsequently, steps S905 and S906 are executed as setting processes for the closing conditions (setting processes for when the variable prize winning device 83 (large prize winning slot) are configured. Specifically, in step S905, the timer counter TC1 is set to "15000" (equivalent to 30 seconds), and in the following step S906, the first prize winning counter PC1 is set to "10".

After executing the process in step S906, in step S907, an open command is set to indicate that the variable prize device 83 (large prize slot) has been opened, and the large prize slot opening/closing process is terminated. This set open command is transmitted to the notification/performance control device 140 in step S401 of the normal process (see Figure 23). Based on the received open command, the notification/performance control device 140 determines the content of the performance corresponding to the opening and controls various devices to execute the determined performance.

Returning to the explanation of step S901, if it is determined in step S901 that the variable prize-winning device 83 (large prize-winning opening) is open, the process proceeds to step S908, where it is determined whether the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0". If the value of the timer counter TC1 is not "0", the process proceeds to step S909, where it is determined whether a game ball has entered the large prize-winning opening based on the detection signal from the detection sensor installed in the variable prize-winning device 83.

If a prize has been awarded, the output process for the prize award command is executed in step S910. This prize award command is output to the notification/performance control device 140, and the performance during the opening/closing execution mode, for example, on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95, changes as a result of this prize award command.

After executing the command output process in step S910, the process proceeds to step S911. In step S911, the value of the first prize counter PC1 is decremented by 1. In the following step S912, it is determined whether the value of the first prize counter PC1 is "0" or not. If it is not "0", the main prize opening/closing process is terminated.

If a positive determination is made in step S912, i.e., if the value of the first prize counter PC1 is "0", or if a positive determination is made in step S908 (i.e., if the value of the timer counter TC1 is determined to be "0"), it means that the condition for closing the large prize opening has been met. In this case, in step S913, the drive unit for the variable ball entry device is deactivated in order to close the variable prize entry device 83 (large prize opening).

In the following step S914, the round counter RC1 is updated. Specifically, if the value of round counter RC1 is not "0", it is decremented by 1. If the value of round counter RC1 is "0", it is kept at "0".

Subsequently, in step S915, it is determined whether the updated round counter RC1 value is "0". If the determination in step S915 is negative, the process proceeds to step S916, where the timer counter TC1 is set to "1000" (equivalent to 2.0 seconds).

After executing the process in step S916, a closing command is set in step S917, and the main prize slot opening and closing process is terminated. This set closing command is transmitted to the notification and performance control device 140 in step S401 of the normal process (Figure 23). The notification and performance control device 140 determines the content of the performance corresponding to the received closing command and controls various devices to execute the determined performance.

Returning to the explanation of step S915, if it is determined in step S915 that the value of the round counter RC1 is "0", the process proceeds to step S918. In step S918, the ending start process is executed. In this start process, an ending waiting time is set for the ending of the open/close execution mode, so that the next game round is not started. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending, which is pre-stored in the ROM 403, is set in the waiting time counter provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404.

Subsequently, in step S919, after setting the ending command, the main prize slot opening and closing process is terminated. This set ending command is transmitted to the notification/performance control device 140 in step S401 of the normal process (Figure 23).

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition process (Figure 30), after executing the opening and closing of the large prize slot in step S810, the process proceeds to step S811, where it is determined whether the value of the round counter RC1 is "0". If the value of the round counter RC1 is not "0", the game state transition process ends immediately. If the value of the round counter RC1 is "0", the process proceeds to step S812. In step S812, it is determined whether the waiting time for the ending has elapsed. If the waiting time for the ending has not elapsed, the game state transition process ends immediately.

If the waiting time for the ending has elapsed, in step S813, the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is executed, and then the game state transition process ends. The transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode will be explained below with reference to the flowchart in Figure 32.

(Transition process when opening/closing execution mode ends)
In the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, first, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the current opening/closing execution mode was triggered by a 6R probability variation jackpot. If the determination in step S1001 is positive, the process proceeds to step S1002, where a high probability mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. Based on the high probability mode flag set in this way, the win/loss table for high probability mode will be referenced in the win/loss lottery for subsequent game rounds.

Subsequently, the high-frequency support mode B flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. Based on this set high-frequency support mode B flag, in the subsequent electric support processing, the D support lottery table for high-frequency support mode B is referenced in the support lottery, and the variation display time table for high-frequency support mode B is referenced as the variation display time table for determining the variation display time of the symbols in the through-gate display unit DS.

Returning to the explanation of step S1001, if the jackpot that triggered this opening/closing execution mode was a 6R regular jackpot, the count limit flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404 (step S1004), and the continuation count counter in the various counter area 434 of RAM 404 is set to "40". After that, the process proceeds to step S1003, where the high-frequency support mode B flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404.

The value of the continuation count counter decreases by "1" each time a game is played. High-frequency support mode B ends when the continuation count counter reaches "0". In other words, the value of the continuation count counter determines the upper limit (the termination criterion count mentioned above) of the number of games that can be played during high-frequency support mode B.

After executing the process in step S1003, the process proceeds to step S1006, where the value of the game count counter located in the various counter areas 434 of RAM 404 is cleared (reset). Then, in step S1007, the various flags (such as the jackpot flag) for the opening/closing execution mode stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404 are erased, and the output of the external signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is stopped.

Next, the control process for the through gate in step S405 of the normal process will be explained with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 33 and 34.

(Control processing for through gates)
In the control process for the through gate, first, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not support is being provided by the electric mechanism 93. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a support flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. The support flag is a flag that is stored in the various flag storage area 435 when support by the electric mechanism 93 begins and is deleted from the various flag storage area 435 when support ends.

If the support flag is stored, the control process for this through gate terminates immediately. If the support flag is not stored, a negative determination is made in step S1101, and the process proceeds to step S1102. In step S1102, it is determined whether the through gate display unit DS in the main display unit D is currently displaying a changing or confirmed pattern. If a negative determination is made in step S1102, the process proceeds to step S1103.

As already explained, in this embodiment, the number of times a game ball has passed through the through gate 84 is retained up to a maximum of four times. That is, the retained information (electric bonus retain) based on winning at the through gate 84 is stored in the electric bonus retain area 433 up to a maximum of four times. In step S1103, it is determined whether the bonus bonus retain memory count SN is "0". If the bonus bonus retain memory count SN is "0", a positive determination is made in step S1103 and the control process for this through gate is terminated. If the bonus bonus retain memory count SN is not "0", a negative determination is made in step S1103 and the process proceeds to step S1104. In step S1104, data setting processing is executed to set the data stored in the electric bonus retain area 433 for variable display.

This data setting process decrements the number of reserved items (SN) by 1. Then, it determines whether the number of reserved items stored in the electric reserved item area 433 is "0". If the number of reserved items (SN) is "0", the data setting process ends. Conversely, if the number of reserved items (SN) is not "0", the data (reserved information) stored in the first area of the electric reserved item area 433 is moved to the execution area. Then, the data (reserved information) stored in the second to fourth areas of the electric reserved item area 433 is shifted sequentially to the lower areas. As a result, for example, when the data in the first area is moved to the execution area, the data within each area is shifted as follows: second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on.

After executing the data setting process in step S1104, the process to start the pattern change on the through-gate display unit DS is executed in step S1105, and then the control process for this through-gate is terminated. Here, the pattern change start process in step S1105 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 34.

(Initiation of change process)
In the variation start process, first, in step S1201, it is determined whether the current support mode is high-frequency support mode B or not. If the current support mode is either low-frequency support mode or high-frequency support mode A, a negative determination is made in step S1201 and the process proceeds to step S1202. In step S1202, a support lottery process (low-probability support lottery process) is executed by referring to the support lottery table corresponding to low-frequency support mode and high-frequency support mode A (see Figures 18(a) and (b)). If the current support mode is high-frequency support mode B, an affirmative determination is made in step S1201 and the process proceeds to step S1203. In step S1203, a support lottery process (high-probability support lottery process) is executed by referring to the support lottery table corresponding to high-frequency support mode B (see Figure 18(c)).

If support is selected in the support lottery process in steps S1202 and S1203, a positive determination is made in step S1204, and the process proceeds to step S1205 to execute the stop result setting process for support selection. If support is not selected in the support lottery process in steps S1202 and S1203, a negative determination is made in step S1204, and the process proceeds to step S1206 to execute the stop result setting process for support not selected.

After executing the stop result setting process in steps S1205 and S1206, the process proceeds to step S1207, where the setting process for the pattern variation display time in the through-gate display unit DS is performed. The variation display time table storage area 423 of ROM 403 stores a variation display time table for low-frequency support mode and a variation display time table for high-frequency support mode, respectively. If the current support mode is low-frequency support mode, the pattern variation display time is set by referring to the variation display time table for low-frequency support mode. In this embodiment, the variation display time set by referring to the variation display time table for low-frequency support mode is specified to be "10 to 20 seconds" (see Figure 35). On the other hand, if the current support mode is high-frequency support mode A or B, the pattern variation display time is set by referring to the variation display time table for high-frequency support mode. In this embodiment, the variation display time set by referring to the variation display time table for high-frequency support mode is specified to be "0.5 seconds" (see Figure 35). In other words, in high-frequency support modes A and B, the display time for the changing patterns in the through-gate display unit DS is significantly reduced compared to the low-frequency support mode.

Furthermore, in all support modes, the display time for confirming the symbols on the through-gate display unit DS is consistently set to "0.5 seconds".

After executing the setting process in step S1207, the control process for this through-gate is terminated in step S1208 by starting the display of the changing patterns on the through-gate display unit DS.

(Processing for power supply support)
Next, with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 36 and 37, the power supply support process in step S406, which is performed as part of the normal process, will be described.

In the process for supporting the electric feature, first, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not support is currently being provided by the electric feature 93. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a support flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. If support is not currently being provided, a negative determination is made in step S1301, and the process proceeds to step S1302. In step S1302, it is determined whether or not the display of confirmed symbols has finished in the through-gate display unit DS. If the display of confirmed symbols has not finished, a negative determination is made in step S1302, and the process for supporting the electric feature ends. If the display of confirmed symbols has finished, an affirmative determination is made in step S1302, and the process proceeds to step S1303.

In step S1303, it is determined whether or not support has been won in the support lottery based on entry into the through gate 84. If support has not been won, a negative determination is made in step S1303, and the process for this electric support function ends there. If support has been won in the support lottery based on entry into the through gate 84, an positive determination is made in step S1303, and the process proceeds to step S1304. In step S1304, it is determined whether or not the current support mode is high-frequency support mode A or B. If there is a low-frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S1305, and "1" is set in the round counter RC2 provided in the various counter areas 434 of RAM 404. The round counter RC2 functions as a means of determining the number of times the electric function 93 has opened. If it is high-frequency support mode A or B, the process proceeds to step S1306, and "2" is set in the round counter RC2.

After executing steps S1305 and S1306, the process proceeds to step S1307, where support flags are set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. Then, in step S1308, the opening start process is executed, and the main electric support process is terminated. The opening start process sets a waiting time for the opening. After this waiting time has elapsed, the opening and closing operation of the electric mechanism 93 begins.

Returning to the explanation of step S1301, if a positive result is obtained in step S1301, the process proceeds to step S1309. In step S1309, it is determined whether the opening waiting time set in step S1308 has elapsed. If the opening waiting time has not elapsed, a negative result is obtained in step S1309, and the main power support process ends. If the opening waiting time has elapsed, a positive result is obtained in step S1309, and the process proceeds to step S1310. Now, referring to Figure 37, the power switching process in step S1310 will be explained.

(Power supply switching process)
In the electric device switching process, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether the electric device 93 is open (in the open state). Whether the electric device 93 is open or not is determined by whether the electric device drive unit is in a driving state. If the electric device 93 is open, the process proceeds to step S1402, where it is determined whether the value of the round counter RC2 is "0". If the value of the round counter RC2 is "0", the electric device switching process ends there. If the value of the round counter RC2 is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1403. In step S1403, it is determined whether the value of the timer counter TC2 provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 is "0". The timer counter TC2 is a counter that is referenced when determining the opening time and interval time of the electric device 93, and its value is decremented by "1" each time a timer interrupt process (see Figure 20) is executed. If a negative determination is made in step S1403, the electric device switching process ends there. If a positive result is obtained in step S1403, proceed to step S1404.

In step S1404, the electric mechanism release process is executed. Specifically, the output of a drive signal to the electric mechanism drive unit (solenoid) is started, switching the electric mechanism 93 from the closed state to the open state. Then, in step S1405, the second prize counter PC2 is set to "10". In the following step S1406, it is determined whether the current support mode is high-frequency support mode A or B. If it is high-frequency support mode A or B, the timer counter TC2 is set to "1000" (equivalent to 2 seconds) (step S1407). If it is low-frequency support mode, the timer counter TC2 is set to "50" (equivalent to 0.1 seconds).

Returning to the explanation of step S1401, if a positive result is obtained in step S1401, i.e., if the electric mechanism 93 is open, the process proceeds to step S1409. In step S1409, it is determined whether the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0". If the value of the timer counter TC2 is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1410. In step S1410, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the second operating port 92 based on the detection signal from the detection sensor for the second operating port 92. If no entry has occurred, the main electric mechanism opening/closing process ends. If an entry has occurred, the value of the second entry counter PC2 is deducted by 1 in step S1411, and in the following step S1412, it is determined whether the value of the second entry counter PC2 is "0". If it is not "0", the main electric mechanism opening/closing process ends.

If a positive determination is made in step S1412, i.e., if the value of the second prize counter PC2 is "0", or if a positive determination is made in step S1409 (i.e., if the value of the timer counter TC2 is determined to be "0"), it means that the conditions for ending the opening of the electric mechanism 93 have been met. In this case, in step S1413, the output of the drive signal to the electric mechanism drive unit is stopped in order to close the electric mechanism 93 (second operating opening 92).

In the following step S1414, the round counter RC2 is updated. Specifically, if the value of round counter RC2 is not "0", it is decremented by 1. If the value of round counter RC2 is "0", it is kept at "0".

Subsequently, in step S1415, it is determined whether the updated round counter RC2 value is "0". If the determination in step S1415 is negative, the process proceeds to step S1416, where the timer counter TC2 is set to "100" (equivalent to 0.2 seconds). If the determination in step S1415 is that the round counter RC2 value is "0", the process proceeds to step S1417. In step S1417, the ending start process is executed. In this start process, the waiting time for the ending of the electric support is set. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending, which is pre-stored in ROM 403, is set in the waiting time counter provided in the various counter areas 434 of RAM 404.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 36, after executing the electric power switch opening/closing process in step S1310, the process proceeds to step S1311. In step S1311, it is determined whether the value of the round counter RC2 is "0". If the result in step S1311 is negative, the electric power support process ends. If the result in step S1311 is positive, the process proceeds to step S1312, where it is determined whether the ending waiting time set in step S1417 has elapsed. If the result in step S1312 is negative, the electric power support process ends. If the result in step S1312 is positive, the process proceeds to step S1313. In step S1313, the support flags stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404 are erased, and the electric power support process ends. This releases the restriction on the support lottery based on winning at the through gate 84.

As detailed above, the support mode provided by the electric mechanism 93 is primarily configured to switch from low-frequency support mode to high-frequency support mode via a special game state. However, in cases of the above-mentioned special failure or reaching the ceiling, the mode may switch from low-frequency support mode to high-frequency support mode without going through the special game state. Below, referring to the flowcharts in Figures 38 and 39, we will provide a supplementary explanation of the configuration related to the support mode switching, specifically the confirmation display process (step S509) of the game turn control process (Figure 24) executed as part of the normal process.

(Processing for final display)
As shown in Figure 38, in the confirmation display process, first, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the confirmation display is currently being performed by the operation port display units D1 and D2. If the determination in step S1501 is negative, the process proceeds to step S1502. In step S1502, the confirmation display time setting process is executed. In this embodiment, "1 sec" is set as the confirmation display time in the first normal game state, third normal game state, and fourth normal game state, and "0.5 sec" is set as the confirmation display time in the second normal game state.

In the following step S1503, the start process for the confirmed display is executed. In this start process, the display controls of the operation port display units D1 and D2 are performed to stop the patterns determined in steps S706, S707, and S711-S713. Afterward, in step S1504, a variation end command is set, and this confirmed display process ends. The variation end command is output to the notification/performance control device 140, etc., in step S401 of the normal process. Based on receiving this variation end command, the notification/performance control device 140 terminates the variation display of the currently running patterns on the pattern display device 95, etc. (transitioning to the confirmed display).

Returning to the explanation of step S1501, if a positive result is obtained in step S1501, the process proceeds to step S1505. In step S1505, it is determined whether the confirmation display time for the patterns in the operation port display units D1 and D2 has elapsed. If a negative result is obtained in step S1505, the confirmation display process ends immediately. If a positive result is obtained in step S1505, the support mode switching process is executed in step S1506, ending the confirmation display process. Now, referring to Figure 39, the support mode switching process will be explained.

(Processing for switching support modes)
In the support mode switching process, first, in step S1601, it is determined whether the current support mode is high-frequency support mode B. If the result in step S1601 is positive, the process proceeds to step S1602. In step S1602, it is determined whether the count limit flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. If the result in step S1602 is negative, the switching process ends there. If the result in step S1602 is positive, the process proceeds to step S1603. In step S1603, the continuation count counter in the various counter area 434 is updated. Specifically, the value of the continuation count counter is decremented by "1". In the following step S1604, it is determined whether the value of the continuation count counter is "0". If the result in step S1604 is negative, the switching process ends there. If a positive result is obtained in step S1604, the process proceeds to step S1605, where the high-frequency support mode flag (specifically the high-frequency support mode B flag) and the count limit flag stored in the various flag storage area 435 are cleared, and the switching process ends. When the high-frequency support mode flag is cleared, the support mode switches from high-frequency support mode to low-frequency support mode.

Returning to the explanation of step S1601, if a negative result is obtained in step S1601, proceed to step S1606. In step S1606, it is determined whether the current support mode is high-frequency support mode A. If a positive result is obtained in step S1606, proceed to step S1607. In step S1607, it is determined whether the value of the game count counter has reached its upper limit. If a negative result is obtained in step S1607, proceed to step S1608. In step S1608, the continuation count counter is updated. Specifically, the value of the continuation count counter is decremented by "1". In the following step S1609, it is determined whether the value of the continuation count counter is "0". If a negative result is obtained in step S1609, the switching process ends there. If a positive result is obtained in step S1609, the high-frequency support mode flag (high-frequency support mode A flag) and the count limit flag are cleared in step S1605, and the switching process ends. In other words, when the number of games played in high-frequency support mode A reaches the upper limit, the system switches to low-frequency support mode.

Returning to the explanation of step S1606, if a negative determination is made in step S1606, that is, if the current support mode is low-frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S1610. In step S1610, it is determined whether the value of the game count counter has reached its upper limit. If a negative determination is made in step S1610, the process proceeds to step S1611. In step S1611, it is determined whether the current game count corresponds to a special miss. If it does not correspond to a special miss, a negative determination is made in step S1611, and this switching process ends. If a positive determination is made in step S1611 (corresponding to a special miss) or if a positive determination is made in step S1610 (reaching the ceiling), the process proceeds to step S1612. In step S1612, the high-frequency support mode A flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. Then, in the following step S1613, the game count limit flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. After that, the process proceeds to step S1614, where the setting process for the continuation count counter is executed, and then the main switching process is terminated.

In the continuation counter setting process, if the value of the game count counter reaches its upper limit (the ceiling is reached) during the current game round, the continuation counter is set to "400". This means that High-Frequency Support Mode A will continue until a jackpot is hit during High-Frequency Support Mode A, or until 400 game rounds have been played during High-Frequency Support Mode A. If the result of this game round is Special Miss A, the continuation counter is set to "20". This means that High-Frequency Support Mode A will continue until a jackpot is hit during High-Frequency Support Mode A, or until 20 game rounds have been played during High-Frequency Support Mode A. If the result of this game round is Special Miss B, the continuation counter is set to "40". This means that High-Frequency Support Mode A will continue until a jackpot is hit during High-Frequency Support Mode A, or until 40 game rounds have been played during High-Frequency Support Mode A.

Returning to the explanation of step S1607, if the game count counter reaches its upper limit (the ceiling is reached) during high-frequency support mode A, the continuation count counter is set (overwritten) to "400" in step S1614, and this switching process ends. This extends high-frequency support mode A so that it continues until 400 game plays have been executed during that high-frequency support mode A. In other words, if the ceiling is reached during high-frequency support mode A triggered by a special miss, the number of game plays for which high-frequency support mode A continues is reset (overwritten), and the upper limit of the fourth normal game state is raised without going through other normal game states.

(Regarding the electrical configuration of the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410)
Next, with reference to the block diagram in Figure 40, we will provide a supplementary explanation of the electrical configuration related to the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410.

The notification and effect control board 441, located in the notification and effect control device 140, is equipped with an MPU 442. The MPU 442 contains a ROM 443 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 442, a RAM 444 that temporarily stores various data during the execution of the control programs stored in the ROM 443, and various circuits such as interrupt circuits, timer circuits, and data input/output circuits. It is not mandatory for the ROM 443 and RAM 444 to be integrated into a single chip; they may be configured as separate chips. This is also true for MPUs in other control devices.

The MPU 442 is equipped with both input and output ports. The main control unit 162 is connected to the input side of the MPU 442, and from this main control unit 162, it receives game turn control commands (game turn control information), such as the aforementioned variation start command, type command, and variation end command. It also receives commands for controlling the hold display (hold display control information), such as the shift command and hold command, as well as commands for the opening and closing execution mode (opening and closing execution mode information), such as the opening command and ending command.

The output side of the MPU 442 is connected to the lamp units 26-28 and speaker unit 29, which are installed on the front door frame 14, and the display control device 410. Some of the various commands input from the main control device 162 to the notification/effect control device 140 are transmitted (transferred) to the display control device 410 while maintaining their information format.

The display control device 410 includes an MPU 472, which is an element where the program ROM 473 and work RAM 474 are integrated into a single chip; a display control board 471 on which a video display processor (VDP) 475, a character ROM 476, and a video RAM 477 are mounted. Note that it is not mandatory for the program ROM 473 and work RAM 474 to be integrated into a single chip on the MPU 472; they may also be configured as separate chips.

The MPU 472 of the display control device 410 analyzes various commands received from the main control device 162 via the notification/effect control device 140, or performs predetermined calculations based on the received commands to control the VDP 475 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 475). More specifically, the MPU 472 executes a process to identify the variation display pattern for each game round on the symbol display device 95 based on the commands transmitted from the notification/effect control device 140, and also executes processing related to hold notifications, etc., and then executes drawing processing for the VDP 475 in accordance with the processing results. As a result, various images are displayed on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95.

The program ROM 473 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 472, and also stores JPEG image data for background images. The work RAM 474 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various programs are executed by the MPU 472. This work data and flags are stored in various areas of the work RAM 474.

The VDP475 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates the image processing device, which acts as a liquid crystal display driver, integrated into the graphic display device 95. Because the VDP475 is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip," and in reality, it can be described as a microcontroller chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP475 adjusts the timing of the MPU472, video RAM477, etc., to intervene in data reading and writing, and reads image data to be stored in the video RAM477 from the character ROM476 at a predetermined timing to display it on the graphic display device 95.

The character ROM 476 serves as an image data library for storing character data, such as patterns, displayed on the pattern display device 95. This character ROM 476 holds bitmap image data of various display patterns, a color palette table referenced when determining the color representation for each dot of the bitmap image, and other similar data.

Furthermore, it is possible to provide multiple character ROMs 476 and store image data and other information in each character ROM 476. It is also possible to configure the system so that JPEG image data for background images, stored in the program ROM 473, is stored in the character ROMs 476.

The video RAM 477 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 95. The display content of the pattern display device 95 is changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 477.

As already explained, in this embodiment, the general outline of the pattern variation display mode on the display screen 95a is identified by the notification/effect control device 140 by referring to a command from the main control device 162, and the details of the pattern variation display mode are determined by the display control device 410 based on the identification result. Specifically, the MPU 442 of the notification/effect control device 140 executes a pattern variation control process as part of a periodic process that is activated at a predetermined interval (e.g., 2 msec), and the general outline of the pattern variation display mode is identified in this pattern variation control process. Now, the pattern variation control process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 41.

(Fluctuating display control processing)
In the variable display control processing, if the game state is the first normal game state, a positive determination is made in step S1701, and the first variable display control processing for the first normal game state is executed in step S1702. If the game state is the second normal game state, a negative determination is made in step S1701 and a positive determination is made in step S1703, and the second variable display control processing for the second normal game state is executed in step S1704. If the game state is the third normal game state, negative determinations are made in steps S1701 and S1703, and the third variable display control processing for the third normal game state is executed in step S1705. If the game state is the fourth normal game state, negative determinations are made in steps S1701 and S1703 and a positive determination is made in step S1707, and the fourth variable display control processing for the fourth normal game state is executed in step S1708.

(First variable display control process)
Here, with reference to the flowchart in Figure 42, the first variable display control process executed in the first normal game state will be explained.

In the first variation display control process, step S1801 first determines whether or not a game round is currently being executed, that is, whether or not the variation display or confirmation display for one game round is being executed on the symbol display device 95. If it is determined that a game round is not currently being executed, the process proceeds to step S1802, where it is determined whether or not a variation start command transmitted from the main control device 162 has been received.

If a negative result is obtained in step S1802, the current fluctuation display control process terminates. On the other hand, if a positive result is obtained in step S1802, the first fluctuation initiation process (described later) is executed in step S1803, and then the current fluctuation display control process terminates.

Returning to the explanation of step S1801, if a positive result is obtained in step S1801, that is, if it is determined that a game round is in progress, the process proceeds to step S1804. In step S1804, it is determined whether or not a variation end command transmitted from the main control unit 162 has been received. If a negative result is obtained in step S1804, the variation display control process is terminated after executing the variation in progress processing in step S1805. The variation in progress processing is the process of executing various effects or changing determined effects during the game round started by the variation start processing.

If a positive result is obtained in step S1804, the process proceeds to step S1806, where the variation termination process is executed, and then the variation display control process is terminated. In the variation termination process, the variation display of the symbols and the ongoing effects are terminated (confirmed and stopped) in accordance with the held information for the current game round. This process involves driving and controlling the speaker unit 29 and the lamp unit 26 to perform the effects corresponding to the confirmed stop. Then, a confirmation command is output to the display control device 410, and the variation termination process is terminated. The MPU 472 of the display control device 410 controls the symbol display device 95 to confirm and stop the symbols based on the received confirmation command.

(Processing to initiate the first change)
Here, referring to the flowchart in Figure 43, we will provide a supplementary explanation of the first variation initiation process in step S1803. The first variation initiation process is a process to start the game round's effects based on the receipt of a variation start command from the main control device 162. In the first variation initiation process, settings such as the reach display are made as part of the game round's effects.

In the first variation start process, step S1901 first reads the variation start command received, and identifies information on whether a reach occurred and the variation display time from this command. Also, as already explained, when a variation start command is sent from the main control unit 162, a type command is also sent. In step S1601, the type command received along with the variation start command is read, and various information related to the game result, such as information on the probability variation jackpot result, normal jackpot result, special miss result, normal miss result, and ceiling reach, is identified from this command. Then, in step S1901, from the identified information, information on whether a jackpot was won, the type of jackpot if a jackpot was won, information on whether a special miss occurred, the type of special miss if a special miss occurred, information on whether a reach occurred if neither a jackpot nor a special miss occurred, information on whether the ceiling was reached, and variation display time information are obtained, and this obtained information is stored in the registers of the MPU 442.

In the following step S1902, based on the information obtained in step S1901, it is determined whether the result of the current game round corresponds to a jackpot result. If the result of the current game is a jackpot result (either a 6R probability variation jackpot result or a 6R normal jackpot result), the jackpot performance setting process is executed in the following step S1903. The jackpot performance setting process is broadly divided into a stop result determination process, which determines the combination of jackpot symbols to be stopped and displayed, and the active line on which that combination will be stopped and displayed, and a variation display pattern determination process (performance pattern determination process), which determines the variation display pattern of the jackpot symbols.

In the process of determining the stop result for a jackpot, the stop result for this game round is determined to be the one in which the same combination of symbols appears on one of the valid lines L1 to L5. Specifically, the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 stores the valid lines L1 to L5 and their address information. The final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. Furthermore, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In this embodiment, the following combinations of symbols are defined as corresponding to a jackpot: "1" symbol, "1" symbol, "1" symbol combination; "2" symbol, "2" symbol, "2" symbol combination; "3" symbol, "3" symbol, "3" symbol combination; "4" symbol, "4" symbol, "4" symbol combination; "5" symbol, "5" symbol, "5" symbol combination; "6" symbol, "6" symbol, "6" symbol combination; "7" symbol, "7" symbol combination; "8" symbol, "8" symbol combination; "9" symbol, "9" symbol combination (see, for example, Figure 45(a)).

As already explained, when a jackpot is achieved, the result is announced via a reach display. In the process of determining the jackpot display pattern, the system retrieves the reach display pattern table stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 and determines the normal reach display or super reach display pattern corresponding to the game result in the received variation start command and variation display time and type command. Furthermore, the system executes a process to store the address information of the determined variation display pattern in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

If it is determined in step S1902 that the result is not a jackpot, the process proceeds to step S1904. In step S1904, it is determined whether or not the ceiling will be reached in this game round. If the ceiling will be reached, a positive determination is made in step S1904 and the process proceeds to step S1907. In step S1907, the process for setting the effects for reaching the ceiling is executed. The process for setting the effects for reaching the ceiling is broadly divided into a stop result determination process, which determines the combination of symbols to be displayed for reaching the ceiling and the valid lines for displaying that combination, and a variation display pattern determination process (effect pattern determination process), which determines the variation display pattern of the symbols for reaching the ceiling.

In the process of determining the stop result for reaching the ceiling, the stop result for this game round is determined to be the combination of symbols for reaching the ceiling that is established on one of the active lines L1 to L5. Specifically, the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 stores the address information for each active line L1 to L5, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. Furthermore, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In this embodiment, the combination of symbols "1," "3," and "4" is defined as the symbol combination corresponding to reaching the ceiling (see Figure 45(b)).

When the ceiling is reached, the result is notified via a reach display. In the process of determining the variation display pattern for reaching the ceiling, the variation display pattern table for reach displays, stored in the various table areas of ROM 443, is retrieved. The display pattern for either a normal reach display or a super reach display corresponding to the game result in the variation display time and type command of the currently received variation start command is determined. Furthermore, the address information of the determined variation display pattern is stored in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

In this embodiment, if a jackpot occurs during a game round that reaches the ceiling, the jackpot takes priority. That is, the symbol combination and display pattern for that game round are set by the setting process in step S1903.

If a negative result is obtained in step S1904, the process proceeds to step S1906. In step S1906, it is determined whether the current game round corresponds to a special miss. If a positive result is obtained in step S1906, the process proceeds to step S1907. In step S1907, the special miss animation setting process is executed. The special miss animation setting process is broadly divided into two parts: a stop result determination process that determines the combination of symbols to be displayed as a special miss and the valid lines for displaying that combination, and a variation display pattern determination process (animation pattern determination process) that determines the variation display pattern of the symbols for the special miss.

In the process for determining the stop result for special misses, the stop result for this game round is determined to be the combination of symbols corresponding to a special miss that occurs on one of the active lines L1 to L5. Specifically, the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 stores the address information for each active line L1 to L5, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. Furthermore, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In this embodiment, similar to when the ceiling is reached, the combination of symbols "1", "3", and "4" is defined as the symbol combination corresponding to a special miss (see Figure 45(b)).

If a special miss occurs, the result is reported via a reach display. The process for determining the variation display pattern for special misses retrieves the variation display pattern table for reach displays stored in the various table areas of ROM 443. It then determines the normal reach display or super reach display pattern corresponding to the game result in the variation display time and type command of the currently received variation start command. Furthermore, it executes a process to store the address information of the determined variation display pattern in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

If a negative result is determined in step S1906, the process proceeds to step S1908 to execute the animation setting process for a complete miss. In the animation setting process for a complete miss, it is determined whether or not a reach will occur in the current game round. If a reach occurs, the animation setting process for a reach is executed; if a reach does not occur, the animation setting process for a non-reach is executed.

The process for setting up the effects for triggering a reach is broadly divided into two parts: a stop result determination process that determines the combination of symbols for a complete miss corresponding to a reach and the valid lines for which that combination will be stopped; and a variation display pattern determination process (effect pattern determination process) that determines the variation display pattern of the symbols for a complete miss corresponding to a reach.

In the process for determining the stop result for a complete miss after reaching a winning combination, the stop symbols are determined so that they do not match any of the following combinations: the combination corresponding to a big win, the combination corresponding to a special miss, or the combination corresponding to reaching the ceiling. Specifically, the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 stores the address information for each active line L1 to L5. The final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. Furthermore, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In the process for determining the variable display pattern for a complete miss after a reach, the variable display pattern table for reach displays stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 is retrieved, and the normal reach display or super reach display pattern corresponding to the game result in the variable display time and type command of the received variable start command is determined. Furthermore, the address information of the determined variable display pattern is stored in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

The processing for setting up the effects when a reach does not occur is broadly divided into two parts: a stop result determination process that determines the combination of symbols to be displayed as a complete miss (not corresponding to a reach) and the valid lines for which that combination of symbols will be displayed as a stop; and a variation display pattern determination process (effect pattern determination process) that determines the variation display pattern of the symbols for a complete miss (not corresponding to a reach).

In the process for determining the stop result for a complete miss (no reach), the stop symbols are determined so that they do not match any of the following combinations: the combination corresponding to a jackpot, the combination corresponding to a special miss, or the combination corresponding to reaching the ceiling. Specifically, the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 stores the address information for each active line L1 to L5. The final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. Furthermore, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In the process for determining the display pattern for a complete miss (no reach), the display pattern table for misses (no reach) stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 is retrieved, and the display pattern corresponding to the game result in the display time and type command of the currently received variation start command is determined. Furthermore, the address information of the determined display pattern is stored in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

After executing any of steps S1903, S1905, S1907, or S1908, the process proceeds to step S1909. In step S1909, commands containing the stop result and presentation pattern information determined in steps S1903, S1905, S1907, and S1908 are output to the display control device 410 as a stop result command and a pattern command, respectively. The MPU 472 of the display control device 410 then controls the display of the symbol display device 95 to execute the presentation for the current game round based on the received stop result command and pattern command.

After executing the process in step S1909, the process to start the game round's effects is executed in the following step S1910, and then the process for starting this variation is terminated. Specifically, based on the effects pattern determined in steps S1903, S1905, S1907, and S1908, the drive control of the speaker unit 29 and the lamp unit 26 is started to begin the game round's effects.

Here, we will provide a supplementary explanation regarding the display mode of the patterns shown on the display screen 95a of the pattern display device 95, based on the schematic diagram in Figure 44.

(Display method)
The variable display modes of the symbols executed in the variable display area ME of the display screen 95a are broadly classified into five types: non-reach miss, normal reach A, normal reach B, super reach A, super reach B, and super reach C. These variable display modes are set to have different variable display times, and based on the information related to the variable display time attached to the command from the main control device 162, it is possible to grasp an overview of the variable display mode for each game round.

Specifically, the display time for non-reach misses is "1 sec to 14 sec" (with differences depending on the game state, number of reserved balls, etc.), the display time for normal reach A is "20 sec", the display time for normal reach B is "25 sec", which is longer than the display time for normal reach A, and the display time for super reach A to C is "30 sec", which is longer than the display time for normal reach A and B. For example, if the information regarding the display time of the variation attached to the command from the main control device 162 is "20 sec", the notification and performance control device 140 will understand that normal reach A should be executed, and if the information regarding the display time of the variation attached to the command from the main control device 162 is "25 sec", the notification and performance control device 140 will understand that normal reach B should be executed. In contrast, if the information regarding the variable display time attached to the command from the main control unit 162 is "30 sec," the decision of which of Super Reach A to C to execute is left to the notification and performance control unit 140.

In this determination, during gameplay rounds corresponding to a jackpot, the selection order is more likely to be Super Reach C > Super Reach B > Super Reach A. During gameplay rounds corresponding to a complete miss, the selection order is more likely to be Super Reach A > Super Reach B > Super Reach C. In other words, during gameplay rounds corresponding to a jackpot result, the selection order is more likely to be Super Reach C > Super Reach B > Super Reach A > Normal Reach B > Normal Reach A. During gameplay rounds corresponding to a miss, the selection order is more likely to be Complete Miss > Normal Reach A > Normal Reach B > Super Reach A > Super Reach B > Super Reach C. In short, the probability of winning a jackpot increases as the display time increases, and this probability increases in the order of Super Reach A < Super Reach B < Super Reach C.

Furthermore, regarding the game rounds corresponding to special misses, the selection order is made more likely in the following sequence: Super Reach C > Super Reach B > Super Reach A > Normal Reach B > Normal Reach A. In game rounds where the ceiling is reached, the selection rates are evenly distributed so that Super Reach C = Super Reach B = Super Reach A.

Here, the display patterns for normal reach A and B will be explained with reference to Figure 44(a). When normal reach A or B is selected, the display of all stopped symbol rows begins to change (scroll display), then the display of the upper symbol row (upper symbol row Z1) ends (stops), and then the display of the lower symbol row (lower symbol row Z3) ends (stops). With the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 stopped in this state, a reach line is formed when the main symbols with the same number on any of the active lines L1 to L5 (see Figure 13(a)) are stopped. Then, with the reach line formed, the display of the middle symbol row (middle symbol row Z2) changes, resulting in a reach display (reach change display). After the reach display is formed, the display of the middle symbol row Z2 ends by stopping it. Then, if the same symbols that make up the winning combination stop on the winning line, it is announced that a jackpot has been won. If any other symbols stop on the same winning line, it is announced that a jackpot has not been won. In this way, the combination of symbols that was finally displayed remains the same for a predetermined period. In other words, the current game round continues until the display period has elapsed, and once that period has elapsed, the game is allowed to move on to the next round.

In this embodiment, the difference in the display time of the middle symbol sequence Z2 after the reach line is formed is ensured, thereby maintaining the difference in display time between normal reach A and normal reach B. However, the method of setting this difference is arbitrary. For example, it is also possible to ensure the difference in display time by setting a difference in the time from when the display of the symbols starts until the reach line is formed.

Next, based on the display patterns of Normal Reach A and B described above, the display patterns of Super Reach A, B, and C will be explained. As shown in Figures 44(b) to (c), Super Reach A, B, and C form the reach lines described above through the same process as Normal Reach A and B. After the reach lines are formed, the reach effect is performed by displaying predetermined characters as animations in conjunction with the display of the middle symbol row Z2. Specifically, in Super Reach A, after the reach lines are formed, a character resembling a fairy is displayed in the center of the display area of the middle symbol row Z2 (center of the display area ME); in Super Reach B, after the reach lines are formed, a character resembling a boy is displayed in the center of the display area of the middle symbol row Z2 (center of the display area ME); and in Super Reach C, after the reach lines are formed, a character resembling a girl is displayed in the center of the display area of the middle symbol row Z2 (center of the display area ME).

Next, referring to Figure 46, we will explain the game flow when transitioning to the fourth normal game state, which corresponds to the low probability mode and high-frequency support mode A, triggered by a special miss or reaching the ceiling. Figure 46 is a timing chart illustrating the game flow when transitioning to the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss.

During the first normal game state, which corresponds to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode, at timing ta1, the symbol variation display on the operation slot display unit and the symbol variation display on the symbol display device 95 begin based on the entry into the operation slot. Since this game round corresponds to a special miss, at timing ta2, after a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the symbol variation display, the symbol variation display pattern transitions to a reach display. Subsequently, at timing ta3, the symbol combination corresponding to the special miss is displayed as a stop (confirmation display) prior to the confirmation display of the symbols on the operation slot display unit. Immediately afterward, at timing ta4, the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 darkens, and at timing ta5, the symbols corresponding to the special miss are displayed as a stop on the operation slot display unit, and a message indicating a transition to high frequency support mode A (for example, the words "Chance Zone Entered") is displayed on the display screen 95a.

At the timing of ta6, after the confirmation display time has elapsed from the timing of ta5, the support mode switches to high-frequency support mode A, and accordingly, the background of the display screen 95a changes to the background corresponding to high-frequency support mode A. Furthermore, the remaining number of games required to continue high-frequency support mode A is displayed in the corner of the display screen 95a.

As described above, prior to the confirmation display of the symbols in the operation port display unit, the symbol combination corresponding to a special miss is displayed, and by increasing the notification time indicating the transition to high-frequency support mode A, the likelihood of the notification being missed is suppressed.

Furthermore, the gameplay flow when the trigger for transitioning to High-Frequency Support Mode A is reaching the ceiling is basically the same as the gameplay flow when the trigger is a special miss. However, unlike in the case of a special miss, during the game state corresponding to High-Frequency Support Mode A, which is transitioned to when reaching the ceiling is the trigger, the display of the remaining number of games on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 is omitted.

(Overview of the game)
Next, an overview of the gameplay of this pachinko machine 10 will be explained with reference to Figures 47 and 48. Figure 47 is a block diagram showing the relationships between each game state, and Figure 48 is a timing chart illustrating the changes in the number of balls held as the game progresses.

As already explained, the first normal game state, in which the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode, is the most disadvantageous game state for the player. In this first normal game state, the goal is to achieve a win in the first operation opening 91 and transition to other game states such as the special game state. As described above, the game board 80a shown in this embodiment is a so-called symmetrical gauge (see Figure 6), and a win in the first operation opening 91 can occur regardless of whether the game ball is launched towards the right route or the left route. In addition, through gates 84 are provided on both the right and left routes, and the configuration allows some of the game balls launched aiming for the first operation opening 91 to enter the through gates 84. However, the opening time of the electric mechanism 93 when support is won in the support lottery based on a win in the through gate 84 during the low frequency support mode is extremely short, making it practically impossible to win in the second operation opening 92. In other words, during the first normal game state, the player cannot receive the benefits of the electric mechanism 93, and the number of balls decreases rapidly as the game progresses (see Figure 48).

As shown in Figure 47, if a 6R probability-changing jackpot is achieved during the first normal game state, the game transitions to a special game state and then to a second normal game state corresponding to high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode B.

In the second normal game state, the electric mechanism 93 is opened frequently, and its opening time is set to be a length that allows for a substantial entry into the second operating port 92. Therefore, in addition to entries into the first operating port 91, entries into the second operating port 92 occur, and based on these entries into the second operating port 92, a predetermined number of prize balls (four in this embodiment) are awarded to the player. As a result, during the second normal game state, the decrease in the number of balls held as the game progresses is mitigated compared to the first normal game state, making it possible to play while minimizing investment (decrease in balls). Furthermore, since the second normal game state continues until the next jackpot, the number of balls can be significantly increased by continuously transitioning to the special game state. If a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs in the second normal game state, the game returns to the second normal game state via the special game state. By looping between the second normal game state and the special game state in this way, the number of balls held increases significantly (see Figure 48).

If a 6R regular jackpot is achieved during the first or second normal game state, the game will transition to a special game state and then to the third normal game state, which is a low-probability mode and corresponds to high-frequency support mode B.

In the third normal game state, the electric mechanism 93 is opened frequently, and its opening time is set to be a length that substantially allows for ball entry into the second operating port 92. Therefore, in addition to ball entry into the first operating port 91, ball entry into the second operating port 92 occurs, and based on this entry into the second operating port 92, a predetermined number of prize balls (four in this embodiment) are awarded to the player. As a result, during the third normal game state, the reduction in the player's ball count is mitigated, similar to the second normal game state, allowing the player to continue playing while minimizing investment (reduction in ball count). However, for the high-frequency support mode B in the third normal game state, a termination threshold (upper limit: 40 times) is set. If the number of games played during the third normal game state reaches this upper limit, the game will transition to the first normal game state.

Here, it is a concern that prolonged stay in the first normal game state could lead to monotony in gameplay and decrease the player's motivation to play. In this embodiment, if a special miss occurs during the first normal game state, the game transitions to a fourth normal game state, which is a low-probability mode and corresponds to high-frequency support mode A.

While the probability of hitting a jackpot during the fourth normal game state is the same as in the first normal game state, the frequency of opening of the electric mechanism 93 increases, resulting in more frequent entries into the second operating opening 92. As a result, during the fourth normal game state, the decrease in the number of balls held is mitigated compared to the first normal game state, allowing players to progress through the game while minimizing investment (decrease in balls) (see Figure 48). Furthermore, in the fourth normal game state, similar to the first normal game state, the display time for each game round is significantly shortened as the number of held balls increases. Therefore, transitioning to the fourth normal game state results in more frequent entries into the second operating opening 92, thus accelerating the pace of the game.

Furthermore, if a special miss occurs during the first normal game state, the game transitions directly to the fourth normal game state without passing through the special game state. This minimizes the time required from a special miss until the player can enjoy the benefits of High-Frequency Support Mode A. This configuration, which allows for quick enjoyment of the benefits of High-Frequency Support Mode, is desirable for suppressing delays in state transitions and emphasizing the smoothness of gameplay. Additionally, diversifying the transition patterns by allowing transitions to High-Frequency Support Mode (High-Frequency Support Modes A and B) via two different routes—one via the special game state and the other without—is desirable for diversifying gameplay.

In the first normal game state, the probability of hitting a jackpot is low, and the base payout is also low. Therefore, there is a possibility that investment will become excessively high as the game progresses. This not only worsens the impression of the gaming machine but can also reduce the health of the game. In this embodiment, however, a ceiling (upper limit on the number of plays) is set in the first normal game state. When this ceiling is reached, the game transitions to a fourth normal game state, which is a low-probability mode and corresponds to high-frequency support mode A. In the fourth normal game state, although the probability of winning a jackpot is the same as in the first normal game state, the electric mechanism 93 opens frequently, resulting in frequent entries into the second operating opening 92. This allows the game to progress while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held (see Figure 48).

The first embodiment described in detail above provides the following excellent effects.

If a jackpot is achieved through a lottery based on ball entry into the operating ports 91 and 92, the support mode is changed via a special game state. If a special loss occurs, the support mode is changed without going through the special game state. This configuration diversifies the game flow when changing to a higher support mode, contributing to the suppression of game monotony. Furthermore, in the configuration shown in this embodiment, when switching to a higher support mode, the frequency at which the electric mechanism 93 opens differs depending on whether the trigger is a jackpot or a special loss. By ensuring the superiority of support from high-frequency support mode B while providing game assistance from high-frequency support mode A, game diversification can be effectively achieved. In particular, for the disadvantageous high-frequency support mode B, the support mode is switched quickly without going through the special game state. Such a configuration is preferable for improving player satisfaction.

If a special losing result occurs during the first normal game state, the game transitions directly to the fourth normal game state without passing through the special game state. In this case, the lottery mode remains the low probability mode, but the support mode changes from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode A. This makes it possible to aim for a jackpot while minimizing investment, thus providing a kind of player relief function. Because this relief function is activated without passing through the special game state as described above, the time required for this function to be activated can be minimized, thus reducing the impression that the game is being unnecessarily delayed.

As shown in this embodiment, when switching from low-frequency support mode to high-frequency support mode B, the probability of winning the support lottery based on passing through gate 84 is changed. When switching from low-frequency support mode to high-frequency support mode A, the time required from winning until the electric mechanism 93 opens is shortened without changing the probability of winning. By using different parameters to differentiate between high-frequency support mode A and high-frequency support mode B in this way, the two high-frequency support modes can be suitably allowed to coexist.

In High-Frequency Support Mode B, compared to High-Frequency Support Mode A, the ratio of the number of game balls dispensed by the payout mechanism to the number of game balls launched—that is, the value obtained by dividing the number of game balls dispensed by the number of game balls launched (hereinafter referred to as the "base")—is higher, making it possible to play while suppressing the depletion of your remaining game balls. In other words, if you achieve a jackpot and transition to High-Frequency Support Mode B via a special game state, you have a chance to win a large number of balls. In contrast, while High-Frequency Support Mode A offers a more favorable base than Low-Frequency Support Mode, the degree of this is lower than in High-Frequency Support Mode B, thus preventing excessive relief functions. With this configuration, the combination of multiple support modes can enhance the dynamics of the game.

By setting an upper limit (termination threshold) on the number of games played in High-Frequency Support Mode A, a return from High-Frequency Support Mode A to Low-Frequency Support Mode becomes possible, effectively suppressing the decrease in tension during gameplay after entering High-Frequency Support Mode A.

In the third normal game state, which is entered when a regular jackpot is achieved, the termination count for High-Frequency Support Mode B is set to 40. In the fourth normal game state, which is entered when a special loss occurs, the termination count for High-Frequency Support Mode A is set to be less than or equal to the termination count for High-Frequency Support Mode B (specifically, 20 or 40). This is advantageous in increasing the frequency of transitions to the fourth normal game state and thus increasing the frequency of transitions between game states. Furthermore, by setting a portion of the termination count for the fourth normal game state (entered when a special loss occurs) to the same number as the termination count for High-Frequency Support Mode B, it is possible to create the illusion that there are multiple routes to transition to a single game state (third normal game state, fourth normal game state). This is desirable in achieving diversification of gameplay while avoiding causing confusion for players.

Furthermore, termination criteria are set for both the second and fourth normal game states. By providing transition routes to limited advantageous states with upper limits on the number of games played, both via and without special game states, the game can be diversified. In this configuration, a practically preferable setup can be achieved by configuring the base in high-frequency support mode A such that the difference between the base in high-frequency support mode A and the base in high-frequency support mode B is smaller than the difference between the base in low-frequency support mode.

According to this embodiment, if a special losing result occurs in the first normal game state, or if the number of game attempts reaches the upper limit (ceiling) during the first normal game state, the game transitions to the fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A. In this way, by setting the trigger for transitioning to the fourth normal game state as a judgment result or reaching the ceiling that does not correspond to transitioning to a special game state, and by providing relief to the player through this fourth normal game state, it is possible to contribute to curbing excessive investment. In particular, by setting a relatively high number of game attempts triggered by reaching the ceiling and a relatively low number of game attempts triggered by a special losing result, it is possible to suitably achieve both diversification of gameplay and enhancement of the relief function.

<Variation 1>
The support mode A, triggered by a special miss or reaching the ceiling, may be given preferential treatment to the player, that is, to increase the frequency of winning into the second operating port 92, compared to the support mode B, triggered by a big win.

<Modified Example 2>
The base (benefit) of high-frequency support mode A was initially set to be closer to the base (benefit) of high-frequency support mode B than to the base (benefit) of low-frequency support mode, but this can be changed to be closer to the former. Alternatively, the base (benefit) of high-frequency support mode A may be set to be midway between the base (benefit) of low-frequency support mode and the base (benefit) of high-frequency support mode B.

<Example 3>
The display time for the variable change when the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state may be different from the display time for the variable change when a special miss occurs during the first normal game state. For example, the display time for the variable change when the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state may be set to be longer than the display time for the variable change when a special miss occurs during the first normal game state, or the display time for the variable change when the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state may be set to be shorter than the display time for the variable change when a special miss occurs during the first normal game state.

<Modification 4>
There may be a difference between the support mode of High Frequency Support Mode A triggered by a special miss and the support mode of High Frequency Support Mode A triggered by reaching the ceiling. For example, the support mode of High Frequency Support Mode A triggered by a special miss may be set to have a higher frequency of winning into the second operating port 92 than the support mode of High Frequency Support Mode A triggered by reaching the ceiling, or the support mode of High Frequency Support Mode A triggered by a special miss may be set to have a lower frequency of winning into the second operating port 92 than the support mode of High Frequency Support Mode A triggered by reaching the ceiling.

<Example 5>
The number of times required to terminate a game when a special outcome occurs may be set to be greater than the number of times required to terminate a game when the ceiling is reached, or they may be set to be the same number.

<Modification 6>
The game may also be configured so that the gameplay counter is reset (cleared to 0) when the high-frequency support mode A, which is entered upon reaching the ceiling, ends.

<Example 7>
It is also possible to configure the system so that if another special miss occurs during high-frequency support mode A, which is triggered by a special miss, the continuation count counter is reset (overwritten). However, it is assumed that consecutive special misses will result in fewer games being played in high-frequency support mode A than the number of games that should have been able to continue, which will reduce the player's satisfaction. Therefore, taking these circumstances into consideration, it is best to fix the value set to "40" when a special miss occurs during high-frequency support mode A, which is triggered by a special miss. Specifically, it is best to unify the type of special miss to one and configure the system so that "40" is set to the continuation count counter when that special miss occurs.

<Difference 8>
In the first embodiment described above, the game count counter is reset (cleared to 0) during the transition process at the end of the special game state. However, as long as the game count counter is reset when a jackpot is achieved, the specific timing of the reset is arbitrary. For example, the game count counter can be reset when the game round corresponding to the jackpot is completed, or it can be reset at the start of the special game state or during a round of gameplay.

<Second Embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, if the value of the game count counter reaches its upper limit (the ceiling is reached) during the fourth normal game state, which is in low probability mode and corresponds to high frequency support mode A, the value of the continuation count counter is overwritten with a value triggered by reaching the ceiling (specifically, "400"). When the ceiling is reached, the game is promptly transferred to the fourth normal game state triggered by reaching the ceiling, meaning that the benefits of reaching the ceiling are realized seamlessly without going through other normal game states. In other words, the fourth normal game state related to reaching the ceiling takes precedence over the fourth normal game state related to special misses. In this embodiment, the configuration related to the transition of game states when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state differs from that of the first embodiment. The characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

As shown in the schematic diagram of Figure 49(a), the background color of the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 is blue in high-frequency support mode A, which is triggered by a special miss, and green in high-frequency support mode A, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling. In other words, the trigger for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A can be clearly indicated by the background color of the display screen 95a. In the following description, high-frequency support mode A, which is triggered by a special miss, will be appropriately distinguished as "high-frequency support mode A1," and high-frequency support mode A, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling, will be appropriately distinguished as "high-frequency support mode A2." Incidentally, the support modes of high-frequency support modes A1 and A2 are the same, and the base (the ratio of the number of game balls dispensed to the number of game balls launched) is the same for both, as in the first embodiment.

Here, referring to the schematic diagrams in Figures 49(b) to (c), we will provide a supplementary explanation of the notification flow for the start of high-frequency support mode A.

In game rounds where a special miss occurs and the game transitions to High Frequency Support Mode A1, as shown in Figure 49(b), the symbol combination corresponding to the special miss in that game round is displayed (confirmed) on the display screen 95a. Specifically, after a reach display, the combination of "1", "3", and "4" symbols is displayed (confirmed) on one of the active lines. Then, at the start of the next game round, the background color of the display screen 95a changes from white to blue, and the remaining number of games in High Frequency Support Mode A1 is displayed in the corner of the display screen 95a.

In contrast, in game rounds where the game transitions to High-Frequency Support Mode A2 upon reaching the ceiling, as shown in Figure 49(c), a symbol combination corresponding to reaching the ceiling may be displayed (confirmed) on the display screen 95a during that game round. Specifically, if the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state, a symbol combination including the "CHANCE" symbol will be displayed (confirmed) on any of the active lines via the reach display. In contrast, if the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state corresponding to High-Frequency Support Mode A, a symbol combination corresponding to a complete miss will be displayed (confirmed) without going through the reach display. In this case, the background color of the display screen 95a will also remain blue.

Next, referring to the flowchart in Figure 50, we will explain the support mode switching process that constitutes the game round control process executed as part of the normal processing in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162.

(Processing for switching support modes)
In the support mode switching process, first, in step S2001, it is determined whether the current support mode is high-frequency support mode B. If the result in step S2001 is positive, the process proceeds to step S2002. In step S2002, it is determined whether the count limit flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. If the result in step S2002 is negative, the switching process ends immediately. If the result in step S2002 is positive, the process proceeds to step S2003. In step S2003, the continuation count counter in the various counter area 434 is updated. Specifically, the value of the continuation count counter is decremented by "1". In the following step S2004, it is determined whether the value of the continuation count counter is "0". If the result in step S2004 is negative, the switching process ends immediately. If a positive result is obtained in step S2004, the process proceeds to step S2005, where the high-frequency support mode flag (specifically the high-frequency support mode B flag) and the count limit flag stored in the various flag storage area 435 are cleared, and the switching process ends. When the high-frequency support mode flag is cleared, the support mode switches from high-frequency support mode to low-frequency support mode.

Returning to the explanation of step S2001, if a negative result is obtained in step S2001, the process proceeds to step S2006. In step S2006, it is determined whether the current support mode is high-frequency support mode A. If a positive result is obtained in step S2006, the process proceeds to step S2007. In step S2007, the continuation count counter is updated. Specifically, the value of the continuation count counter is decremented by "1". In the following step S2008, it is determined whether the value of the continuation count counter is "0". If a positive result is obtained in step S2008, the high-frequency support mode flag (high-frequency support mode A flag) and the count limit flag are cleared in step S2005, and this switching process ends. In other words, if the number of games played in high-frequency support mode A reaches the upper limit, the system switches to low-frequency support mode.

If a negative result is obtained in step S2008, the process proceeds to step S2009 to determine whether the game count counter has reached its upper limit (whether the ceiling has been reached). If a negative result is obtained in step S2009, the main switching process ends. If a positive result is obtained in step S2009, the process proceeds to step S2010, where the preparation flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404, and the main switching process ends.

Returning to the explanation of step S2006, if a negative result is obtained in step S2006, the process proceeds to step S2011. In step S2011, it is determined whether the current game round corresponds to a special miss. If it corresponds to a special miss, a positive result is obtained in step S2011, and the process proceeds to step S2012. In step S2012, the high-frequency support mode A flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. In the following step S2013, the count limit flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. Then, after executing the continuation count counter setting process in step S2014, this switching process ends.

In the process of setting the continuation count counter, if the result of the current game is a special miss A, the continuation count counter is set to "20". This ensures that High Frequency Support Mode A1 continues until 20 game rounds have been played during that mode. Conversely, if the result of the current game is a special miss B, the continuation count counter is set to "40". This ensures that High Frequency Support Mode A1 continues until 40 game rounds have been played during that mode.

Returning to the explanation of step S2011, if a negative result is obtained in step S2011, i.e., if it does not correspond to a special miss, the process proceeds to step S2015. In step S2015, it is determined whether the aforementioned preparation flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. If a positive result is obtained in step S2015, the preparation flag is cleared in step S2016, and the processes in steps S2012 to S2014 are executed. In this case, the continuation count counter setting process in step S2014 sets the continuation count counter to "400". As a result, high-frequency support mode A2 will continue until the number of game rounds played during high-frequency support mode A2 reaches 400.

Incidentally, if the above preparation flag remains stored when transitioning to a special game state, the preparation flag will be cleared at the end of that special game state.

Returning to the explanation of step S2015, if a negative result is obtained in step S2015, that is, if the preparation flag is not stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404, the process proceeds to step S2017. In step S2017, it is determined whether the value of the game count counter has reached its upper limit (whether the ceiling has been reached). If a negative result is obtained in step S2017, the switching process ends immediately. If a positive result is obtained in step S2017, the processes of steps S2012 to S2014 are executed, and then this switching process ends. In this step S2014, the continuation count counter is set to "400". As a result, high-frequency support mode A2 will continue until the number of games played during high-frequency support mode A2 reaches 400.

According to the configuration described above, if the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A1, the game will transition to the fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A2 after one game round in the first normal game state. In other words, the game will return to the fourth normal game state after one game round in the first normal game state. Here, even though the return to the fourth normal game state is confirmed, a prolonged game round could give the player the impression that the transition to a favorable state is being unnecessarily delayed. This embodiment features a design that takes this into consideration, aiming to achieve a swift return to the fourth normal game state. This design will be explained below with reference to Figures 51 to 54. First, the setting process for the variable display time (step S714 in Figure 26) executed by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 will be explained with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 51 to 52.

(Setting the variable display time)
In the process of setting the variable display time, first, in step S2101, it is determined whether the current game state is either the first normal game state or the fourth normal game state. If the determination in step S2101 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S2102, where the setting process for the first and fourth normal game states is executed, and then the process of setting the variable display time is terminated. If the determination in step S2101 is negative, then in step S2103, it is determined whether the current game state is the second normal game state. If the determination in step S2103 is affirmative, then in step S2104, the setting process for the second normal game state is executed, and then the process of setting the variable display time is terminated. If the determination in step S2103 is negative, that is, if the current game state is the third normal game state, then in step S2105, the setting process for the third normal game state is executed, and then the process of setting the variable display time is terminated. Now, referring to Figure 52, the setting processes for the first and fourth normal game states will be explained.

(Setting process for the 1st and 4th normal game states)
In the setting process for the first and fourth normal game states, first, in step S2201, it is determined whether the current game round corresponds to a jackpot. If the determination in step S2201 is positive, the setting process for jackpots is executed in step S2202, and then the setting process for the first and fourth normal game states is terminated. In the process of step S2202, the variable display time for the current game round is determined by referring to the variable display time table for jackpots (see Figure 28) stored in the variable display time table storage area 423 of ROM 403.

If a negative result is obtained in step S2201, the process proceeds to step S2203. In step S2203, it is determined whether the current game round corresponds to a special miss. If a positive result is obtained in step S2203, the process proceeds to step S2204 to execute the special miss setting process, and then the setting process for the first and fourth normal game states is terminated. In step S2204, the variable display time for the current game round is determined by referring to the variable display time table for special misses (see Figure 27) stored in the variable display time table storage area 423 of the ROM 403.

If a negative result is obtained in step S2203, the process proceeds to step S2205. In step S2205, it is determined whether the current game round will result in reaching the ceiling. If a positive result is obtained in step S2205, the ceiling reach setting process is executed in step S2206, and then the setting process for the first and fourth normal game states is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S2005, if a negative result is obtained in step S2005, the process proceeds to step S2207. In step S2207, it is determined whether or not the preparation flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. If a positive result is obtained in step S2207, the continuous transition setting process is executed in step S2208, and then the setting process for the first and fourth normal game states is terminated. If a negative result is obtained in step S2207, the complete loss setting process is executed in step S2209, and then the setting process for the first and fourth normal game states is terminated.

Here, in steps S2206 and S2208, the variable display time table corresponding to the normal deviation is referenced; however, this variable display time table is provided individually depending on the presence or absence of the preparation flag. Further explanation of these variable display time tables will be provided below with reference to Figures 53 and 54.

If the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state, which is in low probability mode and low frequency support mode, and the preparation flag is not stored, the fluctuation display time for the activation display unit will be set to "20 to 30 seconds," which corresponds to the fluctuation display time for the reach display. In other words, if the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state, the symbol combination indicating the ceiling has been reached (see Figure 49(c)) will be displayed (confirmed) on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 after the reach display.

On the other hand, if the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode A1) while the preparation flag is not stored, the display time for the activation indicator is set to the same as the display time for a complete miss (see Figure 27). During this game round, symbols other than those corresponding to reaching the ceiling, specifically the symbol combinations corresponding to a complete miss, will be displayed. In other words, the "CHANCE" symbol will not be included in the displayed symbols. This configuration makes it difficult to identify reaching the ceiling during the fourth normal game state from the symbol combinations or the display time (display pattern) of the symbols.

If the game transitions to the first normal game state (corresponding to low probability mode and low frequency support mode) while the preparation flag is stored, and the game result is neither a jackpot nor a special miss (a normal miss), then "3 seconds" is set as the display time for the operation indicator. This display time matches the shortest possible display time for a complete miss in the first normal game state (see Figure 27). In other words, if the ceiling is reached and the preparation flag is stored during the fourth normal game state, the game will return to the fourth normal game state via the first normal game state after the fourth normal game state ends, but the duration of time spent in the first normal game state is suppressed to prevent it from becoming excessively long.

Furthermore, during the fourth normal game state, the game may repeat with the preparation flag still stored. In such cases, the displayed variation time will be the same as the displayed variation time set during game rounds where the preparation flag is not stored (see Figures 27 and 53).

(Flow of continuous transitions)
Next, referring to the timing chart in Figure 55, we will explain the behavior when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state, which is in low probability mode and corresponds to high frequency support mode A1.

At the timing of TB1 after transitioning to the fourth normal game state following a special miss, the 299th game round since the end of the special game state has begun. In the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss, the background color of the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 is blue.

At the subsequent timing of tb2, the 300th game round after the end of the special game state has begun, and at the timing of tb3, the symbol combination corresponding to this 300th game round is displayed as confirmed. Since the game is currently in the 4th normal game state, the symbol combination displayed (confirmed) is not the one corresponding to reaching the ceiling, but rather the one corresponding to a complete miss (normal miss). In the example shown in Figure 55, even in the game round that started at the timing of tb2, the number of rounds (upper limit) for ending the 4th normal game state has not been reached, so the 4th normal game state continues and the above preparation flag is stored.

Even for game rounds started at timing tb4, the number of rounds required to terminate (upper limit) will not be reached, and the aforementioned blue background will be maintained. However, after the end of the fourth normal game state, a message ("STANDBY") indicating a return to the fourth normal game state will be displayed at the top of the display screen 95a, and the counter showing the remaining number of rounds will be hidden.

At timing tb5, the final game round that reaches the termination threshold in the current fourth normal game state begins. In the example shown in Figure 55, this game round corresponds to a complete miss (normal miss), and at timing tb6, when the display of confirmed symbols and patterns is complete, the game transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state, and a new game round begins. Although this game round corresponds to the first normal game state, the background color of the display screen 95a remains blue, and the word "STANDBY" displayed at the top of the display screen 95a also remains displayed. At timing tb7, when a predetermined amount of time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the display screen 95a blacks out. Then, at timing tb8, when the confirmation display begins, the symbol combination corresponding to reaching the ceiling is displayed (reduced) in the upper corner of the display screen 95a, and the words "Entering Super Chance Zone" are displayed in the center of the display screen 95a as a message indicating the transition to the fourth normal game state triggered by reaching the ceiling.

At the timing of tb9, after the confirmation display time has elapsed, the game state transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state, which is a low-probability mode and corresponds to high-frequency support mode A2. Accordingly, the background color of the display screen 95a changes from blue to green.

According to the second embodiment described in detail above, even if the game progresses without a trigger for transitioning to the special game state (jackpot result) being established, the game may transition to the fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A due to a special miss result or reaching the ceiling. By entering high-frequency support mode A, the frequency of winning into the second operation port 92 increases, and investment is suppressed. Such a configuration is desirable in order to improve the soundness of the game. However, as mentioned above, if a special miss result and reaching the ceiling are used in combination as triggers for transitioning to the fourth normal game state, the following concerns arise. That is, if the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state and the ceiling is invalidated, or if the fourth normal game state is forcibly terminated due to a special miss result, it is feared that some of the benefits that the player would have originally enjoyed will be lost, and the player's satisfaction will decrease significantly. In this embodiment, if the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state, the transition to the fourth normal game state triggered by reaching the ceiling will be delayed until at least the number of game rounds played in that fourth normal game state reaches the termination threshold. This eliminates the above concerns and contributes to improving player satisfaction.

As described above, when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state and the game transitions to the fourth normal game state as a result of reaching the ceiling, the behavior (switching pattern) of the electric mechanism 93 can be made identical to prevent the benefits of reaching the ceiling from being less significant compared to the previous behavior.

If the above delay function is present, it is assumed that if the benefits of reaching the ceiling end immediately after a significant delay, it could diminish the player's motivation to play. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, by setting the number of termination criteria related to special misses < the second termination criteria related to reaching the ceiling, excessive delays can be suppressed, and the impression that the benefits after reaching the ceiling are insignificant can be avoided.

If the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state, the system is configured to transition from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state, and then return to the fourth normal game state. This adds emphasis to the rhythm of the game and helps prevent it from becoming monotonous.

In a configuration where the game returns to the fourth normal game state via the first normal game state, variations in the duration of the game-specific actions performed during the first normal game state can lead to the following problems. Specifically, if the action duration is relatively short, there may be insufficient time to inform the player of the transition to the fourth normal game state. If the action duration is relatively long, it may give the player the impression that the transition to the fourth normal game state is being unfairly delayed. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, for game rounds during the first normal game state where the transition to the fourth normal game state is delayed, a predetermined action duration is set regardless of the number of reserved balls. By making the action duration constant, the above concerns can be resolved.

As shown in this embodiment, if a jackpot occurs while a transition to the fourth normal game state triggered by reaching the ceiling is imminent, the transition to the fourth normal game state triggered by reaching the ceiling is invalidated. Such a configuration is preferable in preventing excessive relief functions for the player.

If the maximum number of spins (ceiling) is reached during the first game state, a special animation (stop display of the combination of "3", "1", and "4" symbols) is executed during that spin, promptly informing the player that the game will transition to the fourth normal game state. Conversely, if the maximum number of spins (ceiling) is reached during the fourth normal game state, the special animation (stop display of the combination of "3", "1", and "4" symbols) is avoided during that spin. In this way, by deliberately omitting the special animation when the transition to the fourth normal game state triggered by reaching the ceiling is delayed, it is possible to prevent a decrease in attention to the fourth normal game state, which was transitioned to after a special miss, before the end of that fourth normal game state.

<Variation 1>
In the second embodiment described above, if the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A1, the game transitions to the fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A2 via the first normal game state. In other words, the fourth normal game state is continuous with one game round corresponding to the first normal game state in between. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and may be changed as follows. That is, if the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A1, the game may transition immediately to the fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A2 without going through the first normal game state after the end of the fourth normal game state. In other words, the fourth normal game state may be continued without interruption. Even in this case, since high-frequency support mode A1 is not forcibly terminated midway due to a special miss (high-frequency support mode A1 can be completed), the player's satisfaction does not decrease.

<Modified Example 2>
In the second embodiment described above, the background color of the display screen 95a is set to be different for the fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A1 and the fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A2, but the invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to set the background color to be the same in both fourth normal game states.

<Example 3>
In the second embodiment described above, if the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A1, the system is configured to start displaying a message suggesting the continuation of the fourth normal game state in the next game round. However, it is also possible to configure the system to start displaying the message in the game round in which the ceiling is reached. Furthermore, it is also possible to configure the system to not suggest the continuation of the fourth normal game state, either by displaying a message suggesting the continuation of the fourth normal game state from the game round in which the ceiling is reached or the next game round. In other words, it is possible to keep the transition to the fourth normal game state triggered by reaching the ceiling unspecified until the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss ends.

<Modification 4>
If the game transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state while the electric mechanism 93 is in the open state, the electric mechanism 93 may be configured to switch to the closed state after the initially set opening time for the electric mechanism 93 has elapsed, or the electric mechanism 93 may be configured to quickly switch to the closed state in order to immediately stop the opening.

<Example 5>
In the second embodiment described above, when transitioning from the fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A1 to the fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A2 via the first normal game state, the display time for the changes in the symbols on the operation port display unit and the symbol display device 95 in the first normal game state is set to be shorter than the display time for the changes in the symbols on the through gate display unit DS set during low-frequency support mode (10 to 20 seconds). However, the embodiment is not limited to this. When transitioning from the fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A1 to the fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A2 via the first normal game state, it is also possible to set a longer time for the changes in the symbols on the operation port display unit and the symbol display device 95 in the first normal game state than the display time for the changes in the symbols on the through gate display unit DS set during low-frequency support mode (10 to 20 seconds).

<Modification 6>
In the second embodiment described above, when transitioning from a fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A1 to a fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A2 via a first normal game state, the display time for the symbols on the display unit for the operation port and the symbol display device 95 in the first normal game state is set to "3 seconds," which is the display time for a complete miss. However, the embodiment is not limited to this. For example, when transitioning from a fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A1 to a fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A2 via a first normal game state, the display time for the symbols on the display unit for the operation port and the symbol display device 95 in the first normal game state is set to "30 to 40 seconds," which is the display time for a reach.

<Example 7>
In the second embodiment described above, if the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state, the game is configured to transition to the first normal game state once the number of game rounds in the fourth normal game state reaches the termination threshold, and then return to the fourth normal game state. In this case, the number of game rounds performed during the first normal game state is set to one, but the game is not limited to this. It is sufficient that the number of game rounds performed during the first game state is defined to be at least below the upper limit of the number of reserves that can be stored (preferably the upper limit of the number of reserves related to the second operation port 92).

As shown in this modified example, when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state, the system transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state and then returns to the fourth normal game state. This configuration adds emphasis to the rhythm of the game and helps prevent monotony. Furthermore, in a configuration that includes the first normal game state, the repeated game rounds in the first normal game state may give the player the impression that the enjoyment of benefits is being unfairly delayed. This impression is particularly strong when the number of stored special information rounds becomes zero due to the intervention of the first normal game state, interrupting the continuous progression of game rounds. In this regard, by limiting the number of game rounds performed in the intervening first normal game state to be less than the upper limit of stored special information, the interruption of the continuous progression of game rounds upon return to the fourth normal game state can be avoided, effectively eliminating the above concern.

<Difference 8>
The system may be configured to perform a special effect when the number of game rounds played after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling: for example, 400 rounds) without resulting in a jackpot, thereby enabling a special effect to be performed to indicate a transition to the fourth normal game state. If the upper limit is reached during the fourth normal game state and the number of game rounds played during that fourth normal game state is greater than a predetermined number, the special effect is performed during the game round in which the upper limit is reached. On the other hand, if the upper limit is reached during the fourth normal game state and the number of game rounds played during that fourth normal game state is less than the predetermined number, the special effect is performed during a game round played after the game round in which the upper limit is reached.

If the maximum number of spins (ceiling) is reached during the fourth normal game state, which is triggered by a special miss result, the timing of this can affect the player's impression. For example, if the ceiling is reached immediately after the transition, it may give the impression that the special miss result was wasted. Therefore, as shown in this modified example, if the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state, the timing of the special effect, i.e., the timing of the ceiling reach notification, can be varied according to the number of spins played during that fourth normal game state (the number of spins played up to that point), thereby eliminating the above concern.

<Third Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the gameplay using the special mechanism described above differs from that of the first and second embodiments. Below, the characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be described, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. First, the differences in the basic configuration of the game board unit will be explained with reference to Figure 56. Figure 56 is a front view of the game board unit.

(Game board unit)
In the first embodiment described above, the game board unit 80 (game board 80a) had a symmetrical gauge (see Figure 6), but in this embodiment, the game board unit 80A (game board 80aA) has an asymmetrical gauge. The game board 80aA will be described in detail below.

The game board 80aA has multiple openings of varying sizes that penetrate its own thickness (front-to-back direction). Each opening is equipped with a general prize entry point 81, an operating port unit 82A, a variable prize entry device 83A, a through gate 84A, and the like. When game balls flow into the general prize entry point 81, the operating port unit 82A, or the variable prize entry device 83A, these balls are detected by detection sensors (not shown) provided corresponding to each entry point, and based on the detection results, the player is awarded a predetermined number of prize balls (dispensing of game balls) or other benefits. Additionally, an out port 86 is provided at the bottom of the game board 80aA, and game balls that do not enter the various entry points are discharged from the game area PE through the out port 86.

Furthermore, the game board 80aA is equipped with numerous game pins 87 to appropriately distribute and adjust the flow path of the game balls, as well as various components (mechanisms) such as windmills. These various configurations, including the game pins 87 and windmills, differentiate the flow path of the game balls, adjusting them so that winning into the general prize winning slots 81, etc., occurs with a reasonable probability.

The operating port unit 82A, similar to the operating port unit 82 shown in the first embodiment, is composed of a first operating port 91A and a second operating port 92A disposed directly below the first operating port 91A. In particular, the second operating port 92A is equipped with an electrically operated mechanism 93A, which serves as an open/close ball entry assist device (ball entry assist means) or an open/close member (open/close means).

The game board 80aA is provided with a center frame 96A surrounding the display screen 95aA of the pattern display device 95A. The center frame 96A protrudes from the front of the game board 80aA, and, similar to the first embodiment described above, the flow path of the game balls flowing down the game area PE is broadly divided into a route that bypasses the center frame 96A from the right and a route that bypasses it from the left.

However, in this embodiment, the arrangement of the first operation port 91A, second operation port 92A, variable prize device 83A, and through gate 84A has been modified so that game balls launched along the left route can enter the first operation port 91A and the second operation port 92A, but cannot enter the variable prize device 83A and the through gate 84A. Similarly, game balls launched along the right route can enter the second operation port 92A, the through gate 84A, and the variable prize device 83A, but cannot enter the first operation port 91A. It is also possible to configure the system so that game balls launched along the left route cannot enter the second operation port 92A.

By switching the launch route of the game ball between the right and left routes depending on the game state, it becomes possible to gain an advantage in the game. This encouragement of skillful play helps to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

(Retained ball storage area)
Furthermore, in this embodiment, the configuration for storing hold information based on winning entries into the operating ports 91A and 92A differs from that of the first embodiment. The configuration for storing hold information in this embodiment will now be described with reference to the schematic diagram in Figure 57.

The ball storage area 432A shown in this embodiment includes a first operation port storage area Ra that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 when a ball enters the first operation port 91A, and a second operation port storage area Rb that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 when a ball enters the second operation port 92A.

The first operation port's hold area Ra consists of four areas (Area 1 to Area 4). When multiple consecutive entries occur into the first operation port 91A, the numerical information is stored chronologically in the order of Area 1 → Area 2 → Area 3 → Area 4. Similarly, the second operation port's hold area Rb consists of four areas (Area 1 to Area 4). When multiple consecutive entries occur into the second operation port 92A, the numerical information (hold information) is stored chronologically in the order of Area 1 → Area 2 → Area 3 → Area 4.

In this embodiment, if hold information is stored in the second operation port hold area Rb, the system is configured to preferentially move the hold information stored in the second operation port hold area Rb (specifically, the first area) to the execution area AE. Furthermore, if no hold information is stored in the second operation port hold area Rb, but hold information is stored in the first operation port hold area Ra, the system is configured to move the hold information stored in the first operation port hold area Ra (specifically, the first area) to the execution area AE.

In the first embodiment described above, the lottery based on winning entries into the first operating port 91 and the second operating port 92 was configured to result in a special loss. However, this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that only one of the lottery entries based on winning entries into the first operating port 91 and the second operating port 92 is configured to result in a special loss. The winning/losing table for the operating ports in this embodiment will now be described with reference to Figures 58 and 59.

(Validity table for the operating port)
As shown in Figure 58, the win/loss tables for the first operating port include a win/loss table for the low probability mode (low probability win/loss information group) and a win/loss table for the high probability mode (high probability win/loss information group).

In situations where the win/loss table for low probability mode (Figure 58(a)) is referenced during the lottery based on winning at the first operating port 91A, the random number values that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) are a total of 6: "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507". In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to jackpot results. On the other hand, in situations where the win/loss table for high probability mode (Figure 58(b)) is referenced during the lottery, the random number values that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) are a total of 30: "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107"... "597". In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 ranging from "0 to 599", "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107"... "597" correspond to the jackpot results. All random number values that do not correspond to the jackpot correspond to the losing results (normal losing results). Therefore, in the lottery based on the entry into the first operating port 91A, the configuration prevents the "special losing" described in the first embodiment.

As shown in Figure 59, the win/loss tables for the second operation port consist of a win/loss table for the low probability mode (low probability win/loss information group) and a win/loss table for the high probability mode (high probability win/loss information group).

When the lottery is conducted based on a win in the second operating port 92A, the win/loss table for low probability mode (Figure 59(a)) is referenced, and the random numbers that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) are a total of 6: "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507". In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to jackpot results. On the other hand, when the win/loss table for high probability mode (Figure 59(b)) is referenced during the lottery, the random numbers that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) are a total of 30: "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107"... "597". In other words, among the values of the random number counter C1, which ranges from 0 to 599, "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107"... "597" correspond to the jackpot results.

Furthermore, in situations where the win/loss tables for low probability mode and high probability mode are referenced during the prize draw based on the entry into the second operating port 92A, the random number values that result in a special loss (i.e., special loss information) are all "2", "4", "6", "12", "14"... "596", totaling 150 values. In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "2", "4", "6", "12", "14"... "596" correspond to special loss results. And all random number values that do not correspond to either a big win or a special loss correspond to a loss result (normal loss result).

(How to play the game)
Now, with reference to Figure 60, we will explain the game flow. Figure 60 is a block diagram showing the relationships between each game state.

The first normal game state, which corresponds to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode, consists of a main stage and a special stage (mission stage). The main stage is the stage where the player stays when a game round is executed based on a win at the first operation port 91A, and the special stage is the stage where the player stays when a game round is executed based on a win at the second operation port 92A.

The special stage is a temporary stage where the player stays when transitioning from other normal game states compatible with high-frequency support mode—specifically, the third normal game state compatible with low-probability mode and high-frequency support mode B, or the fourth normal game state compatible with low-probability mode and high-frequency support mode A—to the first normal game state. The maximum number of game rounds that can be played in this stage matches the maximum number of reserved information stored in the second operation port's reserved area Rb. In other words, immediately after transitioning from the third or fourth normal game state to the first normal game state, the player moves to the special stage, provided that reserved information related to the second operation port 92A is stored. If neither a jackpot nor a special miss occurs in this special stage, the player moves from the special stage to the main stage.

As described above, the first normal game state corresponds to the low-frequency support mode. Therefore, even if a support is triggered by launching a game ball to the right route, entry into the second operation port 92A is effectively avoided. Furthermore, since game balls launched to the right route cannot enter the first operation port 91A, it becomes difficult to participate in the lottery based on entry into operation ports 91A and 92A. On the other hand, while game balls launched to the left route avoid entry into the second operation port 92A, entry into the first operation port 91A is possible. For these reasons, in the first normal game state, aiming for the left route is more advantageous to the player than aiming for the right route. Note that if a game ball is launched to the right route during the first game state, a warning will be issued prompting the player to return to the left route.

If a 6R probability-changing jackpot is achieved during the lottery in the first normal game state, the game transitions to the second normal game state, which is a high-probability mode and corresponds to high-frequency support mode B, via a special game state. The second normal game state corresponds to high-frequency support mode B, allowing players to play while minimizing investment (decrease in remaining balls) by launching game balls to the right route. During the second normal game state, game balls launched to the right route enter the second operation port 92A, and the game progresses primarily through the rounds related to the second operation port 92A. As mentioned above, there is approximately a 1/4 probability of a special miss in the lottery based on entry into the second operation port 92A, but special misses during the second normal game state are invalid and treated as normal misses. In other words, even if a special miss occurs during the second normal game state, it will not trigger a transition to the fourth normal game state, which is a low-probability mode and corresponds to high-frequency support mode A.

If a 6R regular jackpot is achieved during the lottery in the first or second normal game state, the game transitions to a special game state and then to a third normal game state, which is a low-probability mode and corresponds to high-frequency support mode B. The third normal game state corresponds to high-frequency support mode B, allowing players to reduce their investment (decrease in balls) by launching game balls along the right route.

During the third normal game state, game balls launched via the right route enter the second operation port 92A, and the game progresses primarily through the rounds related to the second operation port 92A. As mentioned above, the lottery based on balls entering the second operation port 92A has a probability of approximately 1/4 resulting in a special miss. However, special misses during the third normal game state are invalid and treated as normal misses. In other words, even if a special miss occurs during the third normal game state, it will not trigger a transition to the fourth normal game state, which corresponds to the low-probability mode and high-frequency support mode A.

If the game progresses without a jackpot during the third normal game state, and the number of game rounds played (specifically, the game rounds related to the second operation port 92A) reaches the termination threshold (20 rounds), the game transitions to the first normal game state. Specifically, if the number of reserved balls related to the second operation port 92A is "0", the game transitions to the main stage; if the number of reserved balls related to the second operation port 92A is anything other than "0", the game transitions to the special stage.

In the special stage, a lottery based on ball entry into the second operation port 92A is performed for the number of reserved balls. If the lottery based on ball entry into the second operation port 92A results in a special miss, the game transitions to the fourth normal game state, which is a low-probability mode and corresponds to high-frequency support mode A. During the fourth normal game state, players can play while minimizing investment (decrease in remaining balls) by firing game balls to the right route. During the fourth normal game state, game balls fired to the right route enter the second operation port 92A, and the game progresses mainly with the number of game rounds related to the second operation port 92A. As mentioned above, the lottery based on ball entry into the second operation port 92A has a probability of approximately 1/4 of resulting in a special miss, but special misses during the fourth normal game state are invalid and treated as normal misses.

If the game progresses without a jackpot during the fourth normal game state, and the number of game rounds played (specifically, the game rounds related to the second operation port 92A) reaches the termination threshold (20 rounds), the game transitions to the first normal game state. Specifically, if the number of reserved balls related to the second operation port 92A is "0", the game transitions to the main stage; if the number of reserved balls related to the second operation port 92A is anything other than "0", the game transitions to the special stage. In this way, if the game can be looped between the fourth normal game state and the special stage, the player can gain an advantage in the game.

Here, when transitioning from the third or fourth normal game state to the first normal game state, the degree of advantage changes significantly depending on the number of reserved balls related to the second operation port 92A. In this embodiment, in the final game round of the third or fourth normal game state, the display time of the changing symbols on the display unit D2 for the second operation port is made longer than in other game rounds of the third and fourth normal game states. This configuration makes it easier to accumulate the maximum number of reserved balls related to the second operation port 92A during the final game round.

(Fluctuating display time table for the operating port)
Specifically, as shown in Figure 61(a), the variable display time table for the second operation slot, which is referenced in the 20th game round in the third normal game state, is configured to be set to "40 sec" as the variable display time regardless of the number of reserved balls. In contrast, the variable display time tables for the second operation slot, which are referenced in each of the 1st to 19th game rounds in the third normal game state, are configured so that in all cases the variable display time set is shorter than that of the 20th game round. For example, as shown in Figure 61(b), in the case of a non-reach display miss (special miss or normal miss), "12 to 14 sec" or "1 to 2 sec" is set depending on the number of reserved balls, and in the case of a reach display miss (special miss or normal miss), "20 to 30 sec" is set. On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot, as shown in Figure 61(c), "20 to 30 sec" is set regardless of the number of reserved balls.

In this way, by configuring the system so that the display time for the variation is extended in the 20th and final game round compared to the 1st to 19th game rounds, it is possible to reduce the chances of transitioning (demoting) from the third normal game state to the first normal game state without the number of reserved balls related to the second operation port 92A reaching the memory limit.

Furthermore, the variable display time table for the second operation slot, which is referenced during the first normal game state, is broadly divided into two tables: one referenced for special misses and normal misses, and another referenced for jackpots. In the variable display time table for special misses and normal misses referenced during the first normal game state, the variable display time is set to "10 seconds" when the number of reserved balls is "0," and to "0.5 seconds" when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "4." In the variable display time table for jackpots referenced during the first normal game state, the variable display time is set to "20 to 30 seconds" for every game round, regardless of the number of reserved balls or the game result.

Next, referring to Figure 62, the sequence of events when transitioning to the fourth normal game state will be explained. Figure 62 illustrates a case where, during the third normal game state, the game reached the termination threshold without a jackpot, and the remaining reserved balls related to the second operation port 92A include a special miss.

In the third normal game state, the background color of the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 is blue, and the remaining number of games for which the high-frequency support mode will continue is displayed in the upper corner of the display screen 95a. At the timing of tc1, when the 19th game round related to the second operation port 92A begins, the number of reserved balls decreases from "4" to "3," and at the timing of tc2, when the 20th game round (final game round) begins, the number of reserved balls decreases from "3" to "2."

When the final game round begins, a video of the loop branching sequence is displayed on screen 95a. At the beginning of this video, "Mission: Catch the Fairy" is displayed, followed by the display of a fairy character and a girl character. As described above, the display time for the final game round is longer than that for the 1st to 19th game rounds. This makes it easier for balls to enter the second operation slot 92A during the final game round. In the example in Figure 62, balls enter the second operation slot 92A consecutively at timings tc3 and tc4, and the number of reserved balls related to the second operation slot 92A reaches its memory limit before the end of the final game round.

In this embodiment, the loop branching animation is a series of animations that are executed across the final game round in the third normal game state and the game rounds executed during the special stage in the first normal game state. If the final game round corresponds to a jackpot, and the game rounds executed during the special stage correspond to either a special miss or a jackpot, the animation of successful fairy capture is executed. If the final game round corresponds to either a special miss or a normal miss, and all game rounds executed during the special stage correspond to normal misses, the animation of failed fairy capture is executed.

In the example shown in Figure 62, at the timing of tc5, when the confirmed symbol display on the second operation slot display unit D2 is executed during the final spin in the third normal game state, the animation for successfully capturing the fairy is performed. Afterward, the word "STANDBY" is displayed on the display screen 95a as a message indicating a transition to the normal game state (fourth normal game state) compatible with the high-frequency support mode, until the special stage is completed. During this time, the game state transitions from the third normal game state to the first normal game state.

Furthermore, if the electric mechanism 93A is in the open state when transitioning from the third normal game state to the first normal game state, the electric mechanism 93A will be forcibly switched to the closed state, thereby preventing the ball from entering the second operating opening 92A after the transition to the first normal game state.

At timing TC7, the game round corresponding to the special miss begins, and at timing TC8, the symbol combination corresponding to the special miss is confirmed and displayed. Then, at timing TC9, the game transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A. In this fourth normal game state, the background color of display screen 95a turns blue, and the loop count of the high-frequency support mode and the remaining number of games are displayed at the top of display screen 95a.

Subsequently, if the final spin of the fourth normal game state (corresponding to High Frequency Support Mode A) is reached without a jackpot, the game transitions to the first normal game state (corresponding to Low Probability Mode and Low Frequency Support Mode). Specifically, the game transitions to a special stage provided that the reserves related to the second operation port 92A are stored. Even when transitioning from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state, the above-mentioned loop branching animation (specifically, a video with some parts of the fairy and girl chase scene omitted) will be executed across the final spin of the fourth normal game state and each spin performed in the special stage of the first normal game state.

According to the third embodiment described in detail above, if a normal jackpot result occurs in the first normal game state, the game transitions to a third normal game state, which is a low-probability mode and corresponds to high-frequency support mode B, via a special game state. In the third normal game state, the electric mechanism 93A frequently switches to the open state, increasing the opportunities for balls to enter the second operating port 92A and suppressing the reduction of the player's ball count. The third normal game state has a limit on the number of times it can be played. When the number of game rounds played in the third normal game state reaches the first termination threshold (20 rounds), the game transitions to the first normal game state, which corresponds to low-frequency support mode. This makes it difficult for balls to enter the second operating port 92A.

Here, the reserved information obtained based on the entry into the second operation port 92A is stored in the reserved area Rb for the second operation port. After transitioning from the third normal game state to the first normal game state, the game rounds are executed based on the stored reserved information. The remaining game rounds related to the second operation port 92A may result in a special miss. If a special miss occurs in these remaining game rounds, the game transitions to the fourth normal game state, which is a low-probability mode and corresponds to high-frequency support mode A, without going through a special game state, and the high-frequency switching mode loops. This loop makes it possible to aim for a jackpot while minimizing the reduction of remaining balls. By diversifying the gameplay in this way, it is possible to contribute to increasing the player's interest in the game.

As described above, when transitioning from the third or fourth normal game state to the first normal game state, the number of game rounds related to the second operation port 92A is executed, up to the number of reserved information stored in the second operation port reserve area Rb. In the lottery based on winning into the second operation port 92A, the probability of a special miss (1/4) is higher than the probability of a jackpot (1/100), making it possible to aim for a jackpot while looping the high-frequency support mode described above. With this configuration, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game without unnecessarily increasing the probability of a jackpot.

During the third and fourth normal game states, if a special loss occurs, that result is invalidated. However, if a special loss occurs during the remaining game rounds related to the second operation port 92A when transitioning from the third and fourth normal game states to the first normal game state, that special loss triggers a transition to the fourth normal game state or a loop in the fourth normal game state. With this configuration, the presence or absence of the loop depends on the maximum number of reserved information stored related to the second operation port 92A. Therefore, when adjusting the advantage by increasing or decreasing the number of rounds required to terminate in the third and fourth normal game states, it is possible to avoid affecting the loop probability and to suitably improve the flexibility in setting the number of rounds required to terminate.

In high-frequency support mode A, the opening and closing pattern of the electric mechanism 93A is closer to that of high-frequency support mode B than to that of low-frequency support mode. This configuration is preferable in encouraging the player to perceive the game states before and after the first normal game state as being identical, when the game progresses from the third normal game state to the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state. In particular, the number of turns required to terminate the game in the fourth normal game state (20 turns) is the same as the number of turns required to terminate the game in the third normal game state (20 turns). This configuration effectively facilitates the aforementioned perception.

Immediately after transitioning from the third or fourth normal game state to the first normal game state, the remaining reserved game rounds related to the second operation port 92A are executed. If a special loss occurs during these game rounds, the game transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state. Here, as shown in this embodiment, in the third and fourth normal game states, it is possible to determine in advance whether the remaining reserved game rounds will result in a special loss, and by performing a continuation animation based on that result, the level of attention given to whether or not the aforementioned loop occurs can be increased.

The aforementioned pre-identification (prior identification) is performed when transitioning from the third and fourth normal game states to the first normal game state, specifically during the final game round in those third and fourth normal game states. By configuring the system to perform this identification during the final game round in the third and fourth normal game states, the continuation animation is executed when the number of reserved information stored in the second operation port's reserved area Rb reaches its storage limit. This effectively allows the continuation animation to suggest the continuation of the loop.

Furthermore, by configuring the game to initiate the continuation animation before the aforementioned pre-determination during the final game round in the third and fourth normal game states, the constraints on the execution period of the continuation animation can be relaxed, and the obsolescence of the continuation animation can be effectively suppressed.

<Variation 1>
In the third embodiment described above, a configuration was used in which a special miss in certain game states (for example, the second normal game state) is invalidated and treated as a normal miss, but the invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the game so that the lottery for special misses is not performed at all, for example, by referring to a win/loss table that does not include special misses in the game results.

<Modified Example 2>
In the third embodiment described above, the number of rounds required to terminate in the third game state (20 rounds) and the number of rounds required to terminate in the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss (20 rounds) were set to be the same. However, the embodiment is not limited to this, and the number of rounds required to terminate in the third game state and the number of rounds required to terminate in the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss may be set to be different.

For example, the number of spins required to terminate the game in the third game state (40 spins) may be set to be greater than the number of spins required to terminate the game in the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss (20 spins). Alternatively, the number of spins required to terminate the game in the third game state (20 spins) may be set to be less than the number of spins required to terminate the game in the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss (40 spins).

<Example 3>
In the third embodiment described above, the display time for the change in the number of game rounds related to the second operation port 92A in the first normal game state is set to "0.5 sec" regardless of the number of reserved balls or the game result, but the embodiment is not limited to this. The display time for the change in the number of game rounds related to the second operation port 92A in the first normal game state may also be set according to the number of reserved balls and the game result, similar to the display time for the change in the number of game rounds related to the first operation port 91A.

<Modification 4>
In the third embodiment described above, the display time for the final game round in the third normal game state is extended to prevent the number of reserved balls related to the second operation port 92A from falling below the upper limit when transitioning to the first normal game state. However, the following configuration is also possible, either as an alternative or in addition. That is, when transitioning from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state, the display time for the final game round in the fourth normal game state is extended to prevent the number of reserved balls related to the second operation port 92A from falling below the upper limit when transitioning to the first normal game state.

<Example 5>
In the third embodiment described above, the loop branching effect is executed across the third normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode B and the first normal game state. However, it is also possible to configure the loop branching effect to be executed across the third normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode B, the first normal game state, and the third normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A. By increasing the execution time of the effect in this way, it is possible to enhance the loop branching effect while quickly transitioning to the third normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, when the number of games played at the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling) (when the ceiling is reached), the system transitions to the fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A. This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that it has a configuration that simulates variable ceiling. The configuration related to the simulated variable function in this embodiment will be explained below, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. First, with reference to Figure 63, the distribution table for special misses in this embodiment will be explained.

(Distribution table for special exceptions)
In the distribution table for special misses in this embodiment, special miss result A, special miss result B, and special miss result C are set as destinations for the game result. Specifically, of the values of the type counter C2 from "0 to 29", "0 to 23" correspond to special miss result A, "24 to 28" correspond to special miss result B, and "29" corresponds to special miss result C.

Special failure results A through C do not serve as triggers for switching between lottery modes, but rather function as triggers for switching between support modes.

Specifically, special loss result A triggers a switch to high-frequency support mode A after the end of the game round in which special loss result A occurred, that is, a trigger for transitioning to the fourth normal game state. This high-frequency support mode A ends when the number of games played during high-frequency support mode A reaches the termination threshold, or when a jackpot result occurs before reaching the termination threshold (specifically, when transitioning to a special game state), and the system switches to low-frequency support mode (transitioning to the first normal game state). In this embodiment, the termination threshold is set to "20 times".

Regarding special failure result B, the end of the game round in which this special failure result B occurred triggers a switch to high-frequency support mode A, i.e., a transition to the fourth normal game state. This high-frequency support mode A terminates when the number of games played during high-frequency support mode A reaches the termination threshold, or when a jackpot result occurs before reaching the termination threshold (specifically, when transitioning to a special game state), and switches to low-frequency support mode (transitioning to the first normal game state). In this embodiment, the termination threshold is set to "40 times".

Regarding the special miss result C, the end of the game round in which this special miss result C occurred triggers a switch to high-frequency support mode A, i.e., a transition to the fourth normal game state. This high-frequency support mode A terminates when the number of games played during high-frequency support mode A reaches the termination threshold, or when a jackpot result occurs before reaching the termination threshold (specifically, when transitioning to a special game state), and switches to low-frequency support mode (transitioning to the first normal game state). In this embodiment, the termination threshold is set to "260 times".

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the ceiling is set to 300 spins, and the upper limit for the number of spins in the third normal game state is 40 spins. In other words, the number of spins set as the termination criteria when special failure result A occurs, and the number of spins set as the termination criteria when special failure result B occurs, are both less than the maximum number of spins performed in the first normal game state before reaching the ceiling. Conversely, the number of spins set as the termination criteria when special failure result C occurs is the same as the maximum number of spins performed in the first normal game state before reaching the ceiling.

Furthermore, the number of games played before termination in special failure result C can be set to be greater than the maximum number of games played in the first normal game state before reaching the ceiling mentioned above.

In other words, in this embodiment, if a special miss result C occurs during the first normal game state, support by high-frequency support mode A until reaching the ceiling is effectively confirmed. Furthermore, if special miss results A and B occur, and the remaining number of games until reaching the ceiling is less than the termination criteria number for special miss results A and B, support by high-frequency support mode A until reaching the ceiling is confirmed.

In this embodiment, the behavior of the symbol display device 95, etc., differs depending on whether the number of games played before reaching the ceiling exceeds the number of games remaining until the special miss result occurs. Specifically, similar to the first embodiment, when a special miss result occurs, the player is notified (clearly indicated) by the symbol combination corresponding to the special miss result being displayed. However, if the number of games played before reaching the ceiling exceeds the number of games remaining until the ceiling is reached, this notification is not given. The specific configuration for achieving this behavior, namely the first variation start process executed as part of the periodic processing by the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140, will be explained below with reference to the flowchart in Figure 64.

(Processing to initiate the first change)
In the first variation start process, first, in step S2301, the variation start command received is read, and from this command, information on whether a reach occurred and information on the variation display time are identified. Also, as already explained, when a variation start command is sent from the main control device 162, a type command is also sent. In step S2301, the type command received along with the variation start command is read, and from this command, various information related to the game result, such as information on the probability variation jackpot result, information on the normal jackpot result, information on the special miss result, information on the normal miss result, and information on reaching the ceiling, is identified. Then, in step S2301, from the identified information, information on whether a jackpot was won, information on the type of jackpot if a jackpot was won, information on whether a special miss occurred, information on the type of special miss if a special miss occurred, information on whether a reach occurred if neither a jackpot nor a special miss occurred, information on whether the ceiling was reached, and information on the variation display time are identified, and the identified information is stored in the registers of the MPU 442.

In the following step S2302, the various counters used to determine the number of games played are updated. Specifically, the remaining number of games counter, located in the various counter areas 465 of the RAM 444, which is used to determine the number of games remaining until the ceiling is reached, is updated (deducted by "1"). Note that this remaining number of games counter is configured to be set to "300" when the special game state ends.

In the following step S2303, based on the information obtained in step S2301, it is determined whether the result of the current game round is a jackpot. If the result of the current game is a jackpot (either a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 6R normal jackpot), the jackpot performance setting process is executed in the following step S2304. The jackpot performance setting process is broadly divided into a stop result determination process, which determines the combination of jackpot symbols to be stopped and displayed, and the active line on which that combination will be stopped and displayed, and a variation display pattern determination process (performance pattern determination process), which determines the variation display pattern of the jackpot symbols.

In the process of determining the stop result for a jackpot, the stop result for this game round is determined to be the one in which the same combination of symbols appears on one of the valid lines L1 to L5. Specifically, the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 stores the valid lines L1 to L5 and their address information. The final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. Furthermore, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In this embodiment, the following symbol combinations are defined as corresponding to a jackpot: "1" symbol, "1" symbol, "1" symbol combination; "2" symbol, "2" symbol, "2" symbol combination; "3" symbol, "3" symbol, "3" symbol combination; "4" symbol, "4" symbol, "4" symbol combination; "5" symbol, "5" symbol, "5" symbol combination; "6" symbol, "6" symbol, "6" symbol combination; "7" symbol, "7" symbol combination; "8" symbol, "8" symbol combination; "9" symbol, "9" symbol combination.

As already explained, when a jackpot is achieved, the result is announced via a reach display. In the process of determining the jackpot display pattern, the system retrieves the reach display pattern table stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 and determines the normal reach display or super reach display pattern corresponding to the game result in the received variation start command and variation display time and type command. Furthermore, the system executes a process to store the address information of the determined variation display pattern in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

If it is determined in step S2303 that the result is not a jackpot, the process proceeds to step S2305. In step S2305, based on the information obtained in step S2301, it is determined whether the result of the current game round is a special loss. If the result of the current game round is a special loss, a positive determination is made in step S2305, and the process proceeds to step S2306. In step S2306, the count comparison process is performed.

In the count comparison process, the remaining count counter mentioned above is referenced to determine whether the number of plays until reaching the ceiling is less than the number of plays until reaching the ceiling, which is set as the termination threshold for this special failure. If the number of plays until reaching the ceiling is less than the number of plays until reaching the ceiling, a positive determination is made in step S2307, and the process proceeds to step S2308. In step S2308, the first special effect setting process, which is the effect setting process for special failures, is executed.

The first special effect setting process is broadly divided into two parts: a stop result determination process that determines the combination of symbols for special misses to be displayed and the valid lines for displaying those symbol combinations; and a variation display pattern determination process (effect pattern determination process) that determines the variation display pattern of the symbols for special misses.

In the stop result determination process, which constitutes the first special effect setting process, the stop result for this game round is determined to be a combination of symbols corresponding to a special miss that occurs on one of the active lines L1 to L5. Specifically, the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 stores the address information for each active line L1 to L5, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. Furthermore, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In this embodiment, similar to the first embodiment, the combination of symbols "1," "3," and "4" is defined as the symbol combination corresponding to a special miss.

In the variable display pattern determination process, which constitutes the first special effect setting process, the variable display pattern is determined so that the player is notified of the special effect failure via the reach display. Specifically, the variable display pattern table for reach displays stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 is obtained, and the normal reach display or super reach display effect pattern corresponding to the game result in the variable display time and type command of the variable start command received is determined. Furthermore, the address information of the determined variable display pattern is stored in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

Here, we will provide a supplementary explanation of the first special effect, which is set by the first special effect setting process, with reference to the schematic diagram in Figure 65(a).

In the game round corresponding to the first special effect, the display screen 95a transitions to a "reach" display after a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of all stopped symbol rows began to change. At a predetermined timing after transitioning to the "reach" display, the display screen 95a will stop displaying a symbol combination corresponding to a special miss (a combination of "1," "3," and "4" symbols). Afterward, a message indicating a switch to high-frequency support mode A (e.g., "Chance Time Entered") will be displayed on the display screen 95a, and the background color of the display screen 95a will change to blue.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 64, if a negative result is obtained in step S2307, that is, if the number of attempts to reach the termination criterion set for this special failure matches or exceeds the remaining attempts until the ceiling is reached, the process proceeds to step S2309. In step S2309, the second special effect setting process, which is the effect setting process for special failures, is executed.

The second special effect setting process is broadly divided into two parts: a stop result determination process that determines the combination of symbols for special misses to be displayed and the valid lines for displaying those symbol combinations, and a variation display pattern determination process (effect pattern determination process) that determines the variation display pattern of the symbols for special misses.

In the stop result determination process, which constitutes the second special effect setting process, the stop result for this game round is determined to be a combination of symbols corresponding to a special miss that occurs on one of the active lines L1 to L5. Specifically, the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 stores the address information for each active line L1 to L5, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. Furthermore, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area. The symbol combination determined in this stop result determination process includes the "CHANCE" symbol. Therefore, in the second special effect, the "CHANCE" symbol will be displayed on one of the active lines.

In the variable display pattern determination process, which constitutes the second special effect setting process, the variable display pattern is determined so that the player is notified of the special effect failure via the reach display. Specifically, the variable display pattern table for reach displays stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 is obtained, and the normal reach display or super reach display pattern corresponding to the game result in the variable display time and type command of the variable start command received is determined. Furthermore, the address information of the determined variable display pattern is stored in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

Here, we will provide a supplementary explanation of the second special effect, which is set by the second special effect setting process, referring to the schematic diagram in Figure 65(b).

In the second special effect round, the display screen 95a transitions to a "reach" display after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation display for all the stopped symbol rows. At a predetermined timing after the transition to the "reach" display, a symbol combination including the "CHANCE" symbol is displayed on the display screen 95a. Afterward, a message indicating a switch to high-frequency support mode A (e.g., "Rescue Activated") is displayed on the display screen 95a, and the background color of the display screen 95a changes to green.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 64, if a negative result is obtained in step S2305, that is, if the current game round does not correspond to a special losing result, the process proceeds to step S2310. In step S2310, it is determined whether or not the ceiling is reached in the current game round. If the ceiling is reached, a positive result is obtained in step S2310, and the process proceeds to step S2311. In step S2311, the process for setting up the effects for reaching the ceiling is executed. Details of this process for setting up the effects for reaching the ceiling will be described later.

If a negative result is determined in step S2310, the animation setting process for a complete miss is executed in step S2312. This process determines whether a reach occurs in the current game round. If a reach occurs, the animation setting process for a reach occurs is executed; if a reach does not occur, the animation setting process for a non-reach occurs is executed.

The process for setting up the effects for triggering a reach is broadly divided into two parts: a stop result determination process that determines the combination of symbols for a complete miss corresponding to a reach and the valid lines for which that combination will be stopped; and a variation display pattern determination process (effect pattern determination process) that determines the variation display pattern of the symbols for a complete miss corresponding to a reach.

In the process for determining the stop result for a complete miss after reaching a winning combination, the stop symbols are determined so that they do not match any of the following combinations: the combination corresponding to a big win, the combination corresponding to a special miss, or the combination corresponding to reaching the ceiling. Specifically, the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 stores the address information for each active line L1 to L5. The final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. Furthermore, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In the process for determining the variable display pattern for a complete miss after a reach, the variable display pattern table for reach displays stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 is retrieved, and the normal reach display or super reach display pattern corresponding to the game result in the variable display time and type command of the received variable start command is determined. Furthermore, the address information of the determined variable display pattern is stored in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

The processing for setting up the effects when a reach does not occur is broadly divided into two parts: a stop result determination process that determines the combination of symbols to be displayed as a complete miss (not corresponding to a reach) and the valid lines for which that combination of symbols will be displayed as a stop; and a variation display pattern determination process (effect pattern determination process) that determines the variation display pattern of the symbols for a complete miss (not corresponding to a reach).

In the process for determining the stop result for a complete miss (no reach), the stop symbols are determined so that they do not match any of the following combinations: the combination corresponding to a jackpot, the combination corresponding to a special miss, or the combination corresponding to reaching the ceiling. Specifically, the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 stores the address information for each active line L1 to L5. The final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. Furthermore, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In the process for determining the display pattern for a complete miss (no reach), the display pattern table for misses (no reach) stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 is retrieved, and the display pattern corresponding to the game result in the display time and type command of the currently received variation start command is determined. Furthermore, the address information of the determined display pattern is stored in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

After executing any of steps S2304, S2308, S2309, S2311, or S2312, the process proceeds to step S2313. In step S2313, commands containing the stop result and presentation pattern information determined in steps S1903, S1905, S1907, and S1908 are output to the display control device 410 as a stop result command and a pattern command, respectively. The MPU 472 of the display control device 410 then controls the display of the symbol display device 95 to execute the presentation for the current game round based on the received stop result command and pattern command.

After executing the process in step S1909, the process to start the game round's effects is executed in the following step S1910, and then the process for starting this variation is terminated. Specifically, based on the effects pattern determined in steps S2304, S2308, S2309, S2311, and S2312, the drive control of the speaker unit 29 and the lamp unit 26 is started to begin the game round's effects.

Here, the process for setting the effects for reaching the ceiling in step S2311 described above will be explained. The process for setting the effects for reaching the ceiling consists of a normal setting process executed when the current game state is the first normal game state, and a special setting process executed when the current game state is a normal game state other than the first normal game state (for example, the fourth normal game state).

The normal setting process constituting step S2311 is broadly divided into two parts: a stop result determination process that determines the combination of symbols for reaching the ceiling to be displayed as a stop and the valid line for displaying that combination as a stop; and a variation display pattern determination process (performance pattern determination process) that determines the variation display pattern of the symbols for reaching the ceiling.

In the stop result determination process of the normal setting process described above, the stop result for this game round is determined to be the combination of symbols for reaching the ceiling that is established on one of the active lines L1 to L5. Specifically, the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 stores the address information for each active line L1 to L5, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. Furthermore, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area. In this embodiment, the symbol combination including the "CHANCE" symbol is defined as the symbol combination corresponding to reaching the ceiling.

When the ceiling is reached, the result is notified via a reach display. In the variation display pattern determination process, the variation display pattern table for reach displays, stored in the various table areas of ROM 443, is retrieved, and the normal reach display or super reach display pattern corresponding to the game result in the variation display time and type command of the currently received variation start command is determined. Furthermore, the address information of the determined variation display pattern is stored in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

Here, referring to the schematic diagram in Figure 65(b), we will provide a supplementary explanation of the effects performed during the first normal game state when the ceiling is reached.

In the first normal game state, during the game round in which the ceiling is reached, the display screen 95a transitions to a "reach" display after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation display of all the stopped symbol rows. At a predetermined timing after transitioning to the "reach" display, a symbol combination including the "CHANCE" symbol is displayed on the display screen 95a. Afterward, a message indicating a switch to high-frequency support mode A (e.g., "Rescue Activated") is displayed on the display screen 95a, and the background color of the display screen 95a changes to green.

In other words, the animation when the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state is the same as the second special animation set in step S2309 above. The animation pattern and the combination of symbols displayed are identical when the termination threshold number, set as a result of a special miss, matches or exceeds the remaining number of games until the ceiling is reached. To put it another way, when the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state, the second special animation is executed whether the termination threshold number, set as a result of a special miss, matches or exceeds the remaining number of games until the ceiling is reached. The system is configured so that the player cannot distinguish whether the trigger for this animation (the animation pattern and the combination of symbols displayed) was a special miss or reaching the ceiling.

The special setting process constituting step S2311 is broadly divided into two parts: a stop result determination process that determines the combination of symbols to be stopped and the valid lines on which that combination will be stopped; and a variation display pattern determination process (performance pattern determination process) that determines the variation display pattern of the symbols.

In this stop result determination process, the stop result for this game round is determined to be the combination of symbols that normally corresponds to a miss. Specifically, the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 stores the address information for each active line L1 to L5. The final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. Furthermore, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

Furthermore, the result is reported via a reach display. In the variable display pattern determination process, the variable display pattern table for reach displays, stored in the various table areas of ROM 443, is retrieved. The variable display time of the received variable start command and the non-reach display pattern corresponding to the game result of the command are then determined. Additionally, the address information of the determined variable display pattern is stored in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

In other words, if the ceiling is reached during a normal game state other than the first normal game state (specifically, the fourth normal game state), the same animation as in the case of a complete miss without a reach will be performed. This makes it difficult to identify whether the ceiling has been reached from the animation content. To put it another way, if the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state, and it results in a complete miss (neither a big win, a special miss, nor reaching the ceiling), the animation corresponding to a complete miss will be performed. The system is designed so that the player cannot distinguish from the animation (the animation style and the combination of symbols displayed) whether the trigger was reaching the ceiling or a complete miss.

Next, the game flow will be explained with reference to Figure 66. Figure 66(a) is a timing chart illustrating the game flow when the ceiling is reached after the end of the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss, and Figure 66(b) is a timing chart illustrating the game flow when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss.

In the example shown in Figure 66(a), a special miss occurs at timing td1 during the first normal game state. This special miss results in special miss A, and the termination threshold is set to "20" spins. The remaining spins until reaching the ceiling are greater than the termination threshold set in this case. Therefore, in the example shown in Figure 66(a), the ceiling will not be reached during the fourth normal game state, which is transitioned to as a result of the special miss.

In a game round resulting in a special miss, the first special effect (see Figure 65(a)) is executed, and it is clearly indicated that the game will transition to the fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A as a result of the special miss. Upon transitioning to the fourth normal game state, the background color of the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 changes from white to blue. Furthermore, a countdown display of the remaining number of games in the fourth normal game state begins in the upper corner of the display screen 95a, clearly indicating the remaining number of games.

At the timing of td2, when the number of game rounds played during this fourth normal game state reaches the termination threshold, the game transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state. Accordingly, the background color of the display screen 95a changes from blue to white.

Subsequently, the game progresses without any jackpots, and at timing TD3, the number of game spins performed after the end of the special game state reaches its upper limit (ceiling), triggering a transition from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state. In the final game spin that reaches the ceiling, the aforementioned second special effect (see Figure 65(b)) is performed, clearly indicating to the player that the ceiling has been reached. The background color of the display screen 95a changes to green in conjunction with the transition to the fourth normal game state at timing TD3.

In contrast, in the example shown in Figure 66(b), a special miss occurs at the timing of te1 during the first normal game state. This special miss is result B, and the termination threshold is set to "40" spins. The remaining spins to reach the ceiling are greater than the termination threshold set this time. In other words, in the example shown in Figure 66(b), the ceiling can be reached during the fourth normal game state, which is transitioned to as a result of the special miss. At the timing of te1, the second special effect is executed, and the background color of the display screen 95a changes from white to green. However, the countdown display of the remaining spins is not executed on this display screen 95a, and the remaining spins are not explicitly shown.

During the fourth normal game state, at timing te2, the number of game rounds played after the end of the special game state has reached its upper limit (ceiling). In this game round, a normal miss (complete miss) animation is performed, and the symbol combination corresponding to a normal miss (complete miss) is displayed.

At the subsequent timing of te3, the number of game rounds played during the current 4th normal game state has reached the termination threshold, and the game state transitions from the 4th normal game state to the 1st normal game state. In the first game round after transitioning to the 1st normal game state, a normal miss (complete miss) animation is performed, and the symbol combination corresponding to a complete miss is displayed. At the timing of te4, when the game round ends, the game quickly returns to the 4th normal game state. Thus, even during the continuous transitions from the 4th normal game state to the 1st normal game state and back to the 4th normal game state, the background color on the display screen 95a remains green.

According to the fourth embodiment described in detail above, if the number of game rounds played after the special game state ends (number of games played) reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without resulting in a jackpot, the game transitions to the fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A. In high-frequency support mode A, the number of entries into the second operation port 92 is frequent, thereby suppressing investment associated with the progress of the game. Such a function (ceiling function) is desirable in order to provide relief to the player. Here, in the configuration shown in this embodiment, even if the result is a special miss, the game may transition to the fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A. In this case, a special effect is executed. If the result is a special miss and the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state to which the game transitions as a result of the special miss, the same special effect as the one executed when the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state is executed. By having such a configuration, it is possible to make it appear as if the ceiling is variable. Furthermore, if the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state, the above-mentioned effect of reaching the ceiling is not executed, and the ceiling is not explicitly shown, thereby further enhancing the aforementioned mimicry effect. Furthermore, when a special failure occurs and the game transitions to the fourth normal game state, if the set termination threshold number of plays is less than the number of plays until the ceiling is reached, a different animation will be performed. This is desirable for achieving the aforementioned mimicry effect.

When the system cycles from high-frequency support mode A to low-frequency support mode and back to high-frequency support mode A, the aforementioned mimicry effect can be more effectively achieved by continuing to display indicators suggesting the series of modes at least across the transitions from high-frequency support mode A to low-frequency support mode.

<Variation 1>
In the fourth embodiment described above, if the number of times the termination criteria set when a special miss occurs matches the number of times remaining until the ceiling is reached, or if it is greater than the number of times remaining, the same effect (second special effect) as when the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state is executed. However, the embodiment is not limited to this. The embodiment may also be configured to execute the same effect (second special effect) as when the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state only when the number of times the termination criteria set when a special miss occurs is greater than the number of times remaining until the ceiling is reached.

<Modified Example 2>
In the fourth embodiment described above, if the number of times the termination criteria are set when a special miss occurs matches the number of times remaining until the ceiling is reached, or is greater than the number of times remaining, the same effect (second special effect) as when the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state is executed. However, it is not necessarily required that the two effects be completely identical. If the number of times the termination criteria are set when a special miss occurs matches the number of times remaining until the ceiling is reached, or is greater than the number of times remaining, it is sufficient that an effect is executed that is perceived by the player as being identical to the effect executed when the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state, rather than the effect executed when a special miss occurs during the first normal game state.

<Example 3>
In the fourth embodiment described above, the system is configured not to explicitly indicate when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state, but it is also possible to configure the system to explicitly indicate when the ceiling has been reached. For example, the system may be configured to explicitly indicate when the ceiling has been reached by displaying a message on the display screen 95a or by changing the background music output from the speaker unit 29.

<Modification 4>
In the fourth embodiment described above, if the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss, the system is configured to return to the fourth normal game state via the first normal game state. However, it is also possible to set the display time of the symbols on the display unit for the operation port during this first normal game state to the display time corresponding to the reach display. In this way, securing the display time of the symbols for each game round in the first normal game state is preferable for executing the continuation effect (upgrade effect) of the fourth normal game state during that game round.

<Example 5>
In the fourth embodiment described above, the game count counter is reset (cleared to 0) when the special game state ends, but the system is not limited to this. For example, the game count counter may be reset when transitioning to the special game state, or it may be reset while in the special game state. It is also possible to reset the game count counter when the high-frequency support mode ends.

<Modification 6>
The number of games played to terminate when a special failure result A occurs (20 games) is set to be less than the number of games played from the end of high-frequency support mode B until the ceiling is reached, while the number of games played to terminate when a special failure result C occurs (260 games) is set to be more than the number of games played from the end of high-frequency support mode B until the ceiling is reached. In other words, when a special failure result A occurs, the timing determines whether high-frequency support mode A can continue until the ceiling is reached, while when a special failure result C occurs, high-frequency support mode A can continue until the ceiling is reached. This could be changed so that the number of games played to terminate when a special failure result A occurs (20 games) is less than the number of games played until the ceiling is reached (300 games), and the number of games played to terminate when a special failure result C occurs (for example, 310 games) is more than the number of games played until the ceiling is reached (300 games).

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, when the number of game rounds played after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling), the system transitions to a fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A to suppress excessive investment by the player. In such a configuration, even if the transition to the fourth normal game state is intended to rescue the player, the time it takes to enjoy the benefits of the rescue (such as payouts from jackpots) can give the impression that the game is drawn out. In the fourth normal game state, the number of balls entering the second operation port 92 increases frequently, which tends to shorten the display time of the variation. However, this fourth normal game state corresponds to a low probability mode, and the probability of hitting a jackpot based on balls entering the operation ports 91 and 92 is not changed, so it is assumed that it will be difficult to completely eliminate the above-mentioned concerns.

Therefore, one of the features of this embodiment is that, when the number of game spins performed after the end of a special game state (in this embodiment, the jackpot game state or V-jackpot game state described later) reaches its upper limit (ceiling), the game transitions to a limited-spin chance zone (a special game state described later) where the probability of hitting a jackpot substantially increases. The specific configuration for achieving this function will be explained below, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

In the first embodiment described above, the game board unit 80 (game board 80a) had a symmetrical gauge (see Figure 6). However, in this embodiment, the game board unit 80B (game board 80aB) has an asymmetrical gauge, and the arrangement of various game components provided in the game area PE has been changed. The game board unit 80B in this embodiment will be described in detail below with reference to Figure 67. Figure 67 is a front view of the game board unit 80B.

(Game board unit 80B)
The game board 80aB has multiple openings of varying sizes that penetrate in the direction of its own thickness (front-to-back direction). A general prize entry opening 81, an operating opening unit 82A, a variable prize entry device 83B, a through gate 84A, etc. are provided in each opening. When game balls flow into the general prize entry opening 81, the operating opening unit 82A, or the variable prize entry device 83B, these game balls are detected by detection sensors (not shown) provided in accordance with each ball entry area, and based on the detection results, the player is granted a predetermined number of prize balls (dispensing of game balls) or other benefits.

Furthermore, the game board 80aB is equipped with numerous game pins 87 to appropriately distribute and adjust the flow path of the game balls, as well as various components (mechanisms) such as windmills. These various configurations, including the game pins 87 and windmills, differentiate the flow path of the game balls, adjusting them so that entries into the general prize pockets 81, etc., occur with a suitable probability. An out-out opening 86 is provided at the bottom of the game board 80aB, and game balls that do not enter the various ball entry points are discharged from the game area PE through the out-out opening 86.

The operating port unit 82A, similar to the operating port unit 82 shown in the first embodiment, has a first operating port 91A and a second operating port 92A located directly below the first operating port 91A. The latter of the two operating ports 92A is equipped with an electric mechanism 93A, which functions as an open/close ball entry assist device (ball entry assist means) or an open/close member (open/close means). When the support mode of the electric mechanism 93A is set to low-frequency support mode, it is effectively impossible to win a prize in the second operating port 92A. Winning a prize in the second operating port 92A is permitted when the mode switches to high-frequency support mode.

The game board 80aB is provided with a center frame 96A surrounding the display screen 95aA of the pattern display device 95A. The center frame 96A protrudes from the front of the game board 80aB, and the flow path of the game balls flowing down the game area PE is broadly divided into a route that bypasses the center frame 96A from the right side and a route that bypasses it from the left side, similar to the first embodiment described above. However, in this embodiment, the arrangement of the first operation port 91A, second operation port 92A, variable prize device 83B, and through gate 84A has been modified so that game balls launched along the left route can enter the first operation port 91A and the second operation port 92A, but cannot enter the variable prize device 83B or the through gate 84A. Game balls launched along the right route can enter the second operation port 92A, the through gate 84A, and the variable prize device 83B, but cannot enter the first operation port 91A. It is also possible to configure the system so that game balls launched along the left route cannot enter the second operation port 92A.

By switching the launch route of the game ball between the right and left routes depending on the game state, it becomes possible to gain an advantage in the game. This encouragement of skillful play helps to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In this embodiment, the configuration of the variable prize-winning device 83B differs from that of the variable prize-winning device 83 shown in the first embodiment. The specific configuration of the variable prize-winning device 83B will be explained below with reference to Figure 68. Figure 68 is a schematic diagram showing the internal structure of the variable prize-winning device 83B.

(Variable prize-winning device 83B)
Inside the variable prize winning device 83B, a ball passage 332B is formed through which game balls that have flowed into the entrance (large prize opening 331B) of the variable prize winning device 83B pass. The ball passage 332B branches into a first branch passage 334B and a second branch passage 335B at an intermediate position, and a flow path switching member 336B is provided at this branching point, which can switch the destination of the game balls to the first branch passage 334B side and the second branch passage 335B side. The drive unit (specifically a solenoid) for the flow path switching member 336B is connected to the main control device 162 and operates based on a drive signal from the main control device 162. When no drive signal is input from the main control device 162 (non-excited state), the flow path switching member 336B waits in a protruding position that protrudes into the ball passage 332B, and when a drive signal is input (excited state), it waits in a retracted position where protrusion into the ball passage 332B is avoided.

When the flow path switching member 336B is positioned in a protruding location, the inlet of the first branch passage 334B is blocked by the flow path switching member 336B. In this state, the inflow of game balls that have reached the branching section into the first branch passage 334B is prevented, and these game balls flow into the second branch passage 335B.

When the main control device 162 outputs a drive signal for the drive unit of the flow path switching member 336B and the drive unit is energized, the flow path switching member 336B moves to a retracted position where protrusion into the ball passage 332B is avoided, and the entrance portion of the first branch passage 334B is opened. This changes the destination of the game balls. In this state, the game balls that have reached the branching point are prevented from flowing into the second branch passage 335B, and instead flow into the first branch passage 334B. The movement of the flow path switching member 336B is predetermined by the results of a lottery based on winning entries into the operating ports 91A and 92A.

Upstream detection sensor 391d is installed in the ball passage 332B upstream of the branching point, and downstream detection sensors 338B and 339B are installed in the downstream section, specifically in the first branching passage 334B and the second branching passage 335B. The upstream detection sensor 391d and the downstream detection sensors 338B and 339B are connected to the main control unit 162. The main control unit 162 determines whether a ball has entered the variable prize winning device 83B based on detection information (detection signals) from the upstream detection sensor 391d, and dispenses a predetermined number of game balls if a prize has been won. Furthermore, the remaining game ball status is monitored based on detection information (detection signals) from the upstream detection sensor 391d and the downstream detection sensors 338B and 339B.

In the main control device 162 shown in this embodiment, when detection information (detection signal) from the downstream detection sensor 338B attached to the first branch passage 334B indicates that a ball has entered the first branch passage 334B, the support mode switches from the special game state (the V-jackpot game state described in detail later) to the high-frequency support mode (specifically, high-frequency support mode B) after the special game state has ended. In this embodiment, the first branch passage 334B corresponds to the "advantageous ball entry section" or "V," and a ball entering the first branch passage 334B is also referred to as a "V-winning ball."

(Retained ball storage area)
Next, in this embodiment, the configuration for storing hold information based on winning entries into the operating ports 91A and 92A differs from that of the first embodiment. The configuration for storing hold information in this embodiment will now be described with reference to the schematic diagram in Figure 69.

The ball storage area 432A shown in this embodiment includes a first operation port storage area Ra that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 when a ball enters the first operation port 91A, and a second operation port storage area Rb that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 when a ball enters the second operation port 92A.

The first operation port's hold area Ra consists of four areas (Area 1 to Area 4). When multiple consecutive entries occur into the first operation port 91A, the numerical information is stored chronologically in the order of Area 1 → Area 2 → Area 3 → Area 4. Similarly, the second operation port's hold area Rb consists of four areas (Area 1 to Area 4). When multiple consecutive entries occur into the second operation port 92A, the numerical information (hold information) is stored chronologically in the order of Area 1 → Area 2 → Area 3 → Area 4.

In this embodiment, if hold information is stored in the second operation port hold area Rb, the system is configured to preferentially move the hold information stored in the second operation port hold area Rb (specifically, the first area) to the execution area AE. Furthermore, if no hold information is stored in the second operation port hold area Rb, but hold information is stored in the first operation port hold area Ra, the system is configured to move the hold information stored in the first operation port hold area Ra (specifically, the first area) to the execution area AE.

In the first embodiment described above, two lottery modes were provided for the lottery conducted based on the entry of the ball into the first and second operating ports 91 and 92: a low-probability mode where the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively low, and a high-probability mode where the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively high. In other words, the system was configured to switch the win/loss table for the operating ports that was referenced according to the lottery mode. In contrast, this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the win/loss lottery for the operating ports is performed by referencing the same win/loss table regardless of the game state. It also differs from the first embodiment in that it references different win/loss tables depending on where the game ball enters. The win/loss table for the operating ports in this embodiment will be described below with reference to Figure 70.

(Validity table for the operating port)
As shown in Figure 70(a), in the win/loss table referenced when drawing lots based on winnings in the first operating port 91A, there are three random number values that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information): "7", "307", and "507". In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "7", "307", and "507" correspond to jackpots. All random number values that do not correspond to a jackpot correspond to a loss (normal loss). As a result, the probability of winning a jackpot is 1/200.

As shown in Figure 70(b), in the win/loss table referenced during the lottery based on winning at the second operating port 92A, the random number values that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) are "7", "307", and "507", a total of three values. In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "7", "307", and "507" correspond to jackpots. Furthermore, in this win/loss table, a total of 60 values, "5", "15", "25", "35", "45"... "575", "585", and "595", correspond to special wins. All random number values that do not correspond to either jackpots or special wins correspond to losses (normal losses). As a result, the probability of a jackpot is 1/200 and the probability of a special win is 1/10.

In this embodiment, the lottery results based on winning entries into the first and second operating ports 91A and 92A do not include the special misses shown in the first embodiment. However, this is not limited to this; the system may be configured to allow for special misses in the lottery based on winning entries into the first operating port 91A, or in the lottery based on winning entries into the second operating port 92A, or in either the lottery based on winning entries into the first or second operating port 92A.

Next, referring to Figure 71, the distribution tables for each of the operating ports 91A and 92A will be described.

(Distribution table for the operating port)
In the distribution table for the first operating port 91A, of the values of the type counter C2 from "0" to "29", a total of 27 values from "0" to "26" correspond to a 6R jackpot, and a total of 3 values from "27" to "29" correspond to a 10R jackpot. In other words, when a jackpot is won, approximately 90% of the time it will be a 6R jackpot, and the remaining 10% will be a 10R jackpot.

In contrast, in the distribution table for the second operation port 92A, 15 values from "0" to "14" of the type counter C2 (values from "0" to "29") correspond to 6R jackpots, and 15 values from "15" to "29" correspond to 10R jackpots. Therefore, when a jackpot is won, there is a 50% probability of it being a 6R jackpot and a 50% probability of it being a 10R jackpot.

There is a difference in the number of rounds during the opening/closing execution mode for 6R jackpots and 10R jackpots. The former has 6 rounds, while the latter has 10. Therefore, winning a 10R jackpot presents a chance to significantly increase your winnings.

Furthermore, in the event of a 6R or 10R jackpot, after the jackpot game state ends, the support mode provided by the electric mechanism 93A switches to a high-frequency support mode B game state (either the first or second special game state). This high-frequency support mode B game state continues until the number of game rounds played after the jackpot game state ends—specifically, the number of game rounds related to the second operation port 92A—reaches the termination threshold. When this threshold is reached, the support by high-frequency support mode B ends. In the case of a 6R jackpot, the termination threshold is set to "6 rounds," and in the case of a 10R jackpot, the termination threshold is set to "100 rounds."

If a special win is achieved through a lottery based on a ball entering the second operating port 92A, the game transitions to a special win state. The variable prize entry device 83B is opened for a predetermined period of time, and the flow path switching member 336B of the variable prize entry device 83B moves from its protruding position to its retracted position. This allows a ball to enter the advantageous ball entry section 334B (V-win). This entry into the advantageous ball entry section 334B (V-win) results in a 5RV jackpot, and the game transitions to a V-jackpot state after the special win state ends (see Figure 72(a)).

After the V-jackpot game state ends, the game transitions to a game state compatible with High-Frequency Support Mode B. This High-Frequency Support Mode B game state continues until the number of game rounds played after the V-jackpot game state ends—specifically, the number of game rounds related to the second operation port 92A—reaches the termination threshold. When this threshold is reached, the support from High-Frequency Support Mode B ends. In the case of a 5RV jackpot, the termination threshold is set to "6 rounds."

In this embodiment, during the game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode B (first special game state or second special game state), the game progresses mainly with game rounds based on winning into the second operation port 92A. Even after reaching the termination criteria number of rounds and transitioning to the game state corresponding to low-frequency support mode, game rounds related to the second operation port 92A will be executed for the remaining reserved rounds related to the second operation port 92A.

In this embodiment, among the game states in which game rounds are executed based on winning entries into the activation slot, the game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode, excluding the special game states described later, is referred to as the "normal game state." Furthermore, the special winning game state, the V-jackpot game state, and the jackpot game state are referred to as the "special game state."

In other words, if a 5RV jackpot or a 6R jackpot is achieved, the probability of winning is increased for a total of 10 spins: the number of spins until termination (6 spins) plus the maximum number of spins that can be stored in the second operation port 92A (4 spins). During this time, the probability of winning a jackpot or a special jackpot is approximately 65%. Similarly, if a 10R jackpot is achieved, the probability of winning is increased for a total of 10 spins: the number of spins until termination (100 spins) plus the maximum number of spins that can be stored in the second operation port 92A (4 spins). During this time, the probability of winning a jackpot or a special jackpot is almost 100% (see Figure 72(b)).

In this embodiment, the configuration is the same as in the first embodiment in that when the number of game rounds played after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling), the game transitions to a game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A (third special game state). This high-frequency support mode A game state continues until the number of game rounds played after the opening/closing execution mode ends, specifically the number of game rounds related to the second operation port 92A, reaches the termination criterion number (time reduction round: 1 in this embodiment). When this termination criterion number is reached, the game transitions to a game state corresponding to low-frequency support mode (normal game state).

In the normal gameplay state corresponding to High-Frequency Support Mode A, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling, the probability of winning is increased for a total of 5 times: the number of times the game ends (1 time) + the maximum number of reserved balls stored for the second operation port 92A (4 times). During this time, the probability of hitting a jackpot or special win is approximately 40%, meaning that reaching the ceiling temporarily increases the winning probability.

In this embodiment, the number of games played before reaching the ceiling is set to "200." When the game transitions to a high-frequency support mode A upon reaching the ceiling, the ceiling is reset (the game count counter is reset to 0) when that game state ends. In other words, the game is configured to transition to the above-mentioned chance zone every 200 games.

In this embodiment, the high-frequency support mode is broadly divided into high-frequency support mode A, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling, and high-frequency support mode B, which is triggered by a jackpot or V-entry. High-frequency support mode B is designed to provide more favorable support from the electric mechanism 93A than high-frequency support mode A. However, in high-frequency support mode A, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling, the termination criteria is one time, and further game ball launches become unnecessary once the number of reserved balls related to the second operation port 92A reaches its upper limit. This prevents a significant increase in investment when the relief function triggered by reaching the ceiling is active.

Next, referring to the flowcharts in Figures 73 and 74, we will explain the periodic processing (timer interrupt processing, normal processing) performed by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

(Timer interrupt handling)
As shown in Figure 73, the timer interrupt processing in this embodiment is the same as the timer interrupt processing shown in the first embodiment (see Figure 20), with the addition of the V-prize winning processing in step S2406. As will be described in detail later, this V-prize winning processing monitors whether or not a prize (V-prize) has been won in the advantageous ball entry section 334B of the variable prize winning device 83B.

(Normal processing)
As shown in Figure 74, in normal processing, the external signal output process is first executed in step S2501. In the following step S2502, the variation type counter CS is updated, and in step S2503, the game round control process is executed. A part of the game round control process in step S2503 (the support mode switching process) has been changed from the first embodiment. Details of the support mode switching process in this embodiment will be described later.

Subsequently, step S2504 executes the transition process to the special bonus game state, step S2505 executes the V distribution setting process, and step S2506 executes the transition process to the jackpot game state. Details of each of these processes from steps S2504 to S2506 will be described later.

In the following step S2507, control processing for the through gate is executed, and in step S2508, processing for the electric support is executed. Then, in step S2509, game ball launch control processing is executed. Since the processing in steps S2507 to S2509 is the same as in the first embodiment, a detailed explanation is omitted.

In step S2510, it is determined whether the timing for the next normal processing has been reached, that is, whether one cycle (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal processing. Then, within the remaining time until the timing for the next normal processing is reached, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated (steps S2511 to S2512).

Here, referring to the flowchart in Figure 75, the process for switching the support mode, which is performed as part of the game turn control process in step S2503, will be explained.

(Processing for switching support modes)
In the support mode switching process, first, in step S2601, it is determined whether the current support mode is high-frequency support mode A or B. If the determination in step S2601 is positive, the process proceeds to step S2602. In step S2602, it is determined whether the current game round is a game round related to the second operation port 92A. If the determination in step S2602 is negative, the support mode switching process ends there. If the determination in step S2602 is positive, the process proceeds to step S2603.

In step S2603, the continuation count counters in the various counter areas 434 are updated. Specifically, the value of the continuation count counter is decremented by "1". In the following step S2604, it is determined whether the value of the continuation count counter is "0". If the determination in step S2604 is negative, the switching process ends there. If the determination in step S2604 is positive, the process proceeds to step S2605, where the high-frequency support mode flag (high-frequency support mode A flag or high-frequency support mode B flag) stored in the various flag storage area 435 is cleared, and the switching process ends there as well. Clearing the high-frequency support mode flag switches the support mode of the electric mechanism 93A from high-frequency support mode to low-frequency support mode.

Returning to the explanation of step S2601, if a negative result is obtained in step S2601, the process proceeds to step S2606. In step S2606, it is determined whether the value of the game count counter stored in the various counter areas 434 of RAM 404 has reached its upper limit (corresponding to 200 game counts). If a negative result is obtained in step S2606, this switching process ends immediately. If a positive result is obtained in step S2606, the process proceeds to step S2607.

In step S2607, the continuation count counter is set to "1". Then, in the following step S2608, the high-frequency support mode A flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404, and this switching process ends. In other words, when the ceiling is reached, the support mode quickly switches from low-frequency support mode to high-frequency support mode A without going through a special game state.

Next, referring to the flowcharts in Figures 76 and 77, the process of transitioning to the special winning game state in step S2504 will be explained.

(Transition process to special winning game state)
As shown in Figure 76, in the process of transitioning to a special winning game state, first, in step S2701, it is determined whether or not a jackpot game is currently being played. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a jackpot game flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. The jackpot game flag is a flag that indicates that a jackpot game is currently being played. It is stored at the start of the jackpot game and erased when the jackpot game ends.

If it is determined that a jackpot game is not currently in progress (i.e., the jackpot game flag is not stored), the process proceeds to step S2702 to determine whether a special jackpot game is currently in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the special jackpot game flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435. The special jackpot game flag indicates that a special jackpot game is currently in progress.

If it is determined that a special win game is not currently in progress (i.e., the special win game flag is not stored), the process proceeds to step S2703, where it is determined whether or not the special win flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435. That is, it is determined whether or not a special win has been achieved. The special win flag is a flag that is stored in the various flag storage area 435 when a special win is achieved in the win/loss lottery during the game round control process described above.

If it is determined that a special win flag is stored, step S2704 determines whether it is the end of the game round. If it is not the end of the game round, the transition process to this special win game state is terminated. Also, if a positive determination is made in step S2701 (determining that a jackpot game is in progress), or if a negative determination is made in step S2703 (determining that the special win flag is not stored), the transition process to this special win game state is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the game round has ended, the special win game start process is executed in step S2705. This start process involves storing the special win game flag in the various flag storage area 435 and checking that the variable prize device 83B is in a closed state before the start of the special win game. Furthermore, this start process also executes an opening period setting process to allow the variable prize device 83B to wait without opening when the special win game begins. In the opening period setting process, a value corresponding to the opening period is set in the opening timer counter provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404. This set value (counter value) is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, i.e., every 2 msec.

In the following step S2706, the number of rounds played in the special bonus game is set by executing a process to set "1" to the round counter RC1 located in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404.

In the following step S2707, the opening command is set. This set opening command is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 140 during the external output processing in normal processing (Figure 74). Based on the received opening command, the notification/effect control device 140 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode and controls various devices to execute the determined effect.

In the following step S2708, after executing the external signal setting process, the transition process to this special win state is terminated. During the external signal setting process, the signal output state of the output terminal for the special win signal provided on the external output terminal board 213 is set to the special win signal output state. As a result, if the output terminal for the special win signal is connected to the management control device on the gaming hall side, a special win signal is output to the management control device, allowing the management control device to recognize that a special win has occurred in the pachinko machine 10.

On the other hand, if a positive result is obtained in step S2702 (it is determined that the special winning game is in progress), the process proceeds to step S2709 to determine whether the opening waiting time has elapsed. If the opening waiting time has not elapsed, the transition process to this special winning game state is terminated.

If the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2710, where a special opening/closing process is executed to open and close the large prize opening 331B of the variable prize device 83B. The special opening/closing process will now be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 77.

(Opening and closing process for special winning entries)
In the special prize opening/closing process, first in step S2801, it is determined whether or not the large prize opening 331B of the variable prize device 83B is open. Specifically, this determination is made based on the drive state of the drive unit (variable prize drive unit) for the shutter 333B of the variable prize device 83B. If the large prize opening 331B is not open, in step S2802 it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC1 is "0", and in step S2803 it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer counter TC1 of the RAM 404 is "0".

If the value of round counter RC1 is "0" or the value of the first timer counter TC1 is not "0", the opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of round counter RC1 is not "0" AND the value of the first timer counter TC1 is "0", the process proceeds to step S2804, where the drive unit for the shutter 333B is activated to open the variable prize device 83B.

In the following step S2805, the first timer counter TC1 is set to "5000" (equivalent to 10 seconds) as the opening time for the variable prize winning device 83B. Then, in step S2806, the process of setting the upper limit of the number of prizes that can be won by the variable prize winning device 83B in the special prize game is performed. Specifically, the first prize winning counter PC1, located in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404, is set to "10".

Subsequently, in step S2807, an open command is set, and the opening/closing process for this special win is terminated. This set open command is transmitted to the notification/performance control device 140 during the external output processing in the normal process (Figure 74).

Returning to the explanation of step S2801, if it is determined in step S2801 that the large prize slot 331B is open, the process proceeds to step S2808, where it is determined whether the value of the first timer counter TC1 is "0". If the value of the first timer counter TC1 is not "0", step S2809 determines whether a prize has been awarded to the variable prize device 83B. If no prize has been awarded, the special prize opening/closing process ends.

On the other hand, if a prize has been won, a prize winning command is set in step S2810. This prize winning command is transmitted to the notification/performance control device 140 via the external output processing in the normal processing (Figure 74). In the following step S2811, the value of the first prize winning counter PC1 is decremented by "1". Then, in step S2812, it is determined whether the value of the first prize winning counter PC1 is "0" or not, and if it is not "0", the opening/closing process for this special prize is terminated.

If a positive result is obtained in step S2812 or step S2808, it means that the conditions for closing the large prize opening 331B have been met. In this case, in step S2813, the drive unit for the shutter 333B is deactivated in order to close the large prize opening 331B.

In the following step S2814, the value of the round counter RC1 is decremented by "1," and in step S2815, the ending start process is executed. This start process sets an ending waiting time for the special winning game, allowing the game to wait without starting the next round. Specifically, the ending waiting time, pre-stored in ROM 403, is set in the ending timer counter located in the various counter areas 434 of RAM 404. The value of the ending timer counter is decremented by "1" each time a timer interrupt process is executed.

Subsequently, in step S2816, the ending command is set, and then the opening/closing process is terminated. This set ending command is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 140 during the external output process in the normal process (Figure 74).

Returning to the explanation of the transition process to the special winning game state in Figure 76, after executing the special winning opening/closing process in step S2710, it is determined in step S2711 whether the value of the round counter RC1 is "0". Also, in step S2712, it is determined whether the waiting time for the ending has elapsed. If the value of the round counter RC1 is not "0" or the waiting time for the ending has not elapsed, the transition process to this special winning game state ends immediately. On the other hand, if the value of the round counter RC1 is "0" and the waiting time for the ending has elapsed, the special winning game termination process is executed in step S2713 before the transition process to this special winning game state ends. Here, the special winning game termination process in step S2713 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 78.

(Ending process for special winning game)
In the termination process for a special winning game, step S2901 first determines whether or not the V-winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. This V-winning flag is stored in the V-winning process in step S2406 of the timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 73.

Here, we will explain the V-prize winning process in step S2406 and the V-distribution setting process in step S2505 in the normal process, which is related to the V-prize winning process. First, we will explain the V-distribution setting process in step S307, referring to the flowchart in Figure 79.

(V distribution setting process)
In the V distribution setting process, first in step S3001, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing for a special winning game. If it is the start timing, in step S3002, "500" (equivalent to 1 sec) is set in the second timer counter TC2 provided in the various counter area 434 of RAM 404. The value set in the second timer counter TC2 (counter value) is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec.

In the following step S3003, the distribution count counter HC located in the various counter areas 434 is set to "1". The data value (counter value) stored in the distribution count counter HC is used by the MPU 402 to identify the number of operations of the flow path switching member 336B.

If a negative result is determined in step S3001, or after the processing in step S3003 is executed, the process proceeds to step S3004. In step S3004, by understanding the drive state of the drive unit for the distribution member, it is determined whether the flow path switching member 336B is in the retracted position, which is the distribution side (V-winning side) to the advantageous ball entry section 334B. If the flow path switching member 336B is not in the retracted position, i.e., in the protruding position, the process proceeds to step S3005 to determine whether the value of the third timer counter TC3 is "0". If the value of the third timer counter TC3 is not "0", the distribution setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the third timer counter TC3 is "0", it is determined in step S3006 whether the value of the distribution count counter HC is "0".

If a negative result is obtained in step S3006, i.e., if the value of the distribution count counter HC is "1", then in step S3007, the flow path switching member 336B is displaced to the retracted position (V-winning side). In the subsequent step S3008, the third timer counter TC3 is set to "4000" (equivalent to 8 seconds). After the execution of step S3008, or if a positive result is obtained in step S3006, this distribution setting process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S3004, if a positive determination is made in step S3004, that is, if the flow path switching member 336B is in the retracted position (V-winning side), then in step S3009, it is determined whether the value of the third timer counter TC3 is "0". That is, it is determined whether the period for the flow path switching member 336B to wait in the retracted position (V-winning side) has elapsed. If a positive determination is made in step S3009, then in step S3010, the flow path switching member 336B is displaced to the protruding position, and then in step S3011, the value of the distribution count counter HC is subtracted by "1". After the execution of step S3011 or if a negative determination is made in step S3009, this distribution setting process is terminated.

Next, we will explain the process for winning a prize by referring to the flowchart in Figure 80.

(Processing for winning the V prize)
In the process for winning a V prize, step S3101 first determines whether a V prize flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. If a V prize flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3102, where it is determined whether a V prize has occurred (whether the game ball has passed through the detection area of the detection sensor 338B) based on the detection state of the V prize detection sensor 338B provided in the variable prize device 83B.

If it is determined that a V-win has occurred, step S3103 determines whether or not the validity period for the V-win is currently active. This validity period is a predetermined period; for example, the period during which a special winning game is being played or the V-side distribution period of the flow path switching member 336B are set as the validity period. If it is determined that the validity period is not active, the process proceeds to step S3104, where an error command is set as the target for transmission to the notification/performance control device 140, and then the V-win processing is terminated. The set error command is transmitted to the notification/performance control device 140 via the external output processing of the normal processing (Figure 74), and the notification/performance control device 140 controls the display control device 410, the lamp unit 26, and the speaker unit 29 so that a predetermined error notification is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the validity period is still active, the process proceeds to step S3105, where the V-winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. In the following step S3106, the V-winning command is set. The V-winning command is used to notify the notification/performance control device 140 that a V-winning has occurred. The set V-winning command is transmitted to the notification/performance control device 140 via the external output processing of the normal process (Figure 74). Upon receiving the V-winning command, the notification/performance control device 140 controls the display control device 410, etc., so that the symbol display device 95, lamp unit 26, and speaker unit 29 announce the occurrence of a V-winning, or perform effects celebrating the V-winning.

After step S3106 is executed, if the result in step S3101 is positive or the result in step S3102 is negative, this V-prize winning process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the termination process for the special bonus game in Figure 78, if it is determined in step S2901 that the V-winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404, the process proceeds to step S2902, where the V-winning flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. The V-winning flag is a flag used by MPU 402 to determine that a V-jackpot game should be started.

In the following step S2903, the V-winning flag, special win flag, and special win game flag stored in the various flag storage area 435 are cleared. In the following step S2904, a V-winning command is set, and then the termination process for this special win game is completed. The V-winning command is a command to notify the notification/performance control device 140 that a V-jackpot game is starting and the type of V-jackpot game. The set V-winning command is transmitted to the notification/performance control device 140 via the external output process of the normal process (Figure 74). When the notification/performance control device 140 receives the V-winning command, it controls the display control device 410, etc., so that an effect indicating the start of a V-jackpot game is executed on the symbol display device 95, etc.

On the other hand, if a negative result is obtained in step S2901 (it is determined that the V-winning flag is not stored), then in step S2905, the special win flag and special win game flag stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404 are deleted, and then the termination process for this special win game is terminated.

Next, the transition process to the jackpot game state in step S2506 of the normal process (Figure 74) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 81. Note that among the various processes included in this transition process, those that are the same as those included in the transition process to the special jackpot game state described above will be explained in a simplified manner as appropriate.

(Transition process to jackpot game state)
In the process of transitioning to the jackpot game state, first in step S3201, it is determined whether or not a special jackpot game is currently being played. If it is determined that a special jackpot game is currently being played, the process of transitioning to the jackpot game state is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that a special jackpot game is not currently being played, the process proceeds to step S3202, where it is determined whether or not a jackpot game is currently being played.

If it is determined that a jackpot game is not currently in progress, step S3203 determines whether a V-winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. That is, it determines whether or not to start a V-jackpot game. If it is determined that a V-winning flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3204, where it is determined whether or not various jackpot flags are stored in the aforementioned flag storage area 435. That is, it determines whether or not to start a normal jackpot game (not a V-jackpot game).

If it is determined that no jackpot flags are stored, the process of transitioning to the jackpot game state is terminated. However, if it is determined that the jackpot flags are stored, the process proceeds to step S3205 to determine whether it is the end of the game round. If it is determined that it is not the end of the game round, the process of transitioning to the jackpot game state is terminated.

If it is determined in step S3205 that the game round has ended, or if it is determined in step S3203 that the V-winning flag has been stored, the process proceeds to step S3206 to execute the jackpot game start process. In this start process, the jackpot game flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404, and the opening period setting process is executed.

In the following step S3207, the round setting process is executed. Specifically, it is determined which of the following is stored in the various flag storage area 435: the 6R jackpot flag, the 10R jackpot flag, or the 5RV jackpot flag. If it is determined that one of these flags is stored, the process proceeds to step S3208, where the round counter RC1, located in the various counter area 434 of the RAM 404, is set. Specifically, if the 6R jackpot flag is stored, "6" is set in the round counter RC1; if the 10R jackpot flag is stored, "10" is set in the round counter RC1; and if the 5RV jackpot flag is stored, "5" is set in the round counter RC1.

After step S3207 is executed, the opening command is set in step S3208, and then the external signal setting process is executed in step S3209. After that, the process of transitioning to the main jackpot game state is terminated.

Furthermore, if it is determined in step S3202 that a jackpot game is currently in progress, the process proceeds to step S3210 to determine whether the opening period has elapsed. If the opening period has not elapsed, the process of transitioning to the jackpot game state is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening period has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S3211, where a jackpot opening/closing process is executed to control the opening and closing of the large prize opening 331B of the variable prize device 83B. In the jackpot opening/closing process, if the large prize opening 331B of the variable prize device 83B is closed, the drive unit for the shutter 333B is activated, opening the large prize opening 331B, provided that the round counter RC1 is "1" or greater. Furthermore, if the large prize opening 331B is open, the drive unit for the shutter 333B is stopped, closing the large prize opening 331B, provided that a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the opening of the large prize opening 331B or a predetermined number (10 balls) have entered.

After executing the opening/closing process for the jackpot in step S3211, step S3212 determines whether the value of the round counter RC1 is "0". Step S3213 then determines whether the waiting time for the ending has elapsed. If the value of the round counter RC1 is not "0" or the waiting time for the ending has not elapsed, the process of transitioning to the jackpot game state ends.

On the other hand, if the value of the round counter RC1 is "0" and the waiting time for the ending has elapsed, the transition process at the end of the jackpot game is executed in step S3214, and then the transition process to the current jackpot game state is terminated. Here, the transition process at the end of the jackpot game in step S3214 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 82.

(Transition process at the end of a jackpot game)
In the transition process at the end of a jackpot game, the first step S3301 sets the high-frequency support mode B flag in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404. This switches the support mode provided by the electric mechanism 93A to high-frequency support mode B.

In the following step S3302, it is determined whether the current jackpot is a 6R jackpot or a 5RV jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether a 6R jackpot flag or a 5RV jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404.

If a positive result is obtained in step S3302, the process proceeds to step S3303, where the continuation count counter in the various counter areas 434 is set to "6". This ensures that high-frequency support mode B continues until the number of games played after the jackpot game (specifically, the number of games played related to the second operation port 92A) reaches six.

On the other hand, if a negative result is determined in step S3302, that is, if the current jackpot game was triggered by a 10R jackpot, the process proceeds to step S3304, and the continuation counter is set to "100". This ensures that high-frequency support mode B continues until the number of games played after the jackpot game ends (specifically, the number of games played related to the second operation port 92A) reaches 100.

After executing the processes in steps S3303 and S3304, the process proceeds to step S3305. In step S3305, the game count counters in the various counter areas 434 are reset (cleared to 0). Then, the process proceeds to step S3306, where the various flags for the jackpot game state stored in the various flag storage area 435 are erased, and the transition process at the end of this jackpot is completed.

(Regarding the basic flow of the game)
Next, the basic gameplay flow of this pachinko machine 10 will be explained with reference to Figure 83. Figure 83 is a block diagram showing the relationships between each game state.

As already explained, in normal gameplay where the support mode is set to low-frequency support mode, it is not possible to expect the ball to enter the second operating port 92A. Therefore, players should aim to shoot the balls along the left route (so-called left-handed shooting) and try to get them into the first operating port 91A.

When a ball enters the first operating port 91A, a draw is performed based on that entry. If the draw results in a 6R jackpot or a 10R jackpot, the game transitions to a jackpot state in which the variable prize entry device 83B is opened and closed over multiple rounds. Since only game balls flowing down the right route can enter the variable prize entry device 83B, the player increases the amount of rotation of the game ball launching handle 41 to launch game balls down the right route (so-called right-handed play). After the jackpot state ends, the game transitions to the above-mentioned chance zone (hereinafter referred to as the special game state), which is more advantageous to the player compared to the normal game state.

The special game states include a first special game state in which the support mode of the electric mechanism 93A becomes high-frequency support mode B and the number of game rounds related to the second operating port 92A is set to "6", and a second special game state in which the support mode of the electric mechanism 93A becomes high-frequency support mode B and the number of game rounds related to the second operating port 92A is set to "100". After the jackpot game state triggered by a 6R jackpot ends, the game transitions to the first special game state, and after the jackpot game state triggered by a 10R jackpot ends, the game transitions to the second special game state.

In the first special game state, the support mode becomes high-frequency support mode B, making it easier to win a prize in the second operating port 92A. Only game balls flowing down the right route can win a prize in the second operating port 92A. Therefore, when transitioning to the first special game state, a notification is issued prompting the player to continue shooting to the right even after the jackpot game has ended.

The first and second special game states will continue until the number of game rounds related to the second operation port 92A reaches the above-mentioned termination threshold (6 or 100 rounds). However, as already explained, the lottery based on winning at the second operation port 92A is more favorable than the lottery based on winning at the first operation port 91A, resulting in a higher probability of winning a special prize. The actual winning probability, including special prizes, increases significantly from 1/200 to 1/10.

Furthermore, the special game states include a fourth special game state in which the support mode becomes a low-frequency support mode, while the game rounds related to the second operation port 92A, which were acquired during the first or second special game state, are executed based on the reserves related to said second operation port 92A. If none of the game rounds during the first or second special game state result in a jackpot or a special win (i.e., all results are losses), the game transitions to the fourth special game state.

In this embodiment, the second operation port 92A has a hold function that limits the number of held items to four. Therefore, if four hold information items related to the second operation port 92A are stored at the end of high-frequency support mode B, it becomes possible to receive four more win/loss draws based on winning into the second operation port 92A even after high-frequency support mode B has ended. In other words, even if the support mode transitions to low-frequency support mode and the internal state is that of normal gameplay, the special game state is extended (continued) by the number of held items related to the second operation port 92A at the end of high-frequency support mode B. Incidentally, the probability of achieving a special win or a jackpot (continuation rate) during the four win/loss draws related to the second operation port 92A is approximately 35%. Furthermore, the total continuation rate, including the number of games played during the first special game state, is approximately 65%, and the total continuation rate, including the number of games played during the second special game state, is almost 100%.

If all four rounds of play during the fourth special game state result in a normal loss, and all the reserved information related to the second operation port 92A is consumed, the game will return to the normal game state. In other words, if the reserved information related to the second operation port 92A is used up without any special wins or jackpots occurring, the game will be downgraded from the special game state to the normal game state. This means the actual winning probability decreases from 1/10 to 1/200. In this case, the player will return to shooting the game balls to the left and play again aiming for a jackpot based on a ball entering the first operation port 91A.

In contrast, if a special win occurs in any of the first, second, or fourth special game states, the game transitions to a special win game state. In the special win game state, a special win game is executed in which the variable prize-winning device 83B opens and closes in the high-frequency winning pattern described above. Since only game balls flowing down the right route can enter the variable prize-winning device 83B, if a special win occurs, the player will play by shooting to the right. Furthermore, if a V-win occurs during this special win game, after the special win game ends, the game transitions to a V-jackpot game state in which the variable prize-winning device 83B opens and closes over multiple rounds (5 rounds).

Incidentally, when a special winning game is executed in a high-frequency winning pattern, the opening time of the variable winning device 83B and the period during which a V-win is permitted are longer than the game ball launch cycle (0.6 sec). Therefore, as long as the game balls are continuously launched towards the right route, a V-win can be easily achieved.

After the V-jackpot game state ends, the game transitions to the first special game state described above. Furthermore, if a jackpot occurs in any of the first, second, or fourth special game states, the game transitions to the jackpot game state. After the jackpot game state ends, if the jackpot game state was triggered by a 6R jackpot, the game transitions to the first special game state; if the jackpot game state was triggered by a 10R jackpot, the game transitions to the second special game state. In this way, by repeatedly hitting jackpots or special wins during the special game states, players have a chance to significantly increase their number of balls.

The special game states shown in this embodiment include a third special game state in which the support mode by the electric mechanism 93A becomes high-frequency support mode A, and the number of game rounds ending for the second operating port 92A becomes "1". In the third special game state, the high-frequency support mode A makes it easier to win prizes in the second operating port 92A. Only game balls flowing down the right route can win prizes in the second operating port 92A. Therefore, when transitioning to the third special game state, a notification prompting the player to shoot to the right is issued.

Here, the game is configured such that the game count counter is reset when the above-mentioned jackpot game state or jackpot game state ends, thereby resetting the ceiling. Furthermore, in the first normal game state, if the number of games played reaches the above-mentioned ceiling, the game transitions to the third special game state.

The third special game state will continue until the number of game rounds related to the second operation port 92A reaches the above-mentioned termination threshold (1 round). However, as already explained, the lottery based on winning at the second operation port 92A is more favorable than the lottery based on winning at the first operation port 91A, resulting in a higher probability of winning a special prize. The actual winning probability, including special prizes, increases significantly from 1/200 to 1/10.

If a special win occurs during the third special game state, the game transitions to the special win game state described above. If a V-entry occurs during this special win game state, the game transitions to the V-jackpot game state. After the V-jackpot game state ends, the game transitions to the first special game state. Furthermore, if a jackpot occurs during the third special game state, the game transitions to the jackpot game state described above. After this jackpot game state ends, the game transitions to either the first or second special game state.

In contrast, if none of the rounds played in the third special game state result in a jackpot or a special win (i.e., all results are losses), the game transitions to the fourth special game state. As already explained, this embodiment has a reserve function that limits the number of reserved balls stored in the second operation port 92A to four. Therefore, if four reserved balls are stored in the second operation port 92A at the end of high-frequency support mode A, it becomes possible to receive four more win/loss draws based on balls entering the second operation port 92A even after high-frequency support mode A has ended. In other words, even if the support mode transitions to low-frequency support mode and the game is internally in a normal game state, the above special game state is extended (continued) by the number of reserved balls in the second operation port 92A at the end of high-frequency support mode A. Incidentally, the probability of getting a special win or a jackpot in the four win/loss draws for the second operation port 92A (continuation rate) is approximately 35%. Furthermore, the total continuation rate, including the number of games played during the third special game state, is approximately 40%.

If all four rounds of play during the fourth special game state result in misses, and all the reserved information related to the second operation port 92A is consumed, the game will return to the normal game state described above. In other words, if the reserved information related to the second operation port 92A is used up without any special wins or jackpots occurring, the game will be downgraded from the special game state to the normal game state. In this case, the player will return to shooting the game balls to the left and play again, aiming for a jackpot based on a ball entering the first operation port 91A.

Furthermore, if the game ball is launched to the right route, the system is configured to avoid entering the first operation port 91A. However, immediately after transitioning to the special game state, there is a possibility that the reserved information related to the first operation port 91A acquired during the normal game state remains, and the reserved information related to the second operation port 92A has not yet been acquired. Although the system is configured to prioritize the consumption of reserved information related to the second operation port 92A over the reserved information related to the first operation port 91A, if the reserved information related to the second operation port 92A has not been acquired, the game rounds related to the first operation port 91A may be executed in the special game state. Although the lottery for the second operation port 92A has a higher degree of advantage than the lottery for the first operation port 91A, there is concern that it would be a significant disadvantage for the player if the high-frequency support mode ends without the game rounds related to the second operation port 92A being executed or with an insufficient number of executions. In this regard, as already explained, in this embodiment, the termination threshold number for the high-frequency support mode is set for each activation port. Therefore, even if a game round related to the first activation port 91A is executed during the special game state, this prevents the high-frequency support mode from ending before the game round related to the second activation port 92A is executed.

In this embodiment, the above-mentioned chance zone (special game state) is configured to execute special effects for the chance zone over multiple game rounds. Here, the configuration that forms the basis for these special effects for the chance zone, specifically the pre-confirmation process executed in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 as part of the prize entry process for the activation port (see step S2403 in Figure 73), will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 84.

(Pre-confirmation process)
In the pre-check process, first, in step S3401, a win/loss determination process is performed by referring to the win/loss determination table for the operation port and the value of the winning random number counter C1 obtained in step S2403. Specifically, it is determined whether the pending information obtained this time corresponds to a big win or a special win.

If a jackpot is detected, a positive determination is made in step S3402, and the process proceeds to step S3403. Information indicating a jackpot is stored in RAM 404, and information indicating a jackpot is stored in the pending command to be sent to the notification/performance control device 140.

If a special win is indicated, a negative determination is made in step S3402, and a positive determination is made in step S3404, before proceeding to step S3405. In step S3405, information indicating a special win is stored in RAM 404, and information indicating a special win is stored in the hold command to be sent to the notification/performance control device 140.

If the result is incorrect, a negative determination is made in steps S3402 and S3404, respectively, and this pre-verification process is terminated.

In the notification and performance control device 140's MPU 442, it is possible to determine in advance whether a jackpot or special win is likely based on the information contained in the hold command received from the main control device 162.

As already explained, in this embodiment, if the number of games played after the special game state (specifically, the jackpot game state or the V-jackpot game state) ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling), the game will transition to the third special game state. This third special game state corresponds to high-frequency support mode A, and by acquiring the reserved information related to the second operation port 92A during this third special game state, the special performance for the chance zone can be executed from the third special game state to the fourth special game state.

The special effects for the Chance Zone consist of three parts: an opening part that prompts the player to launch the game ball towards the second activation port 92A; a main part where the content of the effects is determined based on the results of all game rounds played in the third special game state and the fourth special game state that follows immediately; and an ending part that functions as a transition to the special game state after the win/loss result is displayed. The opening part begins when the game round in which the ceiling is reached ends, transitions to the main part when the first game round in the third special game state begins, and transitions to the ending part when that game round ends. After that, the ending part ends when the fourth special game state ends and the game returns to the normal game state.

In this embodiment, measures have been taken to ensure sufficient execution time for the main part of the special effects for the chance zone while avoiding an excessively long ending part. Specifically, for the game rounds related to the second operation port 92A that are executed after the number of game rounds executed after the special game state ends reaches the ceiling, the special variation display time table is referenced as the table for determining the variation display time. More specifically, the variation display time table for determining the variation display time for the game rounds related to the second operation port 92A executed immediately after reaching the ceiling is provided separately from the variation display time table referenced when determining the variation display time in other cases.

As shown in the schematic diagram in Figure 85, the display time for the variation in the second operation port 92A, which is executed immediately after reaching the ceiling (for example, the 201st game), is set to "60 seconds". For the four subsequent game rounds (the same number as the maximum number of reserved balls for the second operation port 92A) (for example, the 202nd to 205th game rounds), the display time for the variation is set to "0.5 seconds". In other words, the display time for the game round involving the second operation port 92A, executed immediately after reaching the ceiling, is longer than the sum of the display times for the four subsequent game rounds. This is a design choice to ensure sufficient video playback time, reduce the amount of data for special effects in the chance zone, avoid insufficient reserved balls for the second operation port 92A, and suppress any prolonged ending.

Next, we will provide a supplementary explanation of the gameplay flow upon entering the chance zone, referring to Figure 86. Figure 86 is a timing chart showing the gameplay flow upon entering the chance zone, illustrating the case where a special win occurs during the chance zone.

(Gameplay flow upon entering the chance zone)
At timing tf1 during normal gameplay in low-frequency support mode, a game round begins that marks the 199th game round played since the end of the special game state. At timing tf2, a game round begins that marks the 200th game round played since the end of the special game state, i.e., the ceiling is reached. Both of these game rounds result in a losing outcome. In the game round that reaches the ceiling, the symbol combination corresponding to reaching the ceiling ("1" symbol, "3" symbol, "4" symbol) is displayed on the display screen 95a (on the active line) of the symbol display device 95, clearly indicating to the player that reaching the ceiling will trigger a transition to the chance zone.

At the timing of tf3, when the number of game rounds reaching the ceiling ends, the support mode switches to high-frequency support mode A, and the opening part of the special performance for the chance zone (third special game state) corresponding to the chance zone begins on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95. Specifically, at the timing of tf3, the number of reserved balls related to the second operation port 92A is "0", and gameplay in the chance zone waits until a ball enters the second operation port 92A. In the opening part described above, the display screen 95a displays the message "If you can catch the fairy, a BONUS is guaranteed" as an indication of the start of the chance zone, and the BGM switches to one corresponding to the chance zone. Then, at the timing of tf3, a message prompting the launch of the game ball towards the right route (right-hand shooting notification) begins.

Subsequently, at the timing of tf4 when a prize is awarded to the second operating port 92A, the special performance for the chance zone transitions from the opening part to the main part. As a result, the display screen 95a shows the fairy character and the girl character chasing the fairy character. In this embodiment, after transitioning to the main part, a predetermined waiting period elapses before the final display (result display) in the main part is determined. That is, at a predetermined timing during the main part, it is decided whether the result display will indicate successful capture of the fairy or failure to capture the fairy.

In the example shown in Figure 86, the number of reserved balls related to the second operation port 92A reaches its maximum limit at the timing of tf5 in the main part, specifically before the predetermined timing mentioned above. Of these reserved balls, the fourth one corresponds to a special win. Therefore, at the end of the main part, a result display indicating successful capture of the fairy is executed, clearly informing the player that they have won. The right-hand shooting notification mentioned above ends at the timing of tf5, when the number of reserved balls related to the second operation port 92A reaches its maximum limit.

Subsequently, at the timing of tf6, when the game round in the third special game state ends, the support mode switches from high-frequency support mode to low-frequency support mode, and the special effects for the chance zone transition to the ending part. Furthermore, if the electric mechanism 93A is in the open state at the timing of tf6, it will be forcibly switched to the closed state, preventing further entries into the second operating opening 92A.

After transitioning from the third special game state to the fourth special game state, the remaining reserved balls related to the second operation port 92A are quickly consumed at timings tf6, tf7, tf8, and tf9. In the example shown in Figure 86, the last game round related to the second operation port 92A corresponds to a special win, and the game transitions to the special win game state at timing tf10, when that game round ends. At timing tf10, the special effects for the chance zone (specifically the ending part) end, and the effects for the special win game state are executed.

According to the fifth embodiment described in detail above, if the number of game rounds (number of games played) after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without resulting in a winning outcome, the game transitions to a third special game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A. In high-frequency support mode A, it becomes possible to win in the second operation port 92A, and the judgment (lottery) based on winning in the second operation port 92A can result in not only a jackpot but also a special win. Therefore, the degree of advantage (probability of winning) in the judgment is greatly increased. In other words, reaching the ceiling transitions to a chance zone with a higher degree of advantage than the previous game state. By configuring the game to transition to a chance zone upon reaching the ceiling in this way, the player's desire to play can be effectively stimulated. This is desirable in suppressing the monotony of the game and increasing the level of attention the player receives to the game.

When the ceiling is reached, a prize is awarded by entering the second operating port 92A. This not only suppresses the reduction of the player's remaining balls, but also increases the probability of transitioning to a special game state (such as a jackpot game state or a special bonus game state). In this configuration, the benefits can be effectively realized even with a shorter stay in high-frequency support mode A, thus effectively suppressing the prolonged gameplay after reaching the ceiling.

The number of games played until the ceiling is reached is reset when the high-frequency support mode A, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling, ends. This configuration is preferable for achieving a configuration where the ceiling is shallow, the benefits of reaching the ceiling are small, and a weaker ceiling function is activated in short cycles. In other words, it is preferable for suppressing monotony in gameplay.

The number of games played related to the termination criteria is counted when a game is played using the second operation port 92A. This configuration helps to prevent the benefits of reaching the ceiling from being fully realized.

The probability of a special win in the lottery based on winning at the second operation port 92A is 1/10. The second operation port's reserve area Rb is defined to have a number equal to the sum of the maximum number of reserve information memories and the aforementioned termination criteria count, which is equal to the reciprocal of the above probability. By defining the maximum number of memories memories and the termination criteria count in this way, the effect of generating the above-mentioned chance zone in short cycles and suppressing monotony in the game can be more effectively achieved.

<Variation 1>
In the fifth embodiment described above, the number of times the third special game state transitions upon reaching the ceiling is triggered is set to be less than the number of times the first special game state transitions upon reaching the ceiling is triggered (6 times), but the invention is not limited to this. The number of times the third special game state transitions upon reaching the ceiling is triggered may be set to be more than the number of times the first special game state transitions upon reaching the ceiling is triggered, or the number of times the first special game state transitions upon reaching the ceiling is triggered may be set to be the same as the number of times the first special game state transitions upon reaching the ceiling is triggered.

<Modified Example 2>
In the fifth embodiment described above, the number of times the third special game state is transitioned to upon reaching the ceiling is set to be less than the number of times the first special game state is transitioned to upon reaching the jackpot (6 times) and the number of times the second special game state is transitioned to upon reaching the ceiling (1 time), but the embodiment is not limited to this. The embodiment may be set to be more than the number of times the third special game state is transitioned to upon reaching the ceiling is transitioned to upon reaching the ceiling, or the number of times the first special game state is transitioned to upon reaching the jackpot and the number of times the second special game state is transitioned to upon reaching the jackpot is set to be the same as the number of times the third special game state is transitioned to upon reaching the ceiling is transitioned to

<Example 3>
In the fifth embodiment described above, when a special win occurs, the variable prize device 83B is opened in a high-frequency prize-winning mode, effectively guaranteeing a V-win. However, a first special win is also possible, in which the variable prize device 83B is opened in a high-frequency prize-winning mode, effectively guaranteeing a V-win, and a second special win is possible, in which the variable prize device 83B is opened in a low-frequency prize-winning mode, effectively making a V-win impossible.

<Modification 4>
In the fifth embodiment described above, the probability of winning a jackpot in the lottery based on the ball entering the first operating slot was set to 1/200, and the number of games played to reach the ceiling was set to 200. In other words, the number of games played to reach the ceiling was set to coincide with the reciprocal of the winning probability. It is also possible to change this and set the number of games played to reach the ceiling to an integer smaller than the reciprocal of the winning probability (for example, 50, 100, or 150 games).

<Example 5>
In normal gameplay mode with low-frequency support mode enabled, the game progresses based on ball entry into the first operating port 91A. In this case, the probability of a jackpot is 1/200, and the number of games required to reach the ceiling is set to be the reciprocal of this probability. It is also possible to change this and set the number of games required to reach the ceiling to be less than the reciprocal of this probability. By setting the number of games required to reach the ceiling in this way, the effect of generating the above-mentioned chance zone in a short cycle and suppressing monotony in the game can be more effectively achieved.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the fifth embodiment described above, the probability of hitting a jackpot or a special win during the special game state (chance zone) that is entered upon reaching the ceiling is set to approximately 40%, and even if the chance zone is entered upon reaching the ceiling, the configuration is such that in about half of the cases the chance zone ends without winning either a jackpot or a special win. In other words, by setting the ceiling low, the frequency of entering the chance zone upon reaching the ceiling is increased, while the configuration is such that the advantage in the chance zone does not become excessively high, thereby suppressing monotony in the game. This embodiment differs from the fifth embodiment in that, while the ceiling is set high, the benefits upon reaching the ceiling are strengthened to enhance the player's rescue function. The characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the fifth embodiment. First, the win/loss table for the operation opening will be described with reference to Figure 87.

(Validity table for the operating port)
As shown in Figure 87(a), in the win/loss table referenced when drawing lots based on winnings in the first operating port 91A, there are three random number values that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information): "7", "307", and "507". In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "7", "307", and "507" correspond to jackpots. All random number values that do not correspond to a jackpot correspond to a loss (normal loss). As a result, the probability of winning a jackpot is 1/200.

As shown in Figure 87(b), in the win/loss table referenced during the lottery based on winning at the second operating port 92A, the random number values that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) are "7", "307", and "507", totaling three values. In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "7", "307", and "507" correspond to jackpots. Furthermore, in this win/loss table, a total of 120 values—"3", "5", "13", "15", "23", "25"... "583", "585", "593", and "595"—correspond to special wins. All random number values that do not correspond to either jackpots or special wins correspond to losses (normal losses). As a result, the probability of a jackpot is 1/200 and the probability of a special win is 1/5.

In this embodiment, the lottery results based on winning entries into the first and second operating ports 91A and 92A do not include the special misses shown in the first embodiment. However, this is not limited to this; the system may be configured to allow for special misses in the lottery based on winning entries into the first operating port 91A, or in the lottery based on winning entries into the second operating port 92A, or in either the lottery based on winning entries into the first or second operating port 92A.

In the case of a 6R jackpot or a 10R jackpot, the game transitions to a high-frequency support mode B (first special game state or second special game state) after the end of the special game state (jackpot game state) by the electric mechanism 93A, similar to the fifth embodiment. However, as shown in Figure 88, the termination criterion count is set to "1" when a 6R jackpot occurs, and to "3" when a 10R jackpot occurs.

Furthermore, in the case of a special win → special win game state → V-entry → 5RV jackpot, the game state (first special game state) transitions to a high-frequency support mode B provided by the electric mechanism 93A after the special game state (jackpot game state) ends. This is also the same as the fifth embodiment. However, in the case of a 5RV jackpot, the above termination criterion count is set to "1 time".

In other words, if a 5RV jackpot or a 6R jackpot is achieved, the probability of winning is increased for a total of 5 times: the number of times the game ends (1 time) + the maximum number of reserved balls stored by the second operation port 92A (4 times). During this time, the probability of winning a jackpot or a special jackpot is approximately 67%. Similarly, if a 10R jackpot is achieved, the probability of winning is increased for a total of 7 times: the number of times the game ends (3 times) + the maximum number of reserved balls stored by the second operation port 92A (4 times). During this time, the probability of winning a jackpot or a special jackpot is approximately 80%.

In this embodiment as well, if the number of game rounds played after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling), the game transitions to a game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A (third special game state), similar to the first embodiment. This high-frequency support mode A game state continues until the number of game rounds played after the opening/closing execution mode ends, specifically the number of game rounds related to the second operation port 92A, reaches the termination criterion number (time reduction rounds: 100 rounds in this embodiment). Upon reaching this termination criterion number, the game transitions to a game state corresponding to low-frequency support mode (normal game state).

In the normal gameplay state corresponding to High-Frequency Support Mode A, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling, the probability of winning is increased for a total of 104 spins: the number of spins until termination (100 spins) + the maximum number of reserved spins stored for the second operation port 92A (4 spins). During this time, the probability of hitting a jackpot or special win is almost 100%, and the increased winning probability upon reaching the ceiling makes a jackpot or special win during the chance zone highly likely.

In this embodiment, the number of games played before reaching the ceiling is set to 600. When the game transitions to a high-frequency support mode A upon reaching the ceiling, the ceiling is reset (the game count counter is reset to 0) when that game state ends. In other words, the game is configured to transition to the above-mentioned chance zone every 600 games.

(Regarding the basic flow of the game)
Next, the basic gameplay flow of this pachinko machine 10 will be explained with reference to Figure 89. Figure 89 is a block diagram showing the relationships between each game state.

In normal gameplay, when the support mode is set to low-frequency support mode, it is not possible to expect the ball to enter the second operating port 92A. Therefore, players should aim to shoot the balls along the left route (so-called left-handed shooting) and target the first operating port 91A.

When a ball enters the first operating port 91A, a draw is performed based on that entry. If the draw results in a 6R jackpot or a 10R jackpot, the game transitions to a jackpot state in which the variable prize entry device 83B is opened and closed over multiple rounds. Since only game balls flowing down the right route can enter the variable prize entry device 83B, the player increases the amount of rotation of the game ball launching handle 41 to launch game balls down the right route (so-called right-handed shooting). After the jackpot state ends, the game transitions to the above-mentioned chance zone (special game state), which is more advantageous to the player compared to the normal game state.

The special game states include: a first special game state in which the support mode of the electric mechanism 93A becomes high-frequency support mode B and the number of game rounds related to the second operation port 92A is set to "1"; a second special game state in which the support mode of the electric mechanism 93A becomes high-frequency support mode B and the number of game rounds related to the second operation port 92A is set to "3"; a third special game state in which the support mode of the electric mechanism 93A becomes high-frequency support mode A and the number of game rounds related to the second operation port 92A is set to "100"; and a fourth special game state in which game rounds related to the second operation port 92A are executed based on the reserves acquired during the first to third special game states.

After a jackpot game state triggered by a 6R jackpot ends, the game transitions to the first special game state. After a jackpot game state triggered by a 10R jackpot ends, the game transitions to the second special game state. If a V-entry occurs during a special jackpot game state triggered by a special win, and the 5R V jackpot game state ends, the game transitions to the first special game state. If the number of games played after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling: 600 games), the game transitions to the third special game state. If the number of games played in the first to third special game states without winning either a jackpot or a special win (all resulting in losses) reaches the above termination threshold, the game transitions to the fourth special game state.

The first to third special game states will continue until the number of game rounds related to the second operation port 92A reaches the above termination criteria number (1, 3, or 100 rounds). However, the lottery based on winning at the second operation port 92A is more favorable than the lottery based on winning at the first operation port 91A, resulting in a higher probability of winning a special prize. The actual winning probability, including special prizes, increases significantly from 1/200 to 1/5.

Incidentally, the probability of achieving a special win or a jackpot (continuation rate) during the four draws related to the second operating port 92A is approximately 60%. Furthermore, the total continuation rate, including the rounds played during the first special game state, is approximately 67%, the total continuation rate, including the rounds played during the second special game state, is approximately 80%, and the total continuation rate, including the rounds played during the third special game state, is almost 100%.

According to the sixth embodiment described in detail above, if the number of game rounds played after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without resulting in a win, the game transitions to the third special game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A. However, even if high-frequency support mode A is activated, if the probability of actually winning remains low, the following inconveniences may occur. Specifically, even if the ceiling is reached, the period until the player receives the sufficient benefit (transition to the special game state) that they expect may be prolonged, or the chance zone including high-frequency support mode A may end before the player receives the sufficient benefit (a quick run-through occurs). This is undesirable as it significantly reduces the player's motivation to play. In this regard, the configuration shown in this embodiment makes it possible to enter the second operation port 92A by transitioning from low-frequency support mode to high-frequency support mode, and the judgment (lottery) based on entry into the second operation port 92A can result in not only a big win but also a special win. In other words, the probability of winning (probability of transitioning to the special game state) is greatly increased by reaching the ceiling. Furthermore, the sum of the maximum number of reserved information items (e.g., 4) and the termination threshold count (e.g., 100 times) in the second operation slot's reserved area Rb (e.g., 104 times) is set to be greater than or equal to the reciprocal of the probability of a winning result. This allows for a configuration where reaching the ceiling makes a transition to a special game state highly likely or virtually certain. This effectively suppresses the aforementioned problems.

Furthermore, if there is a limit to the number of plays that can be performed in high-frequency support mode A, which is triggered when the ceiling is reached, the concern of the aforementioned "runaway" scenario becomes stronger. In this regard, the above configuration mitigates the impact of the limit on the number of plays when the ceiling is reached. In other words, even when employing high-frequency support mode A with a play limit upon reaching the ceiling, the occurrence of the above-mentioned problem can be effectively suppressed.

When transitioning from low-frequency support mode to high-frequency support mode A, the probability of winning can be significantly increased. This is desirable because it shortens the duration of stay in high-frequency support mode A, thereby suppressing the prolonged period before the aforementioned relief function upon reaching the ceiling is activated.

In normal gameplay under the low-frequency support mode, if a jackpot is achieved, the game transitions to a special game state, and then to either the first or second special game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode B. In this configuration, the termination threshold for high-frequency support mode B, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling, is greater than the termination threshold for high-frequency support mode A, which is triggered by a special jackpot. Therefore, transitioning to the special game state upon reaching the ceiling is prioritized. This configuration allows the aforementioned relief function to function effectively.

In a configuration where both High-Frequency Support Mode A, triggered by reaching the ceiling, and High-Frequency Support Mode B, triggered by a winning result, are executed based on winning entries into the second operation port 92A, the benefits received when a winning result occurs during a High-Frequency Support Mode are the same. While increasing the benefits received when a winning result occurs is desirable to improve player satisfaction, there is a concern that this may lead to an overly powerful relief function upon reaching the ceiling, as the expected benefits upon reaching the ceiling also increase. This concern is particularly significant in configurations where reaching the ceiling makes a transition to a special game state highly likely or virtually certain, as described above. In this regard, as shown in this embodiment, by setting the upper limit of the number of attempts (ceiling) to be greater than the reciprocal of the probability of a jackpot (1/200), the expected benefits upon reaching the ceiling can be increased while reducing the opportunities to reach the ceiling, thereby eliminating the above concern.

<Variation 1>
According to the sixth embodiment described above, in the third special game state transitioned to upon reaching the ceiling, the number of rounds to terminate is set such that the probability of hitting a jackpot or a special win during the special game state is approximately 100%, but the invention is not limited to this. In the third special game state transitioned to upon reaching the ceiling, the number of rounds to terminate may be set such that the probability of hitting a jackpot or a special win during the special game state is 95% or higher (preferably 99% or higher).

<Modified Example 2>
In order to create a configuration where reaching the ceiling makes the next big win highly likely, the following configuration is also possible. That is, the game count counter is reset when the ceiling is reached, and the number of games played to reach the ceiling and the number of games played to reach the termination criteria in the third special game state to which the player transitions upon reaching the ceiling are the same, or the number of games played to reach the termination criteria in the third special game state to which the player transitions upon reaching the ceiling is greater than the number of games played to reach the ceiling.

<Example 3>
In the third special game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A, which is entered upon reaching the ceiling, if a special win occurs, the display time of the changing symbols on the second operation port display unit D2 may be shortened compared to when a special win occurs under other circumstances. By shortening the display time of the changing symbols when a special win occurs during the fourth special game state, the time required to transition to the special game state is reduced, allowing the player to quickly enjoy the expected benefits.

<Modification 4>
Compared to the special game states corresponding to high-frequency support mode B (first special game state and second special game state) that are transitioned to when the ceiling is reached, the special game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A (third special game state) that is transitioned to when the ceiling is reached may be configured to have stronger support from the electric mechanism 93A (for example, the period during which it remains open is longer). With such a configuration, the frequency of winning into the second operation port 92A increases in high-frequency support mode A triggered by reaching the ceiling, and the number of reserve information stored in the reserve area Rb for the second operation port increases. Therefore, the display time of the changing symbols on the display unit D2 for the operation port during the game round after reaching the ceiling (operation period for the game round) is shortened, and the period from reaching the ceiling to being able to enjoy the above benefits can be effectively suppressed.

<Seventh Embodiment>
One of the features of this embodiment is that it incorporates a mechanism to suppress monotony in gameplay when a 6R regular jackpot is achieved and the game transitions to a third normal game state corresponding to a low probability mode and high-frequency support mode B. The following describes the characteristic configuration of this embodiment, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

(Game board unit)
In the first embodiment described above, the game board unit 80 (game board 80a) had a symmetrical gauge (see Figure 6), but in this embodiment, the game board unit 80A (game board 80aA) has an asymmetrical gauge. The game board unit 80A will be described in detail below with reference to Figure 90. Figure 90 is a front view of the game board unit 80A.

The game board 80aA has multiple openings of varying sizes that penetrate its own thickness (front-to-back direction). Each opening is equipped with a general prize entry point 81, an operating port unit 82A, a variable prize entry device 83A, a through gate 84A, and the like. When game balls flow into the general prize entry point 81, the operating port unit 82A, or the variable prize entry device 83A, these balls are detected by detection sensors (not shown) provided corresponding to each entry point, and based on the detection results, the player is awarded a predetermined number of prize balls (dispensing of game balls) or other benefits. Additionally, an out port 86 is provided at the bottom of the game board 80aA, and game balls that do not enter the various entry points are discharged from the game area PE through the out port 86.

Furthermore, the game board 80aA is equipped with numerous game pins 87 to appropriately distribute and adjust the flow path of the game balls, as well as various components (mechanisms) such as windmills. These various configurations, including the game pins 87 and windmills, differentiate the flow path of the game balls, adjusting them so that winning into the general prize winning slots 81, etc., occurs with a reasonable probability.

The operating port unit 82A, similar to the operating port unit 82 shown in the first embodiment, is composed of a first operating port 91A and a second operating port 92A disposed directly below the first operating port 91A. In particular, the second operating port 92A is equipped with an electrically operated mechanism 93A, which functions as an openable/closable ball entry assist device (ball entry assist means) or an open/close member (open/close means).

The game board 80aA is provided with a center frame 96A surrounding the display screen 95aA of the pattern display device 95A. The center frame 96A protrudes from the front of the game board 80aA, and the flow path of the game balls flowing down the game area PE is broadly divided into a route that bypasses the center frame 96A from the right side and a route that bypasses it from the left side, similar to the first embodiment described above. However, in this embodiment, the arrangement of the first operation port 91A, second operation port 92A, variable prize device 83A, and through gate 84A has been modified so that game balls launched along the left route can enter the first operation port 91A and the second operation port 92A, but cannot enter the variable prize device 83A and the through gate 84A. Similarly, game balls launched along the right route can enter the second operation port 92A, the through gate 84A, and the variable prize device 83A, but cannot enter the first operation port 91A. It is also possible to configure the system so that game balls launched along the left route cannot enter the second operation port 92A.

By switching the launch route of the game ball between the right and left routes depending on the game state, it becomes possible to gain an advantage in the game. This encouragement of skillful play helps to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

(Retained ball storage area)
In this embodiment, the configuration for storing hold information based on winning entries into the operating ports 91A and 92A differs from that of the first embodiment. The configuration for storing hold information in this embodiment will now be described with reference to the schematic diagram in Figure 91.

The ball storage area 432A shown in this embodiment includes a first operation port storage area Ra that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 when a ball enters the first operation port 91A, and a second operation port storage area Rb that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 when a ball enters the second operation port 92A.

The first operation port's hold area Ra consists of four areas (Area 1 to Area 4). When multiple consecutive entries occur into the first operation port 91A, the numerical information is stored chronologically in the order of Area 1 → Area 2 → Area 3 → Area 4. Similarly, the second operation port's hold area Rb consists of four areas (Area 1 to Area 4). When multiple consecutive entries occur into the second operation port 92A, the numerical information (hold information) is stored chronologically in the order of Area 1 → Area 2 → Area 3 → Area 4.

In this embodiment, if hold information is stored in the second operation port hold area Rb, the system is configured to preferentially move the hold information stored in the second operation port hold area Rb (specifically, the first area) to the execution area AE. Furthermore, if no hold information is stored in the second operation port hold area Rb, but hold information is stored in the first operation port hold area Ra, the system is configured to move the hold information stored in the first operation port hold area Ra (specifically, the first area) to the execution area AE.

In the first embodiment described above, the lottery based on winning entries into the first operating port 91 and the second operating port 92 was configured to result in a special loss. However, this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that only one of the lottery entries based on winning entries into the first operating port 91 or the second operating port 92 is configured to result in a special loss. The winning/losing table for the operating ports in this embodiment will now be described with reference to Figures 92 and 93.

(Validity table for the operating port)
As shown in Figure 92, the win/loss tables for the first operating port include a win/loss table for the low probability mode (low probability win/loss information group) and a win/loss table for the high probability mode (high probability win/loss information group).

When the lottery is conducted based on a win in the first operating port 91A, the win/loss table for low probability mode (Figure 92(a)) is referenced, and the random numbers that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) are a total of 6: "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507". In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to jackpot results. On the other hand, when the win/loss table for high probability mode (Figure 92(b)) is referenced during the lottery, the random numbers that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) are a total of 30: "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107"... "597". In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1, which range from 0 to 599, "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107"... "597" correspond to the jackpot results. All random number values that do not correspond to the jackpot correspond to the losing results (more specifically, the normal losing results). Therefore, in the lottery based on the entry into the first operating port 91A, the configuration is such that the "special losing" described in the first embodiment does not occur.

As shown in Figure 93, the second operation port has two win/loss tables: one for the low-probability mode (low-probability win/loss information group) and another for the high-probability mode (high-probability win/loss information group).

When the lottery is conducted based on a win in the second operating port 92A, the win/loss table for low probability mode (Figure 93(a)) is referenced, and the random numbers that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) are a total of 6: "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507". In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to jackpot results. On the other hand, when the win/loss table for high probability mode (Figure 93(b)) is referenced during the lottery, the random numbers that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) are a total of 30: "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107"... "597". In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107"... "597" correspond to jackpot results. Furthermore, in situations where the win/loss tables for low probability mode and high probability mode are referenced during the draw based on the entry into the second operation opening 92A, the random number values that result in a special miss (i.e., special miss information) are all "5", "15", "25", "35"... "585", and "595", totaling 60 values. In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "5", "15", "25", "35"... "585", and "595" correspond to special miss results. Finally, all random number values that do not correspond to either a jackpot or a special miss correspond to a miss result (more specifically, a normal miss result).

Thus, in this embodiment, the lottery based on winning at the first operating port 91A is configured so that it does not result in a special loss, and the winning destination corresponding to a special loss is limited to the second operating port 92A, to which the electric mechanism 93A is attached.

Furthermore, two distribution tables are provided: one for the first operation port (see Figure 94(a)) and another for the second operation port (see Figure 94(b)). For the first operation port's distribution table, values of "0 to 14" from the type counter C2 (0 to 29) correspond to 6R regular jackpot A, while values of "15 to 29" correspond to 6R probability-changing jackpot. For the second operation port's distribution table, values of "0 to 14" from the type counter C2 (0 to 29) correspond to 6R regular jackpot B, while values of "15 to 29" correspond to 6R probability-changing jackpot.

Here, we will compare the various types of jackpots by referring to the schematic diagram in Figure 95. In the case of a 6R probability variation jackpot, after the special game state ends, the game transitions to a second normal game state where the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode B. This second normal game state continues until the next jackpot occurs.

If a 6R regular jackpot A or 6R regular jackpot B occurs, the game transitions to a third regular game state corresponding to low probability mode and high frequency support mode B after the special game state ends. As already explained, after transitioning to the third regular game state, if the number of games played during that third regular game state reaches the termination threshold, the game transitions to a first regular game state corresponding to low probability mode and low frequency support mode. In other words, the third regular game state has a limit on the number of games played. In this embodiment, the counting of games played during the third regular game state is limited to games played based on winning a prize in the second operation port 92A.

If a 6R regular jackpot A occurs, the termination threshold is set to "10 times," and if a 6R regular jackpot B occurs, the termination threshold is set to "20 times." As already explained, the maximum number of reserved balls stored in the second operation port 92A is "4." Therefore, if a 6R regular jackpot A occurs, the second operation port 92A will be played a maximum of 14 times (10 times + 4 reserved balls), and if a 6R regular jackpot B occurs, the second operation port 92A will be played a maximum of 24 times (20 times + 4 reserved balls).

In this embodiment, one of its features is that if a special error occurs during the limited-use high-frequency support mode, the termination criteria for the high-frequency support mode are overwritten (reset), effectively extending the high-frequency support mode. The following explanation, referring to Figure 96, will focus on the differences from the first embodiment regarding the processing required to achieve this function, specifically the processing for switching support modes.

(Processing for switching support modes)
In the support mode switching process, first, in step S3501, it is determined whether the current support mode is high-frequency support mode A or high-frequency support mode B. If the determination in step S3501 is positive, the process proceeds to step S3502. In step S3502, it is determined whether the count limit flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. If the determination in step S3502 is negative, the switching process ends there. If the determination in step S3502 is positive, the process proceeds to step S3503.

In step S3503, it is determined whether the result of the current game round is a special loss. If the result in step S3503 is negative, the process proceeds to step S3506. In step S3506, the continuation count counter in the various counter area 434 is updated. Specifically, the value of the continuation count counter is decremented by "1". In the following step S3507, it is determined whether the value of the continuation count counter is "0". If the result in step S3507 is negative, the main switching process ends. If the result in step S3507 is positive, the process proceeds to step S3508, where the high-frequency support mode flag (specifically the high-frequency support mode A flag and the high-frequency support mode B flag) and the count limit flag stored in the various flag storage area 435 are cleared, and the main switching process ends. Clearing the high-frequency support mode flag switches the support mode from high-frequency support mode to low-frequency support mode.

Returning to the explanation of step S3503, if a positive result is obtained in step S3503, the high-frequency support mode A flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. At this time, if the high-frequency support mode B flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404, the high-frequency support mode B flag is erased. The count limit flag stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404 remains unchanged. As a result, the support mode of the electric mechanism 93A becomes high-frequency support mode A.

In the following step S3505, the continuation count counters in the various counter areas 434 of RAM 404 are overwritten (reset), and this switching process is terminated. Specifically, the continuation count counter is set to "20". This effectively extends the high-frequency support mode.

Returning to the explanation of step S3501, if a negative result is determined in step S3501, the process proceeds to step S3509. In step S3509, it is determined whether the result of the lottery for this game round is a special miss or not. If a negative result is determined in step S3509, the switching process ends there. If a positive result is determined in step S3509, the process proceeds to step S3510. In step S3510, the high-frequency support mode A flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. This switches the support mode by the electric mechanism 93A to high-frequency support mode A. In the next step S3511, the count limit flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. Then, in step S3512, the continuation count counter in the various counter area 434 of RAM 404 is set, and the switching process ends. Specifically, "20" is set in the continuation count counter. As a result, high-frequency support mode A will continue until 20 game rounds related to the second operating port 92A are executed.

(How to play the game)
Now, let's refer to Figure 97 to explain the game flow. Figure 97 is a block diagram showing the relationships between each game state.

The first normal game state, which corresponds to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode, consists of a main stage and a special stage (mission stage). The main stage is the stage where the player stays when a game round is executed based on a win at the first operation port 91A, and the special stage is the stage where the player stays when a game round is executed based on a win at the second operation port 92A.

More specifically, the special stage is a temporary stage where the player stays when transitioning from the third normal game state (corresponding to low probability mode and high-frequency support mode B) or the fourth normal game state (corresponding to low probability mode and high-frequency support mode A) to the first normal game state. The maximum number of game rounds that can be played matches the maximum number of reserved balls that can be stored in the reserved area Rb for the second operation port. In other words, immediately after transitioning from the third or fourth normal game state to the first normal game state, the player moves to the special stage, provided that reserved ball information related to the second operation port 92A is stored. If no jackpot or special miss occurs in this special stage—that is, if all reserved balls related to the second operation port 92A end in normal misses—the player moves from the special stage to the main stage.

As described above, the first normal game state corresponds to the low-frequency support mode. Therefore, even if a support is triggered by launching a game ball to the right route, entry into the second operation port 92A is effectively avoided. Furthermore, since game balls launched to the right route cannot enter the first operation port 91A, it becomes difficult to participate in the lottery based on entry into operation ports 91A and 92A. On the other hand, while game balls launched to the left route avoid entry into the second operation port 92A, entry into the first operation port 91A is possible. For these reasons, aiming for the left route is more advantageous for the player than aiming for the right route. Note that if a game ball is launched to the right route during the first game state, a warning will be issued prompting the player to return the launch target to the left route.

If a 6R probability-changing jackpot is achieved during the lottery in the first normal game state, the game transitions to the second normal game state, which is a high-probability mode and corresponds to high-frequency support mode B, via a special game state. The second normal game state corresponds to high-frequency support mode B, allowing players to play while minimizing investment (reduction of balls) by launching game balls to the right route. During the second normal game state, game balls launched to the right route enter the second operation port 92A, and the game progresses primarily through the rounds related to the second operation port 92A. As mentioned above, there is approximately a 1/10 chance of a special miss in the lottery based on entry into the second operation port 92A, but special misses during the second normal game state are invalid and treated as normal misses. In other words, even if a special miss occurs during the second normal game state, it will not trigger a transition to the fourth normal game state, which is a low-probability mode and corresponds to high-frequency support mode A.

If a 6R regular jackpot is achieved during the lottery in the first or second normal game state, the game transitions to a special game state and then to a third normal game state, which is a low-probability mode and corresponds to high-frequency support mode B. The third normal game state corresponds to high-frequency support mode B, allowing players to reduce their investment (decrease in balls) by launching game balls along the right route.

During the third normal game state, game balls launched via the right route enter the second operation port 92A, and the game progresses primarily through the rounds related to the second operation port 92A. As mentioned above, in the lottery based on balls entering the second operation port 92A, there is approximately a 1/10 chance of a special miss. If a special miss occurs during the third normal game state, the support mode switches from high-frequency support mode B to high-frequency support mode A, and the termination threshold is set to "20" rounds. In other words, the game transitions from the third normal game state to the fourth normal game state.

If a 6R probability-changing jackpot occurs during the fourth normal game state, the game transitions to the second normal game state, which is a high-probability mode and corresponds to high-frequency support mode B, via a special game state. On the other hand, if a special miss occurs during the fourth normal game state, the termination threshold is reset to "20," and the fourth normal game state is extended. In this way, by looping the fourth normal game state, players can continue playing while minimizing the decrease in their tokens (investment).

If the game progresses without any jackpots or special misses during the fourth normal game state, and the number of game rounds played (specifically, the game rounds related to the second operation port 92A) reaches the termination threshold (20 rounds), the game will transition to the first normal game state. Specifically, if the number of reserved balls related to the second operation port 92A is "0", the game will transition to the main stage; if the number of reserved balls related to the second operation port 92A is anything other than "0", the game will transition to the special stage.

In the special stage, a lottery based on winning in the second operation slot 92A will be conducted for the number of reserved balls. If the lottery based on winning in the second operation slot 92A results in a special miss, the game will transition to the fourth normal game state, which is a low-probability mode and corresponds to high-frequency support mode A.

According to the seventh embodiment described in detail above, if a normal jackpot result occurs in the first normal game state, the game transitions to the third normal game state via a special game state. The third normal game state corresponds to high-frequency support mode B, and the decrease in the number of balls held is suppressed by increasing the number of balls entering the second operation port 92A. The third normal game state has a limit on the number of times it can be played, and when the number of game rounds played in the third normal game state reaches the termination criterion number (first termination criterion number), the game transitions to the first normal game state which corresponds to low-frequency support mode. This makes it difficult for balls to enter the second operation port 92A. Here, in the lottery based on balls entering the second operation port 92A, a special losing result may occur. If a special losing result occurs in the third normal game state, the game transitions to the fourth normal game state without going through the special game state. The fourth normal game state corresponds to high-frequency support mode A. Similar to the third normal game state, game rounds related to the second operation port 92A are executed, and this state continues until the number of game rounds reaches the termination criterion (second termination criterion). If the game transitions from the third normal game state to the fourth normal game state, the game rounds related to the second operation port 92A continue to progress. This makes it possible to aim for a jackpot while minimizing the reduction of the player's ball count. By diversifying the gameplay in this way, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

If a special miss occurs during the fourth normal game state, the termination threshold (second termination threshold) is reset. In other words, the fourth normal game state loops. Because this loop bypasses the special game state, the game proceeds smoothly even if the loop repeats.

The second termination criterion count is set to be the same as the first termination criterion count. Therefore, when transitioning from the third normal game state to the fourth normal game state, it is possible to avoid the player effectively losing out due to the timing of a special loss result (the number of game rounds at which the judgment result occurs). This is desirable in achieving diversification of gameplay through the aforementioned loop function and effectively enhancing the effect of increasing attention to the game.

In the fourth normal gameplay state, the probability of a special losing result (1/10) is set to be higher than the probability of a jackpot result (1/100). This configuration makes it less likely for problems to occur, such as frequent jackpots preventing the aforementioned loop function from working properly.

<Variation 1>
In the seventh embodiment described above, if a special miss occurs during high-frequency support mode B with a limited number of attempts, the system switches to high-frequency support mode A and resets the termination criteria number of attempts. However, the system is not limited to this configuration. In high-frequency support mode B, the system may not conduct a special miss lottery, or it may invalidate special misses (treating them the same as normal misses). In other words, if a special miss occurs during high-frequency support mode A, the system may maintain high-frequency support mode A and overwrite (reset) the termination criteria number of attempts, while in high-frequency support mode B, the system may maintain high-frequency support mode B and not overwrite (reset) the termination criteria number of attempts. In such a configuration, if the system transitions to the third normal game state, and a special miss occurs in the remaining reserved turns of the second operation port 92A executed after the third normal game state ends, the system will transition to the fourth normal game state.

<Modified Example 2>
In the seventh embodiment described above, the number of times the game ends when a special miss occurs (20 times) is greater than the number of times the game ends when a 6R normal jackpot A (first hit) occurs (10 times), but the game is not limited to this. For example, the number of times the game ends when a 6R normal jackpot A (first hit) occurs and the number of times the game ends when a special miss occurs may be the same. Alternatively, the number of times the game ends when a special miss occurs may be less than the number of times the game ends when a 6R normal jackpot A (first hit) occurs.

<Example 3>
In the seventh embodiment described above, the number of times to terminate when a 6R normal jackpot B (during consecutive wins) occurs (20 times) and the number of times to terminate when a special miss occurs (20 times) are set to be the same, but the embodiment is not limited to this. For example, the number of times to terminate when a special miss occurs may be greater than the number of times to terminate when a 6R normal jackpot B occurs.

<Modification 4>
In the seventh embodiment described above, the number of termination criteria set when a special miss occurs is uniformly set to 20 times, but it is not limited to this. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the number of termination criteria set differs depending on the type of special miss. For example, a first special miss may be provided in which the number of termination criteria set is a first termination criteria number (e.g., "20 times"), and a second special miss may be provided in which the number of termination criteria set is a second termination criteria number (e.g., "40 times").

<Example 5>
In the seventh embodiment described above, the lottery based on winning at the first operating port 91A is configured so that it does not result in a special loss, but the embodiment is not limited to this. The embodiment may also be configured so that it can result in a special loss even in the lottery based on winning at the first operating port 91A.

<Modification 6>
If a normal jackpot is achieved in a game round related to the second operating port 92A, the number of rounds required to terminate the game may be set to be higher than in cases where a normal jackpot is achieved in a game round related to the first operating port 91A, or where a special miss is achieved in a game round related to the second operating port 92A. With such a configuration, if a normal jackpot is achieved during the aforementioned loop, the player's advantage increases, and an accent can be added to the gameplay during the loop.

<Eighth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, one of its features is that a certain number of big wins trigger a transition to a normal game state corresponding to a high-probability mode and a low-frequency support mode (the fifth normal game state described later), and when the number of game spins performed in this normal game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling), the support mode by the electric mechanism is switched from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode A. The following describes the characteristic configuration of this embodiment, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

(Game board unit)
In the first embodiment described above, the game board unit 80 (game board 80a) had a symmetrical gauge (see Figure 6), but in this embodiment, the game board unit 80A (game board 80aA) has an asymmetrical gauge. The game board unit 80A will be described in detail below with reference to Figure 98. Figure 98 is a front view of the game board unit 80A.

The game board 80aA has multiple openings of varying sizes that penetrate its own thickness (front-to-back direction). Each opening is equipped with a general prize entry point 81, an operating port unit 82A, a variable prize entry device 83A, a through gate 84A, and the like. When game balls flow into the general prize entry point 81, the operating port unit 82A, or the variable prize entry device 83A, these balls are detected by detection sensors (not shown) provided corresponding to each entry point, and based on the detection results, the player is awarded a predetermined number of prize balls (dispensing of game balls) or other benefits. Additionally, an out port 86 is provided at the bottom of the game board 80aA, and game balls that do not enter the various entry points are discharged from the game area PE through the out port 86.

Furthermore, the game board 80aA is equipped with numerous game pins 87 to appropriately distribute and adjust the flow path of the game balls, as well as various components (mechanisms) such as windmills. These various configurations, including the game pins 87 and windmills, differentiate the flow path of the game balls, adjusting them so that winning into the general prize winning slots 81, etc., occurs with a reasonable probability.

The operating port unit 82A, similar to the operating port unit 82 shown in the first embodiment, is composed of a first operating port 91A and a second operating port 92A disposed directly below the first operating port 91A. In particular, the second operating port 92A is equipped with an electrically operated mechanism 93A, which functions as an openable/closable ball entry assist device (ball entry assist means) or an open/close member (open/close means).

The game board 80aA is provided with a center frame 96A surrounding the display screen 95aA of the pattern display device 95A. The center frame 96A protrudes from the front of the game board 80aA, and the flow path of the game balls flowing down the game area PE is broadly divided into a route that bypasses the center frame 96A from the right side and a route that bypasses it from the left side, similar to the first embodiment described above. However, in this embodiment, the arrangement of the first operation port 91A, second operation port 92A, variable prize device 83A, and through gate 84A has been modified so that game balls launched along the left route can enter the first operation port 91A and the second operation port 92A, but cannot enter the variable prize device 83A and the through gate 84A. Similarly, game balls launched along the right route can enter the second operation port 92A, the through gate 84A, and the variable prize device 83A, but cannot enter the first operation port 91A. It is also possible to configure the system so that game balls launched along the left route cannot enter the second operation port 92A.

By switching the launch route of the game ball between the right and left routes depending on the game state, it becomes possible to gain an advantage in the game. This encouragement of skillful play helps to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

(Retained ball storage area)
In this embodiment, the configuration for storing hold information based on winning entries into the operating ports 91A and 92A differs from that of the first embodiment. The configuration for storing hold information in this embodiment will now be described with reference to the schematic diagram in Figure 99.

The ball storage area 432A shown in this embodiment includes a first operation port storage area Ra that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 when a ball enters the first operation port 91A, and a second operation port storage area Rb that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 when a ball enters the second operation port 92A.

The first operation port's hold area Ra consists of four areas (Area 1 to Area 4). When multiple consecutive entries occur into the first operation port 91A, the numerical information is stored chronologically in the order of Area 1 → Area 2 → Area 3 → Area 4. Similarly, the second operation port's hold area Rb consists of four areas (Area 1 to Area 4). When multiple consecutive entries occur into the second operation port 92A, the numerical information (hold information) is stored chronologically in the order of Area 1 → Area 2 → Area 3 → Area 4.

In this embodiment, if hold information is stored in the second operation port hold area Rb, the system is configured to preferentially move the hold information stored in the second operation port hold area Rb (specifically, the first area) to the execution area AE. Furthermore, if no hold information is stored in the second operation port hold area Rb, but hold information is stored in the first operation port hold area Ra, the system is configured to move the hold information stored in the first operation port hold area Ra (specifically, the first area) to the execution area AE.

In the first embodiment described above, the system was configured such that a special loss could occur based on a lottery drawing that resulted in a win at the activation ports 91 and 92. However, this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that special losses are omitted (excluded) from the lottery results based on wins at the first activation port 91 and the second activation port 92. The win/loss table for the activation ports in this embodiment will now be described with reference to Figure 100.

(Validity table for the operating port)
As shown in Figure 100, the success/failure tables for the operating port include a success/failure table for the low probability mode (low probability success/failure information group) and a success/failure table for the high probability mode (high probability success/failure information group).

In situations where the win/loss table for low probability mode (Figure 100(a)) is referenced during the lottery based on winning entries into the operating ports 91A and 92A, the random number values that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) are a total of 6: "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507". In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to jackpot results. On the other hand, in situations where the win/loss table for high probability mode (Figure 100(b)) is referenced during the lottery, the random number values that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) are a total of 30: "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107"... "597". In other words, among the values of the random number counter C1 ranging from "0 to 599", "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107"... "597" correspond to jackpot results. All random number values that do not correspond to jackpots correspond to losing results (specifically, regular losing results). Therefore, in the lottery based on entries into the operating ports 91A and 92A, the configuration prevents the "special losing" described in the first embodiment.

The distribution table for the operating ports is divided into a distribution table for the first operating port and a distribution table for the second operating port. The contents of the distribution tables will be explained using the schematic diagram in Figure 101.

As shown in Figure 101(a), the distribution table for the first operation port has the following distribution destinations for game results: 6R normal jackpot results (special game results corresponding to low probability), 6R probability variation jackpot results (special game results corresponding to high probability), and 2R probability variation jackpot results (game results corresponding to high probability). Specifically, among the values of the type counter C2 from "0 to 29", "0 to 9" correspond to 6R normal jackpot results, "10 to 19" correspond to 6R probability variation jackpot results, and "20 to 29" correspond to 2R probability variation jackpot results.

As shown in Figure 101(b), the distribution table for the second operation port has two distribution destinations for game results: 6R normal jackpot results (special game results corresponding to low probability) and 6R probability variation jackpot results (special game results corresponding to high probability). Specifically, among the values of the type counter C2 from "0 to 29", "0 to 9" correspond to 6R normal jackpot results, and "10 to 29" correspond to 6R probability variation jackpot results.

Here, we will provide supplementary explanations for each jackpot, referring to the schematic diagram in Figure 102.

If a 6R regular jackpot result occurs, the game transitions to a third regular game state corresponding to low probability mode and high-frequency support mode B after the special game state ends. As explained in the first embodiment, after transitioning to the third regular game state, if the number of games played during the third regular game state reaches the termination threshold (specifically "40 games"), the game transitions to a first regular game state corresponding to low probability mode and low-frequency support mode. In other words, the third regular game state has a limit on the number of games played. In this embodiment, the counting of games played during the third regular game state is limited to games played based on winning a prize in the second operation port 92A.

If a regular 6R jackpot occurs, the aforementioned ceiling (upper limit) of "300 spins" is set at the end of the special game state. If the number of spins played after the end of the special game state reaches this ceiling, the support mode of the electric mechanism 93A switches to high-frequency support mode A, thereby suppressing investment (decrease in remaining balls).

If a 6R probability-increasing jackpot is achieved, the game transitions to a second normal game state, which is a high-probability mode and corresponds to high-frequency support mode B, after the special game state ends. As explained in the first embodiment, the second normal game state will continue until the next jackpot is achieved.

If a 6R probability variation jackpot is achieved, the aforementioned ceiling (upper limit) of "100 spins" will be set at the end of the special game state. However, even if the number of spins played after the end of the special game state reaches this ceiling, the support mode by the electric mechanism 93A will remain in high-frequency support mode B, i.e., the second normal game state.

In contrast, if a 2R probability-changing jackpot occurs, the game transitions to the 5th normal game state, which is a high-probability mode and supports low-frequency support mode, after the special game state ends. Furthermore, if a 2R probability-changing jackpot occurs, a ceiling (upper limit) of "100 spins" is set at the end of the special game state. If the number of spins played after the end of the special game state reaches this ceiling, the support mode provided by the electric mechanism 93A switches to high-frequency support mode A, thereby suppressing investment (decrease in remaining balls).

When a 2R probability variation jackpot is achieved, the game switches to a high-probability mode, lowering the hurdle to the next jackpot. However, if the number of game rounds increases excessively in this game state (the fifth normal game state), the investment may increase, potentially reducing the player's motivation to play. In this regard, the fifth normal game state prevents such problems by reaching the ceiling early and suppressing additional investment. Furthermore, reaching the ceiling switches to high-frequency support mode A, causing the game to primarily involve game rounds related to the second operation port 92A. When a jackpot is achieved during a game round related to the second operation port 92A, it will not result in a 2R probability variation jackpot (a configuration where a certain amount of payout can be expected), thereby effectively suppressing a decline in player satisfaction. Below, referring to the flowcharts in Figures 103 and 104, the processes for achieving these functions, specifically the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode and the support mode switching process, will be explained, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

(Transition process when opening/closing execution mode ends)
As shown in Figure 103, in the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, first, in step S3601, it is determined whether or not the current opening/closing execution mode (special game state) was triggered by a 6R probability variation jackpot. If the determination in step S3601 is positive, the process proceeds to step S3602, where the high-frequency support mode B flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. Based on the high-frequency support mode B flag set in this way, in the subsequent electric support processing, the support lottery table for high-frequency support mode B is referenced in the support lottery, and the variation display time table for high-frequency support mode B is referenced as the variation display time table for determining the variation display time of the symbols in the through gate display unit DS.

In the following step S3603, the high-probability mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. Based on the high-probability mode flag set in this way, the win/loss table for the high-probability mode is referenced in the subsequent win/loss lottery for each game round.

Subsequently, in step S3604, the number of games played, which serves as the criterion for determining the ceiling, is set to "100." Then, in step S3605, the game count counter located in the various counter area 434 of RAM 404 is reset (cleared to 0). In step S3606, the various flags for the opening/closing execution mode (such as the jackpot flag) stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404 are erased, and the output of the external signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is stopped.

The value of the continuation count counter decreases by "1" each time a game is played. High-frequency support mode B ends when the continuation count counter reaches "0". In other words, the value of the continuation count counter determines the upper limit (the termination criterion count mentioned above) of the number of games that can be played during high-frequency support mode B.

Returning to the explanation of step S3601, if a negative result is obtained in step S3601, that is, if the current jackpot is not a 6R probability variation jackpot, the process proceeds to step S3607. In step S3607, it is determined whether the current jackpot is a 2R probability variation jackpot or not. If a positive result is obtained in step S3607, the processes described in steps S3603 to S3606 are executed, and then this transition process ends.

If a negative result is obtained in step S3607, i.e., if this jackpot is a 6R regular jackpot, then in step S3608, the number of plays limit flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404, and in step S3609, the high-frequency support mode B flag is set. After that, in step S3610, the continuation count counter is set to "40," and in the following step S3611, "300" is set as the number of plays that will be used as the criterion for determining the ceiling.

Subsequently, in step S3605, the game count counter is reset, and in step S3606, the various flags for the opening/closing execution mode (such as the jackpot flag) stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404 are erased, and the output of the external signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is stopped.

Next, referring to Figure 104, the process for switching support modes will be explained.

(Processing for switching support modes)
In the support mode switching process, first, in step S3701, it is determined whether the current support mode is high-frequency support mode A or high-frequency support mode B. If the determination in step S3701 is positive, the process proceeds to step S3702. In step S3702, it is determined whether the count limit flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. If the determination in step S3702 is negative, the switching process ends there. If the determination in step S3702 is positive, the process proceeds to step S3703.

In step S3703, the continuation count counters in the various counter areas 434 are updated. Specifically, the value of the continuation count counter is decremented by "1". In the following step S3704, it is determined whether the value of the continuation count counter is "0". If the determination in step S3704 is negative, the switching process ends. If the determination in step S3704 is positive, the process proceeds to step S3705, where the high-frequency support mode flag (specifically the high-frequency support mode A flag and the high-frequency support mode B flag) and the count limit flag stored in the various flag storage area 435 are cleared, and the switching process ends. Clearing the high-frequency support mode flag switches the support mode from high-frequency support mode to low-frequency support mode.

Returning to the explanation of step S3701, if a negative result is obtained in step S3701, i.e., if the system is in low-frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S3706. In step S3706, it is determined whether the value of the game count counter in the various counter areas 434 of RAM 404 has reached its upper limit, i.e., the value set in step S3604 or step S3611. If a negative result is obtained in step S3706, the switching process ends immediately. If a positive result is obtained in step S3706, the process proceeds to step S3707.

In step S3707, the high-frequency support mode A flag is set in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404. Based on this set high-frequency support mode A flag, in subsequent electric support processing, the support lottery table for high-frequency support mode A is referenced in the support lottery, and the variation display time table for high-frequency support mode A is referenced as the variation display time table for determining the variation display time of the symbols in the through-gate display unit DS. Furthermore, the opening time when the electric mechanism 93A switches to the open state as a support win occurs corresponds to the time for high-frequency support mode A.

In the following step S3708, the count limit flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. Then, in step S3709, the continuation count counter is set to "400," and this switching process ends. As a result, the transition will continue in high-frequency support mode A until the number of games played reaches "400" or until a jackpot is hit.

The eighth embodiment described in detail above provides the following excellent effects.

If the number of game rounds played after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without reaching a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the game transitions to the fourth normal game state corresponding to High Frequency Support Mode A. By forcibly changing the rhythm of the game in this way, monotony of the game can be effectively suppressed. Here, the upper limit for reaching the ceiling is configured to be fewer (shorter) in the case of a probability variation jackpot result (specifically, a jackpot result corresponding to both High Probability Mode and Low Frequency Support Mode) compared to a normal jackpot result. Since the transition to the special game state occurs earlier in High Probability Mode compared to Low Probability Mode, setting a lower upper limit allows the ceiling function to exert its effect effectively. This effectively contributes to increasing the player's attention to the game.

Furthermore, in normal gameplay in high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode, despite being in high-probability mode, the game progresses without a jackpot, resulting in a significant increase in investment contrary to the player's expectations. This is expected to greatly decrease the player's motivation to play. In this regard, as shown in this embodiment, in normal gameplay in high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode, by lowering the upper limit of the number of spins and transitioning to high-frequency switching mode at an earlier timing to suppress investment, the effects of game diversification (increased attention to the game) can be effectively realized.

If the aforementioned relief function upon reaching the ceiling is overly active, the technical significance of providing a normal game state corresponding to both a high-probability mode and a low-frequency support mode (diversification of gameplay) may be diminished. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, by setting the upper limit of the number of attempts in each game state to be greater than or equal to the reciprocal of the probability of achieving a jackpot, it is possible to suitably combine gameplay diversification with the above-mentioned relief function.

As the number of stored pending information increases, the display time of the changing symbols on the operation display unit (the operation period for game rounds) is shortened. This is desirable for smoother game progression. However, assuming such a configuration, the following inconvenience may arise when applying the above-mentioned rescue function configuration. Specifically, when reaching the ceiling in a normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and low frequency support mode, and transitioning to a normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode A, the number of game rounds in that normal game state may progress too quickly, and the benefits of reaching the ceiling may end before the player can fully experience them. This is a concern as it may significantly reduce the player's attention to the rescue function. In this regard, as shown in this embodiment, setting the termination criterion number to be greater than the upper limit number can help alleviate the above concern.

The lottery based on winning at the second operating port 92A is more favorable to the player than the lottery based on winning at the first operating port 91A. When the ceiling is reached during normal gameplay in high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode, not only is investment reduced, but the lottery is also more favorable, providing a double safety net for the player. Furthermore, when a losing streak occurs during normal gameplay in high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode, the expectation of reaching the ceiling increases. This contributes to further increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the lottery based on winning at the first operating port 91A, the lottery results include a result that triggers a transition to a normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and low frequency support mode. In the lottery based on winning at the second operating port 92A, the lottery results do not include a result that triggers a transition to a normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and low frequency support mode. With this configuration, it is possible to avoid situations where, while the relief function is active after reaching the ceiling during a normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and low frequency support mode, a lottery result that triggers a transition to a normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and low frequency support mode is drawn again, effectively negating the benefit of reaching the ceiling (a wasted draw).

<Variation 1>
In the eighth embodiment described above, the ceiling (upper limit) was set differently depending on the type of jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot), but it is not limited to this. It is also possible to set the ceiling (upper limit) to be the same regardless of the type of jackpot.

<Modified Example 2>
It is also possible to set up two types of 2R probability-changing jackpots (so-called hidden jackpots), namely 2R probability-changing jackpot A and 2R probability-changing jackpot B, and to configure the machine so that the ceiling (upper limit) for 2R probability-changing jackpot A is different from the ceiling (upper limit) for 2R probability-changing jackpot B.

<Example 3>
In the eighth embodiment described above, the ceiling (upper limit) is set according to the type of jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot), but this may be changed as follows. That is, the ceiling (upper limit) may be set according to the operating port that triggered the jackpot. For example, if a jackpot is triggered by a ball entering the first operating port 91A, a first ceiling may be set as the ceiling (upper limit), and if a jackpot is triggered by a ball entering the second operating port 92A, a second ceiling may be set as the ceiling (upper limit). In this case, if the first ceiling is set lower than the second ceiling, it is possible to suppress the player's investment from becoming excessively large, and if the second ceiling is set lower than the first ceiling, the contrast of the game can be suitably enhanced.

<Modification 4>
In the eighth embodiment described above, the setting of the ceiling (upper limit) is lower when a probability variation jackpot (specifically a 2R probability variation jackpot) occurs than when a normal jackpot (specifically a 6R normal jackpot) occurs, but the system is not limited to this. The setting of the ceiling (upper limit) may be higher when a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs than when a 6R normal jackpot occurs.

<Example 5>
In a normal game state corresponding to a low probability mode, when the ceiling is reached, a first termination count is set as the termination criterion count for a normal game state corresponding to a low probability mode and high frequency support mode A. In a normal game state corresponding to a high probability mode, when the ceiling is reached, a second termination count is set as the termination criterion count for a normal game state corresponding to a high probability mode and high frequency support mode A. It is also possible to specify that the second termination count is less than the first termination count. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the rescue function from becoming a factor that incites gambling.

<Modification 6>
Similar to the first embodiment described above, the first operating port 91A and the second operating port 92A may be arranged together on a predetermined flow path in the game area PE, and if hold information is stored in both the first operating port hold area Ra and the second operating port hold area Rb, the configuration may be set to prioritize the hold information stored in the second operating port hold area Rb as the target for execution in the game round.

According to the configuration shown in this modified example, even if the ceiling is reached during normal gameplay in high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode, and the game transitions to normal gameplay in high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode A, there is no need to change the target of the game balls in order to enjoy the benefits of the rescue function. Therefore, even in a configuration where the rescue function is activated suddenly without going through a special gameplay state, the wasteful consumption of game balls is suppressed, and the satisfaction level with the rescue function can be appropriately improved.

<Ninth Embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, once the game transitioned to a normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode, it was configured to maintain the high probability mode until the next big win occurred (a so-called probability variation machine). In contrast, this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that an upper limit is set on the number of games in which the high probability mode is maintained after transitioning to a normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode (a so-called ST machine).

When the lottery mode switches to high-probability mode, it is assumed that players will play with the expectation of hitting the jackpot early. However, if the game progresses without a jackpot despite this heightened expectation, it can give players the impression that their investment is being wasted. This is a concern, as the game progresses and approaches the upper limit, potentially decreasing the players' motivation to continue playing. This phenomenon is expected to be more pronounced in gaming machines with lower winning probabilities in high-probability mode. One of the features of this embodiment is that it incorporates measures to address these issues. The following describes the characteristic configuration of this embodiment, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

The configuration of the game board unit in this embodiment is the same as in the first embodiment described above, and the retention function (retained ball storage area) related to the operation port is the same as in the eighth embodiment described above, so its explanation will be omitted. Furthermore, the configuration is the same as in the eighth embodiment in that the game rounds related to the second operation port 92 are executed with priority over the game rounds related to the first operation port 91.

(Validity table for the operating port)
As shown in Figure 100, the success/failure tables for the operating port include a success/failure table for the low probability mode (low probability success/failure information group) and a success/failure table for the high probability mode (high probability success/failure information group).

When the lottery is conducted based on winning entries into the operating slots 91 and 92, the win/loss table for the low probability mode (Figure 105(a)) is referenced, and there are two random numbers that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information): "7" and "307". In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "7" and "307" correspond to the jackpot results. On the other hand, when the win/loss table for the high probability mode (Figure 105(b)) is referenced during the lottery, there are six random numbers that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information): "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507". In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to the jackpot results. Furthermore, all random numbers that do not result in a jackpot correspond to losing results (specifically, regular losing results). In other words, the lottery based on winning entries into the operating ports 91 and 92 is configured in such a way that it does not result in the "special losing" outcome described in the first embodiment.

(Distribution table for the operating port)
As shown in Figure 106(a), in the distribution table for the operation ports 91 and 92, 10R probability variation jackpot A (high probability special game result) and 10R probability variation jackpot B (high probability special game result) are set as destinations for the game result distribution. Specifically, among the values of the type counter C2 from "0 to 29", "0 to 9" corresponds to 10R probability variation jackpot A, and "10 to 29" corresponds to 10R probability variation jackpot B.

If a 10R probability-changing jackpot A is achieved, the game transitions to the 5th normal game state, which is a high-probability mode and supports low-frequency support mode, after the special game state ends. This high-probability mode ends when the number of game spins played after the special game state ends reaches its limit (high-probability limit: 100 spins), and the game switches back to low-probability mode.

If a 10R probability variation jackpot B is achieved, the game transitions to a second normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode after the special game state ends. This high probability mode ends when the number of game spins played after the special game state ends reaches its upper limit (high probability limit: 100 spins), and the game switches to low probability mode. Similarly, the high frequency support mode ends when the number of game spins played after the special game state ends reaches its upper limit (high support limit: 50 spins). In this embodiment, reaching the high support limit results in the aforementioned ceiling being reached, and the game switches from high frequency support mode B to high frequency support mode A. This high frequency support mode A also has an upper limit on the number of spins it can continue (50 spins in this embodiment), and the game switches to low frequency support mode when the high probability mode ends.

In the first embodiment described above, a difference was established so that the base rate (the ratio of prize balls to the number of game balls launched) was higher in high-frequency support mode B than in high-frequency support mode A. However, in this embodiment, the difference is established so that the base rate is higher in high-frequency support mode A than in high-frequency support mode B. The specific configuration for generating such a difference will be explained below, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment, with reference to Figure 107.

In low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning support in the support lottery is 1/2. When support is won, the number of times the electric mechanism 93 is switched to the open state is set to "1," and the opening time is set to "0.1 seconds." Furthermore, the display time for the changing pattern (normal pattern) on the through-gate display unit DS is set to "10 to 20 seconds," and the display time for the confirmed pattern is set to "0.5 seconds."

In high-frequency support mode B, the probability of winning support in the support lottery is 1/1.1. When support is won, the number of times the electric mechanism 93 is switched to the open state is set to "1" and the opening time is set to "2 seconds". Furthermore, the display time for the changing pattern (normal pattern) on the through-gate display unit DS is set to "0.5 seconds" and the display time for the confirmed pattern is set to "0.5 seconds".

In high-frequency support mode A, the probability of winning support in the support lottery is 1/2. When support is won, the number of times the electric mechanism 93 is switched to the open state is set to "2," the opening time is set to "3 seconds," and the interval time between switching to the open state is set to "0.2 seconds." Furthermore, the display time for the changing pattern (normal diagram) on the through-gate display unit DS is set to "0.5 seconds," and the display time for the confirmed pattern is set to "0.5 seconds."

In general, the base performance increases in the order of Low-Frequency Support Mode < High-Frequency Support Mode B < High-Frequency Support Mode A. In High-Frequency Support Mode B, it is possible to play while minimizing the loss of balls compared to Low-Frequency Support Mode, and in High-Frequency Support Mode A, it is possible to play while minimizing the loss of balls even further than in High-Frequency Support Mode B.

Next, referring to the flowchart in Figure 108, we will explain the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, which is performed as part of the normal game state transition process (see step S404 in Figure 23), focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

(Transition process when opening/closing execution mode ends)
In the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode (special game state), first, in step S3801, it is determined whether the current opening/closing execution mode corresponds to a 10R probability variation jackpot. If the determination in step S3801 is positive, the process proceeds to step S3802. In step S3802, the high-frequency support mode B flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. As a result, the support mode by the electric mechanism 93A is switched to high-frequency support mode B.

In the following step S3803, the high-support continuation count counter located in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 is set to "50". The high-support continuation count counter is used to define the number of game rounds that will continue in the high-frequency support mode, and is decremented by "1" each time a game round is played during the high-frequency support mode.

After executing the setting process in step S3803, or if a negative result is determined in step S3801, the process proceeds to step S3804. In step S3804, the high-probability mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. This switches the lottery mode for the draw based on winning into the operating openings 91 and 92 to high-probability mode.

In the following step S3805, the high probability continuation counter located in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 is set to "100". The high probability continuation counter is used to define the number of game rounds that will continue in the high probability mode, and it is deducted by "1" each time a game round is played during that high probability mode.

In step S3806, the game count counters located in the various counter areas 434 of RAM 404 are reset (cleared to 0). Then, in step S3807, the various flags for special game states stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of RAM 404 are erased, and this transition process ends.

Next, referring to Figure 109, we will explain the switching process for the lottery mode and support mode (corresponding to the switching process for the support mode in Figure 39), which is performed as part of the normal game turn control process (step S403 in Figure 23).

(Processing for switching between lottery mode and support mode)
In the process for switching between the lottery mode and the support mode, first, in step S3901, it is determined whether the current lottery mode is the high probability mode. If the determination in step S3901 is positive, the process proceeds to step S3902. In step S3902, the process of updating the high probability continuation count counter provided in the various counter areas 434 of RAM 404 is executed. Specifically, the value of the high probability continuation count counter is deducted by "1".

In the following step S3903, it is determined whether the value of the high probability continuation count counter is "0". If the determination in step S3903 is positive, the process proceeds to step S3904, where the high probability mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404 is erased. This switches the lottery mode for the draw based on winning into the operation openings 91 and 92 from high probability mode to low probability mode.

After executing the process in step S3904, or if a negative determination is made in either step S3901 or S3903, the process proceeds to step S3905. Step S3905 determines whether the current support mode is high-frequency support mode A or high-frequency support mode B. If a positive determination is made in step S3905, the process proceeds to step S3906. Step S3906 executes the update process for the high-frequency support continuation counter located in the various counter areas 434 of RAM 404. Specifically, the value of the high-frequency support continuation counter is deducted by "1".

In the following step S3907, it is determined whether the value of the high-frequency support continuation counter is "0". If the determination in step S3907 is positive, the process proceeds to step S3908, where the high-frequency support mode flag A or high-frequency support mode B flag stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404 is cleared. This switches the support mode of the electric mechanism 93 from high-frequency support mode A or B to low-frequency support mode.

After executing the process in step S3908, or if a negative determination is made in either step S3905 or S3907, the process proceeds to step S3909. In step S3909, it is determined whether the value of the game count counter located in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 has reached its upper limit (50 in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made in step S3909, the switching process ends immediately. If a positive determination is made in step S3909, the process proceeds to step S3910. In step S3910, the high-frequency support mode A flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. This switches the support mode of the electric mechanism 93 to high-frequency support mode A. Afterward, the process proceeds to step S3911, where the high-support continuation count counter located in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 is set to 50, and the switching process ends.

(Changes in the number of balls held as the game progresses)
Next, with reference to Figure 110, we will provide a supplementary explanation regarding the changes in the number of balls held as the game progresses. Figure 110(a) is a timing chart illustrating the flow of the game when a 10R probability variation jackpot A occurs, and Figure 110(b) is a timing chart illustrating the flow of the game when a 10R probability variation jackpot B occurs.

In the example shown in Figure 110(a), at timing tg1, the game transitions to a special game state corresponding to a 10R probability variation jackpot A. At timing tg2, when this special game state ends, the lottery mode switches to a high-probability mode, and the jackpot probability increases from 1/300 to 1/100. From this point onward, the high-probability mode is maintained until 100 game spins have been played.

Immediately after the special game state ends, the support mode switches to low-frequency support mode. At timing TG3, when 50 game rounds have been played since the special game state ended, the support mode switches from low-frequency support mode to high-frequency support mode A. This accelerates the game's progression and suppresses the reduction of the player's remaining balls to almost zero. In other words, after the special game state ends, the player is in a favorable position, and if the game progresses without a jackpot, the player's position becomes even more favorable.

Then, at the timing of TG4, when the number of game spins performed after the special game state ends reaches 100, the support mode switches to low-frequency support mode, and the lottery mode switches to low-probability mode. As a result, the jackpot probability returns from 1/100 to 1/300.

In the example shown in Figure 110(b), at timing th1, the game transitions to a special game state corresponding to the 10R probability variation jackpot B. At timing th2, when this special game state ends, the lottery mode switches to high probability mode, and the jackpot probability increases from 1/300 to 1/100. From this point onward, the high probability mode is maintained until 100 game spins have been played.

Immediately after the special game state ends, the support mode switches to High-Frequency Support Mode B. At the timing of th3, when 50 game rounds have been played since the special game state ended, the support mode switches from High-Frequency Support Mode B to High-Frequency Support Mode A. This further accelerates the game's progression and suppresses the reduction of the player's remaining balls to almost zero. In other words, after the special game state ends, the player is in a favorable state, and if the game progresses without a jackpot, the player becomes even more favorable.

Then, at the timing of th4, when the number of game rounds played after the special game state ends reaches 100, the support mode switches to low-frequency support mode, and the lottery mode switches to low-probability mode.

In this embodiment, after transitioning to a normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high-frequency support mode B, the support mode switches to high-frequency support mode A when the number of game spins reaches 50 without a jackpot result. This increases the frequency of winning in the second operation slot 92. Subsequently, when the number of game spins after the end of the special game state reaches 100, the lottery mode switches to low probability mode, and the support mode switches to low-frequency support mode. With this configuration, the player's advantage during high probability mode is ensured while effectively suppressing monotony in the game.

In gaming machines of the type where the number of game spins in the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode is limited (so-called ST machines), as the number of game spins approaches the limit, the likelihood of a jackpot decreases, and the player's anticipation may significantly decline. This is undesirable in terms of increasing the player's interest in the game. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this embodiment, reaching the ceiling triggers the entry into high-frequency support mode A, which increases the frequency of winning into the second operation port 92, thereby suppressing investment.

Furthermore, similar to the first embodiment described above, the first and second operation ports 91 and 92 are arranged together in a predetermined flow path within the game area PE, while the game rounds related to the second operation port 92 are executed with priority over the game rounds related to the first operation port 91. By transitioning from a normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode B to a normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode A upon reaching the ceiling, the opportunities for game rounds related to the second operation port 92 to be executed increase. This significantly increases the player's advantage upon reaching the ceiling, and effectively enhances the level of attention given to the game after reaching the ceiling.

In high-frequency support mode A, when game balls are continuously launched toward the operation port 92, the average number of reserved balls stored in the reserved ball storage area (second operation port reserved area Rb) changes to "3.5". In high-frequency support mode B, when game balls are continuously launched toward the operation port 92, the average number of reserved balls stored in the reserved ball storage area (second operation port reserved area Rb) changes to "2.5". When the number of reserved balls stored in the second operation port reserved area Rb is "3", the display time of the changing symbols on the operation port display unit D2 is shorter compared to when the number is "2". With this configuration, by transitioning from a normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high-frequency support mode B to a normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high-frequency support mode A when the ceiling is reached, it is possible to change the speed of game progression. This further effectively suppresses the monotony of the game.

<Variation 1>
In the ninth embodiment described above, the high-frequency support mode A, which is switched to after the special game state triggered by the 10R probability variation jackpot A ends, is configured to end (switch to low-frequency support mode) in conjunction with the switch to the low-probability mode of the lottery mode, but the embodiment is not limited to this.

The system may also be configured to switch from high-frequency support mode A to low-frequency support mode before switching from high-probability mode to low-probability mode. In other words, the system may transition in the following order: Special game state → Normal game state corresponding to high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode (5th normal game state) → Normal game state corresponding to high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode A (6th normal game state) → Normal game state corresponding to high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode (5th normal game state) → Normal game state corresponding to low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode (1st normal game state).

Alternatively, the system may be configured to switch from high-probability mode to low-probability mode, and then switch from high-frequency support mode A to low-frequency support mode. In other words, the system may transition in the following order: Special game state → Normal game state corresponding to both high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode (5th normal game state) → Normal game state corresponding to both high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode A (6th normal game state) → Normal game state corresponding to both low-probability mode and high-frequency support mode A (4th normal game state) → Normal game state corresponding to both low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode (1st normal game state).

<Modified Example 2>
In the ninth embodiment described above, it is also possible to provide 10R probability variation jackpots A1 and A2 as 10R probability variation jackpots A, with a ceiling set to 50 spins when 10R probability variation jackpot A1 occurs and a ceiling set to 20 spins when 10R probability variation jackpot A2 occurs. With such a configuration, when 10R probability variation jackpot A occurs, the timing of the upgrade (the timing of tg3 described above) can be changed depending on the type, thereby suitably realizing diversification of the game.

<Example 3>
In the ninth embodiment described above, 10R probability variation jackpots B1 and B2 are provided as 10R probability variation jackpots B. When 10R probability variation jackpot B1 occurs, the ceiling is set to 50 times and the number of continuations of high-frequency support mode B is set to 50 times. When 10R probability variation jackpot B2 occurs, the ceiling is set to 20 times and the number of continuations of high-frequency support mode B is set to 20 times. With such a configuration, when 10R probability variation jackpot B occurs, the timing of the upgrade (the timing of th3 described above) can be changed depending on the type, thereby diversifying the gameplay.

<Modification 4>
In the ninth embodiment described above, the number of games (50) in which the player can remain in a normal game state corresponding to a high probability mode and low frequency support mode (fifth normal game state) after the end of a special game state triggered by a 10R probability variation jackpot A is the same as the number of games (50) in which the player can remain in a normal game state corresponding to a high probability mode and high frequency support mode A (sixth normal game state). However, the embodiment is not limited to this.

It is also possible to configure the system so that the number of games in which the player can remain in a normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and low frequency support mode (5th normal game state) after the special game state triggered by a 10R probability variation jackpot A ends is greater than the number of games in a normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode A (6th normal game state).

Furthermore, it is possible to configure the system so that the number of games played after the special game state triggered by a 10R probability variation jackpot A ends in a normal game state corresponding to a high probability mode and low frequency support mode (5th normal game state) is less than the number of games played in a normal game state corresponding to a high probability mode and high frequency support mode A (6th normal game state).

<Example 5>
In the ninth embodiment described above, the number of games (50) in which the player can remain in a normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode B (second normal game state) after the special game state triggered by a 10R probability variation jackpot B ends is the same as the number of games (50) in which the player can remain in a normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode A (sixth normal game state). However, the embodiment is not limited to this.

It is also possible to configure the system so that the number of times a player can remain in a normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode B (second normal game state) after the special game state triggered by a 10R probability variation jackpot B ends is greater than the number of times a player can remain in a normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode A (sixth normal game state).

Furthermore, it is possible to configure the system so that the number of games played after the special game state triggered by a 10R probability variation jackpot A ends in a normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode B (second normal game state) is less than the number of games played in a normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode A (sixth normal game state).

<Modification 6>
In the ninth embodiment described above, a difference was made so that the base frequency of high-frequency support mode A is higher than that of high-frequency support mode B. However, this may be changed so that the base frequency of high-frequency support mode B is higher than that of high-frequency support mode A.

<Example 7>
When transitioning from high-frequency support modes A and B to high-frequency support mode A, it is optional whether or not to go through low-frequency support mode (game rounds compatible with low-frequency support mode).

<Difference 8>
In the ninth embodiment described above, when the result of a 10R probability variation jackpot is A, the game transitions to a normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode A after 50 game spins have been performed in a normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and low frequency support mode. When the number of game spins after the end of the special game state reaches 100, the game transitions to a normal game state corresponding to low probability mode and low frequency support mode. In other words, the number of game spins spent in the normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and low frequency support mode is set to be the same as the number of game spins spent in the normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode A. This can be changed so that the number of times a player stays in a normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and low frequency support mode is greater than the number of times a player stays in a normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode A, or the number of times a player stays in a normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and low frequency support mode is less than the number of times a player stays in a normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode A.

Furthermore, if the result of a 10R probability variation jackpot is B, the game transitions to a normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode A after 50 spins in the normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode B. The game then transitions to a normal game state corresponding to low probability mode and low frequency support mode when the number of spins after the special game state ends reaches 100. In other words, the number of spins spent in the normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode B is set to be equal to the number of spins spent in the normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode A. This can be modified so that the number of games played in the normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode B is greater than the number of games played in the normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode A, or so that the number of games played in the normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode B is less than the number of games played in the normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode A.

<Difference 9>
In the ninth embodiment described above, when the number of game spins performed after the end of the special game state triggered by the 10R probability variation jackpot result reaches 100, the lottery mode is configured to become the low probability mode and the support mode to become the low frequency support mode. However, the system is not limited to this configuration. For example, it is also possible to configure the system so that the high frequency support mode A continues even after transitioning to the low probability mode. According to the configuration shown in this modified example, after the end of the special game state, the system transitions in the following order: normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode B → normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode A → normal game state corresponding to low probability mode and high frequency support mode A → normal game state corresponding to low probability mode and low frequency support mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the rapid decrease in attention to the game when transitioning from high probability mode to low probability mode.

<Tenth Embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, if the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state, which is a low-probability mode and corresponds to high-frequency support mode A, triggered by a special miss result, the value of the continuation counter that defines the remaining number of games in the fourth normal game state is set (overwritten) to "400". This configuration allows for a swift transition from the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss result to the fourth normal game state triggered by reaching the ceiling, without going through the first normal game state which is a low-probability mode and corresponds to low-frequency support mode, without being triggered by other game states such as the first normal game state. In other words, the configuration allows for a swift extension of the fourth normal game state.

One of the features of this embodiment is the improved behavior when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state, which corresponds to a low-probability mode and high-frequency support mode A, triggered by a special miss result. The characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment, with reference to Figure 111.

As shown in the schematic diagram of Figure 111(a), the background color of the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 is blue in high-frequency support mode A, which is triggered by a special miss, and green in high-frequency support mode A, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling. Therefore, by checking the background color of the display screen 95a, the player can easily determine whether the current high-frequency support mode A was triggered by a special miss or reaching the ceiling. In the following description, high-frequency support mode A, which is triggered by a special miss, will be appropriately distinguished as "high-frequency support mode A1," and high-frequency support mode A, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling, will be appropriately distinguished as "high-frequency support mode A2." Incidentally, the support modes of high-frequency support modes A1 and A2 are the same, and the base (the ratio of the number of game balls dispensed to the number of game balls launched) is the same for both, as in the first embodiment.

Next, referring to the schematic diagrams in Figures 111(b) to (c), we will provide a supplementary explanation of the notification flow for the start of high-frequency support mode A.

In game rounds where a special miss occurs and the game transitions to High Frequency Support Mode A1, as shown in Figure 111(b), the symbol combination corresponding to the special miss in that game round is displayed (confirmed) on the display screen 95a. Specifically, after a reach display, the combination of "1", "3", and "4" symbols is displayed (confirmed) on one of the active lines. Then, at the start of the next game round, the background color of the display screen 95a changes from white to blue, and the remaining number of games in High Frequency Support Mode A1 is displayed in the corner of the display screen 95a.

In contrast, in game rounds where the game transitions to High-Frequency Support Mode A2 upon reaching the ceiling, as shown in Figure 111(c), a symbol combination corresponding to reaching the ceiling may be displayed (confirmed) on the display screen 95a during that game round. Specifically, if the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state, a symbol combination including the "CHANCE" symbol will be displayed (confirmed) on any of the active lines via the reach display. In contrast, if the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state corresponding to High-Frequency Support Mode A, a symbol combination corresponding to a complete miss will be displayed (confirmed) without going through the reach display. In this case, the background color of the display screen 95a will also remain blue.

Furthermore, in the first normal game state, when the ceiling is reached during a game round, a variable display time corresponding to the reach display (specifically 20-30 seconds) is set, similar to the game rounds corresponding to the jackpot result. In contrast, in the fourth normal game state, when the ceiling is reached during a game round, a variable display time that does not correspond to the reach display is set, referring to the variable display time table shown in Figure 27(a2).

Here, referring to the timing chart in Figure 112, we will provide a supplementary explanation of the game flow when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss result.

At timing ti1, a game round corresponding to a normal losing result begins, and at timing ti2, a game round corresponding to a special losing result begins. At timing ti3, when the game round corresponding to the special losing result ends, the game transitions to the fourth normal game state, which is a low-probability mode and corresponds to high-frequency support mode A1. Accordingly, the continuation count counter is set to "40".

Subsequently, with each subsequent game round, the value of the continuation count counter decreases by "1" and the value of the game round counter increases by "1" (see, for example, the timing of ti4). At the timing of ti5 during the fourth normal game state corresponding to the special miss result, the game round that reaches the ceiling has begun. In other words, in the example shown in Figure 112, the ceiling is reached while the fourth normal game state corresponding to the special miss result is still ongoing, that is, before the value of the continuation count counter reaches "0". This game round corresponds to a normal miss result that does not correspond to the reach display, and thanks to the benefits of the high-frequency support mode, the number of reserved balls related to the operation ports 91 and 92 also remains near the upper limit. Therefore, the display time of the changing symbols in the operation port display unit and the display time of the changing symbols in the symbol display device are about 3 to 5 seconds due to the time reduction function, and the game round that reaches the ceiling also progresses quickly.

In the game round in which the ceiling is reached, the "CHANCE" symbol is displayed on the display screen 95a at the timing of the confirmation display, clearly indicating to the player that the ceiling has been reached. Then, at the timing of ti6, when the game round ends, the value of the continuation count counter is overwritten to "400," and the game transitions from the 4th normal game state corresponding to the special miss result to the 4th normal game state corresponding to the ceiling reach, without passing through any other game states. Accordingly, the background color of the display screen 95a changes from blue to green.

In this high-frequency support mode A, the electric mechanism 93 will frequently switch to the open state. At the timing of ti6, when the game round ending after reaching the ceiling, the electric mechanism 93 is in the open state. However, the electric mechanism 93 remains open until the opening time set at the time of switching to the open state has elapsed, and the opening time is not forcibly shortened. In other words, even if the trigger for the fourth normal game state switches from a special miss result to reaching the ceiling, as described above, the behavior of the electric mechanism 93 will not be disrupted. The prize-winning support in this fourth normal game state will end when the value of the continuation count counter reaches "0" or when a jackpot result occurs before that.

<Variation 1>
In the tenth embodiment described above, when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss result, a configuration is used in combination to indicate that the ceiling has been reached by stopping and displaying a symbol combination indicating the ceiling has been reached (a symbol combination including the "CHANCE" symbol) in the game round in which the ceiling is reached, and a configuration is used in combination to indicate that the ceiling has been reached by changing the background color of the display screen 95a from the game round following the game round in which the ceiling has been reached. However, the embodiment is not limited to this. The specific configuration for indicating that the ceiling has been reached is arbitrary, and it is possible to omit one of the two configurations described above. In other words, in the game round in which the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state, it is possible to omit the function of indicating that the ceiling has been reached by a symbol combination. Furthermore, it is possible to unify the background color of the display screen 95a between the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss result and the fourth normal game state triggered by reaching the ceiling.

<Modified Example 2>
In the tenth embodiment described above, the number of times to terminate when transitioning to the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss result ("20" or "40") is set to be less than the number of times to terminate when transitioning to the fourth normal game state triggered by reaching the ceiling ("400"), but it is not limited to this. The number of times to terminate when transitioning to the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss result may be more than the number of times to terminate when transitioning to the fourth normal game state triggered by reaching the ceiling, or the number of times to terminate when transitioning to the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss result may be set to be the same as the number of times to terminate when transitioning to the fourth normal game state triggered by reaching the ceiling.

<Example 3>
If the electric mechanism 93 is in the open state when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss result, it is also possible to configure the system to forcibly switch the electric mechanism 93 to the closed state.

<Embodiment 11>
If a special losing result occurs during high-frequency support mode, and that result is invalidated or otherwise prevented from enjoying its benefits, it can give the player the impression that the special losing result was a wasted draw. This is undesirable as it can reduce the player's motivation to play. In particular, if such an event occurs near the end of high-frequency support mode and is noticed by the player, the above concerns become even greater. One of the features of this embodiment is that it incorporates measures to address these circumstances. The following will explain these measures, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

The symbols displayed as stop (confirmed) on the operation port display sections D1 and D2 of the main display unit 99 (main display section D) are provided to be unique to each lottery result based on winning into the operation ports 91 and 92. In other words, if the lottery result based on entry into the operating ports 91 and 92 is a 6R normal jackpot result, the symbols corresponding to the 6R normal jackpot result are displayed on the operating port display units D1 and D2. If the lottery result based on entry into the operating ports 91 and 92 is a 6R probability variation jackpot result, the symbols corresponding to the 6R probability variation jackpot result are displayed on the operating port display units D1 and D2. If the lottery result based on entry into the operating ports 91 and 92 is a special loss result A, the symbols corresponding to special loss result A are displayed on the operating port display units D1 and D2. If the lottery result based on entry into the operating ports 91 and 92 is a special loss result B, the symbols corresponding to special loss result B are displayed on the operating port display units D1 and D2. If the lottery result based on entry into the operating ports 91 and 92 is a normal loss result, the symbols corresponding to the normal loss result are displayed on the operating port display units D1 and D2 (see Figure 113(a)).

As detailed above, the display units D1 and D2 for the operation port of the main display unit 99 are configured so that the combination of symbols displayed at stop does not differ depending on the game state. In contrast, the combination of symbols displayed at stop on the symbol display device 95 (display screen 95a) that corresponds to a special losing result differs depending on the game state.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 113(b) and (c), if a special losing result occurs during normal gameplay in low-frequency support mode (first normal gameplay state), the symbol display device 95 (display screen 95a) will stop displaying the symbol combinations corresponding to the special losing result: "3," "1," and "4." Conversely, if a special losing result occurs during normal gameplay in high-frequency support mode (second to fourth normal gameplay states), the symbol display device 95 (display screen 95a) will stop displaying symbol combinations other than those mentioned above, specifically, symbol combinations corresponding to normal losing results.

Next, a supplementary explanation of the variable display time table for the operating port in this embodiment will be given with reference to Figures 114 and 115. Figure 114 is a schematic diagram showing the variable display time table corresponding to a normal failure result, and Figure 115 is a schematic diagram showing the variable display time table corresponding to a special failure result.

The variable display time table corresponding to normal miss results is the same as in the first embodiment. Specifically, Figure 114(a1) illustrates the variable display time when a complete miss occurs in the first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode. For example, if the number of stored reserved information is "0" or "1", the variable display time is set to "12, 13, or 14 seconds". If the number of stored reserved information is "2", the variable display time is set to "7, 8, or 9 seconds". If the number of stored reserved information is "3" to "8", the variable display time is set to "3, 4, or 5 seconds". In the first normal game state, the confirmed display time of the symbols in the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the confirmed display time of the symbols in the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "1 second".

Figure 114(a2) illustrates the display time for a complete miss in the fourth normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode A. For example, if the number of stored reserved information is "0" or "1", the display time for the variation is set to "12, 13, or 14 seconds". If the number of stored reserved information is "2", the display time for the variation is set to "7, 8, or 9 seconds". If the number of stored reserved information is "3" to "8", the display time for the variation is set to "3, 4, or 5 seconds". In the fourth normal game state, the display time for the confirmed symbols in the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the display time for the confirmed symbols in the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "1 second". In other words, the setting method for the display time for the variation in the fourth normal game state is the same as the setting method for the display time for the variation in the first normal game state.

Figure 114(a3) illustrates the display time for a complete miss in the second normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode B. For example, if the number of stored reserved information is "0", the display time for the variation is set to "12, 13, or 14 seconds". If the number of stored reserved information is "1" to "8", the display time for the variation is set to "1 or 2 seconds". In the second normal game state, the display time for the confirmed symbols in the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the display time for the confirmed symbols in the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "0.5 seconds".

Figure 114(a4) illustrates the display time for the variation when a complete miss occurs in the third normal game state, which is in low probability mode and corresponds to high frequency support mode B. For example, if the number of stored reserve information is "0", the display time for the variation is set to "12, 13, or 14 seconds". If the number of stored reserve information is "1" to "8", the display time for the variation is set to "1 or 2 seconds". In other words, the setting method for the display time for the variation in the third normal game state is the same as the setting method for the display time for the variation in the second normal game state. In the third normal game state, the display time for the confirmed symbols in the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the display time for the confirmed symbols in the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "1 second".

Incidentally, in all four normal game states (1st to 4th), during game rounds where a losing reach display (losing reach) occurs, the display time is set to "20 to 30 seconds," regardless of the number of stored reserve information. This display time is within the same range as the display time set for game rounds corresponding to jackpot results (see Figure 28). A relatively longer time is more likely to be set for jackpot results, while a relatively shorter time is more likely for losing results. In other words, a longer display time for a reach display indicates a higher probability of a jackpot than a shorter display time.

In this embodiment as well, during the game round in which the ceiling is reached, a variable display time corresponding to the reach display (specifically 20 to 30 seconds) is set.

Next, we will explain the variable display time table corresponding to special miss results. Figure 115(a1) shows an example of the variable display time when a special miss occurs in the first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode. When a special miss occurs in the first normal game state, the variable display time will be set to "20 to 30 seconds," regardless of the number of stored hold information. This variable display time is within the same range as the variable display time set for the game round corresponding to the jackpot result.

Figure 115(a2) illustrates the display time for special misses in the fourth normal game state corresponding to low probability mode and high frequency support mode A. For example, if the number of stored reserve information is "0" or "1", the display time for special misses is set to "12, 13, or 14 seconds". If the number of stored reserve information is "2", the display time for special misses is set to "7, 8, or 9 seconds". If the number of stored reserve information is "3" to "8", the display time for special misses is set to "3, 4, or 5 seconds". In other words, the setting method for the display time for special misses in the fourth normal game state is the same as in the case of a normal miss (see Figure 114(a2)). Note that in the fourth normal game state, the display time for confirmed symbols in the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the display time for confirmed symbols in the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "1 second".

Figure 115(a3) illustrates the display time for special misses in the second normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode B. For example, if the number of stored hold information is "0", the display time for special misses is set to "12, 13, or 14 seconds". If the number of stored hold information is "1" to "8", the display time for special misses is set to "1 or 2 seconds". In other words, the setting method for the display time for special misses in the second normal game state is the same as in the case of a normal miss (see Figure 114(a3)). Note that in the second normal game state, the display time for confirmed symbols in the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the display time for confirmed symbols in the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "0.5 seconds".

Figure 115(a4) illustrates the display time for special misses in the third normal game state, which is in low probability mode and corresponds to high frequency support mode B. For example, if the number of stored hold information is "0", the display time for special misses is set to "12, 13, or 14 seconds". If the number of stored hold information is "1" to "8", the display time for special misses is set to "1 or 2 seconds". In other words, the setting method for the display time for special misses in the third normal game state is the same as in the case of a normal miss (see Figure 114(a4)). Note that in the third normal game state, the display time for confirmed symbols in the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the display time for confirmed symbols in the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "1 second".

Furthermore, in the first normal game state, when the ceiling is reached during a game round, the display time corresponding to the reach display (specifically 20-30 seconds) is set, similar to the game rounds corresponding to the jackpot result. In contrast, in the second to fourth normal game states when the ceiling is reached during a game round, the display time that does not correspond to the reach display is set by referring to the display time table shown in Figures 114(a2) and 115(a2).

Next, referring to the schematic diagram in Figure 116, the display patterns of the changing symbols in each game round will be explained.

As shown in Figure 116(a), in a game round resulting in a normal loss (complete loss) that does not correspond to a reach display, the variable display of each symbol row shown stopped on the symbol display device 95 (display screen 95a) begins at the start of the game round. Afterward, without transitioning to a reach display, the symbols stop in the order of upper symbol row → lower symbol row → middle symbol row, and the symbol combination corresponding to the normal loss result that does not correspond to a reach display is displayed (confirmed display). This variable display pattern is the same in the first to fourth normal game states.

As shown in Figure 116(b), in a normal game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode (first normal game state), during a game round resulting in a special loss, the display of each symbol row stopped on the symbol display device 95 (display screen 95a) begins to change at the start of the game round. Afterward, the symbols stop in the order of upper row → lower row, transitioning to a reach display. After transitioning to the reach display, the middle symbol row stops so that the symbol combination corresponding to the special loss result (the combination of "3", "1", and "4" symbols) is displayed (confirmed display). This symbol combination clearly indicates to the player that a special loss result has occurred.

As shown in Figure 116(c), in normal gameplay states (second normal gameplay state to fourth normal gameplay state) compatible with high-frequency support mode, during gameplay rounds resulting in a special losing outcome, the display of each symbol row stopped on the symbol display device 95 (display screen 95a) begins to change at the start of the game round. Afterward, without transitioning to a reach display, the symbols stop in the order of upper symbol row → lower symbol row → middle symbol row, and the symbol combination corresponding to a normal losing outcome that does not support a reach display is displayed (confirmed display). In other words, it is difficult to determine from the symbol combination whether or not the current game round resulted in a special losing outcome.

According to the configuration shown in this embodiment, even if the game progresses without a jackpot, a special miss result or reaching the ceiling can lead to a transition to the fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A. Transitioning to the fourth normal game state increases the frequency of winning into the second operation port 92A, thereby suppressing investment. Such a configuration is desirable in enhancing the integrity of the game. However, if a special miss result occurs in a normal game state corresponding to a high-frequency support mode, such as the fourth normal game state, that special miss result becomes invalid and is treated the same as a normal miss result. While this is desirable in suppressing the increase in gambling tendencies, there is concern that if the player becomes aware of the special miss result, it may give the player the impression that they have wasted their luck. This could be a factor in reducing the desire to play. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this embodiment, if a special losing result occurs during the first normal game state, the symbol combination indicating that special losing result is displayed on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95. Conversely, if a special losing result occurs during the fourth normal game state (the same applies to the second and third normal game states), the same symbol combination as in the case of a normal losing result is displayed. With this configuration, even if a special losing result occurs during the fourth normal game state (the same applies to the second and third normal game states), it can be made less conspicuous. This suppresses the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience and contributes to improving player satisfaction. This is desirable in terms of increasing attention to the game.

Furthermore, if a special miss occurs during the first normal game state, the display time for the spin will be the same as the display time for the reach indicator. Conversely, if a special miss occurs during a normal game state corresponding to a high-frequency support mode, such as the fourth normal technique state, the display time for the spin will be the same as the display time for the non-reach indicator. In this way, even when a special miss occurs during a high-frequency support mode, the game round can be made less conspicuous, thereby further enhancing the above effect. In particular, when a special miss occurs during a normal game state corresponding to a high-frequency support mode, such as the fourth normal technique state, the same display time table as when a normal miss (non-reach indicator) occurs is referenced, and the display time is set in a common manner. This allows the game round with the special miss to be blended in with the game round with the normal miss, thereby effectively enhancing the above effect.

<Variation 1>
In the 11th embodiment described above, the symbol combination that causes the symbol display device 95 to stop (confirm display) when a special miss result A occurs and the symbol combination that causes the symbol display device 95 to stop (confirm display) when a special miss result B occurs are unified, but the embodiment is not limited to this. The symbol combination that causes the symbol display device 95 to stop when a special miss result A occurs (the symbol combination corresponding to special miss result A) and the symbol combination that causes the symbol display device 95 to stop when a special miss result B occurs (the symbol combination corresponding to special miss result B) may be different.

Furthermore, if separate symbol combinations are provided for special miss result A and special miss result B, and the type of special miss result can be identified from the symbol combination, then, when a relatively advantageous special miss result B occurs, the symbol combinations other than those corresponding to special miss result B (symbol combinations corresponding to normal miss results) may be stopped to conceal the fact that it is special miss result B. Conversely, when a relatively less advantageous special miss result A occurs, the symbol combinations corresponding to special miss result A may be stopped to clearly indicate that it is special miss result A. Alternatively, when a relatively advantageous special miss result B occurs, the symbol combinations corresponding to special miss result B may be stopped to clearly indicate that it is special miss result B. Conversely, when a relatively less advantageous special miss result A occurs, the symbol combinations other than those corresponding to special miss result A (symbol combinations corresponding to normal miss results) may be stopped to conceal the fact that it is special miss result A.

<Modified Example 2>
In the 11th embodiment described above, if a special miss occurs during a normal game state (second normal game state to fourth normal game state) compatible with high-frequency support mode, the symbol display device 95 is configured to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the normal miss. However, the system is not limited to this configuration. If a special miss occurs during a normal game state (third normal game state to fourth normal game state) compatible with high-frequency support mode, the symbol display device 95 is configured to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the normal miss. On the other hand, if a special miss occurs during a normal game state (fourth normal game state) compatible with high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode B, which is a more advantageous game state than the normal game state compatible with high-frequency support mode A to which the player transitions as a result of a special miss, the symbol display device 95 is configured to stop and display the combination of "3", "1", and "4" symbols corresponding to the special miss.

<Example 3>
If the special miss result is not explicitly shown each time, the discrepancy between the probability of the special miss result perceived by the player and the actual probability of the special miss result will become large. This is a concern as it may give players a negative impression, such as "bad luck with the game machine" or "bad luck." In light of this, it is preferable to configure the symbol display device 95 to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the special miss result depending on the number of remaining turns in the fourth normal game state. Specifically, it is preferable to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the special miss result when the number of remaining turns is greater than or equal to a predetermined number, while not stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the special miss result when the number of remaining turns is less than the predetermined number.

<Modification 4>
It is also possible to configure the system to first determine whether the reserved ball information stored in the reserved ball storage area 432 corresponds to a special miss result before the decision on whether the reserved ball information corresponds to a special miss result, and to execute a pre-announcement effect (a so-called pre-read effect) according to the result of this first determination. In the configuration shown in this embodiment, the occurrence of the pre-announcement effect during normal gameplay in high-frequency support mode is likely to cause discomfort to the player. Therefore, in normal gameplay in high-frequency support mode, it is desirable to restrict at least one of the above-mentioned first determination and pre-announcement effect to refrain from performing the pre-announcement effect.

<Twelfth Embodiment>
As shown in the first embodiment above, in a configuration where an upper limit (termination threshold number of plays) is set for the fourth normal game state to which the player transitions upon reaching the ceiling, there is a possibility that the fourth normal game state may end without a jackpot being achieved during that state. In a configuration where the value of the game count counter that affects the ceiling function is reset (cleared to 0) only upon a jackpot, that is, in a configuration where the ceiling is not reset when the above event (hereinafter also referred to as a "runaway") occurs, the ceiling will not be reset until the next jackpot occurs, so there is a possibility that the investment will increase significantly after a runaway. Here, the gaming machine is connected to a data display device installed in the gaming hall, and it is common for the number of plays after a jackpot to be displayed on the data display device, and the administrator of the gaming hall can refer to this data display device to determine whether or not the ceiling has not been reached. However, in gaming halls, the power to the gaming machine and data display device is turned OFF after the end of business hours and turned ON in the morning of the next business day. Such a power operation (OFF → ON) resets the number of games played (clears to 0), making it difficult to determine whether the ceiling has not been reached after the power operation. This difficulty in understanding the state of the gaming machine is expected to reduce the convenience for administrators. One of the features of this embodiment is that it takes these circumstances into consideration. Below, the characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be described, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. First, the support mode switching process in this embodiment will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 117.

(Support mode switching process)
In the support mode switching process, first, in step S9001, it is determined whether the current support mode is high-frequency support mode B. If the result in step S9001 is positive, the process proceeds to step S9002. In step S9002, it is determined whether the count limit flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. If the result in step S9002 is negative, the switching process ends there. If the result in step S9002 is positive, the process proceeds to step S9003. In step S9003, the continuation count counter in the various counter area 434 is updated. Specifically, the value of the continuation count counter is decremented by "1". In the following step S9004, it is determined whether the value of the continuation count counter is "0". If the result in step S9004 is negative, the switching process ends there. If a positive result is obtained in step S9004, the process proceeds to step S9005, where the high-frequency support mode flag (specifically the high-frequency support mode B flag) and the count limit flag stored in the various flag storage area 435 are cleared, and the switching process ends. When the high-frequency support mode flag is cleared, the support mode switches from high-frequency support mode to low-frequency support mode.

Returning to the explanation of step S9001, if a negative result is obtained in step S9001, proceed to step S9006. In step S9006, it is determined whether the current support mode is high-frequency support mode A. If a positive result is obtained in step S9006, proceed to step S9007. In step S9007, it is determined whether the value of the game count counter has reached its upper limit. If a negative result is obtained in step S9007, proceed to step S9008. In step S9008, the continuation count counter is updated. Specifically, the value of the continuation count counter is decremented by "1". In the following step S9009, it is determined whether the value of the continuation count counter is "0". If a negative result is obtained in step S1609, this switching process ends immediately.

If a positive result is obtained in step S9009, the process proceeds to step S9015. In step S9015, it is determined whether the current High-Frequency Support Mode A was triggered by reaching the ceiling. If a negative result is obtained in step S9015, the High-Frequency Support Mode flag (High-Frequency Support Mode A flag) and the play limit flag are cleared in step S9005, and this switching process ends. In other words, when the number of plays performed during High-Frequency Support Mode A reaches the upper limit, the process switches to Low-Frequency Support Mode.

On the other hand, if a positive result is obtained in step S9015, the process proceeds to step S9016. In step S9016, a special notification preparation flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. After that, in step S9005, the high-frequency support mode flag (high-frequency support mode A flag) and the count limit flag are cleared, and this switching process ends. In other words, when the number of games played in high-frequency support mode A reaches the upper limit, the process switches to low-frequency support mode.

Returning to the explanation of step S9006, if a negative determination is made in step S9006, that is, if the current support mode is low-frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S9010. In step S9010, it is determined whether or not the value of the game count counter has reached its upper limit. If a negative determination is made in step S9010, the process proceeds to step S9011. In step S9011, it is determined whether or not the current game count corresponds to a special miss. If it does not correspond to a special miss, a negative determination is made in step S9011, and this switching process ends. If a positive determination is made in step S9011 (it corresponds to a special miss) or if a positive determination is made in step S9010 (the ceiling has been reached), the process proceeds to step S9012. In step S9012, the high-frequency support mode A flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. Then, in the following step S9013, the game count limit flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. After that, the process proceeds to step S9014, where the setting process for the continuation count counter is executed, and then the main switching process is terminated.

In the continuation counter setting process, if the value of the game count counter reaches its upper limit (the ceiling is reached) during the current game round, the continuation counter is set to "400". This means that High-Frequency Support Mode A will continue until a jackpot is hit during High-Frequency Support Mode A, or until 400 game rounds have been played during High-Frequency Support Mode A. If the result of this game round is Special Miss A, the continuation counter is set to "20". This means that High-Frequency Support Mode A will continue until a jackpot is hit during High-Frequency Support Mode A, or until 20 game rounds have been played during High-Frequency Support Mode A. If the result of this game round is Special Miss B, the continuation counter is set to "40". This means that High-Frequency Support Mode A will continue until a jackpot is hit during High-Frequency Support Mode A, or until 40 game rounds have been played during High-Frequency Support Mode A.

Returning to the explanation of step S9007, if the game count counter reaches its upper limit (the ceiling is reached) during high-frequency support mode A, the continuation count counter is set (overwritten) to "400" in step S9014, and this switching process ends. This extends high-frequency support mode A so that it continues until 400 game plays have been executed during that high-frequency support mode A. In other words, if the ceiling is reached during high-frequency support mode A triggered by a special miss, the number of game plays for which high-frequency support mode A continues is reset (overwritten), and the upper limit of the fourth normal game state is raised without going through other normal game states.

Next, referring to the flowchart in Figure 118, the main processing performed by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162 will be described. As shown in the first embodiment, the main processing is initiated when the power is turned on, and after executing this main processing, the system transitions to the normal processing described above (see Figure 23).

(Main processing)
In the main processing, first, in step S9101, a startup process is performed in conjunction with power-on. Specifically, the system waits for approximately 500 msec to allow the secondary control board (dispensing control device 242, etc.) to become operational.

In the following step S9102, it is determined whether 1 second (the permission/denial period) has elapsed since the startup process in step S9101. If 1 second has not elapsed, the process in step S9102 is executed again. This time is measured by counting the number of times the process in step S9102 is executed. For example, if the time required from the negative determination in step S9102 to the execution of the process in step S9102 again is 0.1 msec, then when the count value reaches 10000, it is determined that 1 second has elapsed since the startup process in step S9101. The specific configuration for measuring time is arbitrary; for example, a real-time clock may be used to measure time. If it is determined in step S9102 that 1 second has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S9103.

In step S9103, access to RAM 404 is permitted. Then, in step S9104, it is determined whether the reset switch 166 on the power supply/launch control device 243 is ON. In the following step S9105, it is determined whether a power failure flag is stored in the power failure flag storage area of RAM 404. Furthermore, in step S9106, a RAM determination value is calculated, and in the following step S9107, it is determined whether this RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved when the power was cut off, i.e., the validity of the stored data is determined. The RAM determination value is, for example, the checksum value at the working area address of RAM 404. It is also possible to determine the validity of the stored data by checking whether the keyword written to a predetermined area of RAM 404 is correctly stored.

In this pachinko machine 10, when initializing RAM data upon power-on, such as at the start of a hall's operation, the reset switch 166 is pressed while the power is turned on. If the reset switch 166 is pressed (ON), the process proceeds to steps S9108 to S9109. Similarly, if no power-off information is set, or if an abnormality in the stored data is detected by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the process also proceeds to steps S9108 to S9109. In step S9108, the used area of RAM 404 is cleared to 0, and in step S9109, the initialization process of RAM 404 is executed. In the process of step S9108, the values of the game count counter and continuation count counter provided in the various counter areas 434 are reset (cleared to 0). Also, if a special notification preparation flag is stored in the various flag storage areas, that special notification preparation flag is erased.

On the other hand, if the reset switch 166 is not pressed, and provided that the power outage flag is stored and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal, the power outage flag stored in the power outage flag storage area is cleared in step S9115.

After executing the process in step S9115 or step S9109, the process proceeds to step S9110. In step S9110, it is determined whether the special notification preparation flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. If the special notification preparation flag is not stored, the initial command setting process is executed in step S9111 to output an initial command to the payout control device 242. Then, in step S9112, interrupt permission is set, and the process proceeds to normal operation. The MPU of the payout control device 242 recognizes that communication with the main control device 162 is functioning correctly by receiving the initial command from the main control device 162.

If a positive result is obtained in step S9110, the process proceeds to step S9113. In step S9113, the special notification start process is executed. In the following step S2514, the special notification preparation flags stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404 are cleared. After that, the processes in steps S2511 and S2512 are executed, and the process transitions to normal processing. In the special notification start process of step S9113, the special notification start command is set. This special notification start command is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 140 in step S401 of the normal processing (see Figure 23). The notification/effect control device 140 starts the special notification based on the receipt of this special notification start command.

Here, referring to the flowchart in Figure 119(a), the special notification processing performed by the MPU 442 of the notification and effect control device 140 will be explained. The special notification processing is a process performed by the MPU 442 as part of the periodic processing.

(Special notification processing)
In the special notification process, first, in step S9201, it is determined whether or not a special notification is currently being executed. If the determination in step S9201 is negative, then in step S9202, it is determined whether or not the special notification start command has been received from the main control device 162. If the determination in step S9202 is negative, the special notification process ends there. If the determination in step S9202 is positive, the process proceeds to step S9203, where the special notification start process is executed, and then the special notification process ends. In the special notification start process in step S9203, as shown in Figure 119(b) → Figure 119(c), the annular illuminated section 26 of the front door frame 14 is fully illuminated. The hall manager of the amusement hall can easily determine whether or not the amusement machine is in the state after reaching the ceiling based on the presence or absence of illumination of the annular illuminated section 26.

Returning to the explanation of step S9201, if a positive result is obtained in step S9201, that is, if the special notification is being executed, then the process for canceling the special notification is executed in steps S9204 to S9206. Here, first referring to the flowchart in Figure 120, the special notification control process executed as part of the normal processing (see Figure 23) by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162 will be explained.

(Special notification control processing)
In the special notification control process, first, in step S9301, it is determined whether the reset switch 166 is ON or OFF. If the determination in step S9301 is negative, the special notification control process is terminated. If the determination in step S9301 is positive, the special notification cancellation process is executed in step S9302. In the special notification cancellation process, a special notification cancellation command is set. This special notification cancellation command is sent to the notification/performance control device 140 in step S401 of the normal process (see Figure 23). In the following step S9302, the game count counters in the various counter areas 434 are reset (cleared to 0) and the special notification control process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the special notification process in Figure 119(a), step S9204 determines whether or not a special notification cancellation command has been received from the main control unit 162. If the determination in step S9204 is positive, the special notification cancellation process is executed in step S9205. In the special notification cancellation process, the ring-shaped illuminated section 26 described above is turned off, as shown in Figure 119(c) → Figure 119(b).

If a negative result is obtained in step S9204, the process proceeds to step S9206 to determine whether the performance button 35 located on the front door frame 14 was operated (whether it was turned ON or not). If a negative result is obtained in step S9206, this special notification process ends immediately. If a positive result is obtained in step S9206, the special notification cancellation process in step S9205 is executed, and then this special notification process ends.

As detailed above, if the reset switch 166 is operated (turned ON) while the special notification is active, the game count counter will be reset (cleared to 0) and the special notification will be canceled. Conversely, if the effect button 35 is operated (turned ON) while the special notification is active, the game count counter will not be reset (cleared to 0), and only the special notification will be canceled.

Furthermore, if the game continues without the special notification being canceled, the lighting effects in the ring-shaped illuminated section 26 are prioritized as the game progresses. However, if the game stops, the lighting pattern of the ring-shaped illuminated section 26 returns to the pattern corresponding to the special notification (fully lit). Also, if an action-based effect is performed during gameplay, the player may operate the effect button 35. However, even if the effect button 35 is operated while the lighting effects associated with game progress are prioritized, the special notification will not be canceled; the temporarily suspended state will be maintained.

If the number of game spins (total spins) after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without resulting in a jackpot, the game transitions to the fourth normal game state, which corresponds to the high-frequency support mode (high-frequency support mode A). In the fourth normal game state, winnings into the operating slots 91 and 92 occur frequently, thereby suppressing investment associated with game progression. Such a function (ceiling function) is desirable in terms of providing relief to players. Here, the fourth normal game state transitioned to upon reaching the ceiling has an end-criteria spin count (400 spins), and even if the ceiling is reached, there is a possibility that the fourth normal game state will end without resulting in a jackpot (ceiling rush). This is desirable in order to avoid the benefit of reaching the ceiling becoming excessive and becoming a factor that excessively stimulates gambling tendencies. However, after a ceiling rush, the number of game spins stored by the game spin counter is not reset, making it impossible to reach the ceiling again. Here, if the power switch is turned OFF → ON without operating the reset switch 166 while the machine is still in the state after exceeding the ceiling limit, a special notification is triggered. This allows the administrator of the gaming hall to determine whether or not the machine is in the state after exceeding the ceiling limit. Supporting the determination of the state after exceeding the ceiling limit by powering on the machine in this way is desirable for improving the administrator's convenience.

If either the performance button 35 or the reset switch 166 is operated while the special notification described above is active, the special notification will be canceled. Conversely, if the reset switch 166 is operated while the special notification is active, the number of game plays stored in the game play counter will be reset. With this configuration, the manager of the gaming hall can easily select how to respond to a gaming machine with the special notification active, depending on the operating style of the gaming hall. In other words, they can choose to either cancel only the special notification and leave the machine in a state where the ceiling has been exceeded, or reset the ceiling. This configuration allows the above effects to be achieved even more effectively.

The "first operating means," the performance button 35, is located on the front side of the gaming machine, and the "second operating means," the reset switch 166, is located on the rear side of the gaming machine. This arrangement improves convenience for the administrator while effectively avoiding the inconvenience of the player resetting the execution count.

<Variation 1>
In the twelfth embodiment described above, the operating means for canceling the special notification (performance button 35) is located on the front side of the gaming machine (specifically, the front door frame 14), and the operating means for canceling the special notification and resetting the ceiling (reset switch 166) is located on the rear side of the gaming machine (specifically, the main control device 162). However, the embodiment is not limited to this. The operating means for canceling the special notification and the operating means for canceling the special notification and resetting the ceiling may both be located on the rear side of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, the operating means for canceling special notifications and resetting the ceiling only needs to be located in a position where the player cannot operate it, for example, in a position accessible from the front of the gaming machine by opening the front door frame 14 or inner frame 13. It is not necessarily required that these be located on the main control device 162.

<Modified Example 2>
In the twelfth embodiment described above, the performance button 35 is configured to function as both an operating means for operation-dependent performances and an operating means for canceling special notifications, but the invention is not limited to this configuration. An operating means for canceling special notifications may be provided separately from the performance button 35.

<Example 3>
If the game is played while the special notification is not canceled, it is also possible to configure the ring-shaped illuminated section 26 to prevent the light-up effects associated with the game from being executed.

<Modification 4>
As a special notification, a first special notification using the ring-shaped illuminated section 26 and a second special notification using the pattern display device 95 (for example, a counter displaying the remaining number of games until the ceiling is reached, and when the ceiling is not reached, the counter is fixed to a specific value such as "9999" or "0000") are executed in parallel. It is also possible to configure the system so that if the performance button 35 or reset switch 166 is operated while the special notification is being executed, the first special notification is canceled while the second special notification continues.

<Example 5>
In the twelfth embodiment described above, the special notification is canceled if the performance button 35 is operated while the special notification is being executed, but the system is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the system so that when the performance button 35 is operated, the mode of the special notification is switched from a mode with relatively high discernibility (a mode that is easily noticeable) to a mode with relatively low discernibility (a mode that is less noticeable). In such a configuration, the device that executes the special notification may be changed from the ring-shaped illuminated unit 26 to another device (for example, the pattern display device 95 or a lamp unit provided on the back of the gaming machine).

<Modification 6>
In the twelfth embodiment described above, a special notification is performed by fully illuminating the annular illuminated section 26 of the front door frame 14, but the specific form of the special notification is arbitrary. It is sufficient that it is possible to distinguish between gaming machines that are performing the special notification and those that are not. For example, the special notification may be performed by setting the annular illuminated section 26 to a special light emission pattern. It is also possible to perform the special notification on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95, or by using sound output from the speaker section 29.

<Example 7>
In amusement halls, instead of individually turning the power on and off for each gaming machine, the power is turned on and off collectively for each island of machines to shorten working time. Therefore, if the power is turned off and then on (restarted) while a special notification is in effect, the following effect can be expected. In other words, if the operation of the above-mentioned performance button 35 or reset switch 166 is not required to cancel the special notification, it becomes unnecessary to cancel the notification individually for each gaming machine, thus contributing to improved work efficiency.

Furthermore, it is possible to configure the system to temporarily restrict or deactivate the special notification when a ball enters the ball entry points 91, 92, etc., or when a game round begins, while the special notification is being activated.

<Difference 8>
In the twelfth embodiment described above, the performance button 35 is connected to the notification/performance control device 140, but the invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to connect the performance button 35 to the main control device 162.

<13th Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the behavior when reaching the ceiling and hitting the jackpot coincide is distinctive. Below, the characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be explained, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

(Game board unit)
In the first embodiment described above, the game board unit 80 (game board 80a) had a symmetrical gauge (see Figure 6), but in this embodiment, the game board unit 80A (game board 80aA) has an asymmetrical gauge. The game board unit 80A will be described in detail below with reference to Figure 121. Figure 121 is a front view of the game board unit 80A.

The game board 80aA has multiple openings of varying sizes that penetrate its own thickness (front-to-back direction). Each opening is equipped with a general prize entry point 81, an operating port unit 82A, a variable prize entry device 83A, a through gate 84A, and the like. When game balls flow into the general prize entry point 81, the operating port unit 82A, or the variable prize entry device 83A, these balls are detected by detection sensors (not shown) provided corresponding to each entry point, and based on the detection results, the player is awarded a predetermined number of prize balls (dispensing of game balls) or other benefits. Additionally, an out port 86 is provided at the bottom of the game board 80aA, and game balls that do not enter the various entry points are discharged from the game area PE through the out port 86.

Furthermore, the game board 80aA is equipped with numerous game pins 87 to appropriately distribute and adjust the flow path of the game balls, as well as various components (mechanisms) such as windmills. These various configurations, including the game pins 87 and windmills, differentiate the flow path of the game balls, adjusting them so that winning into the general prize winning slots 81, etc., occurs with a reasonable probability.

The operating port unit 82A, similar to the operating port unit 82 shown in the first embodiment, is composed of a first operating port 91A and a second operating port 92A disposed directly below the first operating port 91A. In particular, the second operating port 92A is equipped with an electrically operated mechanism 93A, which functions as an openable/closable ball entry assist device (ball entry assist means) or an open/close member (open/close means).

The game board 80aA is provided with a center frame 96A surrounding the display screen 95aA of the pattern display device 95A. The center frame 96A protrudes from the front of the game board 80aA, and the flow path of the game balls flowing down the game area PE is broadly divided into a route that bypasses the center frame 96A from the right side and a route that bypasses it from the left side, similar to the first embodiment described above. However, in this embodiment, the arrangement of the first operation port 91A, second operation port 92A, variable prize device 83A, and through gate 84A has been modified so that game balls launched along the left route can enter the first operation port 91A and the second operation port 92A, but cannot enter the variable prize device 83A and the through gate 84A. Similarly, game balls launched along the right route can enter the second operation port 92A, the through gate 84A, and the variable prize device 83A, but cannot enter the first operation port 91A. It is also possible to configure the system so that game balls launched along the left route cannot enter the second operation port 92A.

By switching the launch route of the game ball between the right and left routes depending on the game state, it becomes possible to gain an advantage in the game. This encouragement of skillful play helps to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

(Retained ball storage area)
In this embodiment, the configuration for storing hold information based on winning entries into the operating ports 91A and 92A differs from that of the first embodiment. The configuration for storing hold information in this embodiment will now be described with reference to the schematic diagram in Figure 122.

The ball storage area 432A shown in this embodiment includes a first operation port storage area Ra that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 when a ball enters the first operation port 91A, and a second operation port storage area Rb that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 when a ball enters the second operation port 92A.

The first operation port's hold area Ra consists of four areas (Area 1 to Area 4). When multiple consecutive entries occur into the first operation port 91A, the numerical information is stored chronologically in the order of Area 1 → Area 2 → Area 3 → Area 4. Similarly, the second operation port's hold area Rb consists of four areas (Area 1 to Area 4). When multiple consecutive entries occur into the second operation port 92A, the numerical information (hold information) is stored chronologically in the order of Area 1 → Area 2 → Area 3 → Area 4.

In this embodiment, if hold information is stored in the second operation port hold area Rb, the system is configured to preferentially move the hold information stored in the second operation port hold area Rb (specifically, the first area) to the execution area AE. Furthermore, if no hold information is stored in the second operation port hold area Rb, but hold information is stored in the first operation port hold area Ra, the system is configured to move the hold information stored in the first operation port hold area Ra (specifically, the first area) to the execution area AE.

In the first embodiment described above, the system was configured such that a special loss could occur based on a lottery drawing that resulted in a win at the activation ports 91 and 92. However, in this embodiment, the special loss is omitted (excluded) from the lottery results based on wins at the first activation port 91 and the second activation port 92, which is a difference in configuration from the first embodiment. The win/loss table for the activation ports in this embodiment will now be described with reference to Figure 123.

(Validity table for the operating port)
As shown in Figure 123, the success/failure tables for the operating port include a success/failure table for the low probability mode (low probability success/failure information group) and a success/failure table for the high probability mode (high probability success/failure information group).

In situations where the win/loss table for low probability mode (Figure 123(a)) is referenced during the lottery based on winning entries into the operating ports 91A and 92A, the random number values that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) are a total of 6: "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507". In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to jackpot results. On the other hand, in situations where the win/loss table for high probability mode (Figure 123(b)) is referenced during the lottery, the random number values that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) are a total of 30: "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107"... "597". In other words, among the values of the random number counter C1 ranging from "0 to 599", "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107"... "597" correspond to jackpot results. All random number values that do not correspond to jackpots correspond to losing results (specifically, regular losing results). Therefore, in the lottery based on entries into the operating ports 91A and 92A, the configuration prevents the "special losing" described in the first embodiment.

The distribution table for the operating ports is divided into a distribution table for the first operating port and a distribution table for the second operating port. The contents of the distribution tables will be explained using the schematic diagram in Figure 124.

As shown in Figure 124(a), the distribution table for the first operation port has the following distribution destinations for game results: 6R normal jackpot results (special game results corresponding to low probability), 6R probability variation jackpot results (special game results corresponding to high probability), and 2R probability variation jackpot results (game results corresponding to high probability). Specifically, among the values of the type counter C2 from "0 to 29", "0 to 9" correspond to 6R normal jackpot results, "10 to 19" correspond to 6R probability variation jackpot results, and "20 to 29" correspond to 2R probability variation jackpot results.

As shown in Figure 124(b), the distribution table for the second operation port has two distribution destinations for game results: 6R normal jackpot results (special game results corresponding to low probability) and 6R probability variation jackpot results (special game results corresponding to high probability). Specifically, among the values of the type counter C2 from "0 to 29", "0 to 9" correspond to 6R normal jackpot results, and "10 to 29" correspond to 6R probability variation jackpot results.

Here, we will provide supplementary explanations for each jackpot, referring to the schematic diagram in Figure 125.

If a 6R regular jackpot result occurs, the game transitions to a third regular game state corresponding to low probability mode and high-frequency support mode B after the special game state ends. As explained in the first embodiment, after transitioning to the third regular game state, if the number of games played during the third regular game state reaches the termination threshold (specifically "40 games"), the game transitions to a first regular game state corresponding to low probability mode and low-frequency support mode. In other words, the third regular game state has a limit on the number of games played. In this embodiment, the counting of games played during the third regular game state is limited to games played based on winning a prize in the second operation port 92A.

If a 6R probability variation jackpot is achieved, the game transitions to a second normal game state, which corresponds to high probability mode and high-frequency support mode B, after the special game state ends. As explained in the first embodiment, the second normal game state continues until the next jackpot is achieved. In contrast, if a 2R probability variation jackpot is achieved, the game transitions to a fifth normal game state, which corresponds to high probability mode and low-frequency support mode, after the special game state ends.

Here, referring to Figure 126, we will provide a supplementary explanation of the gameplay flow when reaching the ceiling and hitting a jackpot simultaneously.

In the example shown in Figure 126(a), the game progresses without a jackpot during the first normal game, which corresponds to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode. After the special game state ends, the number of game spins reaches the upper limit (ceiling). A 6R normal jackpot occurs at this 400th spin (the spin at which the ceiling is reached). Instead of transitioning to the fourth normal game state (corresponding to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode A) triggered by reaching the ceiling, the game transitions to the special game state. After the special game state ends, the game transitions to the second normal game state (corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode B).

In the example shown in Figure 126(b), the game progresses without a jackpot during the first normal game, which corresponds to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode. After the special game state ends, the number of game spins reaches the upper limit (ceiling). At this spin (400th spin), a 6R probability-changing jackpot is achieved. Instead of transitioning to the fourth normal game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode A) triggered by reaching the ceiling, the game transitions to the special game state. After the special game state ends, the game transitions to the second normal game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode B).

In the example shown in Figure 126(c), the game progresses without a jackpot during the first normal game, which corresponds to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode. After the special game state ends, the number of game spins reaches the upper limit (ceiling). At this spin (400th spin), a 2R probability-changing jackpot is achieved. Instead of transitioning to the fourth normal game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode A) triggered by reaching the ceiling, the game transitions to the special game state. After the special game state ends, the game transitions to the fifth normal game state (high probability mode and low frequency support mode).

As detailed above, if reaching the ceiling coincides with a 6R regular jackpot result, a 6R probability variation jackpot result, or a 2R probability variation jackpot result, the player will not receive the benefit of reaching the ceiling. In such a configuration, there is concern that the player's satisfaction will be significantly reduced because the benefit of reaching the ceiling is negated. This embodiment incorporates measures to address this issue. Here, referring to the flowchart in Figure 127(a), the first variation start process, executed as part of the variation display control process (see Figure 41) in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140, will be described. The first variation start process is a process for starting the performance for the game round based on the receipt of a variation start command from the main control device 162, and sets the variation display mode of the symbols, such as a reach display, as the performance for the game round.

(First variation start process)
In the first variation start process, step S9401 first reads the variation start command received, and identifies information on whether a reach occurred and information on the variation display time from the command. Also, as already explained, when a variation start command is sent from the main control device 162, a type command is also sent. In step S9401, the type command received along with the variation start command is read, and various information related to the game result, such as information on the probability variation jackpot result, information on the normal jackpot result, information on the special miss result, information on the normal miss result, and information on reaching the ceiling, is identified from the identified information. Then, in step S9401, information on whether a jackpot was won, information on the type of jackpot if a jackpot was won, information on whether a special miss occurred, information on the type of special miss if a special miss occurred, information on whether a reach occurred if neither a jackpot nor a special miss occurred, information on whether the ceiling was reached, and information on the variation display time are obtained, and the obtained information is stored in the registers of the MPU 442.

In the following step S9402, based on the information obtained in step S9401, it is determined whether the result of the current game round corresponds to a jackpot result. If the result of the current game round is a jackpot result (either a 6R probability variation jackpot result or a 6R normal jackpot result), in the following step S9411, it is determined whether the current game round will result in reaching the ceiling. If the determination in step S9411 is negative, the following step S9403 executes the jackpot performance setting process. The jackpot performance setting process is broadly divided into a stop result determination process that determines the combination of jackpot symbols to be stopped and the valid lines for stopping and displaying that combination, and a variation display pattern determination process (performance pattern determination process) that determines the variation display pattern of the jackpot symbols.

In the process of determining the stop result for a jackpot, the stop result for this game round is determined to be the one in which the same combination of symbols appears on one of the valid lines L1 to L5. Specifically, the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 stores the valid lines L1 to L5 and their address information. The final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. Furthermore, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In this embodiment, the following combinations of symbols are defined as corresponding to a jackpot: "1" symbol, "1" symbol, "1" symbol combination; "2" symbol, "2" symbol, "2" symbol combination; "3" symbol, "3" symbol, "3" symbol combination; "4" symbol, "4" symbol, "4" symbol combination; "5" symbol, "5" symbol, "5" symbol combination; "6" symbol, "6" symbol, "6" symbol combination; "7" symbol, "7" symbol combination; "8" symbol, "8" symbol combination; "9" symbol, "9" symbol combination (see, for example, Figure 45(a)).

As already explained, when a jackpot is achieved, the result is announced via a reach display. In the process of determining the jackpot display pattern, the system retrieves the reach display pattern table stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 and determines the normal reach display or super reach display pattern corresponding to the game result in the received variation start command and variation display time and type command. Furthermore, the system executes a process to store the address information of the determined variation display pattern in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

If a positive result is obtained in step S9411, that is, if the current game round is one in which the ceiling is reached and corresponds to a jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S9412. In step S9412, the overlapping event setting process is executed. Details of this overlapping event setting process will be described later.

If step S9402 determines that it is not a jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S9404. Step S9404 determines whether or not the ceiling will be reached in this game round. If the ceiling is reached, a positive determination is made in step S9404, and the process proceeds to step S9407. Step S9407 executes the ceiling reach animation setting process. The ceiling reach animation setting process is broadly divided into two parts: a stop result determination process that determines the combination of symbols to be displayed for the ceiling reach and the valid lines for displaying that combination, and a variation display pattern determination process (animation pattern determination process) that determines the variation display pattern of the symbols for the ceiling reach.

In the process of determining the stop result for reaching the ceiling, the stop result for this game round is determined to be the combination of symbols for reaching the ceiling that is established on one of the active lines L1 to L5. Specifically, the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 stores the address information for each active line L1 to L5, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. Furthermore, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In this embodiment, the combination of symbols "1," "3," and "4" is defined as the symbol combination corresponding to reaching the ceiling (see Figure 45(b)).

When the ceiling is reached, the result is notified via a reach display. In the process of determining the variation display pattern for reaching the ceiling, the variation display pattern table for reach displays, stored in the various table areas of ROM 443, is retrieved. The display pattern for either a normal reach display or a super reach display corresponding to the game result in the variation display time and type command of the currently received variation start command is determined. Furthermore, the address information of the determined variation display pattern is stored in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

If a negative result is obtained in step S9404, the process proceeds to step S9406. In step S9406, it is determined whether the current game round corresponds to a special miss. If a positive result is obtained in step S9406, the process proceeds to step S9407. In step S9407, the special miss animation setting process is executed. The special miss animation setting process is broadly divided into two parts: a stop result determination process that determines the combination of symbols to be displayed as a special miss and the valid lines for displaying that combination, and a variation display pattern determination process (animation pattern determination process) that determines the variation display pattern of the symbols for the special miss.

In the process for determining the stop result for special misses, the stop result for this game round is determined to be the combination of symbols corresponding to a special miss that occurs on one of the active lines L1 to L5. Specifically, the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 stores the address information for each active line L1 to L5, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. Furthermore, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In this embodiment, similar to when the ceiling is reached, the combination of symbols "1", "3", and "4" is defined as the symbol combination corresponding to a special miss (see Figure 45(b)).

If a special miss occurs, the result is reported via a reach display. The process for determining the variation display pattern for special misses retrieves the variation display pattern table for reach displays stored in the various table areas of ROM 443. It then determines the normal reach display or super reach display pattern corresponding to the game result in the variation display time and type command of the currently received variation start command. Furthermore, it executes a process to store the address information of the determined variation display pattern in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

If a negative result is determined in step S9406, the process proceeds to step S9408 to execute the animation setting process for a complete miss. In the animation setting process for a complete miss, it is determined whether or not a reach will occur in the current game round. If a reach occurs, the animation setting process for a reach is executed; if a reach does not occur, the animation setting process for a non-reach is executed.

The process for setting up the effects for triggering a reach is broadly divided into two parts: a stop result determination process that determines the combination of symbols for a complete miss corresponding to a reach and the valid lines for which that combination will be stopped; and a variation display pattern determination process (effect pattern determination process) that determines the variation display pattern of the symbols for a complete miss corresponding to a reach.

In the process for determining the stop result for a complete miss after reaching a winning combination, the stop symbols are determined so that they do not match any of the following combinations: the combination corresponding to a big win, the combination corresponding to a special miss, or the combination corresponding to reaching the ceiling. Specifically, the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 stores the address information for each active line L1 to L5. The final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. Furthermore, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In the process for determining the variable display pattern for a complete miss after a reach, the variable display pattern table for reach displays stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 is retrieved, and the normal reach display or super reach display pattern corresponding to the game result in the variable display time and type command of the received variable start command is determined. Furthermore, the address information of the determined variable display pattern is stored in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

The processing for setting up the effects when a reach does not occur is broadly divided into two parts: a stop result determination process that determines the combination of symbols to be displayed as a complete miss (not corresponding to a reach) and the valid lines for which that combination of symbols will be displayed as a stop; and a variation display pattern determination process (effect pattern determination process) that determines the variation display pattern of the symbols for a complete miss (not corresponding to a reach).

In the process for determining the stop result for a complete miss (no reach), the stop symbols are determined so that they do not match any of the following combinations: the combination corresponding to a jackpot, the combination corresponding to a special miss, or the combination corresponding to reaching the ceiling. Specifically, the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 stores the address information for each active line L1 to L5. The final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. Furthermore, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In the process for determining the display pattern for a complete miss (no reach), the display pattern table for misses (no reach) stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 is retrieved, and the display pattern corresponding to the game result in the display time and type command of the currently received variation start command is determined. Furthermore, the address information of the determined display pattern is stored in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

After executing any of steps S9403, S9405, S9407, S9408, or S9412, the process proceeds to step S9409. In step S9409, commands containing the stop result and presentation pattern information determined in steps S9403, S9405, S9407, S9408, and S9412 are output to the display control device 410 as a stop result command and a pattern command, respectively. The MPU 472 of the display control device 410 then controls the display of the symbol display device 95 to execute the presentation for the current game round based on the received stop result command and pattern command.

After executing the process in step S9409, the process to start the game round's effects is executed in the following step S9410, and then the process for starting this variation is terminated. Specifically, based on the effects pattern determined in steps S9403, S9405, S9407, S9408, and S9412, the drive control of the speaker unit 29 and the lamp unit 26 is started to begin the game round's effects.

Here, referring to the flowchart in Figure 127(b), the duplicate setting process in step S9412 will be explained. In the duplicate setting process, step S9501 determines whether the current jackpot result is a 2R probability variation jackpot result or a 6R normal jackpot result. If the determination in step S9501 is positive, step S9502 executes the normal setting process. The normal setting process is the same as the jackpot performance setting process shown in step S9403 above.

In other words, in the stop result determination process that constitutes the normal setting process, the stop result for this game round is determined to be the one in which the same combination of symbols appears on one of the active lines L1 to L5. Specifically, the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 stores the address information for each active line L1 to L5, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. Furthermore, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

If the result is a regular 6R jackpot, the following combinations of symbols will be set as the stop display (confirmation display): a combination of "2", "2", "2"; a combination of "4", "4", "4"; a combination of "6", "6", "6"; or a combination of "8", "8", "8".

If the result is a 2R probability variation jackpot, one of the following combinations will be set as the stop display (confirmation display): "1" symbol, "1" symbol, "1" symbol; "3" symbol, "3" symbol, "3" symbol; "5" symbol, "5" symbol; or "9" symbol, "9" symbol, "9" symbol.

If a jackpot is achieved, the result is announced via a reach display. In the variable display pattern determination process, which constitutes the normal setting process, the variable display pattern table for reach displays, stored in the various table areas of ROM 443, is retrieved. The system then determines the normal reach display or super reach display pattern corresponding to the game result in the variable display time and type command of the currently received variable start command. Furthermore, the address information of the determined variable display pattern is stored in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

If a negative result is determined in step S9501, i.e., if the current jackpot result is a 6R probability variation jackpot, then a special setting process is executed in step S9503. The special setting process, like the normal setting process in step S9502, consists of a stop result determination process and a variation display mode determination process.

In the stop result determination process, which constitutes the special setting process, the stop result for this game round is determined to be when the same combination of symbols appears on one of the active lines L1 to L5. Specifically, the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 stores the address information for each active line L1 to L5, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. The information of the determined stop result is also stored in the stop result address storage area. Then, the symbol combination of "7", "7", and "7" is set as the symbol combination to be displayed (confirmed) on the final stop line stored in the stop result address storage area.

If a jackpot is achieved, the result is announced via a reach display. The variable display pattern determination process, which constitutes the special setting process, retrieves the variable display pattern table for reach displays stored in the various table areas of ROM 443. It then determines the normal reach display or super reach display pattern corresponding to the game result in the variable display time and type command of the currently received variable start command. Furthermore, it executes a process to store the address information of the determined variable display pattern in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

In the following explanation, the pattern variation display mode determined in step S9503 will be referred to as the "special pattern variation display mode," and will be distinguished from the pattern variation display mode determined in steps S9403, S9405, S9407, S9408, and S9502 (the "normal pattern variation display mode").

(Comparison of variable display patterns)
Here, referring to Figure 128, we will explain the difference between the display mode when reaching the ceiling and achieving both a 6R normal jackpot result and a 2R probability variation jackpot result (normal display mode) and the display mode when reaching the ceiling and achieving both a 6R probability variation jackpot result (special display mode). Figure 128(a) is a timing chart illustrating the flow of gameplay when reaching the ceiling and achieving both a 2R probability variation jackpot result, and Figure 128(b) is a timing chart illustrating the flow of gameplay when reaching the ceiling and achieving both a 6R probability variation jackpot result.

In a game round where both reaching the ceiling and achieving a 2R probability variation jackpot result occur, as illustrated in Figure 128(a), at timing tj1, when the game round begins, the display of changing symbols on the operation port display unit and the symbol display device 95 (display screen 95a) begin. At timing tj2, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the change, the display transitions to a reach display. At timing tj3, the display unit for the operation port displays the symbols corresponding to the 2R probability variation jackpot result, and the symbol display device 95 displays the symbol combination corresponding to the 2R probability variation jackpot result (confirmed display). This clearly indicates to the player that a 2R probability variation jackpot result has occurred. In this change display configuration, the player does not explicitly indicate that the ceiling has been reached, and the game transitions to a special game state.

The gameplay flow when reaching the ceiling and achieving a 6R regular jackpot result are basically the same as in Figure 128(a), but the difference lies in the fact that the final stopping symbol combination (confirmation display) corresponds to the symbol combination of the 6R regular jackpot result. Therefore, the explanation is omitted.

In a game round where reaching the ceiling and achieving a 6R probability variation jackpot result coincide, as illustrated in Figure 128(b), the display of changing symbols on the operation port display unit and the display of changing symbols on the symbol display device 95 (display screen 95a) begin at the timing of tk1, when the game round starts. At timing tk2, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the change, the display transitions to a reach display, and at timing tk3, the symbol display device 95 displays a stopped symbol combination corresponding to reaching the ceiling (temporarily stopped display). This clearly indicates to the player that the ceiling has been reached. However, at timing tk3, the display of changing symbols on the operation port display unit is still continuing. At timing tk4, after the same length of time as the above-mentioned confirmation display time has elapsed from timing tk3, the display of changing symbols on the symbol display device 95 resumes. The period from timing tk1 to timing tk4 constitutes the first half of the special variation display mode. Considering that the ceiling has been reached during this first half, it can be said that this first half is the "ceiling reach indication part."

At timing tk4, the second half of the special variation display mode begins. At timing tk5, the symbols corresponding to the 6R probability variation jackpot result are displayed on the operation port display unit, and the symbol combination corresponding to the 6R probability variation jackpot result is displayed (confirmed) on the symbol display device 95. The execution time for the second half is shorter than that of the first half, and the symbol combination corresponding to the 6R probability variation jackpot result is displayed (confirmed) without going through the reach display. The period from timing tk4 to timing tk5 constitutes the second half of the special variation display mode. Considering that the 6R probability variation jackpot result is clearly indicated in this second half, it can also be said that this second half is the "6R probability variation jackpot result indication part."

Furthermore, the display time table for the symbol changes on the display unit for the activation port is set so that the display time for the symbol changes on the display unit for the activation port is basically the same length when the ceiling is reached and either a 6R regular jackpot result or a 2R probability variation jackpot result coincides, and when the ceiling is reached and either a 6R probability variation jackpot result coincides. As described above, by making the first part corresponding to the reach display relatively longer and the second part not corresponding to the reach display shorter, the sense of incongruity caused by the repetition of the symbol changes when a special symbol change display pattern is executed is reduced.

If the number of game rounds played after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without resulting in a jackpot, the game transitions to the fourth normal game state, which corresponds to High Frequency Support Mode A. In the fourth normal game state, entries into the activation ports 91A and 92A occur frequently, thereby suppressing investment associated with gameplay. Such a function (ceiling function) is desirable in terms of providing relief to players. However, if the aforementioned ceiling function is implemented, it is assumed that players' investment will be high by the time the ceiling is reached. Therefore, if it becomes noticeable that players do not enjoy the benefits despite reaching the ceiling, it is a concern that it may lead to a decrease in players' motivation to play. This is undesirable in terms of increasing interest in the game.

In this embodiment, when a jackpot is achieved in the game round that reaches the ceiling (if there are duplicates), different display effects are executed depending on whether the result is a 6R probability variation jackpot, a 2R probability variation jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot. Specifically, if a 6R probability variation jackpot (a jackpot that triggers a transition to a long-continuing high-frequency support mode) is achieved in the game round that reaches the upper limit, an effect indicating that the upper limit has been reached is executed. If a 2R probability variation jackpot (a jackpot that triggers a transition to a low-frequency support mode) or a 6R normal jackpot (a jackpot that triggers a transition to a short-continuing high-frequency support mode) is achieved in the game round that reaches the upper limit, an effect that does not indicate that the upper limit has been reached is executed. With this configuration, if a 6R probability-increasing jackpot results in a special game state → high-frequency support mode, the player can be led to believe that this is a benefit of reaching the ceiling. If a 2R probability-increasing jackpot results in a special game state → low-frequency switching mode, the player can be led to believe that no benefit occurred by concealing the ceiling reach. If a 6R probability-increasing jackpot results in a transition to a high-frequency support mode, which is much shorter than when reaching the ceiling, the player can be led to believe that no benefit occurred by concealing the ceiling reach. This configuration effectively improves player satisfaction and increases attention to the game.

<Variation 1>
In the 13th embodiment described above, the system is configured to execute normal setting processing when the result of a 6R normal jackpot, which is the trigger for transitioning to the third normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode B, coincides with reaching the ceiling. However, the system is not limited to this configuration. It is also possible to configure the system to execute special setting processing when the result of a 6R normal jackpot coincides with reaching the ceiling. In other words, in a game round in which reaching the ceiling and the result of a 6R normal jackpot coincide, it is also possible to configure the system to execute a special variation display mode in which the variation display of symbols is executed, consisting of a first part in which the symbol combination corresponding to reaching the ceiling is displayed as stopped (temporarily stopped) and a second part in which the symbol combination corresponding to the 6R normal jackpot result is displayed as stopped (confirmed).

<Modified Example 2>
In the 13th embodiment described above, the number of termination criteria set when the ceiling is reached is greater than the number of termination criteria set when a 6R normal jackpot result occurs, but the invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to set the number of termination criteria set when a 6R normal jackpot result occurs and the number of termination criteria set when the ceiling is reached to be the same, or the number of termination criteria set when a 6R normal jackpot result occurs may be greater than the number of termination criteria set when the ceiling is reached. By combining these configurations with the configuration shown in Modification Example 1 described above, a practically preferable configuration can be realized.

<Example 3>
In the 13th embodiment described above, the second half of the special variation display mode (the part that indicates the jackpot result) is shorter than the first half (the part that indicates reaching the ceiling), but it is not limited to this. The first half and the second half may be configured to be the same length, or the second half may be configured to be longer than the first half.

Furthermore, in the latter half of the game, the symbol combination corresponding to the 6R probability-changing jackpot result (a combination of "7" symbols, "7" symbols, and "7" symbols) is displayed (confirmed) without going through the reach display. However, it is also possible to configure the latter half of the game to display (confirm) the symbol combination corresponding to the 6R probability-changing jackpot result via the reach display, similar to the first half of the game.

<Modification 4>
In the 13th embodiment described above, the variable display time table referenced when reaching the ceiling coincides with either a 6R normal jackpot result or a 2R probability variation jackpot result is the same as the variable display time table referenced when reaching the ceiling coincides with a 6R probability variation jackpot result. In other words, the variable display time of the symbols in the operation port display unit (the variable display time of the symbols in the symbol display device 95) is the same when reaching the ceiling coincides with either a 6R normal jackpot result or a 2R probability variation jackpot result, and when reaching the ceiling coincides with a 6R probability variation jackpot result. This may be changed as follows. In other words, a variable display time table may be provided separately for when the ceiling is reached and either the 6R normal jackpot result or the 2R probability variation jackpot result coincides, and a variable display time table may be provided separately for when the ceiling is reached and either the 6R probability variation jackpot result coincides, thereby differentiating the variable display time of the symbols in the operation port display unit (the variable display time of the symbols in the symbol display device 95) when the ceiling is reached and either the 6R normal jackpot result or the 2R probability variation jackpot result coincides. For example, the variable display time of the symbols in the operation port display unit (the variable display time of the symbols in the symbol display device 95) may be longer when the ceiling is reached and either the 6R normal jackpot result or the 2R probability variation jackpot result coincides than when the ceiling is reached and either the 6R normal jackpot result or the 2R probability variation jackpot result coincides. For example, in a configuration where a reach display is executed in both the first and second halves of the game, as shown in the modified example 3 above, it is technically significant to configure the system so that the display time for the changing symbols in the display unit for the operation port (the display time for the changing symbols in the symbol display device 95) is longer when the ceiling is reached and a 6R probability variation jackpot is achieved, compared to when the ceiling is reached and either a 6R normal jackpot result or a 2R probability variation jackpot result is achieved.

<Example 5>
In the 13th embodiment described above, when reaching the ceiling and getting a 6R probability variation jackpot result coincide, the system is configured to clearly indicate reaching the ceiling and getting a 6R probability variation jackpot result by stopping and displaying the symbol combination indicating reaching the ceiling and the symbol combination indicating getting a 6R probability variation jackpot result, respectively. However, the specific configuration for indicating reaching the ceiling is arbitrary. For example, in a game round in which reaching the ceiling and getting a 6R probability variation jackpot result coincide, the system can be configured to display a video or still image (cut-in image of a character, etc.) on the symbol display device 95 (display screen 95a) to indicate reaching the ceiling, or the speaker unit 29 can output a sound effect or background music indicating reaching the ceiling.

<Modification 6>
In the 13th embodiment described above, if reaching the ceiling and achieving a 6R probability variation jackpot result overlap, the configuration is such that reaching the ceiling is clearly indicated in the first part and achieving a 6R probability variation jackpot result in the second part. That is, the configuration is such that reaching the ceiling → achieving a 6R probability variation jackpot result is clearly indicated, but it is not limited to this. If reaching the ceiling and achieving a 6R probability variation jackpot result overlap, it is also possible to configure the system so that achieving a 6R probability variation jackpot result is clearly indicated in the first part and reaching the ceiling in the second part, that is, the configuration so that achieving a 6R probability variation jackpot result → reaching the ceiling is clearly indicated.

<Example 7>
In the 13th embodiment described above, the second normal game state, which is entered when a 6R probability variation jackpot is achieved, is configured to continue until the next jackpot is achieved, but the system is not limited to this. The second normal game state may also be limited in the number of rounds, similar to the third normal game state. For example, if a 6R probability variation jackpot is achieved and the system transitions to the second normal game state, the system may be configured to transition to the first normal game state when the number of rounds played without a jackpot after the special game state ends reaches a predetermined termination criterion number. This predetermined termination criterion number may be the same as, for example, the termination criterion number set when the ceiling is reached, or it may be greater than the said termination criterion number.

<Embodiment 14>
In the first embodiment described above, the remaining number of games in the fourth normal game state, which is entered as a result of a special miss, is notified. In this embodiment, the configuration for notifying the remaining number of games differs from that of the first embodiment. The characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. First, with reference to Figure 129, the types of special miss results in this embodiment will be explained.

In this embodiment, special failure results are provided as special failure result A, special failure result B, and special failure result C. While all of special failure results A through C trigger a transition to high-frequency support mode A, there are differences in the number of games that can be played during high-frequency support mode A, i.e., the number of games that trigger the termination criterion.

Specifically, if the result is Special Failure A, the termination threshold is set to "20 spins," if the result is Special Failure B, the termination threshold is set to "40 spins," and if the result is Special Failure C, the termination threshold is set to "100 spins." In other words, the system favors players by increasing the number of spins required to terminate in the order of Special Failure A < Special Failure B < Special Failure C. In this configuration, when a player experiences a Special Failure, their expectation is directed towards Special Failure C.

(Game board unit 80C)
As shown in the schematic diagram of Figure 130, a hold display area is set at the bottom of the display screen 95aC of the pattern display device 95C. The hold display area consists of a hold number display area Da, which is partitioned and displayed with the same number of unit hold display areas as the maximum number of hold items when game balls enter the operating openings 91 and 92, arranged in a left-right direction, and an execution target display area Dc that can display a hold image (hold icon) corresponding to the game round currently being played.

In the center frame 96C of the game board unit 80C, a counter called a count display unit 88C is provided in the lower part (lower frame) of the display screen 95aC, specifically in a position closer to the first unit hold display area that constitutes the hold count display area Da (directly below the execution target display area Dc), which displays the remaining number of games until the end of high-frequency support mode A. The count display unit 88C is a segment display connected to the notification and performance control device 140, and is subject to display control by the notification and performance control device 140. When transitioning to high-frequency support mode A, the notification and performance control device 140 displays the count corresponding to the termination criterion number on the count display unit 88C and performs display control so that the number is deducted by "1" each time the game progresses. In other words, in the fourth normal game state compatible with high-frequency support mode A, each time the hold icon MP shifts from the hold count display area Da (specifically the first unit hold display area) to the execution target display area Dc, the remaining number of games displayed on the count display unit 88C is deducted by "1".

In this embodiment, the display of the remaining number of games in the count display unit 88C is not performed in game states other than the fourth normal game state, but this is not the only configuration. For example, the count display unit 88C may also be configured to display the remaining number of games in other game states, such as the third normal game state (a game state in which the number of games is limited).

Next, with reference to Figures 131 to 133, the configuration related to the display of changing symbols for each game round and an overview of said display will be explained. Figure 131 is a schematic diagram illustrating the overview of the display in the symbol display device 95C (display screen 95aC).

The pattern display device 95C is configured with three pattern rows: left, center, and right. The pattern display area on the display screen 95a is broadly divided into the left pattern display area DL, the center pattern display area DM, and the right pattern display area DR, corresponding to each of these pattern rows. The patterns in each pattern row are displayed in a periodic, scrolling direction (for example, from top to bottom). Each pattern display area DL, DM, and DR displays three patterns for each pattern row, resulting in a total of nine patterns (3x3) being displayed in the pattern display area.

As shown in Figures 132(j) to (t), the above design consists of 10 main designs: the numbers "1" through "9" and hearts, and secondary designs: pictorial designs resembling seashells.

As shown in Figure 133 (a schematic diagram showing each symbol row), the left and middle symbol rows have 10 main symbols arranged in ascending order, with sub-symbols in between. In contrast, the right symbol row has 10 main symbols arranged in descending order, with sub-symbols in between. The "heart" symbol is positioned between the "1" and "9" symbols.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 131, the display screen 95aC of the symbol display device 95C has five active lines set: the upper line L1, the middle line L2, the lower line L3, the left-upward line L4, and the right-upward line L5. With each game, the symbol display stops in the order of left symbol column → right symbol column → middle symbol column, and when the display of all symbol columns has finished (a confirmation display is shown), the player is clearly informed whether the result is a jackpot, a special miss, or a normal miss. Specifically, symbols "1" through "9" are jackpot symbols, and when the same combination of jackpot symbols stops and is displayed (confirmed) on any of the active lines L1 through L5, it is clearly indicated that it is a jackpot (see Figure 134(a)). The "heart" symbol is a symbol used for special losing outcomes. A combination of these "heart" symbols stopping on any of the active lines L1 to L5 (confirmed) clearly indicates a special losing result (see Figure 134(b)).

Furthermore, according to the relationship between the symbol arrangement shown in Figure 133 and the active lines shown in Figure 131, even if the symbol combination of the "heart" symbol changes while the re-variation display described later is being performed, the phenomenon of the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result passing through the active line is avoided. This is desirable in preventing players from mistaking a special miss result for a jackpot result.

When the aforementioned reach display occurs, the symbol display in the left reel display area DL is completed first, followed by the symbol display in the right reel display area DR. At this point, a reach line is formed when symbols with the same number are displayed on at least one of the active lines L1 to L5. While this reach line is formed, the symbol display in the middle reel display area DM is then performed, resulting in a reach display. Furthermore, if the opening/closing execution mode occurs, the symbol display in the middle symbol column is completed so that symbols identical to those forming the reach line are displayed on the reach line.

One of the features of this embodiment is that, after a reach display and the stop display of the "heart" symbol combination corresponding to the special miss result, the number of turns to terminate the game, which is set for this time, is then notified to the player using that symbol combination. Specifically, the game round performance executed by the symbol display device 95C in the game round corresponding to the special miss result has a two-part structure: the first part executes the start of symbol variation display → reach performance → temporary stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special miss result, and the second part notifies the player of the number of turns to terminate the game. In the game round that results in a special miss result, the outline of the performance is determined by the special miss setting process, which is part of the special miss performance setting process (see step S1907 in Figure 43) executed by the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140. The special miss setting process will be described below with reference to Figure 136.

(Settings for special exceptions)
As shown in Figure 135(a), in the special miss setting process, first, in step S4001, a temporary stop line is determined for temporarily stopping the symbol combination corresponding to the special miss result. Specifically, one of the valid lines L1 to L5 is determined for temporarily stopping and displaying the "heart" symbol combination.

In the following step S4002, the pattern of symbol variation display until the symbol combination corresponding to the special miss result is temporarily stopped and displayed—that is, the outline of the presentation in the first part—is determined. Specifically, one of the above-mentioned Normal Reach A-B or Super Reach A-C is determined as the symbol variation display pattern for the first part.

In the following step S4003, the pattern of symbol variation after the temporary stop (the pattern of symbol variation in the second half) and the final stop line at which the combination of "heart" symbols will be displayed (confirmed display) are determined. For the symbol variation display in the second half, all symbol rows are displayed in a synchronized scrolling manner while maintaining the combination of "heart" symbols (hereinafter also referred to as re-variation display). Each time the combination of "heart" symbols reaches the temporary stop line, the termination criterion count is added and displayed in the count display unit 88C.

However, the duration of this rotating display varies depending on the type of special miss result, i.e., the number of times the termination criteria are set. Furthermore, the final stop line where the "heart" symbol combination is displayed during the confirmation display does not necessarily coincide with the temporary stop line; a different valid line may be determined as the final stop line. Here, referring to Figure 135(b), a supplementary explanation of the relationship between special miss results and the variable display pattern is provided.

If the result of this game is a special losing result A, where 20 spins is set as the termination threshold, the number of spins in the second half will be set to be between 2 and 3. For example, if the number of spins is 2, the spinning display will end when the "heart" symbol combination has completed 2 spins. In other words, the temporary stop line and the final stop line will coincide. On the other hand, if the number of spins is 2 spins + α, the spinning display will continue even after the "heart" symbol combination has completed 2 spins and reached the temporary stop line, and will end before the "heart" symbol combination reaches the temporary stop line again. In other words, the temporary stop line and the final stop line will not coincide.

If the result of this game is a special losing result B, where 40 spins is set as the termination threshold, the number of spins in the second half will be set to be between 4 and 5. For example, if the number of spins is 4, the spinning display will end when the "heart" symbol combination has completed 4 spins. In other words, the temporary stop line and the final stop line will coincide. On the other hand, if the number of spins is 4 spins + α, the spinning display will continue even after the "heart" symbol combination has completed 4 spins and reached the temporary stop line, and will end before the "heart" symbol combination reaches the temporary stop line again. In other words, the temporary stop line and the final stop line will not coincide.

If the result of this game is a special losing result C, where the termination threshold is set to 100 spins, the number of spins in the second half will be set to 10. In this case, the spin display will end when the "heart" symbol combination has appeared 10 times. In other words, the temporary stop line and the final stop line will coincide.

Furthermore, in determining step S4002, a difference is established so that the probability of normal reaches A and B being executed increases with a higher set number of termination criteria for special misses. In other words, when a special miss occurs after a normal reach, the expectation of a higher number of termination criteria being set increases compared to when a special miss occurs after a super reach. This is a measure to ensure smooth gameplay by preventing the display time of the number of spins from becoming unnecessarily long, even when the number of spins increases in the later part of the game.

Next, referring to the flowchart in Figure 136, we will explain the processing for the latter half of the game round's presentation progression related to special miss results, which is executed by the MPU 442 of the notification and presentation control device 140 (hereinafter referred to as the latter half processing for special misses). The latter half processing for special misses is a part of the processing for the first variation (see step S1805 in Figure 42) executed by the MPU 442 of the notification and presentation control device 140, and is executed during the latter half.

(Handling of the latter half of the special case)
In the second half of the special miss processing, it is first determined whether or not the re-spinning display of the symbol combinations in the second half is in progress. If it is not in progress, a negative determination is made in step S4101 and the process proceeds to step S4102. In step S4102, it is determined whether or not it is time to illuminate the active line (temporary stop line) where the "heart" symbol combination is temporarily stopped. If a positive determination is made in step S4102, the process proceeds to step S4103, where the active line illumination process is executed, and the second half of the processing ends. In the active line illumination process, an active line illumination command is sent to the display control device 410, and a sound effect for illuminating the active line is output from the speaker unit 29. Based on the receipt of the active line illumination command, the display control device 410 controls the symbol display device 95C to illuminate the temporary stop line brightly. This makes the line where the symbol combination is stopped clearly visible to the player.

If a negative result is obtained in step S4102, the process proceeds to step S4104. In step S4104, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing for the re-variation display. If a negative result is obtained in step S4104, the processing for the second half of this section ends immediately. If a positive result is obtained in step S4104, the process proceeds to step S4105, where the re-variation display start process is executed, and then the processing for the second half of this section ends. In the re-variation display start process, a re-variation start command is sent to the display control device 410, and the background music output from the speaker unit 29 is switched to one corresponding to the re-variation. Based on the receipt of the re-variation start command, the display control device 410 starts the re-variation display of the symbol combination currently being displayed in temporary stop mode.

Returning to the explanation of step S4101, if the re-variation display is in progress, a positive result is made in step S4101, and the process proceeds to step S4106. In step S4106, it is determined whether it is time to accelerate or decelerate the re-variation display sequence while maintaining synchronization. If a positive result is made in step S4016, the process proceeds to step S4107, where the variation speed change process is executed, and then the second half of this process ends.

In this embodiment, the scrolling speed is changed such that the scrolling speed decreases as the combination of "heart" symbols approaches the temporary stop line, and increases as they move away from the temporary stop line. ROM 443 stores a speed change table that defines the relationship between the scrolling speed and the symbol's scrolling position. In step S4107, the scrolling speed is determined by referring to this speed change table. The display control device 410 changes the scrolling speed of the symbols to match the scrolling speed determined by the notification/effect control device 140.

Returning to the explanation of step S4106, if a negative result is obtained in step S4106, the process proceeds to step S4108. Step S4108 determines whether the combination of "heart" symbols has reached the active line (temporary stop line) during illumination. If a negative result is obtained in step S4108, the second half of this process ends. If a positive result is obtained in step S4108, the process proceeds to step S4109 to execute the count-up process. In this count-up process, the number displayed on the count display unit 88C is increased by "10". In other words, in this embodiment, each time the combination of "heart" symbols reaches the active line during illumination, the remaining number of games displayed on the count display unit 88C is increased by "10".

Next, referring to the flowchart in Figure 137, we will explain the special loss variation termination process (hereinafter referred to as the special loss variation termination process) among the processing for game round progression related to special loss results, which is executed by the MPU 442 of the notification and performance control device 140. The special loss variation termination process is a part of the first variation termination process (see step S1806 in Figure 42) executed by the MPU 442 of the notification and performance control device 140.

(Special error termination processing)
In the special loss termination processing, the confirmation display processing is first performed in step S4201. Specifically, a confirmation display command is sent to the display control device 410, and a sound effect corresponding to the confirmation display (final stop display) is output from the speaker unit 29. Based on the receipt of the confirmation display command, the display control device 410 displays the "heart" symbol combination as the final stop on the final stop line determined in step S4003.

If the "heart" symbol combination is displayed as the final stop on an active line other than the currently illuminated active line, i.e., if the temporary stop line and the final stop line do not match, a negative determination is made in step S4202, and the special loss variation termination process ends there. If the "heart" symbol combination is displayed as the final stop on an active line that is currently illuminated, i.e., if the temporary stop line and the final stop line match, an positive determination is made in step S4202, and the process proceeds to step S4202. In step S4202, a count-up process is executed. In this count-up process, the number displayed on the count display unit 88C is increased by "10". In other words, in this embodiment, when the "heart" symbol combination is displayed as the final stop on an active line that is currently illuminated, the remaining number of games displayed on the count display unit 88C is increased by "10".

Next, referring to Figure 138, we will explain the flow of the game sequence animation for a game round resulting in a special loss. Figure 138 is a timing chart illustrating the flow of the game sequence animation for a game round that resulted in special loss B during the first normal game state.

At the start of the game round (ti1), the display of changing symbols on the operation port display unit and the display of changing symbols on the symbol display device 95C begin. This game round corresponds to special miss result B. At the start of the game round (ti2), after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the game round (ti1), the "heart" symbols in the left and right symbol columns are displayed as stopped symbols (temporarily stopped symbols) on the active line L2, transitioning to a reach display.

At the subsequent timing of ti3, the symbol combination of "heart" symbols is displayed as a stopped (temporarily stopped) on the active line L2, corresponding to special miss result B. This clearly indicates to the player that a special miss result has occurred. However, in this embodiment, the symbol combination of "heart" symbols is displayed as a stopped regardless of whether special miss result A to C occurs. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to determine the set termination criterion number of spins from the symbol combination displayed at this point. Note that the symbol variation display on the operation port display unit continues at the timing of ti3.

At timing ti4, after the combination of "heart" symbols is displayed stopped on the active line L2, the active line L2 lights up, and "0" is displayed on the count display unit 88C (remaining count counter). At timing ti5, each symbol sequence that was previously stopped (temporarily stopped) begins to scroll synchronously, maintaining the combination of "heart" symbols. In other words, it transitions from temporary stop display to the re-fluctuating display described above.

At timing ti6, when the "heart" symbol combination completes one cycle and reaches active line L2 again, the remaining count counter value is increased from "0" to "10". Synchronous scrolling of the symbol sequence continues, and each time the "heart" symbol combination reaches active line L2, the remaining count counter value is increased from "10" to "20" to "30" (timing ti7 and ti8). At timing ti9, when the "heart" symbol combination completes its final cycle and stops on active line L2 (final stop display), the remaining count counter value is increased from "30" to "40", and the symbol variation display on the operation slot ends, with the symbol corresponding to special miss result B being displayed. Then, at timing ti10, after the confirmation display period has elapsed, the game transitions from the first normal game state corresponding to low-frequency support mode to the fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A.

The fourteenth embodiment described in detail above provides the following excellent effects.

As shown in this embodiment, if a jackpot is achieved, the support mode is changed to a high-frequency support mode (specifically, high-frequency support mode B) via a special game state (open/close execution mode). If a special loss occurs, the support mode is changed to a high-frequency support mode (specifically, high-frequency support mode A) without going through the special game state (open/close execution mode). This configuration diversifies the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher-level support mode, contributing to the suppression of gameplay monotony.

In particular, when a special miss occurs and the support mode changes to High-Frequency Support Mode A, the system is configured to set the termination threshold for High-Frequency Support Mode to 20, 40, or 100 spins, thereby further diversifying the gameplay. In this embodiment, when a special miss occurs, the player is clearly informed of the special miss by temporarily stopping and displaying the corresponding symbol combination (the "heart" symbol combination). Afterward, the system is configured to display the symbol combination in a loop before the final stop display, and the remaining spin counter value is updated (incremented) in conjunction with this loop display. The player can understand that a special miss has occurred based on the temporary stop display of the corresponding symbol combination, and then understand the termination threshold for this spin as the remaining spin counter value is updated according to the loop of the symbol combination. This configuration effectively enhances the player's attention to the game when transitioning to the normal gameplay state corresponding to High-Frequency Support Mode A triggered by a special miss.

Furthermore, if the remaining count counter is displayed incremented each time the "heart" symbol combination completes a cycle, players will expect the cycle to continue for as long as possible. This effectively prevents the impression that the transition to the normal game state compatible with High-Frequency Support Mode A is being unnecessarily delayed.

As described above, in a configuration where the value of the remaining spins counter is updated in conjunction with the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special miss result (the symbol combination of "heart" symbols), there is a concern that if circumstances occur during the spinning process that cause the symbol combination to break down, it will give the impression that the spinning is not performed properly, i.e., the value of the remaining spins counter will not be updated, and attention to this effect will decline prematurely. Therefore, by using a configuration that maintains the symbol combination of "heart" symbols during the spinning display, as shown in this embodiment, or more specifically, a configuration that synchronizes each row of symbols during the spinning display, such problems can be effectively suppressed. Furthermore, such a configuration is preferable in order to avoid the player mistakenly believing that the display of the stopped symbol combination of "heart" symbols was a misreading.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the system is configured so that no symbol combination corresponding to a jackpot result is included among the other symbol combinations that pass through the active line during the lap display. This configuration effectively suppresses unnecessary hype that might lead to a jackpot, thus avoiding player misinterpretation. This is preferable in preventing a decrease in attention to the update of the remaining spin counter value linked to the special lap display.

As shown in this embodiment, aligning the stop line where the "heart" symbol combination is displayed as stopped (temporarily stopped) with the stop line that triggers the update of the remaining spins counter suppresses player confusion caused by the diversification of the presentation. This is preferable for effectively achieving the aforementioned effect of increasing attention. In this embodiment in particular, it is possible to end the spinning display when the "heart" symbol combination reaches another active line before the active line (stop line) that triggers the update of the remaining spins counter. This is preferable for realizing the diversification of the presentation.

As shown in this embodiment, if the remaining count counter value is kept hidden when the "heart" symbol combination is displayed as stopped (temporarily stopped), and the display of the remaining count counter value is started when the symbol combination reaches the stop line after variable display, it becomes possible to make the symbol combination complete at least one cycle. This is preferable because it broadens the range of the set termination criteria count while suppressing the resulting obsolescence of the cycle display → remaining count update flow.

<Variation 1>
In the 14th embodiment described above, while the display of changing patterns in the operation port display unit is being executed, the pattern display device 95C displays a stopped (temporarily stopped) pattern combination corresponding to the special miss result and moves to the second half part, in which a special effect is performed to announce the number of times the termination criteria have been reached. However, the specific configuration for securing time to perform the special effect is arbitrary and can be changed as follows.

For example, in a game round resulting in a special miss, the display time for the confirmed outcome may be set to be longer than in other game rounds, and the special effect may be executed during the confirmed outcome display. Alternatively, in a game round resulting in special miss B, the special effect may not be executed, and instead, the special effect may be executed during the first game round after transitioning to the fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A. In this case, it is preferable to set the display time for the variation in that first game round to be sufficient time to execute the special effect. If that first game round corresponds to a jackpot result, it is preferable to change (upgrade) the symbol combination displayed at the end of the special effect from the symbol combination corresponding to the special miss result to the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result.

<Modified Example 2>
In the 14th embodiment described above, the remaining attempts counter is increased by "10" each time the combination of "heart" symbols completes a full cycle and reaches the target line in the latter half of the game. However, it is not necessarily required to limit the value added to just one type. In the latter half of the game, it is also possible to have a configuration in which one of several candidates is added when the combination of "heart" symbols completes a full cycle and reaches the target line. For example, there may be cases where the remaining attempts counter is increased by "10" and cases where it is increased by "20".

<Example 3>
In the 14th embodiment described above, the scrolling speed of the pattern column is accelerated or decelerated during the special variation display, but the scrolling speed of the pattern column may be kept constant during the special variation display.

<Modification 4>
In the special variation display, the configuration is designed to synchronize each row of symbols as it cycles, but this is not the only configuration. It is sufficient that the configuration is such that a combination of "heart" symbols is formed when it reaches the target line, and this does not preclude a configuration in which each row of symbols cycles asynchronously so that the combination of "heart" symbols breaks down during that process.

<Example 5>
In the 14th embodiment described above, the temporary stop line and the target line that triggers the count-up of the remaining count counter are the same active line, but the temporary stop line and the target line that triggers the count-up of the remaining count counter may be different.

<Modification 6>
In the 14th embodiment described above, the special variation display was configured to synchronously scroll each row of symbols so that the combination of "heart" symbols is maintained, but it is not limited to this. It is sufficient as long as the configuration is such that the combination of "heart" symbols is formed when the target line, which triggers the count-up of the remaining spins counter, is reached, and it is also possible to make the movement of each row of symbols asynchronous.

<Example 7>
In the 14th embodiment described above, the remaining spins counter is displayed as "0" at the timing when the spinning display begins after the combination of "heart" symbols has temporarily stopped and been displayed on the active line (when a period of the same length as the confirmation display time has elapsed from the temporary stop). However, the embodiment is not limited to this. The remaining spins counter may be displayed as "0" at the timing when the combination of "heart" symbols has temporarily stopped and been displayed on the active line.

Furthermore, the initial value displayed on the remaining count counter is not limited to "0"; it can also be set to the minimum value of "10".

<Difference 8>
In the 14th embodiment described above, the remaining number of games is displayed in the count display unit 88C, but this can be changed to a configuration in which the remaining number of games is displayed in the pattern display device 95C (display screen 95aC).

<Embodiment 15>
One of the features of this embodiment is that a special notification effect is executed in a game round prior to the game round in which the conditions for transitioning to the fourth normal game state are met, in order to foreshadow the transition to the fourth normal game state. The following describes the characteristic configuration of this embodiment, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

(Game board unit)
In the first embodiment described above, the game board unit 80 (game board 80a) had a symmetrical gauge (see Figure 6), but in this embodiment, the game board unit 80D (game board 80aD) has an asymmetrical gauge. The game board unit 80D will be described in detail below with reference to Figure 139. Figure 139 is a front view of the game board unit 80D.

The game board 80aD has multiple openings of varying sizes that penetrate its own thickness (front-to-back direction). Each opening is equipped with a general prize entry point 81, an operating port unit 82A, a variable prize entry device 83A, a through gate 84A, and the like. When game balls flow into the general prize entry point 81, the operating port unit 82A, or the variable prize entry device 83A, these balls are detected by detection sensors (not shown) provided corresponding to each entry point, and based on the detection results, the player is granted a predetermined number of prize balls (dispensing of game balls) or other benefits. Additionally, an out port 86 is provided at the bottom of the game board 80aD, and game balls that do not enter the various entry points are discharged from the game area PE through the out port 86.

Furthermore, the game board 80aD is equipped with numerous game pins 87 to appropriately distribute and adjust the flow path of the game balls, as well as various components (features) such as windmills. These various configurations, including the game pins 87 and windmills, differentiate the flow path of the game balls, adjusting them so that winning into the general prize winning slots 81, etc., occurs with a reasonable probability.

The operating port unit 82A, similar to the operating port unit 82 shown in the first embodiment, is composed of a first operating port 91A and a second operating port 92A disposed directly below the first operating port 91A. In particular, the second operating port 92A is equipped with an electrically operated mechanism 93A, which functions as an openable/closable ball entry assist device (ball entry assist means) or an open/close member (open/close means).

The game board 80aD is provided with a center frame 96A surrounding the display screen 95aA of the pattern display device 95A. The center frame 96A protrudes from the front of the game board 80aA, and the flow path of the game balls flowing down the game area PE is broadly divided into a route that bypasses the center frame 96A from the right side and a route that bypasses it from the left side, similar to the first embodiment described above. However, in this embodiment, the arrangement of the first operation port 91A, second operation port 92A, variable prize device 83A, and through gate 84A has been modified so that game balls launched along the left route can enter the first operation port 91A and the second operation port 92A, but cannot enter the variable prize device 83A and the through gate 84A. Similarly, game balls launched along the right route can enter the second operation port 92A, the through gate 84A, and the variable prize device 83A, but cannot enter the first operation port 91A. It is also possible to configure the system so that game balls launched along the left route cannot enter the second operation port 92A.

By switching the launch route of the game ball between the right and left routes depending on the game state, it becomes possible to gain an advantage in the game. This encouragement of skillful play helps to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

A hold display area is set at the bottom of the display screen 95aA of the pattern display device 95A. The hold display area consists of a hold count display area Da, which is partitioned by arranging unit hold display areas horizontally, with the same number of units as the maximum number of holdable balls when game balls enter the operating openings 91 and 92; and an execution target display area Dc, which can display hold images (hold icons) corresponding to the currently running game rounds. The hold count display area Da can be switched between a display mode composed of four unit hold display areas and a display mode composed of eight unit hold areas.

The game balls flowing down the left route primarily enter the first operation port 91A, and during low-frequency support mode, the game progresses mainly based on the reserves related to the first operation port 91A. In contrast, the game balls flowing down the right route primarily enter the second operation port 92A, and during high-frequency support mode, the game progresses mainly based on the reserves related to the second operation port 92A. Due to these circumstances, in most cases, the number of reserve icons displayed in the reserve count display area Da will be four or less. Therefore, the display mode of the reserve count display area Da will be based on a display mode consisting of four unit reserve display areas, as illustrated in Figure 139, and will switch to a display mode consisting of eight unit reserve display areas only when the number of reserve icons exceeds four. Note that the function to switch the display mode of the reserve count display area Da according to the situation can be omitted.

In the center frame 96A of the game board unit 80D, a counter called a count display unit 88D is provided in the lower part (lower frame) of the display screen 95aA, specifically in a position closer to the first unit hold display area that constitutes the hold count display area Da (directly below the execution target display area Dc), which displays the remaining number of games until the end of high-frequency support mode A. The count display unit 88D is a segment display connected to the notification and performance control device 140, and is subject to display control by the notification and performance control device 140. When transitioning to high-frequency support mode A, the notification and performance control device 140 displays the count corresponding to the termination criterion number on the count display unit 88D, and performs display control so that the number is deducted by "1" each time the game progresses. In other words, in the fourth normal game state compatible with high-frequency support mode A, each time the hold icon MP shifts from the hold count display area Da (specifically the first unit hold display area) to the execution target display area Dc, the remaining number of games displayed on the count display unit 88C is deducted by "1".

In this embodiment, the display of the remaining number of games in the count display unit 88D is not performed in game states other than the fourth normal game state, but this is not the only configuration. For example, the count display unit 88D may also be configured to display the remaining number of games in other game states, such as the third normal game state (a game state in which the number of games is limited).

Furthermore, a special effect device 500D is provided on the rear side of the game board 80aD. This device performs a preview of the special loss result (transition to the fourth normal game state) in game rounds executed before the game round in which the special loss result occurs. The special effect device 500D is positioned in a location that overlaps with the right route when viewed from the front of the game machine; specifically, it is located below the aforementioned game count display unit 88D and to the side of the operation port unit 82A (specifically, the first operation port 91A), and is visible from the front of the game machine through the game board 80aD. It can be said that the hold display area on the display screen 95aA of the symbol display device 95A is surrounded by the special effect device 500D, the symbol variation display area ME on the display screen 95aA of the symbol display device 95A, and the first operation port 91A where the special loss is provided. Details regarding the specific configuration of the special effect device 500D will be described later.

(Retained ball storage area)
Furthermore, in this embodiment, the configuration for storing hold information based on winning entries into the operating ports 91A and 92A differs from that of the first embodiment. The configuration for storing hold information in this embodiment will now be described with reference to the schematic diagram in Figure 140.

The ball storage area 432A shown in this embodiment includes a first operation port storage area Ra that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 when a ball enters the first operation port 91A, and a second operation port storage area Rb that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 when a ball enters the second operation port 92A.

The first operation port's hold area Ra consists of four areas (Area 1 to Area 4). When multiple consecutive entries occur into the first operation port 91A, the numerical information is stored chronologically in the order of Area 1 → Area 2 → Area 3 → Area 4. Similarly, the second operation port's hold area Rb consists of four areas (Area 1 to Area 4). When multiple consecutive entries occur into the second operation port 92A, the numerical information (hold information) is stored chronologically in the order of Area 1 → Area 2 → Area 3 → Area 4.

In this embodiment, if hold information is stored in the second operation port hold area Rb, the system is configured to preferentially move the hold information stored in the second operation port hold area Rb (specifically, the first area) to the execution area AE. Furthermore, if no hold information is stored in the second operation port hold area Rb, but hold information is stored in the first operation port hold area Ra, the system is configured to move the hold information stored in the first operation port hold area Ra (specifically, the first area) to the execution area AE.

In the first embodiment described above, the lottery based on winning entries into the first operating port 91 and the second operating port 92 was configured to result in a special loss. However, this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that only one of the lottery entries based on winning entries into the first operating port 91 and the second operating port 92 is configured to result in a special loss. The winning/losing table for the operating ports in this embodiment will now be described with reference to Figures 58 and 59.

(Validity table for the operating port)
As shown in Figure 141, the win/loss tables for the first operating port include a win/loss table for the low probability mode (low probability win/loss information group) and a win/loss table for the high probability mode (high probability win/loss information group).

In situations where the win/loss table for low probability mode (Figure 141(a)) is referenced during the lottery based on winning at the first operating port 91A, the random number values that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) are a total of 6: "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507". In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to jackpot results. On the other hand, in situations where the win/loss table for high probability mode (Figure 141(b)) is referenced during the lottery, the random number values that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) are a total of 30: "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107"... "597". In other words, among the values of the random number counter C1, which ranges from 0 to 599, "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107"... "597" correspond to the jackpot results.

Furthermore, in situations where the win/loss tables for low probability mode and high probability mode are referenced during the prize draw based on the entry into the first operating port 91A, the random number values that result in a special loss (i.e., special loss information) are all "2", "4", "6", "12", "14"... "596", totaling 150 values. In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "2", "4", "6", "12", "14"... "596" correspond to special loss results. And all random number values that do not correspond to either a big win or a special loss correspond to a loss result (normal loss result).

As shown in Figure 142, the win/loss tables for the second operation port consist of a win/loss table for the low probability mode (low probability win/loss information group) and a win/loss table for the high probability mode (high probability win/loss information group).

In situations where the win/loss table for low probability mode (Figure 142(a)) is referenced during the lottery based on winning at the second operating port 92A, the random number values that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) are a total of 6: "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507". In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to jackpot results. On the other hand, in situations where the win/loss table for high probability mode (Figure 142(b)) is referenced during the lottery, the random number values that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) are a total of 30: "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107"... "597". In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 ranging from "0 to 599", "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107"... "597" correspond to the jackpot results. All random number values that do not correspond to the jackpot correspond to the losing results (normal losing results). Therefore, in the lottery based on the entry into the second operating port 92A, the configuration is such that the "special losing" described in the first embodiment does not occur.

Next, the pre-confirmation process (see step S306 in Figure 22) and the setting process for the hold command (see step S307 in Figure 22), which are performed as part of the timer interrupt processing in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162, will be explained.

(Pre-confirmation process)
As shown in the flowchart in Figure 143, in the pre-confirmation process, first, in step S4301, the number of operational reserves N and the common reserves CRN stored in the reserve count storage area of the reserve ball storage area 432A are read, and this information on the number of reserves is stored in the register of the MPU 402. Then, in step S4302, it is checked whether the reserve information obtained by this win contains information corresponding to a jackpot result or information corresponding to a special miss result. Details of this determination are the same as the win/fail determination process in step S702 above, so the explanation is omitted.

If the confirmation process in step S4302 confirms that a jackpot has been won, a positive determination is made in step S4303, and the process proceeds to step S4304. In step S4304, the jackpot occurrence information is stored in the register of MPU 402, and this pre-confirmation process ends. In step S4304, based on the current win, the information for type determination, i.e., the value of the acquired type counter C2, is obtained from the pending information acquired in step S304, and the type of jackpot is determined by referring to the distribution table. The information stored in the register of MPU 402 in step S4304 includes information related to the type of jackpot.

If the confirmation process in step S4302 confirms that a special miss has occurred, a negative determination is made in step S4303, and a positive determination is made in step S4350, before proceeding to step S4306. In step S4306, the special miss occurrence information is stored in the register of MPU 402, and this pre-confirmation process ends. Furthermore, in step S4306, based on the current win, the information for type determination, i.e., the acquired value of type counter C2, is obtained from the pending information acquired in step S304, and the type of special miss is determined by referring to the distribution table. The information stored in the register of MPU 402 in step S4306 includes information related to the type of special miss.

If the confirmation process in step S4302 confirms that it will normally be a miss, then a negative determination is made in steps S4303 and S4350, and the process proceeds to step S4307. In step S4307, the normal miss reach confirmation process is executed. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 obtained in step S304 is obtained, and the lottery table for miss reach occurrences is referenced to check whether a miss reach will occur. If a miss reach does not occur (i.e., it is a complete miss), a negative determination is made in step S4308, and this pre-confirmation process ends. If a miss reach occurs, an affirmative determination is made in step S4308, and the process proceeds to step S4309. In step S4309, the miss reach occurrence information is stored in the register of MPU 402, and this pre-confirmation process ends. Note that the information stored in the register of MPU 402 in step S4309 includes information related to the general type of miss reach (whether it is a super reach or not).

Next, we will explain the process for setting up hold commands, referring to the flowchart in Figure 144.

(Setting the pending command)
In the process of setting the hold command, first, in step S4401, it is determined whether or not jackpot occurrence information is stored in the register of the MPU 402. If jackpot occurrence information is stored, the process proceeds to step S4402, and the jackpot-corresponding hold command is set. The jackpot-corresponding hold command includes information about the type of jackpot.

On the other hand, if a negative result is determined in step S4401, that is, if it is determined that no jackpot information is stored in the MPU 402 register, the process proceeds to step S4403 to determine whether or not special miss information is stored in the MPU 402 register. If special miss information is stored, the process proceeds to step S4404 to set a special miss response hold command. The special miss response hold command contains information regarding the type of special miss.

If a negative result is obtained in step S4403, the process proceeds to step S4405, where it is determined whether or not information about a near miss is stored in the register of MPU402. If information about a near miss is stored, a positive result is obtained in step S4405, and the process proceeds to step S4406, where the near miss response hold command is set. The near miss response hold command includes information related to the general type of near miss (whether or not it is a super miss). If a negative result is obtained in step S4405, the process proceeds to step S4407. In step S4407, the near miss non-response hold command (complete miss response hold command) is set.

When setting a hold command in steps S4402, S4404, and S4406, the display time for the variation is determined by referring to the value of the variation type counter CS, etc., and the information related to that variation display time is stored in the hold command. When determining the display time for the variation, the display time table is referred to, similar to the setting process for the display time shown in step S714. The hold command set in this way is transmitted to the notification/performance control device 140, which can then understand the variation display pattern of the symbols based on the hold command. As already explained, in the case of a complete miss, the display time for the variation may change depending on the number of hold information stored when starting the game round related to that hold information. Therefore, when setting a hold command for a complete miss, the information related to the display time for the variation is not stored.

After executing one of the command setting processes in steps S4402, S4404, S4406, or S4407, step S4408 executes a process to set the number of pending items for the pending command. The pending command information is composed of multiple bytes. In step S4408, first, the pending item information stored in the MPU 402 register in step S4301 of the preceding pre-check process (Figure 143) is read. Then, the read pending item information is stored in the bits for the pending item information of the already set pending command using an operation such as logical OR. This ensures that the pending command set in one of the processes in steps S4402, S4404, S4406, or S4407 includes information to identify which pending item corresponds to that pending command. After executing the process in step S4408 as described above, this pending command setting process terminates.

In step S4408, the hold command, which includes information on the number of hold items, is transmitted to the notification/performance control device 140 via the external output processing in step S401 during the next normal processing (Figure 23). Upon receiving this hold command, the notification/performance control device 140 identifies that the hold information has increased. Furthermore, the notification/performance control device 140 adds information for hold notification (described later) to the hold command and transmits it to the display control device 410. The display control device 410 then executes hold display and hold notification processing based on the received hold command.

Next, the processing related to the hold notification executed by the MPU 442 of the notification and performance control device 140 will be explained. The processing related to the hold notification can be broadly divided into two parts: command response processing, which determines the command from the main control device 162, and hold notification performance setting processing, which determines the type of hold notification.

(Handling of pending commands)
In the pending command handling process, when a pending command transmitted by the main control unit 162 is received, processing corresponding to the information contained in the received pending command is executed. Note that the pending command handling process is executed as part of a periodic process that is repeatedly started at a predetermined interval (for example, every 2 msec).

In the process of handling pending commands, the first step is to determine whether or not a pending command has been received. Commands received by the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140 are temporarily stored in the command storage area of the RAM 444. This command storage area is configured as a ring buffer capable of individually storing multiple commands and reading commands in the order they were stored, ensuring that even when multiple commands are received simultaneously, the processing corresponding to each command can be executed smoothly. To determine whether or not a corresponding pending command has been received, the system checks whether a jackpot-related pending command has been received in the target area of the command storage area 461. This command reading configuration is the same for reading other commands, such as commands for starting variations.

When a hold command is received, the various information contained in the hold command is stored in the hold information storage area. The hold information storage area 467 has a first area Rc1 to an eighth area Rc8, and is configured to store one hold information in each area. The hold information stored in each area is shifted sequentially to the lower areas when a shift command is received from the main control device 162, that is, when a game round is started. Specifically, the data in the first area Rc1 is cleared, and the data within each area is shifted as follows: second area Rc2 → first area Rc1, third area Rc3 → second area Rc2, fourth area Rc4 → third area Rc3, ... eighth area Rc8 → seventh area Rc7. In the hold information storage area of the notification/performance control device 140, as with the hold ball storage area 432 of the main control device 162 (more specifically, the hold area RE for the operation port), the hold information is stored chronologically regardless of the ball's destination. For details, the system identifies the number of pending commands included in the received command and stores the various information described above in the area corresponding to that identified number of pending commands among the first area Rc1 to the eighth area Rc8.

Furthermore, when the aforementioned hold command is received, a hold command reception flag is set in the various flag storage areas of RAM 444. Similarly, when a shift command is received, a shift command reception flag is set in the various flag storage areas. These flags trigger the setting process for the hold notification effect (hold notification effect setting process) described below, and are erased when the hold notification effect setting process is completed.

In the MPU 442 of the notification and performance control device 140, the jackpot announcement performance setting process is performed based on the information stored in the hold information storage area. Here, the jackpot announcement performance setting process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 145. The jackpot announcement performance setting process is performed as part of a periodic process that is repeatedly activated at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 msec cycle), and is performed on the condition that the above-mentioned hold command or shift command has been received. In other words, in this embodiment, the trigger for executing the jackpot announcement performance is when hold information is acquired upon entry into the operation ports 91A and 92A, or when hold information is consumed as the game progresses.

(Setting and processing of the jackpot notification effect)
In the process of setting up the jackpot notification effect, first, in step S4501, it is determined whether or not the jackpot notification effect is currently being performed. If the determination in step S4501 is positive, the process of setting up the jackpot notification effect ends immediately. If the determination in step S4501 is negative, the process proceeds to step S4502.

In step S4502, it is determined whether the various flag storage area 466 of RAM 444 contains the jackpot notification effect restriction flag described later. If the result in step S4502 is positive, the jackpot notification effect setting process ends immediately. If the result in step S4502 is positive, the process proceeds to step S4503.

In step S4503, it is determined whether or not a hold command has been received from the main control unit 162. If the determination in step S4503 is positive, the lottery process for receiving a hold command is executed in step S4504 to determine whether or not to perform the jackpot announcement animation. If the determination in step S4503 is negative, the process proceeds to step S4505. In step S4505, it is determined whether or not a shift command has been received from the main control unit 162. If the determination in step S4505 is negative, i.e., if it is determined that neither a hold command nor a shift command has been received, the jackpot announcement animation setting process ends there. If the determination in step S4505 is positive, the lottery process for receiving a shift command is executed in step S4506 to determine whether or not to perform the jackpot announcement animation.

After executing the lottery process in step S4504 or step S4506, the process proceeds to step S4507. In step S4507, it is determined whether or not a jackpot announcement sequence has been won. If the result in step S4507 is negative, the jackpot announcement sequence setting process ends there. If the result in step S4507 is positive, the process proceeds to step S4508. In step S4508, the jackpot announcement sequence details determination process is executed. In the following step S4509, the jackpot announcement sequence flag is set in the various flag storage area 466 of RAM 444, and in step S4510, the special miss announcement sequence restriction flag is set in the various flag storage area 466 of RAM 444. The jackpot announcement sequence flag set in step S4509 will be erased when the jackpot announcement sequence ends. Note that in step S4501 above, it is determined whether or not the jackpot announcement sequence is in progress based on whether or not this jackpot announcement sequence flag is set. Subsequently, in step S4511, the process for starting the selection of the jackpot announcement is executed, and the process for setting the main jackpot announcement effect is terminated.

Next, the process for determining the details of the jackpot announcement animation in step S4508 will be explained with reference to Figures 146 and 147. Figure 146 is a flowchart showing the process for determining the details of the jackpot announcement animation, and Figure 147 is a schematic diagram showing the jackpot announcement animation.

(Details of the jackpot announcement sequence are determined)
As shown in Figure 146, in the process of determining the details of the jackpot announcement effect, the target of the change in display mode is first determined in step S4601.

The jackpot notification effect shown in this embodiment is executed by changing the manner of the hold display in the hold display area NE of the symbol display device 95A (display screen 95aA) to correspond to the jackpot notification effect. Specifically, the hold icon MP displayed in the hold number display area Da that corresponds to the relevant game round (relevant hold) is changed (in this embodiment, the color is changed). Specifically, there are multiple color patterns for the hold icon MP, more specifically, three patterns: white (level 0), blue (level 1), yellow (level 2), and red (level 3), and the color of the relevant hold icon MP is changed to a color other than white.

If the pending symbol corresponds to a jackpot result, the selection order is more likely to be Level 3 > Level 2 > Level 1. If the pending symbol corresponds to a normal loss result, the selection order is more likely to be Level 1 > Level 2 > Level 3. In other words, when a jackpot予告演出 (jackpot prediction effect) is executed, the higher the final level, the higher the expectation of a jackpot result.

Furthermore, the jackpot prediction effects can be broadly categorized into two types: fixed-type prediction effects where the color of the changed reserve icon MP remains until it shifts to the execution target display area Dc, and step-up type prediction effects where the color changes before shifting to the execution target display area Dc.

In step S4601, the pending icon whose color will be changed is determined. In the following step S4602, the final color (display mode) of the corresponding pending icon after it moves to the execution target display area Dc is determined. Then, based on this result, in step S4603, the initial color (display mode) is determined.

Subsequently, in step S4604, the remaining number of shifts until the remaining corresponding pending icons MP move to the execution target display area Dc is determined, and the step-up pattern described above is determined based on the determined number of shifts. Note that if the initial color and the final color match, no step-up occurs.

The MPU 472 of the display control device 410 performs display control of the hold display area NE, etc., based on hold commands and shift commands received from the main control device 162 via the notification/effect control device 140. The command response processing for hold display control executed by the MPU 472 of the display control device 410 will be described below with reference to the flowchart in Figure 148. The command response processing for hold display control is executed as part of a periodic process (command response processing) that is started at a predetermined interval (2 msec in this embodiment).

(Processing for commands to control the hold display)
In the command handling process for controlling the hold display, first, in step S4701, it is determined whether or not a hold command has been received from the notification/performance control device 140. If the determination in step S4701 is positive, the process proceeds to step S4702. In step S4702, the value of the hold count counter (hold memory count SN) provided in the various counter areas of the work RAM 474 is incremented by 1.

After executing the counter update process in step S4702, the process proceeds to step S4703. In step S4703, an additional flag is set in the work RAM 474. In the hold display control process described later, a hold icon MP is added to the hold count display area Da based on this additional flag. Afterward, the command handling process for this hold display control ends.

Returning to the explanation of step S4701, if a negative determination is made in step S4701, i.e., if no hold command has been received, the process proceeds to step S4704. In step S4704, it is determined whether or not a shift command has been received from the notification/performance control device 140. If a negative determination is made in step S4704, the command handling process for this hold display control ends immediately. If a positive determination is made in step S4704, the process proceeds to step S4705. In step S4705, the value of the hold count counter (hold memory count SN) provided in the various counter areas of the work RAM 474 is deducted by 1.

After executing the counter update process in step S4705, the process proceeds to step S4706. In step S4706, a shift flag is set in the work RAM 474. The hold display control process described later shifts the hold icon MP based on this shift flag. Afterward, the command handling process for this hold display control ends.

Next, referring to the flowchart in Figure 149, the pending display process, which is executed as part of the periodic processing by the MPU 472 of the display control device 410, will be explained.

(Pending display processing)
In the pending display process, first, in step S4801, it is determined whether or not additional flags are stored in the various flag storage areas of the work RAM 474. If the determination in step S4801 is positive, the process proceeds to step S4802. In step S4802, it is determined whether or not to change the color of the pending icon to be added this time. Specifically, based on the matters determined in the jackpot announcement effect detail determination process in Figure 146, it is determined whether or not to set the color of the pending icon to be added this time to something other than white.

If a negative result is obtained in step S4802, the normal additional processing is executed in step S4803. Specifically, if the execution target display area Dc is empty, a white hold icon MP is added and displayed in the execution target display area Dc. If the execution target display area Dc is full, a white hold icon MP is added and displayed in the unit hold display area that is the youngest (closest to the execution target display area Dc) among the unit hold display areas where a hold icon MP is not displayed (i.e., empty).

If a positive result is obtained in step S4802, a special additional processing is performed in step S4804. Specifically, if the execution target display area Dc is empty, a pending icon MP of the color determined in step S4603 (one of blue, yellow, or red) is added and displayed in the execution target display area Dc. If the execution target display area Dc is full, a pending icon MP of the color determined in step S4603 (one of blue, yellow, or red) is added and displayed in the unit pending display area that is empty and has no pending icon MP displayed (the youngest unit pending display area closest to the execution target display area Dc).

After executing the process in step S4803 or step S4804, the additional flags stored in the various flag storage areas of the work RAM 474 are cleared in step S4805, and this pending display process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S4801, if a negative result is obtained in step S4801, the process proceeds to step S4806. In step S4806, it is determined whether or not a shift flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of the work RAM 474. If a negative result is obtained in step S4806, the current hold display process ends. If a positive result is obtained in step S4806, the process proceeds to step S4807. In step S4807, based on the matters determined in the jackpot announcement effect detail determination process in Figure 146, it is determined whether or not to change the color of the hold icon displayed during this shift.

If a negative result is obtained in step S4807, a normal shift process is executed in step S4808. If a positive result is obtained in step S4807, a special shift process is performed in step S4807. Both the normal and special shift processes hide the held icon MP displayed in the execution target display area Dc, and then shift the held icon MP displayed in the held number display area Da to the execution target display area Dc. Specifically, the held icon MP displayed in the first unit held display area is moved to the execution target display area Dc, and the held icon MP displayed in other unit held display areas are moved to the unit held display area to their left. By repeating this process, the displayed held icon MP are moved to the execution target display area Dc in chronological order, and are then deleted via that execution target display area Dc. The difference between the normal and special shift processes is that the normal shift process does not change the color of any of the held icons before and after the shift, while the special shift process changes the color of the relevant held icon in accordance with the shift.

After executing the shift process in step S4808 or step S4809, the shift flags stored in the various flag storage areas of the work RAM 474 are cleared in step S4810, and this pending display process is terminated.

Here, we will explain the flow of the jackpot notification sequence with reference to Figure 150. Figure 150(a) is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the first jackpot notification sequence, which does not support step-up, and Figure 150(b) is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the second jackpot notification sequence, which supports step-up. Note that Figure 150 illustrates the case where the display mode of the reserved number display area Da consists of four unit reserved display areas (the first unit reserved display area Da1 to the fourth unit reserved display area Da4).

In the example shown in Figure 150(a), a hold icon MP is added to the third unit hold display area Da3 based on a win in the first operation port 91A. This hold corresponds to a jackpot result, and the color of the hold icon MP added to the third unit hold display area Da3 upon winning the jackpot予告演出 (jackpot announcement演出) is red. This jackpot announcement演出 corresponds to the first jackpot announcement演出 (jackpot announcement演出) which does not support step-up, and the color of the hold icon MP remains red as it shifts in the order of Figure 120(a2) → Figure 120(a3) → Figure 120(a4) → Figure 120(a5). By starting the jackpot announcement演出 during a game round before the game round related to the hold icon MP in question begins, the player's attention can be drawn to the game.

In the example shown in Figure 150(b), a hold icon MP is added to the third unit hold display area Da3 based on a win in the first operation port 91A. This hold corresponds to the jackpot result, and the color of the hold icon MP added to the third unit hold display area Da3 upon winning the jackpot予告演出 (jackpot announcement演出) is blue. This jackpot announcement演出 corresponds to the step-up second jackpot announcement演出, and the color of the hold icon MP changes from blue to yellow to red as it shifts in the order of Figure 120(b2) → Figure 120(b3) → Figure 120(b4) → Figure 120(b5).

As shown in Figure 120(b), the color of the hold icon MP changes multiple times as the game progresses. For example, even if the final color is red, it will first change to a lower-ranking color (blue or yellow) with a lower expectation level, and then step up (promote) to a higher-ranking color with a higher expectation level at the timing when the hold icon MP shifts. By using these two types of jackpot予告演出 (jackpot notification effects) in combination, even if the color is low-expectation, there is a possibility that it will change to a higher-expectation color before the relevant game round. This prevents the attention given to the jackpot notification effects from decreasing prematurely.

As detailed above, the jackpot prediction effect is executed by the symbol display device 95A for displaying symbols. In contrast, the special loss prediction effect is executed by a special effect device 500D, which is provided separately from the symbol display device 95A. Further explanation of the special effect device 500D is provided below with reference to Figure 151. Figure 151 is a front view of the special effect device 500D.

(Special performance device 500D)
The special performance device 500D is a light-emitting performance device that projects light toward the front of the game machine through a transparent game board 80aD. In the special performance device 500, the part facing the back of the game board 80aA (opposing part 501D) is provided with a notification decoration part 511D that executes a special losing notification performance and a notification decoration part 512D that notifies that it is a special losing result.

The pre-announcement decorative unit 511D and the notification decorative unit 512D are arranged side by side, with the former on the left and the latter on the right. The pre-announcement decorative unit 511D is positioned closer to the hold count display area Da, the execution target display area Dc, and the operation port unit 82A than the notification decorative unit 512D. The distance from the first operation port 91A, which may result in a special miss, to the special performance device 500D (specifically the pre-announcement decorative unit 511D) is shorter than the distance from the first operation port 91A to the pattern variation display area ME on the display screen 95aA of the pattern display device 95A.

The notification decorative unit 512D can be switched between an illuminated state and an off state. When a special losing result triggers the high-frequency support mode A, the unit switches from the off state to the illuminated state to provide the notification. During high-frequency support mode A, the unit remains illuminated. When the number of games played in high-frequency support mode A reaches the termination threshold and high-frequency support mode A ends, the unit switches to the off state.

The promotional decorative section 511D consists of a blue first light-emitting section 521D, a yellow second light-emitting section 522D, and a red third light-emitting section 523D. These three sections can be individually switched between illuminated and unlit states.

The special miss notification effect has three steps: Step 1, in which only the first light-emitting unit 521D is lit (see Figure 152(a)); Step 2, in which the second light-emitting unit 522D is lit (see Figure 152(b)); and Step 3, in which the third light-emitting unit 523D is lit (see Figure 152(c)). The probability of a special miss occurs changes as the game progresses through these steps. For example, the probability of a special miss is 30% when Step 1 occurs, 50% when Step 2 occurs, and 80% when Step 3 occurs. In the special miss notification sequence corresponding to a special miss result, the notification decorative unit 512D ultimately lights up to indicate that a special miss occurred (see, for example, Figure 152(d)). In the special miss notification sequence corresponding to a normal miss result, the notification decorative unit 511D and the notification decorative unit 512D turn off to indicate that a special miss did not occur.

Furthermore, in the special miss notification effect shown in this embodiment, the above steps do not necessarily advance every time the game progresses, and there are cases where the steps do not advance even if the game progresses. Also, the steps do not necessarily advance one by one; some steps may be skipped. Incidentally, as will be explained in detail later, even in the case of a special miss result, the special miss notification effect does not necessarily occur, and the notification decorative unit 512D may switch to the illuminated state without going through the special miss notification effect.

In the MPU 442 of the notification and performance control device 140, special miss notification performance setting processing is performed based on the information stored in the hold information storage area. Here, the special miss notification performance setting processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 153. Note that the special miss notification performance setting processing is performed as part of a periodic process that is repeatedly activated at a predetermined interval (for example, a 2 msec interval) during the first normal game state.
(Special miss notification effect setting process)
In the special miss notification effect setting process, first, in step S4901, it is determined whether or not it is the right time to start the confirmation display in a game round corresponding to a normal miss. If the determination in step S4901 is negative, the special miss notification effect setting process ends there. If the determination in step S4901 is positive, the process proceeds to step S4902.

Step S4902 determines whether or not a jackpot notification animation is currently being executed. Specifically, it determines whether or not a jackpot notification animation flag is stored in the various flag storage area 466 of RAM 444. If the determination in step S4902 is positive, the special miss notification animation setting process ends immediately. If the determination in step S4902 is negative, the process proceeds to step S4903.

Step S4903 determines whether the subsequent stored holds include a hold corresponding to a special miss. If the determination in step S4903 is positive, the process proceeds to step S4904. Step S4904 determines whether the preceding holds for the hold corresponding to a special miss include one corresponding to a miss reach. If the determination in step S4904 is negative, the process proceeds to step S4905. Step S4905 determines whether the preceding holds for the hold corresponding to a special miss include one corresponding to a jackpot. If the determination in step S4905 is negative, the process proceeds to step S4906. Step S4906 executes a lottery process (a lottery process corresponding to the main pre-announcement) to determine whether or not to execute the special miss notification animation corresponding to the special miss result. In this lottery process, the lottery table for the main pre-announcement stored in the lottery table storage area 451 of ROM 443 is referenced to determine whether or not to execute the special miss notification animation. The probability of winning in this lottery process is 50%. In other words, approximately half of the cases where a special failure occurs are announced via a special failure warning animation, while the other half are announced without going through the special failure warning animation.

Returning to the explanation of step S4903, if a negative result is determined in step S4903, the process proceeds to step S4907. In step S4907, the latest held ball is provisionally set as the held ball subject to the special miss notification effect, and it is determined whether or not the preceding held balls correspond to a miss reach. If a negative result is determined in step S4907, the process proceeds to step S4908. In step S4908, it is determined whether or not the preceding held balls correspond to a jackpot. If a negative result is determined in step S4905, the process proceeds to step S4909. In step S4909, a lottery process (a lottery process corresponding to a false premonition) is executed to determine whether or not to execute a special miss notification effect that does not correspond to a special miss result. In this lottery process, the special miss notification effect lottery table for false premonitions stored in the lottery table storage area 451 of ROM 443 is referenced to determine whether or not to execute a special miss notification effect. The probability of winning in this lottery process differs depending on the variation display pattern of the provisionally set held balls. Specifically, if the display pattern is Normal Reach A to B, the probability of winning is 1%, and if the display pattern is Super Reach A to C, the probability of winning is 3%.

If the special "miss" notification effect is selected in the lottery process in steps S4906 and S4909, a positive determination is made in step S4910, and the process proceeds to step S4911 to execute the special "miss" notification effect details determination process. If the special "miss" notification effect is not selected in the lottery process in steps S4906 and S4909, or if a positive determination is made in steps S4904, S4905, S4907, and S4908, a negative determination is made in step S4910, and the special "miss" notification effect setting process ends there.

Here, we will explain the process for determining the details of the special miss notification effect, referring to the flowchart in Figure 154.

In the process of determining the details of the special miss notification effect, first, in step S5001, the final display mode of the special effect device 500D is determined. That is, it is determined which of steps 1 to 3 above to be used. Specifically, the determination is made based on whether the reserve that triggered the special miss notification effect (hereinafter referred to as "the relevant reserve") corresponds to a special miss result, and if it does not correspond to a special miss result, the variation display mode related to the relevant reserve and the number of reserves preceding the relevant reserve. For example, if the relevant reserve that triggered the special miss notification effect corresponds to a special miss result, the probability of selection increases in the order of step 1 < step 2 < step 3. If the relevant reserve does not correspond to a special miss result, the probability of selection increases in the order of step 3 < step 2 < step 1. Furthermore, if the relevant reserve when the special miss notification effect is executed corresponds to a reach display, the reach display executed by the symbol display device 95A is configured to form a reach line with "heart" symbols on at least one of the active lines.

In the following step S5002, the remaining number of shifts until the relevant hold is executed is determined. Then, in step S5003, the step-up pattern is determined based on the final display mode (steps 1 to 3) determined in step S5001 and the remaining number of shifts determined in step S5002.

For example, if the relevant game round corresponds to a special losing result and the final display mode is Step 3, the number of remaining shifts is used to determine which of the following step-up patterns to execute: Step 1 (First light-emitting unit 521D = illuminated) → Step 2 (Second light-emitting unit 522D = illuminated) → Step 3 (Third light-emitting unit 523D = illuminated); Step 1 (First light-emitting unit 521D = illuminated) → Step 3 (Third light-emitting unit 523D = illuminated); Step 2 (Second light-emitting unit 522D = illuminated) → Step 3 (Third light-emitting unit 523D = illuminated); or a pattern that starts at Step 3 (Third light-emitting unit 523D = illuminated).

Returning to the explanation in Figure 153, after executing the special miss notification effect details determination process in step S4911, the process proceeds to step S4912. In step S4912, the special miss notification effect flag is set in the various flag storage area 466 of RAM 444. The special miss notification effect flag is used by MPU 442 to determine whether or not the special miss notification effect is currently being executed. In the following step S4913, the jackpot notification effect restriction flag is set in the various flag storage area 466 of RAM 444. The jackpot notification effect restriction flag set in step S4913 is erased when the special miss notification effect ends. After that, the special miss notification effect start process is executed in step S4914, and this special miss notification effect setting process ends. As detailed above, in this embodiment, the special miss notification effect is configured to start in game rounds that result in a normal miss, and its start timing coincides with the timing of the confirmed display of the symbol combination in that game round.

Next, referring to the flowchart in Figure 155, we will explain the special "miss" notification animation execution process performed as part of the periodic processing in MPU 442.

(Special failure notification sequence execution process)
In the special miss notification effect execution process, first, in step S5101, it is determined whether or not a special miss notification effect flag is set in the various flag storage area 466 of RAM 444. If the determination in step S5101 is negative, the special miss notification effect execution process is terminated. If the determination in step S5101 is positive, the process proceeds to step S5102. In step S5102, it is determined whether or not the symbol display device 95A has stopped displaying (confirmed display) the symbol combination. If the determination in step S5102 is positive, the process proceeds to step S5103.

In step S5103, the system determines whether or not to trigger a step-up at this timing by referring to the step-up pattern determined in step S5003. If the determination in step S5103 is positive, the system proceeds to step S5104. In step S5104, the system executes the process of adding a light-emitting target by referring to the step-up pattern determined in step S5003. For example, in the game round corresponding to the special miss result that triggered the start of this special miss notification effect, the notification decoration unit 512D is switched from the off state to the on state. After executing the process of adding a light-emitting target in step S5104, or if the determination in step S5103 is negative, the execution process of this special miss notification effect ends.

Returning to the explanation of step S5102, if a negative result is determined in step S5102, the process proceeds to step S5105. In step S5105, it is determined whether or not the timing for the confirmation display of the symbol combination on the symbol display device 95A is complete. If a negative result is determined in step S5105, the process proceeds to step S5106. In step S5106, a process is executed to turn off the warning decoration section 511D of the special effect device 500D. In other words, regardless of whether the game round corresponds to a special losing result, the special losing warning effect by the warning decoration section 511D ends at the timing when the confirmation display is complete.

Afterward, the special miss notification flag and the jackpot notification restriction flag stored in the various flag storage area 466 of RAM 444 are cleared, and the special notification execution process ends. Once the jackpot notification restriction flag is cleared, the jackpot notification can be executed from then on.

Here, we will illustrate the flow of the special miss notification effect with reference to the timing chart in Figure 156. In the example in Figure 156, the transition to the fourth normal game state occurs after a special miss result during the first normal game state. The special notification effect device 500D had previously announced that this special miss result would occur in a game round prior to the relevant round.

At timing tj1, the display unit D1 for the first operation port starts showing the changing symbols, and the display device 95A also starts showing the changing symbols. At timing tj2 during this game round, a ball enters the first operation port 91A, and the number of reserved balls increases from "2" to "3". These additional reserved balls correspond to the special miss result.

For game rounds started at timing tj1, a normal losing result is expected. At the timing of the confirmed display where this result is explicitly shown (timing tj3), a special losing prediction animation is initiated. Specifically, the first light-emitting part 521D of the special animation device 500D (prediction decoration part 511D) switches from the off state to the on state (step 1).

The game rounds that started at timing tj4 also correspond to the normal losing result, and at the timing of the confirmed display where this result is explicitly shown (timing tj5), the special losing notification effect steps up from step 1 to step 2. Specifically, the second light-emitting part 522D of the special effect device 500D (notification decoration part 511D) switches from the off state to the on state.

The game rounds that started at timing tj6 also correspond to the normal losing result, and at the timing of the confirmed display where this result is explicitly shown (timing tj7), the special losing notification effect steps up from step 2 to step 3. Specifically, the third light-emitting part 523D of the special effect device 500D (preview decoration part 511D) switches from the off state to the on state.

At the subsequent timing of tj8, the game round corresponding to the special miss result that triggered this special miss予告演出 (special miss notification effect) (the relevant game round) begins. This game round corresponds to the reach display, and at timing of tj10, it transitions to the reach display. Specifically, a reach line is formed by the "heart" symbol on the symbol display device 95A. After that, at the timing of the confirmation display where the special miss result is clearly shown (timing of tj11), the notification decorative part 512D of the special effect device 500D switches from the off state to the on state.

Once the confirmation display time has elapsed and timing tj12 occurs, the game transitions to the fourth normal game state, and the notification decoration unit 511D (light-emitting units 521D-523D) switches from the lit state to the unlit state. In other words, the special miss notification effect ends while the notification decoration unit 512D remains lit.

According to the 15th embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be expected.

As shown in this embodiment, if a jackpot is achieved, the support mode is changed to a high-frequency support mode (specifically, high-frequency support mode B) via a special game state (open/close execution mode). If a special loss occurs, the support mode is changed to a high-frequency support mode (specifically, high-frequency support mode A) without going through the special game state. This configuration diversifies the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher-level high-frequency support mode, contributing to the suppression of gameplay monotony.

In this embodiment, whether or not a jackpot result is determined before the start of the game round, and a jackpot announcement animation (corresponding to the "first special animation") is executed based on the result of that determination. Similarly, whether or not a special loss result is determined before the start of the game round, and a special loss announcement animation (corresponding to the "second special animation") is executed based on the result of that determination. This configuration allows for a favorable increase in the player's attention to the game from game rounds prior to the current game round. However, in a configuration where a transition to a special game state is triggered by a jackpot result, players who are expecting to transition to the special game state will focus on the jackpot announcement animation. If a jackpot announcement animation is started while a special loss announcement animation is being executed, it is assumed that the player's attention will likely shift from the special loss announcement animation to the jackpot announcement animation. This is a concern as it may hinder the effective performance of the special loss announcement animation in increasing the player's attention to the game. In this regard, as shown in this embodiment, if a configuration is implemented that prevents the start of a new jackpot prediction animation when a special miss prediction animation is being performed, the above concerns can be effectively eliminated. This is preferable for ensuring the coexistence of the two types of prediction animations described above.

As shown in this embodiment, configuring the system so that the jackpot announcement is restricted when the special miss announcement is executed is preferable in terms of easing the constraints on the presentation mode of the special miss announcement. In other words, not only when the special miss announcement is set to start immediately after the execution conditions are met, but also when the start is deliberately delayed even when the execution conditions for the special miss announcement are internally met, the competition between the jackpot announcement and the special miss announcement can be effectively suppressed, and the constraints on the presentation mode of the second special announcement can be effectively relaxed.

As shown in this embodiment, by configuring the system so that the conditions for executing the special miss notification are met during the execution of the jackpot notification, opportunities for executing the special miss notification can be favorably secured. Furthermore, by stopping the jackpot notification when the conditions for executing the special miss notification are met during the execution of the jackpot notification, the player's attention can be drawn to the special miss notification. When stopping the jackpot notification as described above, stopping the jackpot notification after the start of the special miss notification allows the stopping behavior itself to become part of the performance, resulting in a practically preferable configuration for increasing the player's attention to the game.

As mentioned above, in a configuration where the pre-announcement animation begins in a game round prior to the relevant game round, it is assumed that the player's anticipation increases at the start of the pre-announcement animation. Therefore, when using both a jackpot pre-announcement animation and a special miss pre-announcement animation, staggering the timing of the start of each animation within a game round effectively prevents the start (beginning) of each animation from being missed. In this embodiment, in particular, the jackpot pre-announcement animation is configured to start at the beginning of the game round (during the shift), while the special miss pre-announcement animation is configured to start when the game round transitions to the confirmed display. This difference in timing contributes to increasing attention to the game in each part of the game round, from the first half to the second half.

In the event of a special losing result, the game immediately transitions to the normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A after the end of the game round. Therefore, the switch to the support mode tends to be more abrupt compared to when a jackpot is achieved. This is expected to cause confusion for the player and lead to unnecessary investment. In this embodiment, while a jackpot result is indicated by a symbol combination displayed on the symbol display device 95A, a special losing result is suggested by a special effect device 500D, which is provided separately from the symbol display device 95A. This configuration effectively suppresses confusion between jackpot and special losing results, thereby effectively preventing the various inconveniences described above.

In this embodiment, the configuration is such that whether or not a special loss will occur is determined in advance (pre-determined), and a special loss notification animation is executed according to the result of this pre-determined outcome. Since this special loss notification animation is executed at least in a game round prior to the game round related to the pre-determined pending information, the player can predict in advance that a special loss may occur. This configuration reduces the abruptness mentioned above and contributes to further suppressing the occurrence of the various inconveniences described.

In a configuration where the lottery result is announced by the symbol combination displayed on the symbol display device 95A, the attention given to that game round may rapidly decrease when the player is notified that they have not won (a normal losing result). Therefore, if a special losing notification effect is initiated under such circumstances—that is, if the special losing notification effect is initiated during the confirmation display corresponding to a normal losing result—this special losing notification effect can effectively suppress the rapid decrease in attention mentioned above.

Furthermore, in a configuration where the jackpot result is announced on the symbol display device 95A, the player's attention is easily drawn to the symbol display device 95A. Therefore, it is preferable to configure the system to start the special miss notification effect during the confirmation display, when the need to focus on the symbol display device 95A decreases, in order to prevent players from missing the notification effect.

In a configuration where hold information is acquired based on ball entry into the operating port 91A (operating port unit 82A), the player can focus on the operating port 91A. Therefore, by positioning the special performance device 500D closer to the operating port 91A compared to the symbol display device 95A (specifically, the variable display area ME), the chances of missing the special miss notification can be effectively reduced.

Furthermore, in a configuration where hold information is acquired based on the ball entering the operating port 91A (operating port unit 82A), the player can pay attention to the operating port 91A and the movement of the game ball toward the operating port 91A. Therefore, by positioning the special performance device 500D behind the portion of the flow path (left route) where the game ball flows toward the operating port 91A, the chances of missing the special loss notification can be effectively reduced.

By configuring the special display device 500D so that the possibility of a special incorrect result is suggested in the pre-announcement decorative unit 511D before the notification decorative unit 512D of the special display device 500D announces (explicitly displays) that the result is incorrect, the chances of the notification in the notification decorative unit 512D being missed can be effectively reduced.

As described above, in a gaming machine where the game progresses based on balls entering the activation opening 91A, the player's attention tends to be drawn to the activation opening 91A. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, by forming the special performance device 500D with the notification decoration section 511D (of the two notification decoration sections 511D and 512D) positioned closer to the activation opening 91A (the activation opening that may result in a special miss), the aforementioned effect of preventing players from missing a win can be further enhanced.

When the symbols are displayed variably on the symbol display device 95A, the player's attention is likely to be drawn to the symbol display device 95A. Therefore, by configuring the display of the notification decoration unit 511D to step up (switch the display mode) when the symbol combination is displayed as confirmed (stopped), it is possible to effectively prevent the player from missing this step-up.

Furthermore, while the display of a stopped symbol combination may momentarily decrease attention to the game, as shown in this embodiment, if the display mode of the notification decoration unit 511D switches when the symbol combination is displayed as confirmed (stopped), the decrease in attention to the game can be effectively suppressed.

In gaming machines where there is an upper limit (four) on the number of reserved balls acquired and stored based on ball entry into the operating port 91A (operating port unit 82A), adjustments may be made to temporarily refrain from launching balls in order to avoid unnecessary ball entries. Players making such adjustments pay attention to the movement of the game balls in and around the operating port 91A, or to the display in the reserved ball count display area. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, by forming the special performance device 500D with the notification decoration section 511D closer to the reserved ball count display area, the aforementioned effect of preventing missed opportunities can be further enhanced.

<Variation 1>
In the 15th embodiment described above, the symbol display device 95A is configured to determine whether or not to perform a special miss notification effect at the timing (start timing) when transitioning to the confirmed display of the symbol combination, but it is not limited to this. For example, similar to the case where it is determined whether or not to perform a jackpot notification effect, the configuration may be such that it is determined whether or not to perform a special miss notification effect at the timing when a reserve is newly acquired (added) based on a ball entering the first operation port 91A.

Furthermore, the timing of deciding whether or not to perform the special miss notification effect and the timing of starting the special miss notification effect do not necessarily have to coincide. It is possible to have a configuration where the timing of deciding whether or not to perform the special miss notification effect and the timing of starting the special miss notification effect are staggered; that is, a configuration where the special miss notification effect can start later than the decision to perform it. For example, it is possible to have a configuration where the decision to perform the special miss notification effect is made while the symbols are changing on the symbol display device 95A, and the special miss notification effect starts while the confirmed symbols are being displayed on the symbol display device 95A.

<Modified Example 2>
In the 15th embodiment described above, the step-up of the special miss notification effect by the notification effect device 00D occurs while the confirmed symbols (symbol combinations) are being displayed on the symbol display device 95A. However, it is also possible to configure the step-up of the special miss notification effect to occur while the symbols are being displayed in a variable state on the symbol display device 95A, either as an alternative or in addition to this.

<Example 3>
In the 15th embodiment described above, the special loss notification effect for the predetermined game round is avoided if a game round corresponding to a reach display can be executed before a predetermined game round. However, the embodiment is not limited to this. The embodiment may also be configured so that the special loss notification effect for the predetermined game round can be executed regardless of whether or not a game round corresponding to a reach display is executed before a predetermined game round.

Alternatively, or in addition to this, if a game round corresponding to a jackpot result can be played before a predetermined game round, the special loss notification animation for that predetermined game round will be avoided. However, the system is not limited to this. The system may also be configured so that the special loss notification animation for that predetermined game round can be played regardless of whether a game round corresponding to a jackpot result is played before a predetermined game round.

<Modification 4>
In the 15th embodiment described above, the execution period of the jackpot notification effect and the execution period of the special miss notification effect may partially overlap, but the embodiment is not limited to this. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the execution period of the jackpot notification effect and the execution period of the special miss notification effect do not overlap.

<Example 5>
It is also possible to configure the system so that the jackpot notification animation and the special miss notification animation can start while one of them is in progress. For example, the system may be configured so that the special miss notification animation can start while the jackpot notification animation is in progress, but the jackpot notification animation cannot start while the special miss notification animation is in progress, or so that the jackpot notification animation can start while the special miss notification animation is in progress, but the special miss notification animation cannot start while the jackpot notification animation is in progress.

<Modification 6>
In the 15th embodiment described above, the special performance device 500D is configured to announce in a preceding game round that a special miss result, which is one of the triggers for transitioning to the fourth normal game state, will occur. Alternatively, or in addition to this, the special performance device 500D is also configured to announce in a preceding game round that reaching the ceiling, which is one of the triggers for transitioning to the fourth normal game state, will occur. Specifically, in a game round executed before the game round in which the ceiling is reached in the first normal game state, the first light-emitting unit 521D → second light-emitting unit 522D → third light-emitting unit 523D are lit in that order as the game round progresses, and the notification decoration unit 512D is switched to the lit state in the game round immediately before transitioning to the fourth normal game state (for example, at the confirmation display timing).

<Example 7>
The special non-winning animation shown in the 15th embodiment above is configured to be executed by a special animation device 500D, which is a dedicated animation device, but it is not limited to this. For example, it is also possible to configure the special non-winning animation to be executed by a symbol display device 95A, similar to the jackpot animation. For example, the same animation executed by the special animation device 500D may be executed by the symbol display device 95A. Specifically, it is also possible to configure the symbol display device 95A to display an image that mimics the special animation device 500D, and to execute the special non-winning animation by changing the display mode of this image in steps S1 to S3, etc.

<Difference 8>
In the 15th embodiment described above, the configuration is such that the conditions for starting the jackpot announcement are not met during the special miss announcement, and the conditions for starting the special miss announcement are not met during the jackpot announcement, but the system is not limited to this. The configuration may also be such that the conditions for starting the jackpot announcement can be met even during the special miss announcement, and the conditions for starting the special miss announcement can be met even during the jackpot announcement. For example, if the conditions for starting the other announcement are met while one announcement has already started, the configuration may be such that the other announcement starts at the latest step reached at the end of the first announcement, assuming that the other announcement has been progressing behind the scenes.

<Difference 9>
In the 15th embodiment described above, the configuration prioritizes the special miss notification over the jackpot notification, but the invention is not limited to this. The configuration may also be such that the jackpot notification is restricted when the special miss notification is being performed, and the special miss notification is restricted when the jackpot notification is being performed.

<Modification 10>
In the 15th embodiment described above, the jackpot announcement sequence is interrupted if a special miss announcement sequence is initiated during the jackpot announcement sequence, but the embodiment is not limited to this. For example, the jackpot announcement sequence may be interrupted as soon as the special miss announcement sequence is initiated, or the jackpot announcement sequence may not be interrupted, but a new jackpot announcement sequence may be prevented from being executed.

<Variation 11>
It is also possible to configure the system to prevent the above-mentioned jackpot prediction from starting not only from the reserved information that triggered the start of the special miss prediction, but also from triggering other reserved information that follows that reserved information (other reserved information that has already been stored).

<Modified example 12>
In the 15th embodiment described above, a configuration was exemplified in which a jackpot announcement animation is started at the start of a game round (during shift) and a special miss announcement animation is started when the game transitions to a confirmed win display. However, the start timing of the jackpot announcement animation and the special miss announcement animation in a game round can be changed as desired. However, in order to effectively maximize the effect of increasing attention due to the difference in timing, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the start timing of each announcement animation is divided between the first half and the second half of a game round.

<Modification 13>
In the 15th embodiment described above, the special performance device 500D is used to perform a performance that suggests a special losing result. However, instead of this, or in addition, the special performance device 500D may be used to perform a performance that suggests reaching the ceiling. In such a configuration, a practically preferable configuration can be realized by providing multiple game counts that result in reaching the ceiling, as in the other embodiments.

<Embodiment 16>
In the 15th embodiment described above, a special pre-announcement effect (special loss pre-announcement effect) is executed in a game round prior to the game round in which a special loss result occurs. In this embodiment, the configuration related to this special loss pre-announcement effect differs from that of the 15th embodiment. Specifically, in the 15th embodiment, even if the special loss pre-announcement effect occurs, the game ends in a normal loss result and a special loss result is not necessarily confirmed. However, in this embodiment, the special loss pre-announcement effect is configured to confirm a special loss result at the time the special loss pre-announcement effect occurs (confirmation effect). Furthermore, in order to enhance the impact of the effect in order to make the special loss pre-announcement effect function as a confirmation effect, the configuration related to the pre-announcement effect device has been changed. The pre-announcement effect device in this embodiment will now be described with reference to Figures 157 and 158. Figure 157 is a front view of the game board unit, and Figure 158 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the pre-announcement effect device.

(Special performance device 500E)
As shown in Figure 157, in a front view of the game board unit 80E, the special performance device 500E is positioned in a location that overlaps with the right route formed in the game area PE, more specifically below the count display unit 88D described above and to the side of the operation port unit 82A (more specifically the first operation port 91A).

As shown in Figure 158, the special performance device 500E comprises a performance mechanism 600E that performs a special losing prediction effect, and a base that fixes the performance mechanism 600E to the back block of the game board unit 80E. When the game board 80aE and the back block are assembled (see Figure 7), the performance mechanism 600E faces the back of the game board 80aE with only a small gap separating them. The game board 80aE is transparent, allowing the player to see the performance mechanism 600E through the game board 80aE from the front of the game machine.

The performance mechanism 600E comprises a light-emitting unit 630E and a case 660E that houses the light-emitting unit 630E. The light-emitting unit 630E consists of a light-emitting substrate 640E on which multiple light-emitting elements 641E (specifically LEDs) are mounted, and a holder 651E that holds the light-emitting substrate 640E so that the mounting surface of the light-emitting elements 641E faces the front of the gaming machine. Specifically, both the light-emitting substrate 640E and the holder 651E are disc-shaped, and the light-emitting substrate 640E is fixed to the holder 651E by fitting into a recess formed in the center of the holder 651E. The light-emitting substrate 640E is connected to the notification/performance control device 140 via connection terminals such as slip rings, and the notification/performance control device 140 performs light emission control (switching between on and off states) of the light-emitting elements 641E.

The case 660E consists of a rear cover 680E that covers the light-emitting unit 630E from the rear, and a front cover 670E that covers the light-emitting unit 630E from the front, which are combined front and back. The front cover 670E is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the light from the light-emitting element 641E is emitted from the front cover 670E through the game board 80aE towards the front of the game machine.

The front cover 670E has a disc-shaped opposing portion 671E that faces the back of the light-emitting substrate 640E and the game board 80aE, and a cylindrical shaft portion 673E that rises rearward from the opposing portion 671E. A bearing hole 652E is formed in the center of the light-emitting unit 630E (light-emitting substrate 640E and holder 651E), penetrating from front to back. The shaft portion 673E is inserted through the bearing hole 652E, allowing the light-emitting unit 630E to rotate around the shaft portion 673E. In other words, the light-emitting unit 630E is housed in the case 660E in a rotatable state. Hereinafter, the central axis that serves as the rotation center of the light-emitting unit 630E will be referred to as "central axis CL1".

A circular stopper portion 672E is formed on the back of the opposing portion 671E, which abuts against the holder 651E of the light-emitting unit 630E from the front. This stopper portion 672E restricts the forward displacement of the light-emitting unit 630E. In this state, with the light-emitting unit 630E in contact with the stopper portion 672E, a gap is maintained between the light-emitting substrate 640E and the back of the opposing portion 671E, thus preventing contact between the light-emitting element 641E and the opposing portion 671E. Furthermore, a protrusion formed in the center of the holder 651E abuts against the back cover 680E, and the rearward displacement of the light-emitting unit 630E is restricted by the back cover 680E.

The rear cover 680E houses a drive mechanism 690E that rotates the light-emitting unit 630E. The drive mechanism 690E consists of a motor 691E as the drive unit and gears 653E and 692E that transmit power from the motor 691E to the light-emitting unit 630E. The motor 691E is connected to the notification/performance control device 140, and the motor 691E is driven and controlled by the notification/performance control device 140.

In this embodiment, the front cover 670E is a decorative cover in which a plurality of decorative parts 711E, 721E, and 731E are formed on the front portion of the opposing part 671E. The decorative parts 711E, 721E, and 731E are arranged in the rotational direction of the light-emitting unit 630E, and the positional relationship between these decorative parts 711E, 721E, and 731E and the light-emitting body 641E changes as the light-emitting unit 630E rotates around the central axis CL1. The decorative parts 711E, 721E, and 731E formed on the front cover 670E will be further explained below with reference to Figures 159 and 160. Figure 159(a) is a front view of the special effect device 500E, Figure 159(b) is a schematic diagram showing the positional relationship between the passage path of the light-emitting body 641E and the light-diffusing and non-light-diffusing parts, and Figure 160 is a horizontal cross-sectional view of the light-emitting unit 630E. Note that the decorative parts 711E, 721E, and 731E are omitted from Figure 160.

As shown in Figure 159(a), the opposing portion 671E is composed of a flat portion 701E and the decorative portions described above: the first decorative portion 711E, the second decorative portion 721E, and the third decorative portion 731E.

The first decorative section 711E has multiple (four) annular protrusions 713E that protrude forward from the flat section 701E. Each annular protrusion 713E is circular in shape centered on a central axis CL5 extending in the front-to-back direction, and is arranged radially along the central axis CL5. Small gaps (annular grooves 714E) are provided between each annular protrusion 713E, and these gaps are designed to be larger the further away they are from the central axis CL5.

The second decorative section 721E has multiple (four) annular protrusions 723E that protrude forward from the flat section 701E. Each annular protrusion 723E is circular in shape centered on the central axis CL6 extending in the front-to-back direction, and is arranged radially along the central axis CL6. Small gaps (annular grooves 724E) are provided between each annular protrusion 723E, and these gaps are designed to be larger the further away they are from the central axis CL5.

The third decorative section 731E has multiple (four) annular protrusions 733E that protrude forward from the flat section 701E. Each annular protrusion 733E is circular in shape centered on the central axis CL7 extending in the front-to-back direction, and is arranged radially along the central axis CL6. Small gaps (annular grooves 734E) are provided between each annular protrusion 733E, and these gaps are designed to be larger the further away they are from the central axis CL6.

While the first decorative section 711E, the second decorative section 721E, and the third decorative section 731E differ in their configuration—specifically, the distances from the central axis CL1 to the respective central axes CL5 to CL7 are different, and the diameters (inner and outer diameters) of the annular projection 713E of the first decorative section 711E, the annular projection 723E of the second decorative section 721E, and the annular projection 733E of the third decorative section 731E are different—their basic structure is the same. The following description will focus on the detailed structure of the first decorative section 711E, but the detailed structures of the second decorative section 721E and the third decorative section 731E are similar.

As shown in Figure 160, both the side surface 718E of the annular projection 713E (the inner surface facing the central axis CL5 and the outer surface facing the opposite direction) are oriented in a direction intersecting the central axis CL5, and the annular projection 713E is formed to taper towards its tip (front end). When light from the light-emitting element 641E is irradiated onto the annular projection 713E of the first decorative part 711E, at least a portion of the light is diffused to other annular projections 713E and annular grooves 714E before being emitted forward through these annular projections 713E and annular grooves 714E towards the front of the gaming machine (see Figure 160(b)).

The direction of this diffusion is the radial direction (orthogonal direction) of the central axis CL5, so the light emission pattern when viewed from the front of the gaming machine will be linear (more specifically, band-shaped) extending in the radial direction of the central axis CL5 (see region BE in Figure 161). In contrast, when light from the light emitter 641E is irradiated onto the planar portion 701E (including the partitioned portion 715E partitioned by the annular protrusion 713E), the light passes directly through the opposing portion 671E and is emitted towards the front of the gaming machine with diffusion suppressed (see Figure 160(a)). In other words, the light emission pattern when viewed from the front of the gaming machine will be point-like (see region SE in Figure 161). In the following description, the annular protrusions 713E, 723E, 733E and the annular grooves 714E, 724E, 734E will be referred to as "light-diffusing sections 712E, 722E, 732E," and the flat section 701E and the partitioned sections 715E, 725E, 735E will be referred to as "non-light-diffusing sections 701E, 715E, 725E, 735E" as appropriate.

The light-emitting element 641E revolves (displaces) as the light-emitting unit 630E rotates. The orbit PL of the light-emitting element 641E is a circle centered on the central axis CL1, and the central axis CL1 is separated from the central axis CL5 of the first decorative section 711E. Therefore, the rotation of the light-emitting unit 630E changes the distance from the central axis CL5 to the optical axis LA of the light-emitting element 641E, causing the light-emitting element 641E to displace so as to straddle (cross behind) the light-diffusing section 712E. As a result, the linear (more specifically, band-shaped) light-emitting pattern that appears on the first decorative section 711E changes its position and orientation within the light-diffusing section 712E (see Figure 161).

Here, referring to Figure 159(b), the positional relationship between the trajectory PL of the light-emitting element 641E and the light-diffusing and non-light-diffusing sections will be explained. In Figure 159(b), the areas with dot hatching are the light-diffusing sections, and the areas without dot hatching are the non-light-diffusing sections.

First, the light-emitting elements 641E shown in this embodiment are broadly classified into first light-emitting elements 641aE, second light-emitting elements 641bE, third light-emitting elements 641cE, fourth light-emitting elements 641dE, fifth light-emitting elements 641eE, and sixth light-emitting elements 641fE, depending on their distance from the central axis CL1. Specifically, the distance from the central axis CL1 increases in the following order: first light-emitting element 641aE < second light-emitting element 641bE < third light-emitting element 641cE < fourth light-emitting element 641dE < fifth light-emitting element 641eE < sixth light-emitting element 641fE.

The first light-emitting element 641aE is positioned such that, when the light-emitting unit 630E rotates around its central axis CL1, the orbit PLa of the first light-emitting element 641aE overlaps with the light-diffusing section 712E and non-light-diffusing section 715E, and the non-light-diffusing section 701E, when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. The target of the light emitted by the first light-emitting element 641aE changes repeatedly in the order of non-light-diffusing section 701E → light-diffusing section 712E → non-light-diffusing section 715E → light-diffusing section 712E → non-light-diffusing section 701E as the light-emitting unit 630E rotates.

The second light-emitting element 641bE is positioned such that, when the light-emitting unit 630E rotates around its central axis CL1, its orbit PLb overlaps with the light-diffusing section 712E and non-light-diffusing section 715E of the first decorative section 711E, and the light-diffusing section 732E and non-light-diffusing section 701E of the third decorative section 731E, as viewed from the front of the gaming machine. The target of the light emitted by the second light-emitting element 641bE changes repeatedly in the order of non-light-diffusing section 701E → light-diffusing section 712E → non-light-diffusing section 715E → light-diffusing section 712E → non-light-diffusing section 701E → light-diffusing section 732E → non-light-diffusing section 701E as the light-emitting unit 630E rotates.

The third light-emitting element 641cE is positioned such that, when the light-emitting unit 630E rotates around the central axis CL1, the orbit PLc of the third light-emitting element 641cE overlaps with the light-diffusing section 712E and non-light-diffusing section 715E of the first decorative section 711E, the light-diffusing section 722E of the second decorative section 721E, the light-diffusing section 732E and non-light-diffusing section 735E of the third decorative section 731E, and the non-light-diffusing section 701E, when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. The light source (recipient) of the light emitted by the third light-emitting element 641cE changes in the following order as the light-emitting unit 630E rotates: non-light diffusion section 701E → light diffusion section 712E → non-light diffusion section 715E → light diffusion section 712E → non-light diffusion section 701E → light diffusion section 722E → non-light diffusion section 701E → light diffusion section 732E → non-light diffusion section 735E → light diffusion section 732E → non-light diffusion section 701E.

The fourth light-emitting element 641dE is positioned such that, when the light-emitting unit 630E rotates around the central axis CL1, the orbit PLd of the fourth light-emitting element 641dE overlaps with the light-diffusing section 712E and non-light-diffusing section 715E of the first decorative section 711E, the light-diffusing section 722E and non-light-diffusing section 725E of the second decorative section 721E, the light-diffusing section 732E and non-light-diffusing section 735E of the third decorative section 731E, and the non-light-diffusing section 701E, when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. The light source (recipient) of the light emitted by the fourth light-emitting element 641dE repeatedly changes in the following order as the light-emitting unit 630E rotates: non-light diffusion section 701E → light diffusion section 712E → non-light diffusion section 715E → light diffusion section 712E → non-light diffusion section 701E → light diffusion section 722E → non-light diffusion section 725E → non-light diffusion section 701E → light diffusion section 732E → non-light diffusion section 735E → light diffusion section 732E → non-light diffusion section 701E.

The fifth light-emitting element 641eE is positioned such that, when the light-emitting unit 630E rotates around its central axis CL1, its orbit PLe overlaps with the light-diffusing section 712E of the first decorative section 711E, the light-diffusing section 722E of the second decorative section 721E, the light-diffusing section 732E of the third decorative section 731E, and the non-light-diffusing section 701E, as viewed from the front of the gaming machine. The target of the light emitted by the fifth light-emitting element 641eE changes repeatedly in the order of non-light-diffusing section 701E → light-diffusing section 712E → non-light-diffusing section 701E → light-diffusing section 722E → non-light-diffusing section 701E → light-diffusing section 732E → non-light-diffusing section 701E as the light-emitting unit 630E rotates.

The sixth light-emitting element 641fE is positioned such that, when the light-emitting unit 630E rotates around its central axis CL1, its orbit PLf overlaps with the light-diffusing section 712E of the first decorative section 711E, the light-diffusing section 722E of the second decorative section 721E, the light-diffusing section 732E of the third decorative section 731E, and the non-light-diffusing section 701E, as viewed from the front of the gaming machine. The target of the light irradiation (supply) by the fifth light-emitting element 641eE repeatedly changes in the order of non-light-diffusing section 701E → light-diffusing section 712E → non-light-diffusing section 701E → light-diffusing section 722E → non-light-diffusing section 701E → light-diffusing section 732E → non-light-diffusing section 701E as the light-emitting unit 630E rotates.

Furthermore, for at least some of the light-emitting elements that supply light to the first decorative section 711E (light diffusion section 712E) (the fourth light-emitting element 641dE, the fifth light-emitting element 641eE, and the sixth light-emitting element 641fE), the diameters of the orbitals PLd, PLe, and PLf are larger than the diameter (inner and outer diameter) of the first decorative section 711E, and for all of the light-emitting elements that supply light to the second decorative section 721E (light diffusion section 722E) (the third light-emitting element 641cE, the fourth light-emitting element 641dE, the fifth light-emitting element 641eE, and the sixth light-emitting element), For 641fE, the diameters of the orbitals PLc, PLd, PLE, and PLf are larger than the diameter (inner and outer diameter) of the second decorative section 721E. Furthermore, for at least some of the light-emitting elements that supply light to the third decorative section 731E (light-diffusing section 732E) (third light-emitting element 641cE, fourth light-emitting element 641dE, fifth light-emitting element 641eE, and sixth light-emitting element 641fE), the diameters of the orbitals PLc, PLd, PLE, and PLf are larger than the diameter (inner and outer diameter) of the third decorative section 731E.

Next, with reference to the schematic diagram in Figure 162, the special miss notification effect by the special effect device 500E will be explained. If a reserve corresponding to a special miss result is acquired based on a win in the first operating port 91A, the player may be notified by the special miss notification effect that a special miss result will occur in the game round preceding the game round corresponding to that reserve. In the special miss notification effect, the rotation of the light-emitting unit 630E begins at the timing of the confirmed display of the symbol combination in the preceding game round. After its rotation speed reaches a steady rotation speed during the confirmed display, all light-emitting elements 641E are switched from the off state to the on state. As a result, the special effect device 500E displays a dotted light pattern and a linear (more specifically, a band-shaped) light pattern. This special miss notification effect will continue until the transition to the fourth normal game state. Furthermore, regarding the positional relationship between the light-emitting element 641A and the decorative elements 711E, 721E, and 731E, it is stipulated that when a dot-like light pattern is displayed by one of the light-emitting elements 641A, a linear (more specifically, band-like) light pattern is displayed by at least one of the other light-emitting elements 641A. In other words, during the special miss notification effect, the display is configured so that dot-like and linear (more specifically, band-like) light patterns are mixed at any rotation angle.

Here, after the light-emitting element 641A switches to the illuminated state, the position and shape of the light-emitting pattern change as the rotation angle of the light-emitting unit 630E changes, while the light-emitting element 641E remains illuminated. For example, as shown in Figures 162(a) → 162(b) → 162(c) → 162(d). In particular, the displacement speed of the pattern increases as the distance from the central axis CL1 to the light-emitting element 641E increases. However, patterns farther from the central axis CL1 are displayed for a longer distance compared to patterns closer to it, thus suppressing a significant decrease in visibility compared to light-emitting patterns displayed closer to the central axis CL1.

According to the configuration shown in this embodiment, by rotating the light-emitting unit 630E, the light-emitting element 641E is displaced so as to pass through a predetermined trajectory PL that includes positions where light is irradiated onto the light-diffusing parts 712E, 722E, and 732E of the front cover 670E (corresponding to the "decorative cover" and "cover") and positions where light is irradiated onto the non-light-diffusing parts 701E, 715E, 725E, and 735E of the front cover 670E. The appearance (light-emitting pattern) of the special performance device 500D, which is a light-emitting performance device, can be greatly changed depending on whether the light from the light-emitting unit 630E (light-emitting element 641E) is irradiated onto the non-light-diffusing parts 701E, 715E, 725E, and 735E or onto the light-diffusing parts 712E, 722E, and 732E. This makes it possible to suitably increase the level of attention given to the light-emitting performance using the special performance device 500D. When performing such a light-emitting effect, it is assumed that any change in the position of the decorated front cover 670E could reduce the appearance of the special effect device 500D and diminish the impact of the light-emitting effect. In this regard, the configuration shown in this embodiment effectively suppresses the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems by rotating the light-emitting unit 630E, one of the light-emitting units 630E and the front cover 670E. Furthermore, by making the light-emitting unit 630E rotatable, the light-emitting pattern can be repeatedly changed without interruption, which is preferable for ensuring a sufficiently long duration for the light-emitting effect and effectively enhancing the sustained effect of increasing attention.

As shown in this embodiment, by configuring the light-emitting unit 630E to rotate while the light-emitting element 641E remains lit, it is possible to seamlessly change not only the light-emitting pattern but also the light-emitting location (position), further enhancing the aforementioned visual effects.

On the front cover 670E, the light-diffusing section is formed by a textured, uneven surface. This configuration effectively suppresses the factor that the presence of the light-diffusing section detracts from the appearance of the front cover 670E. The light-diffusing sections 712E, 722E, and 732E have different arrangements in the rotational direction. The light-emitting element 641E is configured to displace from a position illuminating one of the multiple light-diffusing sections 712E, 722E, and 732E to another position illuminating a different light-diffusing section, via a position illuminating the non-light-diffusing sections 701E, 715E, 725E, and 735E, as the light-emitting unit 630E rotates. By configuring the displacement from one light-diffusing section to another via a position corresponding to the non-light-diffusing section, the contrast when changing the light emission pattern can be enhanced.

The light-emitting unit 630E is configured such that if any of the multiple light-emitting elements 641E are illuminating the non-light-diffusing area, then one of the other light-emitting elements 641E will illuminate the light-diffusing area. This configuration allows for the simultaneous display of light-emitting patterns with and without light diffusion. This is advantageous in improving the visual appeal of the light-emitting effect and effectively achieving the attention-grabbing effect described above.

As shown in this embodiment, by forming irregularities on the front side of the opposing portion 671E of the front cover 670E that provide light diffusion and decorative functions, and making the back side flat, the operating gap between the light-emitting unit 630E and the front cover 670E (specifically the opposing portion 671E) can be reduced, thereby promoting the thinning of the special effect device 500D.

The light irradiated onto the light diffusion sections 712E, 722E, and 732E is diffused in the direction of the arrangement of the linear light diffusion sections 712E, 722E, and 732E (in a direction intersecting a predetermined axis). As a result, the light emission pattern becomes a band-like shape extending in a direction intersecting the predetermined axis. This band-like light emission pattern is displaced by the operation of the light emission unit 630E, and this displacement enhances the visual impact of the light emission effect. This effectively increases the level of attention the player receives during gameplay.

As shown in this embodiment, if the optical axis is displaced so as to straddle multiple annular protrusions 713E, the annular protrusions 713E intersecting the optical axis can cause changes in the light diffusion pattern (luminescence pattern). Diversifying the luminescence pattern in this way is desirable for suppressing monotony in the luminescence effect.

In configurations where the annular protrusions 713E, which are decorative elements with uneven surfaces, also function as light diffusers, it is anticipated that the visual impact will be reduced when the front cover 670E moves. In this embodiment, however, the configuration involves operating the light-emitting unit 630E located behind the front cover 670E, thus avoiding such an inconvenience.

The light-emitting unit 630E is rotatable, allowing for continuous and repeated changes in its illumination pattern. This is preferable for ensuring a sufficiently long duration for the illumination effect, thereby effectively enhancing the sustained effect of increasing attention. In particular, as shown in this embodiment, configuring the central axis CL1, which is the rotational axis of the light-emitting unit 630E, to be spaced apart from the central axes CL5 to CL7 and parallel to those axes is preferable for creating changes in the illumination pattern accompanying rotation.

As shown in this embodiment, by configuring the side surface 718E of the annular protrusion 713E, etc., to be inclined with respect to the central axis CL5, etc., a portion of the light from the light-emitting element 641E can be reflected and guided to other annular protrusions 713E. This is preferable for increasing the overall length of the band-shaped light-emitting pattern and emphasizing the visual difference (point-like/band-like).

Between the annular protrusions 713E, the bottom of the annular groove 714E, which acts as a "flat surface," is formed, and the rotational trajectory through which the light-emitting element 641E passes and the annular groove 714E are formed to overlap when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. With this configuration, the shape of the light-emitting pattern (e.g., the overall length) can be changed depending on whether the light from the light-emitting element 641E is irradiated onto the side surface 718E or onto the bottom of the annular groove 714E. In other words, the shape of the light-emitting pattern changes in accordance with the change in its position. Such a configuration is preferable in suppressing monotony in the light-emitting effect.

As shown in this embodiment, by configuring the bottom width (groove width) of each annular groove 714E to be different, it is possible to more effectively generate changes in the shape of the light-emitting pattern (e.g., the overall length) depending on the object being illuminated.

Furthermore, the length of the overlap between the trajectory of the light-emitting element 1 and the light-diffusing section as the light-emitting unit 630E rotates is different from the length of the overlap between the trajectory of other light-emitting elements as the light-emitting unit 630E rotates and the light-diffusing section. This configuration allows for a suitable implementation of different rotation ranges (angles) within which the light-emitting pattern is displayed in the light-diffusing section 1. In configurations where the cover's decoration functions as a light-diffusing section, there may be strong constraints on the shape and size of the light-diffusing section in order to achieve its decorative function. Therefore, by configuring the light-emitting section 1 as shown in this embodiment, allowing multiple light-emitting elements to pass behind it, and then differentiating their rotation ranges, the visual appeal of the light-emitting effect can be improved while effectively eliminating the resulting inconveniences.

<Variation 1>
In the 16th embodiment described above, the rotational position (phase) between the light-emitting unit 630E and the case 660E (specifically, the opposing part 671E) is changed by rotating the light-emitting unit 630E. However, this does not negate the possibility of changing this configuration and changing the rotational position (phase) between the light-emitting unit 630E and the case 660E (specifically, the opposing part 671E) by rotating the case 660E.

Furthermore, while the decorative parts 711E, 721E, and 731E are configured to be visible from the front of the game machine, they may also be formed to be invisible from the front of the game machine. For example, a translucent sticker with light-transmitting properties could be placed on the front or back of the game board 80aE, thereby obstructing the visibility of the decorative parts 711E, 721E, and 731E, while allowing the light from the light-emitting element 641E to be visible from the front of the game machine. In the case where the case 660E is configured to rotate as described above, making the decorative parts 711E, 721E, and 731E invisible effectively prevents the player from sensing the start of the special miss notification effect (lighting effect) before it actually begins, thus reducing the impact of the effect.

<Modified Example 2>
In the 16th embodiment described above, the decorative parts 711E, 721E, and 731E are formed to be circular when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. However, the specific shape of the decorative parts 711E, 721E, and 731E can be arbitrarily changed as long as the luminous pattern is linear and at least one of its orientation and position can be changed. For example, the decorative parts 711E, 721E, and 731E can be made elliptical or polygonal when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, while non-light-diffusing sections 715E, 725E, and 735E are provided in the central parts of the decorative sections 711E, 721E, and 731E, the design is not limited to this. These non-light-diffusing sections 715E, 725E, and 735E can also be omitted.

<Example 3>
In the 16th embodiment described above, the groove width (gap) of the annular groove 714E was formed to increase with increasing distance from the central axis CL5, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, the groove width (gap) of the annular groove 714E may be formed to decrease with increasing distance from the central axis CL5, or the groove width (gap) of the annular groove 714E may be formed to be constant regardless of the distance from the central axis CL5. Similar modifications may be made to the other annular grooves 724E and 734E, or the groove width setting patterns may be different for the annular grooves 714E, 724E, and 734E.

<Modification 4>
In the sixteenth embodiment described above, the annular protrusions 713E, 723E, and 733E were formed such that their cross-sections were approximately triangular, but the invention is not limited to this. The cross-sections of the annular protrusions 713E, 723E, and 733E can be arbitrarily changed as long as they can perform the function of guiding at least a portion of the light from the light-emitting element 641E to adjacent annular protrusions by reflecting it backward. For example, they can be formed to be approximately semicircular.

<Embodiment 17>
In this embodiment, a new special effect device 500F is constructed by applying the configuration of the effect mechanism 600E shown in the 16th embodiment to the special effect device 500D shown in the 15th embodiment. The following explanation will focus on the differences between the special effect device 500F in this embodiment and the 15th embodiment, with reference to Figures 163 and 164. Figure 163 is a horizontal cross-sectional view of the special effect device 500F, and Figure 164 is a front view of the special effect device 500F.

(Special production device 500F)
As shown in Figure 163, the special performance device 500F comprises a performance mechanism 600F, a base for fixing the performance mechanism 600F to the back block of the game board unit 80F, and a decorative sticker 501F fixed to the back of the game board 80aF. When the game board 80aF and the back block are assembled (see Figure 7), the performance mechanism 600F faces the decorative sticker 501F of the game board 80aF with only a small gap between them. The game board 80aF is transparent, allowing the player to see the special performance device 500F, or more specifically the decorative sticker 501F, through the game board 80aF from the front of the game machine.

The performance mechanism 600F comprises a light-emitting unit 630F and a synthetic resin case 660F that houses the light-emitting unit 630F. The light-emitting unit 630F consists of a light-emitting substrate 640F on which multiple light-emitting elements 641F (specifically LEDs) are mounted, and a holder 651F that holds the light-emitting substrate 640F so that the mounting surface of the light-emitting elements 641F faces the front of the gaming machine. Specifically, both the light-emitting substrate 640F and the holder 651F are disc-shaped, and the light-emitting substrate 640F is fixed to the holder 651F by fitting into a recess formed in the center of the holder 651F. The light-emitting substrate 640F is connected to the notification/performance control device 140 via connection terminals such as slip rings, and the notification/performance control device 140 performs light emission control (switching between on and off states) of the light-emitting elements 641F.

The case 660F consists of a rear cover 680F that covers the light-emitting unit 630F from the rear, and a front cover 670F that covers the light-emitting unit 630F from the front, which are combined front and back. The front cover 670F is light-transmitting, and light from the light-emitting element 641F is emitted towards the front of the game machine through the front cover 670F → decorative sticker 501F → game board 80aF.

The front cover 670F has a disc-shaped opposing portion 671F that faces the light-emitting substrate 640F and the decorative seal 501F, and a cylindrical shaft portion 673F that rises rearward from the opposing portion 671F. A bearing hole 652F is formed in the center of the light-emitting unit 630F (light-emitting substrate 640F and holder 651F), extending from front to back. The shaft portion 673F is inserted through the bearing hole 652F, allowing the light-emitting unit 630F to rotate around the shaft portion 673F. In other words, the light-emitting unit 630F is housed in the case 660F in a rotatable state. Hereinafter, the rotational axis of the light-emitting unit 630F will be referred to as "central axis CL1".

A circular stopper portion 672F is formed on the back of the opposing portion 671F, which abuts against the holder 651F of the light-emitting unit 630F from the front. This stopper portion 672F restricts the forward displacement of the light-emitting unit 630F. In this state, with the light-emitting unit 630F in contact with the stopper portion 672F, a gap is maintained between the light-emitting substrate 640F and the back of the opposing portion 671F, thus avoiding contact between the light-emitting element 641F and the opposing portion 671F. Furthermore, a protrusion formed in the center of the holder 651F abuts against the back cover 680F, and the rearward displacement of the light-emitting unit 630F is restricted by the back cover 680F.

The rear cover 680F houses a drive mechanism 690F that rotates the light-emitting unit 630F. The drive mechanism 690F consists of a motor 691F as the drive unit and gears 653F and 692F that transmit power from the motor 691F to the light-emitting unit 630F. The motor 691F is connected to the notification/effect control device 140, and the motor 691F is driven and controlled by the notification/effect control device 140.

As shown in Figure 164, in this embodiment, a plurality of bulging portions 711F, 721F, and 731F are formed on the front surface of the opposing portion 671F of the front cover 670F, bulging toward the decorative seal 501F. In other words, the front surface of the opposing portion 671F is broadly divided into a flat portion 701F and bulging portions 711F, 721F, and 731F that bulge from the flat portion 701F. The bulging portions 711F, 721F, and 731F are aligned in the rotational direction of the light-emitting unit 630F, and the positional relationship between these bulging portions 711F, 721F, and 731F and the light-emitting body 641F changes as the light-emitting unit 630F rotates around the central axis CL1. The bulging portions 711F, 721F, and 731F formed on the front cover 670F will be described in more detail below. Note that the bulging sections 711F, 721F, and 731F are omitted from Figure 163.

The first bulge 711F has multiple (four) annular protrusions 713F that protrude forward from the flat portion 701F. Each annular protrusion 713F is circular in shape centered on a central axis CL5 extending in the front-to-back direction, and is arranged radially along the central axis CL5. Small gaps (annular grooves 714F) are provided between each annular protrusion 713F, and these gaps are designed to be larger the further away they are from the central axis CL5.

The second bulge 721F has multiple (four) annular protrusions 723F that protrude forward from the flat portion 701F. Each annular protrusion 723F is circular in shape centered on the central axis CL6 extending in the front-to-back direction, and is arranged radially along the central axis CL6. Small gaps (annular grooves 724F) are provided between each annular protrusion 723F, and these gaps are designed to be larger the further they are from the central axis CL5.

The third bulge 731F has multiple (four) annular protrusions 733F that protrude forward from the flat portion 701F. Each annular protrusion 733F is circular in shape centered on the central axis CL7 extending in the front-to-back direction, and is arranged radially along the central axis CL6. Small gaps (annular grooves 734F) are provided between each annular protrusion 733F, and these gaps are designed to be larger the further away they are from the central axis CL6.

Furthermore, the first bulge 711F, the second bulge 721F, and the third bulge 731F are arranged such that the distance from the central axis CL1 to the respective central axes CL5 to CL7 is the same, and their external shapes are also unified. The following description will focus on the detailed structure of the first bulge 711F, but the detailed structures of the second bulge 721F and the third bulge 731F are similar.

The sides of the annular projection 713F (the inner surface facing the central axis CL5 and the outer surface facing the opposite direction) are both oriented in a direction intersecting the central axis CL5, and the annular projection 713F is formed to taper towards its tip (front end). When light from the light-emitting element 641F is irradiated onto the annular projection 713F of the first bulge 711F, at least a portion of the light is diffused to other annular projections 713F and annular grooves 714F before being emitted forward through these annular projections 713F and annular grooves 714F towards the front of the gaming machine.

The diffusion direction is the radial direction (perpendicular direction) of the central axis CL5. Therefore, when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, the light emission pattern is linear (band-shaped) extending in the radial direction of the central axis CL5. In contrast, when light from the light-emitting element 641F is irradiated onto the planar portion 701F (including the partitioned portion 715F demarcated by the annular protrusion 713F), the light passes directly through the opposing portion 671F and is emitted towards the front of the gaming machine with diffusion suppressed. In other words, when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, the light emission pattern becomes dot-like. The principle of this change in the light emission pattern is the same as in the 16th embodiment.

In the following description, the annular protrusions 713F, 723F, 733F and the annular grooves 714F, 724F, 734F will be referred to as "light-diffusing sections 712F, 722F, 732F," while the flat section 701F and the partitioned sections 715F, 725F, 735F will be appropriately referred to as "non-light-diffusing sections 701F, 715F, 725F, 735F."

The light-emitting element 641F revolves (displaces) as the light-emitting unit 630F rotates. The orbit PL of the light-emitting element 641F is a circle centered on the central axis CL1, and the central axis CL1 is separated from the central axis CL5 of the first bulge 711F. Therefore, the rotation of the light-emitting unit 630F changes the distance from the central axis CL5 to the optical axis of the light-emitting element 641F, causing the light-emitting element 641F to displace so as to straddle (cross behind) the light-diffusing section 712F. As a result, the linear light-emitting pattern that appears on the first bulge 711F changes in its position and orientation within the light-diffusing section 712F.

(Decorative sticker 501F)
Here, we will provide a supplementary explanation regarding the decorative sticker 501F attached to the back of the game board 80aF. The decorative sticker 501F is a transparent sticker material that transmits light and is provided with a decorative section 511F for announcements that executes a special losing announcement effect and a decorative section 512F for notification that it is a special losing result. The decorative section 511F corresponds to the decorative section 511D in the 15th embodiment, and the decorative section 512F corresponds to the decorative section 512D in the 15th embodiment.

The pre-announcement decorative unit 511F and the notification decorative unit 512F are arranged side by side, with the former on the left and the latter on the right. The pre-announcement decorative unit 511F is positioned closer to the hold count display area Da, the execution target display area Dc, and the operation port unit 82A than the notification decorative unit 512F. The distance from the first operation port 91A, which may result in a special miss, to the special performance device 500F (specifically the pre-announcement decorative unit 511F) is shorter than the distance from the first operation port 91A to the pattern variation display area ME on the display screen 95aA of the pattern display device 95A.

The notification decorative unit 512F can be switched between an illuminated state and an off state. When a special losing result occurs, it switches from the off state to the illuminated state to provide the notification. During high-frequency support mode A, it remains illuminated, and switches to the off state when the number of games played in high-frequency support mode A reaches the termination threshold and high-frequency support mode A ends.

The warning decoration section 511F consists of a blue first warning section 521F, a yellow second warning section 522F, and a red third warning section 523F. These three sections can be individually switched between illuminated and unilluminated states. Note that the first, second, and third warning sections 521F, 522F, and 523F correspond to the first, second, and third light-emitting sections 521D, 522D, and 523D shown in the 15th embodiment.

The special miss notification sequence has three steps: Step 1, where only the first notification unit 521F is lit; Step 2, where the second notification unit 522F is lit; and Step 3, where the third notification unit 523F is lit. The probability of a special miss occurs changes as the game progresses through these steps. For example, in Step 1, the probability of a special miss is 30%, in Step 2, it's 50%, and in Step 3, it's 80%. In the special miss notification sequence corresponding to a special miss, the notification decoration unit 512F lights up to indicate a special miss. In the special miss notification sequence corresponding to a normal miss, the notification decoration unit 511F and notification decoration unit 512F turn off to indicate that a special miss did not occur.

The specific configuration of the special miss notification effect shown in this embodiment is the same as in the 15th embodiment. For example, the above steps do not necessarily advance when the game round progresses; even if the game round progresses, the steps may not advance. Also, the steps do not necessarily advance one by one; some steps may be skipped. Incidentally, even in the case of a special miss result, the special miss notification effect does not necessarily occur; the notification decorative unit 512F may switch to the illuminated state without going through the special miss notification effect.

This embodiment differs from the 16th embodiment in that the visually similar animation to the special miss result confirmation animation shown in the 16th embodiment is executed as a teasing animation indicating that the special miss notification animation is about to begin (that it is a premonition). The following describes the ingenuity for executing two types of animations (special miss notification animation and teasing animation) using the special animation device 500F, with reference to Figure 164.

The light-emitting elements 641F shown in this embodiment are broadly classified into first light-emitting elements 641aF, second light-emitting elements 641bF, third light-emitting elements 641cF, fourth light-emitting elements 641dF, fifth light-emitting elements 641eF, and sixth light-emitting elements 641fF, depending on their distance from the central axis CL1. Specifically, the distance from the central axis CL1 increases in the following order: first light-emitting element 641aF < second light-emitting element 641bF < third light-emitting element 641cF < fourth light-emitting element 641dF < fifth light-emitting element 641eF < sixth light-emitting element 641fF.

The first light-emitting element 641aF is positioned such that, when the light-emitting unit 630F rotates around the central axis CL1, the entire orbit PLa of the first light-emitting element 641aF overlaps with the non-light-diffusing portion 701E of the front cover 670 when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, the first light-emitting element 641aF is positioned such that, when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, a portion of the trajectory PLa overlaps with the notification decorative section 512F. When the light-emitting unit 630F is in standby position, which is a predetermined rotation position, the first light-emitting element 641aF is positioned behind the notification decorative section 512F. Note that the light-emitting unit 630F remains in standby position when the aforementioned promotional effects are not being performed.

The second light-emitting element 641bF is positioned such that, when the light-emitting unit 630F rotates around the central axis CL1, its orbit PLb overlaps with the light-diffusing section 712F of the first bulge 711F, the light-diffusing section 722F of the second bulge 721F, the light-diffusing section 732F of the third bulge 731F, and the non-light-diffusing section 701F, as viewed from the front of the gaming machine. By rotating the light-emitting unit 630F while the second light-emitting element 641bF is lit, the target of the light emitted (supplyed) by the second light-emitting element 641bF can be repeatedly changed in the following order: non-light-diffusing section 701F → light-diffusing section 712F → non-light-diffusing section 701F → light-diffusing section 722F → non-light-diffusing section 701F → light-diffusing section 732F → non-light-diffusing section 701E.

Furthermore, the second light-emitting element 641bF is positioned so that, when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, a portion of the trajectory PLb overlaps with the notification decoration section 512F, the second warning section 522F, and the third warning section 523F. When the light-emitting unit 630F is in standby position, the second light-emitting element 641bF is positioned behind the third warning section 523F. By illuminating the second light-emitting element 641bF while it is in standby position, the third warning section 523F becomes illuminated.

The third light-emitting element 641cF is positioned such that, when the light-emitting unit 630F rotates around the central axis CL1, the orbit PLc of the third light-emitting element 641cF overlaps with the light-diffusing section 712F and non-light-diffusing section 715F of the first bulge 711F, the light-diffusing section 722F and non-light-diffusing section 725F of the second bulge 721F, the light-diffusing section 732F and non-light-diffusing section 735F of the third bulge 731F, and the non-light-diffusing section 701F, when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. By rotating the light-emitting unit 630F while the third light-emitting element 641cF is lit, the target of the light emitted by the third light-emitting element 641cF can be repeatedly changed in the following order: non-light diffusion section 701F → light diffusion section 712F → non-light diffusion section 715F → light diffusion section 712F → non-light diffusion section 701F → light diffusion section 722F → non-light diffusion section 725F → light diffusion section 722F → non-light diffusion section 701F → light diffusion section 732F → non-light diffusion section 735F → light diffusion section 732F → non-light diffusion section 701E.

Furthermore, the third light-emitting element 641cF is positioned such that, when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, a portion of the track PLc overlaps with the notification decoration section 512F, the second notification section 522F, and the third notification section 523F. When the light-emitting unit 630F is in standby position, the third light-emitting element 641cF is positioned behind the second notification section 522F and behind the notification decoration section 512F. By illuminating the third light-emitting element 641cF on the second notification section 522F side while in standby position, the second notification section 522F becomes illuminated. Also, to illuminate the notification decoration section 512F, the third light-emitting element 641cF on the notification decoration section 512F side is illuminated when the light-emitting unit 630F is in standby position.

The fourth light-emitting element 641dF is positioned such that, when the light-emitting unit 630F rotates around the central axis CL1, the orbit PLd of the fourth light-emitting element 641dF overlaps with the light-diffusing section 712F and non-light-diffusing section 715F of the first bulge 711F, the light-diffusing section 722F and non-light-diffusing section 725F of the second bulge 721F, the light-diffusing section 732F and non-light-diffusing section 735F of the third bulge 731F, and the non-light-diffusing section 701F, when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. By rotating the light-emitting unit 630F while the fourth light-emitting element 641dF is lit, the target of the light emitted by the fourth light-emitting element 641dF can be repeatedly changed in the following order: non-light diffusion section 701F → light diffusion section 712F → non-light diffusion section 715F → light diffusion section 712F → non-light diffusion section 701F → light diffusion section 722F → non-light diffusion section 725F → light diffusion section 722F → non-light diffusion section 701F → light diffusion section 732F → non-light diffusion section 735F → light diffusion section 732F → non-light diffusion section 701E.

Furthermore, the fourth light-emitting element 641dF is positioned such that, when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, a portion of the track PLd overlaps with the notification decoration section 512F, the second notification section 522F, and the third notification section 523F. When the light-emitting unit 630F is in standby position, the fourth light-emitting element 641dF is positioned behind the notification decoration section 512F. When the notification decoration section 512F is illuminated, the fourth light-emitting element 641dF is illuminated with the light-emitting unit 630F in standby position.

The fifth light-emitting element 641eF is positioned such that, when the light-emitting unit 630F rotates around the central axis CL1, its orbit PLe overlaps with the light-diffusing section 712F of the first bulge 711F, the light-diffusing section 722F of the second bulge 721F, the light-diffusing section 732F of the third bulge 731F, and the non-light-diffusing section 701F, as viewed from the front of the gaming machine. By rotating the light-emitting unit 630F while the fifth light-emitting element 641eF is lit, the target of the light emitted (supplied) by the fifth light-emitting element 641eF can be repeatedly changed in the order of non-light-diffusing section 701F → light-diffusing section 712F → non-light-diffusing section 701F → light-diffusing section 722F → non-light-diffusing section 701F → light-diffusing section 732F → non-light-diffusing section 701F.

Furthermore, the fifth light-emitting element 641eF is positioned such that, when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, a portion of the trajectory PLe overlaps with the notification decoration section 512F and the first warning section 521F. When the rotation position of the light-emitting unit 630F is in the standby position, the fifth light-emitting element 641eF is positioned behind the notification decoration section 512F. When the notification decoration section 512F is illuminated, the fifth light-emitting element 641eF is illuminated with the light-emitting unit 630F in the standby position.

The sixth light-emitting element 641fF is positioned such that, when the light-emitting unit 630F rotates around the central axis CL1, its orbit PLf overlaps with the light-diffusing section 712F of the first bulge 711F, the light-diffusing section 722F of the second bulge 721F, the light-diffusing section 732F of the third bulge 731F, and the non-light-diffusing section 701F, as viewed from the front of the gaming machine. By rotating the light-emitting unit 630F while the sixth light-emitting element 641fF is lit, the target of the light emitted (supply) from the sixth light-emitting element 641fF can be repeatedly changed in the order of non-light-diffusing section 701F → light-diffusing section 712F → non-light-diffusing section 701F → light-diffusing section 722F → non-light-diffusing section 701F → light-diffusing section 732F → non-light-diffusing section 701F.

Furthermore, the sixth light-emitting element 641fF is positioned such that, when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, a portion of its trajectory PLf overlaps with the notification decoration section 512F and the first warning section 521F. When the light-emitting unit 630F is in the standby position, the sixth light-emitting element 641fF is positioned behind the first warning section 521F and behind the notification decoration section 512F. By illuminating the sixth light-emitting element 641fF on the side of the first warning section 521F while in the standby position, the first warning section 521F becomes illuminated. Also, to illuminate the notification decoration section 512F, the sixth light-emitting element 641fF on the side of the notification decoration section 512F is illuminated while the light-emitting unit 630F is in the standby position.

In the 15th embodiment described above, the system is configured to determine whether or not to execute a special miss notification animation at the timing of the transition to the confirmed display, and if it is decided to execute it, the special miss notification animation is started at that transition timing. In this embodiment, while the timing of the start of the special miss notification animation is the same as in the 15th embodiment, the configuration differs from the 15th embodiment in that the decision on whether or not to execute the special miss notification animation is made at an earlier timing (specifically, at the timing when the hold is acquired).

Next, the flow of the special "miss" notification effect will be explained with reference to Figures 165(a) and 165(b).

In the special miss notification sequence, the first notification section 521F, the second notification section 522F, and the third notification section 523F are switched between off and on states according to the set step-up pattern. The light emission control of each light-emitting element 641F is performed with the light-emitting unit 630F stopped in the aforementioned standby position.

For example, if a special losing result is indicated after progressing through steps 1 → 2 → 3, the sixth light-emitting element 641fF located behind the first warning unit 521F is illuminated at the timing of the confirmation display in the game round preceding the relevant game round. This causes the first warning unit 521F to illuminate (Step 1). At the timing of the confirmation display in the game round executed after the completion of Step 1, the third light-emitting element 641cF located behind the second warning unit 522F is illuminated. This causes the second warning unit 522F to illuminate (Step 2). At the timing of the confirmation display in the game round executed after the completion of Step 2, the second light-emitting element 641bF is illuminated. This causes the third warning unit 523F to illuminate (Step 3).

In the game round executed after the step-up is complete, at the timing of the confirmation display, the first light-emitting element 641aF, the fourth light-emitting element 641dF, the fifth light-emitting element 641eF, and the second light-emitting element 641bF, the third light-emitting element 641cF, and the sixth light-emitting element 641fF that are located behind the notification decorative section 512F are newly illuminated. This causes the notification decorative section 512F to illuminate (see Figure 165(b)).

As already explained, before the special miss notification effect is executed, a pre-announcement effect may be performed. In this pre-announcement effect, the light-emitting unit 630E begins rotating during the display of the changing symbols in the game (before the timing of the confirmed symbol combination display). After the rotation speed reaches a steady speed during the display, the first light-emitting element 641aF, a portion of the third light-emitting element 641cF (located behind the second notification unit 522F in the standby position), the fourth light-emitting element 641dF, and a portion of the sixth light-emitting element 641fF (located behind the first notification unit 521F in the standby position) are illuminated. As a result, the special effect device 500E dynamically displays both dot-like and linear light-emitting patterns. In this way, by using the pre-announcement effect to draw the player's attention to the special effect device 500F before the special miss notification effect begins, the chances of missing the special miss notification effect are reduced.

<Embodiment 18>
In the first embodiment described above, when the ceiling is reached, the game transitions to a normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A (fourth normal game state), thereby suppressing further investment. While such a configuration is desirable in improving the soundness of the game, there is room for improvement in drawing attention to the change in the flow of the game when the ceiling is reached. One of the features of this embodiment is that it takes these circumstances into consideration. The following describes the characteristic configuration of this embodiment, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

In the first embodiment described above, the game board unit 80 (game board 80a) had a symmetrical gauge (see Figure 6). However, in this embodiment, the game board unit 80B (game board 80aB) has an asymmetrical gauge, and the arrangement of various game components provided in the game area PE has been changed. The game board unit 80B in this embodiment will be described in detail below with reference to Figure 166. Figure 166 is a front view of the game board unit 80B.

(Game board unit 80B)
The game board 80aB has multiple openings of varying sizes that penetrate in the direction of its own thickness (front-to-back direction). A general prize entry opening 81, an operating opening unit 82A, a variable prize entry device 83B, a through gate 84A, etc. are provided in each opening. When game balls flow into the general prize entry opening 81, the operating opening unit 82A, or the variable prize entry device 83B, these game balls are detected by detection sensors (not shown) provided in accordance with each ball entry area, and based on the detection results, the player is granted a predetermined number of prize balls (dispensing of game balls) or other benefits.

Furthermore, the game board 80aB is equipped with numerous game pins 87 to appropriately distribute and adjust the flow path of the game balls, as well as various components (mechanisms) such as windmills. These various configurations, including the game pins 87 and windmills, differentiate the flow path of the game balls, adjusting them so that entries into the general prize pockets 81, etc., occur with a suitable probability. An out-out opening 86 is provided at the bottom of the game board 80aB, and game balls that do not enter the various ball entry points are discharged from the game area PE through the out-out opening 86.

The operating port unit 82A, similar to the operating port unit 82 shown in the first embodiment, has a first operating port 91A and a second operating port 92A located directly below the first operating port 91A. The latter of the two operating ports 92A is equipped with an electric mechanism 93A, which functions as an open/close ball entry assist device (ball entry assist means) or an open/close member (open/close means). When the support mode of the electric mechanism 93A is set to low-frequency support mode, it is effectively impossible to win a prize in the second operating port 92A. Winning a prize in the second operating port 92A is permitted when the mode switches to high-frequency support mode.

The game board 80aB is provided with a center frame 96A surrounding the display screen 95aA of the pattern display device 95A. The center frame 96A protrudes from the front of the game board 80aB, and the flow path of the game balls flowing down the game area PE is broadly divided into a route that bypasses the center frame 96A from the right side and a route that bypasses it from the left side, similar to the first embodiment described above. However, in this embodiment, the arrangement of the first operation port 91A, second operation port 92A, variable prize device 83B, and through gate 84A has been modified so that game balls launched along the left route can enter the first operation port 91A and the second operation port 92A, but cannot enter the variable prize device 83B or the through gate 84A. Game balls launched along the right route can enter the second operation port 92A, the through gate 84A, and the variable prize device 83B, but cannot enter the first operation port 91A. It is also possible to configure the system so that game balls launched along the left route cannot enter the second operation port 92A.

By switching the launch route of the game ball between the right and left routes depending on the game state, it becomes possible to gain an advantage in the game. This encouragement of skillful play helps to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

A hold display area is set at the bottom of the display screen 95aA of the pattern display device 95A. The hold display area consists of a hold count display area Da, which is partitioned by arranging unit hold display areas horizontally, with the same number of units as the maximum number of holdable balls when game balls enter the operating openings 91 and 92; and an execution target display area Dc, which can display hold images (hold icons) corresponding to the currently running game rounds. The hold count display area Da can be switched between a display mode composed of four unit hold display areas and a display mode composed of eight unit hold areas.

The game balls flowing down the left route primarily enter the first operation port 91A, and during low-frequency support mode, the game progresses mainly based on the reserves related to the first operation port 91A. In contrast, the game balls flowing down the right route primarily enter the second operation port 92A, and during high-frequency support mode, the game progresses mainly based on the reserves related to the second operation port 92A. Due to these circumstances, in most cases, the number of reserve icons displayed in the reserve count display area Da will be four or less. Therefore, the display mode of the reserve count display area Da will be based on a display mode consisting of four unit reserve display areas, as illustrated in Figure 139, and will switch to a display mode consisting of eight unit reserve display areas only when the number of reserve icons exceeds four. Note that the function to switch the display mode of the reserve count display area Da according to the situation can be omitted.

In this embodiment, the configuration of the variable prize-winning device 83B differs from that of the variable prize-winning device 83 shown in the first embodiment. The specific configuration of the variable prize-winning device 83B will be explained below with reference to Figure 167. Figure 167 is a schematic diagram showing the internal structure of the variable prize-winning device 83B.

(Variable prize-winning device 83B)
Inside the variable prize winning device 83B, a ball passage 332B is formed through which game balls that have flowed into the entrance (large prize opening 331B) of the variable prize winning device 83B pass. The ball passage 332B branches into a first branch passage 334B and a second branch passage 335B at an intermediate position, and a flow path switching member 336B is provided at this branching point, which can switch the destination of the game balls to the first branch passage 334B side and the second branch passage 335B side. The drive unit (specifically a solenoid) for the flow path switching member 336B is connected to the main control device 162 and operates based on a drive signal from the main control device 162. When no drive signal is input from the main control device 162 (non-excited state), the flow path switching member 336B waits in a protruding position that protrudes into the ball passage 332B, and when a drive signal is input (excited state), it waits in a retracted position where protrusion into the ball passage 332B is avoided.

When the flow path switching member 336B is positioned in a protruding location, the inlet of the first branch passage 334B is blocked by the flow path switching member 336B. In this state, the inflow of game balls that have reached the branching section into the first branch passage 334B is prevented, and these game balls flow into the second branch passage 335B.

When the main control device 162 outputs a drive signal for the drive unit of the flow path switching member 336B and the drive unit is energized, the flow path switching member 336B moves to a retracted position where protrusion into the ball passage 332B is avoided, and the entrance portion of the first branch passage 334B is opened. This changes the destination of the game balls. In this state, the game balls that have reached the branching point are prevented from flowing into the second branch passage 335B, and instead flow into the first branch passage 334B. The movement of the flow path switching member 336B is predetermined by the results of a lottery based on winning entries into the operating ports 91A and 92A.

Upstream detection sensor 391d is installed in the ball passage 332B upstream of the branching point, and downstream detection sensors 338B and 339B are installed in the downstream section, specifically in the first branching passage 334B and the second branching passage 335B. The upstream detection sensor 391d and the downstream detection sensors 338B and 339B are connected to the main control unit 162. The main control unit 162 determines whether a ball has entered the variable prize winning device 83B based on detection information (detection signals) from the upstream detection sensor 391d, and dispenses a predetermined number of game balls if a prize has been won. Furthermore, the remaining game ball status is monitored based on detection information (detection signals) from the upstream detection sensor 391d and the downstream detection sensors 338B and 339B.

In the main control device 162 shown in this embodiment, when detection information (detection signal) from the downstream detection sensor 338B attached to the first branch passage 334B indicates that a ball has entered the first branch passage 334B, the lottery mode after the special game state (the V-jackpot game state described in detail later) ends is switched to a high-probability mode (a so-called V-probability machine). In this embodiment, the first branch passage 334B corresponds to the "advantageous ball entry section" or "V," and a ball entering the first branch passage 334B is also referred to as a "V-winning ball."

(Retained ball storage area)
Next, in this embodiment, the configuration for storing hold information based on winning entries into the operating ports 91A and 92A differs from that of the first embodiment. The configuration for storing hold information in this embodiment will now be described with reference to the schematic diagram in Figure 168.

The ball storage area 432A shown in this embodiment includes a first operation port storage area Ra that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 when a ball enters the first operation port 91A, and a second operation port storage area Rb that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 when a ball enters the second operation port 92A.

The first operation port's hold area Ra consists of four areas (Area 1 to Area 4). When multiple consecutive entries occur into the first operation port 91A, the numerical information is stored chronologically in the order of Area 1 → Area 2 → Area 3 → Area 4. Similarly, the second operation port's hold area Rb consists of four areas (Area 1 to Area 4). When multiple consecutive entries occur into the second operation port 92A, the numerical information (hold information) is stored chronologically in the order of Area 1 → Area 2 → Area 3 → Area 4.

In this embodiment, if hold information is stored in the second operation port hold area Rb, the system is configured to preferentially move the hold information stored in the second operation port hold area Rb (specifically, the first area) to the execution area AE. Furthermore, if no hold information is stored in the second operation port hold area Rb, but hold information is stored in the first operation port hold area Ra, the system is configured to move the hold information stored in the first operation port hold area Ra (specifically, the first area) to the execution area AE.

In the first embodiment described above, two lottery modes were provided for the lottery conducted based on the entry of the ball into the first and second operating ports 91 and 92: a low-probability mode where the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively low, and a high-probability mode where the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively high. In other words, the system was configured to switch the win/loss table for the operating ports that was referenced according to the lottery mode. In contrast, this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the win/loss lottery for the operating ports is performed by referencing the same win/loss table regardless of the game state. It also differs from the first embodiment in that it references different win/loss tables depending on where the game ball enters. The win/loss table for the operating ports in this embodiment will be described below with reference to Figure 170.

(Validity table for the operating port)
As shown in Figure 169(a), in the low-probability mode win/loss table referenced when drawing based on winnings in the operating ports 91A and 92A, the random number values that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) are a total of six: "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507". In other words, of the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to jackpots. All random number values that do not correspond to jackpots correspond to losses (normal losses). As a result, the jackpot probability is 1/100.

As shown in Figure 169(b), in the high-probability mode win/loss table referenced during the lottery based on winning entries into the operating ports 91A and 92A, the random number values that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) are "7", "37", "57", "97", "107"... "597", totaling 30 values. In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "7", "37", "57", "97", "107"... "597" correspond to jackpots. All random number values that do not correspond to jackpots correspond to losses (normal losses). This results in a jackpot probability of 1/20.

In this embodiment, the lottery results based on winning entries into the first and second operating ports 91A and 92A do not include the special misses shown in the first embodiment. However, this is not limited to this; the system may be configured to allow for special misses in the lottery based on winning entries into the first operating port 91A, or in the lottery based on winning entries into the second operating port 92A, or in either the lottery based on winning entries into the first or second operating port 92A.

Next, referring to Figure 170, the distribution tables for each of the operating ports 91A and 92A will be described.

(Distribution table for the operating port)
In the distribution table for the first operation port 91A, 15 values from "0" to "14" of the type counter C2 values from "0" to "29" correspond to 3R jackpot A (3R jackpot result A), and 15 values from "15" to "29" correspond to 3R jackpot B (3R jackpot result B). In other words, when a jackpot is won, there is a 50% probability each of getting 3R jackpot result A and 3R jackpot result B.

In contrast, in the distribution table for the second operation port 92A, six values from "0" to "5" of the type counter C2 (values from "0" to "29") correspond to 6R jackpot A (6R jackpot result A), while 24 values from "6" to "29" correspond to 6R jackpot B (6R jackpot result B). Therefore, when a jackpot is won, approximately 20% result in 6R jackpot A, and the remaining 80% result in 6R jackpot B.

As shown in Figure 171, there is a difference in the number of rounds during the opening/closing execution mode between the 3R jackpot result and the 6R jackpot result. The former has 3 rounds, while the latter has 6 rounds. Therefore, a 6R jackpot result presents a chance to significantly increase your winnings.

In this embodiment, the distribution mode of the flow path switching member 336B in the variable prize winning device 83B differs depending on the type of jackpot. Two distribution modes are provided: a low-frequency prize winning mode and a high-frequency prize winning mode.

In the low-frequency prize-winning mode, immediately after the shutter 333B of the variable prize-winning device 83B switches from the closed state to the open state, the flow path switching member 336B switches from the protruding position to the retracted position. Immediately afterward (specifically, before the game balls flowing into the large prize-winning opening reach the branching position), the flow path switching member 336B returns to the protruding position. Specifically, the time from when the shutter 333B switches to the open state until the flow path switching member 336B returns to the protruding position is shorter than the time required for the game balls flowing into the large prize-winning opening 331B at the moment the shutter 333B switches to the open state to reach the distribution position. This results in a configuration that effectively avoids prize-winning in the advantageous ball-winning section 334B.

In contrast, in the high-frequency winning mode, while the flow path switching member 336B switches from the protruding position to the retracted position immediately after the shutter of the variable winning device 83B switches from the closed state to the open state, similar to the low-frequency winning mode described above, the flow path switching member 336B remains in the retracted position for a predetermined time (8 seconds). This time is longer than the game ball launch cycle (0.6 seconds) × maximum number of winnings (10 balls) = 6 seconds. Since almost all game balls launched to the right route reach the variable winning device 83B, a configuration is achieved in which winning into the advantageous ball entry section 334B is practically guaranteed as long as game balls are continuously launched to the right route.

For 3R jackpot result A and 6R jackpot result A, the distribution pattern of the flow path switching member 336B is a low-frequency winning pattern, while for 3R jackpot result B and 6R jackpot result B, the distribution pattern of the flow path switching member 336B is a high-frequency winning pattern. In other words, the lottery based on winning at the first operating port 91A results in a 50% probability transition to the high-probability mode after the special game state ends, and the lottery based on winning at the second operating port 92A results in an 80% probability transition to the high-probability mode after the special game state ends (see Figure 170).

Furthermore, if the result is a 3R jackpot A or a 6R jackpot A, the game state will transition to a high-frequency support mode B after the special game state ends, with the support mode provided by the electric mechanism 93A being high-frequency support mode B. This high-frequency support mode B game state continues until the number of game spins performed after the special game state ends—specifically, the number of spins related to the second operation port 92A—reaches the termination threshold. When this termination threshold is reached, the support from high-frequency support mode B ends. If the result is a 3R jackpot A, the termination threshold is set to "100 spins".

In contrast, if the result is a 3R jackpot B or a 6R jackpot B, after the special game state ends, the game state transitions to a high-frequency support mode B provided by the electric mechanism 93A. This high-frequency support mode B game state will continue until the next jackpot result occurs.

Next, referring to the flowchart in Figure 172, the V-distribution setting process, which is a control process for the flow path switching member 336B executed by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162, will be explained. The V-distribution setting process shown in this embodiment is executed as part of the large prize opening/closing process (Figure 31).

(V distribution setting process)
In the V distribution setting process, step S5201 first determines whether it is the start timing of the third round (V Challenge Round) in the special game state. If it is the start timing of the third round, step S5202 sets "50" (corresponding to 0.1 sec) in the third timer counter TC3 provided in the various counter area 434 of RAM 404. The value set in the third timer counter TC3 (counter value) is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec.

In the following step S5203, the distribution count counter HC located in the various counter areas 434 is set to "1," thereby ending this V distribution setting process. The data value (counter value) stored in the distribution count counter HC is used by the MPU 402 to identify the number of operations of the flow path switching member 336B.

Returning to the explanation of step S5201, if a negative determination is made in step S5201, the process proceeds to step S5204. In step S5204, it is determined whether the value of the distribution count counter HC is "0". If the value of the distribution count counter HC is "0", a positive determination is made in step S5204, and the V distribution setting process ends there. If the value of the distribution count counter HC is not "0", a negative determination is made in step S5240, and the process proceeds to step S5205.

In step S5205, the drive state of the drive unit for the distribution member is used to determine whether the flow path switching member 336B is in the retracted position, which is the distribution side (V-winning side) to the advantageous ball entry section 334B. If the flow path switching member 336B is not in the retracted position, i.e., in the protruding position, the process proceeds to step S5206 to determine whether the value of the third timer counter TC3 is "0". If the value of the third timer counter TC3 is not "0", the distribution setting process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the third timer counter TC3 is "0", the process proceeds to step S5207.

In step S5207, the flow path switching member 336B is moved from the protruding position to the retracted position. This switches the flow path within the variable prize-winning device 83B to the V-prize winning side. In the following step S5208, it is determined whether the current distribution pattern is a high-frequency prize-winning pattern. If the determination in step S5208 is positive, the process proceeds to step S5209, where the third timer counter TC3 is set to "4000" (equivalent to 8 seconds). If the determination in step S5208 is negative, the process proceeds to step S5210, where the third timer counter TC3 is set to "40" (equivalent to 0.08 seconds).

Returning to the explanation of step S5205, if a positive result is obtained in step S5205, that is, if the flow path switching member 336B is in the retracted position, the process proceeds to step S5211. In step S5211, it is determined whether the value of the third timer counter TC3 is "0". That is, it is determined whether the period for the flow path switching member 336B to wait in the retracted position (V-winning side) has elapsed. If a negative result is obtained in step S5211, the V-distribution setting process ends there. If a positive result is obtained in step S5211, the process proceeds to step S5212, and the flow path switching member 336B is displaced to the protruding position. As a result, it becomes impossible to win a prize (V-winning) in the advantageous ball entry section 334B from this point onward. After that, in step S5213, the value of the distribution count counter HC is deducted by "1", and the distribution setting process ends.

Next, referring to the flowchart in Figure 173, the V-prize winning process executed by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162 will be explained. The V-prize winning process shown in this embodiment is executed as part of the game state transition process (Figure 30).

(Processing for winning the V prize)
In the V-prize winning process, first in step S5301, it is determined whether or not a V-prize winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. If a V-prize winning flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S5302, where it is determined whether or not a V-prize has occurred (whether or not the game ball has passed through the detection area of the detection sensor 338B) based on the detection state of the V-prize winning detection sensor 338B provided in the variable prize winning device 83B.

If it is determined that a V-prize has been awarded, step S3303 determines whether the validity period for the V-prize is still in effect. This validity period is the period during which measurement (counting) begins as the flow path switching member 336B is displaced to its retracted position, and its length is slightly longer than the period during which the flow path switching member 336B is maintained in the retracted position.

If it is determined that the validity period has not expired, the process proceeds to step S5304, where an error command is set as the target for transmission to the notification/performance control device 140, and then the V-prize winning process is terminated. The set error command is transmitted to the notification/performance control device 140 via the external output process of the normal process (Figure 23), and the notification/performance control device 140 controls the display control device 410, the lamp unit 26, and the speaker unit 29 so that a predetermined error notification is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the validity period is still active, the process proceeds to step S5305, where the V-winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. In the following step S5306, the V-winning command is set. The V-winning command is used to notify the notification/performance control device 140 that a V-winning has occurred. The set V-winning command is transmitted to the notification/performance control device 140 via the external output processing of the normal process (Figure 23). Upon receiving the V-winning command, the notification/performance control device 140 controls the display control device 410, etc., so that the symbol display device 95, lamp unit 26, and speaker unit 29 announce the occurrence of a V-winning, or perform effects celebrating the V-winning.

After step S5306 is executed, if a positive result was obtained in step S5301 or a negative result was obtained in step S5302, this V-prize winning process is terminated.

Next, referring to the flowchart in Figure 174, the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, executed by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162, will be explained. The transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode shown in this embodiment is executed as part of the game state transition process (Figure 30).

(Transition process when opening/closing execution mode ends)
In the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, first, in step S5401, the high-frequency support mode B flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. This switches the support mode by the electric mechanism 93A to high-frequency support mode B. In the following step S5402, it is determined whether the current opening/closing execution mode was triggered by either the 3R jackpot result B or the 6R jackpot result B. If the determination in step S5402 is negative, the process proceeds to step S5403, where the count limit flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. In the following step S5404, "100" is set in the continuation count counter provided in the various counter area 434 of the RAM 404.

The value of the continuation count counter decreases by "1" each time a game is played. High-frequency support mode B ends when the continuation count counter reaches "0". In other words, the value of the continuation count counter determines the upper limit (the termination criterion count mentioned above) of the number of games that can be played during high-frequency support mode B.

After executing the process in step S5404, or if a positive result is obtained in step S5402, the process proceeds to step S5405. In step S5405, it is determined whether the aforementioned V-winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. If the V-winning flag is stored, a positive result is obtained in step S5405, and the process proceeds to step S5406, where the high-probability mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. This sets the subsequent lottery mode to high-probability mode.

After executing the process in step S5406, or if a negative result is obtained in step S5404, the process proceeds to step S5407. In step S5407, the game count counters located in the various counter areas 434 of RAM 404 are reset to 0. Then, in step S5408, the various flags (such as the jackpot flag) for the opening/closing execution mode stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404 are erased, and the output of the external signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is stopped.

Next, the pre-confirmation process (see step S306 in Figure 22) and the setting process for the hold command (see step S307 in Figure 22), which are performed as part of the timer interrupt processing in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162, will be explained.

(Pre-confirmation process)
As shown in the flowchart of Figure 175, in the pre-confirmation process, first, in step S5501, the number of operational reserves N and the common reserves CRN stored in the reserve count storage area of the reserve ball storage area 432A are read, and this information on the number of reserves is stored in the register of the MPU 402. Then, in step S5502, it is checked whether the reserve information obtained by this win contains information corresponding to the jackpot result. Details of this determination are the same as the win/fail determination process in step S702 above, so the explanation is omitted.

If the confirmation process in step S5502 confirms that a jackpot has been hit, a positive determination is made in step S5503, and the process proceeds to step S5504. In step S5504, the jackpot occurrence information is stored in the register of MPU 402, and this pre-confirmation process ends. Furthermore, in step S5504, based on the current win, the information for type determination, i.e., the value of the acquired type counter C2, is obtained from the pending information acquired in step S304, and the type of jackpot is determined by referring to the distribution table. The information stored in the register of MPU 402 in step S5504 includes information related to the type of jackpot.

If the confirmation process in step S5502 confirms a loss (normal loss), a negative determination is made in step S5503, and the process proceeds to step S5505. In step S5505, the normal loss reach confirmation process is executed. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3, obtained in step S304, is determined, and the lottery table for losing reaches is referenced to check whether a losing reach will occur. If a losing reach does not occur (i.e., a complete loss), a negative determination is made in step S5506, and this pre-confirmation process ends. If a losing reach occurs, an affirmative determination is made in step S5506, and the process proceeds to step S5507. In step S5507, the losing reach occurrence information is stored in the register of MPU 402, and this pre-confirmation process ends. Note that the information stored in the register of MPU 402 in step S5507 includes information related to the general type of losing reach (whether it is a super reach or not).

Next, we will explain the process for setting up hold commands, referring to the flowchart in Figure 176.

(Setting the pending command)
In the process of setting the hold command, first, in step S5601, it is determined whether or not jackpot occurrence information is stored in the register of the MPU 402. If jackpot occurrence information is stored, the process proceeds to step S5602, and the jackpot-corresponding hold command is set. The jackpot-corresponding hold command includes information about the type of jackpot.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5601, that is, if it is determined that no jackpot information is stored in the MPU 402 register, the process proceeds to step S5603, where it is determined whether or not losing reach information is stored in the MPU 402 register. If losing reach information is stored, a positive determination is made in step S5603, and the process proceeds to step S5604, where a losing reach corresponding hold command is set. The losing reach corresponding hold command includes information related to the general type of losing reach (whether or not it is a super reach). If a negative determination is made in step S5603, the process proceeds to step S5605. In step S5605, a losing reach non-corresponding hold command (complete loss corresponding hold command) is set.

When setting a hold command in steps S5602, S5604, and S5605, the display time for the variation is determined by referring to the value of the variation type counter CS, etc., and the information related to that variation display time is stored in the hold command. When determining the display time for the variation, the display time table is referred to, similar to the setting process for the display time shown in step S714. The hold command set in this way is transmitted to the notification/performance control device 140, which can then understand the variation display pattern of the symbols based on the hold command. As already explained, in the case of a complete miss, the display time for the variation may change depending on the number of hold information stored when starting the game round related to that hold information. Therefore, when setting a hold command for a complete miss, the information related to the display time for the variation is not stored.

After executing the command setting process in steps S5602, S5604, or S5605, step S5606 executes a process to set the number of reserved items for the reserved command. The reserved command information is composed of multiple bytes. In step S4408, the reserved item information stored in the MPU402 register in step S5501 of the preceding pre-check process (Figure 175) is first read. Then, the read reserved item information is stored in the bits for the reserved item information of the already set reserved command using an operation such as logical OR. This ensures that the reserved command set in steps S5602, S5604, or S5605 includes information to identify which reserved item corresponds to that command. After executing the process in step S5606 as described above, this reserved command setting process terminates.

In step S5606, the hold command, which includes information on the number of hold items, is transmitted to the notification/performance control device 140 via the external output processing in step S401 during the next normal processing (Figure 23). Upon receiving this hold command, the notification/performance control device 140 identifies that the hold information has increased. The notification/performance control device 140 also adds information for hold notification (described later) to the hold command and transmits it to the display control device 410. The display control device 410 then executes hold display and hold notification processing based on the received hold command.

Next, the processing related to the hold notification executed by the MPU 442 of the notification and performance control device 140 will be explained. The processing related to the hold notification can be broadly divided into two parts: command response processing, which determines the command from the main control device 162, and hold notification performance setting processing, which determines the type of hold notification.

(Handling of pending commands)
In the pending command handling process, when a pending command transmitted by the main control unit 162 is received, processing corresponding to the information contained in the received pending command is executed. Note that the pending command handling process is executed as part of a periodic process that is repeatedly started at a predetermined interval (for example, every 2 msec).

In the process of handling pending commands, the first step is to determine whether or not a pending command has been received. Commands received by the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140 are temporarily stored in the command storage area of the RAM 444. This command storage area is configured as a ring buffer capable of individually storing multiple commands and reading commands in the order they were stored, ensuring that even when multiple commands are received simultaneously, the processing corresponding to each command can be executed smoothly. To determine whether or not a corresponding pending command has been received, the system checks whether a jackpot-related pending command has been received in the target area of the command storage area 461. This command reading configuration is the same for reading other commands, such as commands for starting variations.

When a hold command is received, the various information contained in the hold command is stored in the hold information storage area. The hold information storage area 467 has a first area Rc1 to an eighth area Rc8, and is configured to store one hold information in each area. The hold information stored in each area is shifted sequentially to the lower areas when a shift command is received from the main control device 162, that is, when a game round is started. Specifically, the data in the first area Rc1 is cleared, and the data within each area is shifted as follows: second area Rc2 → first area Rc1, third area Rc3 → second area Rc2, fourth area Rc4 → third area Rc3, ... eighth area Rc8 → seventh area Rc7. In the hold information storage area of the notification/performance control device 140, as with the hold ball storage area 432 of the main control device 162 (more specifically, the hold area RE for the operation port), the hold information is stored chronologically regardless of the ball's destination. For details, the system identifies the number of pending commands included in the received command and stores the various information described above in the area corresponding to that identified number of pending commands among the first area Rc1 to the eighth area Rc8.

Furthermore, when the aforementioned hold command is received, a hold command reception flag is set in the various flag storage areas of RAM 444. When a shift command is received, a shift command reception flag is set in the various flag storage areas. These flags trigger the setting process for the hold notification effect described below, and are cleared when the said hold notification effect setting process is completed.

In the MPU 442 of the notification and performance control device 140, the jackpot announcement performance setting process is performed based on the information stored in the hold information storage area. The jackpot announcement performance setting process is executed as part of a periodic process that is repeatedly activated at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 msec cycle), and is performed on the condition that the above-mentioned hold command or shift command has been received. In other words, in this embodiment, the trigger for executing the jackpot announcement performance is when hold information is acquired upon entry into the operation ports 91A and 92A, or when hold information is consumed as the game progresses.

The jackpot notification effect shown in this embodiment is executed by changing the manner of the hold display in the hold display area NE of the symbol display device 95A (display screen 95aA) to correspond to the jackpot notification effect. Specifically, as shown in Figure 177, the hold icon MP displayed in the hold number display area Da that corresponds to the corresponding game round (corresponding hold) is changed (in this embodiment, the color is changed). Specifically, there are multiple color patterns for the hold icon MP, more specifically, three patterns: white (level 0), blue (level 1), yellow (level 2), and red (level 3), and the color of the corresponding hold icon MP is changed to a color other than white.

If the pending symbol corresponds to a jackpot result, the selection order is more likely to be Level 3 > Level 2 > Level 1. If the pending symbol corresponds to a normal loss result, the selection order is more likely to be Level 1 > Level 2 > Level 3. In other words, when a jackpot予告演出 (jackpot prediction effect) is executed, the higher the final level, the higher the expectation of a jackpot result.

Furthermore, the jackpot notification effects can be broadly categorized into two types: the first jackpot notification effect (non-step-up compatible), where the color of the changed reserve icon MP is maintained until it shifts to the execution target display area Dc, and the second jackpot notification effect (step-up compatible), where the color changes before shifting to the execution target display area Dc.

In the first jackpot notification sequence, the sequence begins during a game round before the game round corresponding to the relevant reserve icon MP starts, thereby encouraging the player to focus on the game. In contrast, in the second jackpot notification sequence, the color of the reserve icon MP changes as the game progresses. For example, even if the final color is red, it will first change to a lower-ranking color (blue or yellow) with a lower expectation level, and then step up (promote) to a higher-ranking color with a higher expectation level at the timing when the reserve icon MP shifts. By using these two types of jackpot notification sequences in combination, even if the color is low-expectation, there is a possibility that it will change to a higher-expectation color before the relevant game round. This prevents a premature decline in attention to the jackpot notification sequence.

In the gaming machine described in detail above, the goal is to hit a jackpot. However, if the ceiling is reached without hitting a jackpot, not only is investment reduced by the high-frequency support mode A, but the probability of transitioning to the high-probability mode when a jackpot is hit, and the number of prize balls that can be won when a jackpot is hit are also increased. In other words, when approaching the ceiling, hitting a jackpot after reaching the ceiling increases the expectation of a large payout more than hitting a jackpot before reaching the ceiling. For these reasons, it is assumed that the tension of playing when approaching the ceiling will increase. While a moderate level of tension in gaming is desirable for increasing attention to the game, it is a concern that such a state of tension continuing for a long time will lead to fatigue for the player. In this embodiment, one of the features is that the above concern is mitigated by configuring the system so that in some cases when approaching the ceiling, the ceiling reach confirmation animation is executed in a game round before the game round in which the ceiling is reached. The following explanation, referring to the flowchart in Figure 178, describes the process for confirming the ceiling has been reached, which is executed as part of the periodic processing by the MPU 442 of the notification and performance control device 140.

(Processing for the animation confirming reaching the ceiling)
In the process for the ceiling reach confirmation animation, first, in step S5701, it is determined whether or not the ceiling reach confirmation animation flag is stored in the various flag storage area 466 of RAM 444. As will be described in detail later, the ceiling reach confirmation animation flag is stored when the ceiling reach confirmation animation starts and erased when the ceiling reach confirmation animation ends. If the determination in step S5791 is negative, the process proceeds to step S5702.

In step S5702, it is determined whether or not a hold command has been received from the main control unit 162. If a hold command has not been received, a negative determination is made in step S5702 and the process for confirming the arrival of the main ceiling is terminated. If a hold command has been received, a positive determination is made in step S5702 and the process proceeds to step S5703. In step S5703, it is determined whether enough holds (holds equivalent to the remaining number of plays) have been secured until the ceiling is reached. If there are insufficient holds, a negative determination is made in step S5703 and the process for confirming the arrival of the main ceiling is terminated. If enough holds have been secured, a positive determination is made in step S5703 and the process proceeds to step S5704.

In step S5704, it is determined whether the reserves consumed before reaching the ceiling include any that correspond to a jackpot result. If the reserves corresponding to a jackpot result do not include any, a negative determination is made in step S5704, and the process proceeds to step S5705. In step S5705, a lottery process for the guaranteed win animation is executed. In the guaranteed win animation lottery process, the lottery table for guaranteed win animations stored in the lottery table storage area 451 of ROM 443 is referenced to determine whether or not to execute the ceiling reach guaranteed win animation. The probability of winning in this lottery is 50%.

If the lottery in step S5705 is successful, a positive result is determined in step S5706, and the process proceeds to step S5707. In step S5707, the process for starting the ceiling reach confirmation animation is executed. Specifically, a golden effect is displayed on the outer edge of the display screen 95aA of the symbol display device 95A, and the background music output from the speaker unit 29 is switched to the background music corresponding to the ceiling reach confirmation animation.

After the ceiling confirmation animation begins, in step S5708, a jackpot announcement animation restriction flag is set in the various flag storage area 466 of RAM 444. This prevents any new jackpot announcement animations from starting until the ceiling confirmation animation ends. If the announcement animation restriction flag is set while a jackpot announcement animation is still pending, that animation will be canceled without being executed.

In the following step S5709, the ceiling reach confirmation演出 flag is set in the various flag storage area 466 of RAM 444. Then, in step S5710, the launch stop indication start process is executed, and the ceiling reach confirmation演出 process ends. Upon execution of the launch stop indication start process, the words "Launch Stop" are displayed on the display screen 95aA of the symbol display device 95A. Note that if enough reserves are secured up to the ceiling, regardless of whether the reserves correspond to the jackpot result or whether the ceiling reach confirmation演出 occurs, the launch stop indication start process is executed in step S5710, and then the ceiling reach confirmation演出 process ends.

Returning to the explanation of step S5701, if a positive result is obtained in step S5701, that is, if the ceiling reach confirmation演出 (performance/animation) flag is stored in the various flag storage area 466 of RAM 444, the process proceeds to step S5711. In step S5711, it is determined whether or not the ceiling has been reached. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the final game round that would result in the ceiling reaching has ended. If a negative result is obtained in step S5711, the process proceeds to step S5712. In step S5712, it is determined whether or not the jackpot announcement performance is currently being executed. If a negative result is obtained in step S5712, the process for this ceiling reach confirmation performance ends. If a positive result is obtained in step S5712, the process proceeds to step S713.

Step S5713 determines whether it is time to cancel (cancel) the jackpot notification animation. Specifically, it determines whether the timing for cancellation, which is the timing during the confirmation display in the current game round, has been reached. If the result in step S5713 is negative, the process for the confirmed ceiling reach animation ends immediately. If the result in step S5713 is positive, the jackpot notification animation cancellation process is executed in step S5714, and then the process for the confirmed ceiling reach animation ends.

In the process of canceling the jackpot notification effect, the speaker unit 29 outputs a sound effect for canceling the jackpot notification effect, and the color of the reserve icon MP, which has been changed to blue, yellow, or red, is changed to white. More specifically, a dynamic display is performed in which a white effect converges from the golden effect displayed on the outer edge of the display screen 95aA toward the color-changed reserve icon MP, and then the color of the reserve icon MP is changed to white.

Returning to the explanation of step S5711, if a positive result is obtained in step S5711, i.e., if the ceiling has been reached, the process proceeds to step S571. In step S5715, the termination process for the indication of stopping firing is executed. As a result, the "Firing Stopped" text displayed on display screen 95aA is hidden. In the following step S5716, the termination process for the ceiling reach confirmation演出 is executed. As a result, the background music for the ceiling reach confirmation演出 output from speaker unit 29 is turned OFF. Specifically, since reaching the ceiling triggers a transition to a normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A, the background music output from speaker unit 29 switches to the background music corresponding to the transitioned normal game state. Also, the golden effect displayed on the outer edge of display screen 95aA is hidden.

After executing the process to conclude the ceiling reach confirmation animation, in step S5717, the jackpot announcement animation restriction flags stored in the various flag storage area 466 of RAM 444 are deleted. This releases the restriction on the jackpot announcement animation. Then, in step S5718, the ceiling reach confirmation animation flags stored in the various flag storage area 466 of RAM 444 are deleted, and the process for this ceiling reach confirmation animation is terminated.

Here, we will illustrate the flow of the ceiling reach confirmation演出 (performance/animation) with reference to Figure 179. Figure 179 is a timing chart showing the flow of the ceiling reach confirmation演出, illustrating the case where the ceiling reach confirmation演出 begins during a jackpot予告演出 (jackpot notification performance) corresponding to a losing result (normal losing result).

At timing tk1, the number of reserved balls related to the first operating port 91A decreases from "3" to "2" at the start of the 395th game round after the end of the special game state. At timing tk2 during the 395th game round, a ball enters the first operating port 91A, and the number of reserved balls related to the first operating port 91A increases from "2" to "3". However, at timing tk2, although the number of reserved balls has increased, the number of reserved balls needed to reach the ceiling has not been secured (there are insufficient reserved balls).

At timing tk3, the number of reserved balls related to the first operation port 91A decreases from "3" to "2" as the 396th game round begins after the special game state ends. At timing tk4 during the 396th game round, a ball enters the first operation port 91A, increasing the number of reserved balls related to the first operation port 91A from "2" to "3". Immediately afterwards, at timing tk5, another ball enters the first operation port 91A, increasing the number of reserved balls related to the first operation port 91A from "3" to "4".

At the timing of tk5, the number of reserved balls increases, securing the number of reserved balls needed to reach the ceiling. All reserved balls consumed before reaching the ceiling correspond to a losing result (a normal losing result). Based on these conditions, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to execute the ceiling-reaching confirmation animation. In the example shown in Figure 179, the lottery was won, and the ceiling-reaching confirmation animation begins at the timing of tk5. Furthermore, coinciding with the start of the ceiling-reaching confirmation animation, the display screen 95aA of the symbol display device 95A begins to indicate that firing has stopped.

At timing tk5, the jackpot prediction animation is currently running for the 397th game round. This jackpot prediction animation is normally scheduled to continue until timing tk8, when the 397th game round ends. However, it is canceled (deactivated) when the ceiling reach confirmation animation is executed. Therefore, the jackpot prediction animation is canceled (deactivated) at a timing prior to tk8, specifically at timing tk6, during the confirmation display for the 396th game round.

At timing tk7, the number of reserved balls related to the first operating port 91A decreases from "4" to "3" as the 397th game round begins after the special game state ends. At timing tk8, the number of reserved balls related to the first operating port 91A decreases from "3" to "2" as the 398th game round begins after the special game state ends. At timing tk9, the number of reserved balls related to the first operating port 91A decreases from "2" to "1" as the 399th game round begins after the special game state ends. Then, at timing tk10, the number of reserved balls related to the first operating port 91A decreases from "1" to "0" as the 400th game round begins after the special game state ends. This 400th game round is the round in which the ceiling is reached, and at timing tk11, when this game round ends, the ceiling reach confirmation演出 and launch stop indication end, and the game transitions to the normal game state (4th normal game state) corresponding to high-frequency support mode A.

According to the configuration shown in this embodiment, if the game progresses without a jackpot result, which is the trigger for transitioning to the special game state (open/close execution mode), the game transitions to the normal game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode (specifically, high-frequency support mode A) when the number of game executions after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling reached). In the high-frequency support mode, the electric mechanism 93A attached to the second operation port 92A frequently opens (receives balls), increasing the frequency of balls entering the second operation port 92A and suppressing further investment. Such a configuration is preferable for improving the soundness of the game.

Here, the judgment based on ball entry into the second operating port 92A is given preferential treatment to the player compared to the judgment based on ball entry into the first operating port 91A. In other words, the benefit of reaching the ceiling is enhanced by transitioning to the high-frequency support mode and having the ball enter the second operating port 92A → judgment. In such a configuration, if a jackpot result occurs just before reaching the ceiling, the player will not be able to enjoy this benefit. Therefore, it is assumed that players who expect to reach the ceiling will play the game expecting that a jackpot result will not occur at least just before reaching the ceiling. In particular, in the configuration shown in this feature, whether or not a transition to the normal game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode will occur due to reaching the ceiling is determined in advance (pre-determined), and based on the result of that determination, a judgment is made before the game round in which the ceiling will be reached, and if it is determined that the transition will occur, an animation indicating the transition to the normal game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode will be executed before the game round in which the ceiling will be reached. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress excessive tension just before reaching the ceiling and give a sense of security to players who expect to reach the ceiling. This is desirable in terms of improving player satisfaction and further increasing interest in the game.

As shown in this embodiment, if the system is configured to determine whether a transition to the normal game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode occurs when the number of stored pending information reaches the number of remaining spins until the ceiling is reached, the increase in control load caused by the implementation of special effects can be suppressed. For example, compared to a configuration that determines whether the above transition occurs each time pending information is added, the control load can be suitably reduced. Furthermore, as shown in this embodiment, configuring the system to determine whether the above transition occurs when pending information is added is also preferable for promptly initiating special effects.

In a configuration where the determination based on ball entry into the second operating port 92A, to which the electric mechanism 93A is attached, is given preferential treatment over the determination based on ball entry into the first operating port 91A, it cannot be ruled out that even after the ceiling has been confirmed in advance, game balls may be launched, resulting in further ball entry into the first operating port 91A. If hold information is acquired through such ball entry, the player may not be able to effectively enjoy the benefits of reaching the ceiling. This is a concern as it could significantly reduce the player's motivation to play. Therefore, if the system is configured so that the ceiling-indicating animation continues at least until the ceiling is reached, the above-mentioned inconvenience can be effectively suppressed, such as the animation being missed.

<Variation 1>
In the 18th embodiment described above, if reaching the ceiling is confirmed in a game round prior to the game round in which the ceiling is reached, a ceiling reach confirmation animation is performed to inform the player that the ceiling has been reached. However, the system is not limited to this. Alternatively, if a ceiling reach suggestion animation occurs in a game round prior to the game round in which the ceiling is reached (but within the maximum number of reserved balls that can be stored), the system can be configured to indicate that reaching the ceiling is highly likely (or possible). In this case, the system can be configured to selectively execute one of several animations with different expectations of reaching the ceiling. In other words, even if some of the reserved balls that are secured for reaching the ceiling include those corresponding to a big win, the system can be configured to execute an animation that indicates that reaching the ceiling is highly likely.

<Modified Example 2>
As shown in the 18th embodiment above, in a configuration where reaching the ceiling transitions to a normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A, changing from a pattern where the game rounds related to the first operation port 91A are the main focus to a pattern where the game rounds related to the second operation port 92A are the main focus, there is a possibility that the remaining reserved balls related to the first operation port 91A will be consumed even after transitioning to a normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A. If such remaining reserved balls include those corresponding to a jackpot result, the player is less likely to fully enjoy the benefits of reaching the ceiling. In light of these circumstances, when deciding whether or not to execute the ceiling reach confirmation演出 (performance/animation), it is possible to realize a practically preferable configuration by determining whether or not the game rounds related to the first operation port 91A executed after transitioning to high-frequency support mode A include those corresponding to a jackpot result, and if those include those corresponding to a jackpot result, the ceiling reach confirmation演出 (performance/animation) is avoided. Alternatively, when deciding whether or not to execute the ceiling reach confirmation演出 (performance/animation) instead of this configuration, it is also possible to configure the system to determine whether or not the game rounds related to the first operation port 91A executed after transitioning to high-frequency support mode A include a jackpot result corresponding to the unfavorable jackpot result, 3R jackpot result A, and to avoid the ceiling reach confirmation演出 if a result corresponding to 3R jackpot result A is included. Incidentally, in such a configuration, it is preferable to configure the system so that the ceiling reach confirmation演出 can be executed if the game rounds related to the first operation port 91A executed after transitioning to high-frequency support mode A include a jackpot result corresponding to the favorable jackpot result, 3R jackpot result B.

<Example 3>
In the 18th embodiment described above, the configuration allows the ceiling reach confirmation animation to start when the reserve for reaching the ceiling is acquired. However, the timing of the start of the ceiling reach confirmation animation can be arbitrarily changed as long as it is after the decision to execute the ceiling reach confirmation animation has been made. For example, the configuration may be such that the ceiling reach confirmation animation starts in conjunction with the start of the game round that is executed after the reserve for reaching the ceiling has been secured (for example, the next game round).

<Modification 4>
In the 18th embodiment described above, if the ceiling reach confirmation sequence starts during the jackpot announcement sequence, the jackpot announcement sequence is canceled (stopped) midway through. However, it is not limited to this, and it is also possible to configure the system so that the jackpot announcement sequence is not canceled (stopped) midway through if the ceiling reach confirmation sequence starts during the jackpot announcement sequence.

Furthermore, while the timing for canceling the jackpot notification animation is set to coincide with the confirmation display during the game round, the timing of cancellation is arbitrary. For example, it is possible to configure the system to cancel (stop) the jackpot notification animation at the start of the ceiling reach confirmation animation.

<Example 5>
In the 18th embodiment described above, the probability of obtaining a jackpot result corresponding to transitioning to high probability mode (3R jackpot result B) in the lottery based on entry into the first operating port 91A is set to 50%, and the probability of obtaining a jackpot result corresponding to transitioning to high probability mode (6R jackpot result B) in the lottery based on entry into the second operating port 92A is set to 80%. In other words, a difference is made so that the lottery based on entry into the second operating port 92A is more advantageous than the lottery based on entry into the first operating port 91A in terms of two elements: the probability of transitioning to high probability mode and the number of prize balls in the special game state (open/close execution mode). The specific configuration is arbitrary, as long as the player's advantage can be increased by reaching the ceiling. For example, it is also possible to configure the system so that there is no difference in the advantage of one of the two elements (probability of entering high probability mode and number of prize balls).

<Modification 6>
In the 18th embodiment described above, the system is configured to initiate a notification (suggestion to stop launching) that the launch of game balls should be suspended when the number of balls held to reach the ceiling is secured. However, this notification function can be omitted.

<Example 7>
In a system where the outcome of the draw is indicated by a "reach" display, there is a concern that the effect of the reach display being a so-called false alarm will not be effectively achieved once the ceiling reach confirmation animation is started. Taking this into consideration, it is also possible to configure the system so that even if the ceiling reach is confirmed, the ceiling reach confirmation animation is refrained from being shown if a reach display is shown in any of the game rounds played before the ceiling is reached.

<Difference 8>
In a configuration where the outcome of the win/loss lottery can be indicated by a super reach display that has a high probability of resulting in a big win, there is concern that the execution of a super reach display with a high probability of result during the ceiling reach confirmation performance will unnecessarily heighten the player's anxiety. This is expected to be a factor that reduces the player's satisfaction. Therefore, when the ceiling reach is confirmed and the ceiling reach confirmation performance is executed, the manner of the super reach display executed during the ceiling reach confirmation performance can be changed (downgraded) from a display manner with a high probability of result (e.g., super reach C) to a display manner with a low probability of result (super reach A), thereby suitably suppressing the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience. Furthermore, when the ceiling reach is confirmed and the ceiling reach confirmation performance is executed, it is also possible to change (downgrade) the super reach display executed during the ceiling reach confirmation performance to a normal reach, which is a display manner with an even lower probability of result.

<Other Embodiments>
Furthermore, the implementation is not limited to the descriptions of each embodiment described above, and may be carried out as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the above embodiments, or some or all of them may be applied to each of the above embodiments in combination. In addition, it is possible to arbitrarily combine all or some of the various configurations shown in each of the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration consisting of a combination of embodiments, or some or all of them may be applied in combination.

(1) In the above embodiments, the variable display time table referenced in the first normal game state and the variable display time table referenced in the fourth normal game state were common. However, the variable display time table referenced in the first normal game state and the variable display time table referenced in the fourth normal game state may be provided separately. That is, the range and breakdown of the variable display time set in the first normal game state and the range and breakdown of the variable display time set in the fourth normal game state may be different.

(2) In each of the above embodiments, if the electric mechanism 93 is in the open state when switching from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode, the electric mechanism 93 is forcibly switched to the closed state to prevent further winnings into the second operating port 92. To prevent further winnings into the second operating port 92 after switching to the low-frequency support mode, it is also possible to configure the system to switch from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode before the game round that triggers the switch (the game round in which the termination criterion is reached) ends. Specifically, it is possible to configure the system to switch from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode at a predetermined timing during the variation display in the game round in which the termination criterion is reached, or to configure the system to switch from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode at the timing when the confirmation display begins in the game round in which the termination criterion is reached.

(3) In a configuration where a special loss occurs in the lottery based on winning entries into the first and second operating ports 91 and 92, it is possible to differentiate the probability of a special loss based on winning entries into the first operating port 91 from the probability of a special loss based on winning entries into the second operating port. For example, the probability of a special loss based on winning entries into the first operating port 91 may be lower than the probability of a special loss based on winning entries into the second operating port, or the probability of a special loss based on winning entries into the first operating port 91 may be higher than the probability of a special loss based on winning entries into the second operating port.

(4) If the ceiling is reached during the high-frequency support mode triggered by a special miss, the game transitions from the game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode triggered by a special miss (e.g., the 4th normal game state) to the game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode (e.g., the 1st normal game state) based on reaching the termination criteria number of spins, and then transitions to the game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode. However, whether or not to include the game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode in this way is optional. For example, if the ceiling is reached during the high-frequency support mode triggered by a special miss, it is also possible to configure the game to shift from the game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode triggered by a special miss (e.g., the 4th normal game state) to the game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode triggered by reaching the ceiling (e.g., the 4th normal game state) based on reaching the termination criteria number of spins. In other words, if the ceiling is reached during a high-frequency support mode triggered by a special miss, it is possible to configure the system to continue the high-frequency support mode game state without intervening with a low-frequency support mode game state (for example, the first normal game state) when the termination criteria number of spins is reached.

(5) If a special miss occurs during a game round that would otherwise reach the ceiling, the system may be configured to transition to high-frequency support mode upon reaching the ceiling (a configuration that prioritizes reaching the ceiling), or it may be configured to transition to high-frequency support mode upon a special miss (a configuration that prioritizes special misses).

(6) In the above embodiments, the game count counter is updated regardless of whether a game round related to the first operation port 91 or a game round related to the second operation port 92 is executed. However, the system is not limited to this configuration. It is also possible to configure the system so that the game count counter is updated when a game round related to the first operation port 91 is executed, but not when a game round related to the second operation port 92 is executed. Furthermore, it is also possible to configure the system so that the game count counter is updated when a game round related to the second operation port 92 is executed, but not when a game round related to the first operation port 91 is executed.

(7) In the above embodiments, when the value of the game count counter reaches its upper limit (ceiling), the game count by the game count counter begins after the high-frequency support mode A, triggered by reaching the ceiling, has ended. However, the system is not limited to this configuration. For example, when the value of the game count counter reaches its upper limit (ceiling), it is also possible to configure the system so that the game count by the game count counter begins from the game immediately following the ceiling.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, the game count counter is configured to be updated (subtracted by "1") at the start of each game round. However, the timing of the game count counter update is arbitrary. For example, it is also possible to configure the game count counter to be updated (subtracted by "1") at the timing when the confirmation display is executed or when each game round ends.

(9) In each of the above embodiments, the base (the ratio of prize balls to the number of game balls launched) was set so that the number of balls held would slightly decrease in either High Frequency Support Mode A or High Frequency Support Mode B, but it is not limited to this. It is also possible to set the base so that the number of balls held would slightly increase in at least one of the support modes.

(10) The placement of the variable prize-winning device 83 in the game area PE is arbitrary. For example, if the game ball flow paths in the game area PE include a left route that bypasses the variable display unit 85 located in the center of the game board 80a from the left, and a right route that bypasses it from the right, the variable prize-winning device 83 may be placed on one of the routes, and the path of game balls launched on the other route may be restricted so that they cannot reach the variable prize-winning device 83.

(11) In the above embodiments, the display of changing patterns on the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the display of changing patterns on the pattern display device 95 are initiated based on the win/loss lottery (determination process) performed in the main control device 162. However, the configuration is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the display of changing patterns on the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the display of changing patterns on the pattern display device 95 to begin prior to the win/loss lottery (determination process) in the main control device 162.

(12) The present invention can also be applied to other types of pachinko machines different from the embodiments described above, such as pachinko machines in which an electric mechanism opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines in which a right is generated and a jackpot is won when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines equipped with other mechanisms, arrangement ball machines, mahjong ball machines, and other gaming machines.

Furthermore, this invention can also be applied to non-paper-scissors gaming machines, such as slot machines equipped with multiple reels each bearing multiple symbols circumferentially. The reels begin rotating upon insertion of a medal and operation of a start lever. After the reels stop due to operation of a stop switch, if a specific symbol or combination of symbols appears on an active line visible through the display window, the player is awarded a bonus, such as a medal payout.

Furthermore, the present invention can also be applied to gaming machines that combine pachinko and slot machines, in which the gaming machine body, supported by an outer frame in an openable and closable manner, is equipped with a storage unit and a take-up device, and the reels start rotating when a start lever is operated after a predetermined number of gaming balls stored in the storage unit have been taken in by the take-up device.

<Regarding the group of inventions extracted from each of the above embodiments>
The following describes the features of the group of inventions extracted from each of the embodiments described above, showing their effects and other aspects as necessary. For ease of understanding, corresponding configurations in the above embodiments will be indicated in parentheses as appropriate, but the invention is not limited to these specific configurations indicated in parentheses.

<Characteristics Group A>
The following Group A features were developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and challenges described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Feature A1. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured such that the frequency at which the variable mechanism enters the acceptance state differs.
A first transition means that, when the determination by the determination means results in a determination corresponding to the first determination information, transitions to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode via the special game state,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a second transition means that, when the determination by the determination means results in a determination corresponding to the second determination information, transitions to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the third switching mode without going through the special gaming state.

As shown in this feature, if the switching control mode is changed via a special game state when the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (jackpot result), and the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state when the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result), the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher switching control mode can be diversified, contributing to the suppression of monotony in gameplay. Furthermore, in the configuration shown in this feature, when switching to a higher switching control mode, the frequency at which the variable mechanism enters the acceptance state will differ depending on whether the trigger is the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information or the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information. For example, by favoring the switching control mode when the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained, it is possible to suppress excessive investment before transitioning to the special game state (suppressing a decrease in the desire to play), or by favoring the switching control mode when the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained, the contrast in gameplay can be strengthened. In particular, by configuring the system to quickly switch to the third switching mode when the judgment result corresponds to a second judgment information that does not trigger a large payout (a trigger for transitioning to a special game state), player satisfaction can be improved.

Furthermore, it is also possible to designate the "First Judgment Information" described in this feature as "Winning Information" and the "Second Judgment Information" as "Special Non-Winning Information."

Feature A2. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured such that the frequency at which the variable mechanism enters the acceptance state differs.
As the predetermined game state,
A first game state corresponding to the first switching mode (for example, a first normal game state),
A second game state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, a second/third normal game state),
A third game state (for example, a fourth normal game state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided.
A first transition means that, when a judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the first game state, transitions to the second game state via the special game state,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a second transition means that, when a judgment result (special miss result) corresponding to the second judgment information occurs in the first gaming state, transitions to the third gaming state without going through the special gaming state.

As shown in this feature, if the switching control mode is changed via a special game state when the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (jackpot result), and the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state when the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result), the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher switching control mode can be diversified, contributing to the suppression of monotony in gameplay. Furthermore, in the configuration shown in this feature, when switching to a higher switching control mode, the frequency at which the variable mechanism enters the acceptance state will differ depending on whether the trigger is the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information or the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information. For example, by favoring the switching control mode when the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained, it is possible to suppress excessive investment before transitioning to the special game state (suppressing a decrease in the desire to play), or by favoring the switching control mode when the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained, the contrast in gameplay can be strengthened. In particular, by configuring the system to quickly switch to the third game state (third switching mode) when the judgment result corresponds to a second judgment information that does not trigger a large payout (a trigger for transitioning to a special game state), player satisfaction can be improved.

Furthermore, it is also possible to designate the "First Judgment Information" described in this feature as "Winning Information" and the "Second Judgment Information" as "Special Non-Winning Information."

Feature A3. The determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination by the determination means is provided as a low-probability mode in which the probability of obtaining a determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively low, and a high-probability mode in which the probability of obtaining a determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively high.
In both the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode, the probability of obtaining a determination result corresponding to the second determination information by the determination means is the same.
The first game state corresponds to the first switching mode and the low probability mode,
The gaming machine according to feature A2, characterized in that the third gaming state corresponds to the third switching mode and the low probability mode.

If the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained during the first game state, the game will transition to the third game state without going through the special game state. In this case, the judgment mode remains the low probability mode, but the switching control mode changes from the first switching mode to the third switching mode. This makes it possible to aim for the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information while minimizing investment, thus providing a kind of player relief function. Since this relief function is activated without going through the special game state as described above, the time required for this function to be activated can be minimized, thus reducing the impression to the player that the game is being unnecessarily delayed.

Feature A4. A gaming machine according to any one of Feature A1 to Feature A3, characterized in that the transition period by the second transition means is configured to be shorter than the transition period by the first transition means.

According to the configuration described in this feature, when the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information, the switching control mode is promptly changed to the third switching mode, thereby reducing the time lag before the player can enjoy the benefits of the rescue function described above. This is desirable in suppressing a decline in the player's motivation to play, as they are aiming for the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (transition to a special game state).

Feature A5. The control means for the variable mechanism is configured to switch the variable mechanism to the acceptance state when it wins a lottery (support lottery) based on the passing of a game ball through a passage section (e.g., through gate 84) provided in the game area.
The second switching mode is configured such that the probability of winning in the lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode.
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, characterized in that the third switching mode is configured such that the probability of winning in the lottery is the same as in the first switching mode, but the time required from winning in the lottery until the acceptance state is reached is shortened.

As shown in this feature, when switching from the first switching mode to the second switching mode, the probability of winning in the lottery based on passage through the passage section is changed. When switching from the first switching mode to the third switching mode, the time required from winning to acceptance is shortened without changing the probability of winning. By using different parameters to differentiate between the second and third switching modes in this way, the technical concept shown in Feature A1, etc., can be suitably realized.

Feature A6. The gaming machine according to any one of Features A1 to A5, characterized in that the second switching mode is configured such that the ratio of the number of game balls dispensed by the dispensing means to the number of game balls launched by the game ball launching means is higher than that of the third switching mode.

According to Feature A6, in the second switching mode, compared to the third switching mode, the ratio of the number of game balls dispensed by the payout mechanism to the number of game balls launched—that is, the value obtained by dividing the number of game balls dispensed by the number of game balls launched (hereinafter referred to as the "base")—becomes higher, making it possible to play while suppressing the decrease in the number of game balls held. In other words, if the judgment result corresponds to the first judgment information and the game transitions to the second switching mode via the special game state, there is a chance to win a large number of game balls. In contrast, in the third switching mode, although the above base is more favorable than in the first switching mode, the degree is kept lower than in the second switching mode, thus preventing the relief function from becoming excessive. With this configuration, the contrast of the game can be enhanced by using multiple switching modes in combination.

Feature A7. The gaming machine according to any one of Features A1 to A5, characterized in that the third switching mode is configured such that the ratio of the number of game balls dispensed by the dispensing means to the number of game balls launched by the game ball launching means is higher than that of the second switching mode.

According to Feature A7, by switching to the third switching mode, the ratio of the number of game balls dispensed by the dispensing mechanism to the number of game balls launched—that is, the value obtained by dividing the number of game balls dispensed by the number of game balls launched (hereinafter referred to as the "base")—becomes higher compared to the second switching mode. This makes it possible to continue playing while suppressing the decrease in the number of game balls held. In other words, if the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information and the system transitions to the third switching mode without going through the special game state, a large payout cannot be expected at that point. However, it is possible to wait for an opportunity to obtain a large payout corresponding to the judgment result of the first judgment information while significantly suppressing the decrease in the number of game balls held. With such a configuration, the soundness of the game can be suitably improved.

Feature A8. A gaming machine according to any one of Features A1 to A7, characterized in that, when the number of game rounds played in the predetermined game state corresponding to the third switching mode reaches the termination criterion number (e.g., 40 rounds) without reaching the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, the machine transitions to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode.

By setting an upper limit (termination threshold) on the number of games played in a predetermined game state corresponding to the third switching mode, a return from the third switching mode to the first switching mode becomes possible, effectively suppressing the decrease in tension during gameplay after entering the third switching mode.

Feature A9. The determination means provides a determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is made, which includes a low probability mode in which the probability of obtaining a determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of obtaining a determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively high.
In both the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode, the probability of obtaining a determination result corresponding to the second determination information by the determination means is the same.
As the predetermined game state,
A first game state (for example, a first normal game state) corresponding to the first switching mode and the low probability mode,
A second game state (for example, a third normal game state) corresponding to the second switching mode and the low probability mode,
A third game state (for example, a fourth normal game state) corresponding to the third switching mode and the low probability mode is provided.
The first transition means is configured to transition to the second game state via the special game state when the judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the first game state.
The second transition means is configured to transition to the third game state without going through the special game state if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is obtained in the first game state.
A third transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the third normal game state to the first normal game state when the number of game rounds in the second game state reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 40 rounds) without the number of rounds of game play in the second game state reaching the determination result corresponding to the first determination information,
A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8, characterized by having a fourth transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state when the number of game rounds executed in the third gaming state reaches the termination criterion number (for example, 40 rounds) without the number of game rounds executed in the third gaming state reaching the determination result corresponding to the first determination information.

According to this feature, an upper limit (termination threshold) is set for the number of games played in the third game state, and upon reaching this limit, a downgrade (return) from the third game state to the first game state may occur. This configuration effectively suppresses the decrease in tension during gameplay after transitioning to the third game state.

Furthermore, termination criteria are set for both the second and third game states. By providing transition routes to limited advantageous states with upper limits on the number of plays, either via or without a special game state, the game can be diversified. In this configuration, it is preferable to configure the base in the third switching mode such that the difference between the base in the second switching mode and the base in the first switching mode is smaller.

Feature A10. The gaming machine according to Feature A9, characterized in that it has means for setting the number of termination criteria, which is the criterion for transitioning to the first game state by the fourth transition means, to be less than the number of termination criteria, which is the criterion for transitioning to the first game state by the third transition means.

As shown in this feature, setting the number of rounds required to terminate the third game state to be less than the number of rounds required to terminate the second game state is advantageous in increasing the frequency of transitions to the third game state and thus increasing the frequency of transitions between game states. This is desirable in suppressing monotony in the game.

Feature A11. The gaming machine according to Feature A9, characterized in that it has means for setting the termination criterion number, which is the criterion for transitioning to the first game state by the fourth transition means, to be the same number as the termination criterion number, which is the criterion for transitioning to the first game state by the third transition means.

As shown in this feature, by aligning the number of turns required to terminate the third game state with the number of turns required to terminate the second game state, it is possible to make it appear as if there are multiple routes to transition to the same game state (second game state, third game state). This is desirable in achieving diversification of gameplay while avoiding causing confusion for players.

Feature A12. A fifth transition means that, in the first game state, when the number of game rounds after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit without the result corresponding to the first judgment information, transitions to the third game state.
When the system transitions to the third game state by the fifth transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the third game state reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 400 rounds) without reaching the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, the system is further equipped with a sixth transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state during the time-saving mode), which transitions the system to the first game state.
The gaming machine according to any one of features A9 to A11, characterized in that the sixth transition means sets the number of termination criteria, which is the criterion for transitioning to the first game state, to be greater than the number of termination criteria, which is the criterion for transitioning to the first game state, by the fourth transition means.

According to the configuration described in this feature, if a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained in the first game state, or if the number of game rounds reached the upper limit (ceiling) during the first game state, the game transitions to the third game state corresponding to the third switching mode. In this way, by setting the trigger for transitioning to the third game state as a judgment result that does not correspond to transitioning to a special game state or reaching the ceiling, and by providing relief to the player through the third game state, it is possible to contribute to curbing excessive investment. In particular, by setting the termination criterion number set when reaching the ceiling relatively high and the termination criterion number set when the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is relatively low, it is possible to suitably achieve both diversification of gameplay and enhancement of the relief function.

Feature A13. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured such that the frequency at which the variable mechanism enters the acceptance state differs.
As the predetermined game state,
A first game state corresponding to the first switching mode (for example, a first normal game state),
A second game state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, a second/third normal game state),
A third game state (for example, a fourth normal game state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided.
A first transition means that, when a judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the first game state, transitions to the second game state via the special game state,
A second transition means that, when a judgment result (special loss result) corresponding to the second judgment information occurs in the first game state, transitions to the third game state without going through the special game state,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for transitioning to the third gaming state when, in the first gaming state, the number of game rounds played after the end of the special gaming state reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information.

As shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (jackpot result) is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via a special game state. If the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is obtained, or if the number of game plays reaches the maximum number (ceiling reached) during the first game state, the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state. This configuration diversifies the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher switching control mode, contributing to the suppression of gameplay monotony. Furthermore, in the configuration shown in this feature, when switching to a higher switching control mode, the frequency at which the variable mechanism enters the acceptance state differs depending on whether the trigger is a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information, or reaching the ceiling. This enables further diversification of gameplay. In particular, by making the trigger for transitioning to the third game state a judgment result that does not correspond to transitioning to the special game state or reaching the ceiling, and providing relief to the player in the third game state, it is possible to contribute to suppressing excessive investment.

Furthermore, it is also possible to designate the "First Judgment Information" described in this feature as "Winning Information" and the "Second Judgment Information" as "Special Non-Winning Information."

Feature A14. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured such that the frequency at which the variable mechanism enters the acceptance state differs.
As the predetermined game state,
A first game state corresponding to the first switching mode (for example, a first normal game state),
A second game state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, a second/third normal game state),
A third game state (for example, a fourth normal game state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided.
A means for transitioning to the second game state via the special game state when a judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the first game state,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for transitioning to the third gaming state when, in the first gaming state, the number of game rounds played after the end of the special gaming state reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information.

As shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (jackpot result) is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via a special game state. If the number of game rounds reached the upper limit (ceiling reached) during the first game state, the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state. This configuration diversifies the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher switching control mode, contributing to the suppression of gameplay monotony. Furthermore, in the configuration shown in this feature, when switching to a higher switching control mode, the frequency at which the variable mechanism enters the acceptance state differs depending on whether the trigger is a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information or reaching the ceiling. This enables further diversification of gameplay. In particular, by setting the trigger for transitioning to the third game state as reaching the ceiling and providing relief to the player in the third game state, it is possible to contribute to suppressing excessive investment.

Furthermore, it is also possible to designate the "First Judgment Information" described in this feature as "Winning Information" and the "Second Judgment Information" as "Special Non-Winning Information."

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in features A1 to A12 above may also be applied to features A13 to A14.

<Characteristics Group B>
The following group of features B were developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and issues described above state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Feature B1. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. The system includes a game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that executes the opening and closing process of the variable prize entry device 83 using the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and high-frequency switching modes (high-frequency support modes A and B) that are set to have a longer period of time during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state than in the low-frequency switching mode.
The predetermined game states include a first type of game state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode (for example, a first normal game state) and a second type of game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode (for example, a second normal game state, a third normal game state, and a fourth normal game state).
When a judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the first type of game state, a first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the second normal game state or the third normal game state triggered by a jackpot result) is provided to transition to the second type of game state via the special game state,
When the first type of game state results in a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result), a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state triggered by the special miss result) is provided to transition to the second type of game state without going through the special game state.
After transitioning to the second type of game state by the second transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the second type of game state reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 40 rounds) without a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, a third transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the consumption of time-saving features) is provided to transition to the first type of game state.
The system includes a fourth transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions to the fourth normal game state when the ceiling is reached) which causes the system to transition to the second type of game state without going through the special game state if the number of game rounds played after the special game state ends does not result in a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information and reaches the upper limit (ceiling: for example, 400 rounds),
The fourth transition means is configured to delay the transition to the second type of game state triggered by reaching the upper limit number of game rounds, at least until the number of game rounds in the second type of game state reaches the termination criterion number, when the number of game rounds after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit number during the second type of game state transitioned by the second transition means.

According to Feature B1, even if the trigger for transitioning to the special game state (the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information) is not met and the game continues, the game may transition to the second type of game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode due to the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information or reaching the upper limit of the number of games played after the special game state ends (reaching the ceiling). Entering the high-frequency switching mode increases the frequency of balls entering the starting ball entry area, thus reducing investment. Such a configuration is desirable in terms of improving the soundness of the game. However, as mentioned above, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information and reaching the ceiling are used together as triggers for transitioning to the second type of game state, the following concerns arise. Specifically, if the ceiling is reached during the second type of game state and the ceiling is invalidated, or if the second type of game state is forcibly terminated due to the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information, some of the benefits that the player would have originally enjoyed will be lost, and there are concerns that the player's satisfaction will decrease significantly. In this regard, according to the configuration described in this feature, if the ceiling is reached during the Type 2 game state, the transition to the Type 2 game state triggered by reaching the ceiling will be delayed until at least the number of game rounds played in that Type 2 game state reaches the termination threshold. This eliminates the above concerns and contributes to improving player satisfaction.

Furthermore, the configuration described in this feature is a game machine comprising: a game board (game board 80a) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed; a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation; and a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable prize entry device 83) provided in the game area, wherein a special information acquisition means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) which is the ball entry section. A function to perform the following: an acquisition information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means; a determination means (a function to perform lottery processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result); and a game rotation operation (pictures on the operation opening display units D1 and D2) prior to or based on the determination by the determination means. The system includes a game round control means (a function that executes game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (operation port display units D1, D2) so that the game round operation is performed for each game round according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means, and the predetermined judgment information includes first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result), and the judgment result by the judgment means corresponds to the first judgment information Based on the corresponding determination result and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state), a variable ball entry unit (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry unit that can switch between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the accepting state, and when the game state is transitioned, the variable The system includes a control means for a variable ball entry section that switches the ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state (a function that executes opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162), a variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can switch between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the accepting state, and a control means for a variable mechanism that controls the variable mechanism (a function that executes processing for electric device support in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162), and the first switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism is a first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the first A second type switching mode (high-frequency support mode) is provided, in which the period during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state is longer than in the type switching mode. When a judgment result (special miss result) corresponding to the second judgment information occurs in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first type switching mode, a first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state triggered by the special miss result) is provided, which transitions to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second type switching mode without going through the special game state. The first transition means transitions the predetermined game state corresponding to the first type switching mode When transitioning to a game state, a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from a fourth normal game state to a first normal game state triggered by the consumption of time-saving features) transitions to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first type switching mode when the number of game rounds in the predetermined game state reaches the termination threshold number (e.g., 40 rounds) without reaching the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, and transitions to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second type switching mode when the number of game rounds after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit number (ceiling: e.g., 400 rounds) without reaching the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information. The gaming machine also includes a third transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state upon reaching the ceiling), and the third transition means is configured to delay the transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second type switching mode, triggered by reaching the upper limit number of game rounds, until at least the number of game rounds in the predetermined game state reaches the termination criterion number.

Feature B2. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. The system includes a game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that executes the opening and closing process of the variable prize entry device 83 using the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured such that the frequency at which the variable mechanism enters the acceptance state differs.
The predetermined game states include a first game state corresponding to the first switching mode (for example, a first normal game state), a second game state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, a second/third normal game state), and a third game state corresponding to the third switching mode (for example, a fourth normal game state).
When a judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the first game state, a first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the second normal game state or the third normal game state triggered by a jackpot result) is provided to transition to the second game state via the special game state,
When the first game state results in a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (a special miss result), a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state triggered by the special miss result) is provided to transition to the third game state without going through the special game state,
In the third game state transitioned by the second transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the third game state reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 40 rounds) without reaching the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, the third transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the completion of the time-saving feature) transitions to the first game state.
The system includes a fourth transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions to the fourth normal game state when the ceiling is reached) which causes the system to transition to the third game state without going through the special game state if the number of game rounds played after the special game state ends does not result in a judgment corresponding to the first judgment information and reaches the upper limit (ceiling: for example, 400 rounds),
The fourth transition means is configured to delay the transition to the third game state triggered by reaching the upper limit number of game rounds, at least until the number of game rounds in the third game state reaches the termination criterion number, when the number of game rounds after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit number during the transition to the third game state by the second transition means.

According to Feature B2, even if the trigger for transitioning to the special game state (the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information) is not met and the game continues, the game may transition to the third game state corresponding to the third switching mode due to the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information or reaching the maximum number of plays after the special game state ends (reaching the ceiling). Entering the third switching mode increases the frequency of balls entering the starting ball entry area, thus reducing investment. Such a configuration is desirable in order to improve the soundness of the game. However, as mentioned above, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information and reaching the ceiling are used in combination as triggers for transitioning to the third game state, the following concerns arise. That is, if the ceiling is reached during the third game state and the ceiling is invalidated, or if the third game state is forcibly terminated due to the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information, it is feared that some of the benefits that the player would have originally enjoyed will be lost, and the player's satisfaction will decrease significantly. In this regard, according to the configuration described in this feature, if the ceiling is reached during the third game state, the transition to the third game state triggered by reaching the ceiling will be delayed until at least the number of game rounds played in that third game state reaches the termination threshold. This eliminates the above concerns and contributes to improving player satisfaction.

Feature B3. The gaming machine according to Feature B2, characterized in that the switching mode of the variable mechanism when transitioning to the third game state by the fourth transition means is configured to be the same as the switching mode of the variable mechanism when transitioning to the third game state by the second transition means.

As shown in Feature B2, when the ceiling is reached during the third game state and the game transitions to the third game state triggered by reaching the ceiling, the switching behavior of the variable mechanism can be made identical to prevent the benefits of reaching the ceiling from being less significant compared to the previous behavior.

Feature B4. The termination criterion count is the first termination criterion count.
In the third game state transitioned by the fourth transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the third game state does not result in a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and reaches the second termination criterion round (for example, 400 rounds), the system is provided with a fifth transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the completion of the time-saving feature),
The gaming machine according to feature B2 or feature B3, characterized in that the first termination criterion count is set to be less than the second termination criterion count.

If the system has the delay function shown in Feature B2, it is anticipated that if the benefits of reaching the ceiling end immediately after a significant delay, it could diminish the player's motivation to play. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by setting the first termination criterion count < the second termination criterion count, excessive delays can be suppressed, and the impression that the benefits after reaching the ceiling are insignificant can be avoided.

Feature B5. The fourth transition means is configured such that, if the number of game rounds played after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit during the third game state transitioned by the second transition means, it transitions to the third game state triggered by the third transition means reaching the termination criterion number, after which the game transition is triggered by the third transition means to the first game state, and then transitions to the third game state triggered by the reaching of the upper limit. This is the gaming machine according to any one of Features B2 to B4.

As shown in this feature, if the ceiling is reached during the third game state, the system is configured to transition from the third game state to the first game state and then return to the third game state. This adds emphasis to the rhythm of the game and helps prevent it from becoming monotonous.

Feature B6. The acquired information storage means is capable of storing multiple pieces of the special information.
The fourth transition means is configured such that, if the number of game rounds played after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit during the third game state transitioned by the second transition means, it transitions to the third game state triggered by the third transition means when the number of game rounds played in the third game state reaches the termination criterion count, and then transitions to the third game state triggered by the reaching of the upper limit.
The gaming machine according to any one of features B2 to B4, characterized in that, under circumstances where the transition to the third gaming state by the fourth transition means is delayed, the number of games played during the first gaming state transitioned to by the third transition means is set to be less than the maximum storage limit of special information that can be stored by the acquired information storage means.

As shown in this feature, when the ceiling is reached during the third game state, the system transitions from the third game state to the first game state and then returns to the third game state. This configuration adds emphasis to the rhythm of the game and helps prevent monotony. Furthermore, in a configuration that includes the first game state, the repeated game rounds in the first game state may give the player the impression that the enjoyment of benefits is being unfairly delayed. This impression is particularly strong when the number of stored special information rounds becomes zero due to the intervention of the first game state, interrupting the continuous progression of game rounds. In this regard, by limiting the number of game rounds performed in the intervening first game state to less than the upper limit of stored special information, the interruption of the continuous progression of game rounds upon return to the third game state can be avoided, effectively eliminating the above concern.

Feature B7. The fourth transition means is configured such that, if the number of game rounds played after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit during the third game state transitioned by the second transition means, it transitions to the third game state after the transition by the third transition means triggered by the number of game rounds played in the third game state reaching the termination criterion, and after one game round played in the first game state, it transitions to the third game state triggered by the reaching of the upper limit. This is the configuration of the gaming machine according to any one of Features B2 to B4.

As shown in this feature, when the ceiling is reached during the third game state, the system transitions from the third game state to the first game state and then returns to the third game state. This configuration adds emphasis to the rhythm of the game and helps prevent monotony. Furthermore, in a configuration that includes the first game state, the repeated game rounds in the first game state may give the player the impression that the enjoyment of the benefits is being unfairly delayed. This concern can be effectively addressed by a configuration that returns to the third game state after one game round.

Feature B8. A gaming machine according to any one of Feature B5 to Feature B7, characterized in that it is equipped with a notification means for notifying the player that the transition to the third gaming state is about to occur during the first gaming state, while the transition to the third gaming state is being delayed by the fourth transition means.

Ensuring an opportunity to notify the player that the game is transitioning to the third game state during the first game state is preferable, as it encourages players to focus on each game round during the third game state before the transition to the first game state.

Feature B9. The acquired information storage means is capable of storing multiple pieces of the special information.
The game round control means includes an operation period setting means that can set the operation period of the game round operation according to the number of special pieces of information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The gaming machine according to feature B8, characterized in that the operation period setting means is configured to set a predetermined operation period for game rounds performed during the first game state in which the transition to the third game state is delayed by the fourth transition means, regardless of the number of special information items stored in the acquired information storage means.

As shown in Feature B5, etc., in a configuration that returns to the third game state via the first game state, variations in the operation duration of game-specific actions performed during the first game state can lead to the following problems. Specifically, if the operation duration is relatively short, there may be insufficient time to inform the player of the transition to the third game state. If the operation duration is relatively long, it may give the player the impression that the transition to the third game state is being unfairly delayed. Therefore, as shown in this feature, for game rounds during the first game state where the transition to the third game state is delayed, a predetermined operation duration is set regardless of the number of special information items stored in the acquired information storage means. By making the operation duration constant, the above concerns can be resolved.

Feature B10. The gaming machine according to any one of Features B2 to B4, characterized in that, if the number of game rounds after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit during the third game state transitioned by the second transition means, the machine transitions to the third game state without passing through any other game states after the end of the third game state, triggered by the reaching of the upper limit.

As shown in this feature, by creating a configuration that seamlessly connects the third game state triggered by the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information and the third game state triggered by reaching the ceiling, the two benefits can be combined into one, thereby enhancing the impact.

Feature B11. A gaming machine according to any one of Feature B2 to Feature B10, characterized in that, during the third game state transitioned by the second transition means, the number of game rounds after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit, and while the transition to the third game state by the fourth transition means is delayed, the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the determination result of the first determination information, and the transition to the fourth transition means triggered by reaching the upper limit is invalidated.

As described in this feature, configuring the system so that the transition to the third game state triggered by reaching the ceiling is invalidated when the judgment result corresponds to the first judgment information while the transition to the third game state triggered by reaching the ceiling is imminent is preferable in order to prevent excessive relief functions for the player.

Feature B12. When the number of game rounds played after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling: for example, 400 rounds) without reaching the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, the system is equipped with a special performance execution means capable of executing a special performance indicating that the system will transition to the third game state.
The gaming machine according to any one of features B2 to B11, characterized in that the special performance execution means is configured to execute the special performance in the game round in which the upper limit is reached when the upper limit is reached during the first game state, while not executing the special performance in the game round in which the upper limit is reached when the upper limit is reached when the third game state transitioned to by the second transition means.

If the maximum number of spins (ceiling) is reached during the first game state, a special animation will be performed during that spin, promptly informing the player that the game will transition to the third game state. Conversely, if the maximum number of spins (ceiling) is reached during the third game state, the special animation will be avoided during that spin. In this way, by deliberately omitting the special animation when the transition to the third game state triggered by reaching the ceiling is delayed, it is possible to prevent a decrease in attention to the third game state, which was triggered by the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information, before the end of that game state.

Feature B13. A gaming machine according to any one of Feature B2 to Feature B11, characterized in that, if the upper limit of the number of plays is reached during the third game state transitioned by the second transition means, the machine includes means for notifying the player that the game state will transition to the third game state in a game play session that occurs after the game play session in which the upper limit was reached, and before the game play session that transitions to the third game state triggered by the upper limit being reached by the fourth transition means.

As described in this feature, if the maximum number of spins (ceiling) is reached during the third game state, the player will be notified of the transition to the third game state (ceiling reached) in the game spins before the transition to the third game state, triggered by reaching the ceiling in the game spins executed after the ceiling is reached. This configuration encourages players to expect that the third game state will be effectively extended even in game spins other than those where the ceiling could be reached.

Feature B14. When the number of game rounds played after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling: for example, 400 rounds) without reaching the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, the system is equipped with a special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect indicating that the system will transition to the third game state.
The special performance execution means is configured such that, if the upper limit is reached during the third game state and the number of game rounds played during the third game state is greater than a predetermined number, the special performance is executed in the game round in which the upper limit is reached; on the other hand, if the upper limit is reached during the third game state and the number of game rounds played during the third game state is less than a predetermined number, the special performance is executed in a game round played after the game round in which the upper limit is reached. This is the gaming machine according to any one of features B2 to B11.

If the maximum number of spins (ceiling reached) is reached during the third game state, which is transitioned to based on the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information, the timing of this can affect the player's impression. For example, if the ceiling is reached immediately after the transition, the player might get the impression that the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information was a wasted spin. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the ceiling is reached during the third game state, the timing of the special effect, i.e., the timing of the ceiling reach notification, can be varied according to the number of spins performed during that third game state (the number of spins performed up to that point), thereby eliminating the above concern.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in Features B3 to B14 may be applied to Feature B1.

Incidentally, the technical concepts shown in Group A above may also be applied to Features B1 to B14.

<Characteristics Group C>
The following group C features were developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and issues described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Feature C1. A game board (game board 80aA) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91A, 92A and variable prize entry device 83A) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. The system includes a game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83A) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the system includes a control means for the variable ball entry section that switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state (a function that executes the opening and closing process of the variable prize entry device 83A using the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The aforementioned starting ball entry section is provided with a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92A).
The acquired information storage means includes a first storage means (first operation port retention area Ra) for storing special information acquired based on ball entry into the first starting ball entry section, and a second storage means (second operation port retention area Rb) for storing special information acquired based on ball entry into the second starting ball entry section.
The second storage means is capable of storing multiple pieces of the special information,
The determination result corresponding to the first determination information can occur in either the determination based on the ball entering the first starting ball entry section or the determination based on the ball entering the second starting ball entry section, whereas the determination result corresponding to the second determination information can occur only in the determination based on the ball entering the second starting ball entry section.
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93A) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the second starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) set to make it difficult or impossible to enter the second starting ball entry section, and a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support modes A and B) set to make it easier to enter the second starting ball entry section than in the low-frequency switching mode by making the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state longer than in the low-frequency switching mode.
The predetermined game states include a first type of game state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode (for example, a first normal game state) and a second type of game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode (for example, a second normal game state, a third normal game state, and a fourth normal game state).
When a judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the first type of game state, a first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the second normal game state or the third normal game state triggered by a jackpot result) is provided to transition to the second type of game state via the special game state,
In the Type 2 game state transitioned by the first transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the Type 2 game state reaches the first termination criterion number (for example, 20 rounds) without reaching the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the third normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the time reduction) is provided to transition back to the Type 1 game state.
In the first type of game state, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is obtained, a third transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state triggered by the special miss result) is provided to transition to the second type of game state without going through the special game state,
A gaming machine characterized by having a fourth transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state when the number of game rounds played in the second type gaming state, which has been transitioned to by the third transition means, reaches the second termination criterion number (for example, 20 rounds) without the number of game rounds played in the second type gaming state reaching the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information) and transitioning to the first type gaming state.

According to feature C1, if the judgment result corresponds to the first judgment information in the first type of game state, the game transitions to the second type of game state via a special game state. The second type of game state corresponds to a high-frequency switching mode, and the decrease in the number of balls held is suppressed by increasing the number of balls entering the second starting ball entry section. The second type of game state has a limit on the number of times it can be played, and when the number of game rounds played in the second type of game state reaches the first termination criterion, the game transitions to the first type of game state which corresponds to a low-frequency switching mode. This makes it difficult to enter the second starting ball entry section. Here, the special information obtained based on balls entering the second starting ball entry section is stored by the second storage means, and after transitioning from the second type of game state to the first type of game state, game rounds are executed based on the stored special information. In the remaining game rounds related to the second starting ball entry section, the judgment result may correspond to the second judgment information. If the remaining game rounds result in a judgment corresponding to the second judgment information, the game will quickly transition to the second type of game state without going through the special game state, and the high-frequency switching mode will loop. This loop makes it possible to aim for a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information while minimizing the reduction of the player's remaining balls. By achieving this diversification of gameplay, it is possible to contribute to increasing the player's interest in the game.

Feature C2. A game board (game board 80aA) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91A, 92A and variable prize entry device 83A) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. The system includes a game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83A) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the system includes a control means for the variable ball entry section that switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state (a function that executes the opening and closing process of the variable prize entry device 83A using the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The aforementioned starting ball entry section is provided with a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92A).
The acquired information storage means includes a first storage means (first operation port retention area Ra) for storing special information acquired based on ball entry into the first starting ball entry section, and a second storage means (second operation port retention area Rb) for storing special information acquired based on ball entry into the second starting ball entry section.
The second storage means is capable of storing multiple pieces of the special information,
The determination result corresponding to the first determination information can occur in either the determination based on the ball entering the first starting ball entry section or the determination based on the ball entering the second starting ball entry section, whereas the determination result corresponding to the second determination information can occur only in the determination based on the ball entering the second starting ball entry section.
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93A) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the second starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides the following switching control modes (support modes) for the variable mechanism: a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) set to make it difficult or impossible to enter the second starting ball entry section; a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to make it easier to enter the second starting ball entry section than in the first switching mode by making the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state longer than in the first switching mode; and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to make it easier to enter the second starting ball entry section than in the first switching mode by making the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state longer than in the first switching mode.
The predetermined game states include a first game state corresponding to the first switching mode (for example, a first normal game state), a second game state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, a second/third normal game state), and a third game state corresponding to the third switching mode (for example, a fourth normal game state).
When a judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the first game state, a first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the second normal game state or the third normal game state triggered by a jackpot result) is provided to transition to the second game state via the special game state,
In the second game state transitioned by the first transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the second game state reaches the first termination threshold (for example, 20 rounds) without reaching the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the third normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the completion of the time-saving feature) is provided to transition back to the first game state.
In the first game state, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is obtained, a third transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state triggered by the special miss result) is provided to transition to the third game state without going through the special game state,
A gaming machine characterized by having a fourth transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state when the number of game rounds played in the third gaming state transitioned by the third transition means reaches the second termination criterion number (for example, 20 rounds) without the number of game rounds played in the third gaming state transitioning to the first determination information reaches the determination result corresponding to the first determination information.

According to feature C2, if the judgment result corresponds to the first judgment information in the first game state, the game transitions to the second game state via a special game state. The second game state corresponds to the second switching mode, and the decrease in the number of balls held is suppressed by increasing the number of balls entering the second starting ball entry section. The second game state has a limit on the number of times it can be played, and when the number of game rounds executed in the second game state reaches the first termination criterion, the game transitions to the first game state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode. This makes it difficult to enter the second starting ball entry section. Here, the special information obtained based on balls entering the second starting ball entry section is stored by the second storage means, and after transitioning from the second game state to the first game state, game rounds are executed based on the stored special information. In the remaining game rounds related to the second starting ball entry section, the judgment result may correspond to the second judgment information. If the remaining game rounds result in a judgment corresponding to the second judgment information, the game will transition to the third game state corresponding to the third switching mode without going through the special game state, and the high-frequency switching mode will loop. This loop makes it possible to aim for a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information while minimizing the reduction of the player's remaining balls. By achieving this diversification of gameplay, it is possible to contribute to increasing the player's interest in the game.

Feature C3. A game board (game board 80aA) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91A, 92A and variable prize entry device 83A) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. The system includes a game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83A) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the system includes a control means for the variable ball entry section that switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state (a function that executes the opening and closing process of the variable prize entry device 83A using the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The aforementioned starting ball entry section includes a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91) located in the first flow path (left route) in the game area, and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92) located in the second flow path (right route) in the game area.
The acquired information storage means includes a first storage means (first operation port retention area Ra) for storing special information acquired based on ball entry into the first starting ball entry section, and a second storage means (second operation port retention area Rb) for storing special information acquired based on ball entry into the second starting ball entry section.
The second storage means is capable of storing multiple pieces of the special information,
The determination result corresponding to the first determination information can occur in either the determination based on the ball entering the first starting ball entry section or the determination based on the ball entering the second starting ball entry section, whereas the determination result corresponding to the second determination information can occur only in the determination based on the ball entering the second starting ball entry section.
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93A) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the second starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides the following switching control modes (support modes) for the variable mechanism: a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) set to make it difficult or impossible to enter the second starting ball entry section; a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to make it easier to enter the second starting ball entry section than in the first switching mode by making the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state longer than in the first switching mode; and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to make it easier to enter the second starting ball entry section than in the first switching mode by making the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state longer than in the first switching mode.
The predetermined game states include a first game state corresponding to the first switching mode (for example, a first normal game state), a second game state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, a second/third normal game state), and a third game state corresponding to the third switching mode (for example, a fourth normal game state).
When a judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the first game state, a first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the second normal game state or the third normal game state triggered by a jackpot result) is provided to transition to the second game state via the special game state,
In the second game state transitioned by the first transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the second game state reaches the first termination threshold (for example, 20 rounds) without reaching the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the third normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the completion of the time-saving feature) is provided to transition back to the first game state.
In the first game state, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is obtained, a third transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state triggered by the special miss result) is provided to transition to the third game state without going through the special game state,
A gaming machine characterized by having a fourth transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state when the number of game rounds played in the third gaming state transitioned by the third transition means reaches the second termination criterion number (for example, 20 rounds) without the number of game rounds played in the third gaming state transitioning to the first determination information reaches the determination result corresponding to the first determination information.

According to feature C3, if the judgment result corresponds to the first judgment information in the first game state, the game transitions to the second game state via a special game state. The second game state corresponds to the second switching mode, and by launching game balls to the second route, the number of balls entering the second starting ball entry section increases, suppressing the reduction of the player's ball count. The second game state has a limit on the number of times it can be played, and when the number of game rounds played in the second game state reaches the first termination criterion, the game transitions to the first game state, which corresponds to the low-frequency switching mode. This makes it difficult to get balls into the second starting ball entry section. Here, the special information obtained based on balls entering the second starting ball entry section is stored by the second storage means, and after transitioning from the second game state to the first game state, game rounds are executed based on the stored special information. In the remaining game rounds related to the second starting ball entry section, the judgment result may correspond to the second judgment information. If the remaining game rounds result in a judgment corresponding to the second judgment information, the game will transition to the third game state corresponding to the third switching mode without going through the special game state, and the high-frequency switching mode will loop. This loop makes it possible to aim for a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information while minimizing the reduction of the player's remaining balls. By achieving this diversification of gameplay, it is possible to contribute to increasing the player's interest in the game.

Feature C4. The gaming machine according to Feature C2 or Feature C3, characterized in that the judgment based on ball entry into the second starting ball entry section is configured to more likely result in a judgment corresponding to the second judgment information than to a judgment corresponding to the first judgment information.

As described above, when transitioning from the second or third game state to the first game state, the number of game rounds related to the second ball entry unit is executed, up to the number of special information items stored in the second memory means. In these game rounds, the probability of obtaining a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is higher than the probability of obtaining a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information. Even if the judgment result does not correspond to the first judgment information, it is possible to aim for a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information by looping the high-frequency switching mode described above. With this configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game without unnecessarily increasing the probability of obtaining a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information.

Feature C5. A gaming machine according to any one of Feature C2 to Feature C4, characterized in that, during the second and third gaming states, if the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the determination result of the second determination information, the determination result becomes invalid.

According to feature C5, if a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained during the second/third game state, that judgment result becomes invalid. Conversely, if a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained during the remaining game rounds related to the second starting ball entry unit when transitioning from the second/third game state to the first game state, that judgment result triggers a transition to the third game state. With this configuration, the presence or absence of the above loop depends on the maximum number of special information items that can be stored related to the second starting ball entry unit. Therefore, when adjusting the advantage by increasing or decreasing the number of rounds required to terminate in the second/third game state, it is possible to avoid affecting the loop probability and to suitably improve the degree of freedom in setting the number of rounds required to terminate.

Furthermore, the configuration described in this feature can also be described as "a gaming machine according to any one of features C2 to C4, characterized in that, during the second and third game states, the determination means is configured to avoid obtaining a determination result corresponding to the second determination information."

Feature C6. A gaming machine according to any one of Feature C2 to C5, characterized in that the second termination criterion count is defined to be the same as the first termination criterion count.

The configuration described in this feature is preferable in encouraging the player to perceive the game states before and after the first game state as being identical, when the game progresses from the second game state to the first game state and then to the third game state.

Feature C7. The gaming machine according to any one of Features C2 to C6, characterized in that the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the third switching mode is closer to the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the second switching mode than to the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the first switching mode.

The configuration described in this feature is preferable in encouraging the player to perceive the game states before and after the first game state as being identical, when the game progresses from the second game state to the first game state and then to the third game state.

Furthermore, the "switching mode" described in this feature consists of three elements: the period during which the open state is maintained, the number of times the system is switched to the open state, and the interval period between open states. "Similar to the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the second switching mode" indicates that more of these three elements are identical or similar than in the "first switching mode."

Incidentally, the configuration shown in this feature can also be described as "a gaming machine according to any one of features G2 to G4, characterized in that the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the third switching mode is the same as the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the second switching mode."

Feature C8. A pre-identification means that identifies whether the special information stored in the second storage means corresponds to the second determination information before the special information stored in the second storage means becomes the subject of the determination,
A gaming machine according to any one of features C2 to C6, characterized in that, in the second and third gaming states, a special performance execution means is provided to execute a special performance based on the result of the prior identification means with respect to special information subject to determination after the transition from the second and third gaming states to the first gaming state.

Immediately after transitioning from the second or third game state to the first game state, the remaining reserved game rounds related to the second ball entry section are executed. If the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained during these game rounds, the game transitions from the first game state to the third game state. Here, as shown in this feature, in the second/third game state, it is possible to pre-determine whether the remaining reserved game rounds will result in the judgment information corresponding to the second judgment information, and by performing a special effect based on that result, the attention given to whether or not the aforementioned loop occurs can be increased.

Feature C9. The gaming machine according to Feature C8, characterized in that the prior identification means is configured to perform the identification during the final game round in the second and third game states when transitioning from the second and third game states to the first game state.

If the above identification is performed in the final game round of the second/third game state, the special effect will be executed when the number of special information items stored in the second memory means reaches the maximum number of items that can be stored. This allows the function of suggesting the continuation of the loop through the special effect to be effectively utilized.

Feature C10. The gaming machine according to Feature C9, characterized in that the special performance is initiated before the identification by the aforementioned identification means in the final game round.

According to feature C10, by initiating the special performance prior to identification by the prior identification means, the constraints on the execution period of the special performance can be relaxed, and the obsolescence of the special performance can be effectively suppressed.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in Features C4 to C10 may be applied to Feature C1.

Incidentally, the technical concepts shown in Groups A and B above may also be applied to Feature C1 to Feature C10.

<Features Group D>
The following group of features D were developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and issues described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Feature D1. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) which is set to have a longer period of time during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state than in the first switching mode.
When the result of the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode becomes a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information, a first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state triggered by the special miss result) is provided to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without going through the special game state.
In the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, which has been transitioned by the first transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 20, 40, or 260 rounds) without reaching the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the time reduction) is provided to transition back to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode.
When the number of game rounds played after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling: for example, 400 rounds) without reaching the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, a third transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions to the fourth normal game state when the ceiling is reached) is provided to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without going through the special game state.
A special effect execution means that executes a special effect that suggests transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode when transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode by the first transition means,
Equipped with,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the special performance execution means is configured to determine the performance mode of the special performance depending on whether or not the upper limit is reached during the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode to which the player transitions.

If the number of game rounds played after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without reaching the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, the game transitions to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode. In the second switching mode, balls enter the second starting ball entry section more frequently, thereby suppressing investment associated with game progression. Such a function (ceiling function) is desirable in terms of providing relief to players. However, in the configuration shown in this feature, the game may also transition to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode even if the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information. In this case, a special effect is executed. The type of special effect is determined depending on whether or not the ceiling is reached during the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode. With such a configuration, for example, it is possible to suggest reaching the ceiling when the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is reached, or conversely, to make it difficult or impossible to distinguish whether the trigger for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode is the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information or reaching the ceiling, thereby contributing to increased attention to the game through diversification of gameplay.

Feature D2. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) which is set to have a longer period of time during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state than in the first switching mode.
When the result of the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode becomes a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information, a first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state triggered by the special miss result) is provided to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without going through the special game state.
In the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, which has been transitioned by the first transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 20, 40, or 260 rounds) without reaching the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the time reduction) is provided to transition back to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode.
When the number of game rounds played after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling: for example, 400 rounds) without reaching the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, a third transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions to the fourth normal game state when the ceiling is reached) is provided to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without going through the special game state.
The system includes a special effect execution means that, when transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode is performed by the first transition means, executes a special effect that suggests transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the special performance execution means is configured to determine the performance mode of the special performance based on the number of times the termination criterion is reached in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode to which the player is transitioned, and the remaining number of games until the upper limit is reached.

If the number of game rounds played after the special game state ends (number of games played) reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without reaching the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, the game transitions to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode. In the second switching mode, balls enter the second starting ball entry section more frequently, thereby suppressing investment associated with the progress of the game. Such a function (ceiling function) is desirable in order to provide relief to the player. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, the game may also transition to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode even if the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information. In this case, a special performance is executed. The performance style of the special performance is determined based on the number of games played to reach the termination criterion in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode to which the game transitions, and the remaining number of games until the ceiling is reached. With such a configuration, for example, when the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is reached, it is possible to also suggest that the ceiling has been reached, or conversely, it is possible to make it difficult or impossible to distinguish whether the trigger for transitioning to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode is the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information or the ceiling has been reached, thereby contributing to increased attention to the game through diversification of gameplay.

Feature D3. The special performance execution means is the first execution means,
As the aforementioned special effects, a first special effect and a second special effect are provided, each with a different performance style.
The system includes a second execution means that, when transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode by the third transition means, executes the second special performance as a performance that suggests the transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode,
The gaming machine according to feature D2, characterized in that the first execution means has means for executing the second special performance when the set termination criterion count is greater than the remaining number of games until the upper limit is reached.

According to Feature D3, if the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information and the ceiling is reached during a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode triggered by that judgment result, the same special performance (second special performance) that is executed when the ceiling is reached during normal play will be performed. This configuration makes it appear as if the ceiling is variable.

Feature D4. The gaming machine according to Feature D3, characterized in that the first execution means has means for executing the first special performance when the set termination criterion count is less than the remaining number of games until the upper limit is reached.

According to Feature D4, if the set termination threshold number of plays is less than the number of plays until the ceiling is reached, the first special effect will be executed instead of the second special effect. This is preferable for achieving the mimicry effect shown in Feature D3.

Feature D5. The gaming machine according to Feature D3 or Feature D4, characterized in that the second execution means does not execute the second special performance when the third transition means transitions to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode after the second special performance is executed by the first execution means.

As shown in Feature D5, if the ceiling is reached during a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, the second special effect is not executed, and the ceiling has not been explicitly indicated. This allows the mimicry effect shown in Feature D3 to be exhibited even more effectively.

Feature D6. The third transition means is configured such that, if the upper limit is reached during the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, the player transitions to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode via the second transition means upon reaching the termination criterion count, and then transitions to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode.
When the game is in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, the system includes a state suggestion means that indicates that the game is in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode.
The gaming machine according to any one of features D3 to D5, characterized in that the state indicating means is configured to indicate the state across the three game states when the upper limit number of times is reached during the second switching mode and the third transition means transitions from the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode via the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode.

According to Feature D6, when the system cycles from the second switching mode to the first switching mode and back to the second switching mode, continuing to suggest the second switching mode even during the first switching mode allows the mimicry effect shown in Feature D3 to be exhibited even more effectively.

Feature D7. The gaming machine according to any one of Features D2 to D6, characterized in that the first transition means has means for setting one of the number of termination criteria, including the first termination criterion count and the second criterion count, which have different numbers, as the termination criterion count when transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode.

As shown in Feature D7, by using a configuration that combines the first and second termination criterion counts, the pseudo-variable ceiling function shown in Feature D2, etc., can be exhibited even more effectively.

Feature D8. The first termination criterion count is less than the upper limit count.
The gaming machine according to feature D7, characterized in that the second termination criterion count is equal to or greater than the upper limit count.

According to feature D8, when the first termination criterion count is set, whether or not the ceiling is reached during the second switching mode depends on the remaining number of attempts until the ceiling is reached. If the second termination criterion count is set, the ceiling may be reached during the second switching mode. This configuration effectively suppresses the failure of this function to properly operate when using the second judgment information to simulate variable ceiling values.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in features D3 to D8 above may also be applied to feature D1.

Incidentally, the technical concepts shown in the above-mentioned feature groups A to C may also be applied to feature D1 to D8.

<Features Group E>
The following feature group E was developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and issues described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Feature E1. A game board (game board 80aB) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91A, 92A and variable prize entry devices 83B) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined information and the completion of the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means, a special game state transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes special win game state transition processing or jackpot game state transition processing) is provided to transition the game state to a special game state (special win game state or jackpot game state) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, a normal game state or a special game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83B) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the system includes a control means for the variable ball entry section that switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state (a function that executes the opening and closing process of the variable prize entry device 83B using the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable ball entry section is configured to switch the variable ball entry section to the receiving state when the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the predetermined information (for example, a special win result or a jackpot result) and the game transitions to the special game state.
The aforementioned starting ball entry section is provided with a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92A).
The acquired information storage means includes a first storage means (first operation port retention area Ra) for storing special information acquired based on ball entry into the first starting ball entry section, and a second storage means (second operation port retention area Rb) for storing special information acquired based on ball entry into the second starting ball entry section.
The second storage means is capable of storing multiple pieces of the special information,
The predetermined information includes a first piece of information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to a regular jackpot) and a second piece of information that is more advantageous to the player than the first piece of information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot with a probability increase).
The determination based on the ball entering the second starting ball entry section is configured to produce a determination result that is more likely to correspond to the second information than the determination based on the ball entering the first starting ball entry section.
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the second starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) set to make it difficult or impossible to enter the second starting ball entry section, and a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support mode) set to make it easier to enter the second starting ball entry section than in the low-frequency switching mode by making the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state longer than in the low-frequency switching mode.
A gaming machine characterized by having a special transition means that, when the number of game rounds played after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without the result corresponding to the predetermined information, transitions to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode.

If the number of game rounds played after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without the result corresponding to the predetermined information being reached, the game transitions to a predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode. In the high-frequency switching mode, balls can enter the second starting ball entry section, and the judgment (lottery) based on balls entering the second starting ball entry section can result not only in the judgment result corresponding to the first information, but also in the judgment result corresponding to the second information which is more advantageous to the player than the first information. Therefore, the degree of advantage in the judgment is greatly increased. In other words, reaching the ceiling transitions to a chance zone with a higher degree of advantage than the previous game state. By configuring the game to transition to a chance zone upon reaching the ceiling in this way, the player's desire to play can be effectively stimulated. This is desirable in suppressing the monotony of the game and increasing the level of attention the player receives to the game.

Feature E2. A game board (game board 80aB) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91A, 92A and variable prize entry devices 83B) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined information and the completion of the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means, a special game state transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes the transition process to the special game state or the transition process to the jackpot game state) is provided to transition the game state to a special game state (a special winning game state or a big winning game state) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, a normal game state or a special game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83B) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the system includes a control means for the variable ball entry section that switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state (a function that executes the opening and closing process of the variable prize entry device 83B using the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The aforementioned predetermined information includes a first piece of information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special win result) and a second piece of information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a big win result).
The control means for the variable ball entry section is,
When the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the first information and becomes a first determination result (special jackpot result), and the game transitions to the special game state, the means for switching the variable ball entry unit to the acceptance state in a first control mode,
The system includes means for switching the variable ball entry section to the receiving state in a second control mode when the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the second information and becomes a second determination result (jackpot result), and the system transitions to the special game state, or when the first determination result occurs and the game ball passes through a predetermined area (V-winning area) of the variable ball entry section,
The aforementioned starting ball entry section is provided with a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92A).
The acquired information storage means includes a first storage means (first operation port retention area Ra) for storing special information acquired based on ball entry into the first starting ball entry section, and a second storage means (second operation port retention area Rb) for storing special information acquired based on ball entry into the second starting ball entry section.
The second storage means is capable of storing multiple pieces of the special information,
The second determination result can occur in either the determination based on ball entry into the first starting ball entry section or the determination based on ball entry into the second starting ball entry section, whereas the first determination result can occur only in the determination based on ball entry into the second starting ball entry section.
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the second starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) set to make it difficult or impossible to enter the second starting ball entry section, and a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support mode) set to make it easier to enter the second starting ball entry section than in the low-frequency switching mode by making the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state longer than in the low-frequency switching mode.
A gaming machine characterized by having a special transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the normal gaming state to the third special gaming state when the ceiling is reached) which causes the game to transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode when the number of game rounds played after the special gaming state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without the number of rounds played reaching the predetermined information.

If the number of game rounds played after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without the result corresponding to the predetermined information being reached, the game transitions to a predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode. In the high-frequency switching mode, balls can enter the second starting ball entry section, and the judgment (lottery) based on balls entering the second starting ball entry section can result in a judgment not only corresponding to the first information but also to the second information. Therefore, the degree of advantage in the judgment (probability of winning or probability of transitioning to the special game state) is greatly increased. In other words, reaching the ceiling transitions to a chance zone with a higher degree of advantage than the previous game state. By configuring the game to transition to a chance zone upon reaching the ceiling in this way, the player's desire to play can be effectively stimulated. This is desirable in suppressing the monotony of the game and increasing the level of attention the player receives.

Furthermore, upon reaching the ceiling, balls enter the second starting ball entry point, which not only suppresses the reduction of the player's remaining balls but also increases the probability of transitioning to a special game state. This configuration allows the benefits to be effectively realized even with a shorter duration in the second switching mode, thus effectively suppressing the prolonged gameplay after reaching the ceiling.

Feature E3. The special transition means is a first special transition means,
After transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode by the first special transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode reaches the termination criterion number (for example, 1 round) without a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information being obtained, a second special transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the third special game state to the fourth special game state triggered by the consumption of time-saving measures) is provided to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode.
The gaming machine according to feature E2, further comprising a resetting means (a ceiling resetting function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for resetting the upper limit number of plays when the second special transition means is used to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode.

According to Feature E3, the number of games played until the ceiling is reached is reset when the high-frequency switching mode triggered by reaching the ceiling ends. This configuration is preferable for achieving a configuration where the ceiling is shallow, the benefits of reaching the ceiling are small, and a weaker ceiling function is activated in short cycles. In other words, it is preferable for suppressing monotony in gameplay.

Feature E4. The system includes an execution count counter (e.g., a continuation count counter) that tracks the number of game rounds executed without resulting in a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information after transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode by the first special transition means.
The second special transition means is configured to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode when the value of the execution count counter reaches the value corresponding to the termination criterion count.
The gaming machine according to feature E3, characterized in that the execution count counter is updated (counted) when a game round is executed based on a ball entering the second starting ball entry unit, while it is not updated (not counted) when a game round is executed based on a ball entering the first starting ball entry unit.

As shown in Feature E4, by configuring the system so that the termination criterion count is updated when a ball enters the second starting ball entry area, it is possible to prevent the benefits of reaching the ceiling from being fully realized.

Feature E5. The gaming machine according to any one of Features E2 to E4, characterized in that the upper limit number of games played, M (integer), is defined to be smaller than the reciprocal of the probability (for example, approximately 1/200) of obtaining a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information by the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode.

By defining the upper limit of the number of occurrences in the manner described in this feature, the effect of generating the above-mentioned chance zone in a short cycle and suppressing monotony in the game can be more effectively achieved.

Furthermore, the configuration shown in this feature can also be described as "a gaming machine according to any one of features E2 to E4, characterized in that, in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode, the probability of obtaining a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information by the determination means is m/N (for example, approximately 1/200), and the upper limit number of games played, M (integer), is defined such that M < N/m."

Feature E6. The gaming machine according to any one of Features E2 to E4, characterized in that the number of games played (integer), which is the upper limit, is defined to be less than or equal to the reciprocal of the probability (for example, approximately 1/200) of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined information obtained by the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode.

By defining the upper limit of the number of occurrences in the manner described in this feature, the effect of generating the above-mentioned chance zone in a short cycle and suppressing monotony in the game can be more effectively achieved.

Furthermore, the configuration shown in this feature can also be described as "a gaming machine according to any one of features E2 to E4, characterized in that, in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode, the probability of obtaining a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information by the determination means is m/N (for example, approximately 1/200), and the upper limit number of games played, M (integer), is defined such that M ≤ N/m."

Feature E7. The gaming machine according to any one of Features E2 to E6, characterized in that the sum (integer) of the upper limit of the number of special information items to be stored in the second storage means and the number of termination criteria items is defined to be less than or equal to the reciprocal of the probability (e.g., 1/10) of the determination result corresponding to the first information in the determination by the determination means.

By defining the memory limit and termination criteria count in the manner described in this feature, the effect of generating the above-mentioned chance zone in short cycles and suppressing monotony in gameplay can be more effectively achieved.

Furthermore, the configuration shown in this feature can also be described as "a gaming machine according to any one of features E2 to E6, characterized in that the probability of obtaining a determination result corresponding to the first information in the determination by the determination means is y/X (for example, 1/10), and the sum S (integer) of the upper limit number of special information to be stored in the second storage means and the number of termination criteria is defined such that S ≤ X/y."

Feature E8. The termination criterion count is the first termination criterion count,
When a determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the second information is obtained in the predetermined game state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode, a first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the normal game state to the first special game state or the second special game state triggered by a jackpot result) is obtained,
The system includes a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from a first special game state or a second special game state to a fourth special game state triggered by the time reduction) which, after transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode by the first transition means, does not result in a determination result corresponding to the first and second information and the number of game rounds played in the predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode reaches a second termination criterion number (for example, 6 rounds, 100 rounds), and transitions to the predetermined game state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode.
The gaming machine according to any one of features E2 to E7, characterized in that the first termination criterion count is set to be less than the second termination criterion count.

As shown in Feature E8, by reducing the number of termination criteria set when the ceiling is reached (first termination criteria) compared to the number of termination criteria set when the judgment result corresponding to the second information (second termination criteria), it is possible to ensure the superiority of the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (the goal in the game) while effectively utilizing the relief function upon reaching the ceiling.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in Features E3 to E8 above may also be applied to Feature E1.

Incidentally, the technical concepts shown in the above-mentioned feature groups A to D may also be applied to feature E1 to feature E8.

<Features Group F>
The following group of features F were developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and issues described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Feature F1. A game board (game board 80aB) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91A, 92A and variable prize entry devices 83B) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined information and the completion of the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means, a special game state transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes the transition process to the special game state or the transition process to the jackpot game state) is provided to transition the game state to a special game state (a special winning game state or a big winning game state) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, a normal game state or a special game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83B) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the system includes a control means for the variable ball entry section that switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state (a function that executes the opening and closing process of the variable prize entry device 83B using the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The aforementioned predetermined information includes a first piece of information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special win result) and a second piece of information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a big win result).
The control means for the variable ball entry section is,
When the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the first information and becomes a first determination result (special jackpot result), and the game transitions to the special game state, the means for switching the variable ball entry unit to the acceptance state in a first control mode,
The system includes means for switching the variable ball entry section to the receiving state in a second control mode when the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the second information and becomes a second determination result (jackpot result), and the system transitions to the special game state, or when the first determination result occurs and the game ball passes through a predetermined area (V-winning area) of the variable ball entry section,
The aforementioned starting ball entry section is provided with a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92A).
The acquired information storage means includes a first storage means (first operation port retention area Ra) for storing special information acquired based on ball entry into the first starting ball entry section, and a second storage means (second operation port retention area Rb) for storing special information acquired based on ball entry into the second starting ball entry section.
The second determination result can occur in either the determination based on ball entry into the first starting ball entry section or the determination based on ball entry into the second starting ball entry section, whereas the first determination result can occur only in the determination based on ball entry into the second starting ball entry section.
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the second starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) set to make it difficult or impossible to enter the second starting ball entry section, and a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support mode) set to make it easier to enter the second starting ball entry section than in the low-frequency switching mode by making the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state longer than in the low-frequency switching mode.
A first special transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the normal game state to the third special game state when the ceiling is reached) is provided, which causes the game to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode when the number of game rounds played after the special game state ends does not result in a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information and reaches the upper limit (ceiling),
After transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode by the first special transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 100 rounds) without a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information, a second special transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the third special game state to the fourth special game state triggered by the time reduction consumption) is provided to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode,
Equipped with,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the sum (integer) of the upper limit number of special information to be stored in the second storage means and the number of termination criteria is defined to be at least the reciprocal of the probability (for example, about 1/5) of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined information in the determination by the determination means.

In the configuration shown in this feature, if the number of game rounds played after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without the result corresponding to the predetermined information, the game transitions to a predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode. However, even if the game enters the high-frequency switching mode, if the probability of the result corresponding to the predetermined information remains low, the following problems may occur. Specifically, even if the ceiling is reached, the period until the player receives the sufficient benefit they expect (transition to the special game state) may be prolonged, or the high-frequency switching mode may end before the player receives the sufficient benefit (a "runaway" occurs). This is undesirable as it significantly reduces the player's motivation to play. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, transitioning from the low-frequency switching mode to the high-frequency switching mode makes it possible for the ball to enter the second starting ball entry section. Based on the ball entering the second starting ball entry section, the judgment (lottery) can result not only in the second judgment result corresponding to the second information, but also in the first judgment result corresponding to the first information. In other words, the probability of obtaining a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined information, i.e., the probability of transitioning to a special game state, is significantly increased upon reaching the ceiling. Furthermore, since the sum of the upper limit of the number of special information items that can be stored in the second storage means (e.g., four) and the number of times the termination criterion is reached (e.g., 100 times) (e.g., 104 times) is set to be greater than or equal to the reciprocal of the probability of obtaining a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined information, a configuration in which transitioning to a special game state is highly likely or substantially guaranteed upon reaching the ceiling can be suitably realized. This effectively suppresses the occurrence of the aforementioned problems.

Furthermore, if there is a limit to the number of plays possible in the high-frequency switching mode triggered by reaching the ceiling, for example, the concern about the aforementioned "runaway" scenario becomes stronger. In this regard, the above configuration mitigates the impact of the limit on the number of plays upon reaching the ceiling. In other words, even when employing a high-frequency switching mode with a play limit upon reaching the ceiling, the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems can be effectively suppressed.

Feature F2. The gaming machine according to Feature F1, characterized in that, in the determination based on ball entry into the second starting ball entry section, the probability of obtaining the first determination result (e.g., 1/5) is specified to be higher than the probability of obtaining the second determination result (e.g., 1/200).

According to Feature F2, when transitioning from low-frequency switching mode to high-frequency switching mode, the probability of obtaining a judgment result corresponding to predetermined information can be significantly increased. This is preferable for activating the relief function upon reaching the ceiling as shown in Feature F1, as it shortens the stay period in high-frequency switching mode and suppresses the prolonged period before the above-mentioned sufficient benefits are granted.

Feature F3. The system includes an execution count counter (e.g., a continuation count counter) that tracks the number of game rounds executed without resulting in a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information after transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode by the first special transition means.
The second special transition means is configured to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode when the value of the execution count counter reaches the value corresponding to the termination criterion count.
The gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2, characterized in that the execution count counter is updated (counted) when a game round is executed based on a ball entering the second starting ball entry unit, but is not updated (not counted) when a game round is executed based on a ball entering the first starting ball entry unit.

According to the configuration shown in Feature F3, the number of game rounds related to the second starting ball entry section are counted by the execution count counter, while the number of game rounds related to the first starting ball entry section are not counted by the execution count counter. By configuring the system so that the number of game rounds related to the second starting ball entry section determines whether the termination threshold has been reached, a configuration can be suitably realized in which the transition to a special game state is highly likely or substantially confirmed upon reaching the ceiling.

Feature F4. The termination criterion count is the first termination criterion count (for example, 100 times),
When a second determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the second information is obtained in the predetermined game state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode, a first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the normal game state to the first special game state or the second special game state triggered by a jackpot result) is obtained,
The system includes a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from a first special game state or a second special game state to a fourth special game state triggered by the time reduction) which, after transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode by the first transition means, does not result in a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information and the number of game rounds played in the predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode reaches a second termination criterion number (for example, 1 round, 3 rounds), and transitions to the predetermined game state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode.
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3, characterized in that the first termination criterion count is set to be greater than the second termination criterion count.

In a predetermined game state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode, if the second judgment result corresponds to the second piece of information, the game transitions to a predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode via a special game state. In the configuration described in this feature, the number of times the high-frequency switching mode terminates upon reaching the ceiling is greater than the number of times the high-frequency switching mode terminates upon reaching the second judgment result, thus prioritizing the transition to the special game state upon reaching the ceiling. Such a configuration allows the relief function described in feature F1, etc., to be effectively utilized.

Feature F5. The gaming machine according to any one of Features F1 to F4, characterized in that the upper limit number of games played, M (integer), is defined to be greater than the reciprocal of the probability (e.g., 1/200) of obtaining the second determination result in the determination by the determination means.

As shown in Feature F1, in a configuration where both the high-frequency switching mode triggered by reaching the ceiling and the high-frequency switching mode triggered by a judgment result corresponding to predetermined information are executed based on ball entry into the second starting ball entry section, the benefits received when a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined information is obtained during the high-frequency switching mode are the same. While it is desirable to increase the benefits received when a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined information is obtained in order to improve player satisfaction, there is a concern that this may lead to an excessively powerful relief function upon reaching the ceiling, as the expected benefits upon reaching the ceiling will also increase. This concern is particularly significant in configurations where reaching the ceiling makes a transition to a special game state highly likely or virtually certain, as shown in Feature F1. In this regard, as shown in this feature, by making the upper limit of the number of plays (ceiling) greater than the reciprocal of the probability of obtaining the second judgment result, it is possible to increase the expected benefits upon reaching the ceiling while reducing the opportunities to reach the ceiling, thereby eliminating the above concern.

Furthermore, the configuration described in this feature can also be described as "a gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to F4, characterized in that the probability of obtaining the second determination result in the determination by the determination means is m/N (for example, 1/200), and the upper limit number of games played, M (integer), is defined such that M > N/m."

Feature F6. The gaming machine according to any one of Features F1 to F4, characterized in that the number of games played M (integer), which is the upper limit, is defined to be at least the reciprocal of the probability (e.g., 1/200) of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined information in the determination by the determination means.

As shown in Feature F1, in a configuration where both the high-frequency switching mode triggered by reaching the ceiling and the high-frequency switching mode triggered by a judgment result corresponding to predetermined information are executed based on ball entry into the second starting ball entry section, the benefits received when a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined information is obtained during the high-frequency switching mode are the same. While it is desirable to increase the benefits received when a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined information is obtained in order to improve player satisfaction, there is a concern that this may lead to an excessively powerful relief function upon reaching the ceiling, as the expected benefits upon reaching the ceiling will also increase. This concern is particularly significant in configurations where reaching the ceiling makes a transition to a special game state highly likely or virtually certain, as shown in Feature F1. In this regard, as shown in this feature, by setting the upper limit of the number of plays (ceiling) to be greater than or equal to the reciprocal of the probability of obtaining the second judgment result, it is possible to increase the expected benefits upon reaching the ceiling while reducing the opportunities to reach the ceiling, thereby eliminating the above concern.

Furthermore, the configuration described in this feature can also be described as "a gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to F4, characterized in that the probability of obtaining a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information in the determination by the determination means is m/N (for example, 1/200), and the upper limit number of games played, M (integer), is defined such that M ≥ N/m."

Feature F7. A gaming machine according to any one of Features F1 to F6, characterized in that, when the determination by the determination means results in a determination result corresponding to the first information in the predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode transitioned by the special transition means, the operation period of the game cycle operation is shortened compared to when the determination result corresponding to the first information occurs under other circumstances.

As shown in Feature F7, in the predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode after reaching the ceiling, the operation period of the game cycle operation when the first judgment result is obtained is shortened, thereby reducing the time required to transition to the special game state. This allows the player to quickly enjoy the expected benefits.

Feature F8. The second storage means is capable of storing multiple pieces of special information acquired based on ball entry into the second starting ball entry section.
The game cycle control means is configured to execute the game cycle operation such that the operation period of the game cycle operation becomes shorter as the amount of special information stored in the second storage means increases.
The high-frequency switching modes include a first high-frequency switching mode and a second high-frequency switching mode which is set such that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first high-frequency switching mode, thereby making it easier for the ball to enter the second starting ball entry section than in the first high-frequency switching mode.
If the determination by the determination means results in the first determination result, or if the first determination result is obtained and the game ball passes through the predetermined area (V-winning area) of the variable ball entry section, the means is provided to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first high-frequency switching mode via the special game state.
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F7, characterized in that the special transition means is configured to transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second high-frequency switching mode when the number of game rounds after the end of the special gaming state reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without the result of the predetermined information being determined.

According to Feature F8, in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second high-frequency switching mode, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling, the period during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state is longer than in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first high-frequency switching mode, which is triggered by the first judgment result → passage through the predetermined area or the second judgment result. In other words, in the high-frequency switching mode triggered by reaching the ceiling, the frequency of ball entry into the second starting ball entry section increases, and the amount of special information stored in the second memory means increases. Therefore, the operation period for game-specific actions in the game round after reaching the ceiling is shortened, effectively suppressing the prolonged period between reaching the ceiling and enjoying the above-mentioned benefits.

Furthermore, the technical concepts shown in the above-mentioned feature groups A to E may also be applied to feature F1 to feature F8.

<Features Group G>
The following group of features G were developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and issues described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Feature G1. A game board (game board 80aA) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91A, 92A and variable prize entry device 83A) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. The system includes a game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the system includes a control means for the variable ball entry section that switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state (a function that executes the opening and closing process of the variable prize entry device 83A using the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The aforementioned starting ball entry section is provided with a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92A).
The acquired information storage means includes a first storage means (first operation port retention area Ra) for storing special information acquired based on ball entry into the first starting ball entry section, and a second storage means (second operation port retention area Rb) for storing special information acquired based on ball entry into the second starting ball entry section.
The determination result corresponding to the first determination information can occur in either the determination based on the ball entering the first starting ball entry section or the determination based on the ball entering the second starting ball entry section, whereas the determination result corresponding to the second determination information can occur only in the determination based on the ball entering the second starting ball entry section.
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93A) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the second starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) set to make it difficult or impossible to enter the second starting ball entry section, and a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support modes A and B) set to make it easier to enter the second starting ball entry section than in the low-frequency switching mode by making the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state longer than in the low-frequency switching mode.
The predetermined game states include a first type of game state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode (for example, a first normal game state) and a second type of game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode (for example, a third normal game state, a fourth normal game state).
When a judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the first type of game state, a first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the third normal game state triggered by a jackpot result) is provided to transition to the second type of game state via the special game state,
In the second type of game state transitioned by the first transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the second type of game state reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 10 or 20 rounds) without reaching the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the third normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the consumption of time-saving features) is provided to transition to the first type of game state.
The system includes a means for resetting the number of times the termination criteria are reached (for example, resetting to 20 times) when the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) occurs in the second type of game state,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the termination criterion count resetting means is configured to perform the resetting without going through the special game state.

According to Feature G1, if the judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the first type of game state, the game transitions to the second type of game state via the special game state. The second type of game state corresponds to the high-frequency switching mode, and the decrease in the number of balls held is suppressed by increasing the number of balls entering the second starting ball entry section. The second type of game state has a limit on the number of times it can be played, and when the number of times the game is played in the second type of game state reaches the termination criterion, the game transitions to the first type of game state which corresponds to the low-frequency switching mode. This makes it difficult for balls to enter the second starting ball entry section. Here, the judgment based on balls entering the second starting ball entry section may result in a judgment result (special miss result) corresponding to the second judgment information. If the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained in the second type of game state, the termination criterion number is reset without going through the special game state. This causes the second type of game state (high-frequency switching mode) to loop (extend). This loop makes it possible to aim for a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held. By diversifying the types of games offered in this way, we can contribute to increasing interest in gaming.

Feature G2. A game board (game board 80aA) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91A, 92A and variable prize entry device 83A) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. The system includes a game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83A) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the system includes a control means for the variable ball entry section that switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state (a function that executes the opening and closing process of the variable prize entry device 83A using the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The aforementioned starting ball entry section is provided with a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92A).
The acquired information storage means includes a first storage means (first operation port retention area Ra) for storing special information acquired based on ball entry into the first starting ball entry section, and a second storage means (second operation port retention area Rb) for storing special information acquired based on ball entry into the second starting ball entry section.
The determination result corresponding to the first determination information can occur in either the determination based on the ball entering the first starting ball entry section or the determination based on the ball entering the second starting ball entry section, whereas the determination result corresponding to the second determination information can occur only in the determination based on the ball entering the second starting ball entry section.
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93A) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the second starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides the following switching control modes (support modes) for the variable mechanism: a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) set to make it difficult or impossible to enter the second starting ball entry section; a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to make it easier to enter the second starting ball entry section than in the first switching mode by making the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state longer than in the first switching mode; and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to make it easier to enter the second starting ball entry section than in the first switching mode by making the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state longer than in the first switching mode.
The predetermined game states include a first game state corresponding to the first switching mode (for example, a first normal game state), a second game state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, a third normal game state), and a third game state corresponding to the third switching mode (for example, a fourth normal game state).
When a judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the first game state, a first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the third normal game state triggered by a jackpot result) is provided to transition to the second game state via the special game state,
In the second game state transitioned by the first transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the second game state reaches the first termination threshold (for example, 10 or 20 rounds) without reaching the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the third normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the completion of the time-saving feature) is provided to transition back to the first game state.
In the second game state, if a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is obtained, a third transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the third normal game state to the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss result) is provided to transition to the third game state without going through the special game state upon the end of the game round in which the judgment result was obtained,
A gaming machine characterized by having a fourth transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state when the number of game rounds played in the third gaming state transitioned by the third transition means reaches the second termination criterion number (for example, 20 rounds) without the number of game rounds played in the third gaming state transitioning to the first determination information reaches the determination result corresponding to the first determination information.

According to Feature G2, if the judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the first game state, the game transitions to the second game state via a special game state. The second game state corresponds to the second switching mode, and the decrease in the number of balls held is suppressed by increasing the number of balls entering the second starting ball entry section. The second game state has a limit on the number of times it can be played, and if the number of times the game is played in the second game state reaches the first termination criterion, the game transitions to the first game state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode. This makes it difficult for balls to enter the second starting ball entry section. Here, the judgment based on balls entering the second starting ball entry section may result in a judgment result (special miss result) corresponding to the second judgment information. If the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained in the second game state, the game transitions to the third game state without going through the special game state. The third game state corresponds to the third switching mode, and like the second game state, game rounds related to the second ball entry mechanism are executed. This state continues until the number of game rounds reaches the second termination threshold. If the game state transitions from the second to the third game state, the game rounds related to the second ball entry mechanism continue. This makes it possible to aim for the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information while minimizing the reduction in the number of balls held. By achieving this diversification of gameplay, it is possible to contribute to increasing the level of attention given to the game.

Feature G3. In the third game state, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is obtained, the system is equipped with termination criterion count resetting means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 to reset the continuation count counter),
The gaming machine according to feature G2, characterized in that the means for resetting the termination criteria count is configured to perform the reset without going through the special game state.

According to Feature G3, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is reached during the third game state, the second termination criterion count is reset. In other words, the third game state loops. Since this loop does not pass through the special game state, the game proceeds smoothly even if the loop is repeated.

Feature G4. The gaming machine according to Feature G2 or Feature G3, characterized in that the second termination criterion count is defined to be the same number as or greater than the first termination criterion count.

According to Feature G4, when transitioning from the second game state to the third game state, the timing of the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (the number of game rounds in which that judgment result occurs) can be used to avoid the player actually losing money. This is desirable in order to achieve diversification of gameplay through the aforementioned loop function and to effectively enhance the effect of increasing attention to the game.

Feature G5. The gaming machine according to Feature G3 or Feature G4, characterized in that, in the third game state, the probability of obtaining a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information by the judgment means is defined to be higher than the probability of obtaining a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information.

According to feature G5, during the loop, the probability of obtaining a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is higher than the probability of obtaining a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information. This configuration makes it less likely that problems such as the loop function failing to work properly due to frequent occurrences of judgment results corresponding to the first judgment information will occur.

Feature G6. A fifth transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal game state to the third normal game state triggered by a jackpot result) that, when a judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the third game state, transitions to the second game state via the special game state,
In the second game state transitioned by the fifth transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the second game state reaches the third termination criterion number (for example, 20 rounds) without reaching the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, the system includes a sixth transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the third normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the completion of the time-saving feature), which transitions the system back to the first game state.
The gaming machine according to any one of features G3 to G5, characterized in that the third termination criterion count is set to be the same number as or greater than the second termination criterion count.

According to feature G6, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained during the aforementioned loop, the number of termination criteria (third termination criteria) in the second game state that follows will be equal to or greater than the second termination criteria. With this configuration, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained during the loop, the player's advantage increases after the special game state ends compared to during the loop, adding an element of excitement to the gameplay during the loop.

Feature G7. The gaming machine according to any one of Feature G2 to Feature G6, characterized in that the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the third switching mode is closer to the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the second switching mode than to the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the first switching mode.

The configuration described in this feature is preferable in encouraging the player to perceive the transition from the second game state to the third game state as being identical.

Furthermore, the "switching mode" described in this feature consists of three elements: the period during which the open state is maintained, the number of times the system is switched to the open state, and the interval period between open states. "Similar to the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the second switching mode" indicates that more of these three elements are identical or similar than in the "first switching mode."

Incidentally, the configuration shown in this feature can also be described as "a gaming machine according to any one of features G2 to G6, characterized in that the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the third switching mode is the same as the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the second switching mode."

Feature G8. The determination mode performed by the determination means includes a low-probability mode in which the probability of obtaining a determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively low, and a high-probability mode in which the probability of obtaining a determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively high.
The gaming machine according to any one of features G3 to G7, characterized in that the determination mode in the second gaming state is the low probability mode.

According to feature G8, it is possible to suppress the overloading of the loop function by preventing the occurrence of judgment results corresponding to the first judgment information during the aforementioned loop. This allows for diversification of gameplay while suppressing an increase in gambling tendencies.

Feature G9. A game board (game board 80aA) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91A, 92A and variable prize entry device 83A) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A) which is the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. The system includes a game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83A) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the system includes a control means for the variable ball entry section that switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state (a function that executes the opening and closing process of the variable prize entry device 83A using the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The aforementioned starting ball entry section is provided with a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92A).
The acquired information storage means includes a first storage means (first operation port retention area Ra) for storing special information acquired based on ball entry into the first starting ball entry section, and a second storage means (second operation port retention area Rb) for storing special information acquired based on ball entry into the second starting ball entry section.
The determination result corresponding to the first determination information can occur in either the determination based on the ball entering the first starting ball entry section or the determination based on the ball entering the second starting ball entry section, whereas the determination result corresponding to the second determination information can occur only in the determination based on the ball entering the second starting ball entry section.
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93A) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the second starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) set to make it difficult or impossible to enter the second starting ball entry section, and a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to make it easier to enter the second starting ball entry section than in the low-frequency switching mode by making the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state longer than in the low-frequency switching mode.
The predetermined game states include a first type of game state corresponding to the first switching mode (for example, a first normal game state) and a second type of game state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, a fourth normal game state).
In the aforementioned two types of game states, if the number of game rounds played in the second type of game state reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 20 rounds) without reaching the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, a transition means for transitioning to the first type of game state (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the completion of the time-saving feature),
The system includes a means for resetting the number of times the termination criteria are reached (for example, resetting to 20 times) when the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is reached in the second type of game state.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the termination criterion count resetting means is configured to perform the resetting without going through the special game state.

According to Feature G9, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is reached during the Type 2 game state, the termination criterion count is reset. In other words, the Type 2 game state loops. Since this loop does not pass through the Special Game State, the game proceeds smoothly even if the loop is repeated. Therefore, it can diversify the gameplay and contribute to increasing attention to the game.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in features G3 to G8 above may also be applied to features G1 and G9.

Incidentally, the technical concepts shown in the above-mentioned feature groups A through F may also be applied to feature G1 through G9.

<Characteristics Group H>
The following feature group H was developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and issues described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Feature H1. A game board (game board 80aA) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91A, 92A and variable prize entry device 83A) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83A) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that executes the opening and closing process of the variable prize entry device 83A in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93A) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support mode) that is set to have a longer period of time during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state than in the low-frequency switching mode.
When the number of game rounds played after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling: for example, 400 rounds) without reaching a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, a special transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions to the fourth normal game state when the ceiling is reached) is provided to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode without going through the special game state.
The system includes a means for setting the upper limit number of times when a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained and the game transitions to the predetermined game state via the special game state, and the upper limit number of times is set.
The determination means provides a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, which includes a low probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively high.
The predetermined judgment information includes a first piece of information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a normal jackpot result) that serves as a trigger for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the low probability mode, and a second piece of information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a probability variation jackpot result) that serves as a trigger for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode.
The game machine is characterized in that the upper limit number setting means is configured to set a first number (for example, 300 times) as the upper limit number when the determination by the determination means results in a determination corresponding to the first information, and to set a second number (for example, 100 times) which is less than the first number, as the upper limit number when the determination by the determination means results in a determination corresponding to the second information.

If the number of game rounds played after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without reaching a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the game transitions to a predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode. By forcibly changing the rhythm of the game in this way, monotony of the game can be effectively suppressed. Here, the upper limit for reaching the ceiling is the first number (e.g., 300 rounds) if the judgment result corresponds to the first information, and a second number (less than the first) if the judgment result corresponds to the second information. In the high-probability mode, the game transitions to the special game state earlier than in the low-probability mode. By setting a lower upper limit, the effect of the ceiling function can be effectively utilized. This effectively contributes to increasing the player's attention to the game.

Feature H2. A game board (game board 80aA) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91A, 92A and variable prize entry device 83A) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83A) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that executes the opening and closing process of the variable prize entry device 83A in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93A) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support mode) that is set to have a longer period of time during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state than in the low-frequency switching mode.
When the number of game rounds played after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling: for example, 400 rounds) without reaching a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, a special transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions to the fourth normal game state when the ceiling is reached) is provided to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode without going through the special game state.
The system includes a means for setting the upper limit number of times when a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained and the game transitions to the predetermined game state via the special game state, and the upper limit number of times is set.
The determination means provides a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, which includes a low probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively high.
The predetermined judgment information includes a first piece of information that triggers a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the low probability mode (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to a 6R normal jackpot result), and a second piece of information that triggers a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency switching mode (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to a 2R probability variation jackpot result).
The gaming machine is characterized in that the upper limit number of times setting means is configured such that the upper limit number of times set when the determination by the determination means results in a determination corresponding to the first information is less than the upper limit number of times set when the determination by the determination means results in a determination corresponding to the second information.

If the number of game rounds (gameplay count) after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without reaching a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the game transitions to a predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode. By forcibly changing the rhythm of the game in this way, monotony of the game can be effectively suppressed. Here, the upper limit for reaching the ceiling is configured to be fewer (shorter) when the judgment result corresponds to the second piece of information compared to when the judgment result corresponds to the first piece of information. In the high-probability mode, the game transitions to the special game state earlier than in the low-probability mode, so by setting a lower upper limit, the effect of the ceiling function described above can be effectively utilized. This effectively contributes to increasing the player's attention to the game.

Feature H3. A game board (game board 80aA) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91A, 92A and variable prize entry device 83A) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83A) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that executes the opening and closing process of the variable prize entry device 83A in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93A) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support mode) that is set to have a longer period of time during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state than in the low-frequency switching mode.
When the number of game rounds played after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling: for example, 400 rounds) without reaching a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, a special transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions to the fourth normal game state when the ceiling is reached) is provided to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode without going through the special game state.
The system includes a means for setting the upper limit number of times when a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained and the game transitions to the predetermined game state via the special game state, and the upper limit number of times is set.
The determination means provides a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, which includes a low probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively high.
The predetermined judgment information includes a first piece of information that triggers a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the low probability mode (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to a 6R normal jackpot result), and a second piece of information that triggers a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency switching mode (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to a 2R probability variation jackpot result).
The game machine is characterized in that the upper limit number of times setting means is configured to set a first number (for example, 300 times) as the upper limit number of times when the determination by the determination means results in a determination corresponding to the first information, and to set a second number (for example, 100 times) which is less than the first number, as the upper limit number of times when the determination by the determination means results in a determination corresponding to the second information.

If the number of game rounds (gameplay count) after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without reaching a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the game transitions to a predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode. By forcibly changing the rhythm of the game in this way, monotony of the game can be effectively suppressed. Here, the upper limit for reaching the ceiling is configured to be fewer (shorter) when the judgment result corresponds to the second piece of information compared to when the judgment result corresponds to the first piece of information. In the high-probability mode, the game transitions to the special game state earlier than in the low-probability mode, so by setting a lower upper limit, the effect of the ceiling function described above can be effectively utilized. This effectively contributes to increasing the player's attention to the game.

Furthermore, in a predetermined game state corresponding to both high-probability mode and low-frequency switching mode, even though the game is in high-probability mode, the game progresses without producing a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, resulting in a significant increase in investment contrary to the player's expectations. This is expected to be a major factor in reducing the player's motivation to play. In this regard, as shown in this feature, in a predetermined game state corresponding to both high-probability mode and low-frequency switching mode, by lowering the above-mentioned upper limit and transitioning to high-frequency switching mode at an earlier timing to suppress investment, the effects of game diversification (the effect of increasing attention to the game) can be appropriately demonstrated.

Feature H4. The gaming machine according to Feature H3, characterized in that the first count is at least the reciprocal of the probability of obtaining the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information in the low-probability mode, and the second count is at least the reciprocal of the probability of obtaining the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information in the high-probability mode.

If the relief function triggered by reaching the ceiling, as shown in Feature H3, is overly active, the technical significance of providing predetermined game states corresponding to high-probability mode and low-frequency switching mode (diversification of gameplay) may be diminished. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by setting the upper limit of the number of attempts in each game state to be greater than or equal to the reciprocal of the probability of obtaining the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, it is possible to suitably achieve both gameplay diversification and the above-mentioned relief function.

Feature H5. The acquired information storage means is capable of storing multiple (for example, four) pieces of special information.
The game round control means includes an operation period setting means (a function that executes a variable display time setting process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that can set the operation period of the game round operation according to the number of special pieces of information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The operation period setting means is configured such that the operation period becomes shorter as the amount of special information stored in the acquired information storage means increases.
In the predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode, which has been transitioned to by the special transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 400 rounds) without reaching the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, the system is provided with means to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode.
The gaming machine according to feature H3 or feature H4, characterized in that the number of times the termination criteria are set to be greater than the second number of times.

A configuration that shortens the operation period for game rounds by increasing the amount of special information stored is desirable for smooth game progression. However, assuming such a configuration, the following inconvenience may arise when applying the configuration shown in feature H3, etc. Specifically, when reaching the ceiling in a predetermined game state corresponding to high probability mode and low frequency switching mode, and transitioning to a predetermined game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency switching mode, the number of game rounds in that predetermined game state may progress too quickly, causing the benefits of reaching the ceiling to end before the player can fully experience them. This is a concern as it could significantly reduce the player's attention to the relief function. In this regard, as shown in this feature, setting the termination threshold number to be greater than the upper limit number (second number) can help alleviate the above concern.

Feature H6. In the predetermined game state corresponding to the low probability mode, which is transitioned to when the first count is reached, the first termination count is set as the termination criterion count in the predetermined game state corresponding to the low probability mode, and in the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode, which is transitioned to when the first count is reached in the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode, the second termination count is set as the termination criterion count in the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode.
A gaming machine according to any one of features H3 to H5, characterized in that the first termination criterion count and the second termination criterion count are specified to be the same number.

According to Feature H6, using a first termination criterion count and a second termination criterion count is preferable for simplifying the game's configuration. Even with this configuration, during high-probability mode, the probability of obtaining a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information is increased. Therefore, the probability of obtaining a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information increases while the above-mentioned rescue function is active. Consequently, the above-mentioned inconveniences that may occur in a predetermined game state corresponding to both high-probability mode and low-frequency switching mode can be made less likely to occur.

Feature H7. In the predetermined game state corresponding to the low probability mode, when the first count is reached, the predetermined game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency switching mode is transitioned to, and in the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode, when the first count is reached in the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode, the second termination count is set as the termination criterion count.
The gaming machine according to any one of features H3 to H5, characterized in that the second number of termination criteria is set to be less than the first number of termination criteria.

According to feature H7, by making the number of times the second termination criterion is reached less than the number of times the first termination criterion is reached, the rescue function can be suppressed as a factor that incites gambling tendencies.

Feature H8. The starting ball entry section includes a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92A) in which the determination by the determination means is more favorable to the player than that of the first starting ball entry section.
The gaming machine according to any one of features H3 to H7, characterized in that the variable mechanism is configured to switch between an accepting state (open state) in which a game ball can be entered into the second starting ball entry section and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for a game ball to be entered than in the accepting state.

According to Feature H8, the judgment based on ball entry into the second starting entry area is given preferential treatment to the player compared to the judgment based on ball entry into the first starting entry area. When the ceiling is reached in a predetermined game state corresponding to high probability mode and low frequency switching mode, not only is investment reduced, but the judgment result is also favorable, thus providing a double relief function for the player. Furthermore, when a losing streak occurs in a predetermined game state corresponding to high probability mode and low frequency switching mode, the expectation of reaching the ceiling increases. This contributes to further increasing the player's interest in the game.

Feature H9. A gaming machine according to any one of Features H3 to H8, characterized in that the determination based on ball entry into the first starting ball entry section includes a determination result that triggers a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high-probability mode and the low-frequency switching mode, while the determination based on ball entry into the second starting ball entry section does not include a determination result that triggers a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high-probability mode and the low-frequency switching mode.

According to Feature H9, this feature prevents situations where, during a predetermined game state corresponding to high probability mode and low frequency switching mode, the ceiling is reached and the relief function is activated, but then a judgment result occurs that triggers a transition back to a predetermined game state corresponding to high probability mode and low frequency switching mode, effectively negating the benefits of reaching the ceiling (a wasted draw).

Feature H10. The first starting ball entry section and the second starting ball entry section are arranged on a predetermined flow path in the game area.
The acquired information storage means includes a first storage means (first operation port retention area Ra) for storing special information acquired based on ball entry into the first starting ball entry section, and a second storage means (second operation port retention area Rb) for storing special information acquired based on ball entry into the second starting ball entry section.
The gaming machine according to any one of features H3 to H9, characterized in that the determination means is configured to prioritize the special information stored in the second storage means as the subject of the determination when special information is stored in both the first storage means and the second storage means.

According to the configuration described in this feature, even if the ceiling is reached in a predetermined game state corresponding to high probability mode and low frequency switching mode, and the game transitions to a predetermined game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency switching mode, there is no need to change the target of the game balls in order to enjoy the benefits of the rescue function. Therefore, even in a configuration where the rescue function is activated suddenly without going through a special game state, the wasteful consumption of game balls is suppressed, and the satisfaction level with the rescue function can be appropriately improved.

Feature H11. The high-frequency switching mode is the first high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support mode A),
A second high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) is provided as a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which is set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state is longer than that of the low-frequency switching mode.
The predetermined judgment information includes a third piece of information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the result of a 6R probability variation jackpot) that serves as a trigger for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second high frequency switching mode.
The gaming machine according to any one of features H3 to H10, characterized in that the second high-frequency switching mode is configured such that the ratio of the number of game balls dispensed by the dispensing means to the number of game balls launched by the game ball launching means is higher than that of the first high-frequency switching mode.

According to Feature H11, if the ceiling is reached in a predetermined game state corresponding to both high probability mode and low frequency switching mode, the game will transition to a predetermined game state corresponding to both high probability mode and first high frequency switching mode, where the loss of game balls is reduced compared to a predetermined game state corresponding to both high probability mode and second high frequency switching mode. This configuration emphasizes the advantage of reaching the ceiling and allows for a significant change in the game's rhythm upon reaching that ceiling.

Furthermore, the technical concepts shown in the above-mentioned feature groups A to G may also be applied to feature H1 to feature H11.

<Features Group I>
The following Group I features were developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and issues described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Feature I1. A game board (game board 80aA) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91A, 92A and variable prize entry device 83A) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83A) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that executes the opening and closing process of the variable prize entry device 83A in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93A) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured such that the frequency at which the variable mechanism enters the acceptance state differs.
The determination means provides a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, which includes a low probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively high.
The predetermined judgment information includes specific information that triggers a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the 10R probability variation jackpot result B),
A gaming machine characterized in that, during the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode, if the number of game rounds executed after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling: for example, 50 rounds) without reaching the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, it is equipped with a special transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions to a normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode A when the ceiling is reached).

According to Feature I1, during a predetermined game state corresponding to both the high-probability mode and the second switching mode, if the number of game rounds after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without reaching a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the game transitions to a predetermined game state corresponding to both the high-probability mode and the third switching mode without passing through the special game state. This configuration ensures the player's advantage during the high-probability mode while effectively suppressing monotony in the gameplay.

Feature I2. A game board (game board 80aA) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91A, 92A and variable prize entry device 83A) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83A) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that executes the opening and closing process of the variable prize entry device 83A in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93A) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured such that the frequency at which the variable mechanism enters the acceptance state differs.
The determination means provides a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, which includes a low probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively high.
The predetermined judgment information includes specific information that triggers a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the 10R probability variation jackpot result B),
The high probability mode ends when the number of game rounds played after transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode via the special game state reaches a first reference number (e.g., 100 rounds) without resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, and the second switching mode ends when the number of game rounds played after transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode via the special game state reaches a second reference number (e.g., 50 rounds) which is less than the first reference number, without resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information.
The system includes means for switching the switching control mode to the third switching mode when the number of game rounds played after the end of the special game state does not result in a judgment corresponding to the predetermined judgment information and reaches a third reference number (for example, 50 rounds).
A gaming machine characterized in that the third reference number is defined to be greater than or equal to the second reference number and less than or equal to the first reference number.

According to Feature I2, after transitioning to a predetermined game state corresponding to both the high-probability mode and the second switching mode, the second switching mode ends when the number of game rounds executed does not result in a judgment corresponding to the predetermined judgment information and reaches the second reference number, and the high-probability mode ends when it reaches the first reference number. Here, if the number of game rounds executed after the end of the special game state does not result in a judgment corresponding to the predetermined judgment information and reaches the third reference number, the switching control mode becomes the third switching mode. This third reference number is set to be greater than or equal to the second reference number and less than or equal to the first reference number, so the switching control mode switches to the third switching mode while in high-probability mode. With this configuration, the player's advantage in high-probability mode can be ensured while effectively suppressing the monotony of the game.

Feature I3. A game board (game board 80aA) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91A, 92A and variable prize entry device 83A) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83A) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that executes the opening and closing process of the variable prize entry device 83A in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93A) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured such that the frequency at which the variable mechanism enters the acceptance state differs.
The determination means provides a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, which includes a low probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively high.
The predetermined judgment information includes specific information that triggers a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the 10R probability variation jackpot result B),
The high probability mode ends when the number of game rounds played after transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode via the special game state reaches a first reference number (e.g., 100 rounds) without resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, and the second switching mode ends when the number of game rounds played after transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode via the special game state reaches a second reference number (e.g., 50 rounds) which is less than the first reference number, without resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information.
The system includes means for switching the switching control mode to the third switching mode when the number of game rounds played after the end of the special game state does not result in a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information and is less than the first reference number (for example, 50 rounds).
A gaming machine characterized in that the third reference number of rounds is set to be the same as the second reference number of rounds.

According to Feature I3, after transitioning to a predetermined game state corresponding to both the high-probability mode and the second switching mode, the second switching mode ends when the number of game rounds executed does not result in a judgment corresponding to the predetermined judgment information and reaches the second reference number. The high-probability mode ends when it reaches the first reference number. Here, if the number of game rounds executed after the special game state ends does not result in a judgment corresponding to the predetermined judgment information and reaches the third reference number, the switching control mode becomes the third switching mode. This third reference number is the same as the second reference number, meaning the switching control mode switches from the second switching mode to the third switching mode during the high-probability mode. This configuration effectively suppresses monotony in the game while ensuring the player's advantage during the high-probability mode.

Feature I4. A game board (game board 80aA) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91A, 92A and variable prize entry device 83A) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A) which is the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83A) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that executes the opening and closing process of the variable prize entry device 83A in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93A) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The determination means provides a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, which includes a low probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of obtaining the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively high.
The predetermined judgment information includes specific information that triggers a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the 10R probability variation jackpot result B),
A first transition means that, when the number of game rounds played after transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode via the special game state reaches a first reference number (for example, 100 rounds) without resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, transitions the lottery mode to the low probability mode without going through the special game state,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a second transition means that, when the number of game rounds played after transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode via the special game state becomes a second reference number (for example, 50 rounds) which is less than the first reference number, without resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the switching control mode is transitioned to the third switching mode without going through the special game state.

According to Feature I4, after transitioning to a predetermined game state corresponding to the high-probability mode and the second switching mode, if the number of game rounds executed does not result in a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information and reaches the second reference number, the switching control mode becomes the third switching mode. If it reaches the first reference number, the lottery mode becomes the low-probability mode. This configuration allows for the advantageous position of the player during the high-probability mode while effectively suppressing monotony in the game.

Feature I5. The gaming machine according to Feature I4, characterized in that the third switching mode is configured such that the ratio of the number of game balls dispensed by the dispensing means to the number of game balls launched by the game ball launching means is higher than that of the second switching mode.

As shown in Feature I4, in a type of gaming machine (so-called ST machine) where an upper limit (first reference count) is set on the number of game rounds in a predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode, the likelihood of obtaining a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information decreases as the number of game rounds approaches the first reference count, and the player's expectations may decrease significantly. This is undesirable in terms of increasing the player's attention to the game. In this regard, the configuration shown in this feature allows the machine to switch to the third switching mode when the ceiling is reached, increasing the frequency of balls entering the second starting ball entry area and thus suppressing investment. In this way, by using the ceiling function to further favor the switching control mode in the latter half, the weakness of ST machines (a significant decrease in expectations towards the end) can be overcome.

The configuration described in this feature is a game machine comprising: a game board (game board 80aA) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed; a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation; and a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A or variable prize entry device 83A) provided in the game area, wherein a special information acquisition means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162 acquires the hold information) that acquires special information (hold information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A) which is the ball entry section. A function to execute processing; an acquisition information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing special information acquired by the special information acquisition means; a determination means (a function to execute lottery processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result); and a game rotation operation (in the operation port display units D1 and D2) prior to or based on the determination by the determination means. The game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation port display units D1, D2) so that the game cycle operation is performed for each game cycle according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means, and the game state is set to a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state) based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means is a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means has been completed. A special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that transitions to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the regular game state; a variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83A) that serves as the ball entry section and can be switched between an open state in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a closed state in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the open state; and a control means for the variable ball entry section (a function that executes opening/closing processing of the variable prize entry device 83A in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that switches the variable ball entry section between the open state and the closed state when the game transitions to the special game state.
The system includes a variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93A) that can switch between an open state in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a closed state in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the open state, and a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the variable mechanism (a function that executes electric mechanism support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162), and a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a setting that makes the period in which the variable mechanism is in the open state longer than in the first switching mode. A second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) are provided, wherein the period during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state is longer than in the first switching mode, and the third switching mode is configured such that the ratio of the number of game balls dispensed by the dispensing means to the number of game balls launched by the game ball launching means is higher than in the second switching mode, and a judgment mode (lottery mode) is provided for which the judgment is performed by the judgment means, wherein the probability of obtaining the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information is relatively low and the probability of obtaining the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information is relatively high, and the predetermined judgment information includes specific information that triggers a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high-probability mode and the second switching mode (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the 10R probability variation jackpot result B), and the number of game rounds executed after transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high-probability mode and the second switching mode via the special game state does not result in a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information until the first reference number (for example, 100 times) The game machine is characterized by comprising: a first transition means that, when the situation occurs, transitions the lottery mode to the low probability mode without going through the special game state; and a second transition means that, when the number of game rounds executed after transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode via the special game state becomes a second reference number (for example, 50 rounds) which is less than the first reference number without resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, transitions the switching control mode to the third switching mode without going through the special game state.

Feature I6. The gaming machine according to Feature I4 or Feature I5, characterized in that the second transition means is configured to transition from the second switching mode to the third switching mode during the game round in which the second reference number of rounds is reached.

The configuration shown in Feature I6 allows for smooth gameplay by connecting high-support elements seamlessly.

Feature I7. The gaming machine according to Feature I4 or Feature I5, characterized in that, after transitioning to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode via the special gaming state, if the number of game rounds executed after transitioning to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode reaches the second reference number (e.g., 50 rounds) without resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the machine transitions to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode upon the end of the game round in which the second reference number was reached, and then transitions to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the third switching mode in the next game round.

According to the configuration shown in Feature I7, when the relief function is activated upon reaching the ceiling, the switching control mode changes via the first switching mode to the third switching mode. This configuration enhances the impact when the switching control mode is changed.

Feature I8. The gaming machine according to Feature I7, characterized in that the second reference number of rounds is defined to be less than or equal to the first termination reference number of rounds, and greater than or equal to the difference between the first reference number of rounds and the second reference number of rounds.

According to the configuration described in this feature, by shortening the duration of game rounds in high-probability mode and corresponding to the third switching mode compared to the duration of game rounds in high-probability mode and corresponding to the second switching mode, it is possible to dramatically increase the attention given to the advantageous state transitioning after the end of the special game state.

Feature I9. The acquired information storage means is capable of storing multiple pieces of the special information.
The game round control means includes an operation period setting means that can set the operation period of the game round operation according to the number of special pieces of information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The gaming machine according to any one of features I4 to I5, characterized in that in the third switching mode, the average number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means when game balls are continuously launched toward the starting ball entry section is greater than the average number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means when game balls are continuously launched toward the starting ball entry section in the second switching mode.

According to the configuration described in this feature, the game progresses at a different speed by transitioning from a predetermined game state corresponding to a high-probability mode and a second switching mode to a predetermined game state corresponding to a high-probability mode and a third switching mode, triggered by reaching the ceiling. This further effectively suppresses the monotony of the game.

Feature I10. The starting ball entry section is provided with a first starting ball entry section and a second starting ball entry section in which the determination by the determination means is more favorable to the player than the first starting ball entry section.
The variable mechanism is configured to switch between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the second starting ball entry section and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the accepting state.
Both the first starting ball entry section and the second starting ball entry section are arranged in a predetermined flow path in the game area.
The gaming machine according to feature I9, characterized in that the determination means is configured to perform the determination in the order in which the balls enter the first starting ball entry section and the second starting ball entry section.

According to the configuration described in this feature, reaching the ceiling triggers a transition from a predetermined game state corresponding to a high-probability mode and the second switching mode to a predetermined game state corresponding to a high-probability mode and the third switching mode, thereby increasing the opportunities for game rounds related to the second starting ball entry section to be executed. This significantly increases the player's advantage upon reaching the ceiling, and effectively enhances the level of attention given to gameplay after reaching the ceiling.

Feature I11. The system is equipped with a third transition means that, when the number of game rounds played after transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the third switching mode by the second transition means reaches the third reference number without resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, transitions the switching control mode to the first switching mode without going through the special game state.
The gaming machine according to any one of features I4 to I10, characterized in that the third reference number is specified to be greater than the first reference number.

According to the configuration described in this feature, after the special game state ends, the game transitions in the following order: high probability mode and a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode → high probability mode and a predetermined game state corresponding to the third switching mode → low probability mode and a predetermined game state corresponding to the third switching mode → low probability mode and a predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode. This configuration helps to suppress the rapid decline in attention to the game when the game transitions to the low probability mode after reaching the ceiling and entering the third switching mode.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in features I5 to I11 above may also be applied to features I1 to I3.

Incidentally, the technical concepts shown in the above-mentioned feature groups A to H may also be applied to feature I1 to feature I10.

<Characteristics Group J>
The following group of features J were developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and issues described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Feature J1. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. The system includes a game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that executes the opening and closing process of the variable prize entry device 83 using the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and high-frequency switching modes (high-frequency support modes A and B) that are set to have a longer period of time during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state than in the low-frequency switching mode.
The predetermined game states include a first game state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode (for example, a first normal game state) and a second game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode (for example, a fourth normal game state).
In the first type of game state, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is obtained, and in the first type of game state, if the number of game rounds after the end of the special game state is reached without obtaining the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, the first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state triggered by the special miss result and reaching the ceiling) is obtained,
If, after transitioning to the second type of game state by the first transition means, the number of game rounds played in the second type of game state reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 40 or 400 rounds) without a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the consumption of time-saving features) is provided to transition back to the first type of game state.
The gaming machine is characterized by having a resetting means (a function that overwrites the value of the continuation count counter in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for resetting the number of remaining game rounds that will reach the termination criterion number in the second type of game state when the number of game rounds after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit number during the second type of game state transition triggered by the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information.

According to Feature J1, even if the trigger for transitioning to the special game state (the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information) is not met and the game continues, the game may transition to the second type of game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode due to the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information or reaching the upper limit of the number of games played after the special game state ends (reaching the ceiling). Entering the high-frequency switching mode increases the frequency of balls entering the starting ball entry area, thus reducing investment. Such a configuration is desirable for improving the soundness of the game. However, as mentioned above, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information and reaching the ceiling are used together as triggers for transitioning to the second type of game state, the following concerns arise. Specifically, if the ceiling is reached during the second type of game state and the ceiling is invalidated, some of the benefits that the player could have enjoyed will be lost, and there are concerns that player satisfaction will decrease significantly. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, if the ceiling is reached during the second type of game state, the number of remaining game plays is reset. This eliminates the above concerns and contributes to improving player satisfaction.

Furthermore, the "resetting means" described in this feature may be configured such that the number of remaining game rounds executed when transitioning to the Type 2 game state triggered by the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is the same as the number of remaining game rounds executed when the number of game rounds executed after the end of the special game state reaches the maximum number during the Type 2 game state. Alternatively, the number of remaining game rounds executed when transitioning to the Type 2 game state triggered by the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is different from the number of remaining game rounds executed when the number of game rounds executed after the end of the special game state reaches the maximum number during the Type 2 game state.

Feature J2. The gaming machine according to Feature J1, characterized in that when the number of remaining game rounds is reset by the resetting means, the second type of game state is maintained without passing through any other game state other than the second type of game state.

According to Feature J2, if the ceiling is reached during the Type 2 game state and the remaining number of game rounds is reset, the Type 2 game state will continue without transitioning to another game state as a result of the reset. This is preferable in suppressing disruptions to the rhythm of gameplay in the Type 2 game state.

Feature J3. The gaming machine according to Feature J1 or Feature J2, characterized in that the number of remaining game rounds to be executed by the resetting means is configured to be greater than the number of remaining game rounds to be executed when the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained in the first type of game state.

According to feature J3, this can prevent the number of remaining game rounds from decreasing upon reaching the ceiling, thereby contributing to improved player satisfaction.

Feature J4. The game round control means includes an operation period setting means for setting the operation period of the game round operation,
The aforementioned operating period includes a first operating period (for example, 20 seconds to 30 seconds) and a second operating period shorter than the first operating period (for example, 3 seconds to 14 seconds).
The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J3, wherein the operation period setting means is configured to set the second operation period as the operation period for the number of games in which the upper limit is reached during the second type of game state.

As shown in Feature J4, by configuring the system to set a second operation period as the operation period when the ceiling is reached during the second type of game state, it is possible to effectively suppress the disruption of smooth game progression caused by the reset function.

Feature J5. A gaming machine according to any one of Features J1 to J4, characterized in that, when the remaining number of game rounds is reset by the resetting means while the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state, the acceptance state is maintained until the acceptance period set upon switching to the acceptance state has elapsed.

As shown in Feature J5, even if a reset is performed while the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state, the forced termination of the acceptance state can be avoided, thereby effectively preventing interruptions to the smooth flow of gameplay.

Furthermore, the technical concepts shown in the above-mentioned features A to I may be applied to features J1 to J5.

<Characteristics Group K>
The following group of features K was developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and issues described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Feature K1. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. The system includes a game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the control means for the variable ball entry section switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state (a function that executes the opening and closing process of the variable prize entry device 83 using the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and high-frequency switching modes (high-frequency support modes A and B) that are set to have a longer period of time during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state than in the low-frequency switching mode.
The predetermined game states include a first type of game state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode (for example, a first normal game state) and a second type of game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode (for example, a second normal game state, a third normal game state, and a fourth normal game state).
In the first type of game state, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is obtained, the system is provided with means to transition to the second type of game state without going through the special game state (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state triggered by the special miss result),
In the aforementioned second type of game state, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is obtained, the system is configured to invalidate that judgment result.
The game includes a display and effect execution means (symbol display device 95, notification and effect control device 140, display control device 410) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
As the aforementioned display effects, a first display effect and a second display effect are provided.
The aforementioned display and presentation execution means is
A means for executing the first display effect when the determination result by the determination means is a determination result that does not correspond to the predetermined determination information (normally a false result),
A means for executing the second display effect when the determination result by the determination means is a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information while the game is in the first type of game state,
A gaming machine characterized by having means for executing the first display effect when, under the conditions of the second type of game state, the determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result corresponding to the second determination information (special miss result).

According to Feature K1, even if the trigger for transitioning to the special game state (the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information) is not met and the game continues, the game may transition to the Type 2 game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode by obtaining a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information. Entering the high-frequency switching mode increases the frequency of balls entering the starting ball entry area, thus reducing investment. Such a configuration is desirable in terms of improving the integrity of the game. However, if a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information occurs during the Type 2 game state, that judgment result becomes invalid. While this is desirable in suppressing the increase in gambling tendencies, there is a concern that if the player becomes aware of this result, it may give the player the impression that they have wasted their luck. This could be a factor in reducing the desire to play. In this configuration, if the judgment result from the judgment means does not correspond to the predetermined judgment information (normal miss result), the first display effect is executed. If the judgment result from the judgment means corresponds to the second judgment information (special miss result) while in the first type of game state, the second display effect is executed. If the judgment result from the judgment means corresponds to the second judgment information (special miss result) while in the second type of game state, the first display effect is executed. With this configuration, even if the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information during the second type of game state, it can be made less noticeable. This suppresses the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience and contributes to improving player satisfaction. This is desirable in terms of increasing attention to the game.

Feature K2. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. The system includes a game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that executes the opening and closing process of the variable prize entry device 83 using the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and high-frequency switching modes (high-frequency support modes A and B) that are set to have a longer period of time during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state than in the low-frequency switching mode.
The predetermined game states include a first type of game state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode (for example, a first normal game state) and a second type of game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode (for example, a second normal game state, a third normal game state, and a fourth normal game state).
In the first type of game state, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is obtained, the system is provided with means to transition to the second type of game state without going through the special game state (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state triggered by the special miss result),
In the aforementioned second type of game state, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is obtained, the system is configured to invalidate that judgment result.
The game includes a display and effect execution means (symbol display device 95, notification and effect control device 140, display control device 410) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The aforementioned display and presentation execution means is
A pattern display means (pattern display device 95) having a display screen (display screen 95a) and capable of variably displaying multiple patterns (designs) on the display screen,
The display screen includes a display control means (notification/performance control device 140 and display control device 410) that controls the display of the pattern display means by variably displaying the multiple patterns and then finally stopping and displaying the pattern combination corresponding to the notification result from the predetermined notification means,
The game round control means is configured to control the predetermined notification means so that if a determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained during a game round in which either the first type of game state or the second type of game state is in play, the notification result corresponding to the determination result is obtained.
The display screen is provided with a first symbol combination (a symbol combination that normally indicates a losing result) and a second symbol combination (a symbol combination that indicates a special losing result) as the final symbol combinations to be displayed.
The display control means is
If the determination result by the determination means is a determination result that does not correspond to the predetermined determination information (usually a wrong result), the means for stopping the display of the first pattern combination,
A gaming machine characterized by having means to stop displaying the second symbol combination when the determination result by the determination means is a determination result corresponding to the second determination information (special miss result) while the game is in the first type of game state, and means to stop displaying the first symbol combination when the determination result by the determination means is a determination result corresponding to the second determination information (special miss result) while the game is in the second type of game state.

According to Feature K2, even if the trigger for transitioning to the special game state (the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information) is not met and the game continues, the game may transition to the second type of game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode by obtaining a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information. Entering the high-frequency switching mode increases the frequency of balls entering the starting ball entry area, thus reducing investment. Such a configuration is desirable in terms of improving the integrity of the game. However, if a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information occurs during the second type of game state, that judgment result becomes invalid. While this is desirable in suppressing the increase in gambling tendencies, there is a concern that if the player becomes aware of this result, it may give the player the impression that they have wasted their luck. This could be a factor in reducing the desire to play. In this configuration, if the judgment result does not correspond to the predetermined judgment information (a normal miss), the first symbol combination is displayed as stopped. If the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information (a special miss) while in the first type of game state, the second symbol combination is displayed as stopped. Similarly, if the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information (a special miss) while in the second type of game state, the first symbol combination is displayed as stopped. This configuration makes it less conspicuous even if the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information during the second type of game state. This suppresses the occurrence of the aforementioned inconvenience and contributes to improving player satisfaction. This is desirable in terms of increasing attention to the game.

Feature K3. The game round control means includes an operation period setting means for setting the operation period of the game round operation,
The aforementioned operating period includes a first operating period (for example, 20 seconds to 30 seconds) and a second operating period shorter than the first operating period (for example, 3 seconds to 14 seconds).
The aforementioned operating period setting means is
A means for setting the first operation period as the operation period when the determination result by the determination means is a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information under the conditions of the first type of game state,
In the situation where the second type of game state is in progress, if the determination result by the determination means is a determination result that does not correspond to the predetermined determination information (normally a losing result), means for setting the second operation period as the operation period,
The gaming machine according to feature K1 or feature K2, further comprising means for setting the second operating period as the operating period when the determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result corresponding to the second determination information (special miss result) while the game is in the second type of game state.

According to the configuration described in this feature, if a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) occurs during the first type of game state, the operation period becomes the first operation period. If a judgment result that does not correspond to the predetermined judgment information (normal miss result) occurs during the second type of game state, the operation period becomes the second operation period. If a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) occurs during the second type of game state, the operation period becomes the second operation period. By setting the operation period in this way, it is possible to suppress the feeling of unnaturalness caused by the operation period and to suitably exhibit the effects shown in feature K1, etc.

Feature K4. The second operating period is a variable period that is variable within a predetermined range (for example, 3 sec to 14 sec).
The acquired information storage means is capable of storing multiple pieces of the special information,
The gaming machine according to feature K3, characterized in that, when the determination result by the determination means is in the state of the second type of game, and the determination result is either a determination result that does not correspond to the predetermined determination information (normal failure result) or a determination result that corresponds to the second determination information (special failure result), and the second operation period is set as the operation period, the operation period becomes shorter as the number of special pieces of information stored in the acquired information storage means increases.

In the second type of game state, balls frequently enter the starting ball entry area. Therefore, if the system is configured so that when a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information occurs during the second type of game state, the operation period is shortened according to the number of special information items, similar to when a judgment result not corresponding to the predetermined judgment information occurs, then the game round in which the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information occurs can proceed smoothly and quickly, and the opportunities for the player to notice the notification result in the predetermined notification means can be effectively reduced.

Feature K5. A pre-identification means that identifies whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the second determination information before the special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes the subject of the determination,
In the aforementioned first type of game state, a special performance execution means executes a special performance based on the result specified by the aforementioned prior identification means,
A gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K4, characterized in that, when the game is in the second type of game state, it is equipped with a regulating means that restricts either the identification by the prior identification means or the special performance by the special performance execution means.

By executing special effects (preview effects, pre-reading effects) targeting the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information using the pre-identification means (so-called pre-reading), the monotony of the game can be effectively suppressed. However, in such a configuration, if the special effect occurs during the second type of game state, it not only confuses the player but also significantly reduces the reliability of the special effect. Therefore, it is preferable to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems by configuring the system to restrict either the above-mentioned identification or the special effect during the second type of game state.

Furthermore, the technical concepts shown in the above-mentioned feature groups A to J may also be applied to feature K1 to K5.

<Characteristics Group L>
The following group of features L was developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and issues described above, which state that "while the above-described type of gaming machine can increase attention to gaming machines by promoting the diversification of games, there are concerns that this may lead to new problems such as increased complexity in the management of gaming machines in gaming halls."

Feature L1. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) which is set to have a longer period of time during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state than in the first switching mode.
A first execution count storage means (a game count counter provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404) stores the number of times the game was played after the special game state ended,
When the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the predetermined determination information, the first reset means resets (clears to 0) the number of executions stored in the first execution count storage means (a function that clears the game count counter to 0 by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162 in normal processing, which is a periodic process),
When the number of executions stored in the first execution count storage means reaches the upper limit (ceiling: for example, 400 times), a first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions to the fourth normal game state when the ceiling is reached) causes the system to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without going through the special game state,
A second execution count storage means (a continuation count counter provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404) stores the number of times a game was played in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, which was transitioned to by the first transition means,
In the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, which has been transitioned by the first transition means, when the number of executions stored in the second execution count storage means reaches the termination criterion number (for example, 400 times), a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the time reduction consumption) is provided to transition back to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode.
When a predetermined reset operation (turning on the reset switch 166) is performed in conjunction with the power being turned on to the gaming machine, a second reset means (a function in which the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162 clears the game count counter to 0 in the main processing executed at startup) resets (clears to 0) the number of executions stored in the first execution count storage means,
The gaming machine is characterized by comprising notification means (annular illuminated section 26 of the front door frame 14 and notification/performance control device 140) that performs a predetermined notification (special notification) when the power is turned on without the predetermined reset operation and the game state before the power was cut off was the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode transitioned by the second transition means.

If the number of game rounds played after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without reaching a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the game state transitions to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode. In the second switching mode, balls enter the starting ball entry section more frequently, thereby suppressing investment associated with the progress of the game. Such a function (ceiling function) is desirable in order to provide relief to the player. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, to which the game state transitions upon reaching the ceiling, has an termination criterion number of rounds, and even if the ceiling is reached, there is a possibility that the predetermined game state will end without reaching a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information during that predetermined game state (hereinafter also referred to as "ceiling rush"). This is desirable in order to avoid the benefit of reaching the ceiling becoming excessive and becoming a factor that excessively stimulates gambling. However, after a ceiling rush, the number of rounds stored in the first round count storage means is not reset, and it becomes impossible to reach the ceiling again. Here, if the power of the game machine is turned OFF → ON without performing a predetermined reset operation while in the state after a ceiling rush, a predetermined notification is executed. This allows the manager of the gaming hall to determine whether or not the machine has reached its maximum payout limit. Supporting the determination of the machine's state after reaching the maximum payout limit by simply turning on the power is desirable in terms of improving the manager's convenience.

Feature L2. A first operating means (performance button 35) and a second operating means (reset switch 166),
The system includes a notification cancellation means for canceling the predetermined notification when either the first operating means or the second operating means is operated while the predetermined notification is being performed.
The gaming machine according to feature L1, characterized in that the execution count stored in the first execution count storage means is reset when the second operating means is operated while the predetermined notification is being performed.

According to the configuration described in this feature, the manager of the amusement hall can easily select how to respond to amusement machines that are displaying a predetermined notification, depending on the operating style of the amusement hall. In other words, they can choose to either cancel only the predetermined notification and leave the machine in a state where it has exceeded the ceiling limit, or reset the ceiling limit. This configuration allows the effects described in feature L1 to be more effectively realized.

Feature L3. The gaming machine according to Feature L2, characterized in that the first operating means is located on the front side of the gaming machine, and the second operating means is located on the rear side of the gaming machine.

As shown in this feature, by arranging the second operating means for resetting and canceling the notification on the back of the gaming machine and the first operating means for canceling the notification on the front of the gaming machine, it is possible to improve the convenience for administrators while making it less likely for the player to reset the number of executions.

Feature L4. The notification cancellation means is a first notification cancellation means,
The gaming machine according to feature L2 or feature L3, further comprising a second notification cancellation means for canceling the predetermined notification when the power is cut off and then turned back on while the predetermined notification is being performed.

In gaming halls, numerous gaming machines are often installed in island-style setups. A larger number of machines means a greater number of machines triggering the aforementioned notification. Therefore, as described in this feature, if the notification is deactivated by turning the power OFF and then ON while the notification is active, it eliminates the need to perform the deactivation operation individually for each gaming machine, further improving the convenience for administrators.

Feature L5. The notification means provides the predetermined notification by setting a light-emitting display unit (ring-shaped illuminated unit 26) provided on the front of the gaming machine (front door frame 14) to a predetermined light-emitting mode (for example, fully lit).
A gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L4, characterized in that it is equipped with a regulating means for regulating the predetermined notification when at least the game rounds are progressing by the game round control means.

To make the designated notification as conspicuous as possible, there is technical merit in displaying the notification on a light-emitting display unit located on the front of the gaming machine. However, if the designated notification is missed or otherwise not canceled, the notification will continue even during the gaming hall's operating hours. In the configuration described in this feature, the designated notification is restricted at least while the game is in progress. This allows for the use of the light-emitting display unit for purposes such as visual effects. This is preferable in that it suppresses the missed notification while simultaneously suppressing the resulting decrease in the effectiveness of the visual effects.

Incidentally, the configuration shown in this feature is described as follows: "The notification means provides the predetermined notification by setting the light-emitting display unit (ring-shaped illuminated unit 26) provided on the front part (front door frame 14) of the gaming machine to a predetermined light-emitting mode (for example, fully lit)."
The game machine according to any one of features L1 to L4, characterized in that the predetermined notification is canceled when a game round is started by the game round control means.

Furthermore, the technical concepts shown in the above-mentioned feature groups A to K may also be applied to feature L1 to feature L5.

<Characteristics of Group M>
The following group of features M were developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and issues described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Feature M1. A game board (game board 80aA) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91A, 92A and variable prize entry device 83A) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83A) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93A) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and high-frequency switching modes (high-frequency support modes A and B) that are set to have a longer period of time during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state than in the low-frequency switching mode.
The predetermined game states include a first type of game state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode (for example, a first normal game state) and a second type of game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode (for example, a second normal game state, a third normal game state, and a fourth normal game state).
In the first type of game state, if the number of game rounds played after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling: for example, 400 rounds) without reaching the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, a means for transitioning to the second type of game state without going through the special game state (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions to the fourth normal game state when the ceiling is reached),
The system includes a display and effect execution means (a symbol display device 95, a notification and effect control device 140, and a display control device 410) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The aforementioned display effects include a first display effect that clearly indicates that the upper limit has been reached, and a second display effect that does not clearly indicate that the upper limit has been reached.
The predetermined judgment information includes a first piece of information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the result of a 6R probability variation jackpot) and a second piece of information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the result of a 2R probability variation jackpot),
The aforementioned display and presentation execution means is
A means for executing a first display effect when the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the determination result of the first information in the game round in which the upper limit number of times is reached,
A gaming machine characterized by having means for executing a second display effect when the determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result corresponding to the second information in the game round in which the upper limit number of times is reached.

If the number of game rounds played after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without the result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the game transitions to a Type 2 game state compatible with high-frequency switching mode. In the Type 2 game state, balls enter the starting ball entry area frequently, thereby suppressing investment associated with game progression. Such a function (ceiling function) is desirable in order to provide relief to players. Here, if the above-mentioned ceiling function is provided, there is a possibility that the result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information will be reached in the game rounds in which the ceiling is reached. In the configuration shown in this feature, if the above-mentioned duplication occurs, different display effects are executed depending on whether the judgment result corresponds to the first information or the second information. Specifically, if the result corresponds to the first information in the game rounds in which the upper limit is reached, a first display effect indicating that the upper limit has been reached is executed, and if the result corresponds to the second information in the game rounds in which the upper limit is reached, a second display effect that does not indicate that the upper limit has been reached is executed. This configuration helps to prevent the game's presentation from becoming monotonous and contributes to increasing player engagement.

Furthermore, the description of "predetermined judgment information" can also be rephrased as follows: "The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first set of information that gives the player a relatively high advantage (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the result of a 6R probability variation jackpot) and a second set of information that gives the player a relatively low advantage (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the result of a 2R probability variation jackpot)."

Feature M2. A game board (game board 80aA) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91A, 92A and variable prize entry device 83A) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83A) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93A) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and high-frequency switching modes (high-frequency support modes A and B) that are set to have a longer period of time during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state than in the low-frequency switching mode.
The predetermined game states include a first type of game state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode (for example, a first normal game state) and a second type of game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode (for example, a second normal game state or a fourth normal game state).
In the first type of game state, if the number of game rounds played after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling: for example, 400 rounds) without reaching the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the system is provided with means to transition to the second type of game state without going through the special game state (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions to the fourth normal game state when the ceiling is reached).
The predetermined judgment information includes a first piece of information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the result of a 6R probability variation jackpot) and a second piece of information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the result of a 2R probability variation jackpot),
When the determination by the determination means results in a determination result corresponding to the first information, the means for transitioning to the second type of game state via the special game state,
When the determination by the determination means results in a determination result corresponding to the second information, the means for transitioning to the first type of game state via the special game state,
The system includes a display and effect execution means (a symbol display device 95, a notification and effect control device 140, and a display control device 410) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The aforementioned display effects include a first display effect that clearly indicates that the upper limit has been reached, and a second display effect that does not clearly indicate that the upper limit has been reached.
The aforementioned display and presentation execution means is
A means for executing a first display effect when the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the determination result of the first information in the game round in which the upper limit number of times is reached,
A gaming machine characterized by having means for executing a second display effect when the determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result corresponding to the second information in the game round in which the upper limit number of times is reached.

If the number of game rounds played after the special game state ends (number of games played) reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without the result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the game transitions to a Type 2 game state compatible with high-frequency switching mode. In the Type 2 game state, balls enter the starting ball entry area frequently, thereby suppressing investment associated with game progression. Such a function (ceiling function) is desirable in order to provide relief to players. However, if the above-mentioned ceiling function is implemented, it is assumed that the player's investment will be high when the ceiling is reached. Therefore, if it becomes noticeable that players cannot enjoy the benefits despite reaching the ceiling, it is a concern that it will lead to a decrease in players' motivation to play. This is undesirable in order to increase the level of attention given to the game. In the configuration shown in this feature, if the result corresponds to the predetermined judgment information in the game round in which the ceiling is reached (if there is a duplicate), different display effects are executed depending on whether the judgment result corresponds to the first information or the second information. Specifically, in a game where the maximum number of plays is reached, if the judgment result corresponds to the first piece of information (i.e., a judgment result that results in a high-frequency switching mode after the special game state ends), a first display effect indicating that the maximum number of plays has been reached is executed. If the judgment result corresponds to the second piece of information (i.e., a judgment result that results in a low-frequency switching mode after the special game state ends), a second display effect that does not indicate that the maximum number of plays has been reached is executed. With this configuration, when the judgment result corresponds to the first piece of information and results in a special game state → high-frequency switching mode, the player can be led to believe that this is a benefit of reaching the ceiling. Conversely, when the judgment result corresponds to the second piece of information and results in a special game state → low-frequency switching mode, the player can be led to believe that there was no benefit at all by not explicitly indicating that the ceiling has been reached. This configuration effectively improves player satisfaction and increases attention to the game.

Feature M3. A game board (game board 80aA) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91A, 92A and variable prize entry device 83A) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83A) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93A) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and high-frequency switching modes (high-frequency support modes A and B) that are set to have a longer period of time during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state than in the low-frequency switching mode.
The predetermined game states include a first type of game state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode (for example, a first normal game state) and a second type of game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode (for example, a second normal game state, a third normal game state, and a fourth normal game state).
In the first type of game state, if the number of game rounds played after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling: for example, 400 rounds) without reaching the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, a means for transitioning to the second type of game state without going through the special game state (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions to the fourth normal game state when the ceiling is reached),
The system includes a means for transitioning to the first type of game state when the number of game rounds played in the second type of game state transitioned by the second transition means reaches the first termination criterion round (for example, 400 rounds) without the number of game rounds reaching the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information,
The predetermined judgment information includes a first piece of information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the result of a 6R probability variation jackpot) and a second piece of information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the result of a 6R normal jackpot),
The determination means provides a means for transitioning to the second type of game state via the special game state when the determination means results in a determination result corresponding to the first information and a determination result corresponding to the second information.
The second type of game state, which is transitioned to after a judgment result corresponding to the first information, continues until the next judgment result corresponds to the predetermined judgment information. On the other hand, the second type of game state, which is transitioned to after a judgment result corresponding to the second information, transitions back to the first type of game state when the next judgment result corresponds to the predetermined judgment information, or when the number of game rounds executed in the second type of game state becomes less than the first termination criterion number (for example, 40 rounds) without the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information.
The game includes a display and effect execution means (symbol display device 95, notification and effect control device 140, display control device 410) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The aforementioned display effects include a first display effect that clearly indicates that the upper limit has been reached, and a second display effect that does not clearly indicate that the upper limit has been reached.
The aforementioned display and presentation execution means is
A means for executing a first display effect when the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the determination result of the first information in the game round in which the upper limit number of times is reached,
A gaming machine characterized by having means for executing a second display effect when the determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result corresponding to the second information in the game round in which the upper limit number of times is reached.

If the number of game rounds played after the special game state ends (number of games played) reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without the result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the game transitions to a Type 2 game state compatible with high-frequency switching mode. In the Type 2 game state, balls enter the starting ball entry area frequently, thereby suppressing investment associated with game progression. Such a function (ceiling function) is desirable in order to provide relief to players. However, if the above-mentioned ceiling function is implemented, it is assumed that the player's investment will be high when the ceiling is reached. Therefore, if it becomes noticeable that players cannot enjoy the benefits despite reaching the ceiling, it is a concern that it will lead to a decrease in players' motivation to play. This is undesirable in order to increase the level of attention given to the game. In the configuration shown in this feature, if the result corresponds to the predetermined judgment information in the game round in which the ceiling is reached (if there is a duplicate), different display effects are executed depending on whether the judgment result corresponds to the first information or the second information. Specifically, in a game where the maximum number of plays is reached, if the judgment result corresponds to the first piece of information (i.e., a judgment result that results in a high-frequency switching mode for long continuation after the special game state ends), the first display animation indicating that the maximum number of plays has been reached is executed. If the judgment result corresponds to the second piece of information (i.e., a judgment result that results in a high-frequency switching mode for short continuation after the special game state ends), the second display animation that does not indicate that the maximum number of plays has been reached is executed. With this configuration, if the judgment result corresponds to the first piece of information, resulting in a special game state → high-frequency switching mode for long continuation, the player can be led to believe that this is a benefit of reaching the ceiling. If the judgment result corresponds to the second piece of information, resulting in a special game state → high-frequency switching mode for short continuation, the player can be led to believe that there was no benefit at all by not explicitly indicating that the ceiling has been reached. This configuration effectively improves player satisfaction and increases attention to the game.

Furthermore, the description in this feature that states "the second type of game state to which the judgment result corresponding to the first information is obtained is continued until the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information is obtained next, while the second type of game state to which the judgment result corresponding to the second information is obtained next is configured to transition to the first type of game state when the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information is obtained next, or when the number of game rounds executed in the second type of game state becomes less than the first termination criterion number (for example, 40 rounds) without the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information being obtained" should be changed to "the judgment result corresponding to the first information is obtained In the transitioned Type 2 game state, if the number of game rounds reaches a second termination criterion number (e.g., 9999 rounds) that is greater than the first termination criterion number without reaching a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the system transitions back to the Type 1 game state. Conversely, in the transitioned Type 2 game state after the judgment result corresponding to the second information, if the number of game rounds reaches a third termination criterion number (e.g., 40 rounds) that is greater than the first termination criterion number without reaching a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the system transitions back to the Type 1 game state. This configuration can also be changed to:

Feature M4. The gaming machine according to any one of Features M1 to M3, characterized in that, in the first display effect, the means executes an effect indicating that the upper limit has been reached, and then executes an effect indicating that the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information has been obtained, whereas in the second display effect, the effect indicating that the upper limit has been reached is not executed, and instead an effect indicating that the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information has been obtained is executed.

According to the configuration described in this feature, the first display animation, executed when the judgment result corresponding to the first piece of information is reached, explicitly states that the ceiling has been reached, and then explicitly states that the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information has been reached. With this configuration, the explicit statement that the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information has been reached leads to a special game state, thus minimizing any sense of incongruity in the animation and making it appear as if two benefits are being granted.

Feature M5. A game board (game board 80aA) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91A, 92A and variable prize entry device 83A) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83A) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93A) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides the following switching control modes (support modes) for the variable mechanism: a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) set to make it difficult or impossible to enter the starting ball entry section; a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to make it easier to enter the starting ball entry section than in the first switching mode by making the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state longer than in the first switching mode; and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to make it easier to enter the starting ball entry section than in the first switching mode by making the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state longer than in the first switching mode.
The predetermined judgment information includes a first piece of information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the result of a 6R probability variation jackpot) and a second piece of information (for example, a group of random numbers corresponding to the result of a 2R probability variation jackpot),
A first transition means that, when the determination by the determination means results in a determination result corresponding to the first information, transitions to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode via the special game state,
A second transition means that, when the determination by the determination means results in a determination result corresponding to the second information, transitions to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode via the special game state,
When the number of game rounds played after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling: for example, 400 rounds) without reaching the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, a third transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions to the fourth normal game state when the ceiling is reached) is provided to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the third switching mode without going through the special game state.
The system includes a display and effect execution means (a symbol display device 95, a notification and effect control device 140, and a display control device 410) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The aforementioned display effects include a first display effect that clearly indicates that the upper limit has been reached, and a second display effect that does not clearly indicate that the upper limit has been reached.
The aforementioned display and presentation execution means is
A means for executing a first display effect when the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the determination result of the first information in the game round in which the upper limit number of times is reached,
A gaming machine characterized by having means for executing a second display effect when the determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result corresponding to the second information in the game round in which the upper limit number of times is reached.

If the number of game rounds played after the special game state ends (number of games played) reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without the result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the game transitions to a predetermined game state corresponding to the third switching mode. In this predetermined game state, balls enter the starting ball entry section frequently, thereby suppressing investment associated with the progress of the game. Such a function (ceiling function) is desirable in order to provide relief to players. However, if the above-mentioned ceiling function is implemented, it is assumed that the player's investment will be high when the ceiling is reached. Therefore, if it becomes noticeable that players cannot enjoy the benefits despite reaching the ceiling, it is a concern that it will lead to a decrease in players' motivation to play. This is undesirable in order to increase the level of attention given to the game. In the configuration shown in this feature, if the result corresponds to the predetermined judgment information in the number of games played that reaches the ceiling (if there is a duplicate), different display effects are executed depending on whether the judgment result corresponds to the first information or the second information. Specifically, in the game rounds in which the maximum number of plays is reached, if the judgment result corresponds to the first information (i.e., the judgment result that results in the second switching mode after the special game state ends), the first display effect indicating that the maximum number of plays has been reached is executed. If the judgment result corresponds to the second information (i.e., the judgment result that results in the first switching mode after the special game state ends) in the game rounds in which the maximum number of plays is reached, the second display effect that does not indicate that the maximum number of plays has been reached is executed. With this configuration, when the judgment result corresponds to the first information and results in the special game state → high-frequency switching mode (second switching mode), the player can be made to imagine that this is a benefit of reaching the ceiling. When the judgment result corresponds to the second information and results in the special game state → low-frequency switching mode (first switching mode), the player can be made to imagine that there is no benefit at all by not indicating that the ceiling has been reached. With this configuration, it is possible to effectively improve player satisfaction and increase attention to the game.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in features M1 to M4 above may also be applied to feature M5.

Incidentally, the technical concepts shown in the above feature groups A to L may also be applied to feature M1 to feature M3.

<Features Group N>
The following group of features N were developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and issues described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Feature N1. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) which is set to have a longer period of time during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state than in the first switching mode.
When the result of the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode becomes a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information, a first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state triggered by the special miss result) is provided to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without going through the special game state.
In the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, which has been transitioned by the first transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 20, 40, or 260 rounds) without reaching the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the time reduction) is provided to transition back to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode.
The system includes a display and effect execution means (a symbol display device 95, a notification and effect control device 140, and a display control device 410) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The aforementioned display and presentation execution means is
A pattern display means (pattern display device 95) having a display screen (display screen 95a) and capable of variably displaying multiple patterns (designs) on the display screen,
The display screen includes a display control means (notification/performance control device 140 and display control device 410) that controls the display of the pattern display means by variably displaying the multiple patterns and then finally stopping and displaying the pattern combination corresponding to the notification result from the predetermined notification means,
The display control means is
When the determination result corresponds to the second determination information, a special stop display means (a function that executes a temporary stop process in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) stops and displays the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the second determination information as a pattern combination corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means,
The device has a special variable display means (a function that executes processing for re-variation display in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140), which causes the predetermined combination of patterns that has been stopped by the special stop display means to be changed again before the final stop display occurs.
Multiple reference counts (for example, 20, 40, 100 times) are provided as the termination reference counts, and when the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information and the game transitions to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, one of the multiple reference counts is set as the termination reference count for this time. This is done by a termination reference count setting means (a function that executes the setting process of the continuation count counter in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The system includes a correlation information notification means (a remaining count counter displayed on the count display unit 88C and a notification/performance control device 140) that notifies the player of correlation information (counts) that are correlated with the number of times set by the termination criterion count setting means,
The correlation information notification means is characterized by having an information update means (a function that performs a count-up process in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) that updates the correlation information being notified based on the fact that the predetermined combination of patterns has been displayed in a predetermined position after variable display by the special variable display means.

As shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (jackpot result) is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via a special game state, and if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is obtained, the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state. This configuration diversifies the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher switching control mode, contributing to the suppression of monotony in gameplay. In particular, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained, one of several reference counts is set as the reference count for ending this time, further diversification of gameplay is achieved. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained, the player is made aware that the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information has been obtained by stopping and displaying a predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the second judgment information. After that, the system is configured to display a variable display again before the final stop display, and the correlation information is updated in conjunction with this variable display. The player can understand that the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information has been reached based on the stopping (temporary stopping) display of a predetermined combination of symbols. Subsequently, the correlation information is updated each time the symbol combination reaches a predetermined position, allowing the player to estimate or understand the number of rounds required to terminate the current round. This configuration allows for a favorable increase in the player's attention to the game when transitioning to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, triggered by the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information.

Feature N2. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) which is set to have a longer period of time during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state than in the first switching mode.
When the result of the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode becomes a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information, a first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state triggered by the special miss result) is provided to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without going through the special game state.
In the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, which has been transitioned by the first transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 20, 40, or 260 rounds) without reaching the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the time reduction) is provided to transition back to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode.
The system includes a display and effect execution means (a symbol display device 95, a notification and effect control device 140, and a display control device 410) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The aforementioned display and presentation execution means is
A pattern display means (pattern display device 95) having a display screen (display screen 95a) and capable of variably displaying multiple pattern rows (left pattern row, middle pattern row, right pattern row) on the display screen,
The display screen includes a display control means (notification/performance control device 140 and display control device 410) that controls the display of the pattern display means by variably displaying the plurality of pattern rows and then finally stopping and displaying the pattern combination corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means,
The display control means is
When the determination result corresponds to the second determination information, a special stop display means (a function that executes a temporary stop process in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) stops and displays a predetermined combination of patterns corresponding to the second determination information as a pattern combination corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means,
The device has a special circulating display means (a function that executes processing for re-display in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) which causes the predetermined combination of patterns that has been stopped by the special stop display means to be displayed in a circulating manner before the final stop display occurs.
Multiple reference counts (for example, 20, 40, 100 times) are provided as the termination reference counts, and when the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information and the game transitions to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, one of the multiple reference counts is set as the termination reference count for this time. This is done by a termination reference count setting means (a function that executes the setting process of the continuation count counter in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The system includes a correlation information notification means (a remaining count counter displayed on the count display unit 88C and a notification/performance control device 140) that notifies the player of correlation information (counts) that are correlated with the number of times set by the termination criterion count setting means,
The correlation information notification means is characterized in that it has an information update means (a function that performs a count-up process in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) which updates the correlation information being notified based on the movement of the predetermined combination of symbols when the predetermined combination of symbols is being displayed in a loop by the special loop display means.

As shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (jackpot result) is changed via a special game state, and if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is changed without going through the special game state, the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher-level switching control mode can be diversified, contributing to the suppression of monotony in gameplay. In particular, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is set, one of several reference counts is set as the reference count for ending this time, further diversification of gameplay is achieved. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is changed, the player is made aware that the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information has been changed by stopping and displaying a predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the second judgment information. After that, the predetermined combination of symbols is displayed in a loop before the final stop display, and the correlation information is updated in conjunction with this loop display. The player can understand that the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information has been reached based on the stopping display (temporary stop display) of a predetermined combination of symbols. Subsequently, the correlation information is updated, allowing the player to estimate or understand the number of turns required to terminate the game. This configuration allows for a favorable increase in the player's attention to the game when transitioning to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, triggered by the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information.

Feature N3. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) which is set to have a longer period of time during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state than in the first switching mode.
When the result of the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode becomes a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information, a first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state triggered by the special miss result) is provided to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without going through the special game state.
In the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, which has been transitioned by the first transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 20, 40, or 260 rounds) without reaching the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the time reduction) is provided to transition back to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode.
The system includes a display and effect execution means (a symbol display device 95, a notification and effect control device 140, and a display control device 410) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The aforementioned display and presentation execution means is
A pattern display means (pattern display device 95) having a display screen (display screen 95a) and capable of variably displaying multiple pattern rows (left pattern row, middle pattern row, right pattern row) on the display screen,
The display screen includes a display control means (notification/performance control device 140 and display control device 410) that controls the display of the pattern display means by variably displaying the plurality of pattern rows and then finally stopping and displaying the pattern combination corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means,
The display control means is
When the determination result corresponds to the second determination information, a special stop display means (a function that executes a temporary stop process in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) stops and displays the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the second determination information as a pattern combination corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means,
The device has a special circulating display means (a function that executes processing for re-display in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) which causes the predetermined combination of patterns that has been stopped by the special stop display means to be displayed in a circulating manner before the final stop display occurs.
Multiple reference counts (for example, 20, 40, 100 times) are provided as the termination reference counts, and when the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information and the game transitions to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, one of the multiple reference counts is set as the termination reference count for this time. This is done by a termination reference count setting means (a function that executes the setting process of the continuation count counter in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The system includes a correlation information notification means (a remaining count counter displayed on the count display unit 88C and a notification/performance control device 140) that notifies the player of correlation information (counts) that are correlated with the number of times set by the termination criterion count setting means,
The correlation information notification means is characterized by having an information update means (a function that performs a count-up process in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) that updates the correlation information being notified based on the fact that the predetermined combination of patterns has completed a cycle by the special cycle display means.

As shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (jackpot result) is changed via a special game state, and if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is changed without going through the special game state, the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher-level switching control mode can be diversified, contributing to the suppression of monotony in gameplay. In particular, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is set, one of several reference counts is set as the reference count for ending this time, further diversification of gameplay is achieved. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is changed, the player is made aware that the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information has been changed by stopping and displaying a predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the second judgment information. After that, the predetermined combination of symbols is displayed in a loop before the final stop display, and the correlation information is updated in conjunction with this loop display. The player can understand that the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information has been reached based on the stopping (temporary stopping) display of a predetermined combination of symbols. Subsequently, the correlation information is updated according to the number of cycles of the predetermined combination of symbols, allowing the player to estimate or understand the current number of cycles until the game ends. This configuration allows for a favorable increase in the player's attention to the game when transitioning to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, triggered by the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information.

Feature N4. The gaming machine according to Feature N2 or Feature N3, characterized in that the special rotation display means is configured to perform the rotation display in such a way that the predetermined combination of patterns is maintained.

As shown in Feature N2, etc., in a configuration that updates correlation information by displaying a predetermined combination of symbols in a circular pattern, there is a concern that if circumstances occur during the circular patterning process that cause the predetermined combination of symbols to break down, it may give the impression that the circular patterning is not performed properly, i.e., that the correlation information is not updated, leading to a premature decline in attention to the animation. Therefore, by configuring the circular patterning to maintain the predetermined combination of symbols, as shown in this feature, the occurrence of such problems can be effectively suppressed. Furthermore, such a configuration is preferable in order to avoid the player mistakenly believing that the display of the predetermined combination of symbols at a stop was a misreading.

Feature N5. The gaming machine according to Feature N2 or Feature N3, characterized in that the special rotation display means is configured to perform the rotation display by synchronizing the multiple rows of patterns.

As shown in Feature N2, etc., in a configuration that updates correlation information by displaying a predetermined combination of symbols in a circular pattern, there is a concern that if circumstances occur during the circular process that cause the predetermined combination of symbols to break down, it may give the impression that the circular process is not being performed properly, i.e., that the correlation information is not being updated, and that attention to the animation may decline prematurely. Therefore, by configuring the circular display to synchronize each row of symbols as shown in this feature, the occurrence of such problems can be effectively suppressed. Furthermore, such a configuration is also preferable in that it avoids the misunderstanding by the player that the display of the predetermined combination of symbols was a misreading.

Feature N6. The gaming machine according to Feature N4 or Feature N5, characterized in that the other symbol combinations displayed in the special rotation display do not include the symbol combination corresponding to the first judgment information.

Feature N6 effectively avoids misleading players by suppressing unnecessary hype that might suggest an upgrade to the result corresponding to the first judgment information. This is desirable in preventing a decrease in attention to the updates of correlation information linked to the special lap display.

Feature N7. The correlation information notification means is configured to display the remaining number of times the termination criterion number of times will be reached as the correlation information.
The gaming machine according to any one of features N2 to N6, characterized in that the information updating means is configured to add and display the remaining number of rounds as an update each time the predetermined combination of patterns is completed.

As shown in Feature N7, if the remaining number of rounds is displayed incremented each time a predetermined combination of symbols completes a cycle, the player will expect the cycle to continue for as long as possible. This effectively suppresses the impression that the transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode is being unnecessarily delayed by this effect.

Feature N8. The display control means has a lap count setting means that sets the number of laps using the special lap count display means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features N2 to N7, characterized in that the means for setting the number of laps is configured such that the number of laps increases as the number of set termination criteria increases.

According to the configuration shown in Feature N8, players expect the circling motion to continue for as long as possible, and this effectively suppresses the impression that the transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode is unnecessarily delayed.

Feature N9. The display screen of the pattern display means is provided with multiple active lines.
The special stop display means is configured to set one of the multiple active lines as a stop line for displaying the predetermined combination of patterns.
The gaming machine according to any one of features N2 to N8, characterized in that the correlation information notification means is configured to update the correlation information when the predetermined combination of patterns reaches the stop line by the rotational display by the special rotational display means.

As shown in this feature, by aligning the stop line where a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed (temporarily stopped) with the stop line that triggers the update of correlation information, it is possible to suppress player confusion caused by the diversification of the presentation. This is preferable for effectively achieving the aforementioned effect of increasing attention.

Feature N10. The gaming machine according to Feature N9, characterized in that the special stop indicator means is configured to set the stop line such that at least one effective line is secured in front of the stop line in the rotational direction of the pattern.

According to the configuration described in this feature, it becomes possible to terminate the loop display when a predetermined combination of symbols reaches another valid line preceding the valid line (stop line) that triggers the update of correlation information. This is desirable for achieving diversification of the presentation.

Feature N11. The game machine according to Feature N9 or Feature N10, characterized in that the correlation information notification means remains hidden when the predetermined pattern combination is stopped and displayed by the special stop display means, and begins displaying the correlation information when the predetermined pattern combination reaches the stop line after variable display.

As shown in this feature, if the correlation information is kept hidden when a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed as stopped (temporarily stopped), and the display of the correlation information is started when the predetermined combination of symbols reaches the stop line after being displayed in a variable manner, it becomes possible to make the predetermined combination of symbols complete a cycle at least once. This is preferable because it broadens the range of the set termination criteria number of cycles while suppressing the resulting obsolescence of the cycle display → correlation information update flow.

Feature N12. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured such that the frequency at which the variable mechanism enters the acceptance state differs.
When the result of the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode becomes a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information, a first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state triggered by the special miss result) is provided to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without going through the special game state.
In the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, which has been transitioned by the first transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 20, 40, or 100 rounds) without reaching the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the time reduction) is provided to transition back to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode.
The system includes a display and effect execution means (a symbol display device 95, a notification and effect control device 140, and a display control device 410) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The aforementioned display and presentation execution means is
A pattern display means (pattern display device 95) having a display screen (display screen 95a) and capable of variably displaying multiple patterns (designs) on the display screen,
The display screen includes a display control means (notification/performance control device 140 and display control device 410) that controls the display of the pattern display means by variably displaying the multiple patterns and then finally stopping and displaying the pattern combination corresponding to the notification result from the predetermined notification means,
The display control means is
When the determination result corresponds to the second determination information, a special stop display means (a function that executes a temporary stop process in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) stops and displays the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the second determination information as a pattern combination corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means,
The device has a special variable display means (a function that executes processing for re-variation display in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140), which causes the predetermined combination of patterns that has been stopped by the special stop display means to be changed again before the final stop display occurs.
Multiple reference counts (for example, 20, 40, 100 times) are provided as the termination reference counts, and when the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information and the game transitions to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, one of the multiple reference counts is set as the termination reference count for this time. This is done by a termination reference count setting means (a function that executes the setting process of the continuation count counter in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The system includes a correlation information notification means (a remaining count counter displayed on the count display unit 88C and a notification/performance control device 140) that notifies the player of correlation information (counts) that are correlated with the number of times set by the termination criterion count setting means,
The correlation information notification means is characterized by having an information update means (a function that performs a count-up process in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) that updates the correlation information being notified based on the fact that the predetermined combination of patterns has been displayed in a predetermined position after variable display by the special variable display means.

As shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (jackpot result) is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via a special game state, and if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is obtained, the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state. This configuration diversifies the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher switching control mode, contributing to the suppression of monotony in gameplay. In particular, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained, one of several reference counts is set as the reference count for ending this time, further diversification of gameplay is achieved. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained, the player is made aware that the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information has been obtained by stopping and displaying a predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the second judgment information. After that, the system is configured to display a variable display again before the final stop display, and the correlation information is updated in conjunction with this variable display. The player can understand that the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information has been reached based on the stopping (temporary stopping) display of a predetermined combination of symbols. Subsequently, the correlation information is updated each time the symbol combination reaches a predetermined position, allowing the player to estimate or understand the number of rounds required to terminate the current round. This configuration allows for a favorable increase in the player's attention to the game when transitioning to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, triggered by the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information.

Feature N13. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured such that the frequency at which the variable mechanism enters the acceptance state differs.
When the result of the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode becomes a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information, a first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state triggered by the special miss result) is provided to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without going through the special game state.
In the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, which has been transitioned by the first transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 20, 40, or 100 rounds) without reaching the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the time reduction) is provided to transition back to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode.
The system includes a display and effect execution means (a symbol display device 95, a notification and effect control device 140, and a display control device 410) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The display control means is
When the determination result corresponds to the second determination information, a special stop display means (a function that executes a temporary stop process in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) stops and displays the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the second determination information as a pattern combination corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means,
The device has a special circulating display means (a function that executes processing for re-display in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) which causes the predetermined combination of patterns that has been stopped by the special stop display means to be displayed in a circulating manner before the final stop display occurs.
Multiple reference counts (for example, 20, 40, 100 times) are provided as the termination reference counts, and when the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information and the game transitions to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, one of the multiple reference counts is set as the termination reference count for this time. This is done by a termination reference count setting means (a function that executes the setting process of the continuation count counter in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The system includes a correlation information notification means (a remaining count counter displayed on the count display unit 88C and a notification/performance control device 140) that notifies the player of correlation information (counts) that are correlated with the number of times set by the termination criterion count setting means,
The correlation information notification means is characterized in that it has an information update means (a function that performs a count-up process in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) which updates the correlation information being notified based on the movement of the predetermined combination of symbols when the predetermined combination of symbols is being displayed in a loop by the special loop display means.

As shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (jackpot result) is changed via a special game state, and if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is changed without going through the special game state, the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher-level switching control mode can be diversified, contributing to the suppression of monotony in gameplay. In particular, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is set, one of several reference counts is set as the reference count for ending this time, further diversification of gameplay is achieved. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is changed, the player is made aware that the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information has been changed by stopping and displaying a predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the second judgment information. After that, the predetermined combination of symbols is displayed in a loop before the final stop display, and the correlation information is updated in conjunction with this loop display. The player can understand that the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information has been reached based on the stopping display (temporary stop display) of a predetermined combination of symbols. Subsequently, the correlation information is updated, allowing the player to estimate or understand the number of turns required to terminate the game. This configuration allows for a favorable increase in the player's attention to the game when transitioning to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, triggered by the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information.

Feature N14. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured such that the frequency at which the variable mechanism enters the acceptance state differs.
When the result of the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode becomes a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information, a first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state triggered by the special miss result) is provided to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without going through the special game state.
In the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, which has been transitioned by the first transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 20, 40, or 100 rounds) without reaching the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the time reduction) is provided to transition back to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode.
The system includes a display and effect execution means (a symbol display device 95, a notification and effect control device 140, and a display control device 410) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The display control means is
When the determination result corresponds to the second determination information, a special stop display means (a function that executes a temporary stop process in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) stops and displays the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the second determination information as a pattern combination corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means,
The device has a special circulating display means (a function that executes processing for re-display in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) which causes the predetermined combination of patterns that has been stopped by the special stop display means to be displayed in a circulating manner before the final stop display occurs.
Multiple reference counts (for example, 20, 40, 100 times) are provided as the termination reference counts, and when the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information and the game transitions to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, one of the multiple reference counts is set as the termination reference count for this time. This is done by a termination reference count setting means (a function that executes the setting process of the continuation count counter in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The system includes a correlation information notification means (a remaining count counter displayed on the count display unit 88C and a notification/performance control device 140) that notifies the player of correlation information (counts) that are correlated with the number of times set by the termination criterion count setting means,
The correlation information notification means is characterized by having an information update means (a function that performs a count-up process in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) that updates the correlation information being notified based on the fact that the predetermined combination of patterns has completed a cycle by the special cycle display means.

As shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (jackpot result) is changed via a special game state, and if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is changed without going through the special game state, the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher-level switching control mode can be diversified, contributing to the suppression of monotony in gameplay. In particular, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is set, one of several reference counts is set as the reference count for ending this time, further diversification of gameplay is achieved. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is changed, the player is made aware that the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information has been changed by stopping and displaying a predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the second judgment information. After that, the predetermined combination of symbols is displayed in a loop before the final stop display, and the correlation information is updated in conjunction with this loop display. The player can understand that the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information has been reached based on the stopping (temporary stopping) display of a predetermined combination of symbols. Subsequently, the correlation information is updated according to the number of cycles of the predetermined combination of symbols, allowing the player to estimate or understand the current number of cycles until the game ends. This configuration allows for a favorable increase in the player's attention to the game when transitioning to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, triggered by the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in features N2 to N11 above may also be applied to features N1, N12 to N14.

Incidentally, the technical concepts shown in the above-mentioned feature groups A to M may also be applied to feature N1 to feature N14.

<Characteristics Group O>
The following group of features O was developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and issues described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Feature O1. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) which is set to have a longer period of time during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state than in the first switching mode.
When the result of the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode becomes a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information, a first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state triggered by the special miss result) is provided to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without going through the special game state.
In the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, which has been transitioned by the first transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 20, 40, or 100 rounds) without reaching the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the time reduction) is provided to transition back to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode.
Before the special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes the subject of the determination, a first prior identification means (a function that executes a process for confirming a jackpot in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) determines whether the special information corresponds to the first determination information,
In the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode, a first special performance execution means (a function that executes processing for the jackpot announcement performance using the symbol display device 95A, the notification/performance control device 140, and the display control device 410) executes a first special performance (jackpot announcement performance) based on the result of the first prior identification means,
A second prior identification means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162 to execute a process for confirming whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the second determination information before the special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes the subject of the determination),
In the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode, the system includes a second special effect execution means (a function that executes processing for the special loss notification effect in special effect devices 500D, 500E, 500F and the notification/effect control device 140) which executes a second special effect (special loss notification effect) based on the result of the second prior identification means,
The first special effect is an effect that is performed at least in a game round prior to the game round related to the special information that triggered the execution of the first special effect,
The second special effect is an effect that is performed at least in a game round prior to the game round related to the special information that triggered the execution of the second special effect.
A gaming machine characterized by having a restrictive means (a function in the notification/performance control device 140's MPU 442 that manages performance restriction flags, etc.) that restricts the execution of the other of the first special performance and the second special performance when one of them is being performed.

As shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (jackpot result) is changed via a special game state, and if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is changed without going through the special game state, the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher-level switching control mode can be diversified, contributing to the suppression of monotony in gameplay. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, whether or not the judgment result corresponds to the first judgment information is determined before the start of the game round (hereinafter referred to as pre-determination), and the first special performance is executed based on the result of that pre-determination, and whether or not the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information is determined before the start of the game round (hereinafter referred to as pre-determination), and the second special performance is executed based on the result of that pre-determination. With such a configuration, the level of attention to the game can be suitably increased from game rounds prior to the current game round. However, the parallel execution of two types of special performances with different underlying results can be a source of confusion for players. This is undesirable when aiming to increase the level of attention to the game through special performances. In this regard, as shown in this feature, the above concerns can be effectively eliminated by configuring the system to prevent the execution of one special effect while the other is being performed. This is preferable for ensuring the coexistence of the two types of special effects described above.

Furthermore, the "regulatory measures" described in this feature are designed to avoid overlap between the first and second special performances, and include configurations that restrict the commencement of the other special performance while one is in progress, and configurations that forcibly terminate (cancel) the first special performance if the other special performance begins while the first special performance is in progress.

Feature O2. The gaming machine according to Feature O1, characterized in that the regulatory means is configured to prevent the other of the first and second special performances from starting when special information triggers the start of either the first or second special performance.

If both the first and second special effects are triggered by special information 1, one special effect will negate the other. This is a concern as it could confuse the player. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by avoiding the execution of both the first and second special effects triggered by special information 1, the above-mentioned inconvenience can be effectively suppressed.

Furthermore, the configuration described in this feature can also be described as "a gaming machine according to feature O1, characterized in that the regulating means is configured to prevent the other of the first and second special performances from starting based on special information that triggers the commencement of either the first or second special performance, or other special information that follows said special information."

Feature O3. The gaming machine according to Feature O1 or Feature O2, characterized in that the regulating means is configured to start the regulation when either the first special performance or the second special performance is performed by the first special performance execution means or the second special performance execution means, and to end the regulation when the one of the special performances is completed.

As shown in this feature, configuring the system so that the execution of one special effect restricts the execution of the other is preferable for easing the constraints on the execution methods of the special effects. In other words, not only when the special effect starts immediately after the execution conditions are met, but also when the start is deliberately delayed even if the execution conditions for the special effect are internally met, the two types of special effects can be suitably coexisted, and the constraints on the execution methods of the special effects can be suitably relaxed.

Feature O4. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
A collection information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing multiple pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) which is set to have a longer period of time during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state than in the first switching mode.
When the result of the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode becomes a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information, a first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state triggered by the special miss result) is provided to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without going through the special game state.
In the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, which has been transitioned by the first transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 20, 40, or 100 rounds) without reaching the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the time reduction) is provided to transition back to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode.
Before the special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes the subject of the determination, a first prior identification means (a function that executes a process for confirming a jackpot in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) determines whether the special information corresponds to the first determination information,
In the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode, a first special performance execution means (a function that executes the processing of the jackpot announcement performance using the symbol display device 95A, the notification/performance control device 140, and the display control device 410) executes a first special performance (jackpot announcement performance) based on the result of the first prior identification means,
A second prior identification means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162 to execute a process for confirming whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the second determination information before the special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes the subject of the determination),
In the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode, the system includes a second special effect execution means (a function that executes processing for the special loss notification effect in special effect devices 500D, 500E, 500F and the notification/effect control device 140) which executes a second special effect (special loss notification effect) based on the result of the second prior identification means,
The first special effect is an effect that is performed at least in a game round prior to the game round related to the special information that triggered the execution of the first special effect,
The second special effect is an effect that is performed at least in a game round prior to the game round related to the special information that triggered the execution of the second special effect.
A gaming machine characterized by having a restricting means (a function in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140 that manages performance restriction flags, etc.) that restricts the execution of the first special performance by the first special performance execution means when the second special performance is being executed by the second special performance execution means.

As shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (jackpot result) is changed via a special game state, and the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is changed without going through the special game state, the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher-level mode can be diversified, contributing to the suppression of monotony in gameplay. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, whether or not the judgment result corresponds to the first judgment information is determined before the game round in question starts (hereinafter referred to as pre-determination), and the first special performance is executed based on the result of that pre-determination, and whether or not the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information is determined before the game round in question starts (hereinafter referred to as pre-determination), and the second special performance is executed based on the result of that pre-determination. With such a configuration, the level of attention to the game can be suitably increased from game rounds prior to the game round in question. However, in a configuration in which the game transitions to a special game state triggered by the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, players who expect to transition to a special game state will focus on the first special performance. If the first special performance is initiated while the second special performance is in progress, it is highly likely that the player's attention will shift from the second to the first special performance. This is a concern as it may hinder the effectiveness of the second special performance in increasing player attention. In this regard, as shown in this feature, a configuration that restricts the execution of the first special performance by the first special performance execution means from executing the second special performance while the second special performance is being executed by the second special performance execution means can effectively eliminate the above concern. This is preferable for ensuring the coexistence of the two types of special performances described above.

Furthermore, the "regulatory measures" described in this feature are designed to avoid overlap between the first and second special performances, and include configurations that restrict the initiation of a new first special performance and configurations that forcibly terminate (cancel) a first special performance that is currently running.

Feature O5. The gaming machine according to Feature O4, characterized in that the regulatory means is configured to prevent the first special performance from starting as a result of special information that triggered the start of the second special performance, or other special information that follows said special information.

If both the first and second special effects are triggered by special information 1, one special effect will negate the other. This is a concern as it could confuse players. In particular, in configurations where the first special effect is more anticipated than the second, the execution of the second special effect can reduce the reliability (expected value) of the first special effect. This can significantly reduce attention to the first special effect. Therefore, as shown in this feature, a configuration that restricts the initiation of the first special effect from being triggered by special information that initiated the second special effect, or by other special information following that information, can effectively suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems. For example, even if new special information is acquired before the second special effect ends, it is advisable to restrict the execution of the first special effect triggered by that new information.

Feature O6. The gaming machine according to Feature O4 or Feature O5, characterized in that the regulating means is configured to start the regulation when the second special performance is performed by the second special performance execution means, and to end the regulation when the second special performance is completed.

As shown in this feature, configuring the system so that the first special performance is restricted when the second special performance is executed is preferable in terms of easing the constraints on the performance mode of the second special performance. In other words, not only when the second special performance is set to start immediately after the execution conditions are met, but also when the start is deliberately delayed even when the execution conditions for the second special performance are internally met, the competition between the first and second special performances can be suitably suppressed, and the constraints on the performance mode of the second special performance can be suitably relaxed.

Feature O7. A gaming machine according to any one of Features O1 to O6, characterized in that, when the second special performance is executed by the second special performance execution means while the first special performance is being executed by the first special performance execution means, the machine is equipped with a cancellation means to cancel the first special performance.

If the system is configured so that the conditions for executing the second special performance can be met while the first special performance is running, then the opportunity to execute the second special performance can be appropriately secured. Furthermore, if the conditions for executing the second special performance are met while the first special performance is running, the first special performance can be stopped, thereby encouraging the player to focus on the second special performance.

Feature O8. The gaming machine according to Feature O7, characterized in that the cancellation means is configured to cancel the first special performance after the start of the second special performance when the second special performance is initiated by the second special performance execution means while the first special performance is being executed by the first special performance execution means.

As shown in Feature O7, when canceling the first special effect, canceling the first special effect after the start of the second special effect allows the cancellation itself to become part of the effect, resulting in a practically desirable configuration for increasing attention to the game.

Feature O9. A gaming machine according to any one of Features O1 to O8, characterized in that, when a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, the machine is configured such that the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is more advantageous to the player than when the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode.

As shown in Feature O9, if the game is configured such that the advantage increases when the judgment result corresponds to the first judgment information in a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, the player will expect the judgment result to change from the second judgment information to the first judgment information, thereby effectively increasing attention to the second special effect.

In particular, when combined with Feature O7 or Feature O8, if the Second Special Performance begins during the First Special Performance, the First Special Performance is canceled. In other words, the cancellation of the First Special Performance increases the expectation of a judgment result corresponding to the Second Judgment Information, thereby allowing the effect of canceling the First Special Performance to be more effectively realized.

Feature O10. A gaming machine according to any one of Feature O1 to Feature O9, characterized in that the timing at which the first special effect is initiated by the first special effect execution means in the game round is different from the timing at which the second special effect is initiated by the second special effect execution means in the game round.

As shown in Feature O1, etc., in a configuration where the special effect begins before the relevant game round, it is assumed that the player's anticipation increases at the start of the special effect. Therefore, when using the first and second special effects in combination, if the timing of when the special effects begin in each game round is staggered, it is possible to effectively prevent the start (beginning) of each special effect from being missed.

Feature O11. The gaming machine according to Feature O10, characterized in that either the first special effect start timing or the second special effect start timing occurs in the first half of the game round, and the other occurs in the second half of the game round.

As shown in Feature O10, by differentiating the start timing of the first and second special effects, and dividing them so that one occurs in the first half of the game round and the other in the second half, it is possible to suppress a decline in attention to the game throughout the entire game round.

Feature O12. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured such that the frequency at which the variable mechanism enters the acceptance state differs.
When the result of the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode becomes a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information, a first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state triggered by the special miss result) is provided to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without going through the special game state.
In the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, which has been transitioned by the first transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 20, 40, or 100 rounds) without reaching the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the time reduction) is provided to transition back to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode.
A first prior identification means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162 that executes a process for confirming a jackpot in order to determine whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the first determination information before it becomes the subject of the determination),
In the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode, a first special performance execution means (a function that executes processing for the jackpot announcement performance using the symbol display device 95A, the notification/performance control device 140, and the display control device 410) executes a first special performance (jackpot announcement performance) based on the result of the first prior identification means,
A second prior identification means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162 to execute a process for confirming whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the second determination information before the special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes the subject of the determination),
In the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode, the system includes a second special effect execution means (a function that executes processing for the special loss notification effect in special effect devices 500D, 500E, 500F and the notification/effect control device 140) which executes a second special effect (special loss notification effect) based on the result of the second prior identification means,
The first special effect is an effect that is performed at least in a game session prior to the game session related to the special information that triggered the execution of the first special effect,
The second special effect is an effect that is performed at least in a game round prior to the game round related to the special information that triggered the execution of the second special effect,
A gaming machine characterized by having a restrictive means (a function in the notification/performance control device 140's MPU 442 that manages performance restriction flags, etc.) that restricts the execution of the other of the first special performance and the second special performance when one of them is being performed.

As shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (jackpot result) is changed via a special game state, and if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is changed without going through the special game state, the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher-level switching control mode can be diversified, contributing to the suppression of monotony in gameplay. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, whether or not the judgment result corresponds to the first judgment information is determined before the start of the game round (hereinafter referred to as pre-determination), and the first special performance is executed based on the result of that pre-determination, and whether or not the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information is determined before the start of the game round (hereinafter referred to as pre-determination), and the second special performance is executed based on the result of that pre-determination. With such a configuration, the level of attention to the game can be suitably increased from game rounds prior to the current game round. However, the parallel execution of two types of special performances with different underlying results can be a source of confusion for players. This is undesirable when aiming to increase the level of attention to the game through special performances. In this regard, as shown in this feature, the above concerns can be effectively eliminated by configuring the system to prevent the execution of one special effect while the other is being performed. This is preferable for ensuring the coexistence of the two types of special effects described above.

Feature O13. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured such that the frequency at which the variable mechanism enters the acceptance state differs.
When the result of the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode becomes a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information, a first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state triggered by the special miss result) is provided to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without going through the special game state.
In the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, which has been transitioned by the first transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 20, 40, or 100 rounds) without reaching the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the time reduction) is provided to transition back to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode.
Before the special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes the subject of the determination, a first prior identification means (a function that executes a process for confirming a jackpot in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) determines whether the special information corresponds to the first determination information,
In the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode, a first special performance execution means (a function that executes processing for the jackpot announcement performance using the symbol display device 95A, the notification/performance control device 140, and the display control device 410) executes a first special performance (jackpot announcement performance) based on the result of the first prior identification means,
A second prior identification means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162 to execute a process for confirming whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the second determination information before the special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes the subject of the determination),
In the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode, the system includes a second special effect execution means (a function that executes processing for the special loss notification effect in special effect devices 500D, 500E, 500F and the notification/effect control device 140) which executes a second special effect (special loss notification effect) based on the result of the second prior identification means,
The first special effect is an effect that is performed at least in a game round prior to the game round related to the special information that triggered the execution of the first special effect,
The second special effect is an effect that is performed at least in a game round prior to the game round related to the special information that triggered the execution of the second special effect.
A gaming machine characterized by having a restricting means (a function in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140 that manages performance restriction flags, etc.) that restricts the execution of the first special performance by the first special performance execution means when the second special performance is being executed by the second special performance execution means.

As shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (jackpot result) is changed via a special game state, and the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is changed without going through the special game state, the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher-level mode can be diversified, contributing to the suppression of monotony in gameplay. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, whether or not the judgment result corresponds to the first judgment information is determined before the game round in question starts (hereinafter referred to as pre-determination), and the first special performance is executed based on the result of that pre-determination, and whether or not the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information is determined before the game round in question starts (hereinafter referred to as pre-determination), and the second special performance is executed based on the result of that pre-determination. With such a configuration, the level of attention to the game can be suitably increased from game rounds prior to the game round in question. However, in a configuration in which the game transitions to a special game state triggered by the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, players who expect to transition to a special game state will focus on the first special performance. If the first special performance is initiated while the second special performance is in progress, it is highly likely that the player's attention will shift from the second to the first special performance. This is a concern as it may hinder the effectiveness of the second special performance in increasing player attention. In this regard, as shown in this feature, a configuration that restricts the execution of the first special performance by the first special performance execution means from executing the second special performance while the second special performance is being executed by the second special performance execution means can effectively eliminate the above concern. This is preferable for ensuring the coexistence of the two types of special performances described above.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in features O2 to O3 and features O5 to O11 may also be applied to features P12 to P13.

Furthermore, the technical concepts shown in the above-mentioned feature groups A to N may be applied to feature O1 to feature O13.

<Features P group>
The following group of features P was developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and issues described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Feature P1. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) which is set to have a longer period of time during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state than in the first switching mode.
When the result of the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode becomes a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information, a first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state triggered by the special miss result) is provided to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without going through the special game state.
In the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, which has been transitioned by the first transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 20, 40, or 100 rounds) without reaching the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the time reduction) is provided to transition back to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode.
The system includes a display effect execution means (a function that executes the variable display area ME of the symbol display device 95, the notification/effect control device 140, and the display control device 410 for display control of the symbol display device 95) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The display and performance execution means includes a pattern display unit (variable display area ME of the pattern display device 95) capable of variably displaying multiple patterns (symbols), and a function for controlling the display of the pattern display unit (a function that executes processing for controlling the display of patterns in the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410). When the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the determination result of the first determination information, the system is configured to stop displaying the pattern combination corresponding to the determination result after a variable display.
A special display unit (special performance device 500D, 500F) is provided separately from the aforementioned pattern display unit,
A gaming machine characterized by having a special control means (a function in the notification/performance control device 140 to execute processing for a special miss notification performance) that performs a special performance in the special display unit to suggest or clearly indicate that the result of the determination by the determination means is a determination result corresponding to the second determination information when the game is in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode.

As shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (jackpot result) is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via a special game state, and if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is obtained, the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state. This configuration diversifies the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher switching control mode, contributing to the suppression of monotony in gameplay. However, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained, the game transitions quickly to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode after the end of the game round, so the switch to the switching control mode tends to be abrupt compared to when the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained. This is expected to cause confusion for the player and lead to unnecessary investment. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained, a symbol combination indicating that is stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit, whereas if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained, it is suggested or clearly indicated by a special effect on a special display unit provided separately from the symbol display unit. This configuration effectively suppresses confusion between the first judgment information and the corresponding judgment result, thereby effectively preventing the various problems described above from occurring.

Feature P2. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) which is set to have a longer period of time during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state than in the first switching mode.
When the result of the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode becomes a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information, a first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state triggered by the special miss result) is provided to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without going through the special game state.
In the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, which has been transitioned by the first transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 20, 40, or 100 rounds) without reaching the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the time reduction) is provided to transition back to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode.
The system includes a display effect execution means (a function that executes the variable display area ME of the symbol display device 95, the notification/effect control device 140, and the display control device 410 for display control of the symbol display device 95) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The display and performance execution means includes a pattern display unit (variable display area ME of the pattern display device 95) capable of variably displaying multiple patterns (symbols), and a function for controlling the display of the pattern display unit (a function that executes processing for controlling the display of patterns in the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410). When the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the determination result of the first determination information, the system is configured to stop displaying the pattern combination corresponding to the determination result after a variable display.
Before the special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes the subject of determination by the determination means, a pre-determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes a process to confirm whether the special information is not applicable) is used to determine whether the special information corresponds to the second determination information.
A special display unit (special performance device 500D, 500F) is provided separately from the aforementioned pattern display unit,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a special control means (a function that executes processing for the special loss notification effect in the notification/effect control device 140) that controls the display of the special display unit by executing a special effect (special loss notification effect) in the special display unit based on the result of the prior identification means when the game is in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode.

As shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (jackpot result) is changed via a special game state, and the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is changed without going through the special game state, the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher-level switching control mode can be diversified, contributing to the suppression of monotony in gameplay. However, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained, the game transitions quickly to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode after the end of the game round, so the switch to the switching control mode tends to be abrupt compared to when the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained. This is expected to cause confusion for the player and result in wasted investment. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained, a symbol combination indicating that is stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit, whereas if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained, it is suggested by a special effect on a special display unit provided separately from the symbol display unit. This configuration effectively suppresses confusion between the first judgment information and the corresponding judgment result, thereby effectively preventing the various problems described above from occurring.

In particular, this feature is configured such that whether or not the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information is determined in advance by a pre-determination means (hereinafter referred to as "pre-determination"). Since a special effect is executed according to the result of this pre-determination, the player can predict in advance whether or not the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information. This configuration reduces the abruptness mentioned above and contributes to further suppressing the occurrence of the various inconveniences described above.

Feature P3. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) which is set to have a longer period of time during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state than in the first switching mode.
When the result of the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode becomes a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information, a first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state triggered by the special miss result) is provided to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without going through the special game state.
In the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, which has been transitioned by the first transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 20, 40, or 100 rounds) without reaching the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the time reduction) is provided to transition back to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode.
The system includes a display effect execution means (a function that executes the variable display area ME of the symbol display device 95, the notification/effect control device 140, and the display control device 410 for display control of the symbol display device 95) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The display and performance execution means includes a pattern display unit (variable display area ME of the pattern display device 95) capable of variably displaying multiple patterns (symbols), and a function for controlling the display of the pattern display unit (a function that executes processing for controlling the display of patterns in the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410). When the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the determination result of the first determination information, the system is configured to stop displaying the pattern combination corresponding to the determination result after a variable display.
Before the special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes the subject of determination by the determination means, a pre-determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes a process to confirm whether the special information is not applicable) is used to determine whether the special information corresponds to the second determination information.
A special display unit (special performance device 500D, 500F) is provided separately from the aforementioned pattern display unit,
A gaming machine characterized by having a special control means (a function that executes processing for the special loss notification effect in the notification/effect control device 140) that controls the display of the special display unit so as to execute a special effect (special loss notification effect) in the special display unit based on the result of the specified special information, at least before the start of a game round related to the special information specified by the prior identification means, when the game is in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode.

As shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (jackpot result) is changed via a special game state, and the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is changed without going through the special game state, the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher-level switching control mode can be diversified, contributing to the suppression of monotony in gameplay. However, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained, the game transitions quickly to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode after the end of the game round, so the switch to the switching control mode tends to be abrupt compared to when the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained. This is expected to cause confusion for the player and result in wasted investment. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained, a symbol combination indicating that is stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit, whereas if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained, it is suggested by a special effect on a special display unit provided separately from the symbol display unit. This configuration effectively suppresses confusion between the first judgment information and the corresponding judgment result, thereby effectively preventing the various problems described above from occurring.

In this feature, the determination of whether or not the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information is determined in advance by a pre-determination means (hereinafter referred to as "pre-determination"), and a special performance is executed according to the result of this pre-determination. Since this special performance is executed at least in a game round prior to the game round related to the special information that was the subject of the pre-determination, the player can predict in advance that there is a possibility of the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information. This configuration reduces the abruptness mentioned above and contributes to further suppressing the occurrence of the various inconveniences described above.

Feature P4. The gaming machine according to any one of Features P1 to P3, characterized in that the special control means has means for initiating the special performance when the pattern combination is stopped and displayed on the pattern display unit.

In a configuration where the result is announced based on the combination of symbols displayed in the symbol display section, the player's attention to the game may rapidly decrease when they are notified that they have not won. Therefore, if a special effect is initiated under such circumstances, this special effect can effectively suppress the rapid decline in attention mentioned above.

Furthermore, in a configuration where the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is announced on the symbol display unit, the player's attention is easily drawn to the symbol display unit. Therefore, by configuring the system to start the special effect during the stop display period when the need to focus on the symbol display unit decreases, the chances of missing the special effect can be reduced.

Feature P5. The gaming machine according to any one of Features P1 to P3, characterized in that the special control means has means for waiting for the variable display of the symbols in the symbol display unit to stop before starting the special effect if the conditions for executing the special effect are met during that variable display.

In a configuration where the result is announced based on the combination of symbols displayed in the symbol display section, the player's attention to the game may rapidly decrease when they are notified that they have not won. Therefore, if a special effect is initiated under such circumstances, this special effect can effectively suppress the rapid decline in attention mentioned above.

Furthermore, in a configuration where the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is announced on the symbol display unit, the player's attention is easily drawn to the symbol display unit. Therefore, if the conditions for executing a special effect are met while the symbols are being displayed variably on the symbol display unit, a configuration that waits for the symbols to stop before starting the special effect can help prevent players from missing the special effect.

Feature P6. The gaming machine according to any one of Features P1 to P5, characterized in that the special display unit is arranged such that the distance from the starting ball entry unit to the special display unit is smaller than the distance from the starting ball entry unit to the pattern display unit.

In a configuration where special information is acquired based on ball entry into the starting ball entry area, players may focus their attention on the starting ball entry area. Therefore, by positioning the special display area closer to the starting ball entry area compared to the pattern display area, the chances of missing special effects can be effectively reduced.

Feature P7. The gaming machine according to any one of Features P1 to P6, characterized in that the special display unit is located behind the portion of the flow path (left route) in which the game balls flow down toward the starting ball entry section within the game area, which is closer to the starting ball entry section.

In a configuration where special information is acquired based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section, players can pay attention to the starting ball entry section and the movement of the game ball toward that section. Therefore, by positioning the special display section behind the part of the flow path (left route) where the game ball flows toward the starting ball entry section, the chances of missing the special effect can be effectively reduced.

Feature P8. The special display unit comprises a first display unit (preview decorative unit 511D, 511F) that suggests that the result may correspond to the second determination information, and a second display unit (notification decorative unit 512D, 512F) that clearly indicates that the result corresponds to the second determination information.
The special control means has a configuration that, when the determination result by the determination means is a determination result corresponding to the second determination information, executes a first display (preview display) on the first display unit that suggests that the determination result may correspond to the second determination information, and then executes a second display (result display) on the second display unit that clearly indicates that the determination result corresponds to the second determination information, as a special effect, and when the determination result by the determination means is not a determination result corresponding to the second determination information, executes the first display on the first display unit as a special effect, while not executing the second display on the second display unit, as a special effect, the gaming machine according to any one of features P1 to P7.

If the first display unit suggests the possibility of a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information before the second display unit explicitly indicates that the result corresponds to the second judgment information, the chances of the second display unit being overlooked can be effectively reduced.

Feature P9. The gaming machine according to Feature P8, characterized in that the special display unit is formed such that the distance from the first display unit to the starting ball entry unit is smaller than the distance from the second display unit to the starting ball entry unit.

In gaming machines where gameplay progresses based on ball entry into the starting ball entry area, players' attention tends to be drawn to this area. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by forming a special display area where the first display unit is positioned closer to the starting ball entry area (the starting ball entry area where the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is provided), the effect of preventing players from missing important information, as shown in Feature P8, can be more effectively achieved.

Feature P10. The first display unit is provided with a plurality of display modes that have different expected degrees of determination corresponding to the second determination information.
The gaming machine according to feature P8 or feature P9, characterized in that the special control means has means for switching the display mode of the first display unit when the pattern combination is stopped and displayed on the pattern display unit.

When the symbols are displayed variably on the symbol display unit, the player's attention is easily drawn to the symbol display unit. Therefore, by configuring the display unit to switch the display mode while the symbol combination is displayed in a stationary state, the likelihood of the player overlooking the change in display mode can be effectively suppressed.

Furthermore, while the display of the symbol combinations may momentarily decrease attention to the game, as shown in this feature, if the display mode of the first display unit is switched when the symbol combinations are displayed in a stopped state, the decrease in attention to the game can be effectively suppressed.

Furthermore, the configuration described in this feature can also be described as "a gaming machine according to any one of features P1 to P7, characterized in that, as the display mode of the special display unit in the special performance, there are multiple display modes with different expected values for the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information, and the special control means can switch the display mode of the special display unit while the pattern combination is displayed in a stopped state on the pattern display unit."

Feature P11. The number of special information items that can be stored in the acquired information storage means is limited (for example, four).
The pattern display unit is provided with a storage count display unit (a reserved display area of the pattern display device 95A) that displays the number of special information items stored in the acquired information storage means.
The gaming machine according to any one of features P8 to P10, characterized in that the special display unit is formed such that the distance from the first display unit to the memory count display unit is smaller than the distance from the second display unit to the memory count display unit.

In gaming machines where there is an upper limit on the amount of special information acquired and stored based on ball entry into the starting ball entry section, adjustments may be made to temporarily refrain from launching balls in order to avoid unnecessary ball entries. Players making such adjustments pay attention to the movement of the game balls in and around the starting ball entry section, or to the display on the stored ball count display section. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by forming the special display section so that the first display section is closer to the stored ball count display section, the effect of preventing missed information, as shown in feature P8, can be more effectively achieved.

Feature P12. In the first game state, if the number of game rounds after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without reaching a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, the system has means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode.
The gaming machine according to any one of features P1 to P11, characterized in that the special control means has means for executing the special performance at least in the number of games played before the number of games played in which the upper limit is reached.

As shown in Feature P12, if the system is configured to transition to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode upon reaching the upper limit of the number of plays, excessive investment can be suppressed and the soundness of the game can be enhanced. Even in such cases, by configuring the system so that the special effects described above are executed from the previous play session, the frequency of special effects (success patterns) can be appropriately increased to encourage the recognition that the occurrence of a special effect indicates a possibility of transitioning to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode.

Feature P13. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured such that the frequency at which the variable mechanism enters the acceptance state differs.
When the result of the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode becomes a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information, a first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state triggered by the special miss result) is provided to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without going through the special game state.
In the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, which has been transitioned by the first transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 20, 40, or 100 rounds) without reaching the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the time reduction) is provided to transition back to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode.
The system includes a display effect execution means (a function that executes the variable display area ME of the symbol display device 95, the notification/effect control device 140, and the display control device 410 for display control of the symbol display device 95) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The display and performance execution means includes a pattern display unit (variable display area ME of the pattern display device 95) capable of variably displaying multiple patterns (symbols), and a function for controlling the display of the pattern display unit (a function that executes processing for controlling the display of patterns in the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410). When the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the determination result of the first determination information, the system is configured to stop displaying the pattern combination corresponding to the determination result after a variable display.
A special display unit (special performance device 500D, 500F) is provided separately from the aforementioned pattern display unit,
A gaming machine characterized by having a special control means (a function in the notification/performance control device 140 to execute processing for a special miss notification performance) that performs a special performance in the special display unit to suggest or clearly indicate that the result of the determination by the determination means is a determination result corresponding to the second determination information when the game is in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode.

As shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (jackpot result) is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via a special game state, and if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is obtained, the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state. This configuration diversifies the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher switching control mode, contributing to the suppression of monotony in gameplay. However, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained, the game transitions quickly to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode after the end of the game round, so the switch to the switching control mode tends to be abrupt compared to when the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained. This is expected to cause confusion for the player and lead to unnecessary investment. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained, a symbol combination indicating that is stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit, whereas if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained, it is suggested or clearly indicated by a special effect on a special display unit provided separately from the symbol display unit. This configuration effectively suppresses confusion between the first judgment information and the corresponding judgment result, thereby effectively preventing the various problems described above from occurring.

Feature P14. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A gaming machine comprising a dispensing means (dispensing device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured such that the frequency at which the variable mechanism enters the acceptance state differs.
When the result of the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode becomes a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information, a first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state triggered by the special miss result) is provided to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the third switching mode without going through the special game state.
In the predetermined game state corresponding to the third switching mode, which has been transitioned by the first transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 20, 40, or 100 rounds) without reaching the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the time reduction) is provided to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode.
The system includes a display effect execution means (a function that executes the variable display area ME of the symbol display device 95, the notification/effect control device 140, and the display control device 410 for display control of the symbol display device 95) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The display and performance execution means includes a pattern display unit (variable display area ME of the pattern display device 95) capable of variably displaying multiple patterns (designs), and a function for controlling the display of the pattern display unit (a function that executes processing for controlling the display of the designs in the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410). When the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the determination result of the first determination information, the system is configured to stop displaying the pattern combination corresponding to the determination result after a variable display.
Before the special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes the subject of determination by the determination means, a pre-determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes a process to confirm whether the special information is not applicable) is used to determine whether the special information corresponds to the second determination information.
A special display unit (special performance device 500D, 500F) is provided separately from the aforementioned pattern display unit,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a special control means (a function that executes processing for the special loss notification effect in the notification/effect control device 140) that controls the display of the special display unit by executing a special effect (special loss notification effect) in the special display unit based on the result of the prior identification means when the game is in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode.

As shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (jackpot result) is changed via a special game state, and the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is changed without going through the special game state, the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher-level switching control mode can be diversified, contributing to the suppression of monotony in gameplay. However, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained, the game transitions quickly to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode after the end of the game round, so the switch to the switching control mode tends to be abrupt compared to when the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained. This is expected to cause confusion for the player and result in wasted investment. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained, a symbol combination indicating that is stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit, whereas if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained, it is suggested by a special effect on a special display unit provided separately from the symbol display unit. This configuration effectively suppresses confusion between the first judgment information and the corresponding judgment result, thereby effectively preventing the various problems described above from occurring.

In particular, this feature is configured such that whether or not the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information is determined in advance by a pre-determination means (hereinafter referred to as "pre-determination"). Since a special effect is executed according to the result of this pre-determination, the player can predict in advance whether or not the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information. This configuration reduces the abruptness mentioned above and contributes to further suppressing the occurrence of the various inconveniences described above.

Feature P15. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that dispenses game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 and variable prize entry devices 83) provided in the game area,
When a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) which serves as the ball entry section, a special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) acquires special information (hold information),
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. A game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The aforementioned predetermined judgment information includes a first judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second judgment information (a group of random numbers corresponding to a special miss result).
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that performs opening and closing processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured such that the frequency at which the variable mechanism enters the acceptance state differs.
When the result of the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode becomes a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information, a first transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state triggered by the special miss result) is provided to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the third switching mode without going through the special game state.
In the predetermined game state corresponding to the third switching mode, which has been transitioned by the first transition means, if the number of game rounds played in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode reaches the termination threshold number (for example, 20, 40, or 100 rounds) without reaching the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, a second transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state triggered by the time reduction) is provided to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode.
The system includes a display effect execution means (a function that executes the variable display area ME of the symbol display device 95, the notification/effect control device 140, and the display control device 410 for display control of the symbol display device 95) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the aforementioned game rotation operation is being performed.
The display and performance execution means includes a pattern display unit (variable display area ME of the pattern display device 95) capable of variably displaying multiple patterns (symbols), and a function for controlling the display of the pattern display unit (a function that executes processing for controlling the display of patterns in the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410). When the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the determination result of the first determination information, the system is configured to stop displaying the pattern combination corresponding to the determination result after a variable display.
Before the special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes the subject of determination by the determination means, a pre-determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes a process to confirm whether the special information is not applicable) is used to determine whether the special information corresponds to the second determination information.
A special display unit (special performance device 500D, 500F) is provided separately from the aforementioned pattern display unit,
A gaming machine characterized by having a special control means (a function that executes processing for the special loss notification effect in the notification/effect control device 140) that controls the display of the special display unit so as to execute a special effect (special loss notification effect) in the special display unit based on the result of the specified special information, at least before the start of a game round related to the special information specified by the prior identification means, when the game is in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode.

As shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (jackpot result) is changed via a special game state, and the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result) is changed without going through the special game state, the flow of gameplay when changing to a higher-level switching control mode can be diversified, contributing to the suppression of monotony in gameplay. However, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained, the game transitions quickly to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode after the end of the game round, so the switch to the switching control mode tends to be abrupt compared to when the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained. This is expected to cause confusion for the player and result in wasted investment. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, if the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained, a symbol combination indicating that is stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit, whereas if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained, it is suggested by a special effect on a special display unit provided separately from the symbol display unit. This configuration effectively suppresses confusion between the first judgment information and the corresponding judgment result, thereby effectively preventing the various problems described above from occurring.

In this feature, the determination of whether or not the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information is determined in advance by a pre-determination means (hereinafter referred to as "pre-determination"), and a special performance is executed according to the result of this pre-determination. Since this special performance is executed at least in a game round prior to the game round related to the special information that was the subject of the pre-determination, the player can predict in advance that there is a possibility of the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information. This configuration reduces the abruptness mentioned above and contributes to further suppressing the occurrence of the various inconveniences described above.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in features P4 to P12 above may also be applied to features P13 to P15.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in the above-mentioned feature groups A to O may be applied to feature P1 to feature P15.

<Features Q group>
The following group of features Q were developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and issues described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Feature Q1. A gaming machine equipped with a light-emitting device (special effect device 500E, 500F) comprising a light-emitting unit (light-emitting unit 630E, 630F) on which light-emitting elements (light-emitting elements 641E, 641F) are provided, and a decorative cover (front cover 670E, 670F) covering the light-emitting unit, wherein light from the light-emitting unit is emitted towards the front of the gaming machine through the light-transmitting portion (opposing portion 671E, 671F) of the decorative cover,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a drive means (drive mechanisms 690E, 690F and notification/performance control device 140) for driving the light-emitting unit so that the light-emitting unit is displaced within a predetermined operating range that includes a first position in which light from the light-emitting element is irradiated onto a light-diffusing region (light-diffusing sections 712E, 722E, 732E, 712F, 722F, 732F) in the light-transmitting section, and a second position in which light from the light-emitting element is irradiated onto a non-light-diffusing region (non-light-diffusing sections 701E, 715E, 725E, 735E, 701F, 715F, 725F, 735F) in the light-transmitting section.

According to the configuration shown in Feature Q1, by driving the light-emitting unit, the light-emitting element is displaced within a predetermined operating range that includes a first position where light is irradiated onto the light-diffusing region of the decorative cover, and a second position where light is irradiated onto the non-light-diffusing region of the decorative cover. The appearance (light-emitting pattern) of the light-emitting device can be significantly changed depending on whether the light from the light-emitting unit (light-emitting element) is irradiated onto the non-light-diffusing region or the light-diffusing region. This effectively increases the attention given to the light-emitting effect using the device. When performing such a light-emitting effect, it is assumed that changes in the position of the decoration itself can reduce the appearance of the light-emitting device and diminish the impact of the light-emitting effect. In this regard, the configuration shown in this feature effectively suppresses the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems by moving the light-emitting unit among the decorative cover and light-emitting unit.

Feature Q2. A gaming machine equipped with a light-emitting display device (special display device 500E, 500F) having a light-emitting unit (light-emitting unit 630E, 630F) and a decorative cover (front cover 670E, 670F) covering the light-emitting unit, wherein light from the light-emitting unit is emitted towards the front of the gaming machine through the light-transmitting portion (opposing portion 671E, 671F) of the decorative cover,
The light-emitting unit is equipped with a driving means (driving mechanism 690E and notification/performance control device 140) for rotating it in a predetermined direction.
The light-emitting unit is configured to rotate in a predetermined direction so that the light-emitting elements (light-emitting elements 641E, 641F) provided on the light-emitting unit pass through a predetermined path (trajectory PLa to PLf) which includes a first position where light is irradiated onto a light-diffusing region (light-diffusing sections 712E, 722E, 732E, 712F, 722F, 732F) in the light-transmitting section, and a second position where light is irradiated onto a non-light-diffusing region (non-light-diffusing sections 701E, 715E, 725E, 735E, 701F, 715F, 725F, 735F) in the light-transmitting section.

According to the configuration shown in Feature Q2, by rotating the light-emitting unit, the light-emitting element is displaced to pass through a predetermined path that includes a first position where light is irradiated into the light-diffusing region of the decorative cover, and a second position where light is irradiated into the non-light-diffusing region of the decorative cover. The appearance (light-emitting pattern) of the light-emitting device can be significantly changed depending on whether the light from the light-emitting unit (light-emitting element) is irradiated into the non-light-diffusing region or the light-diffusing region. This effectively enhances the attention given to the light-emitting effect using the device. When performing such a light-emitting effect, changes in the position of the decoration itself are expected to degrade the appearance of the light-emitting device and reduce the impact of the light-emitting effect. In this regard, the configuration shown in this feature effectively suppresses the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems by rotating the light-emitting unit among the decorative cover and light-emitting unit. Furthermore, by making the light-emitting unit rotatable, the light-emitting pattern can be repeatedly changed without interruption, which is preferable for ensuring a sufficiently long duration for the light-emitting effect and effectively enhancing the sustained attention-grabbing effect.

Feature Q3. The gaming machine according to Feature Q2, characterized in that the driving means is configured to rotate the light-emitting unit while the light-emitting element is maintained in an illuminated state.

As shown in this feature, by configuring the light-emitting unit to rotate while the light-emitting element remains lit, it is possible to seamlessly change not only the light-emitting pattern but also the location (position) of the light-emitting element, further enhancing the visual effect shown in Feature Q2.

Feature Q4. The gaming machine according to Feature Q2 or Feature Q3, characterized in that the light-diffusing region is an uneven decoration provided on the decorative cover.

As shown in this feature, by creating a light-diffusing region through uneven decoration, it is possible to effectively suppress the fact that the presence of the light-diffusing region detracts from the appearance of the decorative cover.

Feature Q5. The light diffusion regions are provided in multiple locations, with different arrangements in the predetermined direction.
The gaming machine according to any one of features Q2 to Q4, characterized in that the light-emitting element is configured to be displaced via the second position from a first position that irradiates light to one of the plurality of light-diffusing regions as the light-emitting unit rotates, to another first position that irradiates light to another of the light-diffusing regions.

According to Feature Q5, by configuring the system so that displacement from one light-diffusing region to another passes through a second position corresponding to a non-light-diffusing region, the contrast when changing the emission pattern can be enhanced.

Feature Q6. A gaming machine according to any one of Feature Q2 to Feature Q5, characterized in that the emission pattern when light is irradiated into the light-diffusing region is linear, and the emission pattern when light is irradiated into the non-light-diffusing region is dotted.

As shown in this feature, by configuring the luminescence pattern to vary between dots and lines, the appearance can be significantly altered.

Furthermore, the configuration described in this feature can also be described as "a gaming machine according to any one of features Q2 to Q5, characterized in that the light emission pattern when light is irradiated onto the light-diffusing region is different from the light emission pattern when light is irradiated onto the non-light-diffusing region."

Feature Q7. Having multiple light-emitting bodies,
The light-emitting unit is configured such that if any of the plurality of light-emitting elements is located at the second position, any of the other light-emitting elements is located at the first position, as described in any one of features Q2 to Q6.

The configuration described in this feature allows for the simultaneous display of luminous patterns with and without light diffusion. This is advantageous in improving the visual appeal of the luminous effect and effectively achieving the attention-grabbing effect mentioned above.

Feature Q8. The light-transmitting portion has a planar shape that intersects with the rotational axis of the light-emitting unit.
The gaming machine according to any one of features Q2 to Q7, characterized in that the surface of the light-transmitting portion facing the light-emitting unit is flat, and the surface of the light-transmitting portion facing away from the light-emitting unit is formed with an uneven decoration.

As shown in Feature Q8, by forming irregularities on the front side of the light-transmitting section that provide light diffusion and decorative functions, and making the back side flat, the operating gap between the light-emitting unit and the decorative cover can be reduced, thereby promoting a thinner light-emitting display device.

Feature Q9. A gaming machine equipped with a light-emitting display device (special display device 500E, 500F) having a light-emitting unit (light-emitting unit 630E, 630F) and a decorative cover (front cover 670E, 670F) covering the light-emitting unit, wherein light from the light-emitting unit is emitted towards the front of the gaming machine through the light-transmitting portion (opposing portion 671E, 671F) of the decorative cover,
One of the light-emitting unit and the decorative cover is a movable body that can rotate about an axis (central axis CL1) extending in the direction in which the light-emitting unit and the decorative cover are arranged side by side.
The movable body is equipped with a driving means (driving mechanism 690E and notification/performance control device 140) for rotating the movable body about the axis,
The movable body is configured such that, by rotating about the axis, it enters a first state in which light from the light-emitting body is irradiated onto the light-diffusing regions (light-diffusing regions 712E, 722E, 732E, 712F, 722F, 732F) in the light-transmitting portion, and a second state in which light from the light-emitting body is irradiated onto the non-light-diffusing regions (non-light-diffusing regions 701E, 715E, 725E, 735E, 701F, 715F, 725F, 735F) in the light-transmitting portion.

According to the configuration shown in Feature Q9, the relationship between the light-emitting unit and the decorative cover changes as the movable body rotates, switching between a relationship where light is irradiated into the light-diffusing region and a relationship where light is irradiated into the non-light-diffusing region. Because the appearance (light emission pattern) of the light-emitting device changes significantly depending on whether the light from the light-emitting unit (light-emitting body) is irradiated into the non-light-diffusing region or the light-diffusing region, the level of attention drawn to the light-emitting effect using the device can be effectively increased. Furthermore, by making the movable body rotatable, the light emission pattern can be repeatedly changed without interruption, which is preferable for ensuring a sufficiently long duration for the light-emitting effect and effectively enhancing the sustained effect of increasing attention.

Feature Q10. The gaming machine according to Feature Q9, characterized in that the driving means is configured to rotate the movable body while the light-emitting element is maintained in an illuminated state.

According to Feature Q10, if the light-emitting unit is rotated while the light-emitting element remains lit, it is possible to seamlessly change not only the light-emitting pattern but also the location (position) of the light-emitting element, further enhancing the visual effect shown in Feature Q2.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in features Q3 to Q8 above may also be applied to features Q1, Q9, and Q10.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in the above-mentioned feature groups A to P may be applied to feature Q1 to feature Q10.

<Features R group>
The following group of features R were developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and issues described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Feature R1. A gaming machine comprising a light-emitting unit (light-emitting unit 630E, 630F) on which light-emitting elements (light-emitting elements 641E, 641F) are provided, and a cover (front cover 670E, 670F) covering the light-emitting unit, wherein the light-emitting device (special effect device 500E, 500F) is configured such that light from the light-emitting unit is emitted forward through the cover,
The light-emitting unit and the cover are movable bodies that operate while maintaining the distance relationship between the light-emitting unit and the cover.
The system includes a drive mechanism (drive mechanism 690E and notification/performance control device 140) for operating the movable body,
The cover is provided with a light-diffusing region (light-diffusing portions 712E, 722E, 732E, 712F, 722F, 732F) in which a plurality of linear light-diffusing portions (for example, annular protrusions 713E, 723E, 733E, 713F, 723F, 733F) are arranged radially with respect to a predetermined axis extending in the direction in which the light-emitting unit and the cover are installed side by side.
The light-emitting unit is configured such that the optical axis of the light-emitting element faces the direction of parallel arrangement.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the driving means is configured to drive the movable body such that the distance from the predetermined axis to the optical axis of the light-emitting body changes while maintaining the overlap between the optical axis of the light-emitting body and the light-diffusing region in the parallel arrangement direction.

According to the configuration shown in Feature R1, light irradiated onto the light diffusion region is diffused in the direction of the arrangement of the linear light diffusion parts (a direction intersecting a predetermined axis). This results in a band-shaped (linear) light emission pattern extending in a direction intersecting the predetermined axis. This band-shaped light emission pattern is displaced by the movement of the movable body, and this displacement enhances the visual impact of the light emission effect. This effectively increases the level of attention given to the game.

Feature R2. A gaming machine comprising a light-emitting unit (light-emitting unit 630E, 630F) on which light-emitting elements (light-emitting elements 641E, 641F) are provided, and a cover (front cover 670E, 670F) covering the light-emitting unit, wherein the light-emitting device (special effect device 500E, 500F) is configured such that light from the light-emitting unit is emitted forward through the cover,
The light-emitting unit is provided with a driving means (driving mechanism 690E and notification/effect control device 140) that operates it while maintaining the distance relationship with the cover,
The cover is provided with a light-diffusing region (light-diffusing portions 712E, 722E, 732E, 712F, 722F, 732F) in which a plurality of linear light-diffusing portions (e.g., annular protrusions) are arranged radially with respect to a predetermined axis extending in the direction in which the light-emitting unit and the cover are installed side by side.
The light-emitting unit is configured such that the optical axis of the light-emitting element faces the direction of parallel arrangement.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the driving means is configured to drive the light-emitting unit such that the distance from the predetermined axis to the light-emitting element's optical axis changes while maintaining the overlap between the optical axis of the light-emitting element and the light-diffusing region in the parallel arrangement direction.

According to the configuration shown in Feature R2, light irradiated onto the light diffusion region is diffused in the direction of the arrangement of the linear light diffusion parts (a direction intersecting a predetermined axis). This results in a band-shaped (linear) light emission pattern extending in a direction intersecting the predetermined axis. This band-shaped light emission pattern is displaced by the movement of the movable body, and this displacement enhances the visual impact of the light emission effect. This effectively increases the level of attention given to the game.

Feature R3. The gaming machine according to Feature R2, characterized in that, when the light-emitting unit is driven by the driving means, the optical axis of the light-emitting body is displaced so as to straddle the plurality of light-diffusing parts in accordance with the operation of the light-emitting unit.

As shown in this feature, by configuring the optical axis to be displaced across multiple light-diffusing sections, it is possible to create variations in the light diffusion pattern (luminescence pattern) depending on the light-diffusing section intersecting the optical axis. Diversifying the luminescence pattern in this way is desirable for suppressing monotony in the light-emitting effect.

Feature R4. The gaming machine according to Feature R2 or Feature R3, characterized in that the light-diffusing portion is an uneven decorative surface formed on the cover.

According to Feature R4, in a configuration where the uneven decorative surface also functions as a light diffuser, it is anticipated that the visual impact will be reduced when the cover moves. However, in combination with Feature R2, the configuration involves operating the light-emitting unit located behind the cover, rather than the cover itself, thus avoiding such problems.

Feature R5. The light-emitting unit is rotatable.
The gaming machine according to any one of features R2 to R4, characterized in that the rotational central axis (central axis CL1) of the light-emitting unit is separated from the predetermined axis and parallel to the predetermined axis.

By making the light-emitting unit rotatable, the light-emitting pattern can be repeatedly and seamlessly changed. This is preferable for ensuring a sufficiently long duration for the light-emitting effect and effectively enhancing the sustained effect of increasing attention. In particular, as shown in this feature, configuring the rotational axis of the light-emitting unit to be spaced away from a predetermined axis and parallel to that predetermined axis is preferable for creating changes in the light-emitting pattern that accompany rotation.

Furthermore, it is preferable to configure the light diffusion section to be arc-shaped, and to make the radius of the path (trajectory PLa to PLf) through which the light-emitting element passes as the light-emitting unit rotates, different from the radius of the light diffusion section.

Feature R6. The gaming machine according to any one of Feature R2 to Feature R5, characterized in that the light-diffusing portion is shaped like a protrusion or groove.

As shown in this feature, by making the light-diffusing portion into a ridge or groove shape, a configuration that diffuses light in the direction of the arrangement of the light-diffusing portion can be suitably realized through three-dimensional decoration.

Feature R7. The gaming machine according to Feature R6, characterized in that the light-diffusing portion is formed such that all of its side surfaces (side surfaces 718E) are inclined surfaces that are inclined with respect to the predetermined axis.

As shown in this feature, by configuring the side surface of the light-diffusing section to be inclined with respect to a predetermined axis, some of the light from the light-emitting element can be reflected and guided to other light-diffusing sections. This is preferable for increasing the overall length of the band-shaped light-emitting pattern, thereby emphasizing the visual difference (point-like/band-like).

Feature R8. A flat surface is formed between the light-diffusing sections.
The gaming machine according to feature R7, characterized in that the rotating trajectory through which the light-emitting element passes and the planar portion are formed to overlap when viewed in the direction of the rotational axis.

According to the configuration shown in Feature R8, the shape of the luminescent pattern (e.g., the overall length) can be changed depending on whether the light from the light-emitting element is shone on an inclined surface or on a flat surface. In other words, the shape of the luminescent pattern changes in accordance with the change in its position. Such a configuration is preferable for suppressing monotony in the luminescent effect.

Feature R9. The light diffusing section has a first light diffusing section, a second light diffusing section, and a third light diffusing section.
The gaming machine according to feature R8, characterized in that the width of the planar portion formed between the first light-diffusing portion and the second light-diffusing portion is different from the width of the planar portion formed between the second light-diffusing portion and the third light-diffusing portion.

As shown in this feature, by configuring the width (length in the direction of arrangement) of each planar section to be different, it is possible to more effectively generate changes in the shape of the luminescent pattern (e.g., the overall length) depending on the object being illuminated.

Feature R10. The light-emitting unit is rotatable.
The rotational axis (central axis CL1) of the light-emitting unit is separated from the predetermined axis and parallel to the predetermined axis.
The light-emitting body comprises a first light-emitting body and a second light-emitting body having a different distance from the rotational center axis from the first light-emitting body.
A gaming machine according to any one of features R2 to R9, characterized in that the length of the portion that overlaps with the light diffusion region when viewed in the parallel arrangement direction in the trajectory (e.g., trajectory PLe) through which the first light-emitting element passes as the light-emitting unit rotates is different from the length of the portion that overlaps with the light diffusion region when viewed in the parallel arrangement direction in the trajectory (e.g., trajectory PLg) through which the second light-emitting element passes as the light-emitting unit rotates.

By making the light-emitting unit rotatable, the light-emitting pattern can be repeatedly and seamlessly changed. This is preferable for ensuring a sufficiently long duration for the light-emitting effect and effectively enhancing the sustained effect of increasing attention. In particular, as shown in this feature, configuring the rotational axis of the light-emitting unit to be spaced away from a predetermined axis and parallel to that predetermined axis is preferable for creating changes in the light-emitting pattern that accompany rotation.

Furthermore, by configuring the light-emitting unit so that the length of the portion overlapping the light-diffusing region when viewed in the parallel arrangement direction in the trajectory through which the first light-emitting element passes as the light-emitting unit rotates is different from the length of the portion overlapping the light-diffusing region when viewed in the parallel arrangement direction in the trajectory through which the second light-emitting element passes as the light-emitting unit rotates, a configuration that differs the rotation range (angle) over which the light-emitting pattern is displayed in the first light-diffusing region can be suitably realized. In a configuration where the cover's decoration functions as a light-diffusing section, there may be strong constraints on the shape and size of the light-diffusing section in order to perform its decorative function. Therefore, by configuring the light-emitting section so that multiple light-emitting elements can pass behind the first light-diffusing region as shown in this feature, and by differentiating the rotation ranges, the appearance of the light-emitting effect can be improved while suitably eliminating the inconveniences caused by this.

Furthermore, it is preferable to configure the light diffusion section to be arc-shaped, and to make the radius of the trajectory (trajectory PLa to PLf) through which the light-emitting element passes as the light-emitting unit rotates different from the radius of the light diffusion section. It is also possible to define the "trajectory" as a "predetermined path" in this feature.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in features R3 to R10 above may also be applied to feature R1.

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in the above feature groups A to Q may be applied to feature R1 to feature R10.

<Characteristic S Group>
The following group of features S were developed in consideration of the background technology described above, which states that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area based on a launching operation by the player. When game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter a ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is granted benefits such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. By making the ball entry section variable and switching between an accepting state and a non-accepting state in the ball entry section according to the game situation, the game can be diversified (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." and the background and issues described above, which state that "there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-described type of gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention given to the game."

Feature S1. A game board (game board 80aB) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91A, 92A and variable prize entry devices 83B) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A) as the ball entry section,
A collection information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing multiple pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. The system includes a game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83A) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that executes the opening and closing process of the variable prize entry device 83A in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93A) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) which is set to have a longer period of time during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state than in the first switching mode.
A special transition means that, in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode, when the number of game rounds after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without the result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, transitions to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode,
Prior to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means becoming the subject of the determination, a prior identification means for determining whether the special information corresponds to the predetermined determination information,
A transition determination means that, while in a state corresponding to the first switching mode, is in a predetermined game state, determines whether or not a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by the special transition means, based on the result of the prior identification means, before the number of game rounds that would reach the upper limit,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the transition determination means determines that a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode by the special transition means has occurred, the gaming machine further comprises a special effect execution means that executes a special effect indicating a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode before the number of game rounds that reach the upper limit.

According to Feature S1, if the trigger for transitioning to the special game state (the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information) is not met and the game continues, the game transitions to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode when the number of game rounds after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling reached). In the second switching mode, the variable mechanism attached to the starting ball entry section frequently enters the receiving state, increasing the frequency of ball entry into the starting ball entry section and suppressing further investment. Such a configuration is desirable in order to improve the soundness of the game.

In this configuration, specifically, whether or not a transition to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs via a special transition means is determined before the number of game spins that would reach the upper limit, based on the result of a determination by the prior determination means. If it is determined that such a transition will occur, a special effect indicating the transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode is executed before the number of game spins that would reach the upper limit. This configuration suppresses excessive tension just before reaching the ceiling and provides a sense of security to players who are anticipating reaching the ceiling. This is desirable for improving player satisfaction and further increasing attention to the game.

Furthermore, this feature includes: "a pre-identification means that identifies whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined determination information before the determination is made"; "a transition determination means that, while in a situation where the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode is in operation, determines whether a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by the special transition means, based on the result of the pre-identification means, before the number of game rounds that reach the upper limit"; and "when the transition determination means determines that a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by the special transition means." The "special effect execution means for executing a special effect indicating a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode" may be replaced with "transition determination means for determining whether a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by the special transition means while the game is in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode, before the number of game turns that reaches the upper limit," and "special effect execution means for executing a special effect indicating a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode when the transition determination means determines that a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by the special transition means."

Furthermore, the description "Special effect execution means that, when the transition determination means determines that a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode by the special transition means occurs, executes a special effect indicating the transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode before the number of game rounds that reach the upper limit" may be changed to "Special effect execution means that, based on the determination result by the transition determination means, executes a special effect before the number of game rounds that reach the upper limit." Incidentally, the description "Special effect execution means that, when the transition determination means determines that a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode by the special transition means occurs, executes a special effect indicating the transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode before the number of game rounds that reach the upper limit" can also be changed to "Special effect execution means that, when the transition determination means determines that a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode by the special transition means occurs, executes a special effect indicating the arrival of the upper limit before the number of game rounds that reach the upper limit."

Feature S2. A game board (game board 80aB) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91A, 92A and variable prize entry devices 83B) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. The system includes a game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83A) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the system includes a control means for the variable ball entry section that switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state (a function that executes the opening and closing process of the variable prize entry device 83A using the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The aforementioned starting ball entry section is provided with a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92A).
The acquired information storage means includes a first storage means (first operation port retention area Ra) capable of storing multiple special pieces of information acquired based on ball entry into the first starting ball entry section, and a second storage means (second operation port retention area Rb) capable of storing multiple special pieces of information acquired based on ball entry into the second starting ball entry section.
The determination made by the determination means based on the special information stored in the first storage means is configured to be more favorable to the player than the determination made by the determination means based on the special information stored in the second storage means.
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93A) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the second starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) which is set to have a longer period of time during which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state than in the first switching mode.
A special transition means that, in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode, when the number of game rounds after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without the result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, transitions to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode,
Prior to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means becoming the subject of the determination, a prior identification means for determining whether the special information corresponds to the predetermined determination information,
A transition determination means that, while in a state corresponding to the first switching mode, is in a predetermined game state, determines whether or not a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by the special transition means, based on the result of the prior identification means, before the number of game rounds that would reach the upper limit,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the transition determination means determines that a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode by the special transition means has occurred, the gaming machine further comprises a special effect execution means that executes a special effect indicating a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode before the number of game rounds that reach the upper limit.

According to Feature S2, if the trigger for transitioning to the special game state (the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information) is not met and the game continues, the game transitions to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode when the number of game rounds after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling reached). In the second switching mode, the variable mechanism attached to the second starting ball entry section frequently enters the receiving state, increasing the frequency of ball entry into the second starting ball entry section and suppressing further investment. Such a configuration is desirable in order to improve the soundness of the game.

Here, the judgment based on ball entry into the second starting ball entry section is given preferential treatment to the player compared to the judgment based on ball entry into the first starting ball entry section. In other words, by transitioning to the second switching mode and having the ball enter the second starting ball entry section → judgment, the benefit of reaching the ceiling is enhanced. In such a configuration, if the judgment result corresponds to the predetermined judgment information just before reaching the ceiling, the player will not be able to enjoy this benefit. Therefore, it is assumed that players who expect to reach the ceiling will play the game expecting that the judgment result does not correspond to the predetermined judgment information, at least just before reaching the ceiling. In particular, in the configuration shown in this feature, whether or not a transition to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by a special transition means is determined before the number of games that will reach the upper limit, based on the result of the prior identification means, and if it is determined that such a transition will occur, a special effect indicating the transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode is executed before the number of games that will reach the upper limit. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress excessive tension just before reaching the ceiling and give a sense of security to players who expect to reach the ceiling. This is desirable in terms of improving player satisfaction and further increasing interest in the game.

Furthermore, this feature includes: "a pre-identification means that identifies whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined determination information before the determination is made"; "a transition determination means that, while in a situation where the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode is in operation, determines whether a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by the special transition means, based on the result of the pre-identification means, before the number of game rounds that reach the upper limit"; and "when the transition determination means determines that a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by the special transition means." The "special effect execution means for executing a special effect indicating a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode" may be replaced with "transition determination means for determining whether a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by the special transition means while the game is in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode, before the number of game turns that reaches the upper limit," and "special effect execution means for executing a special effect indicating a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode when the transition determination means determines that a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by the special transition means."

Furthermore, the description "Special effect execution means that, when the transition determination means determines that a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode by the special transition means occurs, executes a special effect indicating the transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode before the number of game rounds that reach the upper limit" may be changed to "Special effect execution means that, based on the determination result by the transition determination means, executes a special effect before the number of game rounds that reach the upper limit." Incidentally, the description "Special effect execution means that, when the transition determination means determines that a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode by the special transition means occurs, executes a special effect indicating the transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode before the number of game rounds that reach the upper limit" can also be changed to "Special effect execution means that, when the transition determination means determines that a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode by the special transition means occurs, executes a special effect indicating the arrival of the upper limit before the number of game rounds that reach the upper limit."

Feature S3. The game machine according to Feature S2, characterized in that the transition determination means determines that a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode by the special transition means will occur if the prior identification means determines that all game rounds performed up to the upper limit of play result in a determination result that does not correspond to the predetermined determination information, and determines that a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode by the special transition means will not occur if the prior identification means determines that any of the game rounds performed up to the upper limit of play result in a determination result that corresponds to the predetermined determination information.

As shown in Feature S3, if it is determined in advance that all game rounds performed before reaching the upper limit will result in a judgment result that does not correspond to the predetermined judgment information, then it is determined that a state transition by the special transition means will occur. Conversely, if it is determined in advance that any of the game rounds performed before reaching the upper limit will result in a judgment result that corresponds to the predetermined judgment information, then it is determined that a state transition by the special transition means will not occur. This configuration allows for a suitable implementation of the technical concept shown in Feature S2.

Feature S4. The game machine according to Feature S2 or Feature S3, characterized in that the transition determination means includes a memory count determination means that determines whether the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the number of remaining game rounds until the upper limit is reached, and if the memory count determination means determines that the number of special information has reached the corresponding number, it determines whether a transition by the special transition means occurs.

As shown in this feature, by configuring the system to determine whether a transition by a special transition mechanism occurs when the number of special information items stored reaches the number of remaining executions that would otherwise reach the upper limit, the increase in control load caused by the implementation of special effects can be suppressed. For example, compared to a configuration that determines whether a transition by a special transition mechanism occurs each time special information is added, the control load can be significantly reduced.

Feature S5. The gaming machine according to Feature S4, characterized in that the memory count determination means is configured to determine whether the memory count has reached the corresponding number when special information is acquired by the special information acquisition means.

As shown in this feature, by configuring the system to determine whether a transition by a special transition mechanism occurs when special information is added, the special effects can be initiated quickly.

Feature S6. The predetermined judgment information includes first judgment information (jackpot result A, which is a jackpot result corresponding to the low probability mode) and second judgment information (jackpot result B, which is a jackpot result corresponding to the high probability mode),
The judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is configured to be more favorable to the player than the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information.
The gaming machine according to any one of features S2 to S5, characterized in that the determination based on ball entry into the second starting ball entry section is configured to more easily result in a determination corresponding to the second determination information than the determination based on ball entry into the first starting ball entry section.

As shown in this feature, in a gaming machine where the judgment based on ball entry into the second starting ball entry section is more advantageous to the player than the judgment based on ball entry into the first starting ball entry section, transitioning to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode increases the benefits when the judgment result corresponds to the predetermined judgment information. In such a configuration, by using a special effect to inform the player early that the ceiling has been reached, it is possible to effectively suppress the occurrence of situations where the player is unable to effectively enjoy the benefits of reaching the ceiling. Specifically, even after the ceiling has been reached, if the launch of game balls toward the first starting ball entry section continues, the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information may occur in the game round related to the special information obtained (the game round after reaching the ceiling), but the occurrence of such inconveniences can be effectively suppressed.

Feature S7. The gaming machine according to any one of Features S2 to S6, characterized in that the special effect is initiated in a game round before the game round in which the maximum number of occurrences is reached, and continues at least until the game round in which the maximum number of occurrences is reached.

In a configuration where the judgment based on ball entry into the second starting ball entry section, which is equipped with a variable mechanism, is given preferential treatment over the judgment based on ball entry into the first starting ball entry section, it cannot be ruled out that even after the maximum number of rounds (ceiling) has been determined in advance, game balls may be launched, resulting in further ball entry into the first starting ball entry section. If special information is obtained through such ball entry, the player may not be able to effectively enjoy the benefits of reaching the ceiling. This is a concern as it could significantly reduce the player's motivation to play. Therefore, if the system is configured so that the special effect continues at least until the ceiling is reached, the above-mentioned inconvenience can be effectively suppressed, such as the special effect being overlooked.

Feature S8. The gaming machine according to any one of Features S2 to S7, characterized in that the special effect execution means is configured to execute the special effect when a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by the special transition means, and when none of the game rounds executed up to the upper limit are corresponding to a reach display, which is one of the game round effects executed in parallel with the game round operation.

In a configuration where a "reach" display indicates that a judgment result corresponding to predetermined judgment information has been reached, there is a concern that the start of a special effect will make it obvious that the reach display is a so-called false effect, thus diminishing the effect of the reach display in increasing attention to the game. This is also expected to reduce the reliability of the reach display. Therefore, in this feature, if the reach display is executed before the ceiling is reached when the upper limit of the number of plays has been confirmed, the special effect is refrained from being executed. This allows the special effect function and the reach display function to coexist appropriately.

Feature S9. As one of the game round effects that is performed in parallel with the game round operation, there are two modes of reach display: a first reach display mode and a second reach display mode which has a lower probability of resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information than the first reach display mode.
The gaming machine according to any one of features S2 to S7, characterized in that when a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by the special transition means, and any of the game rounds performed before the upper limit is reached corresponds to a reach display of the second reach display mode, the machine is provided with means to change the reach display mode to the first reach display mode.

In a configuration where the reach display indicates that a judgment result corresponding to predetermined judgment information will be achieved, there is a concern that the execution of the reach display in the second reach display mode, which has a higher expectation level, during a special performance may unnecessarily heighten the player's anxiety. This could be a factor in reducing player satisfaction. Therefore, as shown in this feature, when the maximum number of plays (ceiling) is confirmed to be reached and a special performance is executed, the reach display mode executed during the special performance can be changed from the second reach display mode, which has a relatively higher expectation level, to the first display mode, which has a relatively lower expectation level, thereby effectively suppressing the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

Feature S10. The system includes a suggestion performance execution means that performs a suggestion performance based on the result of prior identification by the prior identification means, which suggests that the relevant special information will result in a determination corresponding to the predetermined determination information before it becomes the subject of the determination by the determination means.
A gaming machine according to any one of features S2 to S9, characterized in that, after the special performance is initiated by the special performance execution means, the suggestion performance by the suggestion performance execution means is restricted from being performed until at least the number of game rounds that reach the upper limit has ended.

In a configuration where suggestive effects indicate that a judgment result corresponding to predetermined judgment information will be reached, there is a concern that players may become confused if these suggestive effects overlap with the special effects mentioned above. This is undesirable as it can be a drawback of diversifying the effects. Therefore, as shown in this feature, the above concern can be suitably resolved by configuring the system to prevent the suggestive effects from being executed while the special effects are running.

Feature S11. The system includes a suggestion performance execution means that performs a suggestion performance based on the result of prior identification by the prior identification means, which suggests that the relevant special information will result in a determination corresponding to the predetermined determination information before the determination means becomes the subject of the determination,
The special effect execution means is capable of executing the special effect while the suggestive effect is being executed.
A gaming machine according to any one of features S2 to S10, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for canceling the suggestive performance if the special performance is started before the suggestive performance ends.

As shown in this feature, by configuring the system to allow special effects to be executed even during suggestive effects, opportunities for special effects to be executed can be appropriately secured. As shown in this feature, by configuring the system to stop the suggestive effects when special effects begin, the player can be given the impression that the special effects have negated the suggestive effects (an impression that an advantage has been guaranteed), thereby appropriately improving player satisfaction.

Feature S12. The gaming machine according to Feature S11, characterized in that the timing of the cancellation of the suggestive effect by the cancellation means is configured to occur at a predetermined timing after the start of the special effect.

As shown in this feature, by shifting the timing of the suggestion effect's termination to a later timing than the special effect's start, it becomes possible to suppress the oversight of the suggestion effect's termination and to optimally exhibit the effect shown in feature S11.

Feature S13. A game board (game board 80aB) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91A, 92A and variable prize entry devices 83B) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A) as the ball entry section,
A collection information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing multiple pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. The system includes a game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83A) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the variable ball entry section control means (a function that executes the opening and closing process of the variable prize entry device 83A in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state,
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93A) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured such that the frequency at which the variable mechanism enters the acceptance state differs.
A special transition means that, in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode, when the number of game rounds after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without the result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, transitions to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode,
Prior to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means becoming the subject of the determination, a prior identification means for determining whether the special information corresponds to the predetermined determination information,
A transition determination means that, while in a state corresponding to the first switching mode, is in a predetermined game state, determines whether or not a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by the special transition means, based on the result of the prior identification means, before the number of game rounds that would reach the upper limit,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the transition determination means determines that a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode by the special transition means has occurred, the gaming machine further comprises a special effect execution means that executes a special effect indicating a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode before the number of game rounds that reach the upper limit.

According to feature S13, if the trigger for transitioning to the special game state (the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information) is not met and the game continues, the game transitions to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode when the number of game rounds after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling reached). In the second switching mode, the variable mechanism attached to the starting ball entry section frequently enters the receiving state, increasing the frequency of ball entry into the starting ball entry section and suppressing further investment. Such a configuration is desirable in order to improve the soundness of the game.

In this configuration, specifically, whether or not a transition to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs via a special transition means is determined before the number of game spins that would reach the upper limit, based on the result of a determination by the prior determination means. If it is determined that such a transition will occur, a special effect indicating the transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode is executed before the number of game spins that would reach the upper limit. This configuration suppresses excessive tension just before reaching the ceiling and provides a sense of security to players who are anticipating reaching the ceiling. This is desirable for improving player satisfaction and further increasing attention to the game.

Furthermore, this feature includes: "a pre-identification means that identifies whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined determination information before the determination is made"; "a transition determination means that, while in a situation where the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode is in operation, determines whether a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by the special transition means, based on the result of the pre-identification means, before the number of game rounds that reach the upper limit"; and "when the transition determination means determines that a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by the special transition means." The "special effect execution means for executing a special effect indicating a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode" may be replaced with "transition determination means for determining whether a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by the special transition means while the game is in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode, before the number of game turns that reaches the upper limit," and "special effect execution means for executing a special effect indicating a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode when the transition determination means determines that a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by the special transition means."

Feature S14. A game board (game board 80aB) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed,
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on the player's operation,
A gaming machine comprising a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91A, 92A and variable prize entry devices 83B) provided in the game area,
A special information acquisition means (a function that executes the process of acquiring the reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A) as the ball entry section,
The acquisition information storage means (the reserved ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) is capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that executes lottery processing) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result),
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, a game cycle operation (variable display of patterns in the operation slot display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game cycle operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is considered one game cycle. The system includes a game cycle control means (a function that executes game cycle control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (operation slot display units D1 and D2) so that the game cycle operation for each game cycle is performed according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means corresponding to the first determination information and the completion of the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means, a special game state transition means (a function that executes game state transition processing etc. in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state),
The variable ball entry section (variable prize entry device 83A) as the ball entry section is switchable between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can be entered and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the accepting state,
When the game transitions to the aforementioned special game state, the system includes a control means for the variable ball entry section that switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state (a function that executes the opening and closing process of the variable prize entry device 83A using the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The aforementioned starting ball entry section is provided with a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92A).
The acquired information storage means includes a first storage means (first operation port retention area Ra) capable of storing multiple special pieces of information acquired based on ball entry into the first starting ball entry section, and a second storage means (second operation port retention area Rb) capable of storing multiple special pieces of information acquired based on ball entry into the second starting ball entry section.
The determination made by the determination means based on the special information stored in the first storage means is configured to be more favorable to the player than the determination made by the determination means based on the special information stored in the second storage means.
A variable mechanism (electric mechanism 93A) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which game balls can be entered into the second starting ball entry section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to be entered than in the receiving state,
The system includes a control means for the variable mechanism that controls the aforementioned variable mechanism (a function that executes power supply support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
The control means for the variable mechanism provides a switching control mode (support mode) for the variable mechanism, which includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set to have a longer period of acceptance of the variable mechanism than the first switching mode.
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured such that the frequency at which the variable mechanism enters the acceptance state differs.
A special transition means that, in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode, when the number of game rounds after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without the result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, transitions to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode,
Prior to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means becoming the subject of the determination, a prior identification means for determining whether the special information corresponds to the predetermined determination information,
A transition determination means that, while in a state corresponding to the first switching mode, is in a predetermined game state, determines whether or not a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by the special transition means, based on the result of the prior identification means, before the number of game rounds that would reach the upper limit,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the transition determination means determines that a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode by the special transition means has occurred, the gaming machine further comprises a special effect execution means that executes a special effect indicating a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode before the number of game rounds that reach the upper limit.

According to feature S14, if the trigger for transitioning to the special game state (the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information) is not met and the game continues, the game transitions to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode when the number of game rounds after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling reached). In the second switching mode, the variable mechanism attached to the second starting ball entry section frequently enters the receiving state, increasing the frequency of ball entry into the second starting ball entry section and suppressing further investment. Such a configuration is desirable in order to improve the soundness of the game.

Here, the judgment based on ball entry into the second starting ball entry section is given preferential treatment to the player compared to the judgment based on ball entry into the first starting ball entry section. In other words, by transitioning to the second switching mode and having the ball enter the second starting ball entry section → judgment, the benefit of reaching the ceiling is enhanced. In such a configuration, if the judgment result corresponds to the predetermined judgment information just before reaching the ceiling, the player will not be able to enjoy this benefit. Therefore, it is assumed that players who expect to reach the ceiling will play the game expecting that the judgment result does not correspond to the predetermined judgment information, at least just before reaching the ceiling. In particular, in the configuration shown in this feature, whether or not a transition to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by a special transition means is determined before the number of games that will reach the upper limit, based on the result of the prior identification means, and if it is determined that such a transition will occur, a special effect indicating the transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode is executed before the number of games that will reach the upper limit. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress excessive tension just before reaching the ceiling and give a sense of security to players who expect to reach the ceiling. This is desirable in terms of improving player satisfaction and further increasing interest in the game.

Furthermore, this feature includes: "a pre-identification means that identifies whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined determination information before the determination is made"; "a transition determination means that, while in a situation where the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode is in operation, determines whether a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by the special transition means, based on the result of the pre-identification means, before the number of game rounds that reach the upper limit"; and "when the transition determination means determines that a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by the special transition means." The "special effect execution means for executing a special effect indicating a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode" may be replaced with "transition determination means for determining whether a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by the special transition means while the game is in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode, before the number of game turns that reaches the upper limit," and "special effect execution means for executing a special effect indicating a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode when the transition determination means determines that a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by the special transition means."

Furthermore, the description "Special effect execution means that, when the transition determination means determines that a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode by the special transition means occurs, executes a special effect indicating the transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode before the number of game rounds that reach the upper limit" may be changed to "Special effect execution means that, based on the determination result by the transition determination means, executes a special effect before the number of game rounds that reach the upper limit." Incidentally, the description "Special effect execution means that, when the transition determination means determines that a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode by the special transition means occurs, executes a special effect indicating the transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode before the number of game rounds that reach the upper limit" can also be changed to "Special effect execution means that, when the transition determination means determines that a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode by the special transition means occurs, executes a special effect indicating the arrival of the upper limit before the number of game rounds that reach the upper limit."

Furthermore, the technical concepts described in features S3 to S12 above may also be applied to features S1, S13, and S14.

Furthermore, the technical concepts shown in the above-mentioned feature groups A to R may be applied to feature S1 to feature S14.

Pachinko game machine: A game machine comprising an operating means (game ball launching handle 41) operated by the player, a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) that launches game balls based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage (guidance rail 100) that guides the launched game balls to a predetermined game area (game area PE), and various game components (nails, etc.) arranged within the game area, which grants a bonus to the player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage section (general prize entry opening 81, etc.) among these game components.

Slot machines and other revolving gaming machines: These machines are equipped with a variable display means that displays a sequence of symbols consisting of multiple symbols in a variable manner, and then displays the final stopped symbol sequence. The symbol variation begins when a starting operation means is operated, and the symbol variation stops when a stopping operation means is operated or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A special game state (such as a bonus game) advantageous to the player is generated, provided that the final stopped symbol at the time of stopping is a specific symbol.

A ball-operated belt-type gaming machine: This gaming machine features a variable display means that displays a sequence of symbols consisting of multiple symbols in a variable manner, and then displays the final stopped symbol sequence. The symbol variation begins when a starting operation means is operated, and stops when a stopping operation means is operated or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A special game state (such as a bonus game) advantageous to the player is generated, provided that the final stopped symbol at the time of stopping is a specific symbol. Furthermore, the machine includes a ball tray and an input device that takes game balls from the ball tray, and a payout device that dispenses game balls into the ball tray. The operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when game balls are inserted by the input device.

10...Pachinko machine as a gaming machine, 41...Game ball launching handle, 80...Game board unit, 80a...Game board, 82...Operation port unit, 83...Variable prize entry device, 84...Through gate, 86...Out port, 91...First operation port, 92...Second operation port, 93...Electric mechanism, 95...Pattern display device, 95a...Display screen, 99...Main display unit, 110...Game ball launching mechanism, 140...Notification/effect control device, 162...Main control device, 224...Payout device, 242...Payout control device, 402...MPU, 403...ROM, 404...RAM, 410...Display control device, 421...Win/Loss table storage area, 422...Distribution table storage area, 423...Variable display time table storage area, 431...Buffer for lottery counter, 432...Retained ball storage area, 433... Electrical performance hold area, 442...MPU, 500D, 500E, 500F...Special effect device, 511D, 511F...Preview unit, 512D, 512F...Notification unit, 630E, 630F...Lighting unit, 641E, 641F...Light source, 670E, 670F...Front cover, 671E, 671F...Opposite part, 690E, 690F...Drive mechanism, 701E, 715E, 725E, 735 E, 701F, 715F, 725F, 735F…Non-light diffusion section; 712E, 722E, 732E, 712F, 722F, 732F…Light diffusion section; 713E, 723E, 733E, 713F, 723F, 733F…Annular protrusion section; CL1…Central axis; CL5-CL7…Central axis; ME…Variable display area; NE…Hold count display area; PLa-PLf…Trajectory; PE…Game area.

Claims (1)

A means for acquiring special information that acquires special information based on the occurrence of a predetermined acquisition trigger,
An acquired information storage means capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means,
A determination means that performs a determination based on special information stored in the acquired information storage means,
A means that, based on the result of the aforementioned specific determination being the first result, allows the player to transition to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state,
A means for performing the variable display of the first symbol in each game round, wherein the variable display of the first symbol is performed in the first notification means based on the specific determination, and the variable display of the first symbol is performed in the first notification means based on the determination of the specific determination, and the variable display of the first symbol is performed in the first notification means based on the determination, and the variable display of the first symbol is performed in each game round.
In a game round, a second symbol different from the first symbol is variably displayed by a second notification means different from the first notification means, and a stop result corresponding to the result of the specific judgment is displayed.
Equipped with,
The game state is one that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state, and has a specific game state that is different from the special game state.
A means that, based on the result of the specified determination being a second result different from the first result, allows transitioning to the specified game state without going through the special game state,
A pre-identification means for identifying information corresponding to the determination result when a predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes the subject of the identification determination, before the predetermined special information becomes the subject of the identification determination,
A gaming machine characterized by having the following features.